Huawei OptiX OSN 3500 Hardware Description (V200R012)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission
System
V200R012C01
Hardware Description
Issue
02
Date
2013-01-18
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

System
About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Version
OptiX OSN 3500
V200R012C01
Intended Audience
This document describes the structure, composition, boards, and cables of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
The readers can have a comprehensive understanding of the hardware of the OptiX OSN
equipment through this document.
This document is intended for:
Network design and planning engineers
Hardware installation engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium
level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,
if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
ii

System
Symbol
About This Document
Description
Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or
supplement important points in the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 02 (2013-01-18) Based on Product Version

V200R012C01
This is the second document issue for the V200R012C01 product version. Compared with
Issue 01, Issue 02 includes the following updates in V200R012C01SPC100:
In chapter "EoS Boards", added the number of links that Ethernet virtual private line
(EVPL) services support.
In chapter "Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards", optimized the

description of GSCC board jumpers.

V200R012C01
This is the first document issue for the V200R012C01 product version. Compared with the
document issue for the V200R012C00 product version, this issue has the following updates:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
In chapter "Cabinet", added the description of DPD100-2-8 PDU and DPD63-8-8 PDU.
Copyright Huawei
iii

System
About This Document
In chapter "EoS Boards", added the description of N2EFT8, N3EAS2, and N2EFT8A
boards.
In section "Functions and Features" for one-slot packet Ethernet boards, described
support for port mirroring.
In section "Functions and Features" for N1PEG8 and N1PEFF8 boards, described
support for single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.

V200R012C00
This is the second document issue for the V200R012C00 version. Compared with issue 01,
this issue has the following updates:
In chapter "Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards", changed the maximum
number of SNCP protection groups that a PSXCSA board supports.
In chapter "SDH Boards", optimized the description of PRBS support for each line
board.

V200R012C00
This is the first document issue for the V200R012C00 version. Compared with the document
issue for the V200R011C03 version, this issue has the following updates:
In section "SDH Boards", added the description of N1SF16E, N4SLQ16, N4SLO16,

N4SLD64, N4SFD64, and N4SF64 boards.
Deleted the section "Microwave Boards".
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
iv

System
Contents
Contents
1 Equipment Structure.......................................................................................................................1
2 Cabinet..............................................................................................................................................5
2.1 Types of Cabinets......................................................................................................................................................5
2.1 Types of Cabinets......................................................................................................................................................5
2.2 Configuration of the Cabinet..................................................................................................................................13
2.2 Configuration of the Cabinet..................................................................................................................................13
2.2.1 Indicators..........................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.1 Indicators..........................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.2 DC Power Distribution Unit.............................................................................................................................15
2.2.2 DC Power Distribution Unit.............................................................................................................................15
2.2.3 Other Configurations........................................................................................................................................21
2.2.3 Other Configurations........................................................................................................................................21
3 Subrack...........................................................................................................................................22
3.1 Subrack Structure...................................................................................................................................................23
3.1 Subrack Structure...................................................................................................................................................23
3.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................................24
3.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................................24
3.3 Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode....................................................................................................................26
3.3 Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode....................................................................................................................26
3.4 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode......................................................................................................................28
3.4 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode......................................................................................................................28
3.5 Ventilation Mode....................................................................................................................................................28
3.5 Ventilation Mode....................................................................................................................................................28
3.6 Cable Management.................................................................................................................................................29
3.6 Cable Management.................................................................................................................................................29
3.7 Mapping Policies of Power Consumption..............................................................................................................31
3.7 Mapping Policies of Power Consumption..............................................................................................................31
3.8 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................................32
3.8 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................................32
4 Overview of Boards.......................................................................................................................35
4.1 Appearances and Dimensions of the Boards..........................................................................................................35
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
Contents
4.1 Appearances and Dimensions of the Boards..........................................................................................................35

4.2 Bar Codes of the Boards.........................................................................................................................................37
4.2 Bar Codes of the Boards.........................................................................................................................................37
5 Classification of Boards................................................................................................................39
6 Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards...................................................................52
6.1 SXCSA...................................................................................................................................................................52
6.1 SXCSA...................................................................................................................................................................52
6.1.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................................52
6.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................52
6.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................52
6.1.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................................53
6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................................54
6.1.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................................56
6.1.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................................56
6.1.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches...............................................................................................................................58
6.1.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................58
6.1.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................58
6.1.8 Feature Code.....................................................................................................................................................58
6.1.8 Feature Code.....................................................................................................................................................58
6.1.9 Configuring and Commissioning the Board.....................................................................................................58
6.1.10 Parameter Settings..........................................................................................................................................59
6.1.11 Maintaining the Board....................................................................................................................................60
6.1.12 List of Alarms.................................................................................................................................................60
6.1.12 List of Alarms.................................................................................................................................................60
6.1.13 List of Performance Events............................................................................................................................61
6.1.14 Technical Specifications.................................................................................................................................61
6.2 PSXCS(A)..............................................................................................................................................................62
6.2 PSXCS(A)..............................................................................................................................................................62
6.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................63
6.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................63
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
vi

System
Contents

6.2.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................................66
6.2.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................................66
6.2.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................68
6.2.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................68
6.2.8 Feature Code.....................................................................................................................................................68
6.2.8 Feature Code.....................................................................................................................................................68
6.2.12 List of Alarms.................................................................................................................................................70
6.2.12 List of Alarms.................................................................................................................................................70
6.3 GSCC......................................................................................................................................................................74
6.3 GSCC......................................................................................................................................................................74
6.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................75
6.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................75
6.3.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................................79
6.3.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................................79
6.3.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................85
6.3.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................................85
6.3.8 Feature Code.....................................................................................................................................................86
6.3.8 Feature Code.....................................................................................................................................................86
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
vii

System
Contents

6.3.12 List of Alarms.................................................................................................................................................88
6.3.12 List of Alarms.................................................................................................................................................88
7 Packet Processing Boards.............................................................................................................92

7.1 PEX1.......................................................................................................................................................................92
7.1 PEX1.......................................................................................................................................................................92
7.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................93
7.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................................93
7.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................................100
7.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................102
7.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................102
7.1.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches.............................................................................................................................104
7.1.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................104
7.1.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................104
7.1.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................105
7.1.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................105
7.1.9 Configuring and Commissioning the Board...................................................................................................105
7.1.10 Configuring the Board Functions.................................................................................................................107
7.1.11 Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................................107
7.1.12 Maintaining the Board..................................................................................................................................108
7.1.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................108
7.1.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................108
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
viii

System
Contents
7.1.14 List of Performance Events...........................................................................................................................110

7.1.14 List of Performance Events...........................................................................................................................110
7.1.15 Technical Specifications of PEX1................................................................................................................116
7.2 PEX2.....................................................................................................................................................................119
7.2 PEX2.....................................................................................................................................................................119
7.2.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................................119
7.2.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................................119
7.2.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................119
7.2.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................119
7.2.3 Functions and Features...................................................................................................................................120
7.2.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................127
7.2.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................127
7.2.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................129
7.2.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................129
7.2.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................129
7.2.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................129
7.2.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................132
7.2.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................132
7.2.14 List of Performance Events..........................................................................................................................134
7.3 PEG8.....................................................................................................................................................................139
7.3 PEG8.....................................................................................................................................................................139
7.3.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................................139
7.3.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................140
7.3.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................140
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
ix

System
Contents

7.3.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................148
7.3.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................148
7.3.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................149
7.3.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................149
7.3.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................150
7.3.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................150
7.3.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................153
7.3.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................153
7.3.15 Technical Specifications of PEG8................................................................................................................158
7.3.15 Technical Specifications of PEG8................................................................................................................158
7.4 PEG16...................................................................................................................................................................161
7.4 PEG16...................................................................................................................................................................161
7.4.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................162
7.4.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................162
7.4.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................169
7.4.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................169
7.4.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................171
7.4.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................171
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
Contents
7.4.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................171

7.4.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................171
7.4.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................175
7.4.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................175
7.4.15 Technical Specifications of PEG16..............................................................................................................178
7.4.15 Technical Specifications of PEG16..............................................................................................................178
8 Packet Interface Boards..............................................................................................................181

8.1 PETF8...................................................................................................................................................................181
8.1 PETF8...................................................................................................................................................................181
8.1.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................182
8.1.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................182
8.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................188
8.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................188
8.1.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................190
8.1.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................190
8.1.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................190
8.1.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................190
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xi

System
Contents
8.1.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................193

8.1.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................193
8.1.14 Technical Specifications of PETF8...............................................................................................................199
8.1.14 Technical Specifications of PETF8...............................................................................................................199
8.2 PEFF8...................................................................................................................................................................200
8.2 PEFF8...................................................................................................................................................................200
8.2.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................200
8.2.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................200
8.2.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................207
8.2.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................207
8.2.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................209
8.2.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................209
8.2.7 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................209
8.2.7 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................209
8.2.9 Configuring the Board Functions...................................................................................................................211
8.2.9 Configuring the Board Functions...................................................................................................................211
8.2.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................212
8.2.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................212
8.2.14 Technical Specifications of PEFF8...............................................................................................................216
8.2.14 Technical Specifications of PEFF8...............................................................................................................216
8.3 CQ1.......................................................................................................................................................................219
8.3 CQ1.......................................................................................................................................................................219
8.3.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................219
8.3.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................219
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xii

System
Contents

8.3.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................223
8.3.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................223
8.3.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................224
8.3.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................224
8.3.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................224
8.3.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................224
8.3.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................226
8.3.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................226
8.3.14 Technical Specifications of CQ1..................................................................................................................228
8.3.14 Technical Specifications of CQ1..................................................................................................................228
8.4 MD12....................................................................................................................................................................229
8.4 MD12....................................................................................................................................................................229
8.4.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................230
8.4.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................230
8.4.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................234
8.4.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................234
8.4.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................237
8.4.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................237
8.4.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................237
8.4.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................237
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xiii

System
Contents

8.4.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................239
8.4.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................239
8.4.14 Technical Specifications of MD12...............................................................................................................241
8.5 MD75....................................................................................................................................................................242
8.5 MD75....................................................................................................................................................................242
8.5.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................242
8.5.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................242
8.5.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................248
8.5.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................248
8.5.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................251
8.5.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................251
8.5.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................251
8.5.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................251
8.5.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................253
8.5.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................253
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xiv

System
Contents
9 EoD Boards..................................................................................................................................257
9.1 EDQ41..................................................................................................................................................................257
9.1 EDQ41..................................................................................................................................................................257
9.1.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................257
9.1.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................257
9.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................267
9.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................267
9.1.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................269
9.1.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................269
9.1.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................269
9.1.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................269
9.1.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................274
9.1.13 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................274
9.1.15 Technical Specifications of EDQ41..............................................................................................................278
9.1.15 Technical Specifications of EDQ41..............................................................................................................278
10 SDH Boards................................................................................................................................280
10.1 SL1......................................................................................................................................................................283
10.1 SL1......................................................................................................................................................................283
10.1.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................................283
10.1.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................283
10.1.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................283
10.1.3 Functions and Features.................................................................................................................................284
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xv

System
Contents

10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..............................................................................................................285
10.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................287
10.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................287
10.1.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches...........................................................................................................................289
10.1.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................289
10.1.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................289
10.1.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................289
10.1.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................289
10.1.9 Configuring and Commissioning the Board.................................................................................................290
10.1.10 Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................................291
10.1.11 Maintaining the Board................................................................................................................................291
10.1.12 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................292
10.1.12 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................292
10.1.13 List of Performance Events........................................................................................................................295
10.1.14 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................296
10.2 SL1A...................................................................................................................................................................297
10.2 SL1A...................................................................................................................................................................297
10.2.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................297
10.2.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................297
10.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................301
10.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................301
10.2.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................303
10.2.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................303
10.2.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................303
10.2.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................303
10.2.9 Technical Specifications...............................................................................................................................304
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xvi

System
Contents

10.3 SLQ1...................................................................................................................................................................306
10.3 SLQ1...................................................................................................................................................................306
10.3.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................307
10.3.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................307
10.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................311
10.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................311
10.3.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................312
10.3.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................312
10.3.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................312
10.3.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................312
10.4 SLQ1A................................................................................................................................................................315
10.4 SLQ1A................................................................................................................................................................315
10.4.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................315
10.4.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................315
10.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................320
10.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................320
10.4.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................321
10.4.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................321
10.4.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................321
10.4.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................321
10.5 SLO1...................................................................................................................................................................323
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xvii

System
Contents
10.5 SLO1...................................................................................................................................................................323
10.5.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................324
10.5.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................324
10.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................328
10.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................328
10.5.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................330
10.5.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................330
10.5.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................330
10.5.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................330
10.6 SLT1....................................................................................................................................................................332
10.6 SLT1....................................................................................................................................................................332
10.6.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................332
10.6.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................332
10.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................336
10.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................336
10.6.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................338
10.6.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................338
10.6.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................338
10.6.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................338
10.7 SLH1...................................................................................................................................................................341
10.7 SLH1...................................................................................................................................................................341
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xviii

System
Contents

10.7.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................341
10.7.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................341
10.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................346
10.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................346
10.7.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................348
10.7.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................348
10.7.8 Board Protection...........................................................................................................................................348
10.7.12 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................353
10.7.12 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................353
10.8 SEP1...................................................................................................................................................................355
10.8 SEP1...................................................................................................................................................................355
10.8.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................355
10.8.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................355
10.8.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................362
10.8.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................362
10.8.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................363
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xix

System
Contents
10.8.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................363

10.8.9 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................366
10.8.9 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................366
10.8.10 Configuring and Commissioning the Board...............................................................................................366
10.8.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................369
10.8.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................369
10.9 SL4......................................................................................................................................................................371
10.9 SL4......................................................................................................................................................................371
10.9.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................371
10.9.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................371
10.9.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................376
10.9.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................376
10.9.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................377
10.9.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................377
10.9.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................377
10.9.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................377
10.10 SL4A.................................................................................................................................................................379
10.10 SL4A.................................................................................................................................................................379
10.10.1 Version Description....................................................................................................................................379
10.10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................379
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xx

System
Contents
10.10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................379
10.10.3 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................380
10.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow............................................................................................................381
10.10.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................384
10.10.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................384
10.10.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................385
10.10.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................385
10.10.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................385
10.10.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................385
10.10.9 Technical Specifications of SL4A..............................................................................................................386
10.10.9 Technical Specifications of SL4A..............................................................................................................386
10.11 SLD4.................................................................................................................................................................389
10.11 SLD4.................................................................................................................................................................389
10.11.1 Version Description.....................................................................................................................................389
10.11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................390
10.11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................390
10.11.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................394
10.11.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................394
10.11.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................396
10.11.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................396
10.11.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................396
10.11.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................396
10.12 SLD4A..............................................................................................................................................................399
10.12 SLD4A..............................................................................................................................................................399
10.12.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................399
10.12.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................399
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxi

System
Contents

10.12.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................404
10.12.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................404
10.12.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................405
10.12.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................405
10.12.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................405
10.12.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................405
10.13 SLQ4.................................................................................................................................................................407
10.13 SLQ4.................................................................................................................................................................407
10.13.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................408
10.13.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................408
10.13.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................412
10.13.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................412
10.13.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................414
10.13.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................414
10.13.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................414
10.13.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................414
10.14 SLQ4A..............................................................................................................................................................417
10.14 SLQ4A..............................................................................................................................................................417
10.14.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................417
10.14.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................417
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxii

System
Contents

10.14.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................422
10.14.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................422
10.14.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................423
10.14.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................423
10.14.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................423
10.14.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................423
10.15 SL16..................................................................................................................................................................425
10.15 SL16..................................................................................................................................................................425
10.15.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................426
10.15.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................426
10.15.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................430
10.15.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................430
10.15.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................432
10.15.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................432
10.15.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................432
10.15.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................432
10.15.9 Technical Specifications of SL16...............................................................................................................433
10.15.9 Technical Specifications of SL16...............................................................................................................433
10.16 SL16A...............................................................................................................................................................435
10.16 SL16A...............................................................................................................................................................435
10.16.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................436
10.16.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................436
10.16.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................440
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxiii

System
Contents
10.16.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................440

10.16.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches.........................................................................................................................442
10.16.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................442
10.16.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................442
10.16.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................442
10.16.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................442
10.16.10 Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................................444
10.16.11 Maintaining the Board..............................................................................................................................444
10.16.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................446
10.16.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................446
10.16.13 List of Performance Events......................................................................................................................449
10.16.14 Technical Specifications of SL16A..........................................................................................................451
10.16.14 Technical Specifications of SL16A..........................................................................................................451
10.17 SLD16...............................................................................................................................................................454
10.17 SLD16...............................................................................................................................................................454
10.17.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................454
10.17.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................454
10.17.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................459
10.17.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................459
10.17.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................460
10.17.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................460
10.17.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................460
10.17.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................460
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxiv

System
Contents

10.17.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................464
10.17.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................464
10.17.14 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................465
10.18 SLQ16...............................................................................................................................................................467
10.18 SLQ16...............................................................................................................................................................467
10.18.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................468
10.18.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................468
10.18.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................472
10.18.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................472
10.18.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................475
10.18.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................475
10.18.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................475
10.18.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................475
10.18.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................479
10.18.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................479
10.18.14 Technical Specifications of SLQ16..........................................................................................................482
10.19 SLO16...............................................................................................................................................................485
10.19 SLO16...............................................................................................................................................................485
10.19.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................486
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxv

System
Contents
10.19.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................486
10.19.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................491
10.19.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................491
10.19.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................492
10.19.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................492
10.19.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................492
10.19.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................492
10.19.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................496
10.19.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................496
10.19.14 Technical Specifications of SLO16..........................................................................................................499
10.19.14 Technical Specifications of SLO16..........................................................................................................499
10.20 SF16..................................................................................................................................................................502
10.20 SF16..................................................................................................................................................................502
10.20.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................503
10.20.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................503
10.20.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................507
10.20.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................507
10.20.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................509
10.20.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................509
10.20.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................509
10.20.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................509
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxvi

System
Contents

10.20.9 Technical Specifications of SF16...............................................................................................................510
10.20.9 Technical Specifications of SF16...............................................................................................................510
10.21 SF16E...............................................................................................................................................................512
10.21 SF16E...............................................................................................................................................................512
10.21.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................512
10.21.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................512
10.21.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................517
10.21.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................517
10.21.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................519
10.21.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................519
10.21.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................519
10.21.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................519
10.21.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................522
10.21.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................522
10.21.14 Technical Specifications of SF16E...........................................................................................................524
10.21.14 Technical Specifications of SF16E...........................................................................................................524
10.22 SL64..................................................................................................................................................................525
10.22 SL64..................................................................................................................................................................525
10.22.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................526
10.22.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................526
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxvii

System
Contents

10.22.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................530
10.22.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................530
10.22.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................533
10.22.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................533
10.22.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................533
10.22.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................533
10.22.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................537
10.22.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................537
10.22.14 Technical Specifications of SL64.............................................................................................................542
10.22.14 Technical Specifications of SL64.............................................................................................................542
10.23 SLD64...............................................................................................................................................................547
10.23 SLD64...............................................................................................................................................................547
10.23.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................548
10.23.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................548
10.23.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................552
10.23.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................552
10.23.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................554
10.23.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................554
10.23.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................554
10.23.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................554
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxviii

System
Contents

10.23.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................557
10.23.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................557
10.23.14 Technical Specifications of SLD64..........................................................................................................561
10.23.14 Technical Specifications of SLD64..........................................................................................................561
10.24 SF64..................................................................................................................................................................563
10.24 SF64..................................................................................................................................................................563
10.24.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................564
10.24.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................564
10.24.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................568
10.24.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................568
10.24.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................571
10.24.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................571
10.24.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................571
10.24.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................571
10.24.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................574
10.24.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................574
10.24.14 Technical Specifications of SF64.............................................................................................................578
10.24.14 Technical Specifications of SF64.............................................................................................................578
10.25 SF64A...............................................................................................................................................................581
10.25 SF64A...............................................................................................................................................................581
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxix

System
Contents

10.25.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................581
10.25.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................581
10.25.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................585
10.25.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................585
10.25.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................587
10.25.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................587
10.25.8 Technical Specifications of SF64A.............................................................................................................587
10.25.8 Technical Specifications of SF64A.............................................................................................................587
10.26 SFD64...............................................................................................................................................................589
10.26 SFD64...............................................................................................................................................................589
10.26.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................590
10.26.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................590
10.26.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................594
10.26.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................594
10.26.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................596
10.26.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................596
10.26.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................596
10.26.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................596
10.26.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................599
10.26.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................599
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxx

System
Contents

10.26.14 Technical Specifications of SFD64...........................................................................................................601
10.26.14 Technical Specifications of SFD64...........................................................................................................601
10.27 SLQ41...............................................................................................................................................................603
10.27 SLQ41...............................................................................................................................................................603
10.27.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................604
10.27.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................604
10.27.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................608
10.27.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................608
10.27.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................610
10.27.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................610
10.27.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................610
10.27.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................610
10.27.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................614
10.27.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................614
10.28 SLH41...............................................................................................................................................................620
10.28 SLH41...............................................................................................................................................................620
10.28.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................620
10.28.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................620
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxi

System
Contents

10.28.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................624
10.28.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................624
10.28.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................627
10.28.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................627
10.28.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................628
10.28.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................628
10.28.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................631
10.28.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................631
10.28.14 Technical Specifications of SLH41..........................................................................................................633
10.28.14 Technical Specifications of SLH41..........................................................................................................633
10.29 EU04.................................................................................................................................................................636
10.29 EU04.................................................................................................................................................................636
10.29.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................636
10.29.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................636
10.29.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................637
10.29.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................637
10.29.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................639
10.29.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................639
10.30 EU08.................................................................................................................................................................640
10.30 EU08.................................................................................................................................................................640
10.30.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................640
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxii

System
Contents
10.30.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................640
10.30.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................641
10.30.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................641
10.30.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................643
10.30.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................643
10.31 OU08................................................................................................................................................................644
10.31 OU08................................................................................................................................................................644
10.31.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................645
10.31.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................645
10.31.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................646
10.31.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................646
10.31.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................649
10.31.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................649
11 PDH Boards................................................................................................................................653
11.1 PQ1.....................................................................................................................................................................655
11.1 PQ1.....................................................................................................................................................................655
11.1.1 Version Description.......................................................................................................................................655
11.1.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................655
11.1.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................655
11.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................660
11.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................660
11.1.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches............................................................................................................................661
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxiii

System
Contents

11.1.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................661
11.1.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................661
11.1.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................662
11.1.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................662
11.1.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................667
11.1.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................667
11.1.14 List of Performance Events.........................................................................................................................668
11.2 PQM....................................................................................................................................................................669
11.2 PQM....................................................................................................................................................................669
11.2.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................669
11.2.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................669
11.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................673
11.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................673
11.2.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................675
11.2.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................675
11.2.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................675
11.2.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................675
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxiv

System
Contents

11.2.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................680
11.2.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................680
11.3 PFL1....................................................................................................................................................................681
11.3 PFL1....................................................................................................................................................................681
11.3.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................682
11.3.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................682
11.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................685
11.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................685
11.3.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................686
11.3.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................686
11.3.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................686
11.3.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................686
11.3.12 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................689
11.3.12 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................689
11.4 PL3......................................................................................................................................................................691
11.4 PL3......................................................................................................................................................................691
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxv

System
Contents

11.4.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................691
11.4.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................691
11.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................696
11.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................696
11.4.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................697
11.4.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................697
11.4.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................697
11.4.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................697
11.4.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................702
11.4.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................702
11.5 PL3A...................................................................................................................................................................705
11.5 PL3A...................................................................................................................................................................705
11.5.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................705
11.5.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................705
11.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................709
11.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................709
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxvi

System
Contents

11.5.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................711
11.5.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................711
11.5.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................711
11.5.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................711
11.5.12 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................714
11.5.12 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................714
11.6 PD3.....................................................................................................................................................................717
11.6 PD3.....................................................................................................................................................................717
11.6.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................717
11.6.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................717
11.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................721
11.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................721
11.6.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................723
11.6.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................723
11.7 PQ3.....................................................................................................................................................................726
11.7 PQ3.....................................................................................................................................................................726
11.7.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................726
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxvii

System
Contents
11.7.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................726
11.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................730
11.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................730
11.7.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................732
11.7.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................732
11.8 DX1.....................................................................................................................................................................735
11.8 DX1.....................................................................................................................................................................735
11.8.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................735
11.8.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................735
11.8.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................738
11.8.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................738
11.8.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................740
11.8.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................740
11.8.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................740
11.8.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................740
11.8.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................745
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxviii

System
Contents
11.8.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................745

11.9 DXA....................................................................................................................................................................747
11.9 DXA....................................................................................................................................................................747
11.9.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................747
11.9.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................747
11.9.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................749
11.9.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................749
11.9.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................751
11.9.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................751
11.10 SPQ4.................................................................................................................................................................751
11.10 SPQ4.................................................................................................................................................................751
11.10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................752
11.10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................752
11.10.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................757
11.10.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................757
11.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..........................................................................................................................759
11.10.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................759
11.10.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................759
11.10.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................759
11.10.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................759
11.10.9 Board Protection.........................................................................................................................................759
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xxxix

System
Contents

11.10.10 Configuring and Commissioning the Board.............................................................................................762
11.10.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................764
11.10.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................764
11.10.14 List of Performance Events.......................................................................................................................766
11.11 D12B.................................................................................................................................................................767
11.11 D12B.................................................................................................................................................................767
11.11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................767
11.11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................767
11.11.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................768
11.11.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................768
11.11.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................770
11.11.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................770
11.12 D12S.................................................................................................................................................................772
11.12 D12S.................................................................................................................................................................772
11.12.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................772
11.12.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................772
11.12.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................773
11.12.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................773
11.12.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................775
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xl

System
Contents
11.12.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................775

11.13 D75S.................................................................................................................................................................777
11.13 D75S.................................................................................................................................................................777
11.13.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................777
11.13.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................777
11.13.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................779
11.13.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................779
11.13.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................781
11.13.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................781
11.14 D34S.................................................................................................................................................................782
11.14 D34S.................................................................................................................................................................782
11.14.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................782
11.14.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................782
11.14.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................783
11.14.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................783
11.14.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................785
11.14.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................785
11.15 C34S..................................................................................................................................................................786
11.15 C34S..................................................................................................................................................................786
11.15.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................786
11.15.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................786
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xli

System
Contents

11.15.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................787
11.15.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................787
11.15.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................789
11.15.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................789
11.16 MU04................................................................................................................................................................790
11.16 MU04................................................................................................................................................................790
11.16.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................790
11.16.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................790
11.16.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................791
11.16.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................791
11.16.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................793
11.16.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................793
11.17 DM12................................................................................................................................................................794
11.17 DM12................................................................................................................................................................794
11.17.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................794
11.17.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................794
11.17.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................795
11.17.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................795
11.17.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................798
11.17.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................798
11.18 TSB4.................................................................................................................................................................799
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xlii

System
Contents
11.18 TSB4.................................................................................................................................................................799
11.18.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................800
11.18.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................800
11.18.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................801
11.18.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................801
11.18.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................801
11.18.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................801
11.19 TSB8.................................................................................................................................................................803
11.19 TSB8.................................................................................................................................................................803
11.19.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................803
11.19.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................803
11.19.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................804
11.19.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................804
11.19.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................805
11.19.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................805
12 EoS Boards.................................................................................................................................810
12.1 EFT8...................................................................................................................................................................811
12.1 EFT8...................................................................................................................................................................811
12.1.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................812
12.1.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................812
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xliii

System
Contents

12.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................819
12.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................819
12.1.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................822
12.1.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................822
12.1.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................822
12.1.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................822
12.1.10 Configuring the Board Functions...............................................................................................................823
12.1.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................825
12.1.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................825
12.1.15 Technical Specifications of EFT8...............................................................................................................829
12.1.15 Technical Specifications of EFT8...............................................................................................................829
12.2 EFT8A................................................................................................................................................................833
12.2 EFT8A................................................................................................................................................................833
12.2.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................834
12.2.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................834
12.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................841
12.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................841
12.2.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................843
12.2.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................843
12.2.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................843
12.2.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................843
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xliv

System
Contents

12.2.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................846
12.2.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................846
12.2.15 Technical Specifications of EFT8A............................................................................................................850
12.2.15 Technical Specifications of EFT8A............................................................................................................850
12.3 EGT2..................................................................................................................................................................855
12.3 EGT2..................................................................................................................................................................855
12.3.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................855
12.3.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................855
12.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................861
12.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................861
12.3.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................864
12.3.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................864
12.3.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................865
12.3.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................865
12.3.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................868
12.3.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................868
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xlv

System
Contents

12.4 EFS0...................................................................................................................................................................882
12.4 EFS0...................................................................................................................................................................882
12.4.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................882
12.4.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................882
12.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................892
12.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................892
12.4.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................893
12.4.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................893
12.4.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................894
12.4.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................894
12.4.14 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................898
12.4.14 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................898
12.5 EFS0A................................................................................................................................................................915
12.5 EFS0A................................................................................................................................................................915
12.5.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................915
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xlvi

System
Contents
12.5.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................915
12.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................924
12.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................924
12.5.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................925
12.5.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................925
12.5.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................926
12.5.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................926
12.5.14 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................930
12.5.14 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................930
12.6 EFS4...................................................................................................................................................................936
12.6 EFS4...................................................................................................................................................................936
12.6.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................937
12.6.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................937
12.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................946
12.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................946
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xlvii

System
Contents

12.6.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................948
12.6.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................948
12.6.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................948
12.6.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................948
12.6.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................951
12.6.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................951
12.7 EGS2...................................................................................................................................................................966
12.7 EGS2...................................................................................................................................................................966
12.7.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................966
12.7.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................966
12.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................975
12.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................975
12.7.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................978
12.7.7 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................978
12.7.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................979
12.7.8 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................979
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xlviii

System
Contents

12.7.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................982
12.7.13 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................982
12.8 EMS2..................................................................................................................................................................996
12.8 EMS2..................................................................................................................................................................996
12.8.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................996
12.8.2 Application....................................................................................................................................................996
12.8.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1005
12.8.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1005
12.8.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1008
12.8.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1008
12.8.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1008
12.8.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1008
12.8.10 Configuring the Board Functions.............................................................................................................1010
12.8.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1012
12.8.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1012
12.9 EMS4................................................................................................................................................................1023
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
xlix

System
Contents
12.9 EMS4................................................................................................................................................................1023
12.9.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1023
12.9.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1023
12.9.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1032
12.9.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1032
12.9.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1035
12.9.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1035
12.9.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1035
12.9.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1035
12.9.14 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1043
12.9.14 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1043
12.10 EGS4...............................................................................................................................................................1055
12.10 EGS4...............................................................................................................................................................1055
12.10.1 Version Description..................................................................................................................................1055
12.10.1 Version Description..................................................................................................................................1055
12.10.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1055
12.10.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1055
12.10.3 Functions and Features.............................................................................................................................1056
12.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................1061
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
Contents

12.10.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1064
12.10.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1064
12.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches.......................................................................................................................1067
12.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches.......................................................................................................................1067
12.10.7 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1067
12.10.7 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1067
12.10.8 Feature Code.............................................................................................................................................1067
12.10.8 Feature Code.............................................................................................................................................1067
12.10.9 Board Protection.......................................................................................................................................1067
12.10.9 Board Protection.......................................................................................................................................1067
12.10.10 Configuring and Commissioning the Board...........................................................................................1071
12.10.10 Configuring and Commissioning the Board...........................................................................................1071
12.10.11 Configuring the Board Functions...........................................................................................................1073
12.10.11 Configuring the Board Functions...........................................................................................................1073
12.10.12 Parameter Settings..................................................................................................................................1073
12.10.12 Parameter Settings..................................................................................................................................1073
12.10.13 Maintaining the Board............................................................................................................................1074
12.10.14 List of Alarms.........................................................................................................................................1075
12.10.14 List of Alarms.........................................................................................................................................1075
12.10.15 List of Performance Events....................................................................................................................1078
12.10.15 List of Performance Events....................................................................................................................1078
12.10.16 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................1082
12.10.16 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................1082
12.11 EAS2...............................................................................................................................................................1092
12.11 EAS2...............................................................................................................................................................1092
12.11.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................1092
12.11.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1092
12.11.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1092
12.11.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1100
12.11.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1100
12.11.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches........................................................................................................................1102
12.11.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches........................................................................................................................1102
12.11.7 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1102
12.11.7 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1102
12.11.8 Feature Code.............................................................................................................................................1102
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
li

System
Contents
12.11.8 Feature Code.............................................................................................................................................1102

12.11.10 Configuring the Board Functions............................................................................................................1104
12.11.10 Configuring the Board Functions............................................................................................................1104
12.11.11 Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................................1104
12.11.11 Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................................1104
12.11.13 List of Alarms.........................................................................................................................................1105
12.11.13 List of Alarms.........................................................................................................................................1105
12.11.14 List of Performance Events.....................................................................................................................1107
12.11.14 List of Performance Events.....................................................................................................................1107
12.11.15 Technical Specifications of EAS2...........................................................................................................1110
12.11.15 Technical Specifications of EAS2...........................................................................................................1110
12.12 EFF8................................................................................................................................................................1115
12.12 EFF8................................................................................................................................................................1115
12.12.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1115
12.12.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1115
12.12.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1116
12.12.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1116
12.12.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1118
12.12.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1118
12.13 EFF8A.............................................................................................................................................................1120
12.13 EFF8A.............................................................................................................................................................1120
12.13.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1120
12.13.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1120
12.13.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1121
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lii

System
Contents
12.13.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1121

12.13.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1123
12.13.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1123
12.14 ETF8...............................................................................................................................................................1124
12.14 ETF8...............................................................................................................................................................1124
12.14.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1124
12.14.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1124
12.14.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1125
12.14.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1125
12.14.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1127
12.14.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1127
12.15 ETF8A............................................................................................................................................................1129
12.15 ETF8A............................................................................................................................................................1129
12.15.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1129
12.15.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1129
12.15.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1130
12.15.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1130
12.15.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1131
12.15.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1131
12.16 ETS8...............................................................................................................................................................1132
12.16 ETS8...............................................................................................................................................................1132
12.16.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1133
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
liii

System
Contents
12.16.2 Application................................................................................................................................................1133
12.16.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1134
12.16.5 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................1134
12.16.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1135
12.16.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................1135
13 ATM Boards.............................................................................................................................1138
13.1 ADL4................................................................................................................................................................1138
13.1 ADL4................................................................................................................................................................1138
13.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1139
13.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1139
13.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1143
13.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1143
13.1.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1145
13.1.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1145
13.1.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1145
13.1.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1145
13.1.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1148
13.1.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1148
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
liv

System
Contents

13.2 ADQ1................................................................................................................................................................1151
13.2 ADQ1................................................................................................................................................................1151
13.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1151
13.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1151
13.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1156
13.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1156
13.2.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1158
13.2.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1158
13.2.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1158
13.2.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1158
13.2.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1161
13.2.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1161
13.3 IDL4..................................................................................................................................................................1164
13.3 IDL4..................................................................................................................................................................1164
13.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1164
13.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1164
13.3.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1168
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lv

System
Contents
13.3.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1168

13.3.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1170
13.3.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1170
13.3.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1170
13.3.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1170
13.3.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1173
13.3.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1173
13.4 IDQ1.................................................................................................................................................................1177
13.4 IDQ1.................................................................................................................................................................1177
13.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1177
13.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1177
13.4.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1181
13.4.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1181
13.4.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1183
13.4.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1183
13.4.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1183
13.4.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1183
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lvi

System
Contents

13.4.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1186
13.4.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1186
14 RPR Boards..............................................................................................................................1191
14.1 EGR2................................................................................................................................................................1191
14.1 EGR2................................................................................................................................................................1191
14.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1191
14.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1191
14.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1198
14.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1198
14.1.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1200
14.1.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1200
14.1.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1200
14.1.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1200
14.1.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1203
14.1.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1203
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lvii

System
Contents

14.2 EMR0................................................................................................................................................................1213
14.2 EMR0................................................................................................................................................................1213
14.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1213
14.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1213
14.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1220
14.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1220
14.2.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1222
14.2.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1222
14.2.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1223
14.2.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1223
14.2.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1226
14.2.13 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1226
15 SAN/Video Boards...................................................................................................................1239
15.1 MST4................................................................................................................................................................1239
15.1 MST4................................................................................................................................................................1239
15.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1239
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lviii

System
Contents
15.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1239
15.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1243
15.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1243
15.1.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1245
15.1.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1245
15.1.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1245
15.1.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1245
15.1.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1248
15.1.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1248
15.2 VST4.................................................................................................................................................................1251
15.2 VST4.................................................................................................................................................................1251
15.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1251
15.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1251
15.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1254
15.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1254
15.2.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1256
15.2.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1256
15.2.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1256
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lix

System
Contents
15.2.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1256

15.2.9 Configuring and Commissioning a Board..................................................................................................1256
15.2.9 Configuring and Commissioning a Board..................................................................................................1256
15.2.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1258
15.2.12 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1258
16 WDM Boards...........................................................................................................................1261
16.1 CMR2...............................................................................................................................................................1262
16.1 CMR2...............................................................................................................................................................1262
16.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1262
16.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1262
16.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1264
16.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1264
16.1.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1266
16.1.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1266
16.1.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1266
16.1.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1266
16.2 CMR4...............................................................................................................................................................1267
16.2 CMR4...............................................................................................................................................................1267
16.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1268
16.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1268
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lx

System
Contents

16.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1270
16.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1270
16.2.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1271
16.2.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1271
16.2.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1271
16.2.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1271
16.3 CMD2...............................................................................................................................................................1273
16.3 CMD2...............................................................................................................................................................1273
16.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1273
16.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1273
16.3.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1275
16.3.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1275
16.3.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1277
16.3.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1277
16.3.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1277
16.3.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1277
16.3.11 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1279
16.3.11 List of Alarms...........................................................................................................................................1279
16.4 MR2..................................................................................................................................................................1280
16.4 MR2..................................................................................................................................................................1280
16.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1281
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxi

System
Contents
16.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1281
16.4.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1283
16.4.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1283
16.4.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1284
16.4.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1284
16.4.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1284
16.4.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1284
16.5 MR2A...............................................................................................................................................................1286
16.5 MR2A...............................................................................................................................................................1286
16.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1286
16.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1286
16.5.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1289
16.5.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1289
16.5.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1290
16.5.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1290
16.6 MR2C...............................................................................................................................................................1291
16.6 MR2C...............................................................................................................................................................1291
16.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1291
16.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1291
16.6.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1294
16.6.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1294
16.6.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1296
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxii

System
Contents
16.6.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1296

16.7 MR4..................................................................................................................................................................1297
16.7 MR4..................................................................................................................................................................1297
16.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1297
16.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1297
16.7.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1300
16.7.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1300
16.7.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1301
16.7.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1301
16.7.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1301
16.7.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1301
16.8 LWX.................................................................................................................................................................1303
16.8 LWX.................................................................................................................................................................1303
16.8.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1303
16.8.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1303
16.8.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1306
16.8.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1306
16.8.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1308
16.8.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1308
16.8.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1308
16.8.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1308
16.9 FIB....................................................................................................................................................................1312
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxiii

System
Contents
16.9 FIB....................................................................................................................................................................1312
16.9.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1312
16.9.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1312
16.9.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1313
16.9.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1313
16.9.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1315
16.9.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1315
17 Auxiliary Boards......................................................................................................................1316
17.1 AUX..................................................................................................................................................................1316
17.1 AUX..................................................................................................................................................................1316
17.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1316
17.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1316
17.1.5 Jumpers.......................................................................................................................................................1319
17.1.5 Jumpers.......................................................................................................................................................1319
17.1.6 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1321
17.1.6 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1321
17.1.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1328
17.1.7 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1328
17.2 FAN...................................................................................................................................................................1329
17.2 FAN...................................................................................................................................................................1329
17.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1329
17.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1329
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxiv

System
Contents

17.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1331
17.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1331
17.2.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1332
17.2.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1332
18 Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards......................................1333

18.1 BA2...................................................................................................................................................................1334
18.1 BA2...................................................................................................................................................................1334
18.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1334
18.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1334
18.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1337
18.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1337
18.1.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1340
18.1.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1340
18.1.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1341
18.1.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1341
18.2 BPA...................................................................................................................................................................1342
18.2 BPA...................................................................................................................................................................1342
18.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1342
18.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1342
18.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1345
18.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1345
18.2.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1347
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxv

System
Contents
18.2.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1347

18.2.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1347
18.2.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1347
18.3 COA..................................................................................................................................................................1348
18.3 COA..................................................................................................................................................................1348
18.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1349
18.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1349
18.3.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1354
18.3.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1354
18.3.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1358
18.3.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1358
18.3.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1359
18.3.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1359
18.4 RPC01...............................................................................................................................................................1360
18.4 RPC01...............................................................................................................................................................1360
18.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1361
18.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1361
18.4.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1363
18.4.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1363
18.4.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1364
18.4.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1364
18.4.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1365
18.4.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1365
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxvi

System
Contents

18.5 RPC02...............................................................................................................................................................1367
18.5 RPC02...............................................................................................................................................................1367
18.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1367
18.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1367
18.5.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1370
18.5.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1370
18.5.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1371
18.5.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1371
18.5.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1372
18.5.8 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1372
18.6 OBU1................................................................................................................................................................1374
18.6 OBU1................................................................................................................................................................1374
18.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1374
18.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1374
18.6.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1377
18.6.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1377
18.6.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1379
18.6.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1379
18.6.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1379
18.6.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1379
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxvii

System
Contents

18.7 OBU2................................................................................................................................................................1382
18.7 OBU2................................................................................................................................................................1382
18.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1382
18.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1382
18.7.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1385
18.7.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1385
18.7.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1387
18.7.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1387
18.7.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1387
18.7.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1387
18.8 DCU..................................................................................................................................................................1390
18.8 DCU..................................................................................................................................................................1390
18.8.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1390
18.8.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1390
18.8.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1392
18.8.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1392
18.8.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1395
18.8.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1395
18.8.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1395
18.8.7 Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................1395
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxviii

System
Contents
19 Power Boards...........................................................................................................................1398
19.1 UPM..................................................................................................................................................................1398
19.1 UPM..................................................................................................................................................................1398
19.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1398
19.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1398
19.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1402
19.1.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1402
19.1.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1405
19.1.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1405
19.2 PIU....................................................................................................................................................................1406
19.2 PIU....................................................................................................................................................................1406
19.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1407
19.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1407
19.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1408
19.2.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1408
19.2.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1410
19.2.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1410
19.3 PIUA.................................................................................................................................................................1410
19.3 PIUA.................................................................................................................................................................1410
19.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1410
19.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1410
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxix

System
Contents

19.3.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1412
19.3.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1412
19.3.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1414
19.3.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1414
19.4 PIUB.................................................................................................................................................................1414
19.4 PIUB.................................................................................................................................................................1414
19.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1415
19.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................1415
19.4.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1416
19.4.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................1416
19.4.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1418
19.4.6 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................1418
20 Pluggable Optical Module......................................................................................................1420

20.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................................1420
20.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................................1420
20.2 SFP/eSFP/SFP+................................................................................................................................................1422
20.2 SFP/eSFP/SFP+................................................................................................................................................1422
20.3 XFP...................................................................................................................................................................1428
20.3 XFP...................................................................................................................................................................1428
20.4 CWDM/DWDM...............................................................................................................................................1429
20.4 CWDM/DWDM...............................................................................................................................................1429
21 Pluggable Electrical Module...................................................................................................1444

22 Cables........................................................................................................................................1446
22.1 Fiber Jumper.....................................................................................................................................................1446
22.1 Fiber Jumper.....................................................................................................................................................1446
22.1.1 Categories of the Fiber Jumpers.................................................................................................................1446
22.1.1 Categories of the Fiber Jumpers.................................................................................................................1446
22.1.2 Connector....................................................................................................................................................1447
22.1.2 Connector....................................................................................................................................................1447
22.2 Power Cable and Ground Cable.......................................................................................................................1450
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxx

System
Contents
22.2 Power Cable and Ground Cable.......................................................................................................................1450

22.2.1 Power Cable of the Cabinet........................................................................................................................1450
22.2.1 Power Cable of the Cabinet........................................................................................................................1450
22.2.2 Ground Cable of the Cabinet Door.............................................................................................................1454
22.2.2 Ground Cable of the Cabinet Door.............................................................................................................1454
22.2.3 Subrack Power Cable..................................................................................................................................1455
22.2.3 Subrack Power Cable..................................................................................................................................1455
22.2.4 COA Power Cable......................................................................................................................................1457
22.2.4 COA Power Cable......................................................................................................................................1457
22.2.5 RPC Power Cable.......................................................................................................................................1459
22.2.5 RPC Power Cable.......................................................................................................................................1459
22.3 Alarm Cable......................................................................................................................................................1460
22.3 Alarm Cable......................................................................................................................................................1460
22.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable..............................................................................................................................1460
22.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable..............................................................................................................................1460
22.3.2 Indicator Cascading Cable Between Subracks or Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN
Equipment..............................................................................................................................................................1462
22.3.2 Indicator Cascading Cable Between Subracks or Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN
Equipment..............................................................................................................................................................1462
22.3.3 Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment and the Other Huawei Transmission
Equipment..............................................................................................................................................................1463
22.3.3 Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment and the Other Huawei Transmission
Equipment..............................................................................................................................................................1463
22.3.4 Alarm Input/Output Cable..........................................................................................................................1465
22.3.4 Alarm Input/Output Cable..........................................................................................................................1465
22.4 Management Cable...........................................................................................................................................1466
22.4 Management Cable...........................................................................................................................................1466
22.4.1 OAM Serial Cable......................................................................................................................................1467
22.4.1 OAM Serial Cable......................................................................................................................................1467
22.4.2 Serial 1 to 4/F1/F&f Serial Cable...............................................................................................................1468
22.4.2 Serial 1 to 4/F1/F&f Serial Cable...............................................................................................................1468
22.4.3 RS-232/RS-422 Serial Cable......................................................................................................................1469
22.4.3 RS-232/RS-422 Serial Cable......................................................................................................................1469
22.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Line............................................................................................................................1471
22.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Line............................................................................................................................1471
22.4.5 COA Cascading Cable................................................................................................................................1472
22.4.5 COA Cascading Cable................................................................................................................................1472
22.4.6 Straight-Through Cable..............................................................................................................................1473
22.4.6 Straight-Through Cable..............................................................................................................................1473
22.4.7 Crossover Cable..........................................................................................................................................1474
22.4.7 Crossover Cable..........................................................................................................................................1474
22.5 Signal Cable......................................................................................................................................................1476
22.5 Signal Cable......................................................................................................................................................1476
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxxi

System
Contents
22.5.1 75-ohm 8xE1 Cable....................................................................................................................................1476

22.5.1 75-ohm 8xE1 Cable....................................................................................................................................1476
22.5.2 120-ohm 8xE1 Cable..................................................................................................................................1479
22.5.2 120-ohm 8xE1 Cable..................................................................................................................................1479
22.5.3 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable...................................................................................................................................1481
22.5.3 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable...................................................................................................................................1481
22.5.4 Framed E1 Cable........................................................................................................................................1482
22.5.4 Framed E1 Cable........................................................................................................................................1482
22.5.5 Nx64 kbit/s Cable.......................................................................................................................................1482
22.5.5 Nx64 kbit/s Cable.......................................................................................................................................1482
22.6 Clock Cable......................................................................................................................................................1500
22.6 Clock Cable......................................................................................................................................................1500
22.6.1 75-ohm/120-ohm Clock Cable...................................................................................................................1500
22.6.1 75-ohm/120-ohm Clock Cable...................................................................................................................1500
22.6.2 One-Channel Clock Transit Cable and Two-Channel Clock Transit Cable................................................1502
22.6.2 One-Channel Clock Transit Cable and Two-Channel Clock Transit Cable................................................1502
23 Indicators..................................................................................................................................1505
23.1 Indicators on the Cabinet..................................................................................................................................1505
23.1 Indicators on the Cabinet..................................................................................................................................1505
23.2 Alarm Indicators on the Boards........................................................................................................................1506
23.2 Alarm Indicators on the Boards........................................................................................................................1506
24 Labels........................................................................................................................................1511
24.1 Safety Labels.....................................................................................................................................................1511
24.1 Safety Labels.....................................................................................................................................................1511
24.1.1 Label Description........................................................................................................................................1511
24.1.1 Label Description........................................................................................................................................1511
24.1.2 Label Position.............................................................................................................................................1513
24.1.2 Label Position.............................................................................................................................................1513
24.2 Engineering Labels...........................................................................................................................................1515
24.2 Engineering Labels...........................................................................................................................................1515
25 Board Information Quick Reference.....................................................................................1519

25.1 Board Version Replacement.............................................................................................................................1520
25.1 Board Version Replacement.............................................................................................................................1520
25.2 Quick Reference Table for Optical Interfaces..................................................................................................1525
25.2 Quick Reference Table for Optical Interfaces..................................................................................................1525
25.2.1 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of SDH Boards......................................................1525
25.2.1 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of SDH Boards......................................................1525
25.2.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Ports of PDH Boards.......................................................................1533
25.2.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Ports of PDH Boards.......................................................................1533
25.2.3 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Packet Boards...................................................1534
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxxii

System
Contents

25.2.5 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Data Boards......................................................1537
25.2.5 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Data Boards......................................................1537
25.3 Quick Reference of Board Functions...............................................................................................................1540
25.3 Quick Reference of Board Functions...............................................................................................................1540
25.3.1 Information Quick Reference of SDH Boards...........................................................................................1540
25.3.1 Information Quick Reference of SDH Boards...........................................................................................1540
25.3.2 Information Quick Reference of PDH Boards...........................................................................................1543
25.3.2 Information Quick Reference of PDH Boards...........................................................................................1543
25.3.3 Information Quick Reference of Data Boards............................................................................................1544
25.3.3 Information Quick Reference of Data Boards............................................................................................1544
25.3.4 Information Quick Reference of Packet Boards.........................................................................................1548
25.3.4 Information Quick Reference of Packet Boards.........................................................................................1548
25.4 Loopback Capability of the Boards..................................................................................................................1553
25.4 Loopback Capability of the Boards..................................................................................................................1553
25.5 Protection Schemes Supported by Each Board................................................................................................1564
25.5 Protection Schemes Supported by Each Board................................................................................................1564
25.6 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board..............................................................1571
25.6 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board..............................................................1571
26 Parameter Settings..................................................................................................................1577
26.1 Packet Processing Boards.................................................................................................................................1578
26.1 Packet Processing Boards.................................................................................................................................1578
26.1.1 General Attributes.......................................................................................................................................1578
26.1.1 General Attributes.......................................................................................................................................1578
26.1.2 Flow Control...............................................................................................................................................1579
26.1.2 Flow Control...............................................................................................................................................1579
26.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes.......................................................................................................................................1580
26.1.5 Advanced Attributes...................................................................................................................................1583
26.1.5 Advanced Attributes...................................................................................................................................1583
26.2 EoD Boards.......................................................................................................................................................1586
26.2 EoD Boards.......................................................................................................................................................1586
26.3 Packet Interface Boards....................................................................................................................................1586
26.3 Packet Interface Boards....................................................................................................................................1586
26.3.1 SDH Parameters.........................................................................................................................................1587
26.3.1 SDH Parameters.........................................................................................................................................1587
26.3.2 Channelized STM-1 Port............................................................................................................................1588
26.3.2 Channelized STM-1 Port............................................................................................................................1588
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxxiii

System
Contents
26.3.3 E1 Port........................................................................................................................................................1591
26.3.3 E1 Port........................................................................................................................................................1591
26.4 Data Boards......................................................................................................................................................1594
26.4 Data Boards......................................................................................................................................................1594
26.4.1 SDH Parameters.........................................................................................................................................1595
26.4.1 SDH Parameters.........................................................................................................................................1595
26.4.2 Ethernet Parameters....................................................................................................................................1596
26.4.2 Ethernet Parameters....................................................................................................................................1596
26.4.3 ATM Parameters.........................................................................................................................................1607
26.4.3 ATM Parameters.........................................................................................................................................1607
26.5 SDH Processing Boards....................................................................................................................................1607
26.5 SDH Processing Boards....................................................................................................................................1607
26.6 PDH Boards......................................................................................................................................................1608
26.6 PDH Boards......................................................................................................................................................1608
26.7 WDM Boards....................................................................................................................................................1611
26.7 WDM Boards....................................................................................................................................................1611
26.8 Cross-Connect and Timing Units.....................................................................................................................1618
26.8 Cross-Connect and Timing Units.....................................................................................................................1618
26.9 Optical Amplifier Boards..................................................................................................................................1622
26.9 Optical Amplifier Boards..................................................................................................................................1622
27 Task Collection.........................................................................................................................1629
27.1 Querying the Protection Subnet........................................................................................................................1630
27.1 Querying the Protection Subnet........................................................................................................................1630
27.2 Troubleshooting Service Unavailability...........................................................................................................1630
27.2 Troubleshooting Service Unavailability...........................................................................................................1630
27.3 Troubleshooting the Clock Tracing Failure......................................................................................................1631
27.3 Troubleshooting the Clock Tracing Failure......................................................................................................1631
27.4 Configuring the F&f Debugging Serial Port and OAM NM Port....................................................................1632
27.4 Configuring the F&f Debugging Serial Port and OAM NM Port....................................................................1632
27.5 Testing the Frequency Accuracy of the Free-Run Clock..................................................................................1633
27.5 Testing the Frequency Accuracy of the Free-Run Clock..................................................................................1633
27.6 Testing the Clock Holdover Accuracy..............................................................................................................1634
27.6 Testing the Clock Holdover Accuracy..............................................................................................................1634
27.7 Checking Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................1635
27.7 Checking Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................1635
27.8 Testing the SAN Service Channel....................................................................................................................1638
27.8 Testing the SAN Service Channel....................................................................................................................1638
27.9 Testing the SDI Service Channel......................................................................................................................1640
27.9 Testing the SDI Service Channel......................................................................................................................1640
A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................1642
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
lxxiv

System
1 Equipment Structure
Equipment Structure
The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, cabinet doors, DC power distribution
unit (PDU), subracks, orderwire phone fixing frame, boards, and cables. The OptiX OSN
3500 subrack can be installed in a 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500 that is installed in the 300 mm ETSI
cabinet.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
Figure 1.1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500 that is installed in the 300 mm ETSI cabinet
1
7
7
7
H
D
1. DC PDU
2. Side panel
3. Cable distribution plate
4. Orderwire phone fixing frame
5. Subrack
6. Cabinet
7. Fiber management tray
8. Front door
Figure 1-2 shows the appearance of the general OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and enhanced
OptiX OSN 3500 subrack (1100 W).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
Figure 1.2 Appearance of the general OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and enhanced OptiX OSN 3500
subrack (1100 w)
4
1. Interface board area
2. Fan area
3. Processing board area
4. Cable routing area
Figure 1-3 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500 type III subrack (2300 W).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
Figure 1.3 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500 type III subrack (2300 W)
4
2. Fan area
The difference between a general subrack and a type III subrack (2300 W) is with regard to applicable
power boards. With different power boards, the two types of subracks support different maximum power
consumption values.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
2 Cabinet
Cabinet
About This Chapter

Subracks are installed in a cabinet. OptiX OSN subracks need to be installed in appropriate
cabinets.
2.1 Types of Cabinets
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.2600
mm high T63 cabinets are discontinued. For details, see the released product change notice.
2.2 Configuration of the Cabinet
An ETSI cabinet has indicators and a DC PDU at the top.
2.1 Types of Cabinets

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.2600
mm high T63 cabinets are discontinued. For details, see the released product change notice.
The cabinets described in this topic are provided by Huawei.
The 300 mm ETSI cabinet is available in two types, namely, T63 cabinet and N63E cabinet.
Figure 2-1 shows the appearances of the T63 cabinet and N63E cabinet.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.1 Appearances of the T63 cabinet and N63E cabinet
T63 Cabinet
N63E Cabinet
1.1.1.1.1 Comparison Between the Specifications of the T63 Cabinet and the
Specifications of the N63E Cabinet

Table 2-1 describes the comparison between the specifications of the T63 cabinet and the
specifications of the N63E cabinet.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.1 Comparison between the specifications of the T63 cabinet and the specifications of the
N63E cabinet
Cabinet
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
300 mm ETSI cabinet (T63)
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H)
58
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H)
63
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H)
73
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H)
41
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H)
45
300 mm ETSI cabinet (N63E)
1.1.1.1.2 T63 Cabinet

The specifications of the T63 cabinet comply with the ETSI standard. The T63 cabinet is 600
mm wide and 300 mm deep.
There are two ground bolts on the frame at the top of the T63 cabinet. Figure 2-2 shows the
locations of the cable holes at the top of the T63 cabinet. Figure 2-3 shows the locations of the
cable holes at the bottom of the T63 cabinet.
Figure 1.2 Locations of the cable holes at the top of the T63 cabinet
600mm
200mm
106mm
Cabling hole
15mm
160mm
200mm
295mm
106mm
110mm
110mm
Power cable hole Cabniet grounding terminal
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.3 Locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the T63 cabinet
600mm
106mm
Cabling hole
15mm
200mm
200mm
160mm
295mm
106mm
Cabniet installtion hole
110mm
Power cable hole
1.1.1.1.3 N63E Cabinet

The specifications of the N63E cabinet comply with the ETSI standard. The N63E cabinet is
600 mm wide and 300 mm deep.
There are two ground bolts on the frame at the top of the N63E cabinet. Figure 2-4 shows the
locations of the cable holes at the top of the N63E cabinet. Figure 2-5 shows the locations of
the cable holes at the bottom of the N63E cabinet.
Figure 1.4 Locations of the cable holes at the top of the N63E cabinet
Cable hole Cable hole
Cable hole Cable hole
600mm
143mm
155mm
62mm
81mm
188mm
300mm
66mm
251mm
Fiber hole
Grounding bolt
Fiber hole
Power cable hole
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.5 Locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the N63E cabinet
Cable hole
Cable hole
184mm
360mm
Fiber hole
Fiber hole
The difference between the cable routing in the case of the T63 cabinet and the cable routing
in the case of the N63E cabinet is with regard to the cable routing at the top and bottom cable
holes. The cable routing in the T63 cabinet is the same as the cable routing in the N63E
cabinet.
The T63 cabinet is approximately 16 mm deeper than the N63E cabinet. When you install the
mounting ears of the components, select proper mounting holes according to the type of
cabinet on site.
1.1.1.1.4 Enclosure Frame

Only the 2000 mm and 2200 mm high N63E cabinets are available. If the 2600 mm high
N63E cabinet is required, you need to place a 400 mm high enclosure frame on the top of the
2200 mm high N63E cabinet.
Figure 2-6 shows the picture and dimensions of the enclosure frame.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.6 Picture and dimensions of the enclosure frame
60
0m
m
400mm
mm
00
1.1.1.1.5 N66T Cabinet

The 600 mm ETSI cabinet is called the N66T cabinet. The N66T cabinet uses both the front
and rear columns, and it has a single front door and a single rear door. Figure 2-7 shows the
appearance of the N66T cabinet.
The N66T cabinet supports back-to-back installation of one ordinary OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and one
enhanced OptiX OSN 3500 subrack (1,100 W).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
10

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.7 Appearance of the N66T cabinet
Table 2-2 lists the specifications of the N66T cabinet.

Figure 1.1 Specifications of the N66T cabinet
Cabinet
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
N66T cabinet
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H)
71
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)
76
There are two ground bolts on the frame at the top of the N66T cabinet. Figure 2-8 shows the
locations of the cable holes at the top of the N66T cabinet. Figure 2-9 shows the locations of
the cable holes at the bottom of the N66T cabinet.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
11

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.8 Locations of the cable holes at the top of the N66T cabinet
600 mm
95 mm
95 mm
95 mm
215 mm
Cabling hole
17.8 mm
600 mm
95 mm
17.8 mm
224 mm
Power cable hole
Cabniet grounding terminal
224 mm
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
12

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.9 Locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the N66T cabinet
Cabling hole
2.2 Configuration of the Cabinet

An ETSI cabinet has indicators and a DC PDU at the top.
Figure 2-10 shows the positions of the indicators and the DC PDU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
13

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.1 ETSI cabinet

1
2
PowerCritical MajorMinor
Power distribution unit
H
W
1. Indicators
2. DC PDU
2.2.1 Indicators
The ETSI cabinet has one power indicator and three alarm severity indicators.
Table 2-3 describes the meanings of the status of the indicators.
Figure 1.2 Meanings of the status of the indicators
Indicator
Status
Meaning
Power indicator - Power (green)
On
Power is supplied to
the equipment.
Off
Power is not supplied

to the equipment.
On
A critical alarm occurs

on the equipment.
Off
No critical alarm
occurs on the
equipment.
On
A major alarm occurs

on the equipment.
Off
No major alarm occurs

on the equipment.
On
A minor alarm occurs
Critical alarm indicator - Critical (red)
Major alarm indicator - Major (orange)
Minor alarm indicator - Minor (yellow)

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
14

System
2 Cabinet
Indicator
Status
Meaning
on the equipment.
Off
No minor alarm occurs

on the equipment.
The status of the indicators is controlled by the AUX on the subrack. The indicators work only
after the cables of the indicators are correctly connected and the subrack is powered on.
2.2.2 DC Power Distribution Unit

The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top of a cabinet and is used to supply
power to the equipment.
1.1.1.1.6 DC Power Distribution Unit N1PDU

Figure 2-11 shows the front panel of the general cabinet DC PDU, N1PDU.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N1PDU
3
2
OUTPUT
2 3 4 5
ON
3
2
OUTPUT
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF
32A
32A
20A
INPUT
OFF
32A
20A
32A
20A
1. Terminal block (A)
2. Power ground cable RTN1(+)
3. Power ground cable RTN2(+)
4. Power cable NEG1(-)
5. Power cable NEG2(-)
6. Terminal block (B)
7. PGND
8. Power switch
20A
In the case of the OptiX OSN 3500, the output terminal block on side A supplies power to the
power interface board on side A of the subrack, and the output terminal block on side B
supplies power to the power interface board on side B of the subrack. Table 2-4 shows the
connections of the output terminal blocks on side A and side B.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
15

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.1 Connections of the output terminal blocks on side A and side B
Terminal
Block on Side
A
Corresponding Subrack
and Power Interface
Board
Terminal
Block on
Side B
Corresponding Subrack
and Power Interface
Board
Power interface board on

side A of the first subrack

side B of the first subrack

side A of the second
subrack

side B of the second
subrack

side A of the third subrack

side B of the third subrack

side A of the fourth subrack

side B of the fourth subrack
In the case of an enhanced subrack, the two power inputs work in load-sharing mode (each input carries
16 A). In the telecommunications room, however, the PDU needs to provide power supply of 34 A to an
entire subrack. In the case of a general subrack, the two power inputs work in load-sharing mode (each
input carries 10 A). In the telecommunications room, however, the PDU needs to provide power supply
of 20 A to an entire subrack. In this case, power failure will not occur if either of the power inputs fails.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 3500, the first and second terminal blocks are used. The third
and fourth terminal blocks supplies power to other equipment such as case-shaped optical
amplifiers. The number of the subracks increases from the bottom up.
The DPD100-2-8 PDU can substitute for the N1PDU.
1.1.1.1.7 DC Power Distribution Unit DPD100-2-8 PDU

The DPD100-2-8 is installed at the top of the cabinet, and is divided into two parts, namely,
part A and part B that back up each other. Part A and part B each receive one -48 V power
input and provide four power outputs to subracks inside the cabinet.
Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13 show the front panel of the DPD100-2-8 PDU.
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the DPD100-2-8 PDU (covered)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
16

System
2 Cabinet
Figure 1.3 Front panel of the DPD100-2-8 PDU (uncovered)
Power output area: On both sides of the DC PDU, there are respectively four output
terminal blocks that are used to connect to the power cables of subracks.
Power input area: INPUT A and INPUT B are each connected to one -48 V DC power
cable and one power ground cable, that is, two -48 V DC power cables and two power
ground cables in total.
Power switch area: On both sides of the DC PDU, there are respectively four power
output switches that correspond to the output terminal blocks. The power output switches
control power supply to the corresponding subracks.
1.1.1.1.8 DC Power Distribution Unit TN51PDU

The TN51PDU is installed at the top of the cabinet, and is divided into two parts, namely, part
A and part B that back up each other. Part A and part B respectively access four -48 V power
supplies. Among them:
Connections of main power supply: Part A is connected to RTN(+) and NEG(-).
Connections of standby power supply: Part B is connected to RTN(+) and NEG(-).

RTN(+)s and NEG(-)s are located at the upper layer and lower layer of the power input area
respectively.
The TN51PDU provides eight power output interfaces, supplying power to the subracks
inside the cabinet. Figure 2-14 shows the front panel of the TN51PDU.
Figure 1.4 Front panel of the TN51PDU
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
17

System
2 Cabinet
Power input area: The TN51PDU supports corresponding power input capability based
on the power supply capacity of the telecommunications room.
When the telecommunications room provides four power inputs not less than 63 A,
part A and part B can respectively be connected to four -48 V DC power cables and
four power ground cables, that is, eight -48 V DC power cables and eight power
ground cables in total.
When the telecommunications room provides two power inputs not less than 125 A,
part A and part B can respectively be connected to two -48 V DC power cables and
two power ground cables, that is, four-48 V DC power cables and four power ground
cables in total.
1.1.1.1.9 DC Power Distribution Unit DPD63-8-8 PDU

The DPD63-8-8 PDU is installed at the top of the cabinet, and is divided into two parts,
namely, part A and part B that back up each other. Part A and part B each receive four -48 V
power inputs and provide four power outputs subracks inside the cabinet.
Figure 2-15 and Figure 2-16 show the front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
Figure 1.5 Front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU (covered)
Figure 1.6 Front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU (uncovered)
Power input area: INPUT A and INPUT B are each connected to four -48 V DC power
cables and four power ground cables, that is, eight -48 V DC power cables and eight
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
18

System
2 Cabinet
power ground cables in total.
Each of part A and part B needs to be connected to only two -48 V DC power cables and two power
ground cables.
The DPD63-8-8 PDU can substitute for the TN51PDU.
By default, one DPD63-8-8 PDU provides eight inputs and eight outputs. It can provide four inputs and
eight outputs with a short-circuiting copper bar installed.
1.1.1.1.10 Power Distribution Scheme

The DC PDU provides two groups (left and right) of power output at the same time. Table 2-5
lists the power distribution scheme of the N1PDU. Table 2-6 lists the power distribution
scheme of the TN51PDU. Table 2-7 lists the power distribution scheme of the DPD100-2-8
PDU.Table 2-8 lists the power distribution scheme of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
Figure 1.1 Power distribution scheme of the N1PDU
Input/Out
put
Group
No.
Power
Ground
Cable
Remarks
Power
input
INPUT
NEG1(-)
RTN1(+)
External power supply 1
NEG2(-)
RTN2(+)
Power
output
32 A
power
supply
group
1(-)
1(+)
Two outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup

of 32 A power to the subrack
2(-)
2(+)

20 A
power
supply
group
3(-)
3(+)

4(-)
4(+)

Connected to the protection ground of

the cabinet
Protection
ground
Figure 1.2 Power distribution scheme of the TN51PDU

Input/Output
Group No.
Remarks
Power input
(short-circuiting
copper bar not
installed)
INPUT A
Two 63 A power inputs and two 32 A power inputs
INPUT B
Power input
(short-circuiting
copper bar
INPUT A
One 125 A power input and two 32 A power inputs
INPUT B
One 125 A power input and two 32 A power inputs
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
19

System
Input/Output
2 Cabinet
Group No.
Remarks
63 A power
supply group
Four outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup of 63 A power

to the subrack
32 A power
supply group
Four outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup of 32 A power

to the subrack
Connected to the protection ground of the cabinet
installed)
Power output
Protection
ground
Figure 1.3 Power distribution scheme of the DPD100-2-8 PDU

Input/Output
Group No.
Remarks
Power input
INPUT A
One 100 A power input
INPUT B
One 100 A power input
OUTPUT A
Four outputs, providing two 32 A power inputs and

two 20 A power inputs to subracks
OUTPUT B
Four outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup for the two 32

A power inputs and two 20 A power inputs to subracks
Power output
Protection
ground
Figure 1.4 Power distribution scheme of the DPD63-8-8 PDU

Input/Output
Group No.
Remarks
Power input
(short-circuiting
copper bar not
installed)
INPUT A
INPUT B
Power input
(short-circuiting
copper bar
installed)
INPUT A
One 125 A power input and one 63 A power input
INPUT B
One 125 A power input and one 63 A power input
Power output
OUTPUT A
Four outputs, providing two 63 A power inputs and

two 32 A power inputs to subracks
OUTPUT B
Four outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup for the two 63

A power inputs and two 32 A power inputs to subracks
Protection
ground
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
20

System
2 Cabinet
1.1.1.1.11 Technical Specifications

Figure 1.1 Technical specifications of the PDU
Board
Dimensions
(mm)
Single-Cabinet
Input Voltage
(V)
Single-Cabinet
Output Voltage
(V)
Output Current
(A)
DPD1002-8 PDU
44.2 (W) x 79.6

(D) x 110 (H)
-48 (DC)
-38.4 to -57.6
4x32 A
-60 (DC)
-48 to -72
4x20 A
N1PDU
530 (W) x 97 (D)

x 133 (H)
-48 (DC)
-38.4 to -57.6
4x32 A
-60 (DC)
-48 to -72
4x20 A
DPD63-88 PDU
44.2 (W) x 79.6

(D) x 110 (H)
-48 (DC)
-38.4 to -57.6
4x63 A
-60 (DC)
-48 to -72
4x32 A
TN51PDU
535 (W) x 147

(D) x 133 (H)
-48 (DC)
-38.4 to -57.6
4x63 A
-48 to -72
4x32 A
-60 (DC)
NOTE
Two power inputs that back up each other need to be provided, and they work in load-sharing mode.
In the telecommunications room, it is required that the PDU needs to provide power supply for an
entire subrack. In this case, normal power supply can be guaranteed when either of the power inputs
fails.
2.2.3 Other Configurations

In addition to subracks, external case-shaped devices can be installed in a cabinet as required.
Uninterruptible power module (UPM)
Roman pump amplifiers RPC01 and RPC02
Orderwire phone
Dispersion compensation module (DCM)
Case-shaped optical amplifier (COA)
Fiber management tray
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
21

System
3 Subrack
Subrack
About This Chapter

This topic describes the structure, capacity, slot layout, and technical specifications of the
subrack.
3.1 Subrack Structure
An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of an interface
board area, a processing board area, a fan area, and a cable routing area.
3.2 Slot Allocation
An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of an upper layer and a lower layer. The upper layer,
where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18
slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.
3.3 Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode
When different cross-connect boards are used, the access capacity of each slot on the
equipment varies.
3.4 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode
equipment varies.
3.5 Ventilation Mode
The subrack of the equipment has many minute air vents and houses fans. The air enters from
the front and exits from the back, and the air flows from the bottom to the top. In this manner,
the equipment has good performance in heat dissipation.
3.6 Cable Management
This topic describes the function of the cable distribution plate and fiber spool box and the
overall scheme for cable routing.
3.7 Mapping Policies of Power Consumption
The increasing features supported by the equipment cause higher power consumption. To
ensure the normal operation of the equipment, the internal power supply system provides
different mapping policies of power consumption according to different power consumption
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
22

System
3 Subrack
requirements.
3.8 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum
power consumption.
3.1 Subrack Structure

An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of an interface
board area, a processing board area, a fan area, and a cable routing area.
Figure 3-1 shows the structure of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Figure 1.1 Structure of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
2. Fan area
The functions of the areas are as follows:
Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the
equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
23

System
3 Subrack
Processing board area: This area houses the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Cable routing area: This area houses fiber jumpers in a subrack.

An interface board is also called an access board or a transit board. An interface board provides physical
interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical signals or electrical signals
to the corresponding processing board.
3.2 Slot Allocation

An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of an upper layer and a lower layer. The upper layer,
where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18
slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.
Figure 3-2 shows the single-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Figure 1.1 Slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
S
L
O
T
1
9
S
L
O
T
2
0
S
L
O
T
2
1
S
L
O
T
2
2
S
L
O
T
2
3
S
L
O
T
2
4
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
FAN
SLOT 38
S
L
O
T
1
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
2 3 4 5
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
3
S S
L L
O O
T T
7 8
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
A
U
X
FAN
SLOT 39
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
X
C
S
X
C
S
S
L
O
T
1
1
FAN
SLOT 40
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
1 1 1 1
2 3 4 5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
Fiber routing trough
Figure 3-3 shows the dual-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
24

System
3 Subrack
Figure 1.2 Dual-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
The slots in an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack are allocated as follows:
Slots for service interface boards: slots 19-26 and 29-36
Slots for service processing boards: slots 1-8 and 11-17
Slots for cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9-10
Slots for system control and communication boards: slots 17-18 (slot 17 can also house a
processing board)
Slots for power interface boards: slots 27-28
Slot for an auxiliary interface board: slot 37
Slots for fan boards: slots 38-40

In an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, dual-slot boards and single-slot boards cannot be installed at the same
time.
1.1.1.1.12 Mapping Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 3-1 lists the mapping between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
25

System
3 Subrack
Figure 1.1 Mapping between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards
Slot for
Processing
Board
Dual-Slot for
Processing Board
Slot for Corresponding Interface Board
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slot 13
Slot 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slot 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slot 15
Slot 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slot 35 and 36
1.1.1.1.13 Paired Slots

If overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots are called
paired slots. Paired slots achieves automatic transparent transmission of overhead bytes such
as K bytes, D bytes, and E1 overhead bytes. This improves multiplex section protection
(MSP) switching performance and protects orderwire and DCC communication with other
NEs even after the system control board on the local NE cannot be detected. Table 3-2 lists
paired slots.
Figure 1.1 Paired slots
Cross-Connect Capacity
Paired Slot
200 Gbit/s
(Slot 2, Slot 17)

(Slot 3, Slot 16)
(Slot 4, Slot 15)
(Slot 5, Slot 14)
(Slot 6, Slot 13)
(Slot 7, Slot 12)
(Slot 8, Slot 11)
3.3 Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode

equipment varies.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
26

System
3 Subrack
When the N1PSXCS board is used, one service processing board occupies two slots. In this
case, adjacent slots can be merged, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 1.1 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N1PSXCS board is used (dualslot)
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
5
S S
L L
O O
T T
1 1
7 8
GSCC
S
L
O
T
1
1
GSCC
10Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
0
7.5Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
9
10Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
7
10Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
5
FAN
XCS
S
L
O
T
3
XCS
S
L
O
T
1
7.5Gbit/s
FAN
5Gbit/s
FAN
Cable routing area
Figure 3-5 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N2PSXCSA or
N3PSXCSA board is used.
Figure 1.2 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCSA board
is used (single slots)
XCS
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
GSCC
XCS
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
1 1 1 1
5 6 7 8
GSCC
20Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
4
5Gbit/s
S S
L L
O O
T T
1 1
2 3
2.5Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
1
5Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
0
5Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
9
5Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
8
5Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
7
5Gbit/s
S S S S S
L L L L L
O O O O O
T T T T T
2 3 4 5 6
2.5Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
10Gbit/s
FAN
2.5Gbit/s
FAN
2.5Gbit/s
FAN
Cable routing
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
27

System
3 Subrack
3.4 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode

equipment varies.
Figure 3-6 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 1.1 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment
S S
L L
O O
T T
1 1
2 3
S
L
O
T
1
4
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
XCS
XCS
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
1 1 1 1
5 6 7 8
GSCC
S
L
O
T
1
1
5Gbit/s or GSCC
S
L
O
T
1
0
5Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
9
10Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
8
10Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
7
5Gbit/s
S S S S S
L L L L L
O O O O O
T T T T T
2 3 4 5 6
5Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
10Gbit/s
FAN
5Gbit/s
FAN
5Gbit/s
FAN
Cable routing
3.5 Ventilation Mode

The subrack of the equipment has many minute air vents and houses fans. The air enters from
the front and exits from the back, and the air flows from the bottom to the top. In this manner,
the equipment has good performance in heat dissipation.
Make smooth ventilation of the air pipe of the cabinet. Do not block the air intake vents and air exhaust
vents of the subrack. Do not place any sundries in the upper part of the subrack to ensure that air can
flow through the subrack.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
28

System
3 Subrack
Figure 1.1 Ventilation mode of the OptiX OSN 3500
AIR OUT
AIR OUT
AIR OUT
AIR IN
When the arrow color changes from a cool color to a warm color, air temperature increases.
3.6 Cable Management

This topic describes the function of the cable distribution plate and fiber spool box and the
overall scheme for cable routing.
1.1.1.1.14 Cable Distribution Plate

One subrack needs to have one cable distribution plate installed on its top. Figure 3-8 shows
the appearance of the cable distribution plate. The function of the cable distribution plate is to
fix the equipment cable to avoid the difficulty that the board may not be easily reseated or that
the air vents of the equipment are blocked and therefore the heat dissipation of the equipment
is poor.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
29

System
3 Subrack
Figure 1.1 Appearance of the cable distribution plate
1.1.1.1.15 Fiber Spool Box

The fiber spool box is used to coil the redundant optical fibers inside the cabinet, and is
installed under a subrack by default. Figure 3-9 shows the appearance of a fiber spool box.
Figure 1.2 Appearance of a fiber spool box
Cable-through
hole
Fiber spool
box
For the installation position of the fiber spool box and cable distribution plate in the cabinet,
see 1 Equipment Structure.
1.1.1.1.16 Overall Scheme for Fiber Jumper Routing
The fiber jumpers of the equipment are routed through the front vertical columns at the
two sides of the cabinet.
The fiber jumpers of the equipment are led out through the fiber hole of the cabinet.
The fiber jumpers between the cabinet and the ODF are protected with a protection pipe.
The two ends of the protective pipe should be extended 10 cm into the cabinet and the
ODF.
The fiber jumpers are secured smoothly and interconnected reliably in the ODF. The
redundant fiber jumpers are coiled tidily.
When the internal fiber jumpers are routed, the redundant fibers are coiled tidily in the
fiber spool box.
The routing and connection of the fiber jumpers should be consistent with the design.
The optical attenuators are added according to the requirements of the engineering
design.
The bend radius of the fiber jumper must be greater than its minimum curvature radius.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
30

System
3 Subrack
Specifically, the minimum curvature radius for the 2 mm fiber jumper is 40 mm, and that
for the 3 mm fiber jumper is 60 mm.
1.1.1.1.17 Overall Scheme for Cable Routing
The external power cables and ground cables are arranged separately from the signal
cables, with a space more than 3 cm.
The power cables of the subrack are bundled under the cable distribution plate. The
power cables of the subrack are routed separately towards the back of the two sides of
the cabinet, and are routed along the back of the side panels to reach the power box.
In the case of overhead cabling, the signal cables of the upper subrack are led out from
the cable-through holes in the top middle of the cabinet, and the signal cables of the
lower subrack are led out from the cable-through holes on the two sides of the top of the
cabinet.
In the case of underfloor cabling, the signal cables of the upper and lower subracks are
led out from the cable-through holes on the two sides of the bottom of the cabinet.
3.7 Mapping Policies of Power Consumption

The increasing features supported by the equipment cause higher power consumption. To
ensure the normal operation of the equipment, the internal power supply system provides
different mapping policies of power consumption according to different power consumption
requirements.
The internal power supply system consists of PDU and PIU. Table 3-3 shows different
mapping policies of power consumption.
Figure 1.1 Mapping policies of power consumption on the OptiX OSN 3500
Type of
Subrack
Label of Subrack
Mappin
g PDU
Mappin
g PIU
Mappin
g UPM
Maximu
m
Power
Consum
ption
Fuse
Capacit
y of
Circuit
Breaker
s in a
DC PDU
Standard
OptiX
OSN
3500
subrack
N1PDU,
DPD100
-2-8
PDU
N1PIU,
N1PIU
A
EPS754815AF
720 W
20 A
Enhance
d OptiX
OSN
3500
subrack
(1100
W)
N1PDU,
DPD100
-2-8
PDU
N1PIU
A
EPS754815AF
1100 W
32 A
OptiX
OSN
TN51PD
U,
N1PIUB
EPS754815AF
2300 W
63 A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
31

System
Type of
Subrack
3 Subrack
Label of Subrack
3500
type III
subrack
(2300
W)
Mappin
g PDU
Mappin
g PIU
Mappin
g UPM
Maximu
m
Power
Consum
ption
Fuse
Capacit
y of
Circuit
Breaker
s in a
DC PDU
DPD638-8 PDU
When the type III subrack (2300 W) is configured with N1PDU/DPD100-2-8 PDU, the
maximum power consumption of the equipment is 1100 W. Therefore, it is recommended that
the type III subrack (2300 W) be configured with 51PDU/DPD63-8-8 PDU.
The service boards supported by various subracks are the same. However, for a specific type
of service board, the maximum number of boards that can be configured per subrack is related
to the power consumption of the subrack.
3.8 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum
power consumption.
Table 3-4 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H)
23 (net weight of the subrack that is not

installed with boards or fans)
Table 3-5 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Figure 1.3 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Subrack
Type
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
ona
Fuse
Capaci
ty
Typical Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption
General
OptiX
OSN
720 W
20 A
496 W
Two N1SLD64 (S-64.2b, LC)

boards
Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
32

System
Subrack
Type
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
ona
3 Subrack
Fuse
Capaci
ty
Typical Power
Consumption
3500
subrack
Enhanced
OptiX
OSN
3500
subrack
OptiX
OSN
3500
type-III
subrack
boards
1100 W
2300 W
32 A
63 A
534 W
718 W
Two N1SLQ16 (L-16.2, LC)

boards
Two N1SLH1 (S-1.1, LC)

boards
Four N1OU08 boards
Two N2EGT2 boards
Two N1PSXCS boards
One N4GSCC board
One N1AUX board
Two N1PIU boards
Two N1SL64 (S-64.2b, LC)

boards
Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC)

boards
One N1SLT1 (S-1.1, LC)

board
Two N1PEG8 boards
Two N1PEX2 boards
Two N1PETF8 boards
Two N2PSXCSA boards
One N1AUX board
Two N1PIUA boards
Five N1PEG8 boards
Two N1PEX2 boards
Two N2PEX1 boards
Three N1PETF8 boards
Two N2PSXCSA boards
One N1AUX board
Two N1PIUB boards
a: The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption

configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of
the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption
of the subrack in typical configuration.
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat
consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each
other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
33

System
3 Subrack
Table 3-6 lists the predicted reliability specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 1.4 Equipment predicted reliability
System
Availability
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR)
Mean Time Between Failures

(MTBF)
0.9999964
1 hour
31.83 years
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
34

System
4 Overview of Boards
Overview of Boards
About This Chapter

This topic describes the appearances, dimensions, bar codes, and classification of the boards
used on the OptiX OSN systems.
4.1 Appearances and Dimensions of the Boards
Different boards have different appearances and dimensions.
4.2 Bar Codes of the Boards
The bar code on the front panel of a board indicates the version, name, and feature code of the
board.
4.1 Appearances and Dimensions of the Boards

Different boards have different appearances and dimensions.
Table 4-1 provides information about the appearances and dimensions of the boards used on
the OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 1.5 Appearances and dimensions of the boards used on the OptiX OSN 3500
Parameter
Appearance and Dimensions
Board
appearance
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
35

System
Parameter
Board
classificatio
n
Optical interface board

(for example, SL16)
Service processing
board (for example,
PQ1)
Service interface board

(for example, D75S)
Height
(mm)
261.4
261.4
261.4
Depth (mm)
235.2
235.2
125.2
Width (mm)
25.4
25.4
22.0
Board
classificatio
n
Cross-connect and
timing board
System auxiliary
interface board (AUX)
Power interface board

(PIU)
Height
(mm)
261.4
261.4
261.4
Depth (mm)
235.2
125.2
125.2
Width (mm)
40.0
44.0
44.0
Board
appearance
Board
appearance
Board
classificatio
n
Board that occupies two

slots (such as the
N1PEG16)
Height
(mm)
261.4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
36

System
Parameter
Depth (mm)
235.2
Width (mm)
50.3
Note: The figure in the right cell shows the three

dimensions. "H" and "W" indicate the height and width of
the front panel respectively and "D" indicates the depth of
the printed circuit board (PCB).
H
D
Wear an ESD wrist strap when holding a board. To prevent the static discharge from
damaging the board, ensure that the ESD wrist strap is grounded properly.
Do not look directly at the optical interface board or optical interface. The laser beams inside
the fiber can damage your eyes.
A level optical module cannot be directly connected to an optical attenuator. If an optical

attenuator is required, use the attenuator on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.
If an optical attenuator is required, insert the attenuator in the IN interface instead of the
OUT interface.
Add an attenuator when performing a loopback at an optical interface to prevent the

optical module from being damaged.
4.2 Bar Codes of the Boards

The bar code on the front panel of a board indicates the version, name, and feature code of the
board.
Two types of bar codes are used for the boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, which are as follows:
16-digit manufacturing code + board version + board name + board feature code
20-digit manufacturing code + board version + board name + board feature code
The bar code is attached to the front panel of a board. Figure 4-1 shows the bar code with a
16-digit manufacturing code.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
37

System
Figure 1.1 Bar code of a board
Bar code
0364401055000015 -SSN3SL16A01
Last six digits of the BOM code

Internal code
Board version
Board name
5 Board feature code
The positions of bar codes vary according to boards. For details on the feature code of a board, see the
topic that describes the feature code of the board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
38

System
5 Classification of Boards
Classification of Boards
Boards are functionally classified into cross-connect boards and system control boards, packet
processing boards, packet interface boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, WDM boards, optical
amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards, auxiliary boards, and power boards.
For details on the board version replacement relationship between boards, see 25.1 Board Version
Replacement .
1.1.1.1.18 Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

Table 5-1 lists all cross-connect boards and system control boards and their applicable
products.
Figure 1.1 List of cross-connect boards and system control boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
TNN1SCA
System control and auxiliary

processing board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
TNN1PSXCS
Super Cross-connect and

Synchronous Timing Board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
T1PSXCSA,
T2PSXCSA
Super dual-plane crossconnect and synchronous

timing board
OptiX OSN 7500
N4GSCC,
N6GSCC
System Control and

Communication Board
OptiX OSN 7500, OptiX OSN 3500
N1PSXCS,
N2PSXCSA,
N3PSXCSA
Super Cross-connect and

Synchronous Timing Board
(supporting packet features)
OptiX OSN 3500
N1SXCSA
Super cross-connect and

synchronous timing board
(only applicable in TDM
mode)
OptiX OSN 3500
R1PCXLN
SCC unit, cross-connect
OptiX OSN 1500
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
39

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
unit, and optical interface

unit integrated board
(supporting the packet
feature)
Only the T2PSXCSA, TNN1PSXCS, and N3PSXCSA boards support MPLS-TP OAM and centralized
MPLS OAM.
1.1.1.1.19 Packet Processing Boards

Table 5-2 lists all packet processing boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of packet processing boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
TNN1EX2
2x10GE processing board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
N1PEX2
2-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet

switching processing board
N1PEX1
1x10GE Ethernet processing

board
OptiX OSN 3500
N2PEX1
1x10GE Ethernet processing

board
N1PEG16
16xGE Ethernet processing

board
OptiX OSN 3500
TNN1EG16
16xGE Ethernet processing

board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
TNN1EG8
8xGE processing board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
N1PEG8
8-port Gigabit Ethernet

switching processing board
Q1PEGS2
OptiX OSN 1500A, OptiX OSN 1500B
R1PEGS1
R1PEFS8
8xFE processing board
R1PEF4F
4xFE optical processing

board
R1ML1
Multi-protocol 16xE1
electrical processing board
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
40

System
1.1.1.1.20 Packet Interface Boards

Table 5-3 lists all packet interface boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of packet interface boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
TNN1CO1
8-port channelized STM-1

CES optical interface board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
N1CQ1
4-port channelized STM-1

CES optical interface board
TNN1D75E
32-port 75-ohm E1 interface

board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
TNN1D12E
32-port 120-ohm E1
interface board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
TNN1ETMC
8xFE+4xFE/GE electrical
interface board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
TNN1AFO1
8-port ATM STM-1 service

interface board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
TNN1EFF8
8-port FE optical interface

board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
N1PEFF8
8-port FE optical interface

board
N1PETF8
8xFE electrical interface

board
N1CQ1
4-channel channelized
STM-1 CES optical
interface board
N1MD12
interface board (120 ohms)
N1MD75
1.1.1.1.21 EoD Boards

Table 5-4 lists all EoD boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of EoD boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1EDQ41
4-port 622/155 Mbit/s SDH

optical interface Ethernet
dual-mode multi-function
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
41

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
processing board
1.1.1.1.22 SDH Boards

Table 5-5 lists all SDH boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of SDH boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N4SLD64
2xSTM-64 optical interface

board
OptiX OSN 7500 II, OptiX OSN 7500,

OptiX OSN 3500
N1SLD64

board
N4SFD64

board with the FEC function
T2SL64,
T2SL64A

board
OptiX OSN 7500
N1SF64,
N1SF64A,
N4SF64

board (with the forward
error correction (FEC)
function)
N1SL64

board
N2SL64

board
OptiX OSN 3500
N4SL64

board

OptiX OSN 3500
N4SLO16

board

OptiX OSN 3500
N1SLO16

board
N4SLQ16

board

OptiX OSN 3500
N1SLQ16,
N2SLQ16

board
N1SLD16

board
OptiX OSN 3500
N3SL16,
N3SL16A

board

OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 1500A,
OptiX OSN 1500B
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
42

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1SL16,
N1SL16A,
N2SL16,
N2SL16A

board
OptiX OSN 7500, OptiX OSN 3500,

N1SF16

board (with the outband
FEC function)

N1SF16E

board (with the outband
EFEC function)

N3SLH41
16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical
interface board

OptiX OSN 3500
N3SLQ41
4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical
interface board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1SLQ4,
N2SLQ4

board

N1SLQ4A

board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1SLD4,
N2SLD4,
N1SLD4A

board

R1SLD4

board (divided slot)
R1SL4

N1SL4, N2SL4,
N1SL4A

board

N1SLH1
16xSTM-1 signal processing

board

OptiX OSN 3500
N1SLT1

board

N1EU08
8xSTM-1 electrical interface

board

OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 1500B
N1OU08
8xSTM-1 optical/electrical
interface board (LC)

N2OU08

board (SC)

OptiX OSN 1500B
N2SLO1,
N3SLO1

board

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
43

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1SLQ1,
N2SLQ1

board

N1SLQ1A

board

OptiX OSN 1500B
R1SLQ1

N1EU04
4xSTM-1 electrical interface

board
N1SEP1
2xSTM-1 line processing

board when interfaces are
available on the front panel

8xSTM-1 line processing

board when interfaces are
available on the
corresponding interface
board
N1SL1, N2SL1,
N1SL1A

board

R1SL1

1.1.1.1.23 PDH Boards

Table 5-6 lists all PDH boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of PDH boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1SPQ4
4xE4/STM-1 electrical
processing board
N2SPQ4
processing board

N1MU04
interface board

N2PQ3
12xE3/T3 service
processing board

N1D34S
6xE3/T3 electrical switching

interface board

N1C34S
3xE3/T3 electrical switching

interface board

OptiX OSN 1500B
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
44

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1PD3, N2PD3
6xE3/T3 service processing

board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1PL3, N2PL3

board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1PL3A,
N2PL3A

board (Interfaces are
available on the front panel.)

N1PQ1
63xE1 service processing

board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N2PQ1

board

N1PQM
63xE1/T1 service
processing board

N1D12B
32xE1/T1 electrical
switching interface board

N1D12S
32xE1/T1 electrical
(120 ohms)

N1D75S
32xE1 electrical switching


R1PD1, R2PD1

board
R1PL1

board
R1L12S
16xE1/T1 electrical
(120 ohms)
OptiX OSN 1500A
R1L75S
16xE1 electrical switching

OptiX OSN 1500A
N1PFL1
8xE1 optical processing

board

N1TSB8
8-port electrical switching

interface board

N1TSB4
4-port electrical switching

interface board
N1DX1
DDN service accessing and

converging board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1DXA
DDN service converging

and processing board

N1DM12
DDN service interface board
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
45

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
OptiX OSN 1500B
1.1.1.1.24 EoS Boards

Table 5-7 lists all EoS boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of EoS boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1EFT8
8xFE/16xFE transparent
transmission board

N2EFT8
8xFE/16xFE transparent
transmission board

N1EFT8A
8xFE transparent
transmission board

N2EFT8A
8xFE transparent
transmission board

N1EFS0A
16xFE switching and

processing board

N1EFS0
8xFE switching and

processing board
N2EFS0,
N4EFS0,
N5EFS0
8xFE switching and

processing board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1EFS4,
N2EFS4,
N3EFS4
4xFE switching and

processing board

R1EFT4
4xFE transparent
transmission board (divided
slot)
N1EAS2
2x10GE Layer 2 switching

N3EAS2
2x10GE Layer 2 switching


OptiX OSN 3500
N1EMS4
4xGE and 16xFE switching


N1EMS2
2xGE and 16xFE switching


N1EGS4,
N3EGS4
4xGE switching and

processing board

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
46

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1EGT2,
N2EGT2
2xGE transparent
transmission board

N2EGS2,
N3EGS2
2xGE switching and

processing board

N1EFF8
8x100M Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8A
8x100M Ethernet optical

interface board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1ETF8
8x100M Ethernet twistedpair interface board

N1ETF8A
8x100M Ethernet twistedpair interface board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1ETS8
8x10/100M Ethernet twisted

pair interface switching
board

1.1.1.1.25 ATM Boards

Table 5-8 lists all ATM boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of ATM boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1ADL4,
N1IDL4
1xSTM-4 ATM service

processing board

N1ADQ1,
N1IDQ1
4xSTM-1 ATM service

processing board

1.1.1.1.26 RPR Boards

Table 5-9 lists all PRP boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of RPR boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N2EGR2
2xGE ring processing board

N2EMR0
12xFE and 1xGE ring

processing board

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
47

System
1.1.1.1.27 SAN/Video Boards

Table 5-10 lists all SAN/video boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of SAN/video boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1VST4
4-port video service

transparent transmission
board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1MST4
4-port multi-service
transparent transmission
board

1.1.1.1.28 WDM Boards

Table 5-11 lists all WDM boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of WDM boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
TN11CMR4
4-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing board

TN11CMR2,
TN11MR2
N1MR2A

multiplexing board

N1MR2C

multiplexing board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1MR2B

multiplexing board
TN11MR2
2-port optical add/drop

multiplexing board

TN11MR4
4-port optical add/drop

multiplexing board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1CMD2
2-channel bidirectional
optical multiplexer and
demultiplexer board

N1LWX
Arbitrary bit rate

wavelength conversion
board

N1FIB
Filter isolating board

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
48

System
1.1.1.1.29 Auxiliary Boards

Table 5-12 lists all auxiliary boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of auxiliary boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
T1EOW
Orderwire processing board
OptiX OSN 7500
R1EOW
Orderwire processing board
T1AUX
System auxiliary interface

board
OptiX OSN 7500
N1AUX

board
OptiX OSN 3500
R1AUX,
R2AUX

board
R1AMU
Orderwire processing or
alarm cascading board
TN81FAN
Fan board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
N1FANA
Fan board (high power)
OptiX OSN 7500
N1FAN
Fan board
OptiX OSN 3500
R1FAN
Fan board
1.1.1.1.30 Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards

Table 5-13 lists all optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards and their
applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
N1BPA
One-channel power
amplifier and one-channel
pre-amplifier board

N2BPA
One-channel power
amplifier and one-channel
pre-amplifier board

OptiX OSN 1500B
N1COA,
61COA, 62COA
Case-shaped optical
amplifier

N1DCU
Dispersion compensation
board
N2DCU
board

OptiX OSN 3500
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
49

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
TN11OBU1
Optical booster amplifier

board
TN12OBU1

board
OptiX OSN 7500 II
TN12OBU2

board
N1BA2
Two-channel power
amplifier board

N1RPC01
Forward Raman driving

board (external)

N1RPC02
Backward Raman driving

board (external)

1.1.1.1.31 Power Boards

Table 5-14 lists all power boards and their applicable products.
Figure 1.1 List of power boards
Board
Description
Applicable Product
TN81PIU
OptiX OSN 7500 II
UPM
Uninterruptible power
module

T1PIU

(supporting standard
subracks)
OptiX OSN 7500
T1PIUB

(supporting type III
subracks)
OptiX OSN 7500
N1PIUA

(supporting 1100 W
enhanced subrack.)
OptiX OSN 3500
N1PIUB

(supporting type III
subracks)
OptiX OSN 3500
R1PIU

(supporting OptiX OSN
1500B subrack)
OptiX OSN 1500B
R1PIUA

(supporting OptiX OSN
1500A subrack)
OptiX OSN 1500A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
50

System
Board
Description
Applicable Product
R1PIUB

(supporting enhanced OptiX
OSN 1500B subrack)
OptiX OSN 1500B
R1PIUC

(supporting enhanced OptiX
OSN 1500A subrack)
OptiX OSN 1500A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
51

System
6 Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards
Cross-Connect Boards and System Control

Boards
About This Chapter

This topic describes the system control boards and the cross-connect boards that have
different capacities.
6.1 SXCSA
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and
technical specifications of the SXCSA (super cross-connect and synchronous timing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the SXCSA.
6.2 PSXCS(A)
technical specifications of the PSXCS(A) (super dual-plane cross-connect and timing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PSXCS(A).
6.3 GSCC
technical specifications of the GSCC (system control and communication board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the GSCC.
6.1 SXCSA
technical specifications of the SXCSA (super cross-connect and synchronous timing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the SXCSA.
6.1.1 Version Description

The SXCSA is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
6.1.2 Application
The SXCSA is a super cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The SXCSA provides
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
52

System
service grooming and clock input/output functions in the OptiX OSN system.
The cross-connect and synchronous timing board provides the other boards in the system with
the timing information and grooms the services between line boards or tributary boards.
Figure 6-1 shows the position of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board in the
OptiX OSN system.
Figure 1.1 Position of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board in the system
Line
Line
SDH
Cross-connect and timing board
PDH
RPR
FE/GE
ATM
SAN
6.1.3 Functions and Features

The SXCSA grooms services and inputs/outputs clock signals.
1.1.1.1.32 Cross-Connect Unit

Table 6-1 provides the functions and features of the cross-connect unit of the SXCSA.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the cross-connect unit of the SXCSA
Function and
Feature
SXCSA
Basic functions
Realizes 200 Gbit/s higher order cross-connection at the VC-4 level,

20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connection at the VC-3 or VC-12 level,
and 155 Gbit/s access.
Service processing
Supports the flexible service grooming and supports the fully

non-blocking cross-connect, multicast, and broadcast services.
Enables the communication between the SXCSA and the other

boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
53

System
Function and
Feature
SXCSA
Supports the tact switch and performs the protection switching

without interrupting services.
Supports the SNCP protection at the VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-416c, VC-4-64c, VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, and AU-3 levels.
Supports VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, and VC-4-64c

concatenation services.
Supports a maximum of 40 linear MSP groups.
Supports a maximum of 12 ring MSP groups.
Supports a maximum of 2016 SNCP groups.
Supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP groups.
Supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups.
Protection schemes
Supports the 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing
Units (non-revertive, by default).
Maintenance
features
Supports the PRBS function in the line direction.
1.1.1.1.33 Clock Unit

Table 6-2 provides the functions and features of the clock unit of the SXCSA.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the clock unit of the SXCSA
Function and
Feature
SXCSA
Basic functions
Provides the standard system synchronization clock.
Other functions
Supports the processing of the S1 byte to realize the clock

protection switching.
Supports the extraction, insertion, and management of the SSM

and clock ID.
Provides the real-time clock (RTC).
Input and output
Through the AUX board:
Inputs/Outputs two-channel 2 MHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals

(75-ohm) and allows selection of external timing sources.

6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The SXCSA consists of the synchronous timing module, cross-connect module,
communication and control module, and power module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
54

System
Figure 6-2 shows the functional block diagram of the SXCSA.

Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SXCSA
Matrix
HPC
622 Mbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s
SNCP
LPC
Service unit
Cross-connect module
T0
Communication
and conrol
module
Communication
Synchronous
timing module
(SETS)
T1
T2
T3
SETG
Clock external
output
T4
T0
Frame header
T0 (reference clock)
38 MHz
OSC
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
SCCunit
SDH unit
PDH unit
AUX
AUX
Service unit
Service unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
SETG: synchronous equipment timing generation function
The functional modules of the cross-connect and synchronous timing boards are described
below.
1.1.1.1.34 Synchronous Timing Module

The synchronous timing module uses the centralized timing allocation mode as the clock
mode. The synchronous timing module also selects one clock source from reference clock
sources as the reference clock for the timing module. The reference clock sources are from the
line board, the tributary board, or the external synchronous clock source. The synchronous
clock source and 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz external synchronous clock source are then generated.
The precise 38 MHz oscillator ensures that the reference clock complies with ITU-T standards
in free-run mode.
The SDH clock (SETS) can work in the following modes:
Lock mode
Hold-over mode
Free-run mode
When working in lock mode, the SETS extracts the clock from three types of timing signals:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
55

System
Timing signal (T1) from the STM-N line
Timing signal (T2) from the PDH line
Reference signal (T3) from the external synchronous clock source (2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s)
The timing module outputs the following timing signals:
T0, system clock
T4, external timing output signal (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz)
1.1.1.1.35 Cross-Connect Module

The cross-connect module consists of two parts:
SNCP module, which tests relative alarms and reports the alarms to the software to
trigger the protection switching such as the SNCP switching and MSP switching.
Higher order and lower order cross-connect module, which performs the functions of
higher order and lower order cross-connect units.
1.1.1.1.36 Communication and Control Module

The communication and control module is a sub-system provided by the pinch board. It
consists of the CPU, register, Ethernet port, HDLC controller, FPGA loading controller, and
bus driver. This module is connected to external circuits through buses to manage and
configure other units of the boards.
1.1.1.1.37 Power Module

It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board
require.
6.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SXCSA has indicators and a bar code.
1.1.1.1.38 Diagram of the Front Panel

Figure 6-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SXCSA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
56

System
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SXCSA
SXCSA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SYNC
SXCSA
1.1.1.1.39 Indicators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Synchronization clock status indicator (SYNC) two colors (red and green)
For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see 23 Indicators.
1.1.1.1.40 Interfaces
The front panel of the SXCSA has no interface. The AUX provides the SXCSA with the
external clock interface that can be set in 2048 kHz mode or 2048 kbit/s mode. The AUX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
57

System
provides two BITS clock interfaces with 120-ohm or 75-ohm impedance. For details, see
AUX.
6.1.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches

The SXCSA does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
6.1.7 Valid Slots

The SXCSA must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SXCSA cannot
work normally.
The SXCSA can be installed in slots 9 and 10 in the subrack. By default, slot 9 houses the
active board and slot 10 houses the standby board.
6.1.8 Feature Code

The SXCSA does not have the feature code.
6.1.9 Configuring and Commissioning the Board

After you select a correct board, you need to configure and commission the board. The
following tasks need to be performed: checking the hardware of the board, configuring the
board, commissioning the board, and checking the operation of the board.
1.1.1.1.41 Checking the Hardware of the Board

Step 1 Required: Check the hardware of the board.
The labels on the front panel of the board must be correct and clear.
The daughter board of the board must be properly installed.
All the components on both surfaces of the board must be available and intact.
Step 2 Required: Check whether the active board and standby board are installed in the correct slots.
Step 3 Required: Check whether the board is properly installed. The board must be pushed to the
bottom of the subrack along the guide rails, and the front panel of the board must be properly
locked. For the method for installing a board, see Replacing Boards Onsite.
Step 4 Required: Check the status of the indicators of the board when and after the board is powered
on. For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see 23 Indicators.
Step 5 Required: Check whether the version of the board software matches the version of the NE
software and the version of the software. Ensure that the version of the board software is
correct.
Step 6 Required: Check the micro switch of the board. When the front panels of the active and
standby cross-connect boards are locked, the active/standby switching can be realized if you
unlock the front panel of the active board.
----End
1.1.1.1.42 Configuring the Board

Step 1 Add the logical board. For details, see Adding Boards.
Step 7 Set parameters for the XCS on the . The following main parameters need to be set:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
58

System
Clock synchronization status
Clock source priority
Phase-locked source output by external clock
Clock source switching
Clock subnet configuration
For information about more parameters and the method for setting the parameters, see
Configuring Clocks.
----End
1.1.1.1.43 Commissioning the Board

Step 1 Optional: Test the frequency accuracy of the free-run clock. For details, see 27.5 Testing the
Frequency Accuracy of the Free-Run Clock.
Step 8 Optional: Test the clock holdover accuracy. For details, see 27.6 Testing the Clock Holdover
Accuracy.
Step 9 Required: Test the protection switching of the cross-connection. For details, see Testing the
1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect and Timing Board.
----End
1.1.1.1.44 Checking the Operation of the Board

Step 1 Required: Check the status of the indicators on the front panel of the board to ensure that the
board starts to work normally. When all the indicators are on and green, the board operates
normally. For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see 23.2 Alarm Indicators on the
Boards.
Step 10 Required: Query the alarms and performance events of the board. Modify the connections or
configurations of the board according to the alarms and performance events until the alarms
are cleared. For the method for querying the alarms and performance events of a board, see
Viewing the Current Alarms.
----End
6.1.10 Parameter Settings

You can set parameters for the SXCSA by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SXCSA by using the U2000:
For the description of each parameter, see 26.8 Cross-Connect and Timing Units.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
59

System
6.1.11 Maintaining the Board

This topic describes the alarms and faults that may occur when the board operates. This topic
also provides the methods and precautions to be taken for rectifying the faults.
1.1.1.1.45 Troubleshooting
Table 6-3 lists the faults that occur on the SXCSA frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SXCSA frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service unavailable
The type of logical

board is not
consistent with the
type of the board
that is installed on
the NE.
The service
configuration is
incorrect.
The running status

of the other boards
on the NE is
incorrect.
The clock source

priority table is
incorrectly
configured.
Clock tracing failure
Troubleshooting Method
See 27.2 Troubleshooting Service
Unavailability.
See 27.3 Troubleshooting the

Clock Tracing Failure.
1.1.1.1.46 Replacing the Board

For information on how to replace the SXCSA, see Replace a Cross-Connect and Timing
Board.
See General Precautions to get familiar with the precautions to be taken for replacing a board before you
replace the board.
6.1.12 List of Alarms

This topic lists the alarms that may occur when the board operates. The alarms are reported
according to the logical board on the .
6.1.12.1 Alarms of N1SXCSA

APS_FAIL
APS_INDI
BD_STATUS
CHIP_FAIL
BUS_ERR
CHIP_ABN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
60

System
EXT_SYNC_LOS
CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE
COMMUN_FAIL
HSC_UNAVAIL
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
LPS_UNI_BI_M
K1_K2_M
K2_M
NO_BD_SOFT
LTI
MS_APS_INDI_EX
PRBS_TEST
OOL
POWER_ABNORMAL
S1_SYN_CHANGE
SWITCH_DISABLE
SYN_BAD
SYNC_C_LOS
SYNC_F_M_SWITCH
SYNC_LOCKOFF
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
W_OFFLINE
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
W_R_FAIL
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
TIME_FORCE_SWITCH
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
TIME_NO_TRACE_MOD
E
OTH_HARD_FAIL
TIME_LOS
EXT_TIME_LOC
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
OTH_BD_STATUS
PATCH_ERR
6.1.13 List of Performance Events

None.
6.1.14 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the SXCSA include the cross-connect capacity, clock access
capability, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
1.1.1.1.47 Cross-Connect Capacity

Item
SXCSA
Higher order cross-connect capacity (Gbit/s)
200
Lower order cross-connect capacity (Gbit/s)
20
Access capacity (Gbit/s)
155
1.1.1.1.48 Clock Access Capability

The clock access capability of the SXCSA is as follows:
External input clock: two channels of 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz external clock signals
External output clock: two channels of 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz external clock signals
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
61

System
1.1.1.1.49 Mechanical Specifications

The mechanical specifications of the SXCSA are as follows:
Dimensions (mm): 40.0 (W) x 235.2 (D) x 261.4 (H)
Weight (kg): 2.2
1.1.1.1.50 Power Consumption

The maximum power consumption of the SXCSA at room temperature (25C) is 63 W.
6.2 PSXCS(A)
technical specifications of the PSXCS(A) (super dual-plane cross-connect and timing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PSXCS(A).

PSXCS(A) is available in the following functional versions: N3PSXCSA, N1PSXCS and
N2PSXCSA. The N1PSXCS and N2PSXCSA are discontinued.
Table 6-4 provides version description of PSXCS(A).
Figure 1.1 Versions of the PSXCS(A) board
Item
Description
Functional versions
PSXCS(A) is available in the following functional versions:

N1PSXCS, N2PSXCSA, and N3PSXCSA.
Differences
Basic functions: cross-connect capacity.
Service processing: the number of SNCP protection

groups.
Others:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
N1PSXCS boards cannot work

with single-slot packet data
boards.
N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCSA
boards configured as
N1PSXCS cannot work with
single-slot packet data boards.
N2PSXCSA boards configured

as N2PSXCSA cannot work
with two-slot packet data
boards.
N3PSXCSA boards configured

as N3PSXCSA or N2PSXCSA
cannot work with two-slot
packet data boards.
The N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA
supports only distributed
62

System
Item
Description
MPLS OAM, whereas the
N3PSXCSA supports
distributed MPLS OAM,
centralized MPLS OAM, and
MPLS-TP OAM.
Substitution
N2PSXCSA can substitute for N1PSXCS and N1SXCSA.

N3PSXCSA can substitute for N2PSXCSA, N1PSXCS, and
N1SXCSA.
6.2.2 Application
The PSXCS(A) is a super cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The PSXCS(A)
provides service grooming and clock input/output functions in the OptiX OSN system.
The cross-connect and synchronous timing board provides the timing information to the other
boards in the system and grooms the services between SDH line boards, packet boards, or
tributary boards.
Figure 6-4 shows the position of The cross-connect and synchronous timing board in the
system.
Figure 1.1 Position of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board in the system
Packet data
SDH/PDH
service
Higher order/
Lower order
cross-connect
unit
Packet data
Clock
unit
Packet data
processing
unit
Auxillary
unit
PIU
Auxillary
interface
-48 V/-60 V
XCS

The PSXCS(A) board grooms services and inputs/outputs clock signals.
1.1.1.1.51 Cross-Connect Unit

Table 6-5 provides the functions and features of the cross-connect unit of the PSXCS(A)
board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
63

System
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the cross-connect unit of the PSXCS(A)
Functions
and Features
Description
Basic
functions
Cross-Connect Capacity
N1PSXCS
N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCS
A
Higher order crossconnect capacity (Gbit/s)
200
200
Lower order crossconnect capacity (Gbit/s)
20
20
Packet switching capacity

(Gbit/s)
80
160
Service
access
capacity
TDM mode
(Gbit/s)
155
155
Packet
mode
(Gbit/s)
60
100
Service
processing
Supports the flexible service grooming and supports the fully nonblocking cross-connect, multicast, and broadcast services.
Communicates with other boards.
Supports the tact switch and performs the protection switching without
service interruption.
Supports the SNCP protection at the levels of VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC4-16c, VC-4-64c, VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, and AU-3.
Supports VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, and AU-3 services.
Supports VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, and VC-4-64c concatenation

services.
Supports a maximum of 40 linear MSP groups.
Supports a maximum of 12 ring MSP groups.
The N1PSXCS board supports a maximum of 8064 SNCP pairs.
The N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCSA board supports a maximum of 8904

SNCP pairs.
Supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP pairs.
Supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP pairs.
Protection
Scheme
Supports 1+1 hot standby. The default protection mode is the nonrevertive switching mode.
Maintenance
features
Others
Supports querying and reporting the working temperature of the crossconnect and timing board and the entire equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
64

System
1.1.1.1.52 Clock Unit

Table 6-6 provides the functions and features of the clock unit of the PSXCS(A) board.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the clock unit of the PSXCS(A) board
Functions and
Features
Description
Basic functions
Provides the standard system synchronization clock.
Other functions
Supports the processing of the S1 byte to perform clock

protection switching.
Supports the extraction, insertion, and processing of the SSM

and clock ID.
Supports IEEE 1588v2 time and clock synchronization.
N2PSXCSA and N3PSXCSA boards support frequency

deviation detection.
Input and output
Through the AUX board:



The PSXCS(A) consists of the higher order cross-connect matrix, lower order cross-connect
matrix, packet cross-connect matrix, communication and control module, clock module, and
power module.
Figure 6-5 shows the functional block diagram of the PSXCS(A).
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PSXCS(A)
Backpl ane
Lower order crossconnect matri x
Hi gher order
cross-connect
matri x
Packet crossconnect matri x
Cl ock
modul e
Servi ce uni t/SCC

uni t/AUX
Communi cati on and

control modul e
+3. 3 V
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The board and system
Power
modul e
Fuse
SCC uni t
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

Copyright Huawei
65

System
1.1.1.1.53 Higher Order Cross-Connect Matrix

Realizes higher order cross-connection at the VC-4 level.
1.1.1.1.54 Lower Order Cross-Connect Matrix

Realizes lower order cross-connection at the VC-3 or VC-12 level.
1.1.1.1.55 Packet Cross-Connect Matrix

Cross-connects the packet data.

Communicates with the SCC unit and other boards, ensures communication with the other
boards when the GSCC cannot be detected, and generates the other control signals for the
PSXCS and system.
1.1.1.1.57 Clock Module

The clock module performs the following functions:
Traces external clock sources, line clock sources, or tributary clock sources, and provides
the PSXCS and the system with a synchronization clock source.
Through system timing, provides the nodes in the data stream of the system with the
clock signals that have proper frequency and phase. In this way, the components at each
node can meet the requirements regarding data setup and data holding during data
receiving.
Provides the system with the frame indication signal that is used to indicate the position
of the frame header in the data.
Supports the IEEE 1588v2 clock.

The power module converts the accessed DC voltage into the DC voltages that the modules of
the PSXCS require.
6.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PSXCS(A) has indicators and a bar code.

Figure 6-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PSXCS(A).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
66

System
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PSXCS(A)
PSXCS
PSXCSA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SYNC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SYNC
PSXCS
PSXCSA
N1PSXCS
N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCSA
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Synchronization clock status indicator (SYNC) two colors (red and green)
For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see 23.2 Alarm Indicators on the Boards.
The front panel of the PSXCS(A) has no interface. The AUX provides the PSXCS(A) with the
external clock interface that can be set in 2048 kHz mode or 2048 kbit/s mode. The AUX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
67

System
provides two BITS clock interfaces with 120-ohm or 75-ohm impedance. For details, see the
topic that describes the interfaces of the AUX.

The PSXCS(A) does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
6.2.7 Valid Slots

The PSXCS(A) can be installed in slots 9 and 10 in the subrack.
By default, slot 9 is the slot for the working board, and slot 10 is the slot for the protection
board.
6.2.8 Feature Code

The PSXCS(A) does not have the feature code.


correct.
Step 6 Required: Check the micro switch of the board. When the front panels of the active and
standby cross-connect boards are locked, the active/standby switching can be realized if you
unlock the front panel of the active board.
----End

Step 1 Add the logical board. For details, see Adding Boards.
Step 7 Set parameters for the XCS on the U2000. The following main parameters need to be set:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
68

System
For information about more parameters and the method for setting the parameters, see
Configuring Clocks.
----End

Step 1 Optional: Test the frequency accuracy of the free-run clock. For details, see 27.5 Testing the
Frequency Accuracy of the Free-Run Clock.
Step 8 Optional: Test the clock holdover accuracy. For details, see 27.6 Testing the Clock Holdover
Accuracy.
Step 9 Required: Test the protection switching of the cross-connection. For details, see Testing the
1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect and Timing Board.
----End

Boards.
----End

You can set parameters for the PSXCS(A) by using the U2000.
You can set the following principal parameters for the PSXCS(A) by using the U2000:
For more parameters and the description of the parameters, see 26.8 Cross-Connect and
Timing Units.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
69

System

This topic describes the faults that may occur when the board operates. This topic also
provides the methods and precautions to be taken for rectifying the faults.
Table 6-7 lists the faults that occur on the PSXCS(A) frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PSXCS(A) frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service unavailable
The type of logical

board is not
consistent with the
type of the board
that is installed on
the NE.
The service
configuration is
incorrect.
The running status

of the other boards
on the NE is
incorrect.
The clock source

priority table is
incorrectly
configured.
Clock tracing failure
See 27.2 Troubleshooting Service
Unavailability.
See 27.3 Troubleshooting the

Clock Tracing Failure.

For information on how to replace the PSXCS(A), see Replace a Cross-Connect and Timing
Board.
replace the board.

6.2.12.1 Alarms of N1PSCXS(A)

APS_FAIL
APS_INDI
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BUS_ERR
CHIP_ABN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
70

System
CHIP_FAIL
CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE
COMMUN_FAIL
EXT_SYNC_LOS
PATCH_ERR
HARD_BAD
HSC_UNAVAIL
K1_K2_M
K2_M
LPS_UNI_BI_M
LTI
MS_APS_INDI_EX
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
APS_MANUAL_STOP
OOL
OTH_BD_STATUS
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
POWER_ABNORMAL
PRBS_TEST
S1_SYN_CHANGE
SWITCH_DISABLE
SYN_BAD
SYNC_C_LOS
SYNC_F_M_SWITCH
SYNC_LOCKOFF
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
TIME_FORCE_SWITCH
TIME_LOS
TIME_NO_TRACE_MOD
E
W_OFFLINE
W_R_FAIL
EXT_TIME_LOC
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE

APS_FAIL
APS_INDI
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BUS_ERR
CHIP_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
CLK_NO_TRAC
E_MODE
COMMUN_FAIL
EXT_SYNC_LOS
PATCH_ERR
HARD_BAD
HSC_UNAVAIL
K1_K2_M
K2_M
LPS_UNI_BI_M
LTI
MS_APS_INDI_EX
NO_BD_SOFT
CES_LPS_UNI_B
I_M
APS_MANUAL_STOP
PATCH_NOT_CO
NFIRM
OOL
OTH_BD_STATUS
PATCHFILE_NO
TEXIST
POWER_ABNOR
MAL
PRBS_TEST
S1_SYN_CHAN
GE
SWITCH_DISAB
LE
SYN_BAD
SYNC_C_LOS
SYNC_F_M_SWI
TCH
SYNC_LOCKOFF
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
71

System
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
TIME_FORCE_SWITCH
TIME_LOS
TIME_NO_TRA
CE_MODE
W_OFFLINE
W_R_FAIL
EXT_TIME_LOC
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
TIME_NOT_SUP
PORT
CES_K1_K2_M
CES_K2_M
CES_APS_INDI
CES_APS_FAIL
CES_MS_APS_I
NDI_EX

APS_FAIL
APS_INDI
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BUS_ERR
CHIP_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE
COMMUN_FAIL
EXT_SYNC_LOS
PATCH_ERR
HARD_BAD
HSC_UNAVAIL
K1_K2_M
K2_M
LPS_UNI_BI_M
LTI
MS_APS_INDI_EX
NO_BD_SOFT
OOL
OTH_BD_STATUS
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
POWER_ABNORMAL
PRBS_TEST
S1_SYN_CHANGE
SWITCH_DISABLE
SYN_BAD
SYNC_C_LOS
SYNC_F_M_SWITCH
SYNC_LOCKOFF
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
TIME_FORCE_SWITCH
TIME_LOS
TIME_NO_TRACE_MODE
W_OFFLINE
W_R_FAIL
EXT_TIME_LOC
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
CES_K1_K2_M
CES_K2_M
CES_APS_INDI
CES_APS_FAIL
CES_MS_APS_INDI_EX
CES_LPS_UNI_BI_M
APS_MANUAL_STOP
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
ETH_APS_LOST
ETH_APS_PATH_MISMAT
CH
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAI
L
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMAT
CH
MPLS_PW_AIS
MPLS_PW_BDI
MPLS_PW_Excess
MPLS_PW_LOCV
MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
72

System
MPLS_PW_RDI
MPLS_PW_SD
MPLS_PW_SF
MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG
MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP
MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER
MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMA
TCH
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMER
GE
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAI
L
MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXP
MEG
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPM
EP
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPP
ER
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKN
OWN
PWAPS_LOST
PWAPS_PATH_MISMATC
H
PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATC
H
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADE
D
MPLS_PW_LCK
MPLS_PW_LOCK
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCK
MPLS_PW_CSF
TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE

None.

The technical specifications of the PSXCS(A) include the cross-connect capacity, clock
access capability, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
1.1.1.1.68 Cross-Connect Capacity

Item
N1PSXCS
N2PSXCSA/N3PSXC
SA
Higher order cross-connect capacity

(Gbit/s)
200
200
Lower order cross-connect capacity

(Gbit/s)
20
20
Packet switching capability (Gbit/s)
80
160
Access
capacity
TDM mode (Gbit/s)
155
155
Packet mode (Gbit/s)
60
100
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
73

System
1.1.1.1.69 Clock Access Capability

The clock access capability of the PSXCS(A) is as follows:
External input clock:
one channel of 75-ohm 2 MHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals
External output clock:
1.1.1.1.70 External Time Access Capability

The external time access capability of the PSXCS(A) board is as follows:
External input time: one channel of 1PPS+TOD
External output time: one channel of 1PPS+TOD

The mechanical specifications of the N1PSXCS are as follows:
Weight (kg): 2.1
The mechanical specifications of the N2PSXCSA are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.2
The mechanical specifications of the N3PSXCSA are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.5

The maximum power consumption of the N1PSXCS at room temperature (25C) is 90 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N2PSXCSA at room temperature (25C) is 80 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N3PSXCSA at room temperature (25C) is 74 W.
6.3 GSCC
technical specifications of the GSCC (system control and communication board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the GSCC.

The GSCC is available in several functional versions. The functions provided by the
functional versions are different.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
74

System
Table 6-8 describes the versions of the GSCC.

Figure 1.1 Versions of the GSCC
Item
Description
Function
al
versions
The GSCC is available in the following functional versions: N4 and N6.
Differen
ces
Packet performance specifications differ between the N4GSCC and the

N6GSCC. For details, see Packet System Performance.
Substitut
ion
The GSCC boards of different versions cannot directly substitute for each other.
If the GSCC of a later version needs to substitute for the GSCC of an earlier
version, the NE software needs to be upgraded accordingly.
6.3.2 Application
The GSCC is the intelligent system control board. The GSCC works with the to manage the
boards on the equipment and realize the communication between different pieces of
equipment.
Figure 6-7 shows the position of the GSCC in the system.
Figure 1.1 Position of the GSCC in the system
Auxiliary interface
Auxiliary unit
SCC unit
Other boards
PIU
-48 V/-60 V

The GSCC supports the system control, orderwire, communication, and system power supply
monitoring.
Table 6-9 provides the functions and features of the GSCC.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
75

System
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the GSCC

Function and
Feature
GSCC
Basic functions
Performs the service configuration function and service grooming

function, monitors the service performance, and collects information
about performance events and alarms.
Interfaces
Provides the 10M/100M Ethernet port, which is used for

communicating with the NMS. The Ethernet port is accessed
through the AUX.
Provides the F&f interface, which is accessed through the AUX and
is used to manage the COA.
Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous data port F1, which is accessed

through the AUX.
Provides the RS232 OAM interface, which is used for connecting a

PC or workstation, and supports the remote maintenance by using a
modem that uses the RS232 DCE interface. The OAM interface is
accessed through the AUX.
DCC
communication
Processes a maximum of 160 DCCs (D1D3). In this manner, the link

is provided for transmitting the NM information.
Overhead
processing
Processes the E1, E2, F1, and serial1serial4 bytes.
Clock function
Provides the RTC.
Supports the high-precision clock synchronization feature, and

complies with the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol. The N4GSCC receives
the time information through interfaces S1S4 of the AUX. The S1,
S3 and ALMI4 interfaces receive the first channel of time
information, and the S2, S4 and ALMI4 interfaces receive the
second channel of time information.
Supports service performance monitoring and collects information

about performance events and alarms.
Provides 16 alarm inputs and four alarm outputs through the AUX.
Provides one 4-output alarm cascading port through the AUX.
Controls the four cabinet indicators through the AUX.
Supports intelligent fan speed control and manages the fan alarms.
Supports simulation package loading and diffused loading.
Supports the function of detecting whether a packet data board is in

position.
Power supply
management
Supports the monitoring of the 48 V or 60 V power supply.
Supports the in-service check function for the PIU board and
supports the failure check function for the lightning protection
module of the PIU.
Protection
schemes
Supports the 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit. When the active board
is faulty, services are switched to the standby board automatically.
Alarms and
maintenance
features
NOTE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
76

System
Function and
Feature
GSCC
If GSCC boards are used in packet systems, two N4GSCC/N6GSCC boards of
the same version need to be configured in 1+1 backup mode.
Packet function
The N4GSCC and N6GSCC support the packet function.

For information about the performance of the packet system, see Packet
System Performance.

The GSCC consists of the communication and control module, OHP module, and power
module.
Figure 6-8 shows the functional block diagram of the GSCC.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the GSCC
Backplane
Other
units
V1
V2
Phone
S1-S4
F1
OH
manager
OHP
OHP module
Reset
ALM CUT
Boot
ROM
RAM
Communication
and control
module
AUX interface
16-input/4-output
alarm control
ETH port
OAM interface
F&f interface
COM interface
NVRAM
Flash
PIU
interface
+3.3 V
Power
module
AUX power monitor

and reset control
AUX unit
Input/Output alarm
ETH
OAM
F&f
COM
Control of subrack
indicators
Inter-board
communication
Power monitor
PIU test
Other
units
PIU unit
-48 V/-60 V

The communication and control module controls and manages the boards, realizes the
communication between NEs, manages the network, and performs other functions.
The system control module communicates with the boards in the subrack, manages the
boards, monitors the performance events and alarms of the boards, collects the status
information about the other functional modules, and performs the corresponding
management operations.
The communication and control module provides the function that NEs communicate
with each other through DCCs. The communication module transfers the OAM
information to other NEs through DCCs, reports the alarms and performance data of the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
77

System
equipment to the network management terminal, and responds to the commands issued
by the network management terminal.
The communication and control module configures and operates the NE.
The service protection is realized by the cross-connect and timing board. When services are switched,
the switching event is reported to the GSCC, which then reports the switching event to the NMS.
When the communication and control module fails, the following situations occur:
Communication failure
The communication and control module cannot manage the boards in the subrack,
monitor the performance events and alarms of the boards, collect the status information
about the other functional modules, or perform the corresponding management
operations.
DCC failure
The communication and control module cannot transfer the OAM information to other
NEs through the local NE, report the alarms and performance data of the equipment to
the network management terminal, or respond to the commands issued by the network
management terminal.
1.1.1.1.74 OHP Module
Receives overhead signals from the line slot.
Processes such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serial14serial
Sends overhead signals to the line board.
Provides the following external interfaces:
One orderwire interface
Two SDH NNI audio interfaces
Interface F1
Broadcast data ports serial14serial
Figure 6-9 shows the orderwire bytes in the SDH frame.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
78

System
Figure 1.2 Position of these orderwire bytes in the SDH frame

A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
Serial 1 Serial2
AU_PTR
B2
B2
D4
Serial 4
B2
K1
K2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
Serial3
E2

require.
6.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the GSCC has indicators and a bar code.

Figure 6-10 shows the appearance of the N4GSCC/N6GSCC.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
79

System
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N4GSCC/N6GSCC
GSCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
ALM CUT
GSCC
48 V power supply indicator of channel A (PWRA) two colors (red and green)
48 V power supply indicator of channel B (PWRB) two colors (red and green)
+3.3 V backup power supply indicator of the system (PWRC) two colors (red and
green)
Alarm mute indicator (ALMC) one color (yellow)

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
80

System
The front panel of the GSCC has no interface. The AUX provides interfaces for the GSCC.
For details, see AUX.
The front panel of the N4GSCC/N6GSCC has one warm reset switch and one alarm cut
switch. Table 6-10 describes the types and usage of the switches
Figure 1.1 Types and usage of the switches of the GSCC
Switch
Type of
Switch
Usage
RESET
Warm reset
switch
Press the switch to perform a warm reset for the SCC unit.
ALM CUT
Alarm cut
switch
Press the switch to mute the alarm. Press the switch for
five seconds to mute the alarm permanently. Press the
switch again for five seconds to resume the alarm sound.

The GSCC has jumpers, which are used to set the input voltage and running state of the
equipment.
The jumpers are used for test and maintenance. Do not change the setting of jumpers at
random. Otherwise, the board may become faulty.
1.1.1.1.79 N4GSCC
Figure 6-11 shows the layout of the J2101, J7100, J3201, and J3202 jumpers on the N4GSCC.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
81

System
Figure 1.1 Position of the jumpers of the N4GSCC
Power
module
J3202
J3201
CPU
J7100
J2101
1
2
3
Table 6-11 lists the jumpers of the N4GSCC.

Figure 1.1 Jumpers of the N4GSCC
Jumper
Function
Description
J2101
To enable the
battery
12: If jumper bits (positions) 1 and 2 are capped, the

database and clock are cleared.
battery is enabled. It is the default state.
J7100
To set the running

state of the board
Jumper J7100 is a group of two-pin jumpers located

in five rows. The jumper in the lowest row is reserved
and does not need to be set. In the case of the jumpers
in the top four rows, the value of a jumper bit is
defined as follows:
If a jumper bit is not capped, the value is 0.
If a jumper bit is capped, the value is 1.
The jumper bit values are queued from bottom to top
and from the higher bit to the lower bit, and form a
four-bit binary number. For details, refer to Table 612.
J3202 and
J3201
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
To set the input

voltage of the
equipment
When the jumpers are not capped, the equipment is

supplied with the 60 V power.
When the jumpers are capped, the equipment is
supplied with the 48 V power. It is the default state.

Copyright Huawei
82

System
Set J3202 and J3201 correctly based on the power voltage provided in the
telecommunications room. If J3202 and J3201 are set incorrectly, the POWER_ABNORMAL
alarm is generated.
Figure 1.2 Jumper J7100
Value
Description
0b0000
Indicates the running state when the watchdog is started. It is the

default state.
0b0001
Changes to the self-test state of the SDRAM Burst.
0b0011
Indicates the commissioning state.
0b0100
Indicates the running state when the watchdog is stopped.
0b0101
The software is in the BIOS state. The SCC does not work even
though the NE software exists. The IP address of the parameter area,
however, is not changed, which is for querying.
0b0110
The software enters the exhibition mode.
0b1001
Indicates the running state when the watchdog is started.
0b1011
Erases the database.
0b1100
Erases the NE software, including the patches.
0b1101
Erases the database and NE software, including the patches.
0b1110
Erases the database, NE software, and NE.ini file.
0b1111
Erases the extended BIOS and system parameter area in the file
system and flash memory.
1.1.1.1.80 N6GSCC
Figure 6-12 shows the layout of the J18, J11, J30, and J31 jumpers on the N6GSCC.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
83

System
Figure 1.2 Position of the jumpers of the N6GSCC
Power
module
J30
321
J31
32 1
CPU
J18
123
J11
Table 6-13 lists the jumpers of the N6GSCC.

Figure 1.1 Jumpers of the N6GSCC
Jumper
Function
Description
J18
To enable the
battery

database and clock are cleared.
battery is enabled. It is the default state.
J11
To set the running

state of the board
Jumper J11 is a group of two-pin jumpers located in

five rows. The jumper in the left-most row is reserved
and does not need to be set. In the case of the jumpers
in the right four rows, the value of a jumper bit is
defined as follows:
If a jumper bit is not capped, the value is 0.
If a jumper bit is capped, the value is 1.
The jumper bit values are queued from left to right
and from the higher bit to the lower bit, and form a
four-bit binary number. For details, refer to Table 614.
J30 and J31

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
To set the input

voltage of the
23 or jumpers are not capped: If jumper bits

(positions) 2 and 3 are capped or jumpers are not

Copyright Huawei
84

System
Jumper
Function
Description
equipment
capped, the equipment is supplied with the 60 V

power.
equipment is supplied with the 48 V power. It is the
default state.
Set J30 and J31 correctly based on the power voltage provided in the telecommunications
room. If J30 and J31 are set incorrectly, the POWER_ABNORMAL alarm is generated.
Figure 1.2 Jumper J11
Value
Description
0b0000
Indicates the running state when the watchdog is started. It is the

default state.
0b0001
Changes to the self-test state of the SDRAM Burst.
0b0011
Indicates the commissioning state.
0b0100
Indicates the running state when the watchdog is stopped.
0b0101
The software is in the BIOS state. The SCC does not work even
though the NE software exists. The IP address of the parameter area,
however, is not changed, which is for querying.
0b0110
The software enters the exhibition mode.
0b1001
Indicates the running state when the watchdog is started.
0b1011
Erases the database.
0b1100
Erases the NE software, including the patches.
0b1101
Erases the database and NE software, including the patches.
0b1110
Erases the database, NE software, and NE.ini file.
0b1111
Erases the extended BIOS and system parameter area in the file
system and flash memory.
6.3.7 Valid Slots

The GSCC must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the GSCC cannot work
normally.
The GSCC can be installed in slots 17 and 18 in the subrack. By default, slot 18 houses the
active board and slot 17 houses the standby board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
85

System
6.3.8 Feature Code

The GSCC does not have the feature code.


correct.
Step 6 Required: Check the status of the ALM switch.
1.
Press the switch to mute the current alarm sound.
2.
Press the switch for five seconds to mute the alarm sound permanently. In this case, the
alarm mute indicator (ALMC) turns on (in yellow).
3.
Press the switch again for five seconds to resume the alarm sound. In this case, the
ALMC indicator turns off.
----End

Step 1 Required: Add the logical board. For details, see Adding Boards.
Step 7 Required: If the parameter settings of the GSCC are available on the , download the
parameter settings to the GSCC. Otherwise, perform the following operations:
Set the NE ID. For details, see Setting the NE ID.
Set the NE name, date, and time. For details, see Setting the NE Name, Date, and Time.
----End

Step 1 Check the setting of the jumper that controls the debugging status of the board. For the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
86

System
description of the jumper, see 6.3.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches.

Step 8 Check and commission the circuit status on the data ports, including the F&f debugging serial
port and OAM NM port. For details, see 27.4 Configuring the F&f Debugging Serial Port and
OAM NM Port.
Step 9 Check the configurations of the data ports.
For the configuration of the broadcast data port, see Configuring the Broadcast Data
Service.
For the configuration of the F1 codirectional data port, see Configuring the F1 Data
Service.
----End

Boards.
----End

You can set parameters for the GSCC by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the GSCC by using the U2000:
NE ID
NE name, date, and time
F&f debugging serial port
OAM NM port
Broadcast data port
F1 data port

Table 6-15 lists the faults that occur on the GSCC frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
87

System
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the GSCC frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
ECC failure
The running status

of the board
becomes abnormal.
The optical fibers

are incorrectly
connected.
Power supply alarm
The jumper that

controls the input
voltage is incorrectly
set.
Connection failure
between the NMS
computer and the
equipment
An incorrect
network cable is
used to connect the
NMS computer to
the equipment.
The IP address of
the NMS computer
and the IP address
of the equipment are
not in the same
network segment.
Repetitive GSCC resets
The GSCC is faulty.
Check whether the running status

of the board is correct. See 23.2
Alarm Indicators on the Boards to
obtain the meanings of the status
of the indicators.
Check whether the optical fibers

are correctly connected.
For information on how to set the

jumper, see 6.3.6 Jumpers and DIP
Switches.
For information on the connection

of the network cable, see Checking
Connection Between the U2000
Computer and the Equipment.
Ensure that the IP address of the

NMS computer and the IP address
of the equipment are correctly set.
For details, see Setting the IP
Address of the PC.
Replace the GSCC. For information

on how to replace the GSCC, see
Replacing a GSCC Board.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the GSCC, see Replacing a GSCC Board.

6.3.12.1 Alarms of N4GSCC

APS_MANUAL_S
TOP
BD_AT_LOWPO
WER
BD_NOT_INSTALLED
BD_STATUS
BOOTROM_BAD
CFCARD_FAILED
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
88

System
CFCARD_OFFLIN
E
CFCARD_W_R_D
ISABLED
CHIP_ABN
COMMUN_FAIL
DBMS_ERROR
DBMS_PROTECT_MODE
LAN_LOC
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
SYSLOG_COMM_
FAIL
MSSW_DIFFERE
NT
NE_POWER_OVER
NESF_LOST
NESTATE_INSTA
LL
PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CO
NFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
POWER_ABNOR
MAL
POWER_FAIL
REG_MM
RINGMAPM_MM
RTC_FAIL
SECU_ALM
SQUTABM_MM
SWDL_ACTIVAT
ED_TIMEOUT
SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH
SWDL_INPROCE
SS
SWDL_CHGMNG
_NOMATCH
SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL
SWDL_NEPKGCH
ECK
SWDL_ROLLBA
CK_FAIL
SYNC_FAIL
TEMP_OVER
WRG_FANTYPE
WRG_BD_TYPE
CFCARD_FULL
BIOS_STATUS
DCC_CHAN_LACK
PATCH_PKGERR
DBMS_DELETE
STORM_CUR_QUENUM_OVER
PATCH_DEACT_T
IMEOUT
Ext_COMM_FAIL
LCS_DAYS_OF_GRACE
LCS_EXPIRED
LCS_FILE_NOT_
EXIST
FEATURE_WITHOUT_LICENSE
SYNC_DISABLE
DCNSIZE_OVER
MEM_OVER
CPC_NODE_ID_E
RR
SWDL_PKG_NOB
DSOFT
CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP
NE_CFG_CONFLI
CT
NTP_SYNC_FAIL
DB_RESTORE_FAIL
PASSWORD_NEE
D_CHANGE
SEC_RADIUS_FA
IL
SSL_CERT_NOENC
SUBNET_RT_CO
NFLICT
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
89

System
6.3.12.2 Alarms of N6GSCC

APS_MANUAL_S
TOP
BD_AT_LOWPO
WER
BD_NOT_INSTALLED
BD_STATUS
BOOTROM_BAD
CFCARD_FAILED
CFCARD_OFFLIN
E
CFCARD_W_R_D
ISABLED
CHIP_ABN
COMMUN_FAIL
DBMS_ERROR
DBMS_PROTECT_MODE
LAN_LOC
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
SYSLOG_COMM_
FAIL
MSSW_DIFFERE
NT
NE_POWER_OVER
NESF_LOST
NESTATE_INSTA
LL
PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CO
NFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
POWER_ABNOR
MAL
POWER_FAIL
REG_MM
RINGMAPM_MM
RTC_FAIL
SECU_ALM
SQUTABM_MM
SWDL_ACTIVAT
ED_TIMEOUT
SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH
SWDL_INPROCE
SS
SWDL_CHGMNG
_NOMATCH
SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL
SWDL_NEPKGCH
ECK
SWDL_ROLLBA
CK_FAIL
SYNC_FAIL
TEMP_OVER
WRG_FANTYPE
WRG_BD_TYPE
CFCARD_FULL
BIOS_STATUS
DCC_CHAN_LACK
PATCH_PKGERR
DBMS_DELETE
STORM_CUR_QUENUM_OVER
PATCH_DEACT_T
IMEOUT
Ext_COMM_FAIL
LCS_DAYS_OF_GRACE
LCS_EXPIRED
LCS_FILE_NOT_
EXIST
FEATURE_WITHOUT_LICENSE
SYNC_DISABLE
DCNSIZE_OVER
MEM_OVER
CPC_NODE_ID_E
RR
SWDL_PKG_NOB
DSOFT
CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP
NE_CFG_CONFLI
CT
NTP_SYNC_FAIL
DB_RESTORE_FAIL
PASSWORD_NEE
D_CHANGE
SEC_RADIUS_FA
IL
SSL_CERT_NOENC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
90

System
SUBNET_RT_CO
NFLICT

This topic lists the performance events that may occur when the board operates. The
performance events are reported according to the logical board on the .
6.3.13.1 Performance Events of N4GSCC

XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN
XCSTMPCUR
CPUUSAGEMAX
CPUUSAGEMIN
CPUUSAGECUR
MEMUSAGEMAX
MEMUSAGEMIN
MEMUSAGECUR
6.3.13.2 Performance Events of N6GSCC

XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN
XCSTMPCUR
CPUUSAGEMAX
CPUUSAGEMIN
CPUUSAGECUR
MEMUSAGEMAX
MEMUSAGEMIN
MEMUSAGECUR

The technical specifications of the GSCC include the mechanical specifications and power
consumption.

The mechanical specifications of the GSCC are as follows:
Weight of the N4GSCC (kg): 1.0
Weight of the N6GSCC (kg): 0.9

The maximum power consumption of the N4GSCC at room temperature (25C) is 19 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N6GSCC at room temperature (25C) is 35 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
91

System
7 Packet Processing Boards
Packet Processing Boards
About This Chapter

The packet processing boards include the PEX1, PEX2, PEG16, and PEG8. They achieve the
packet switching function in the packet domain.
7.1 PEX1
technical specifications of the PEX1 (1x10GE Ethernet processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PEX1.
7.2 PEX2
technical specifications of the PEX2 (2-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PEX2.
7.3 PEG8
technical specifications of the PEG8 (8-Port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PEG8
7.4 PEG16
technical specifications of the PEG16 (16xGE Ethernet processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PEG16.
7.1 PEX1
technical specifications of the PEX1 (1x10GE Ethernet processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PEX1.

The PEX1 is available in N1 and N2. The N1PEX1 is discontinued.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
92

System
Table 7-1 describes the versions of the PEX1.

Figure 1.1 Versions of the PEX1
Item
Description
Functional versions
The PEX1 is available in two functional versions, namely,

N1 and N2.
Differences
Regarding interface specifications: interface types,

working modes, unidirectional-mode setting.
Regarding service specifications: tunnel specifications,

Ethernet service capability.
Regarding protection schemes: MPLS PW APS, MCLAG.
Regarding clock synchronization: IEEE 1588v2.
Regarding maintenance features: distributed MPLS

OAM/centralized MPLS OAM, MPLS-TP OAM,
loopback capability.
Regarding other points: The N1PEX1 occupies two

slots, but the N2PEX1 occupies only one slot. Therefore,
the N1PEX1 and N2PEX1 boards cannot be used
interchangeably.
Substitution
None
7.1.2 Application
The PEX1 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
packets, manage bandwidths, and realize switching of data packets.
Figure 7-1 shows the typical networking and application of the PEX1. The PEX1 works with
the cross-connect board that provides the packet switching function to meet the requirement
of packet features. With this board, the TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet
domain on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit data in the two domains. In this way, the
equipment realizes the smooth evolution from the MSTP network to the packet switching
network.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
93

System
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the PEX1

OptiX OSN 3500/
7500
NMS
OptiX OSN 3500/

7500
OptiX OSN 3500/

7500
PSN
10GE ring
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 1500

PSN
GE ring
OptiX OSN 1500
PSN
GE ring
OptiX OSN
3500/7500
OptiX OSN 1500
Traffic direction
FE interface board/FE processing board
GE convergence board
GE processing board
10GE processing board
Dual-domain (TDM domain and packet

domain) cross-connect board
PSN: packet switched network

PEX1 boards process and forward 1x10 Gbit/s Ethernet services and support QoS functions
such as traffic management, congestion control, and queue scheduling for data packets.
Table 7-2 lists the functions and features supported by PEX1 boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by PEX1 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Provides one 10GE optical port to receive/transmit and process 1x10 GE services
independently.
Port
types
N1PEX1 boards support 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN),

10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), and 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors and support the
transmission distances of 0.3 km, 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km.
(N2PEX1) Supports 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), and

10GBASE-ZR (LAN) Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports use LC
connectors and support the transmission distances of 10 km, 40 km, and 80
km.
(N2PEX1) Supports CWDM and DWDM colored optical ports. The optical
ports use LC connectors. CWDM optical ports support the transmission
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
94

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
distance of 70 km. DWDM optical ports support the transmission distance of

40/80 km.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
A PEX1 board does not support an interface board, and provides one 10GE port
on the front panel.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Pluggable optical
module
Supports XFP optical modules.
Single-fiber
bidirectional
optical module
Not supported
Working modes
N1PEX1 boards support 10GE full-duplex in both LAN

(default) and WAN mode.
N2PEX1 boards support 10GE full-duplex in LAN mode.
Flow control at
ports
Servic
e
specifi
cation
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Autonegotiati
on mode
Not supported
Nonautonego
tiation
mode
Not supported by N1PEX1 boards but supported

by N2PEX1 boards
Query/Setting of
port status
Supported
Query of port
types
Supported
Query/Setting of
optical power
thresholds
Supported
Query/Setting of
unidirectionalmode
Not supported by N1PEX1 boards but supported by

N2PEX1 boards
Processing
capability
Processes 10 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode.
Service bearing
MPLS
Supported

Copyright Huawei
95

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
modes
PW specifications
Tunnel
specifications
QinQ
Supported
Port
Supported
Maximu
m
number
of PWs
16K
Maximu
m
number
of MSPWs
8K
Unidirec
tional
Number of unidirectional MPLS tunnels (with

tunnels shared):
N1PEX1: 4K
N2PEX1:
Bidirecti
onal
When working with the N4GSCC: 4K
Number of bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with

tunnels shared):
N1PEX1: 2K
N2PEX1:
MTU
MTU for
ports
Supports the setting of the packet length, which

ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the
setting becomes valid, the length of the packets
that enter or exit the ports is restricted by the
preset MTU.
MTU for
services
For packet services carried by PWs, N1PEX1

boards support the setting of the packet length,
which ranges from 64 bytes to 9000 bytes. For
packet services carried in other modes, N1PEX1
which ranges from 64 bytes to 9000 bytes.
For packet services carried by PWs, N2PEX1
which ranges from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. For
packet services carried in other modes, N2PEX1
boards do not support the setting of the packet
length.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
96

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Ethernet service
capability
Protec
tion
schem
es
Tunnel APS
E-Line
service
Number of supported E-Line services:
When working with an N4GSCC board: 4K
When working with an N6GSCC board: 8K
E-LAN
service
Number of supported E-LAN services: 1020
EAGGR
service
An N1PEX1 board supports four E-AGGR

services, each of which supports 127 leaf ports.
An N2PEX1 board does not support E-AGGR
services.
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3

format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p
format.
Maximu
m
number
of QinQ
links
1K
Jumbo
frame
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length

of 9600 bytes.
Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN

services: 2K
Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dualended) tunnel APS in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and
ITU-T G.8131.
Number of supported tunnel APS protection groups: 1K
PW APS
Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended), 1:1 (dualended) PW APS and PW FPS (single-ended) PW APS (only
on N2PEX1 boards).
Supports a maximum of 1K PW APS protection groups, and
a PW protection group can bind a maximum of 512 members
(only on N2PEX1 boards) in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720
and ITU-T G.8131.
NOTE
PW APS and tunnel APS share the protection resources.
LAG
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports manual link aggregation and static link

aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing

mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.

Copyright Huawei
97

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
MC-LAG
Supported only on N2PEX1 boards, which complies with

IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
MSTP
Supported only on N2PEX1 boards, which complies with

IEEE 802.1s.
LPT
Point-topoint
LPT
Supported
Point-tomultipoi
nt LPT
Supported
Synch
roniza
tion
Synchronous
Ethernet Clock
Supports one channel of synchronous Ethernet clock signals.
1588v2
Supports one channel of the IEEE 1588v2 time

synchronization and clock synchronization (only on
N2PEX1 boards).
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
ETH OAM
Ethernet
service
OAMa
Supports CC, LB and LT. These functions

comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
Supports LM and 2DM. These functions comply
with ITU-T Y.1731.
Number of services that support Ethernet OAM
(ETH OAM): 2K
Ethernet
port
OAMa
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopback,

fault detection, and link performance monitoring.
These functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Number of ports that support ETH OAM: 2K
Distributed MPLS
OAM/Centralized
MPLS OAM
NOTE
N1PEX1 boards
support only
distributed MPLS
tunnel OAM.
MPLS
tunnel
OAMa
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Tunnel ping, and

Tunnel traceroute. These functions comply with
ITU-T Y.1711.
Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM: 2K
MPLS
PW
OAMa
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, PW traceroute,

and PW ping. These functions comply with ITUT Y.1711.
Number of PWs that support MPLS PW OAM:
2K.
MPLS-TP OAM
NOTE
Only N2PEX1
boards support
MPLS-TP OAM.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
MPLSTP
tunnel
OAMa
Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM,

TST, LCK, and 2DM. These functions comply
with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Number of tunnels that support MPLS-TP OAM:
2K

Copyright Huawei
98

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
MPLSTP PW
OAMa

TST, LCK, CSF, and 2DM. These functions
comply with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Number of PWs that support MPLS-TP OAM:
2K
Loopback
capability
PHY
layer at
Ethernet
ports
N1PEX1: Supports inloops and outloops.
MAC
layer at
Ethernet
ports
N1PEX1: Supports inloops.
N2PEX1: Not support loopbacks.
N2PEX1: Supports inloops and outloops.
RMON
Supported
Port mirroring
Supports ingress mirroring.
Inban
d
DCN
Supported
HQoS
Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, PW polices, QinQ polices, VUNI ingress policies, V-UNI egress policies, port policies, port shaping.
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protocol enabling
Supported
Port aging time
Supported
Fast leave
Supported
Discarding of
unknown
broadcast packets
Supported
Static broadcast
entry
Supported
Query
of
electro
nic
labels
Supported
NOTE
a: MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM
share OAM resources.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
99

System

The PEX1 consists of the network processing module, transmission management module,
switching network buffering module, CPU management module, logic control module,
temperature and voltage detecting module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 7-2 shows the functional block diagram of the PEX1.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PEX1
Backplane
Two system clock signals
Working clock
IEEE 1588 V2 packet
Modules of the board
Synchronous Ethernet clock
1x10GE signals
Data processing
module
Packet forwarding
module
Network processing
module
Service
signal
Upstream transmission
module

Service Upstream scheduling
module
signal
Downstream
transmission module
Downstream
scheduling module
Transmission
management module
Switching network
buffering module
Parallel management bus
CPU
management
module
PSXCSA
IEEE 1588 V2 packet
Clock
module
PSXCSA
PSXCSA
Service
signal
PSXCSA
Data backup bus

Inter-board communication bus
GSCC
GSCC

Logic control
module
Modules of the
board
Temperature and voltage

detecting signals
Temperature and
voltage detecting
signals
- 48V / - 60 V
Power
module
- 48V / - 60 V
1.1.1.1.89 Receive Direction

The network processing module receives the 10xGE optical signals, decodes the signals, and
converts the serial signals into parallel signals. Then, the network processing module
performs route searching or address matching for the data packets, and transmits the
corresponding packets to the transmission management module. The transmission
management module buffers and grooms the packets, slices the packets into cells that the
switching network requires, and sends the cells to the switching network buffering module.
The switching network buffering module buffers the cells and sends the cells to the crossconnect unit.
1.1.1.1.90 Transmit Direction

The switching network buffering module processes the cells sent by the cross-connect unit
and sends the cells to the transmission management module. The transmission management
module rearranges the cells to form packets, performs buffering and QoS management for the
packets, and sends the packets to the network processing module. The network processing
module converts the parallel signals into serial signals and sends the signals to the 10xGE
optical interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
100

System
1.1.1.1.91 Network Processing Module

The network processing module performs route searching, address matching, and other
functions for data packets. The network processing module of the PEX1 can process the 10
Gbit/s data packets in full-duplex mode.
1.1.1.1.92 Transmission Management Module

The transmission management module slices packets into cells, and performs QoS
management and large volume buffering for the cells.
QoS management: The transmission management module provides the scheduling

function at five levels including the flow queue and port queue, the bandwidth restricting
function, and the corresponding statistical information.
Large volume buffering: The transmission management module supports traffic of 10

Gbit/s and can buffer data for 17 ms in both the upstream direction and downstream
direction.
1.1.1.1.93 Switching Network Buffering Module

The switching network buffering module performs cell buffering, queue management,
scheduling, and other functions. This module and the cross-connect unit form a three-level
switching network to switch cells.
1.1.1.1.94 CPU Management Module

The CPU management module provides the parallel management bus, Ethernet bus, and other
buses to manage the modules of the PEX1. The CPU management module also monitors
alarms and performance events and reports the alarms and performance events to the SCC
unit.
1.1.1.1.95 Logic Control Module

The logic control module controls the logic of the PEX1. The PEX1 occupies two slots. Each
board part that occupies one slot has the control part. The control logic of the PEX1 is
realized on the board part that occupies the slot with a smaller slot number between the two
slots that house the PEX1.
1.1.1.1.96 Temperature and Voltage Detecting Module

The temperature and voltage detecting module monitors the temperature and voltage.

Provides the clock signal for each module of the PEX1.
Supports the synchronous Ethernet clock.

the PEX1 require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
101

System
7.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEX1 has indicators, an interface, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 7-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1PEX1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N1PEX1
PEX1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK
ACT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
PEX1
Figure 7-4 shows the appearance of the N2PEX1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
102

System
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the N2PEX1
PEX1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK
ACT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
PEX1
Connection status indicator (LINK) one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) one color (orange)
The front panel of the PEX1 has one optical interface. Table 7-3 describes the type and usage
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
103

System
of the optical interface of the PEX1.

Figure 1.1 Optical interface of the PEX1
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1
LC (pluggable)
Receives 10GE signals.
OUT1
LC (pluggable)
Transmits 10GE signals.

The PEX1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.1.7 Valid Slots

The PEX1 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the PEX1 fails to work
normally.
The N1PEX1 occupies two slots, and it can be installed in slots 18, and 1116. The PEX1
slot displayed on the NMS is the slot that has a smaller slot number between the two slots that
house the PEX1. For example, if the PEX1 is installed in slots 1 and 2, the PEX1 slot
displayed on the NMS is slot 1. The mapping relationships between the valid slots for the
PEX1 and the allocated bandwidths are as follows:
Slot 1: 5 Gbit/s
Slot 3: 7.5 Gbit/s
Slot 5, 7, 11, or 13: 10 Gbit/s
Slot 15: 7.5 Gbit/s
Table 7-4 lists the slots valid for the PEX1 and the corresponding logical slots of the N1PEX1
on the NMS.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the N1PEX1 and the corresponding logical slots of the N1PEX1 on the
NMS
Slot Valid for the PEX1
Corresponding Logical Slot
Slots 1 and 2
Slot 1
Slots 3 and 4
Slot 3
Slots 5 and 6
Slot 5
Slots 7 and 8
Slot 7
Slots 11 and 12
Slot 11
Slots 13 and 14
Slot 13
Slots 15 and 16
Slot 15
The N2PEX1 occupies one slot, and it can be installed in slots 18, and 1116. The mapping
relationships between the valid slots for the N2PEX1 and the allocated bandwidths are as
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
104

System
follows:
Slots 13, and 16: 2.5 Gbit/s
Slots 46, and 1315: 5 Gbit/s
Slots 7 and 12: 10 Gbit/s
Slots 8 and 11: 20 Gbit/s
Two-slot boards can work only with cross-connect boards whose logical boards are N1PSXCS.
One-slot boards cannot work with cross-connect boards whose logical boards are N1PSXCS.
Two-slot boards and one-slot boards cannot be configured at the same time.
When working with an EDQ41 board, a two-slot board cannot be installed in slot 1 or slot 15.
7.1.8 Feature Code

The PEX1 does not have the feature code.


Step 2 Required: Check and record the bandwidth and slot information of the board.
Step 3 Required: Check whether the cable matches the board. Ensure that the cable matches the
board.
correct.
----End

Step 6 Optional: Configure the inband DCN. For details, see Configuring the Inband DCN.
Step 7 Required: Set the Ethernet interface as follows:
Port enabled/disabled: When you configure services on a port of the Ethernet board, the
port must be set to Enabled.
Working mode: Generally, the Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment are
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
105

System
required to work in the same fixed working mode. If the working modes on two sides do
not match, packets may be lost or the bit rate may decrease. In the case of large volume
of traffic, services may be completely interrupted.
For details, see Parameter Description.
For more information about the parameters of the board, see 26.1 Packet Processing Boards.
Step 8 Required: Configure services. The following Ethernet services can be configured according
to actual requirements:
Configure the E-line service. For details, see Configuring E-Line Services.
Configure the E-LAN service. For details, see Configuring E-LAN Services.
Configure the E-AGGR service (only on the N1PEX1). For details, see Configuring EAGGR Services.
Step 9 Optional: Configure the OAM:
Configure the MPLS OAM, For details, see Configuring the MPLS OAM and
Configuring PW OAM.
Configure the MPLS-TP OAM, For details, see Configuring MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM and
Configuring MPLS-TP PW OAM(Only N2PEX1 boards support MPLS-TP OAM).
Step 10 Optional: Configure the MPLS tunnel protection group. For details, see Configuring Tunnel
APS on a Per-NE Basis.
Step 11 Optional: Configure the link aggregation function on the Ethernet port. For details, see
Configuring an Ethernet LAG.
Step 12 Optional: Configure the QoS. For details, see Configuring the HQoS.
Step 13 Optional: Configure the IEEE 1588v2 time and clock (only on the N2PEX1). For details, see
Configuring the IEEE 1588v2 Time Synchronization and Clock Synchronization.
Step 14 Optional: Configure the IGMP Snooping. For details, see Configuring the IGMP Snooping.
----End

Step 1 Required: Test the Ethernet service channel. For details, see Testing EoS Services.
----End

Step 1 Required: Check Ethernet services.
Check the E-line service. For details, see Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service
Configuration.
Check the E-LAN service. For details, see Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service
Configuration.
Check the E-AGGR service (only on the N1PEX1). For details, see Verifying the
Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
106

System
Boards.
----End
7.1.10 Configuring the Board Functions

The PEX1 supports the packet switching function and provides multiple packet switchingspecific functions and features, such as HQoS, LAG, and ETH OAM. Configure the functions
according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following packet switching functions for the N1PEX1 and N2PEX1 by
using the :
HQoS
LAG
ETH OAM
Tunnel APS
MPLS OAM
IGMP Snooping
Inband DCN
LPT
The N2PEX1 also provides the following packet switching functions:
MPLS-TP OAM
PW APS
MC-LAG
MSTP
MS-PW
The N1PEX1 supports only the MPLS Tunnel OAM function.

You can set parameters for the PEX1 by using the U2000.
1.1.1.1.106 Displayed Slots

The N1PEX1 occupies two slots in the subrack. The logical slot of the N1PEX1 displayed on
the U2000 is the slot that has a smaller slot number between the two slots that house the
PEX1.
For the logical slots of the N1PEX1 displayed on the U2000, refer to Table 7-4.
The N2PEX1 occupies one slot in the subrack. The logical slot of the N2PEX1 displayed on
the NMS corresponds to the installation slot.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
107

System
1.1.1.1.107 Board Parameters

You can set the following principal parameter for the PEX1 by using the U2000:
Ethernet interface
For more parameters and the description of the parameters, see 26.1 Packet Processing
Boards.

Table 7-5 lists the faults that occur on the PEX1 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PEX1 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service
troubleshooting
The service is
interrupted.
The service loses

packets or has
errored packets.
The tunnel APS

switching fails.
The PW APS
switching fails.
The MC-LAG
switching fails.
Protection switching
fault
See Troubleshooting Packet Service
Interruptions.
See Failure of Packet Service Protection

Switching.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PEX1, see Replacing a Packet Processing Board.

7.1.13.1 Alarms of N1PEX1

ALM_ALS
BD_STATUS
ETH_APS_LOST
BUS_ERR
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
108

System
H
ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH
ETH_APS_SWIT
CH_FAIL
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_CFM_UNE
XPERI
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_LINK_DOWN
ETH_EFM_LOO
PBACK
FDBSIZEALM_ELAN
FLOW_OVER
ETH_LOS
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
IN_PWR_ABN
LAG_DOWN
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LASER_MOD_E
RR
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LSR_BCM_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MAC_FCS_EXC
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL
_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
MPLS_TUNNEL
_MISMERGE
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
MPLS_TUNNEL
_UNKNOWN
NO_BD_SOFT
POWER_ABNORMAL
TEMP_OVER
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEST_STATUS
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
PW_NO_TRAFF
IC
W_OFFLINE
TR_LOC
IN_PWR_LOW
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
TUNNEL_APS_
OUTAGE

TEMP_OVER
COMMUN_FAIL
TR_LOC
BUS_ERR
NO_BD_SOFT
TEST_STATUS
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
POWER_ABNORMAL
BD_STATUS
PW_NO_TRAFFIC
WRG_BD_TYPE
LSR_NO_FITED
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
109

System
ALM_ALS
LSR_WILL_DIE
IN_PWR_ABN
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
LSR_BCM_ALM
FLOW_OVER
LOOP_ALM
ETH_LOS
ETH_LINK_DOWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MAC_FCS_EXC
FDBSIZEALM_ELAN
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISME
RGE
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATC
H
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKN
OWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMA
TCH
ETH_APS_PATH_MISM
ATCH
LAG_DOWN
ETH_APS_LOST
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
MPLS_PW_LOCV
MPLS_PW_Excess
MPLS_PW_BDI
MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
MPLS_PW_SD
MCLAG_CFG_MISMATC
H
MPLS_PW_SF
MCSP_PATH_LOCV
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATC
H
PWAPS_PATH_MISMAT
CH
PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
PWAPS_LOST
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
BWUTILIZATION_OVE
R
SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFA
IL
MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL
DROPRATIO_OVER
PW_DROPPKT_EXC
ETH_NO_FLOW
TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
110

System
7.1.14.1 Performance Events of N1PEX1

Figure 1.1 SDH
BDTEMPCUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
CPUUSAGECUR
CPUUSAGEMAX
CPUUSAGEMIN
MEMUSAGECUR
MEMUSAGEMAX
MEMUSAGEMIN
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
ETH_CFM_FLR
ETH_CFM_FL
ETH_CFM_FD
ETH_CFM_FDV
ETH_CFM_LS
ETH_CFM_SLS
ETH_CFM_UAS
ETH_CFM_CSLS
Figure 1.2 ETH OAM 802.1ag
Figure 1.3 MPLS Tunnel OAM

MPLS_TUNNEL_LS
MPLS_TUNNEL_SLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_UAS
MPLS_TUNNEL_CSLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_FLR
MPLS_TUNNEL_FL
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV
Figure 1.4 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SN
DPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SNDB
YTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RC
VPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RC
VBYTES
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_P
PS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX
_BPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
111

System
Figure 1.5 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UTILISATI
ON
PW_RX_BPS
PW_TX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
Figure 1.6 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES
Figure 1.7 Statistics of RMON basic performance

RXPKTS
RXOCTETS
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT1024
ETHOVER
Figure 1.8 Statistics of RMON extended performance

TXPKTS
TXOCTETS
TXBGOOD
TXUNICAST
TXBRDCAST
TXMULCAST
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT1024
TXPKT1519
RXBGOOD
RXUNICAST
RXPAUSE
RXPKT1519
PKT64
PKT65
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
PKT1519
PORT_RX_BYTES_AVAI
LABILITY
RXBPS
TXBPS
RXPPS
TXPPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
112

System

Figure 1.9 SDH
CPUUSAGEMAX
CPUUSAGEMIN
CPUUSAGECUR
MEMUSAGEMAX
MEMUSAGEMIN
MEMUSAGECUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR

ETH_CFM_LS
ETH_CFM_SLS
ETH_CFM_CSLS
ETH_CFM_UAS
ETH_CFM_FLR
ETH_CFM_FL
ETH_CFM_FD
ETH_CFM_FDV

MPLS_TUNNEL_LS
MPLS_TUNNEL_SLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_CSLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_UAS
MPLS_TUNNEL_FLR
MPLS_TUNNEL_FL
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV
Figure 1.12 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TNL_BW_UTILISATIO
N
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SND
PKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SNDB
YTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
CVPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RCV
BYTES
TNL_REVERSE_BW_UTILIS
ATION
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_BP
S
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
X_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
PPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
113

System
Figure 1.13 MPLS PW OAM

MPLS_PW_LS
MPLS_PW_SLS
MPLS_PW_CSLS
MPLS_PW_UAS
MPLS_PW_FLR
MPLS_PW_FL
MPLS_PW_FD
MPLS_PW_FDV
Figure 1.14 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UTILISA PW_DROPPKTS
TION
PW_DROPBYTES
PW_RX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
PW_TX_BPS
Figure 1.15 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES
VUNI_TX_UTILIZATION
VLAN_RCVPKTS
VLAN_RCVBYTES
VLAN_SNDPKTS
VLAN_SNDBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPPKTS
VUNI_SND_DROPBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPRATIO
VLAN_RX_BPS
VLAN_TX_BPS
VLAN_RX_PPS
VLAN_TX_PPS

RXOCTETS
RXPKTS
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
ETHUNDER
ETHOVER
ETHFRG
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT1024

RXPKT1519
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
TXPKT64
Copyright Huawei
TXPKT65
114

System
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT1024
TXPKT1519
PKT64
PKT65
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
PKT1519
RXUNICAST
TXUNICAST
TXMULCAST
TXBRDCAST
RXPAUSE
ETHFCS
ETHUTILIZ
RXCTLPKTS
TXETHOVER
TXPKTS
TXOCTETS
PORT_RX_BYTES_AVAILABILI
TY
PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZ
ATION
PORT_TX_BW_UTILI
ZATION
TX_DROP_RATIO
RXBPS
TXBPS
RXPPS
TXPPS
Figure 1.18 QoS

QOS_STRM_MATCHPKT
S
QOS_STRM_MATCHBYT
ES
QOS_CARGRNPKTS
QOS_CARGRNBYTES
QOS_CARYLWPKTS
QOS_CARYLWBYTES
QOS_CARREDPKTS
QOS_CARREDBYTES
QOS_CARREDRATIO
FLOW_RX_UTILIZATION
QOS_PRI_DROPPKTS
QOS_PRI_DROPBYTES
PORT_PRI_SNDPKTS
PORT_PRI_SNDBYTES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPPK
TS
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPBY
TES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPRA
TIO
TNL_SNDDROPPKTS
TNL_SNDDROPBYTES
TNL_SNDDROPRATIO
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PPKTS
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PBYTES
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PRATIO
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
RATIO
QOS_PORTQUEUE_DROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDPKTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDBYTES
VGROUP_TX_UTILIZATI
ON
PORT_PRI_TX_BPS
PORT_PRI_TX_PPS
PWQUEUE_TX_BPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
115

System
PWQUEUE_TX_PPS
7.1.15 Technical Specifications of PEX1

The technical specifications of the PEX1 include the parameters specified for optical
interfaces, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
1.1.1.1.110 Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces

Table 7-24 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N1PEX1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N1PEX1
Parameter
Value
Type of
interface
10GBASE-SR
(LAN)
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)
10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)
10GBASE-SW
(WAN)
10GBASE-LW
(WAN)
10GBASE-EW
(WAN)
10GBASE-ZW
(WAN)
Transmission
distance (km)
0.3
10
40
80
Type of fiber
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-1.3 to -7.3
-6 to -1
-1 to 2
0 to 4
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
840 to 860
1260 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1
0.5
-1
-7
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-7.5
-11
-15
-24
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
116

System
Table 7-25 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N2PEX1.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N2PEX1
Parameter
Value
Type of interface
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)
10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)
Transmission
distance (km)
10
40
80
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to 2
0 to 4
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Minimum overload
(dBm)
0.5
-1
-7
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
-11
-15
-24
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30
30
Table 7-26 and Table 7-27 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of
the N2PEX1.
Figure 1.3 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N2PEX1
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
70
Launched optical power range

(dBm)
0 to 4
Operating wavelength range

(nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
117

System
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
1451nm to 1551nm: -23
1571nm: -22
1591nm to 1611nm: -21
Minimum overload (dBm)
-9
Maximum allowed dispersion

(ps/nm)
1400
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
Maximum -20 dB spectral

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio (dB)
30
Figure 1.4 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N2PEX1
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40
80
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-1 to 2
-1 to 3
Central frequency
(THz)
192.10 to 196.00
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
10
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-24
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1
-9
Maximum
allowed dispersion
(ps/nm)
800
1600
Minimum
extinction ratio
9.5
8.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
118

System
Parameter
Value
DWDM
(dB)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
35
30
1.1.1.1.111 Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1. The maximum launched optical power of
the optical interfaces is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).

The mechanical specifications of the N1PEX1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 2.4
The mechanical specifications of the N2PEX1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.4

The maximum power consumption of the N1PEX1 at room temperature (25C) is 107 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N2PEX1 at room temperature (25C) is 48 W.
7.2 PEX2
technical specifications of the PEX2 (2-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PEX2.

The PEX2 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
7.2.2 Application
The PEX2 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
packets, manage bandwidths, and implement switching of data packets.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
119

System
Figure 7-5 shows the typical networking and application of the PEX2. The PEX2 works with
domain on the OptiX OSN equipment so that the data can be transmitted in the two domains.
In this manner, an MSTP network can smoothly evolve to a packet switching network.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the PEX2
OptiX OSN 3500/
7500
NMS
OptiX OSN 3500/

7500
OptiX OSN 3500/

7500
PSN
10GE ring
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 1500

PSN
GE ring
OptiX OSN 1500
PSN
GE ring
OptiX OSN
3500/7500
OptiX OSN 1500
Traffic direction
GE processing board


PEX2 boards process and forward 2x10 Gbit/s Ethernet services and support QoS functions
such as traffic management, congestion control, and queue scheduling for data packets.
Table 7-28 lists the functions and features supported by PEX2 boards.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by PEX2 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits and processes 2x10 GE services.
Port
types
Supports 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), and 10GBASE-ZR

(LAN) Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors and support
the transmission distances of 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km.
Supports CWDM and DWDM colored optical ports. The optical ports use LC
connectors. CWDM optical ports support the transmission distance of 70 km.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
120

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
DWDM optical ports support the transmission distance of 40/80 km.

Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
A PEX2 board does not support an interface board, and provides two 10GE ports
on the front panel.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Pluggab
le
optical
module
Supports XFP optical modules.
Singlefiber
bidirecti
onal
optical
module
Not supported
Workin
g modes
10GE full-duplex (only in LAN mode)
Flow
control
at ports
Autonegotiation
mode
Not supported
Nonautonegotia
tion mode
Supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Query/S
etting of
port
status
Supported
Query
of port
types
Supported
Query/S
etting of
optical
power
threshol
ds
Supported

Copyright Huawei
121

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Description
Query/S
etting of
unidirec
tionalmode
Supported
Processi
ng
capabili
ty
Service
bearing
modes
MPLS
Supported
QinQ
Supported
Port
Supported
Maximum
number of
PWs
16K
Maximum
number of
MS-PWs
8K
Unidirectio
nal
Number of unidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels

shared):
PW
specific
ations
Tunnel
specific
ations
Bidirection
al
MTU
Ethernet
service
capabili
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Number of bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels

shared):
MTU for
ports
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges

from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes
valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the ports
is restricted by the preset MTU.
MTU for
services
For packet services carried by PWs, PEX2 boards

support the setting of the packet length, which ranges
from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. For packet services carried
in other modes, PEX2 boards do not support the setting
of the packet length.
E-Line
service

Copyright Huawei
122

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
ty
Protec
tion
schem
es
Tunnel
APS
E-LAN
service
E-AGGR
service
Not supported
Formats of
Ethernet
data frames
Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format,

Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format.
Maximum
number of
QinQ links
1K
Jumbo
frame
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.
Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services: 2K
Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended)

tunnel APS in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
PW
APS
Supports the PW FPS (single-ended), 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended)

and 1:1 (dual-ended) PW APS in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and
ITU-T G.8131.
Supports a maximum of 1K PW APS protection groups, and a PW
protection group can bind a maximum of 512 members.
NOTE
LAG
Synch
roniza
tion
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
MCLAG
Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
MSTP
Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.
LPT
Point-topoint LPT
Supported
Point-tomultipoint
LPT
Supported
Synchro
nous
Ethernet
Clock
Supports two channels of synchronous Ethernet clock signals.

Copyright Huawei
123

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
Description
1588v2
Supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization and clock

synchronization.
ETH
OAM
Ethernet
service
OAMa
Supports CC, LB and LT. These functions comply with

IEEE 802.1ag.
Supports LM and 2DM. These functions comply with
ITU-T Y.1731.
Number of services that support Ethernet OAM (ETH
OAM): 2K
Ethernet
port OAMa
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopback, and

link performance monitoring. These functions comply
with IEEE 802.3ah.
Distribu
ted
MPLS
OAM/C
entraliz
ed
MPLS
OAM
MPLS
tunnel
OAMa
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Tunnel ping, and Tunnel

traceroute. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLS PW
OAMa
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, PW traceroute, and PW

ping. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLSTP
OAM
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAMa
Number of MPLS PWs that support OAM: 2K

Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK,
and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T
G.8113.1.
Number of tunnels that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K
MPLS-TP
PW OAMa
CSF, and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T
G.8113.1.
Number of PWs that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K
Inban
d
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Loopba
ck
capabili
ty
PHY layer
at Ethernet
ports
Not supported
MAC layer
at Ethernet
ports
Supports inloops and outloops.
RMON
Supported
Port
mirrorin
g
Supported

Copyright Huawei
124

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
DCN
HQoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protocol
enablin
g
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported
Discardi
ng of
unknow
n
broadca
st
packets
Supported
Static
broadca
st entry
Supported
Query
of
electro
nic
labels
Supported
NOTE

The PEX2 consists of the network processing module, transmission management module,
switching network buffering module, CPU management module, logic control module,
Figure 7-6 shows the functional block diagram of the PEX2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
125

System
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PEX2

Working clock
Clock
module
IEEE 1588 V2 packet

2x10GE signals
Backplane
PSXCSA
IEEE 1588 V2 packet
PSXCSA
PSXCSA
Upstream transmission
Service Upstream scheduling Service
module
module
signal
signal
Downstream
Downstream
transmission module
scheduling module
Transmission
Switching network
management module
buffering module
Parallel management bus Parallel management
bus
Data backup bus
CPU
Data processing
module
Packet forwarding
module
Network processing
module
Service
signal
management
module
PSXCSA
GSCC
GSCC

Logic control
module
Temperature and
voltage detecting
signals
Temperature and
voltage detecting
signals
- 48V / - 60V
Power
module
- 48V / - 60V

The network processing module receives 2x10GE optical signals, decodes the signals, and
converts the serial signals into parallel signals. Then, the network processing module
performs route searching or address matching for the data packets, and transmits the
corresponding packets to the transmission management module. The transmission
management module buffers and schedules the packets, slices the packets into cells that the
switching network requires, and sends the cells to the switching network buffering module.
The switching network buffering module buffers the cells and sends the cells to the crossconnect unit.

module converts the parallel signals into serial signals and sends the signals to the 10xGE
optical interface.

functions for data packets. The network processing module of the PEX2 can process the 20

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
126

System

function at five levels for the flow queue and port queue, and the bandwidth restricting
function, and provides the corresponding statistics information.

direction.


buses to manage the modules of the board. The CPU management module also monitors
alarms and performance events and reports the alarms and performance events to the SCC
unit.

The logic control module controls the logic of the PEX2. It performs the following functions:
Decodes the address signals of the peripheral modules, allocates the registers, and
controls the logic.
Reports and controls the board status, for example, the shutdown or startup of the laser.
Controls the logic of the CPU module and decodes the address signals of the CPU
module.
Configures services, queries the performance, and controls alarms.
Implements some clock functions.
1.1.1.1.121 Temperature and Voltage Detecting Module

The temperature and voltage detecting module monitors the temperature and voltage.

Provides clock signals for each module of the PEX2.

the PEX2 require.
7.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEX2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
127

System

Figure 7-7 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PEX2.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PEX2
PEX2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
PEX2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
128

System
The front panel of the PEX2 has two optical interfaces. Table 7-29 describes the type and
usage of the optical interfaces of the PEX2.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the PEX2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN2
LC (pluggable)
Receives 10GE signals.
OUT1OUT2
LC (pluggable)
Transmits 10GE signals.

The PEX2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.2.7 Valid Slots

The PEX2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the PEX2 fails to work
normally.
The following part lists the valid slots of the PEX2 and the corresponding bandwidths:
Slots 1-3, and 16 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slots 4-6 and 13-15 (5 Gbit/s)
Slots 7 and 12 (10 Gbit/s)
Slots 8 and 11 (20 Gbit/s)

7.2.8 Feature Code

The PEX2 does not have the feature code.


board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
129

System
correct.
----End


Configuring PW OAM.
Configuring MPLS-TP PW OAM.
Step 13 Optional: Configure the IEEE 1588v2 time and clock. For details, see Configuring the IEEE
1588v2 Time Synchronization and Clock Synchronization.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
130

System

----End

Configuration.
Configuration.
Boards.
----End

The PEX2 supports the packet switching function and provides multiple packet-specific
functions and features, such as HQoS, LAG, and ETH OAM. Configure the functions
You can configure the following packet functions for the PEX2 by using the U2000:
HQoS
ETH OAM
MPLS OAM
MPLS-TP OAM
IGMP Snooping
Inband DCN
LPT
Tunnel APS
PW APS
LAG
MC-LAG
MS-PW
MSTP

You can set the parameters for the PEX2 by using the U2000.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
131

System
You can set the following parameters for the PEX2 by using the U2000:
Ethernet interface
For information about more parameters and the description of each parameter, see 26.1 Packet
Processing Boards.

Table 7-30 lists the faults that occur on the PEX2 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PEX2 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service
troubleshooting
The service is
interrupted.
The service loses

packets or has
errored packets.
The tunnel APS

switching fails.
The PW APS
switching fails.
The MC-LAG
switching fails.
fault
Interruptions.

Switching.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PEX2, see Replacing a Packet Processing Board.

according to the logical board on the NMS.

TEMP_OVER
COMMUN_FAIL
TR_LOC
BUS_ERR
NO_BD_SOFT
TEST_STATUS
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
POWER_ABNORMAL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
132

System
BD_STATUS
PW_NO_TRAFFIC
WRG_BD_TYPE
LSR_NO_FITED
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
ALM_ALS
LSR_WILL_DIE
IN_PWR_ABN
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
LSR_BCM_ALM
FLOW_OVER
LOOP_ALM
ETH_LOS
ETH_LINK_DOWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MAC_FCS_EXC
FDBSIZEALM_ELAN
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISME
RGE
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATC
H
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKN
OWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMA
TCH
ETH_APS_PATH_MISM
ATCH
LAG_DOWN
ETH_APS_LOST
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
MPLS_PW_LOCV
MPLS_PW_Excess
MPLS_PW_BDI
MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
MPLS_PW_SD
MCLAG_CFG_MISMATC
H
MPLS_PW_SF
MCSP_PATH_LOCV
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATC
H
PWAPS_PATH_MISMAT
CH
PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
PWAPS_LOST
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
BWUTILIZATION_OVE
R
SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFA
IL
MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL
DROPRATIO_OVER
PW_DROPPKT_EXC
ETH_NO_FLOW
TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
133

System

performance events are reported according to the logical board on the NMS.

Figure 1.1 SDH
CPUUSAGEMAX
CPUUSAGEMIN
CPUUSAGECUR
MEMUSAGEMAX
MEMUSAGEMIN
MEMUSAGECUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR

ETH_CFM_LS
ETH_CFM_SLS
ETH_CFM_CSLS
ETH_CFM_UAS
ETH_CFM_FLR
ETH_CFM_FL
ETH_CFM_FD
ETH_CFM_FDV

MPLS_TUNNEL_LS
MPLS_TUNNEL_SLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_CSLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_UAS
MPLS_TUNNEL_FLR
MPLS_TUNNEL_FL
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV
Figure 1.4 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TNL_BW_UTILISATIO
N
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SND
PKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SNDB
YTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
CVPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RCV
BYTES
TNL_REVERSE_BW_UTILIS
ATION
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
134

System
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_BP
S
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
X_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
PPS

MPLS_PW_LS
MPLS_PW_SLS
MPLS_PW_CSLS
MPLS_PW_UAS
MPLS_PW_FLR
MPLS_PW_FL
MPLS_PW_FD
MPLS_PW_FDV
Figure 1.6 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
TION
PW_DROPBYTES
PW_RX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
PW_TX_BPS
Figure 1.7 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES
VUNI_TX_UTILIZATION
VLAN_RCVPKTS
VLAN_RCVBYTES
VLAN_SNDPKTS
VLAN_SNDBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPPKTS
VUNI_SND_DROPBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPRATIO
VLAN_RX_BPS
VLAN_TX_BPS
VLAN_RX_PPS
VLAN_TX_PPS

RXOCTETS
RXPKTS
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
ETHUNDER
ETHOVER
ETHFRG
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT1024
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
135

System

RXPKT1519
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT1024
TXPKT1519
PKT64
PKT65
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
PKT1519
RXUNICAST
TXUNICAST
TXMULCAST
TXBRDCAST
RXPAUSE
ETHFCS
ETHUTILIZ
RXCTLPKTS
TXETHOVER
TXPKTS
TXOCTETS
TY
PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZ
ATION
PORT_TX_BW_UTILI
ZATION
TX_DROP_RATIO
RXBPS
TXBPS
RXPPS
TXPPS
Figure 1.10 QoS

QOS_STRM_MATCHPKT
S
QOS_STRM_MATCHBYT
ES
QOS_CARGRNPKTS
QOS_CARGRNBYTES
QOS_CARYLWPKTS
QOS_CARYLWBYTES
QOS_CARREDPKTS
QOS_CARREDBYTES
QOS_CARREDRATIO
FLOW_RX_UTILIZATION
QOS_PRI_DROPPKTS
QOS_PRI_DROPBYTES
PORT_PRI_SNDPKTS
PORT_PRI_SNDBYTES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPPK
TS
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPBY
TES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPRA
TIO
TNL_SNDDROPPKTS
TNL_SNDDROPBYTES
TNL_SNDDROPRATIO
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PPKTS
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PBYTES
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PRATIO
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
RATIO
QOS_PORTQUEUE_DROP
RATIO
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
136

System
VUNIGROUP_SNDPKTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDBYTES
VGROUP_TX_UTILIZATI
ON
PORT_PRI_TX_BPS
PORT_PRI_TX_PPS
PWQUEUE_TX_BPS
PWQUEUE_TX_PPS
7.2.15 Technical Specifications of PEX2

The technical specifications of the PEX2 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 7-41 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PEX2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PEX2
Parameter
Value
Type of interface
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)
10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)
Transmission
distance (km)
10
40
80
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to 2
0 to 4
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Minimum overload
(dBm)
0.5
-1
-7
(dBm)
-11
-15
-24
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30
30
Table 7-42 and Table 7-43 lists the parameters specified for the 10GE colored optical
interfaces of the PEX2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
137

System
Figure 1.2 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the PEX2
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
70

(dBm)
0 to 4

(nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
1451nm to 1551nm: -23
1571nm: -22
1591nm to 1611nm: -21
-9

(ps/nm)
1400
8.2

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30
Figure 1.3 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the PEX2
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40
80
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-1 to 2
-1 to 3
Central frequency
(THz)
192.10 to 196.00
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
138

System
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-24
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1
-9
Maximum
allowed dispersion
(ps/nm)
800
1600
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
9.5
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
35
30


The mechanical specifications of the PEX2 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.4

The maximum power consumption of the PEX2 at room temperature (25C) is 49 W.
7.3 PEG8
technical specifications of the PEG8 (8-Port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PEG8

The PEG8 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
139

System
7.3.2 Application
The PEG8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
Figure 7-8 shows the typical networking and application of the PEG8. The PEG8 works with
domain on the OptiX OSN equipment so that the data can be transmitted in the two domains.
In this manner, an MSTP network can smoothly evolve to a packet switching network.
8.1.2 Application describes the typical networking and application when the PEG8 works with
the PETF8.
the PEFF8.
the CQ1.
the MD12.
the MD75.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the PEG8
OptiX OSN 3500/
7500
NMS
OptiX OSN 3500/

7500
OptiX OSN 3500/

7500
PSN
10GE ring
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 1500

PSN
GE ring
OptiX OSN 1500
PSN
GE ring
OptiX OSN
3500/7500
OptiX OSN 1500
Traffic direction
GE processing board


PEG8 boards process and forward 8xGE services and support QoS functions such as traffic
management, congestion control, and queue scheduling for data packets.
Table 7-44 lists the functions and features supported by PEG8 boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
140

System
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by PEG8 boards

Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Provides eight GE optical/electrical ports on the front panel to receive/transmit

and process 8xGE signals.
Port
types
Supports 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-VX, and 1000BASEZX optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors and support the
Supports CWDM colored optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors
and support the transmission distances of 40 km and 80 km.
Supports DWDM colored optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors
and support the transmission distance of 120 km.
Supports GE electrical ports. The electrical ports use RJ45 connectors and
meet the specifications of the 1000BASE-T physical layer provided in IEEE
802.3.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Works with the interface board PETF8/PEFF8/CQ1/MD12/MD75. One PEG8

board can receive/transmit the FE/channelized E1/STM-1 CES services from a
maximum of two interface boards.
Works with the interface board MD12/MD75. One PEG8 board can
receive/transmit the ATM/IMA services from a maximum of two interface
boards.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Pluggab
le
optical/
electrica
l
module
Supports SFP optical/electrical modules.
Singlefiber
bidirecti
onal
optical
module
Supports SFP single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.
Workin
g modes
1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation for GE optical ports
Flow
control
at ports
Autonegotiation
mode
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Auto-negotiation for GE electrical ports (The negotiation result can

only be 1000M full-duplex.)
Supported

Copyright Huawei
141

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Nonautonegotia
tion mode
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Supported
Query/S
etting of
port
status
Supported
Query
of port
types
Supported
Query/S
etting of
optical
power
threshol
ds
Supported
Query/S
etting of
unidirec
tionalmode
Not supported
Processi
ng
capabili
ty
The processing capability varies according to slots.
Service
bearing
modes
MPLS
Supported
QinQ
Supported
Port
Supported
Maximum
number of
PWs
16K
Maximum
number of
MS-PWs
8K
Unidirectio
nal

shared):
PW
specific
ations
Tunnel
specific
ations
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
When a PEG8 is installed in any slot of slots 1-3 and 16, it

processes 2.5 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode.
When a PEG8 is installed in any slot of slots 4-6 and 13-15, it

processes 5 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode.

Copyright Huawei
142

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Bidirection
al
MTU
Etherne
t service
capabili
ty
Protec
tion
schem
es
Tunnel
APS

shared):
MTU for
ports

MTU for
services
For packet services carried by PWs, PEG8 boards

in other modes, PEG8 boards do not support the setting
E-Line
service
E-LAN
service
E-AGGR
service
Not supported
Formats of
Ethernet
data frames

Maximum
number of
QinQ links
1K
Jumbo
frame

bytes.
Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services: 2K

PW
APS

and 1:1 (dual-ended) PW APS in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and
ITU-T G.8131.
Supports a maximum of 1K PW APS protection groups, and a PW
protection group can bind a maximum of 512 members.
NOTE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
143

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
LAG
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
MCLAG
Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
MSTP
LPT
Point-topoint LPT
Supported
Point-tomultipoint
LPT
Supported
Synchro
nous
Etherne
t Clock
Supports eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clock signals (only by

GE optical ports).
1588v2
Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization and

clock synchronization (only by GE optical ports).
ETH
OAM
Ethernet
service
OAMa

IEEE 802.1ag.
ITU-T Y.1731.
OAM): 2K
Ethernet
port OAMa
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopback, fault

detection, and link performance monitoring. These
functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Distribu
ted
MPLS
OAM/C
entraliz
ed
MPLS
OAM
MPLS
tunnel
OAMa

MPLS PW
OAMa

MPLSTP
OAM
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAMa
and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T G.8113.1.
MPLS-TP
Number of MPLS PWs that support OAM: 2K
Number of tunnels that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K

Copyright Huawei
144

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
PW OAMa

G.8113.1.
Number of PWs that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K
Loopba
ck
capabili
ty
PHY layer
at Ethernet
ports
Not supported
MAC layer
at Ethernet
ports
RMON
Supported
Port
mirrorin
g
Inban
d
DCN
Supported
HQoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protoco
l
enablin
g
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported
Discard
ing of
unknow
n
broadca
st
packets
Supported
Static
broadca
st entry
Supported
Query
of
electro
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supported

Copyright Huawei
145

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
nic
labels
NOTE

The PEG8 consists of the network processing module, transmission management module,
switching network buffering module, CPU management module, clock module, and power
module.
Figure 7-9 shows the functional block diagram of the PEG8.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PEG8
Backplane
GE signals
Interface board
IEEE 1588 V2 packet

Interface board
Data processing
module
8xGE signals
Service
signal
Packet forwarding
module
Network processing
module
Upstream
transmission module
Downstream
scheduling module
Transmission
management module
Switching network
buffering module
CPU
management
module
Service
signal
PSXCSA
Parallel
management bus
Ethernet communication bus

GSCC
Other boards
System clock
Working clock
Interface board
Interface board/Eight GE signals
IEEE 1588 V2 packet
Interface board/Eight GE signals
Upstream
scheduling module
Downstream
transmission module
Service
signal

Clock module
Synchronous Ethernet
clock
IEEE 1588 V2 packet
Power
module
PSXCSA
PSXCSA
PSXCSA
- 48 V / - 60 V
- 48 V / - 60 V
Interface board

The network processing module receives the signals sent from the GE interface on the front
panel or the interface board, decodes the signals, and converts the serial signals into parallel
signals. Then, the network processing module performs route searching or address matching
for the data packets, and sends the corresponding packets to the transmission management
module. The transmission management module buffers and schedules the packets, slices the
packets into cells that the switching network requires, and sends the cells to the switching
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
146

System
network buffering module. The switching network buffering module buffers the cells and
sends the cells to the cross-connect unit.

module converts the parallel signals into serial signals, and sends the signals to the GE
interface on the front panel of the board or the corresponding interface board through the
backplane.

functions for data packets. The network processing module of the PEG8 can process 5 Gbit/s
data packets in full-duplex mode.


function at five levels for the flow queue and port queue, and the bandwidth restricting
function, and provides the corresponding statistics information.

direction.


buses to manage the modules of the PEG8 and the interface board to which the PEG8
corresponds. The CPU management module also monitors alarms and performance events and
reports the alarms and performance events to the SCC unit.

Provides the clock signal for each module of the board.
Supports the transparent transmission of the IEEE 1588v2 packets from the interface
board or the 8xGE signals to the PSXCSA.
Selects a clock source from the two system clocks sent from the PSXCSA and sends the
selected clock to the interface board and the modules of the PEG8.
Selects a clock source from the synchronous Ethernet clock signals accessed by the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
147

System
interface board or the 8xGE signals and sends the selected clock to the PSXCSA.

the board require.
7.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEG8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 7-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PEG8.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PEG8 with optical interfaces
PEG8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
PEG8
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
148

System
The front panel of the PEG8 has eight optical/electrical interfaces. Table 7-45 describes the
type and usage of the interface of the PEG8.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the PEG8
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
RX1-RX8
LC/RJ-45 (pluggable)
Receives GE signals.
TX1-TX8
LC/RJ-45 (pluggable)
Transmits GE signals.

The PEG8 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.3.7 Valid Slots

The PEG8 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the PEG8 fails to work
normally.
The PEG8 can be installed in slots 16, and 1316 in the subrack.
When the PEG8 is installed in slots 1-3, and 16, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
When the PEG8 is installed in slots 4-6 and 13-15, the bandwidth is 5 Gbit/s.
When the PEG8 works with the interface board PETF8/PEFF8/CQ1/MD12/MD75, one PEG8
can work with a maximum of two PETF8/PEFF8/CQ1/MD12/MD75 boards. In this case, all
the optical interfaces on the PEG8 can be used. Table 7-46 lists the slots valid for the PEG8
and the corresponding slots for the interface boards.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the PEG8 and the corresponding slots for the interface board
Slot Valid for the PEG8
Corresponding Slot for the Interface Board
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
149

System
Slot Valid for the PEG8
Corresponding Slot for the Interface Board
Slot 6
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36
7.3.8 Feature Code

The PEG8 does not have the feature code.


Step 3 Required: Check whether the interface board and cable match the board. Ensure that the
interface board and the cable match the board.
correct.
----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
150

System

Step 8 Required: Configure services. The following services can be configured according to actual
requirements:
Configure ATM/IMA service. For details, see Configuring ATM Services
Configuring PW OAM.
----End

Step 15 Required: Test the ATM/IMA service. For details, see Testing ATM Services.
----End

Configuration.
Configuration.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
151

System
Boards.
----End

The PEG8 supports the packet switching function and provides multiple packet-specific
functions and features, such as HQoS, LAG, and ETH OAM. Configure the functions
You can configure the following packet functions for the PEG8 by using the U2000:
HQoS
ETH OAM
MPLS OAM
MPLS-TP OAM
IGMP Snooping
Inband DCN
LPT
Tunnel APS
PW APS
LAG
MC-LAG
MS-PW
MSTP

You can set the parameters for the PEG8 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PEG8 by using the U2000:
Ethernet interface
Processing Boards.

Table 7-47 lists the faults that occur on the PEG8 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
152

System
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PEG8 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service
troubleshooting
The service is
interrupted.
The service loses

packets or has
errored packets.
The tunnel APS

switching fails.
The PW APS
switching fails.
The MC-LAG
switching fails.
fault
Interruptions.

Switching.
1.1.1.1.153 Replacing the Optical/Electrical Module

The OptiX OSN equipment supports pluggable optical/electrical modules. If an
optical/electrical module is faulty, replace only the faulty optical/electrical module instead of
the associated board.
For information on how to replace an optical/electrical module, see Replacing a Pluggable
Optical/Electrical Module.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PEG8, see Replacing a Packet Processing Board.

7.3.13.1 Alarms of N1PEG8

TEMP_OVER
COMMUN_FAIL
TR_LOC
BUS_ERR
NO_BD_SOFT
TEST_STATUS
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
POWER_ABNORMAL
BD_STATUS
PW_NO_TRAFFIC
WRG_BD_TYPE
LSR_NO_FITED
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
ALM_ALS
LSR_WILL_DIE
IN_PWR_ABN
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
153

System
LSR_BCM_ALM
FLOW_OVER
LOOP_ALM
ETH_LOS
ETH_LINK_DOWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MAC_FCS_EXC
FDBSIZEALM_ELAN
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISME
RGE
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATC
H
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKN
OWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMA
TCH
ETH_APS_PATH_MISM
ATCH
LAG_DOWN
ETH_APS_LOST
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
MPLS_PW_LOCV
MPLS_PW_Excess
MPLS_PW_BDI
MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
MPLS_PW_SD
MCLAG_CFG_MISMATC
H
MPLS_PW_SF
MCSP_PATH_LOCV
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATC
H
PWAPS_PATH_MISMAT
CH
PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
PWAPS_LOST
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
BWUTILIZATION_OVE
R
SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFA
IL
MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL
DROPRATIO_OVER
PW_DROPPKT_EXC
ETH_NO_FLOW
TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
154

System
7.3.14.1 Performance Events of N1PEG8

Figure 1.1 SDH
CPUUSAGEMAX
CPUUSAGEMIN
CPUUSAGECUR
MEMUSAGEMAX
MEMUSAGEMIN
MEMUSAGECUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR

ETH_CFM_LS
ETH_CFM_SLS
ETH_CFM_CSLS
ETH_CFM_UAS
ETH_CFM_FLR
ETH_CFM_FL
ETH_CFM_FD
ETH_CFM_FDV

MPLS_TUNNEL_LS
MPLS_TUNNEL_SLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_CSLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_UAS
MPLS_TUNNEL_FLR
MPLS_TUNNEL_FL
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV
Figure 1.4 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TNL_BW_UTILISATION
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SND
PKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SND
BYTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RC
VPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RCV
BYTES
TNL_REVERSE_BW_UTI
LISATION
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
PPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
155

System

MPLS_PW_LS
MPLS_PW_SLS
MPLS_PW_CSLS
MPLS_PW_UAS
MPLS_PW_FLR
MPLS_PW_FL
MPLS_PW_FD
MPLS_PW_FDV
Figure 1.6 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
TION
PW_DROPBYTES
PW_RX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
PW_TX_BPS
Figure 1.7 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES
VUNI_TX_UTILIZATION
VLAN_RCVPKTS
VLAN_RCVBYTES
VLAN_SNDPKTS
VLAN_SNDBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPPKTS
VUNI_SND_DROPBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPRATIO
VLAN_RX_BPS
VLAN_TX_BPS
VLAN_RX_PPS
VLAN_TX_PPS

RXOCTETS
RXPKTS
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
ETHUNDER
ETHOVER
ETHFRG
ETHJAB
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT1024

RXPKT1519
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
TXPKT64
Copyright Huawei
TXPKT65
156

System
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT1024
TXPKT1519
PKT64
PKT65
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
PKT1519
TXMULCAST
TXBRDCAST
RXPAUSE
ETHALI
ETHFCS
ETHUTILIZ
RXCTLPKTS
TXPKTS
TXOCTETS
TY
PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZ
ATION
PORT_TX_BW_UTILI
ZATION
TX_DROP_RATIO
RXBPS
TXBPS
RXPPS
TXPPS
Figure 1.10 QoS

QOS_STRM_MATCHPKT
S
QOS_STRM_MATCHBYT
ES
QOS_CARGRNPKTS
QOS_CARGRNBYTES
QOS_CARYLWPKTS
QOS_CARYLWBYTES
QOS_CARREDPKTS
QOS_CARREDBYTES
QOS_CARREDRATIO
FLOW_RX_UTILIZATION
QOS_PRI_DROPPKTS
QOS_PRI_DROPBYTES
PORT_PRI_SNDPKTS
PORT_PRI_SNDBYTES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPPK
TS
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPBY
TES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPRA
TIO
TNL_SNDDROPPKTS
TNL_SNDDROPBYTES
TNL_SNDDROPRATIO
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PPKTS
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PBYTES
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PRATIO
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
RATIO
QOS_PORTQUEUE_DROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDPKTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDBYTES
VGROUP_TX_UTILIZATI
ON
PORT_PRI_TX_BPS
PORT_PRI_TX_PPS
PWQUEUE_TX_BPS
PWQUEUE_TX_PPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
157

System
7.3.15 Technical Specifications of PEG8

The technical specifications of the PEG8 include the Ethernet performance specifications,
laser safety class, parameters specified for optical interfaces, mechanical specifications, and
power consumption.

Table 7-58 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PEG8.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PEG8
Parameter
Value
Type of
interface
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASEVX
1000BASE-ZX
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5
10
40
80
Type of fiber
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17
-20
-23
-23
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
Table 7-59 lists the parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of
the PEG8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
158

System
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the PEG8
Parameter
Value
Type of
interface
1000BASELX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
1000BASE-VX
Transmissi
on distance
(km)
10
10
40
40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelength
(nm)
1490
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelength
(nm)
1310
1490
1310
1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
-2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5
-19.5
-23
-23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 7-60 and Table 7-61 lists the parameters specified for the GE colored optical interfaces
of the PEG8.
Figure 1.3 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the PEG8
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
1250000 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
40
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
80
159

System
Parameter
Value
CWDM

(dBm)
0 to 5
0 to 5

(nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of

20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-19
-28
-3
-9

(ps/nm)
800
1600
8.2
8.2

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30
30
Figure 1.4 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the PEG8
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
1250000 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
120

(dBm)
-1 to 3
Central frequency (THz)
192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency deviation

(GHz)
10
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
2400
8.2

width (nm)
0.3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
160

System
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Minimum side mode

30
1.1.1.1.156 Parameters Specified for Electrical Interfaces

Table 7-62 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PEG8.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PEG8
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
1000 Mbit/s
Code pattern
4D-PAM5
Type of interface
RJ-45


The mechanical specifications of the PEG8 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.2

The maximum power consumption of the PEG8 at room temperature (25C) is 47 W.
7.4 PEG16
technical specifications of the PEG16 (16xGE Ethernet processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PEG16.

The PEG16 is available in one functional version, namely, N1. The PEG16 is discontinued.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
161

System
7.4.2 Application
The PEG16 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
packets, manage bandwidths, and realize switching and aggregation of data packets.
Figure 7-11 shows the typical networking and application when the PEG16 works with the
other boards on the network. The PEG16 works with the cross-connect board that provides the
packet switching function to meet the requirement of packet features. With this board, the
TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet domain on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit data in the two domains. In this way, the equipment realizes the smooth evolution
from the MSTP network to the packet switching network.
For the typical networking and application when the PEG16 works with the PETF8, see 8.1.2
Application.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the PEG16
OptiX OSN 3500/
7500
NMS
OptiX OSN 3500/

7500
OptiX OSN 3500/

7500
PSN
10GE ring
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 1500

PSN
GE ring
OptiX OSN 1500
PSN
GE ring
OptiX OSN
3500/7500
OptiX OSN 1500
Traffic direction
GE processing board


PEG16 boards receive/transmit and forward 16xGE services, and support the QoS functions
such as traffic measurement, congestion control, and queue scheduling for data packets.
Table 7-63
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
162

System
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by PEG16 boards

Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits and processes 16xGE services.
Port
types
Supports 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-VX, and 1000BASEZX optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors and support the
Supports CWDM colored optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors
and support the transmission distance of 40 km.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Provides ports on the front panel or works with the interface board PETF8. One
PEG16 board can receive/transmit the FE services of a maximum of two interface
boards.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Pluggab
le
optical
module
Supports SFP optical modules.
Singlefiber
bidirecti
onal
optical
module
Not supported
Workin
g modes
Full-duplex and auto-negotiation for GE ports
Flow
control
at ports
Autonegotiation
mode
Not supported
Nonautonegotia
tion mode
Not supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Query/S
etting of
port
status
Supported
Query
Supported
Copyright Huawei
163

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
of port
types
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Query/S
etting of
optical
power
threshol
ds
The setting of input optical power thresholds is supported.
Query/S
etting of
unidirec
tionalmode
Not supported
Processi
ng
capabili
ty
Service
bearing
modes
MPLS
Supported
QinQ
Supported
Port
Supported
Maximum
number of
PWs
16K
Maximum
number of
MS-PWs
8K
Tunnel
specific
ations
Unidirectio
nal

shared): 4K
Bidirection
al

shared): 2K
MTU
MTU for
ports

MTU for
services

from 64 bytes to 9000 bytes.
E-Line
service
PW
specific
ations
Ethernet
service
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
164

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
capabili
ty
Protec
tion
schem
es
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Tunnel
APS
E-LAN
service
Number of supported E-LAN services: 1020.
E-AGGR
service
4, each of which supports 127 leaf ports
Formats of
Ethernet
data frames

Maximum
number of
QinQ links
1K
Jumbo
frame

bytes.
Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services:

2K.

Number of supported Tunnel APS protection groups:1K
PW
APS
Not supported
LAG
MCLAG
Not supported
MSTP
Not supported
LPT
Point-topoint LPT
Supported
Point-tomultipoint
LPT
Supported
Synchro
nous
Ethernet
Clock
Provides two GE optical ports (only by the first two optical ports) that
support the synchronous Ethernet clock feature.
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
ETH
Ethernet

Copyright Huawei
165

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
enanc
e
featur
es
OAM
service
OAMa
IEEE 802.1ag.
ITU-T Y.1731.
OAM): 2K
Ethernet
port OAMa

detection, and link performance monitoring. These
Distribu
ted
MPLS
OAM/C
entraliz
ed
MPLS
OAM
MPLS
tunnel
OAMa

MPLS PW
OAM
Not supported
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAM
Not supported
MPLS-TP
PW OAM
Not supported
Loopba
ck
capabili
ty
PHY layer
at Ethernet
ports
MAC layer
at Ethernet
ports
Supports inloops.
RMON
Supported
Port
mirrorin
g
Not supported
NOTE
PEG16
boards
support
only
distribu
ted
MPLS
OAM.
MPLSTP
OAM
Inban
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supported
Copyright Huawei
166

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
d
DCN
HQoS
Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, PW polices, QinQ polices, VUNI ingress policies, V-UNI egress policies, port policies.
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protocol
enablin
g
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported
Discardi
ng of
unknow
n
broadca
st
packets
Supported
Static
broadca
st entry
Supported
Query
of
electro
nic
labels
Supported
NOTE
For MPLS tunnel OAM and ETH OAM share OAM resources.

The PEG16 consists of the network processing module, transmission management module,
switching network buffering module, CPU management module, clock module, and power
module.
Figure 7-12 shows the functional block diagram of the PEG16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
167

System
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PEG16

Backplane
GE signals
Interface board
IEEE 1588 V2 packet

Interface board
Data processing
module
16xGE signals
Service Upstream transmission

module
signal
Service
signal
Upstream
scheduling module
Packet forwarding
module
Downstream
transmission module
Downstream
scheduling module
Network processing
module
Transmission
management module
Switching network
buffering module
Service
signal
PSXCSA
Parallel
management bus
Ethernet communication bus

CPU management
module
Other boards
System clock
Working clock
Interface board
Interface board/First two GE signals
IEEE 1588 V2 packet
Interface board/First two GE signals
GSCC

Clock module
PSXCSA
Synchronous Ethernet
clock
PSXCSA
PSXCSA
IEEE 1588 V2 packet
Power
module
- 48 V / - 60 V
- 48 V / - 60 V
Interface board

The network processing module receives the signals sent from the GE interface on the front
panel or the interface board, decodes the signals, and converts the serial signals into parallel
signals. Then, the network processing module performs route searching or address matching
for the data packets, and sends the corresponding packets to the transmission management
module. The transmission management module buffers and grooms the packets, slices the
packets into cells that the switching network requires, and sends the cells to the switching
network buffering module. The switching network buffering module buffers the cells and
sends the cells to the cross-connect unit.

module converts the parallel signals into serial signals, and sends the signals to the GE
interface on the front panel of the PEG16 or the corresponding interface board through the
backplane.

functions for data packets. The network processing module of the PEG16 can process the 10

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
168

System

function at five levels including the flow queue and port queue, the bandwidth restricting
function, and the corresponding statistical information.

direction.


buses to manage the modules of the PEG16 and the interface board to which the PEG16
corresponds. The CPU management module also monitors alarms and performance events and
reports the alarms and performance events to the SCC unit.

Provides the clock signal for each module of the PEG16.
Supports the transparent transmission of the IEEE 1588v2 packets from the interface
board or the first two channels of GE signals to the PSXCS.
Selects a clock source from the two system clocks sent from the PSXCS and sends the
selected clock to the interface board and the modules of the PEG16.
Selects a clock source from the synchronous Ethernet clock signals accessed by the
interface board or the first two channels of GE signals and sends the selected clock to the
PSXCS.

the PEG16 require.
7.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEG16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 7-13 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PEG16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
169

System
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PEG16
PEG16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT9
OUT1
IN9 OUT10 IN10 OUT11 IN11 OUT12 IN12
IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
OUT1
OUT13 IN13 OUT14 IN14
IN15 OUT16 IN16
5
OUT5 IN5
OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
PEG16
The front panel of the PEG16 has sixteen GE optical interfaces. Table 7-64 describes the
types and usage of the optical interfaces of the PEG16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
170

System
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the PEG16

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN16
LC (pluggable)
Receives GE signals.
OUT1
OUT16
LC (pluggable)
Transmits GE signals.

The PEG16 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.4.7 Valid Slots

The PEG16 occupies two slots and can be installed in any two adjacent slots among slots 16
and 1316. The PEG16 slot displayed on the is the slot that has a smaller slot number
between the two slots that house the PEG16. For example, if the PEG16 is installed in slots 1
and 2, the PEG16 slot displayed on the is slot 1.
When the PEG16 works with the interface board PETF8, one PEG16 board can work with a
maximum of two PETF8 boards. In this case, all the optical interfaces on the PEG16 can be
used. Table 7-65 lists the slots valid for the PEG16 and the corresponding slots for the PETF8.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the PEG16 and the corresponding slots for the PETF8
Slot Valid for the
PEG16
Corresponding Logical Slot
Corresponding Slot for the

PETF8
Slots 1 and 2
Slot 1
Slots 3 and 4
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slots 5 and 6
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slots 13 and 14
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slots 15 and 16
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Two-slot boards can work only with cross-connect boards whose logical boards are N1PSXCS.
The dual-slot board PEG16 cannot be configured together with the single-slot board
N2PEX1/N1PEX2/PEG8.
When working with the cross-connect board N1PSXCS and the EDQ41 board, the dual-slot board
PEG16 cannot be housed in slot 1 or slot 15.
7.4.8 Feature Code

The PEG16 does not have the feature code.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
171

System

interface board and the cable match the board.
correct.
----End


Configure the E-AGGR service. For details, see Configuring E-AGGR Services.
Step 9 Optional: Configure the MPLS OAM. For details, see Configuring the MPLS OAM.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
172

System
----End

----End

Configuration.
Configuration.
Check the E-AGGR service. For details, see Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR
Service Configuration.
Boards.
----End

The PEG16 supports the packet switching function and provides multiple packet switchingspecific functions and features, such as HQoS, LAG, and ETH OAM. Configure the functions
You can configure the following packet switching functions for the PEG16 by using the
U2000:
HQoS
ETH OAM
MPLS OAM
IGMP Snooping
Inband DCN
LPT
Tunnel APS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
173

System
LAG
MS-PW

You can set parameters for the PEG16 by using the U2000.
1.1.1.1.175 Displayed Slots

The PEG16 occupies two slots in the subrack. The logical slot of the PEG16 displayed on the
U2000 is the slot that has a smaller slot number between the two slots that house the PEG16.
For the logical slots of the PEG16 displayed on the U2000, refer to Table 7-65.
1.1.1.1.176 Board Parameters

You can set the following principal parameter for the PEG16 by using the U2000:
Ethernet interface
For more parameters and the description of the parameters, see 26.1 Packet Processing
Boards.

Table 7-66 lists the faults that occur on the PEG16 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PEG16 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service
troubleshooting
The service is
interrupted.
The service loses

packets or has
errored packets.
fault
The MPLS APS

switching fails.
Interruptions.
See Troubleshooting.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PEG16, see Replacing a Packet Processing Board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
174

System

7.4.13.1 Alarms of N1PEG16

ALM_ALS
BD_STATUS
ETH_APS_LOST
BUS_ERR
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATC
H
ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH
ETH_APS_SWIT
CH_FAIL
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_CFM_UNE
XPERI
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_LINK_DOWN
ETH_EFM_LOO
PBACK
FDBSIZEALM_ELAN
FLOW_OVER
ETH_LOS
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
IN_PWR_ABN
LAG_DOWN
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LASER_MOD_E
RR
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LSR_BCM_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MAC_FCS_EXC
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL
_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
MPLS_TUNNEL
_MISMERGE
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
MPLS_TUNNEL
_UNKNOWN
NO_BD_SOFT
POWER_ABNORMAL
TEMP_OVER
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEST_STATUS
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
PW_NO_TRAFF
IC
W_OFFLINE
TR_LOC
IN_PWR_LOW
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
TUNNEL_APS_
OUTAGE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
175

System

7.4.14.1 Performance Events of N1PEG16

Figure 1.1 SDH
BDTEMPCUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
CPUUSAGECUR
CPUUSAGEMAX
CPUUSAGEMIN
MEMUSAGECUR
MEMUSAGEMAX
MEMUSAGEMIN
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
ETH_CFM_FLR
ETH_CFM_FL
ETH_CFM_FD
ETH_CFM_FDV
ETH_CFM_LS
ETH_CFM_SLS
ETH_CFM_UAS
ETH_CFM_CSLS

MPLS_TUNNEL_LS
MPLS_TUNNEL_SLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_UAS
MPLS_TUNNEL_CSLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_FLR
MPLS_TUNNEL_FL
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV
Figure 1.4 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SN
DPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SNDB
YTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RC
VPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RC
VBYTES
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_P
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
176

System
BPS
PPS
PS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX
_BPS
Figure 1.5 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UTILISATI
ON
PW_RX_BPS
PW_TX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
Figure 1.6 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES

RXPKTS
RXOCTETS
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT1024
ETHUNDER
ETHJAB
ETHOVER

TXPKTS
TXOCTETS
TXBGOOD
TXUNICAST
TXBRDCAST
TXMULCAST
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT1024
TXPKT1519
TXDEFFRM
RXBGOOD
RXUNICAST
RXPAUSE
RXPKT1519
PKT64
PKT65
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
PKT1519
ETHFCS
ETHCARERR
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
177

System
ETHLATECOL
ETHEXCCOL
ETHMULCOL
ETHUNICOL
PORT_RX_BYTES_AV
AILABILITY
RXBPS
TXBPS
RXPPS
TXPPS
7.4.15 Technical Specifications of PEG16

The technical specifications of the PEG16 include the Ethernet performance specifications,
laser safety class, parameters specified for optical interfaces, mechanical specifications, and
power consumption.

Table 7-75 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PEG16.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PEG16
Parameter
Value
Type of
interface
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASEVX
1000BASE-ZX
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5
10
40
80
Type of fiber
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17
-20
-23
-23
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
178

System
Parameter
Value
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
Table 7-76 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the PEG16.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the PEG16
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
1250000 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
40

(dBm)
0 to 5

(nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-19
-3

(ps/nm)
800
8.2

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30


The mechanical specifications of the PEG16 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 2.3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
179

System

The maximum power consumption of the PEG16 at room temperature (25C) is 137 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
180

System
8 Packet Interface Boards
Packet Interface Boards
About This Chapter

The packet interface boards include the PETF8, PEFF8, CQ1, MD12, and MD75. They
provide packet switching boards with cable input/output interfaces for myriad signals.
8.1 PETF8
technical specifications of the PETF8 (8xFE electrical interface board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PETF8.
8.2 PEFF8
technical specifications of the PEFF8 (8-port fast Ethernet optical interface processing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PEFF8.
8.3 CQ1
technical specifications of the CQ1 (4-channel channelized STM-1 CES optical interface
board).
8.4 MD12
technical specifications of the MD12 (multi-protocol 32-channels E1 interface processing
board). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the MD12.
8.5 MD75
8.1 PETF8
technical specifications of the PETF8 (8xFE electrical interface board). This topic also
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
181

System
describes how to configure and commission the PETF8.

The PETF8 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
8.1.2 Application
The PETF8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
Figure 8-1 shows the typical networking and application of the PETF8. The PETF8 works
with the cross-connect board that provides the packet switching function to meet the
requirement of packet features. With this board, the TDM domain can be overlapped with the
packet domain on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit data in the two domains. In this way,
the equipment realizes the smooth evolution from the MSTP network to the packet switching
network.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the PETF8
NMS
NE1
User A2
NE2
PSN
NE4
NE3
User B2
Traffic direction
User B1
PEG8/PEG16
PETF8
Dual-domain (TDM domain
and packet domain) cross- User A1
connect board

PETF8 boards receive/transmit 8xFE electrical signals and work with PEG8/PEG16 boards to
process services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
182

System
Table 8-1 lists the functions and features supported by PETF8 boards. 7.3.3 Functions and
Features lists the functions and features supported by PETF8 boards that work with PEG8
boards. 8.1.3 Functions and Features lists the functions and features supported by PETF8
boards that work with PEG16 boards.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by PETF8 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits and processes 8xFE electrical signals.
Port
types
Uses the RJ45 connector and meets the specifications of the 100BASE-TX
physical layer provided in IEEE 802.3.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Pluggab
le
optical
module
Not supported
Singlefiber
bidirecti
onal
optical
module
Not supported
Workin
g modes
100 Mbit/s full-duplex or auto-negotiation for FE electrical ports (In

auto-negotiation mode, only the 100 Mbit/s full-duplex working mode
is supported.)
Flow
control
at ports
Autonegotiation
mode
Not supported
Nonautonegotia
tion mode
Not supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Query/S
etting of
port
status
Supported
Query
of port
types
Not supported
Query/S
etting of
optical
power
threshol
Not supported

Copyright Huawei
183

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
ds
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Query/S
etting of
unidirec
tionalmode
Not supported
Service
bearing
modes
MPLS
Supported
QinQ
Supported
Port
Supported
MTU for
ports
When working with PEG16 boards, PETF8 boards do

not support the setting of the packet length, which takes
the default value of 9600 bytes. When working with
PEG8 boards, PETF8 boards support the setting of the
packet length, which ranges from 960 bytes to 1976
bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of a
packet that enters or exits a port is restricted by the MTU
preset for the port.
MTU for
services
For packet services carried by PWs, PETF8 boards

in other modes, PETF8 boards do not support the setting
E-Line
service
Supported
E-LAN
service
Supported
E-AGGR
service
When working with PEG16 boards, PETF8 boards

support the E-AGGR service.
Formats of
Ethernet
data frames

Jumbo
frame

support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 1976
bytes.
MTU
Ethernet
service
capabili
ty

support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600
bytes.
Protec
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
MS-PW
Supports static MS-PWs.
Tunnel

Copyright Huawei
184

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
tion
schem
es
APS
PW
APS

and 1:1 (dual-ended) PW APS when working with the PEG8 in
compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Does not support PW APS when working with the PEG16.
LAG
MCLAG
Supports MC-LAG when working with the PEG8 in compliance with

802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
Does not support MC-LAG when working with the PEG16.
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
MSTP
LPT
Point-topoint LPT
Supported
Point-tomultipoint
LPT
Supported
Synchro
nous
Ethernet
Clock
PETF8 boards support eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clocks.
1588v2
PETF8 boards support eight channels of IEEE 1588v2 time

synchronization and clock synchronization.
ETH
OAM
Ethernet
service
OAMa

IEEE 802.1ag.
Ethernet
port OAMa
Supports OAM auto-discovery, fault detection, and link

performance monitoring. These functions comply with
IEEE 802.3ah.
Distribu
ted
MPLS
OAM/C
entraliz
ed
MPLS
OAM
MPLS
tunnel
OAMa

MPLS PW
OAMa

MPLS-
MPLS-TP

ITU-T Y.1731.

Copyright Huawei
185

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
TP
OAM
tunnel
OAMa

G.8113.1.
NOTE
When
workin
g with
PEG8
boards,
PETF8
boards
support
MPLSTP
OAM.
MPLS-TP
PW OAMa
G.8113.1.
Loopba
ck
capabili
ty
PHY layer
at Ethernet
ports
Supports inloops.
MAC layer
at Ethernet
ports
RMON
Supported
Port
mirrorin
g
Inban
d
DCN
Supported
HQoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protocol
enablin
g
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported
Discardi
ng of
unknow
n
broadca
st
Supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
186

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
packets
Static
broadca
st entry
Query
of
electro
nic
labels
Supported
Supported
NOTE

The PETF8 consists of the access and converging module, control and driving module,
voltage detecting module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 8-2 shows the functional block diagram of the PETF8.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PETF8
Voltage detecting
module
8xFE electrical
signals
Access and
converging
module
Voltage detecting
signal
GE
Management bus
IEEE
Control and
GE service
1588 V2 driving module
signal
Backplane
IEEE
Working
1588 V2
clock signal
signal
One system clock
Working clock
signal
Clock
module
IEEE 1588 V2 packet
Synchronous
clock
PEG16/PEG8
PEG16/PEG8
PEG16/PEG8
PEG16/PEG8
PEG16/PEG8
Modules of
the board
Modules of
the board
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
PEG16/PEG8
+3.3 V backup power
1.1.1.1.183 Upstream Direction

The services in the upstream direction are accessed by the FE ports. The service packets are
added with different VLAN tags according to the ingress ports. Then, the services are
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
187

System
transmitted to the GE port on the backplane side. As a result, the FE services are converged
into the GE services. After the PEG16 receives the packets, the PEG8/PEG16 identifies the
ports to which the services correspond according to the VLAN tags and strips the VLAN tags.
1.1.1.1.184 Downstream Direction

The services in the downstream direction are added with VLAN tags on the PEG8/PEG16
according to the destination ports. Then, the services are accessed by the GE port on the
backplane side. The VLAN tags indicate the destination ports of the service packets. The
service packets are sent to the destination ports after the VLAN tags are stripped.
1.1.1.1.185 Access and Converging Module

The access and converging module performs the following functions:
Transmits/Receives 8xFE electrical signals.
Converges 8xFE services into 1xGE services on the backplane side.
Extracts the IEEE 1588v2 clock information.
1.1.1.1.186 Control and Driving Module

The control and driving module performs the following functions:
Detects the system status through the management control bus.
Checks whether the board is properly inserted.
Detects the voltage of the PETF8.
Realizes the hot-swappable function of the PETF8.
1.1.1.1.187 Voltage Detecting Module

The voltage detecting module monitors the voltage.

Provides the working clock signal for each module of the PETF8.

the PETF8 require.
8.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PETF8 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Figure 8-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PETF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
188

System
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PETF8
PETF8
STAT
ACT
SRV
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
FE7
FE8
PETF8
Service alarm indicator (SRV) two colors (red and green)
Connection status indicator (LINK) one color (green and located on the RJ45
connector)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) one color (orange and located on the
RJ45 connector)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
189

System
The front panel of the PETF8 has eight FE electrical interfaces. Table 8-2 describes the types
and usage of the electrical interfaces of the PETF8.
Figure 1.1 Electrical interfaces of the PETF8
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
FE1FE8
RJ-45
Transmits and receives FE signals.

The PETF8 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
8.1.7 Valid Slots

The PETF8 must be installed in a valid slot on the subrack. Otherwise, the PETF8 fails to
work normally.
The PETF8 can be installed in slots 1926, and 2936 in the subrack.
The PETF8 works as the interface board for the PEG8 and PEG16. For the slots valid for the
PEG8 and PEG16 and the corresponding slots for the PETF8, refer to Table 7-46 and Table 765.
8.1.8 Feature Code

The PETF8 does not have the feature code.


board.
correct.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
190

System
----End


Configuring PW OAM.
----End

----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
191

System

Configuration.
Configuration.
Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the PETF8 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PETF8 by using the U2000:
Ethernet interface
For more parameters the description of the parameters, see 26.1 Packet Processing Boards.

Table 8-3 lists the faults that occur on the PETF8 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PETF8 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service
troubleshooting
The service is
interrupted.
The service loses

packets or has
errored packets.
The tunnel APS

switching fails.
The PW APS
switching fails.
fault
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Switching.

Copyright Huawei
192

System
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The MC-LAG
switching fails.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PETF8, see Replacing a Packet Interface Board.

8.1.12.1 Alarms of N1PETF8

Table 8-4 provides the alarms supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8 works together with the
PEG8..
Figure 1.1 Alarms

TEMP_OVER
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
POWER_ABNORMAL
BD_STATUS
WRG_BD_TYPE
FLOW_OVER
LOOP_ALM
ETH_LOS
ETH_LINK_DOWN
MAC_FCS_EXC
FDBSIZEALM_ELAN
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMA
TCH
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMER
GE
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNO
WN
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_APS_LOST
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMA
TCH
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
PW_NO_TRAFFIC
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
MPLS_PW_Excess
LAG_DOWN
MPLS_PW_LOCV
MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
193

System
MPLS_PW_SF
MPLS_PW_BDI
MPLS_PW_SD
PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATC
H
PWAPS_PATH_MISMATC
H
MCLAG_CFG_MISMATC
H
PWAPS_LOST
MCSP_PATH_LOCV
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
PORTMODE_MISMATCH
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRAD
ED
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
BWUTILIZATION_OVER
SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAI
L
MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL
DROPRATIO_OVER
ETH_NO_FLOW
PW_DROPPKT_EXC
ETH_APS_PATH_MISMA
TCH
TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE
Table 8-5 provides the alarms supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8 works together with the
PEG16..
Figure 1.2 Alarms

TEMP_OVER
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
POWER_ABNORMAL
BD_STATUS
WRG_BD_TYPE
FLOW_OVER
LOOP_ALM
ETH_LOS
ETH_LINK_DOWN
MAC_FCS_EXC
FDBSIZEALM_ELAN
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMA
TCH
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMER
GE
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNO
WN
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_APS_LOST
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMA
TCH
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
PW_NO_TRAFFIC
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
LAG_DOWN
ETH_APS_PATH_MISMAT
CH
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRAD
ED
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
PORTMODE_MISMATCH
TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
194

System

8.1.13.1 Performance Events of N1PETF8

Figure 1.3 SDH
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR

ETH_CFM_LS
ETH_CFM_SLS
ETH_CFM_CSLS
ETH_CFM_UAS
ETH_CFM_FLR
ETH_CFM_FL
ETH_CFM_FD
ETH_CFM_FDV

MPLS_TUNNEL_LS
MPLS_TUNNEL_SLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_CSLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_UAS
MPLS_TUNNEL_FLR
MPLS_TUNNEL_FL
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV
Table 8-9 provides the statistical items of tunnel supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8 works
together with the PEG8.
Figure 1.6 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TNL_BW_UTILISATIO
N
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SND
PKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SNDB
YTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
CVPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RCV
BYTES
TNL_REVERSE_BW_UTILI
SATION
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_B
PS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
X_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
PPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
195

System
Table 8-10 provides the statistical items of tunnel supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8 works
Figure 1.7 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SN
DPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SNDB
YTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RC
VPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RC
VBYTES
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX
_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_P
PS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
BPS
Table 8-11 provides the statistical items of MPLS PW OAM supported by the N1PETF8 when the
N1PETF8 works together with the PEG8. When working together with the PEG16, the N1PETF8 does
not support MPLS PW OAM performance measurement.

MPLS_PW_LS
MPLS_PW_SLS
MPLS_PW_CSLS
MPLS_PW_UAS
MPLS_PW_FLR
MPLS_PW_FL
MPLS_PW_FD
MPLS_PW_FDV
Table 8-12 provides the statistical items of PW supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8 works
Figure 1.9 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UT
ILISATION
PW_DROPPKTS
PW_DROPBYTES
PW_RX_BPS
PW_TX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
196

System
Table 8-13 provides the statistical items of PW supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8 works
Figure 1.10 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UTILI
SATION
PW_RX_BPS
PW_TX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
Table 8-14 provides the statistical items of L2VPN supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8
works together with the PEG8.
Figure 1.11 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES
VUNI_TX_UTILIZATION
VLAN_RCVPKTS
VLAN_RCVBYTES
VLAN_SNDPKTS
VLAN_SNDBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPPKTS
VUNI_SND_DROPBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPRATIO
VLAN_RX_BPS
VLAN_TX_BPS
VLAN_RX_PPS
VLAN_TX_PPS
Table 8-15 provides the statistical items of L2VPN supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8
Figure 1.12 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES
Table 8-16 and Table 8-17 provide the statistical items supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8

RXOCTETS
RXPKTS
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
ETHUNDER
RXPKT64
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
197

System
RXPKT1024

RXPKT1519
TXPKT64
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT1024
TXPKT1519
PKT64
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
PKT1519
RXUNICAST
TXUNICAST
TXMULCAST
TXBRDCAST
ETHFCS
TXPKTS
TXOCTETS
PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZA
TION
PORT_TX_BW_UTILIZATI
ON
TX_DROP_RATIO
RXBPS
TXBPS
RXPPS
TXPPS
Table 8-18 and Table 8-19 provide the statistical items supported by the N1PETF8 when the N1PETF8

RXPKTS
RXOCTETS
RXPKT65
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT1024
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
ETHUNDER

TXPKTS
TXOCTETS
TXUNICAST
TXBRDCAST
TXMULCAST
TXPKT65
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT1024
TXPKT1519
RXUNICAST
RXPKT1519
PKT1519
ETHFCS
PKT65
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
PORT_RX_BYTES_AVAI
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
198

System
LABILITY
TX_DROP_RATIO
RXBPS
RXPPS
TXPPS
TXBPS
Table 8-20 provides the statistical items of QoS and VUNI supported by the N1PETF8 when the
N1PETF8 works together with the PEG8.
Figure 1.17 QoS

QOS_STRM_MATCHPKT
S
QOS_STRM_MATCHBYT
ES
QOS_CARGRNPKTS
QOS_CARGRNBYTES
QOS_CARYLWPKTS
QOS_CARYLWBYTES
QOS_CARREDPKTS
QOS_CARREDBYTES
QOS_CARREDRATIO
FLOW_RX_UTILIZATION
QOS_PRI_DROPPKTS
QOS_PRI_DROPBYTES
PORT_PRI_SNDPKTS
PORT_PRI_SNDBYTES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPPK
TS
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPBY
TES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPRA
TIO
TNL_SNDDROPPKTS
TNL_SNDDROPBYTES
TNL_SNDDROPRATIO
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PPKTS
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PBYTES
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PRATIO
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
RATIO
QOS_PORTQUEUE_DROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDPKTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDBYTES
VGROUP_TX_UTILIZATI
ON
PORT_PRI_TX_BPS
PORT_PRI_TX_PPS
PWQUEUE_TX_BPS
PWQUEUE_TX_PPS
8.1.14 Technical Specifications of PETF8

The technical specifications of the PETF8 include the parameters specified for electrical
interfaces, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Table 8-21 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PETF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
199

System
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PETF8
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
100 Mbit/s
Type of electrical interface
RJ-45
Line code pattern
MLT-3 encoding signal (100M)
Specifications of the
interface
Complies with IEEE 802.3u.

The mechanical specifications of the PETF8 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the PETF8 at room temperature (25C) is 6 W.
8.2 PEFF8
technical specifications of the PEFF8 (8-port fast Ethernet optical interface processing board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PEFF8.

The PEFF8 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
8.2.2 Application
The PEFF8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
packets, manage bandwidths, and implement switching of data packets.
Figure 8-4 shows the typical networking and application of the PEFF8. The PEFF8 works
with the cross-connect board that provides the packet switching function to meet the
requirement of packet features. With this board, the TDM domain can be overlapped with the
packet domain on the OptiX OSN equipment so that the data can be transmitted in the two
domains. In this manner, an MSTP network can smoothly evolve to a packet switching
network.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
200

System
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the PEFF8
NMS
NE1
User A2
NE2
PSN
NE4
NE3
User B2
Traffic direction
User B1
PEG8
PEFF8
Dual-domain (TDM domain
and packet domain) cross- User A1
connect board

PEFF8 boards receive/transmit 8xFE optical signals and work with the PEG8 to process
services.
Table 8-22 lists the functions and features supported by PEFF8 boards. When working with
PEG8 boards, PEFF8 boards support the functions and features as described in 7.3.3
Functions and Features.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by PEFF8 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits and processes 8xFE optical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
201

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Port
types
Supports 100Base-FX/LX/VX/ZX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports use LC

connectors and support the transmission distances of 2 km, 15 km, 40 km, and 80
km.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Pluggab
le
optical
module
Singlefiber
bidirecti
onal
optical
module
Supports SFP single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.
Workin
g modes
100M full-duplex
Flow
control
at ports
Autonegotiation
mode
Not supported
Nonautonegotia
tion mode
Not supported
Servic
e
specifi
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Query/S
etting of
port
status
Supported
Query
of port
types
Supported
Query/S
etting of
optical
power
threshol
ds
Supported
Query/S
etting of
unidirec
tionalmode
Not supported
Service
bearing
MPLS
Supported
QinQ
Supported

Copyright Huawei
202

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
cation
s
modes
Port
Supported
MTU
MTU for
ports

MTU for
services
For packet services carried by PWs, PEFF8 boards

in other modes, PEFF8 boards do not support the setting
E-Line
service
Supported
E-LAN
service
Supported
E-AGGR
service
Not supported
Formats of
Ethernet
data frames

Jumbo
frame
Supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than

1976 bytes.
Ethernet
service
capabili
ty
Protec
tion
schem
es
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
MS-PW
Supports static MS-PWs.
Tunnel
APS

MPLS Tunnel APS in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T
G.8131.
PW
APS

and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS PW APS in compliance with ITU-T
Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
LAG
MCLAG
Supported when working with a PEG8 board in compliance with

802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
MSTP
LPT
Point-topoint LPT
Supported
Point-to-
Supported

Copyright Huawei
203

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
multipoint
LPT
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
Inban
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Synchro
nous
Ethernet
Clock
Supports eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clock signals.
1588v2
Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization and

clock synchronization.
ETH
OAM
Ethernet
service
OAMa

IEEE 802.1ag.
Ethernet
port OAMa

detection, link performance monitoring, and selfloop
test. These functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Distribu
ted
MPLS
OAM/C
entraliz
ed
MPLS
OAM
MPLS
tunnel
OAMa

MPLS PW
OAMa

MPLSTP
OAM
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAMa
G.8113.1.
MPLS-TP
PW OAMa
G.8113.1.
Loopba
ck
capabili
ty
PHY layer
at Ethernet
ports
Supports inloops.
MAC layer
at Ethernet
ports
RMON
Supported
Port
mirrorin
g

ITU-T Y.1731.
Supported
Copyright Huawei
204

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
d
DCN
HQoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protocol
enablin
g
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported
Discardi
ng of
unknow
n
broadca
st
packets
Supported
Static
broadca
st entry
Supported
Query
of
electro
nic
labels
Supported
NOTE

The PEFF8 consists of the access and converging module, control and driving module,
Figure 8-5 shows the functional block diagram of the PEFF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
205

System
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PEFF8

Voltage detecting
module
Voltage detecting signal
GE
8xFE optical
signals
Access and
converging
module
Synchronous
clock
IEEE
1588v2
signal
Control and
driving module
IEEE1588v2 signal
Working clock
signal
Backplane
Management bus
GE service
PEG8
PEG8
Working clock signal

One channel of system clock
Clock
module

IEEE 1588 V2 packet
PEG8
PEG8
PEG8
Each module of board

Each module
of board
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
PEG8
+3.3 V backup power
1.1.1.1.202 Upstream direction

The services in the upstream direction are accessed by the FE ports. The service packets are
added with different VLAN tags based on the ingress ports. Then, the services are transmitted
to the GE port on the backplane side. As a result, the FE services are converged into the GE
services. After receiving the packets, the PEG8 identifies the ports to which the services
correspond based on the VLAN tags and strips the VLAN tags.
1.1.1.1.203 Downstream direction

The services in the downstream direction are added with VLAN tags on the PEG8 based on
the destination ports. Then, the services are accessed by the GE port on the backplane side.
The destination ports of the service packets are determined based on the VLAN tags. After the
destination ports of the service packets are determined, the VLAN tags are striped and the
services are sent to the destination ports.
1.1.1.1.204 Access and Converging Module

The access and converging module performs the following functions:
Transmits/Receives 8xFE optical signals.
Converges 8xFE services into 1xGE services on the backplane side.
Extracts IEEE 1588v2 clock information.
1.1.1.1.205 Control and Driving Module

The control and driving module performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Detects the system status through the management control bus.
Checks whether the board is properly inserted.
Tests the voltage status.
Implements the hot-pluggable function of the PEFF8.

Copyright Huawei
206

System
1.1.1.1.206 Voltage Test Module

The voltage test module mainly provides the voltage monitoring function.

Provides the working clock signal for each module of the PEFF8.

the board require.
8.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEFF8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 8-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PEFF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
207

System
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PEFF8
PEFF8
STAT
ACT
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
L/A 1
L/A 2
L/A 3
L/A 4
L/A 5
L/A 6
L/A 7
L/A 8
PEFF8
Service alarm indicator (SRV) two colors (red and green)
Connection status indicator (L/A1-L/A8) two colors (yellow and green)
The front panel of the PEFF8 has eight FE optical interfaces. Table 8-23 describes the
interfaces of the PEFF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
208

System
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the PEFF8

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN8
LC (pluggable)
Receives FE signals.
OUT1OUT8
LC (pluggable)
Transmits FE signals.
8.2.6 Valid Slots

The PEFF8 must be installed in a valid slot on the subrack. Otherwise, the PEFF8 fails to
work normally.
The PEFF8 can be installed in slots 1926, and 2936 in the subrack.
The PEFF8 works as the interface board of the PEG8. For the slots valid for the PEG8, see
Table 7-46.
8.2.7 Feature Code

The PEFF8 does not have the feature code.


board.
correct.
----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
209

System

Configuring PW OAM.
----End

----End

Configuration.
Configuration.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
210

System
Boards.
----End

The PEFF8 supports the packet switching function and multiple packet functions and features,
such as HQoS, LAG, and ETH OAM. Configure the functions according to actual
requirements.
You can configure the following packet functions for the PEFF8 by using the U2000:
HQoS
ETH OAM
MPLS OAM
MPLS-TP OAM
IGMP Snooping
Inband DCN
LPT
Tunnel APS
PW APS
LAG
MC-LAG
MS-PW
MSTP

You can set the parameters for the PEFF8 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PEFF8 by using the U2000.
Ethernet interface
Processing Boards.

Table 8-24 lists the faults that occur on the PEFF8 frequently and the troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
211

System
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PEFF8 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service
troubleshooting
The service is
interrupted.
The service loses

packets or has
errored packets.
The tunnel APS

switching fails.
The PW APS
switching fails.
The MC-LAG
switching fails.
fault
Interruptions.

Switching.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PEFF8, see Replacing a Packet Interface Board.

8.2.12.1 Alarms of N1PEFF8

TEMP_OVER
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
POWER_ABNORMA
L
BD_STATUS
WRG_BD_TYPE
LSR_NO_FITED
LASER_MOD_ER
R
LASER_SHUT
ALM_ALS
LSR_WILL_DIE
IN_PWR_ABN
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
LSR_BCM_ALM
FLOW_OVER
LOOP_ALM
ETH_LOS
ETH_LINK_DOW
N
MCLAG_CFG_MISMATCH
FDBSIZEALM_ELA
N
MPLS_TUNNEL_
LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
212

System
MPLS_TUNNEL_MI
SMATCH
MPLS_TUNNEL_
MISMERGE
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_BD
I
MPLS_TUNNEL_
FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
ETH_CFM_UNEX
PERI
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_EFM_LOOP
BACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_APS_SWIT
CH_FAIL
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH
ETH_APS_PATH_MI
SMATCH
LAG_DOWN
ETH_APS_LOST
LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
IN_PWR_LOW
PW_NO_TRAFFIC
IN_PWR_HIGH
MPLS_PW_Exces
s
MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
MPLS_PW_LOCV
MPLS_PW_UNK
NOWN
MPLS_PW_BDI
MPLS_PW_MISMER
GE
PWAPS_TYPE_M
ISMATCH
MPLS_PW_SD
MPLS_PW_SF
PWAPS_LOST
PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH
PWAPS_SWITCH_F
AIL
LPT_CFG_CLOS
EPORT
MCSP_PATH_LOCV
ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OPSSN1PEFF8
MAC_FCS_EXC
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
BWUTILIZATION
_OVER
SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD
MPLS_TUNNEL_OA
MFAIL
MPLS_PW_OAM
FAIL
DROPRATIO_OVER
PW_DROPPKT_EXC
ETH_NO_FLOW
TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
213

System
8.2.13.1 Performance Events of N1PEFF8

Figure 1.1 SDH
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR
BDTEMPMAX
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
ETH_CFM_LS
ETH_CFM_SLS
ETH_CFM_CSLS
ETH_CFM_UAS
ETH_CFM_FLR
ETH_CFM_FL
ETH_CFM_FD
ETH_CFM_FDV

MPLS_TUNNEL_LS
MPLS_TUNNEL_SLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_CSLS
MPLS_TUNNEL_UAS
MPLS_TUNNEL_FLR
MPLS_TUNNEL_FL
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV
Figure 1.4 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TNL_BW_UTILISATIO
N
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SND
PKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SNDB
YTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
CVPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RCV
BYTES
TNL_REVERSE_BW_UTILI
SATION
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_B
PS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
X_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_
PPS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
214

System

MPLS_PW_LS
MPLS_PW_SLS
MPLS_PW_CSLS
MPLS_PW_UAS
MPLS_PW_FLR
MPLS_PW_FL
MPLS_PW_FD
MPLS_PW_FDV
Figure 1.6 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UT
ILISATION
PW_DROPPKTS
PW_DROPBYTES
PW_RX_BPS
PW_TX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
Figure 1.7 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES
VUNI_TX_UTILIZATION
VLAN_RCVPKTS
VLAN_RCVBYTES
VLAN_SNDPKTS
VLAN_SNDBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPPKTS
VUNI_SND_DROPBYTES
VUNI_SND_DROPRATIO
VLAN_RX_BPS
VLAN_TX_BPS
VLAN_RX_PPS
VLAN_TX_PPS

RXOCTETS
RXPKTS
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
ETHUNDER
RXPKT64
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT1024

RXPKT1519
TXPKT64
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT1024
TXPKT1519
PKT64
PKT128
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
215

System
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
PKT1519
RXUNICAST
TXUNICAST
TXMULCAST
TXBRDCAST
ETHFCS
TXPKTS
TXOCTETS
PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZA
TION
PORT_TX_BW_UTILIZATI
ON
TX_DROP_RATIO
RXBPS
TXBPS
RXPPS
TXPPS
Figure 1.10 QoS

QOS_STRM_MATCHPKT
S
QOS_STRM_MATCHBYT
ES
QOS_CARGRNPKTS
QOS_CARGRNBYTES
QOS_CARYLWPKTS
QOS_CARYLWBYTES
QOS_CARREDPKTS
QOS_CARREDBYTES
QOS_CARREDRATIO
FLOW_RX_UTILIZATION
QOS_PRI_DROPPKTS
QOS_PRI_DROPBYTES
PORT_PRI_SNDPKTS
PORT_PRI_SNDBYTES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPPK
TS
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPBY
TES
PWQUEUE_SNDDROPRA
TIO
TNL_SNDDROPPKTS
TNL_SNDDROPBYTES
TNL_SNDDROPRATIO
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PPKTS
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PBYTES
TNL_REVERSE_SNDDRO
PRATIO
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIQUEUE_SNDDROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROPP
KTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
BYTES
VUNIGROUP_SNDDROP
RATIO
QOS_PORTQUEUE_DROP
RATIO
VUNIGROUP_SNDPKTS
VUNIGROUP_SNDBYTES
VGROUP_TX_UTILIZATI
ON
PORT_PRI_TX_BPS
PORT_PRI_TX_PPS
PWQUEUE_TX_BPS
PWQUEUE_TX_PPS
8.2.14 Technical Specifications of PEFF8

The technical specifications of the PEFF8 include the specifications specified for optical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
216

System
1.1.1.1.218 Specifications Specified for Optical Interfaces

Table 8-35 provides the specifications of the optical interfaces on the PEFF8.
Figure 1.1 Specifications of the electrical interfaces
Item
Value
Type of
interface
100BASE-FX
100BASE-LX
100BASEVX
100BASE-ZX
Transmission
distance (km)
15
40
80
Type of fiber
Multi-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10
8.2
10
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
Table 8-36 lists the parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of
the PEFF8.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the PEFF8
Parameter
Value
Type of
interface
100BASE-LX
100BASE-LX
100BASE-VX
100BASE-VX
Transmissi
15
15
40
40
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
217

System
Parameter
Value
on distance
(km)
Type of
fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelength
(nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating
receive
wavelength
(nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-8 to -15
-8 to -15
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-32
-32
-32
-32
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
8.5
10
10


The mechanical specifications of the PEFF8 are as follows:
Weight: 0.5 kg

The maximum power consumption of the PEFF8 at room temperature (25C) is 13 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
218

System
8.3 CQ1
technical specifications of the CQ1 (4-channel channelized STM-1 CES optical interface
board).

The CQ1 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
8.3.2 Application
The CQ1 directly receives channelized STM-1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the
channelized STM-1 services on the packet ring, and directly separates the channelized STM-1
services from other services on the Base Station Controller (BSC) side. In this manner, the
smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain is implemented.
Figure 8-7 shows the application of the CQ1. The CQ1 works with the PEG8 to transmit
channelized STM-1 services on the packet ring.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the CQ1
BSC
NMS
STM-1
CQ1
PEX2
PEX2
PEG8
10GE Ring
TDM ring
FE
Traffic direction
Dual-domain (TDM
domain and packet
domain) crossconnect board
PEG8
PEG8
MD75
E1
FE
E1
NodeB
BTS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
STM1/STM-4
Ring
PEG8
PEG8
MD12
PEG8
Packet ring
GE Ring
GE Ring
PEG8
STM1/STM-4
Ring

Copyright Huawei
NodeB
BTS
219

System

The CQ1 receives four-port channelized STM-1 services, and works with the PEG8 to process
CES service signals.
Table 8-37 provides the functions and features of the CQ1.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the CQ1
Function and
Feature
CQ1
Basic functions
Transmits and receives four-port channelized STM-1 optical signals,

and works with the PEG8 to process four-port channelized STM-1 CES
services.
Interface types
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, S-1.1,

L-1.1, and L-1.2 to meet requirements for transmission distances. The
characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.
Interface
characteristics
ALS
Not supported
Loopback types of the port
Inloops and outloops at STM-1

ports
Inloops and outloops on VC-12
paths
CES
Auto disabling of port loopback
Supported
Detection and query of optical

module information
Supported
Hot insertion and removal of SFP

optical modules
Supported
Supported CES services
252
Supported emulation mode
CESoPSN
SAToP
NOTE
For CES services in CESoPSN mode,
CQ1 boards can compress idle
timeslots to improve the bandwidth
utilization on the NNI side.
Jitter buffering time
0.375 ms to 16 ms; increment:

0.125 ms
Packet loading time
0.25 ms TO 5 ms; increment:

0.125 ms
NOTE
The packet loading time needs to
be set to the same value for the
NEs at both ends.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
The jitter buffering time needs to

be more than at least two times of
the packet loading time.
220

System
Function and
Feature
CQ1
Protection
scheme
Supports the 1+1 and 1:1 Packet-based linear MSP.
SSM protocol
Supported
PRBS
Not supported
Query of laser
transmission
distance
Supported

The CQ1 consists of the line processing module, CES service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 8-8 shows the functional block diagram of the CQ1.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the CQ1
Backplane
4-port channelized
STM-1 signals
Line
processing
module
CES service
processing
module
Service signal
Management bus
3.3. V
.
.
1.2 V
.
.
.
Clock
module
PEG8
Management bus
Management bus
Management
module
Line clock
Service
signal
Line clock
System clock
Power
module
PEG8
PEG8
PEG8
+3.3 V backup
power supply

In the receive direction, the line processing module receives four-channel channelized STM-1
services through the interfaces on the front panel of the CQ1 board. The line processing
module demultiplexes STM-1 signals into VC-12 signals, and demaps the VC-12 signals into
E1 signals. Then, the line processing module processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and
alarm signals, and sends the E1 signals to the CES service processing module. Then, the CES
service processing module rearranges the E1 frames, processes the rearranged signals based
on the service type, and performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling. Finally, the CES
service processing module sends the processed signals to the PEG8 through the interface on
the backplane.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
221

System

In the transmit direction, the CES service processing module receives service signals from the
PEG8, identifies the service type, and performs PWE3 decapsulation and queue scheduling.
Then, the CES service processing module sends the processed signals to the line processing
module. The line processing module maps the E1 service signals into VC-12 signals, and
multiplexes the VC-12 signals into STM-1 signals. Then, the line processing module
processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarm signals, and sends out the STM-1 signals
through the interface on the front panel of the CQ1.
1.1.1.1.224 Line Processing Module

The line processing module performs the following functions.
In the receive direction, the line processing module receives four-port channelized STM1 services, demultiplexes STM-1 signals into VC-12 signals, and demaps the VC-12
signals into E1 signals. Then, the line processing module processes the overhead bytes,
pointers, and alarm signals.
In the transmit direction, the line processing module receives E1 signals from the PEG8,
maps the E1 service signals into VC-12 signals, and multiplexes the VC-12 signals into
STM-1 signals. Then, the line processing module processes the overhead bytes, pointers,
and alarm signals, and sends out the STM-1 signals through the interface on the front
panel of the CQ1.
In the case of a service fault, the line processing module implements the LMSP, and
performs service switching.
The line processing module extracts and restores line clock signals.
1.1.1.1.225 CES Service processing module

The CES service processing module performs the following functions.
In the receive direction, the CES service processing module receives signals from the
line processing module, rearranges the E1 frames, and processes the signals (for
example, compresses timeslots for the CES service). Then, the CES service processing
module performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the processed
signals to the PEG8 through the interface on the backplane.
In the transmit direction, the CES service processing module receives signals from the
PEG8, performs interface conversion, and performs PWE3 decapsulation and service
scheduling. Then, the CES service processing module processes the signals, and sends
the processed signals to the line processing module.
1.1.1.1.226 Management Module

The management module manages and controls the modules on the CQ1.

The clock module provides clock information for the modules on the CQ1.

the board require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
222

System
8.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the CQ1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 8-9 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CQ1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the CQ1
CQ1
STAT
ACT
SRV
OUT1 IN1OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3OUT4 IN4
CQ1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
223

System
The front panel of the CQ1 has four optical interfaces. Table 8-38 describes the type and
usage of the optical interfaces of the CQ1.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the CQ1
Optical
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN4
LC (pluggable)
Channelized STM-1 signal input interface
OUT1OUT4
LC (pluggable)
Channelized STM-1 signal output interface

The CQ1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
8.3.7 Valid Slots

The CQ1 must be installed in a valid slot on the subrack. Otherwise, the CQ1 fails to work
normally.
The CQ1 can be installed in any slot of slots 19-26 and slots 29-36.
The CQ1 needs to be used with the PEG8. Table 7-46 lists the slots valid for the PEG8 and
the corresponding slots for the CQ1.
8.3.8 Feature Code

The CQ1 does not have any feature code.


board.
Step 4 Required: Install the board. For information on how to install the board, see Replacing
Boards Onsite. Ensure that the board is in proper contact with the bottom of the subrack and
that the front panel of the board is properly locked.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
224

System
software and the version of the U2000 software. Ensure that the version of the board software
is correct.
----End

Step 6 Required: Configure the CES service interface. For details, see Configuring CES Ports.
For more information about the parameters of the board, see 26.3 Packet Interface Boards.
Step 7 Required: Configure services. For details, see Operation Tasks for Configuring CES
Services.
Based on the actual requirements, you can configure the following CES services:
UNI-UNI CES services (For the configuration example, see Configuration Example
(UNI-UNI CES Services).)
UNI-NNI CES services (For the configuration example, see Configuration Example
(UNI-NNI CES Services).)
Step 8 Optional: Configure linear MSP. For details, see Creating Packet-Based Linear MSP.
----End

Step 1 Required: Test the CES service channel. For details, see Testing CES Services.
----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the CQ1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the CQ1 by using the U2000.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
J0
Copyright Huawei
225

System
J1
J2
C2
V5
SDH interface
For more parameters and the description of the parameters, see 26.3 Packet Interface Boards.

Table 8-39 lists the faults that occur on the CQ1 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the CQ1 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service fault
The service is
interrupted.
Bit errors are

generated in the
service.
See CES Service Troubleshooting.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the CQ1, see Replacing a Packet Interface Board.

according to the logical board on the U2000.
8.3.12.1 Alarms of N1CQ1

CES_LOSPKT_EXC
CES_MISORDERPKT_EX
C
CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
CES_MALPKT_EXC
CES_JTRUDR_EXC
CES_JTROVR_EXC
CES_RDI
CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI
CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACF
AULT
R_OOF
R_LOS
R_LOF
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
226

System
B2_SD
R_LOC
B2_EXC
BIP_SD
B3_EXC
B3_SD
BIP_EXC
ALM_E1RAI
AU_AIS
BD_STATUS
HP_SLM
J0_MM
AU_LOP
HP_REI
HP_UNEQ
HP_TIM
HP_LOM
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
IN_PWR_LOW
IN_PWR_ABN
HARD_ERR
LFA
LASER_MOD_ERR
IN_PWR_HIGH
LP_RDI_VC12
LMFA
LASER_SHUT
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_REI_VC12
LOOP_ALM
LSR_BCM_ALM
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_RFI
MS_AIS
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_UNEQ_VC12
OUT_PWR_ABN
MS_RDI
LSR_WILL_DIE
TEM_LA
POWER_ABNORMAL
MS_REI
TU_AIS_VC12
TEMP_OVER
TEM_HA
V5_VCAIS
TU_LOP_VC12
TF
WRG_BD_TYPE
UP_E1_AIS

performance events are reported according to the logical board on the U2000.
8.3.13.1 Performance Events of N1CQ1

Figure 1.1 SDH
RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
MSES
MSUAS
MSBBE
MSSES
MSFEBBE
MSCSES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFEES
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
MSFECSES
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
227

System
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
LPBBE
LPES
LPSES
LPUAS
LPCSES
LPFEBBE
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPFECSES
MPLS_PW_LS
MPLS_PW_SLS
MPLS_PW_CSLS
MPLS_PW_UAS
Figure 1.2 CES

CES_LOSPKTS
CES_MISORDERPKTS
CES_STRAYPKTS
CES_MALPKTS
CES_JTRUDR
CES_JTROVR
8.3.14 Technical Specifications of CQ1

The technical specifications of the CQ1 include the specifications of optical interfaces, laser
safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
1.1.1.1.238 Specifications of Optical Interfaces

Table 8-42 provides the specifications of the optical interfaces on the CQ1.
Figure 1.1 Specifications of the optical interfaces on the CQ1
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Type of Fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
228

System
Item
Value
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
10
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
30


The mechanical specifications of the N1CQ1 are as follows:
Weight: 0.5 kg

The maximum power consumption of the N1CQ1 at the room temperature (25C) is 10 W.
8.4 MD12
The interface on the MD12 is a 120-ohm E1 interface.

The MD12 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
229

System
8.4.2 Application
The MD12 directly receives E1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the E1 services on
the packet ring, and directly separates the E1 services from other services on the BSC side. In
this manner, the smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain is
implemented.
Figure 8-10 shows the application of the MD12. The MD12 works with the PEG8 to transmit
E1 services on the packet ring.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the MD12
BSC
NMS
STM-1
CQ1
PEX2
PEX2
PEG8
10GE Ring
TDM ring
FE
Traffic direction
Dual-domain (TDM
domain and packet
PEG8
MD75
E1
FE
E1
PEG8
STM1/STM-4
Ring
PEG8
PEG8
MD12
PEG8
Packet ring
GE Ring
GE Ring
PEG8
STM1/STM-4
Ring
NodeB
BTS
NodeB
BTS

The MD12 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals and works with the PEG8 to process E1 CES
and ATM/IMA services.
Table 8-43 provides the functions and features of the MD12.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
230

System
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the MD12

Function
and
Feature
MD12
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 32xE1 signals, and works with the PEG8 to process E1
CES and ATM/IMA services.
Interface
types
Supports 120-ohm E1 electrical interface. The electrical interface uses the

DB44 connector.
Interface
characteri
stics
Loopba
ck
types of
the port
Inloop
Auto
disablin
g of
port
loopbac
k
Supported
Numbe
r of
CES
service
s
32
Emulati
on
mode
CESoPSN, SAToP
Jitter
compen
sation
bufferin
g time
The jitter compensation buffering time of CES services can be set to

a value in the range of 0.375 ms to 16 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
Packet
loading
time
The packet loading time of CES services can be set to a value in the
range of 0.125 ms to 5 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
CES
Outloop
Non-loopback
NOTE
The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at
both ends.
ATM/IM
A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Numbe
r of
IMA
groups
32
Maxim
um
number
of E1
links in
16
The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than at least two
times of the packet loading time.

Copyright Huawei
231

System
Function
and
Feature
MD12
each
IMA
group
Clock
function
Numbe
r of VUNI
ports
512
Numbe
r of VNNI
ports
128
Cell
concate
nation
Type
Concatenation, non-concatenation
Quantit
y
31
ATM
OAM
Type
CC, LB, RDI, AIS
Quantit
y
512
Service
categor
ies
CBR, UBR, UBR+, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR
ATM
QoS
Supported
Restores four CES adaptive clock recover (ACR) clocks.

Clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 and 9 can be added to the
clock priority list.
NOTE
Clock recovery over ports 1 to 16 is independent of clock recovery over ports 17 to 32.
That is, clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 to 16 can be transmitted out
of ports 1 to 16 and clocks that are recovered from services over ports 17 to 32 can be
transmitted out of ports 17 to 32.
Clock
mode
Line Clock Mode and Null.
Line code
of E1 link
HDB3 code
Frame
format of
E1 link
Unframed format, double-framed format, or E1 CRC-4 multiframe format

(default value)
Maintena
nce
features
Supports the query of the board manufacturer information.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
232

System
Function
and
Feature
MD12
Supports the tributary PRBS function.

The MD12 consists of the tributary processing module, service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 8-11 shows the functional block diagram of the MD12.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the MD12
Backplane
32xE1
signals
Tributary
processing
module
Service
processing
module
Service signal
Management bus
3.3. V
.
.
1.2 V
.
.
.
Clock
module
PEG8
Management bus
Management bus
Management
module
Line clock
Service
signal
PEG8
Line clock
System clock
Power
module
PEG8
PEG8
+3.3 V backup
power supply

The tributary processing module receives E1 signals, and performs the functions of
impedance matching, signal equalization, level conversion, clock recovery, de-jitter, and
decoding. After the tributary processing module processes the E1 signals, the signals are sent
to the service processing module for framing, PWE3 encapsulation and mapping, and PW
scheduling. Then, the signals are sent to the PEG8 through the backplane interface module.

The cross-connect unit receives packets from the backplane interface module, and sends the
packets to the service processing module. The service processing module decapsulates the
packets, buffers the data in queues, schedules the queues based on service types, and then
processes and converts the data. The converted data is sent to the tributary processing module.
The tributary processing module performs the functions of coding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and
line drive, and then sends the services to E1 interfaces.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
233

System
1.1.1.1.244 Tributary Processing Module

The tributary processing module consists of 32 independent receive channels and transmit
channels.
The receive channels implement the functions of impedance matching, signal

equalization, level conversion, clock recovery, de-jitter, and decoding.
The transmit channels implement the functions of coding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and
line drive.
1.1.1.1.245 Service Processing Module

The service processing module performs the following functions:
In the receive direction, the service processing module obtains the PW information of
each E1 service, performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and then sends the
signals to the PEG8 through the backplane interface.
In the transmit direction, the service processing module receives the services from the
PEG8, identifies different service types, and performs PWE3 decapsulation and service
scheduling.

The management module manages and controls the modules on the MD12.

Provides the clock signal for each module of the MD12.

the board require.
8.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the MD12 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 8-12 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MD12.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
234

System
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the MD12
MD12
MD12
The front panel of the MD12 has four DB44 interfaces. Table 8-44 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the MD12.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the MD12
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
1-8
DB44
Receives E1 signals from the 1st channel to the 8th

channel.
9-16
DB44
Receives E1 signals from the 9th channel to the

16th channel.
17-24
DB44

24th channel.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
235

System
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
25-32
DB44

32nd channel.
Table 8-45 lists the pins of the DB44 interface.

Figure 1.2 Pin description of the DB44 interfaces on the MD12
Front View
30
15
44
Pin
Usage
Pin
Usage
38
R1 to receive
the first channel
of signals
34
R5 to receive the
fifth channel of
signals
R2 to receive
the second
channel of
signals
33
R3 to receive
the third channel
of signals
32
R4 to receive
the fourth
channel of
signals
31
T1 to transmit
the first channel
of signals
11
T2 to transmit
the second
channel of
signals
10
T3 to transmit
the third channel
of signals
T4 to transmit
the fourth
channel of
signals
23
37
22
36
21
35
31
16
20
15
30
14
29
13
28
12
27
19
18
17
16
26
25
24
R6 to receive the
sixth channel of
signals
R7 to receive the
seventh channel of
signals
R8 to receive the
eighth channel of
signals
T5 to transmit the
fifth channel of
signals
T6 to transmit the
sixth channel of
signals
T7 to transmit the
seventh channel of
signals
T8 to transmit the
eighth channel of
signals

The MD12 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
236

System
8.4.7 Valid Slots

The MD12 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the MD12 fails to work
normally.
The MD12 can be installed in any slot of slots 19-26 and slots 29-36.
The MD12 needs to be used with the PEG8. Table 7-46 lists the slots valid for the PEG8 and
the corresponding slots for the MD12.
8.4.8 Feature Code

The MD12 does not have the feature code.


board.
is correct.
----End

Step 6 Required: Configure the CES service. For details, see Configuring CES Ports. Configure the
ATM port. For details, see Configuring ATM Interfaces
Step 7 Required: Configure services. Based on the actual requirements, you can configure the
following CES services:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
237

System
UNI-UNI ATM services (For the configuration example, see Configuration Example
(UNI-UNI ATM Services).)
UNI-NNI ATM services (For the configuration example, see Configuration Example
(UNIs-NNI ATM Services).)
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the MD12 by using the U2000.
You can set the PDH interfaces parameters for the MD12 by using the U2000.
For the description of the PDH interfaces parameter, see 26.3 Packet Interface Boards.

Table 8-46 lists the faults that occur on the MD12 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the MD12 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
CES service fault
The service is interrupted.
Bit errors are generated in the service.
ATM/IMA service fault

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
238

System
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the MD12, see Replacing a Packet Interface Board.

8.4.12.1 Alarms of N1MD12

TEMP_OVER
HARD_BAD
POWER_ABNORMAL
BD_STATUS
ALM_E1RAI
WRG_BD_TYPE
CES_LOSPKT_EXC
CES_MISORDERPKT_EX
C
CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
CES_MALPKT_EXC
CES_JTRUDR_EXC
CES_JTROVR_EXC
CES_RDI
CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI
CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFA
ULT
T_ALOS
UP_E1_AIS
E1_LOC
LFA
LMFA
HARD_ERR
IMA_GROUP_RE_DOW
N
IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH
ALM_IMA_LIF
IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN
ALM_IMA_LODS
ALM_IMA_RFI
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUS
ABLE
ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UN
USABLE
ATMPW_LOSPKT_EXC
ATMPW_MISORDERPKT_
EXC
ATMPW_UNKNOWNCE
LL_EXC
CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN
VP_AIS
VP_RDI
VC_AIS
VC_RDI
VP_LOC
VC_LOC
OCD
LCD
UHCS
CHCS
LOOP_ALM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
239

System

8.4.13.1 Performance Events of N1MD12

Figure 1.1 SDH
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR
E1_LCV_SDH
E1_LES_SDH
E1_LSES_SDH
E1_LLOSS_SDH
MPLS_PW_LS
MPLS_PW_SLS
MPLS_PW_CSLS
MPLS_PW_UAS
Figure 1.2 CES

CES_LOSPKTS
CES_MISORDERPKTS
CES_STRAYPKTS
CES_MALPKTS
CES_JTRUDR
CES_JTROVR
MPLS_PW_FL
MPLS_PW_FD
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UTILIS
ATION
CES_RX_PKTS

MPLS_PW_FLR
MPLS_PW_FDV
Figure 1.4 PW
Figure 1.5 ATM

ATM_UNI1_INCELLS
ATM_UNI1_OUTCELLS
ATM_UNI2_INCELLS
ATM_UNI2_OUTCELLS
ATM_CORRECTED_HCSER
R
ATM_UNCORRECTED_H
CSERR
ATM_RCVCELLS
ATM_RCVIDLECELLS
ATM_SNDCELLS
ATM_IF_INRATE_MAX
ATM_IF_INRATE_MIN
ATM_IF_INRATE_AVG
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
240

System
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_MA
X
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_MIN
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_AVG
ATM_CELL_AVAILABI
LITY
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_MAX
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_MIN
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_AV
G
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_MA
X
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_M
IN
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_
AVG
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_MAX
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_MIN
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_AV
G
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_MA
X
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_M
IN
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_
AVG
PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZATI
ON
PORT_TX_BW_UTILIZAT
ION
Figure 1.6 ATM PWE3

ATMPW_SNDCELLS
ATMPW_RCVCELLS
ATMPW_UNKNOWN
CELLS
8.4.14 Technical Specifications of MD12

The technical specifications of the MD12 include the specifications of electrical interfaces,
mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
1.1.1.1.257 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces

Figure 1.1 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the MD12
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2048 kbit/s
DB44
Code pattern
HDB3 code
Signal bit rate at the output port
Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Permitted frequency deviation at the

input port
Allowed attenuation at the input port
Input jitter tolerance
Impedance (ohm)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
120

Copyright Huawei
241

System

The mechanical specifications of the MD12 are as follows:
Weight: 0.5 kg

The maximum power consumption of the MD12 at the room temperature (25C) is 12 W.
8.5 MD75
The interface on the MD12 is a 120-ohm E1 interface.

The MD75 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
8.5.2 Application
The MD75 directly receives E1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the E1 services on
the packet ring, and directly separates the E1 services from other services on the BSC side. In
this manner, the smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain is
implemented.
Figure 8-13 shows the application of the MD75. The MD75 works with the PEG8 to transmit
E1 services on the packet ring.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
242

System
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the MD75

BSC
NMS
STM-1
CQ1
PEX2
PEX2
PEG8
10GE Ring
TDM ring
FE
Traffic direction
PEG8
PEG8
MD75
E1
FE
E1
Dual-domain (TDM
domain and packet
STM1/STM-4
Ring
PEG8
PEG8
MD12
PEG8
Packet ring
GE Ring
GE Ring
PEG8
STM1/STM-4
Ring
NodeB
BTS
NodeB
BTS

The MD75 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals and works with the PEG8 to process E1 CES
and ATM/IMA services.
Table 8-54 provides the functions and features of the MD75.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the MD75
Function
and
Feature
MD75
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 32xE1 signals, and works with the PEG8 to process E1
CES and ATM/IMA services.
Interface
types
Supports 75-ohm E1 electrical interface. The electrical interface uses the DB44
connector.
Interface
character
Loo
pbac
k
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Inloop
Outloop

Copyright Huawei
243

System
Function
and
Feature
MD75
istics
type
s of
the
port
Non-loopback
Auto
disa
blin
g of
port
loop
back
Supported
Num
ber
of
CES
servi
ces
32
Emu
latio
n
mod
e
CESoPSN, SAToP
Jitter
com
pens
ation
buff
erin
g
time
of
CES
servi
ces
The jitter compensation buffering time of CES services can be set to a

value in the range of 0.375 ms to 16 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
Pack
et
loadi
ng
time
of
CES
pack
ets
The packet loading time of CES services can be set to a value in the
range of 0.125 ms to 5 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
Num
ber
of
IMA
32
CES
ATM/IM
A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
NOTE
The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both
ends.
The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than at least two times
of the packet loading time.

Copyright Huawei
244

System
Function
and
Feature
MD75
grou
ps
Clock
function
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Max
imu
m
num
ber
of
E1
links
in
each
IMA
grou
p
16
Num
ber
of
VUNI
ports
512
Num
ber
of
VNNI
ports
128
Cell
conc
aten
ation
Type
Concatenation, non-concatenation
Quanti
ty
31
AT
M
OA
M
Type
CC, LB, RDI, AIS
Quanti
ty
512
Serv
ice
cate
gori
es
CBR, UBR, UBR+, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR
AT
M
QoS
Supported
Recovers four CES ACR clocks.

Clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 and 9 can be added to the
Copyright Huawei
245

System
Function
and
Feature
MD75
clock priority list.

NOTE
Clock recovery over ports 1 to 16 is independent of clock recovery over ports 17 to 32.
That is, clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 to 16 can be transmitted out
of ports 1 to 16 and clocks that are recovered from services over ports 17 to 32 can be
transmitted out of ports 17 to 32.
Clock
mode
Line Clock Mode and Null.
Line
code of
E1 link
HDB3 code
Frame
format of
E1 link
Unframed format, double-framed format, or E1 CRC-4 multiframe format

(default value)
Loopbac
k mode
Inloop, outloop, or non-loopback (default value)
Maintena
nce
features
Supports the query of the board manufacturer information.
Supports the tributary PRBS function.

The MD75 consists of the tributary processing module, service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 8-14 shows the functional block diagram of the MD75.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
246

System
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the MD75

Backplane
32xE1
signals
Tributary
processing
module
Service
processing
module
Service signal
Management bus
3.3. V
.
.
1.2 V
.
.
.
Clock
module
PEG8
Management bus
Management bus
Management
module
Line clock
Service
signal
PEG8
Line clock
System clock
Power
module
PEG8
PEG8
+3.3 V backup
power supply

The tributary processing module receives E1 signals, and performs the functions of
impedance matching, signal equalization, level conversion, clock recovery, de-jitter, and
decoding. After the tributary processing module processes the E1 signals, the signals are sent
to the service processing module for framing, PWE3 encapsulation and mapping, and PW
scheduling. Then, the signals are sent to the PEG8 through the backplane interface module.

The cross-connect unit receives packets from the backplane interface module, and sends the
packets to the service processing module. The service processing module decapsulates the
packets, buffers the data in queues, schedules the queues based on service types, and then
processes and converts the data. The converted data is sent to the tributary processing module.
The tributary processing module performs the functions of coding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and
line drive, and then sends the services to E1 interfaces.
1.1.1.1.262 Tributary Processing Module

The tributary processing module consists of 32 independent receive channels and transmit
channels.
The receive channels implement the functions of impedance matching, signal

equalization, level conversion, clock recovery, de-jitter, and decoding.
The transmit channels implement the functions of coding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and
line drive.
1.1.1.1.263 Service Processing Module

The service processing module performs the following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
247

System
In the receive direction, the service processing module obtains the PW information of
each E1 service, performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and then sends the
signals to the PEG8 through the backplane interface.
In the transmit direction, the service processing module receives the services from the
PEG8, identifies different service types, and performs PWE3 decapsulation and service
scheduling.

The management module manages and controls the modules on the MD75.

Provides the clock signal for each module of the MD75.

the board require.
8.5.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the MD75 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 8-15 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MD75.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
248

System
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the MD75
MD75
MD75
The front panel of the MD75 has four DB44 interfaces. Table 8-55 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the MD75.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the MD75
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
1-8
DB44
Receives E1 signals from the 1st channel to the 8th

channel.
9-16
DB44

16th channel.
17-24
DB44

24th channel.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
249

System
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
25-32
DB44

32nd channel.
Table 8-56 lists the pins of the DB44 interface.

Figure 1.2 Pin description of the DB44 interfaces on the MD75
Front View
30
15
44
Pin
Usage
Pin
Usage
38
R1 to receive
the first channel
of signals
34
R5 to receive the
fifth channel of
signals
R2 to receive
the second
channel of
signals
33
R3 to receive
the third channel
of signals
32
R4 to receive
the fourth
channel of
signals
31
T1 to transmit
the first channel
of signals
11
T2 to transmit
the second
channel of
signals
10
T3 to transmit
the third channel
of signals
T4 to transmit
the fourth
channel of
signals
23
37
22
36
21
35
31
16
20
15
30
14
29
13
28
12
27
19
18
17
16
26
25
24
R6 to receive the
sixth channel of
signals
R7 to receive the
seventh channel of
signals
R8 to receive the
eighth channel of
signals
T5 to transmit the
fifth channel of
signals
T6 to transmit the
sixth channel of
signals
T7 to transmit the
seventh channel of
signals
T8 to transmit the
eighth channel of
signals

The MD75 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
250

System
8.5.7 Valid Slots

The MD75 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the MD75 fails to work
normally.
The MD75 can be installed in any slot of slots 19-26 and slots 29-36.
The MD75 needs to be used with the PEG8. Table 7-46 lists the slots valid for the PEG8 and
the corresponding slots for the MD75.
8.5.8 Feature Code

The MD75 does not have any feature code.


board.
is correct.
----End

Step 6 Required: Configure the CES service. For details, see Configuring CES Ports. Configure the
ATM port. For details, see Configuring ATM Interfaces
Step 7 Required: Configure services. Based on the actual requirements, you can configure the
following CES services:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
251

System
UNI-UNI ATM services (For the configuration example, see Configuration Example
(UNI-UNI ATM Services).)
UNI-NNI ATM services (For the configuration example, see Configuration Example
(UNIs-NNI ATM Services).)
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the MD75 by using the U2000.
You can set the PDH interfaces parameters for the MD75 by using the U2000.
For the description of the PDH interfaces parameter, see 26.3 Packet Interface Boards.

Table 8-57 lists the faults that occur on the MD75 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the MD75 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service fault
ATM/IMA service fault

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
252

System
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the MD75, see Replacing a Packet Interface Board.

8.5.12.1 Alarms of N1MD75

TEMP_OVER
HARD_BAD
POWER_ABNORMAL
BD_STATUS
ALM_E1RAI
WRG_BD_TYPE
CES_LOSPKT_EXC
CES_MISORDERPKT_EX
C
CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
CES_MALPKT_EXC
CES_JTRUDR_EXC
CES_JTROVR_EXC
CES_RDI
CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI
CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFA
ULT
T_ALOS
UP_E1_AIS
E1_LOC
LFA
LMFA
HARD_ERR
IMA_GROUP_RE_DOW
N
IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH
ALM_IMA_LIF
IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN
ALM_IMA_LODS
ALM_IMA_RFI
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUS
ABLE
ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UN
USABLE
ATMPW_LOSPKT_EXC
ATMPW_MISORDERPKT_
EXC
ATMPW_UNKNOWNCE
LL_EXC
CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN
VP_AIS
VP_RDI
VC_AIS
VC_RDI
VP_LOC
VC_LOC
OCD
LCD
UHCS
CHCS
LOOP_ALM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
253

System

8.5.13.1 Performance Events of N1MD75

Figure 1.1 SDH
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR
E1_LCV_SDH
E1_LES_SDH
E1_LSES_SDH
E1_LLOSS_SDH
MPLS_PW_LS
MPLS_PW_SLS
MPLS_PW_CSLS
MPLS_PW_UAS
Figure 1.2 CES

CES_LOSPKTS
CES_MISORDERPKTS
CES_STRAYPKTS
CES_MALPKTS
CES_JTRUDR
CES_JTROVR
MPLS_PW_FL
MPLS_PW_FD
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UTILIS
ATION
CES_RX_PKTS

MPLS_PW_FLR
MPLS_PW_FDV
Figure 1.4 PW
Figure 1.5 ATM

ATM_UNI1_INCELLS
ATM_UNI1_OUTCELLS
ATM_UNI2_INCELLS
ATM_UNI2_OUTCELLS
ATM_CORRECTED_HCSER
R
ATM_UNCORRECTED_H
CSERR
ATM_RCVCELLS
ATM_RCVIDLECELLS
ATM_SNDCELLS
ATM_IF_INRATE_MAX
ATM_IF_INRATE_MIN
ATM_IF_INRATE_AVG
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
254

System
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_MA
X
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_MIN
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_AVG
ATM_CELL_AVAILABI
LITY
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_MAX
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_MIN
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_AV
G
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_MA
X
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_M
IN
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_
AVG
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_MAX
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_MIN
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_AV
G
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_MA
X
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_M
IN
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_
AVG
PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZATI
ON
PORT_TX_BW_UTILIZAT
ION
Figure 1.6 ATM PWE3

ATMPW_SNDCELLS
ATMPW_RCVCELLS
ATMPW_UNKNOWN
CELLS
8.5.14 Technical Specifications of MD75

The technical specifications of the MD75 include the specifications of electrical interfaces,
1.1.1.1.275 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces

Figure 1.1 Specifications of the electrical interfaces of the MD75
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2048 kbit/s
DB44
Code pattern
HDB3 code
Signal bit rate at the output port
Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Permitted frequency deviation at the input

port
Allowed attenuation at the input port
Impedance (ohm)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
75

Copyright Huawei
255

System

The mechanical specifications of the MD75 are as follows:
Weight: 0.5 kg

The maximum power consumption of the MD75 at room temperature (25C) is 12 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
256

System
9 EoD Boards
EoD Boards
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN equipment supports the EoD (Ethernet over Dual Domains) board EDQ41,
which bridges Ethernet services between the TDM domain and packet domain.
9.1 EDQ41
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, valid
slots, and technical specifications of the EDQ41 (4-port 622/155 Mbit/s SDH optical interface
Ethernet double domain multiple function processing board).
9.1 EDQ41
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, valid
slots, and technical specifications of the EDQ41 (4-port 622/155 Mbit/s SDH optical interface
Ethernet double domain multiple function processing board).

The EDQ41 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
9.1.2 Application
The EDQ41 is mainly used for interoperation between the SDH network and the packet
network. The board converges the TDM signals and Ethernet packets from the SDH access
network and deconverges the TDM signals to the SDH ring and the Ethernet packets to the
packet ring. In this manner, the board achieves the interoperation between the TDM domain
and the packet domain, facilitating the smooth evolution of the network.
Figure 9-1 shows the typical networking and application of the EDQ41.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
257

System
9 EoD Boards
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the EDQ41
RNC
BSC
STM-16/STM-64 ring
10GE ring
EDQ41
E1
GE ring
FE
FE
STM-1/STM-4 ring
Networking in the
TDM domain
Networking in the
packet domain
TDM traffic direction
Packet traffic direction
The EDQ41 is applicable in five typical networking scenarios. Figure 9-2 shows the service
signal flow in each application scenario.
Application 1: The EDQ41 receives EoS services from other NEs and then converts the
EoS services to packet services, therefore implementing transition from the STM1/STM-4 SDH network to the GE/10GE packet network.
Application 2: The EDQ41 receives EoS services from line boards on the same NE and
then converts the EoS services to packet services, therefore implementing transition from
the SDH network to the GE/10GE packet network.
Application 3: The EDQ41 board receives SDH services (including SDH services and
EoS services) from SDH line board, processes and then distributes the services to
GE/10GE packet networks and STM-1/STM-4 SDH networks.
Application 4: The EDQ41 board receives packet services from the local NE, processes
and then sends the services directly to the GE/10GE network. In this case, the EDQ41
board functions like a packet processing board.
Application 5: The EDQ41 board receives SDH services (including pure SDH services
and EoS services) from SDH line boards, processes and then sends the services directly
to the SDH network. In this case, the EDQ41 board functions like an SDH line board.
The EDQ41 supports the maximum processing capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s. Therefore, only 2.5 Gbit/s
services of the services received from STM-N (1N64) line boards can be processed and sent to the
packet network.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
258

System
9 EoD Boards
Figure 1.2 Service signal flow on the EDQ41
Application 1:
STM-1/STM-4
(EoS service)
EDQ41
board
Packet
core
Packet
board
GE/10GE
TDM
core
Application 2:
EDQ41
board
STM-N
(EoS service)
SDH
board
Packet
core
Packet
board
GE/10GE
TDM
core
Application 3:
Packet
core
STM-N
(SDH/EoS service)
SDH board
TDM core
Packet board
Packet
core
Packet
board
EDQ41 board
GE/10GE
STM-1/STM-4
Application 4:
GE/10GE
EDQ41 board
GE/10GE
TDM core
Application 5:
Packet
core
STM-N
(SDH/EoS service)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
SDH board
TDM core

Copyright Huawei
EDQ41 board
STM-1/STM-4
259

System
9 EoD Boards

EDQ41 boards process 4x155 Mbit/s or 4x622 Mbit/s SDH services and 2.5 Gbit/s EoS
services at the same time.
As a dual-domain board, EDQ41 boards are applicable in the case of SDH services, packet
services, and EoS services. Table 9-1, Table 9-2, and Table 9-3 provide the functions and
features supported by EDQ41 boards in each service application scenario.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by EDQ41 boards
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic functions
Transmits and receives 4xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals.
Port specifications
The STM-1 or STM-4 optical module can be used.
When the STM-1 optical module is used, the standard S-1.1, L1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports are supported. The optical ports
comply with ITU-T G.957.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the standard S-4.1, L4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical ports are supported. The optical
ports of the S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T
G.957. The optical ports of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the
standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the detection and query of the information about

optical modules.
Supports the usage and detection of SFP pluggable optical

modules, facilitating the maintenance of optical modules.
Provides the ALS function. The optical ports support the

function of setting the on/off state of a laser.
Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services when the STM-1 optical

module is used.
Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-4c services when the STM-4

optical module is used.
Processes the section overheads of STM-4/STM-1 signals.
Processes path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, J2, and C2 bytes.
Supports the ECC communication.
Supports inloops and outloops at optical ports.
Supports inloops and outloops at the VC-4 level.
Optical module
specifications
Service processing
Overhead processing
Loopback function
Alarms and
performance events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates

the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Protection scheme
Supports Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports Linear MSP.
Supports SNCP.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
260

System
Function and
Feature
9 EoD Boards
Description
Maintenance
features
Supports SNCMP.
Supports SNCTP.
Supports fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect
services.
Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms

and performance events, which facilitates the management and
maintenance of the equipment.
Figure 1.2 Packet features supported by EDQ41 boards

Func
tion
and
Feat
ure
Description
Basic
funct
ions
Bridges a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s EoS services to the packet domain.
Form
at of
servi
ce
fram
es
Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE

802.1q/p format.
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Maxi
mum
uplin
k
band
widt
h
2.5 Gbit/s
MTU
MTU for
ports
Supports the query of the MTUs specified for ports but does not
support MTU setting. The default MTU specified for ports is 9600
bytes.
MTU for
services
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 64 bytes
to 9600 bytes.
Type
of
Ether
net
servi
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports point-to-point E-Line services.
Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services.
NOTE
EDQ41 boards support only PW-carried E-Line and E-LAN services on the NNI side.

Copyright Huawei
261

System
Func
tion
and
Feat
ure
9 EoD Boards
Description
ces
Num
ber
of
supp
orted
ELine
servi
ces
Num
ber
of
supp
orted
ELAN
servi
ces
1K
HQo
S
Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, V-UNI ingress policies, and VUNI egress policies on the UNI side.
Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, and PW polices on the NNI side.
Prote
ction
sche
me
Tunnel
APS

PW APS
Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended), 1:1 (dual-ended), and PW

FPS (single-ended) PW APS in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and
ITU-T G.8131.
Number of supported PW APS protection groups: 1K
LAG
Main
tenan
ce
featu
res
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports manual link aggregation.
Supports the load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad.
MCLAG
Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.3ad.
ETH
OAM
Not supported
Distribut
ed MPLS
MPLS tunnel
OAMa
NOTE
EDQ41 boards do not support creation of maintenance points but support
transparent transmission of ETH OAM packets.
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Tunnel ping, and

Tunnel traceroute. These functions comply with

Copyright Huawei
262

System
Func
tion
and
Feat
ure
9 EoD Boards
Description
OAM/Ce
ntralized
MPLS
OAM
MPLSTP OAM
ITU-T Y.1711.
Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM:
2K
MPLS PW OAMa
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, PW traceroute,

and PW ping. These functions comply with ITUT Y.1711. The number of supported MPLS PW
OAM is 2K.
MPLS-TP tunnel
OAMa

TST, LCK, and 2DM. These functions comply
with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Number of tunnels that support MPLS-TP
OAM: 2K
MPLS-TP PW
OAMa

TST, LCK, CSF, and 2DM. These functions
comply with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Number of PWs that support MPLS-TP OAM:
2K
MST
P
Not supported
IGM
P
Snoo
ping
Not supported
NOTE
a: MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, and MPLS-TP PW OAM share OAM
resources.
Figure 1.3 EoS data features supported by EDQ41 boards

Function and
Feature
EDQ41
Basic function
Supports transparent transmission of Ethernet services.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP-F protocol.
EPL
Supports transparent transmission of PORT-based EPL services.
Number of
VCTRUNKs
Binds a maximum of 63 VCTRUNKs, equivalent to 504 VC-12s, 48

VC-3s, or 16 VC-4s.
Configuration features:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
263

System
Function and
Feature
9 EoD Boards
EDQ41
The first eight VC-4s (including VC-3s and VC-12s in the VC4s) and the last eight VC-4s (including VC-3s and VC-12s in the
VC-4s) cannot be bound to the same VCTRUNK.
Only 5th to 8th and the 13th to 16th VC-4s can bind VC-12
paths. In addition, VC-12s in the 5th to 8th VC-4s cannot be
bound to the same VCTRUNK as the VC-12s in the 13th to 16th
VC-4s.
VC-3 and VC-4 signals can be bound to any of the 1st to 16th
VC-4s.
VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK63 can be bound to any of the 1st to

16th VC-4s.
VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 each can be bound to a maximum

of eight VC-4s. VCTRUNK9 to VCTRUNK63 each can be
bound to a maximum of one VC-4, three VC-3s, or 63 VC-12s.
A VC-4 cannot bind VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same time.
LCAS
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the

bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
Test frames
Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames or

Ethernet test frames.

The EDQ41 consists of network processing module, encapsulation/mapping and SDH
overhead processing module, clock module, logic control module, O/E converting module,
SDH overhead processing module, and power module.
Figure 9-3 shows the functional block diagram of the EDQ41.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
264

System
9 EoD Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EDQ41

Backplane
Packet
switching unit
Encapsulation/
mapping and
SDH overhead
processing
module
Network
processing
module
Communication unit
Clock
module
Logic control
module
Reference clock and
frame header unit
O/E
converting
module
4xSTM1/STM-4
Power
module
SCC
SCC
SDH crossconnect unit

(pure SDH
services)
SDH
overhead
processing
module
+3.3 V
SDH crossconnect unit

(EoS services)
Power
module
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
1.1.1.1.278 Services in the SDH Domain
In the transmit direction: The O/E converting module converts the received STM1/STM-4 optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the SDH
overhead processing module. Then, the SDH overhead processing module extracts and
processes the overheads, converts the signals into a format that applies to the backplane
bus, and then sends the signals to the SDH cross-connect unit.
In the receive direction: The SDH overhead processing module inserts overhead bytes
into the electrical signals from the SDH cross-connect unit, and sends the electrical
signals to the E/O converting module. The E/O converting module converts the STM1/STM-4 electrical signals into optical signals, and then sends the optical signal to fibers
for transmission.
1.1.1.1.279 Services Transmitted from the SDH Domain to the Packet Domain
The mapping module demaps the signals from the SDH cross-connect module and
compensates the delay of virtual concatenation. The mapping module decapsulates the packets
through alignment and sends the data to the network processing module. The network
processing module processes the data according to service types and configuration
requirements, and then sends Ethernet services to the packet switching unit.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
265

System
9 EoD Boards
1.1.1.1.280 Services Transmitted from the Packet Domain to the SDH Domain
The network processing module processes the Ethernet services from the packet switching
unit, and then sends the services to the mapping module. The mapping module encapsulates
the Ethernet services in LAPS or GFP format and concatenates the services. Then, the
mapping unit converts the Ethernet services into STM-16 signals and sends the signals to the
SDH cross-connect unit.

The network processing module performs the functions at the MAC layer, including code
conversion, Ethernet packet framing, CRC check, and Ethernet performance statistics. In
addition, the network processing module classifies the services according to service types and
configuration requirements. Then, the module encapsulates or decapsulates frames. The
module supports the Ethernet/VLAN encapsulation formats.
The module supports the following functions:
Traffic detection and traffic classification
Unicast, multicast, and broadcast of flows
Priorities of data
Weighted fair queuing (WFQ) scheduling
Three service classes
1.1.1.1.282 Encapsulation/Mapping and SDH Overhead Processing Module

The encapsulation/mapping and SDH overhead processing module performs
encapsulation/mapping functions and processes SDH overheads.
In the upstream direction, the mapping module encapsulates Ethernet signals in LAPS,
GFP-F, or HDLC format and then performs concatenation. The module supports LCAS.
Then, the mapping module converts Ethernet signals into SDH signals.
In the downstream direction, the mapping module demaps SDH signals and compensates
the delay of virtual concatenation. The mapping module decapsulates packets
accordingly through the alignment operation. The decapsulated data is finally transmitted
to the network processing module.

The logic control module is connected to external circuits through the bus. The logic control
module performs the following functions:
Manages and configures the other modules on the local board.
Implements inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface.
1.1.1.1.284 O/E Converting Module
In the receive direction, the O/E converting unit converts the received optical signals into
electrical signals.
In the transmit direction, the O/E converting unit converts the received electrical signals
into SDH optical signals and transmits the optical signals to optical fibers.
This module also detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the ALS function.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
266

System
9 EoD Boards
1.1.1.1.285 SDH Overhead Processing Module

The SDH overhead processing module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules.
This module provides the inloop and outloop functions.
RST sub-module
In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST
sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes
except the first row of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1
byte.
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST
sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte,
and scrambles all the bytes except the first row of the RSOH.
MST sub-module
In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the
MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS or MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2
byte. In addition, the sub-module generates the B2_SD or B2_EXC alarm after
checking the B2 byte and sends the MS_REI alarm to the opposite end.
In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the
MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and
calculates and writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves AUGs, divides an AUG
into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP and AU_AIS alarms, and performs pointer
justifications.
In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module adds the AU-PTR to a VC-4 to
generate an AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving.
HPT sub-module
In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT
sub-module sends the HP_REI alarm to the opposite end after detecting byte B3. In
addition, the sub-module generates the HP_TIM and HP_SLM alarms, and sends the
HP_RDI alarm to the opposite end after detecting bytes J1 and C2 (the sub-module
also generates the HP_UNEQ alarm if it detects the VC-4 path unequipped).
In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT
sub-module writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.

The clock module traces the system reference clock and generates the required working clock
for each chip.

the board require.
9.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EDQ41 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
267

System
9 EoD Boards

Figure 9-4 shows the front panel of the EDQ41.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EDQ41
EDQ41
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
EDQ41
For the meanings of the indicators, see 23.2 Alarm Indicators on the Boards.
The front panel of the EDQ41 has four optical interfaces. Table 9-4 lists the types and usage
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
268

System
9 EoD Boards
of the optical interfaces of the EDQ41.

Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EDQ41
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN4
LC (pluggable)
Receives the STM-1/STM-4 optical signals.
OUT1OUT4
LC (pluggable)
Transmits the STM-1/STM-4 optical signals.

The EDQ41 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches for board settings.
9.1.7 Valid Slots

The EDQ41 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EDQ41 fails to
work normally.
EDQ41 can be housed in any of slots 4-8 and slots 11-14. The bandwidth of SDH services in
all slots is 2.5 Gbit/s, and the bandwidth of packet services in all slots is 2.5 Gbit/s.
The EDQ41 cannot work with a cross-connect board whose logical board is configured as N1PSXCS.
9.1.8 Feature Code

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the feature code of the
EDQ41. The feature code of the EDQ41 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 9-5 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EDQ41 and types of
optical interfaces.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the EDQ41 and types of optical interfaces
Board
Feature Code
Type of Optical Interface
SSN1EDQ4103
03
S-1.1
SSN1EDQ4104
04
L-1.1
SSN1EDQ4105
05
L-1.2
SSN1EDQ4108
08
S-4.1
SSN1EDQ4109
09
L-4.1
SSN1EDQ4110
10
L-4.2
SSN1EDQ4111
11
Ve-4.2
SSN1EDQ4112
12
S-1.1x2/S-4.1x2a
a: Port 1 and port 2 operate at 622 Mbit/s, port 3 and port 4 operate at 155 Mbit/s.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
269

System
9 EoD Boards


board.
correct.
----End

Step 6 Required: Add the ports. For details, see Querying and Configuring Ports on Boards.
Step 7 Required: Set the SDH interface.
J0 byte: Generally, use the default value. The default value of the J0 byte to be sent is
HuaWei SBS and the default value of the J0 byte to be received is Disabled.
J1 byte: The setting of the J1 byte on the interconnected equipment must be consistent.
Generally, use the default value. The default value of the J1 byte to be sent is HuaWei
SBS and the default value of the J1 byte to be received is Disabled.
C2 byte: The setting of the C2 byte on the interconnected equipment must be consistent.
Set the C2 byte according to the actual service type. Generally, use the default value,
which is TUG structure.
Laser status: Set this parameter to Open when you configure and commission the board.
For details, see 27.7 Checking Board Parameters.

For more information about the parameters of the board, see 26.5 SDH Processing Boards.
Step 8 Optional: Create the protection subnet. For details, see Configuring the Protection Subnet.
Step 9 Required: Configure services. For details, see Configuring Cross-Domain Services.
Step 10 Optional: Configure the manual LAG. For details, see Configuring an Ethernet LAG.
Step 11 Optional: Configure test frames. For details, see Configuring Test Frames.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
270

System
9 EoD Boards
----End

Step 1 Required: Test the specifications of the optical interface. For details, see Testing
Specifications of Optical Interfaces.
Step 12 Required: Test the network protection switching. For details, see Testing SDH Network
Protection Switching.
Step 13 Required: Test the point-to-point BER. For details, see Testing the Point-to-Point BER.
----End

Step 1 Required: Check the dual-domain services. For details, see Testing Cross-domain Services.
Boards.
----End

The EDQ41 supports the packet switching function and multiple Ethernet features, such as
HQoS, LAG, and LCAS. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EDQ41 by using the U2000:
HQoS
LAG
MC-LAG
LCAS
Test Frame
MPLS OAM
MPLS-TP OAM

You can set the parameters for the EDQ41 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the EDQ41 by using the U2000:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
271

System
9 EoD Boards
1.1.1.1.295 SDH Parameters
J0
J1
J2
C2
For the description of parameters, see 26.5 SDH Processing Boards.
1.1.1.1.296 Packet Data Parameters
VCTRUNK interfaces
Processing Boards.
1.1.1.1.297 EoS Parameters
Working mode
Enabling LCAS
Maximum frame length
Mapping protocol
For more parameters and the description of the parameters, see 26.4.2 Ethernet Parameters.

Table 9-6 lists the faults that occur on the EDQ41 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EDQ41 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
SDH service
interruption
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The services on a
single Ethernet
port are
EoS service
interruption
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
See Service Interruption on a Board or a
Port.
See Interruption of an Ethernet Service.

Copyright Huawei
272

System
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
9 EoD Boards
interrupted.
Transient EoS
service interruption
The services on
all the Ethernet
ports are
interrupted.
The services on a
single Ethernet
port are
transiently
interrupted.
The protocol
becomes
abnormal.
Packet service fault
The packet Ethernet

services are faulty.
Bit error
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
The MC-LAG
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the U2000.
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the U2000.
Pointer justification
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
U2000
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
See Troubleshooting Transient Service

Interruptions.

Interruptions.
See Troubleshooting Bit Errors.
See Troubleshooting Pointer Justification.
See Troubleshooting Protection Switching

Faults.
See Troubleshooting the NEs Being

Unreachable.

Copyright Huawei
273

System
Fault Symptom
9 EoD Boards
Common Fault
Cause
Equipment
interconnection fault
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the U2000
frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.
See Troubleshooting Device Interconnection

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EDQ41, see Replacing an EoD board.

9.1.13.1 Alarms of N1EDQ41

ALM_ALS
ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
B3_SD_VC4
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BUS_ERR
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
COMMUN_FAIL
DCN_FAIL
FCS_ERR
FSELECT_STG
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
HP_LOM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
HP_TIM
IN_PWR_LOW
J0_MM
IN_PWR_HIGH
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LASER_MOD_ERR
LAG_DOWN
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LASER_SHUT
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_PLCR
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
274

System
9 EoD Boards
LCAS_TLCT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_BCM_ALM
MCLAG_CFG_MISMATC
H
MCSP_PATH_LOCV
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
NO_BD_SOFT
NO_LSR_PARA_FILE
MS_REI
OUT_PWR_ABN
POWER_ABNORMAL
OH_LOOP
PS
R_LOC
R_LOF
R_LOS
SLAVE_WORKING
T_LOSEX
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
TF
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
WRG_BD_TYPE
ETH_APS_LOST
ETH_APS_PATH_MISMA
TCH
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMA
TCH
MPLS_PW_BDI
MPLS_PW_Excess
MPLS_PW_LOCV
MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL
MPLS_PW_SD
MPLS_PW_SF
MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMAT
CH
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISME
RGE
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAI
L
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNO
WN
PW_EXC_TRAFFIC
PW_NO_TRAFFIC
PWAPS_LOST
PWAPS_PATH_MISMATC
H
PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATC
H
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADE
D
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
275

System
9 EoD Boards
TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE

9.1.14.1 Performance Events of N1EDQ41

Figure 1.1 SDH
LPBBE
LPES
LPSES
LPUAS
LPCSES
LPFEBBE
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPFECSES
CPUUSAGEMAX
CPUUSAGEMIN
CPUUSAGECUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR
VC3BBE
VC3ES
VC3SES
VC3UAS
VC3CSES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FECSES
VC3FEUAS
MEMUSAGEMAX
MEMUSAGEMIN
MEMUSAGECUR
RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
OSPITMPCUR
RSOFS
MSBBE
MSES
MSUAS
MSCSES
MSSES
MSFEBBE
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFECSES
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
276

System
9 EoD Boards
OSPITMPMIN

MPLS_TUNNEL_FLR
MPLS_TUNNEL_FL
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV
Figure 1.3 Tunnel

TUNNEL_RCVPKTS
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES
TUNNEL_SNDPKTS
TUNNEL_SNDBYTES
TNL_BW_UTILISATION
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SND
PKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_SND
BYTES
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
CVPKTS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RCV
BYTES
TNL_REVERSE_BW_UTIL
ISATION
TUNNEL_RX_BPS
TUNNEL_TX_BPS
TUNNEL_RX_PPS
TUNNEL_TX_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RX_
BPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_B
PS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_R
X_PPS
TUNNEL_REVERSE_TX_P
PS

MPLS_PW_FLR
MPLS_PW_FL
MPLS_PW_FD
MPLS_PW_FDV
Figure 1.5 PW
PW_RCVPKTS
PW_RCVBYTES
PW_SNDPKTS
PW_SNDBYTES
PW_BANDWIDTH_UTILISA PW_RX_BPS
TION
PW_TX_BPS
PW_RX_PPS
PW_TX_PPS
Figure 1.6 L2VPN

VUNI_RCVPKTS
VUNI_RCVBYTES
VUNI_SNDPKTS
VUNI_SNDBYTES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
277

System
9 EoD Boards

ETHUNDER
ETHOVER

RXPKTS
TXPKTS
RXBBAD
TXBBAD
RXPPS
TXPPS
9.1.15 Technical Specifications of EDQ41

The technical specifications of the EDQ41 include the specifications of optical interfaces,
1.1.1.1.300 Specifications of Optical Interfaces

The EDQ41 supports the STM-1/STM-4 optical modules.
Table 9-15 provides the specifications of STM-1 optical interfaces on the EDQ41.
Figure 1.1 Specifications of STM-1 optical interfaces on the EDQ41
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Type of Fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-34
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-10
-10
Minimum
8.2
10
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
278

System
Item
9 EoD Boards
Value
extinction ratio
(dB)
Table 9-16 provides the specifications specified for STM-4 optical interfaces on the EDQ41.
Figure 1.2 Specifications of STM-4 optical interfaces on the EDQ41
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to -2
-3 to -2
-3 to -2
(dBm)
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum Overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-13
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
10.5

The mechanical specifications of the EDQ41 are as follows:
Weight: 1.0 kg

The maximum power consumption of the EDQ41 at room temperature (25C) is 70 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
279

System
10 SDH Boards
10
SDH Boards
About This Chapter

This topic describes the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM1 rates.
10.1 SL1
technical specifications of the SL1 (1xSTM-1 optical interface board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SL1.
10.2 SL1A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and
technical specifications of the SL1A (1xSTM-1 optical interface board).
10.3 SLQ1
technical specifications of the SLQ1 (4xSTM-1 optical interface board).
10.4 SLQ1A
technical specifications of the SLQ1A (4xSTM-1 optical interface board).
10.5 SLO1
technical specifications of the SLO1 (8xSTM-1 optical interface board).
10.6 SLT1
technical specifications of the SLT1 (12xSTM-1 optical interface board).
10.7 SLH1
technical specifications of the SLH1 (16xSTM-1 signal processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SLH1.
10.8 SEP1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
280

System
10 SDH Boards
technical specifications of the SEP1 (8xSTM-1 line processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SEP1.
10.9 SL4
technical specifications of the SL4 (1xSTM-4 optical interface board).
10.10 SL4A
10.11 SLD4
technical specifications of the SLD4 (2xSTM-4 optical interface board).
10.12 SLD4A
technical specifications of the SLD4A (2xSTM-4 optical interface board).
10.13 SLQ4
10.14 SLQ4A
10.15 SL16
10.16 SL16A
technical specifications of the SL16A (1xSTM-16 optical interface board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SL16A.
10.17 SLD16
technical specifications of the SLD16 (2xSTM-16 optical interface board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SLD16.
10.18 SLQ16
technical specifications of the SLQ16 (4xSTM-16 optical interface board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SLQ16.
10.19 SLO16
technical specifications of the SLO16 (8xSTM-16 optical interface board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SLO16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
281

System
10 SDH Boards
10.20 SF16
technical specifications of the SF16 (1xSTM-16 optical interface board with the out-band
FEC function).
10.21 SF16E
technical specifications of the SF16E (1xSTM-16 optical interface board with the out-band
EFEC function).
10.22 SL64
10.23 SLD64
10.24 SF64
technical specifications of the SF64 (1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC
function). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the SF64.
10.25 SF64A
technical specifications of the SF64A (1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC
function).
10.26 SFD64
technical specifications of the SFD64 (2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC
function). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the SFD64.
10.27 SLQ41
technical specifications of the SLQ41 (4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the SLQ41.
10.28 SLH41
technical specifications of the SLH41 (16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical interface board with the
variable rate). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the SLH41.
10.29 EU04
technical specifications of the EU04 (4xSTM-1 electrical interface board).
10.30 EU08
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
282

System
10 SDH Boards

10.31 OU08
technical specifications of the N1OU08 (8xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board) and the
N2OU08 (8xSTM-1 optical interface board).
10.1 SL1

The SL1 is available in several functional versions. The functions provided by the functional
versions are different.
The SL1 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N2. The difference between
the functional versions is with regard to whether they support the tandem connection
monitoring (TCM) function and AU-3 services.
The N1SL1 is no longer manufactured.
Table 10-1 describes the versions of the SL1.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the SL1
Item
Description
Functional versions
The SL1 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and

N2.
Differences
Service processing: AU-3 service processing.
Maintenance features: loopbacks on VC-4 paths and TCM

function.
Substitution
Through the board version replacement function, the N1SL1A can

substitute for the N1SL1.
When you configure the multiplex section protection (MSP) or sub-network connection protection
(SNCP), you cannot configure the N1SL1 as the protection board if the working board is the N2SL1 on
which the TCM function is enabled or AU-3 services are configured. Otherwise, the services are
interrupted when a switching operation is performed.
10.1.2 Application
The SL1 is a line board. The SL1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit
and receive STM-1 optical signals. The SL1 converts the received optical signals into
electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SL1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
transmits the optical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
283

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 10-1 shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards
can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
The SL1 does not support the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP.

The SL1 transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the
line.
Table 10-2 provides the functions and features of the SL1.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the SL1
Function and
Feature
SL1
Basic functions
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-1 optical signals.
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2.
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,

and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-1.2 type comply

with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical
module.
Supports the usage and detection of the small form-factor pluggable

(SFP) optical module, which facilitates the maintenance of the
optical module.
Provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. The optical
Specifications
of the optical
module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
284

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SL1
interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Service
processing
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
The N2SL1 supports the AU-3 services.
Overhead
processing
Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path

overheads.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provides various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the

management and maintenance of the equipment.
Protection
schemes
Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.
The N1SL1 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting

services.
The N2SL1 supports the TCM function.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Maintenance
features

The SL1 consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 10-2 shows the functional block diagram of the SL1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
285

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SL1

155 MHz
O/E
155 Mbit/s
E/O
155
Mbit/s
SPI
E/O
K1 and K2
insertion/extraction
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
....
155 Mbit/s
155
Mbit/s
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
155 Mbit/s
....
O/E
CDR
155 MHz
PLL
RST MST MSA HPT
CDR
SPI
High-speed
bus
DCC
155 Mbit/s
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E converting
module
Frame header
Logic and
control module Communication
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power
PLL: phase-locked loop
SPI: SDH physical interface
SDH: synchronous digital

hierarchy
RST: regenerator section

termination
MST: multiplex section

termination
MSA: multiplex section

adaptation
HPT: higher order path

termination
CDR: clock data restoration
Converts the received optical signals into electrical signals, in the receive direction.
Converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals, and then sends the SDH optical
signals to fibers for transmission, in the transmit direction.
The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the laser shut down function.
1.1.1.1.304 CDR Module

This module restores the clock signal.

this module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the
inloop and outloop functions.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the regenerator section
overhead (RSOH). That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes
(A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and
checks the regenerator section trace byte (J0), and checks the B1 byte.
Copyright Huawei
286

System
10 SDH Boards
and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH.
MST sub-module
In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the multiplex section
overhead (MSOH). That is, the MST sub-module generates the multiplex sectionalarm indication signal (MS_AIS) alarm and detects the multiplex section-remote
defect indication (MS_RDI) alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the
multiplex section-remote error indication (MS_REI) alarm and generates the B2excessive errors (B2_EXC) alarm after checking the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the administration unit
group (AUG), divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the administration unit-loss of
pointer (AU_LOP) alarm and the administration unit-alarm indication signal
(AU_AIS) alarm, and performs pointer justifications.
In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the
AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving.
HPT sub-module
In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the path overhead (POH).
That is, the HPT sub-module detects the higher order path-remote error indication
(HP_REI) alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the higher order path-trace
identifier mismatch (HP_TIM) alarm and the higher order path-signal label mismatch
(HP_SLM) alarm and detects the higher order path-remote defect indication
(HP_RDI) alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the higher order
path-unequipped (HP_UNEQ) alarm after detecting the C2 byte.
1.1.1.1.306 Logic and Control Module
Manages and configures the other modules of the board.
Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface.
Traces the clock signal from the active and standby cross-connect units.
Controls the laser.
Passes the orderwire and ECC bytes through an ADM that consists of two paired slots
when the GSCC is not in position.
Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby crossconnect units.
Controls the indicators on the board.

require.
10.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL1 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
287

System
10 SDH Boards

Figure 10-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SL1
SL1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
SL1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
288

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SL1 has one optical interface. Table 10-3 describes the types and usage
of the optical interfaces of the SL1.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SL1
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
Receives optical signals.
OUT
LC
Transmits optical signals.

The SL1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.1.7 Valid Slots

The SL1 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SL1 cannot work
normally.
The slots valid for a board are determined by the following factors:
Slot bandwidth
Cross-connect capacity
Board version
The slots valid for the SL1 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the board are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SL1 can be installed in slots 18 and
1117.
10.1.8 Feature Code

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the feature code of the board.
The feature code of the SL1 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-4 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SL1 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL110 and
SSN2SL110
10
S-1.1
SSN1SL111 and
SSN2SL111
11
L-1.1
SSN1SL112 and
SSN2SL112
12
L-1.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
289

System
10 SDH Boards
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL113 and
SSN2SL113
13
Ve-1.2
SSN1SL114 and
SSN2SL114
14
I-1


correct.
----End

J0 byte: Generally, use the default value. The default value of the J0 to be received is
Disabled.
Generally, use the default value. The default value of the J1 to be received is Disabled.

For the other parameters to be set, see 26.5 SDH Processing Boards.
Step 5 Required: Configure a protection subnet. For details, see Configuring the Protection Subnet.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
290

System
10 SDH Boards
Step 6 Required: Configure services. For details, see Configuring the SDH Services.
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set parameters for the SL1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SL1 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2
For the description of each parameter, see 26 Parameter Settings.

Table 10-5 lists the faults that occur on the SL1 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
The SL1 uses the SFP optical module. When the SL1 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on the
optical interface, check whether the optical module is properly installed. To check whether the optical
module is properly installed, you can re-seat the optical module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
291

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SL1 frequently
Fault
Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption
The optical fiber or connector

becomes abnormal.
An incorrect operation is
performed.
The types or settings of the

boards are inconsistent.
The optical power becomes

abnormal.
The equipment becomes faulty.
The clock configuration is

incorrect.
The precision of the external

clock source is very low.
Protection
switching
failure
The MSP switching fails.
The SNCP switching fails.
The clock protection switching

fails.
NEs being
unreachable to
the
A single NE becomes
unreachable to the .
All the NEs in a subnet become

unreachable to the .
An NE becomes unreachable to
the frequently.
Bit error
Pointer
justification
Equipment
interconnection
fault
An SDH overhead interconnection

fault occurs.
See Troubleshooting TDM Service
Interruptions.
See Troubleshooting Pointer

Justification.
See Troubleshooting Protection

Switching Faults.
See Troubleshooting the NEs

Being Unreachable.
See Troubleshooting Device

Interconnection Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SL1, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.1.12.1 Alarms of N1SL1

ALM_ALS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
AU_AIS
Copyright Huawei
AU_CMM
292

System
10 SDH Boards
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_FAIL
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FSELECT_STG
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
LASER_MOD_ERR
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LP_RDI_VC12
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
R_LOF
POWER_ABNORMAL
OUT_PWR_ABN
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
R_LOC
TEM_HA
SPARE_PATH_ALM
R_OOF
TF
TEM_LA
T_LOSEX
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TEST_STATUS
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
TU_LOP_VC3
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
PS
PATCH_ERR
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

ALM_ALS
ALM_AU3AIS
ALM_AU3B3OVER
ALM_AU3B3SD
ALM_AU3LOP
ALM_AU3RDI
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
293

System
10 SDH Boards
ALM_AU3REI
ALM_AU3SLM
ALM_AU3TIM
ALM_AU3UNEQ
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_FAIL
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FSELECT_STG
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
LASER_MOD_ERR
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LP_RDI_VC12
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
R_LOF
POWER_ABNORMAL
OUT_PWR_ABN
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
R_LOC
TC_DEG
SPARE_PATH_ALM
R_OOF
TC_LTC
TC_EXC
T_LOSEX
TC_RDI
TC_ODI
TC_INCAIS
TC_UNEQ
TC_REI
TC_OEI
TEST_STATUS
TEM_HA
TC_TIM
TU_AIS_VC12
TF
TEM_LA
TU_LOP_VC3
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
PATCH_ERR
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PS
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
294

System
10 SDH Boards

10.1.13.1 Performance Events of N1SL1

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
295

System
10 SDH Boards
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TCBBE
TCFEBBE
TCOBBE
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX

The technical specifications of the SL1 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces,
laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Table 10-6 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SL1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SL1
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
Non-return to zero (NRZ)
Application
code
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1260 to 1360
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-3 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-34
-34
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction ratio
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
296

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the N1SL1 and N2SL1 are as follows:
Weight of the N1SL1 (kg): 0.6

The maximum power consumption of the N1SL1 at room temperature (25C) is 17 W.
10.2 SL1A

The SL1A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.2.2 Application
The SL1A is a line board. The SL1A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The SL1A converts the received optical signals
into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SL1A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
297

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SL1A transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-7 provides the functions and features of the SL1A.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SL1A
Function and
Feature
SL1A
Basic functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface


module.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which
facilitates the maintenance and upgrading of the optical module.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting
of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the singlefiber bidirectional optical module does not support loopbacks as the
optical interface by using fiber jumpers.
Specifications
of the optical
module
Service
processing
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
298

System
10 SDH Boards
Function and
Feature
SL1A
Overhead
processing

overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the

Protection
schemes
Supports the two-fiber ring MSP, four-fiber ring MSP, linear MSP,
SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Maintenance
features
Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
services.

services.

The SL1A consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
Figure 10-5 shows the functional block diagram of the SL1A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
299

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SL1A

155 MHz
O/E
155 Mbit/s
E/O
155
Mbit/s
SPI
E/O
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
....
155 Mbit/s
155
Mbit/s
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
155 Mbit/s
....
O/E
CDR
155 MHz
PLL
RST MST MSA HPT
CDR
SPI
High-speed
bus
DCC
155 Mbit/s
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E converting
module
Frame header
Logic and
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
IIC: inter-integrated circuit
CDR: clock and data

recovery


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
Copyright Huawei
300

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
10.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL1A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
301

System
10 SDH Boards
label.

Figure 10-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL1A.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SL1A
SL1A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
SL1A

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
302

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SL1A has one optical interface. Table 10-8 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SL1A.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SL1A
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC
10.2.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SL1A vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SL1A are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SL1A can be installed in slots 18
and 1117.
10.2.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the SL1A indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-9 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SL1A and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1A and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL1A10
10
S-1.1
SSN1SL1A11
11
L-1.1
SSN1SL1A12
12
L-1.2
SSN1SL1A13
13
Ve-1.2
SSN1SL1A14
14
I-1

You can set the parameters for the SL1A by using the U2000.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
303

System
10 SDH Boards
You can set the following parameters for the SL1A by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

The technical specifications of the SL1A include the parameters specified for optical
interfaces, laster safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Table 10-10 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SL1A.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SL1A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of
fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1260 to 1360
1261 to 1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-3 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-34
-34
-34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
304

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
ratio (dB)
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width (nm)
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
Table 10-11 lists the parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces
of the SL1A.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the SL1A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical interface
S-1.1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.1
Transmission distance
(km)
2 to 15
2 to 15
15 to 40
15 to 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Singlemode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550
Launched optical power

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
8.5
10
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
305

System
10 SDH Boards


The mechanical specifications of the SL1A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.6

The maximum power consumption of the SL1A at room temperature (25C) is 17 W.
10.3 SLQ1

The SLQ1 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2. The difference
between the two versions is with regard to whether they support the TCM function and AU-3
services. The N1SLQ1 is no longer manufactured.
Table 10-12 describes the versions of the SLQ1.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the SLQ1
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The SLQ1 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2.
Differences
Specifications of optical modules: single-fiber bidirectional optical

modules.
Maintenance features: loopbacks on VC-4 paths.
Substitution
Through the board version replacement function, the N3SLQ41 can

substitute for the N1SLQ1 and N2SLQ1 at the same line rate.
When you configure the MSP or SNCP, you cannot configure the N1SLQ1 as the protection board if the
working board is the N2SLQ1 on which the TCM function is enabled or AU-3 services are configured.
Otherwise, the services are interrupted when a switching operation is performed.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
306

System
10 SDH Boards
10.3.2 Application
The SLQ1 is a line board. The SLQ1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The SLQ1 converts the received optical signals
SLQ1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLQ1 transmits and receives 4xSTM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-13 provides the functions and features of the SLQ1.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the SLQ1
Function and
Feature
SLQ1
Basic functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ie-1, and Ve-1.2.

The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the Ie-1 and Ve-1.2

types comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
module.
Specifications
of the optical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
307

System
10 SDH Boards
Function and
Feature
SLQ1
module
facilitates the maintenance of the optical module.
The N1SLQ1 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module,

and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module does not support
loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.
Service
processing
The N2SLQ1 supports the AU-3 services.
Overhead
processing

overheads.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Maintenance
features
The N1SLQ1 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
services.

services.
The N2SLQ1 supports the TCM function.

The SLQ1 consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
Figure 10-8 shows the functional block diagram of the SLQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
308

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLQ1

155 MHz
O/E
155 Mbit/s
E/O
155
Mbit/s
SPI
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
....
E/O
155
Mbit/s
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
155 Mbit/s
....
O/E
155 Mbit/s
CDR
155 MHz
PLL
RST MST MSA HPT
CDR
SPI
High-speed
bus
DCC
155 Mbit/s
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E converting
module
Frame header
Logic and
Communication
control module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery
The functional modules of the STM-1 units are described as follows:


RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
309

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
310

System
10 SDH Boards
10.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-9 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLQ1
SLQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
SLQ1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
311

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SLQ1 has four optical interfaces. Table 10-14 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ1.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ1
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN4
LC
OUT1-OUT4
LC
10.3.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SLQ1 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SLQ1 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLQ1 can be installed in slots 18
and 1117 in the subrack.
10.3.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the SLQ1 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-15 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLQ1 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLQ1 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLQ110 and
SSN2SLQ110
10
S-1.1
SSN1SLQ111 and
SSN2SLQ111
11
L-1.1
SSN1SLQ112 and
SSN2SLQ112
12
L-1.2
SSN1SLQ113 and
SSN2SLQ113
13
Ve-1.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
312

System
10 SDH Boards
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLQ114 and
SSN2SLQ114
14
I-1
SSN1SLQ115
15
Ie-1

You can set the parameters for the SLQ1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLQ1 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

The technical specifications of the SLQ1 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-16 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ1
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Ie-1
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
0 to 2
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1260 to
1360
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
1270 to 1380
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-3 to 0
-19 to -14
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
313

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-34
-34
-34
-30
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
-10
-14
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
of the SLQ1.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the SLQ1
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
S-1.1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.1
(km)
2 to 15
2 to 15
15 to 40
15 to 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Singlemode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction
8.5
8.5
10
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
314

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
ratio (dB)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode



The mechanical specifications of the N1SLQ1 and N2SLQ1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the N1SLQ1 at room temperature (25C) is 15 W.
10.4 SLQ1A

The SLQ1A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Through the board version replacement function, the N1SLQ1 can substitute for the
N1SLQ1A.
10.4.2 Application
The SLQ1A is a line board. The SLQ1A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The SLQ1A converts the received optical signals
SLQ1A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
Figure 10-10 shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing
boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
315

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLQ1A transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-18 provides the functions and features of the SLQ1A.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SLQ1A
Function and
Feature
SLQ1A
Basic functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ie-1, and Ve-1.2.

The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the Ie-1 and Ve-1.2

types comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
module.
Specifications
of the optical
module
Service
processing
Overhead
processing
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
316

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLQ1A
overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Maintenance
features
services.

services.

The SLQ1A consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
Figure 10-11 shows the functional block diagram of the SLQ1A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
317

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLQ1A

155 MHz
155 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
155
Mbit/s
CDR
E/O
S
P
I
155
Mbit/s
CDR
Cross-connect unit
K1 and K2
Cross-connect unit
K1 and K2 insertion/extraction
High-speed
bus
....
155 Mbit/s
O/E
155
Mbit/s
155
Mbit/s
....
155 Mbit/s
Reference clock
155 MHz
PLL
RST
155
Mbit/s
MS
T
MS
A
HPT
High-speed
bus
155
Mbit/s
DCC
SDH overhead processing module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control
module
+3.3 V
DC/DC
converter
DC/DC
converter
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Cross-connect unit A
Cross-connect unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery


RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
318

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
319

System
10 SDH Boards
10.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ1A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-12 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ1A.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLQ1A
SLQ1A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
SLQ1A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
320

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SLQ1A has four optical interfaces. Table 10-19 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ1A.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ1A
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN4
LC
OUT1OUT4
LC
10.4.6 Valid Slots

The SLQ1A must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLQ1A fails to
work normally.
The slots valid for the SLQ1A are as follows:
The SLQ1A can be installed in slots 18 and 1117 in the subrack.
10.4.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the SLQ1A indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-20 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLQ1A and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLQ1A and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLQ1A10
10
S-1.1
SSN1SLQ1A11
11
L-1.1
SSN1SLQ1A12
12
L-1.2
SSN1SLQ1A13
13
Ve-1.2
SSN1SLQ1A14
14
I-1
SSN1SLQ1A15
15
Ie-1

You can set the parameters for the SLQ1A by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLQ1A by using the U2000:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
321

System
J0
J1
J2
C2
10 SDH Boards

The technical specifications of the SLQ1A include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-21 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ1A.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ1A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Ie-1
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
0 to 2
Type of
fiber
Singlemode
LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Multi-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1260 to
1360
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
1270 to
1380
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-3 to 0
-19 to -14
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-34
-34
-34
-30
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
-10
-14
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
322

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width (nm)
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the SLQ1A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the SLQ1A at room temperature (25C) is 15 W.
10.5 SLO1
technical specifications of the SLO1 (8xSTM-1 optical interface board).

The SLO1 is available in two functional versions, namely, N2 and N3. The difference
services. The N3SLO1 is discontinued.
Table 10-22 describes the versions of the SLO1.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the SLO1
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The SLO1 is available in two functional versions, namely, N2 and N3.
Differences
Maintenance features: loopbacks on VC-4 paths, TCM function, and

PRBS function.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
323

System
10 SDH Boards
Item
Description
Substitution
When the N2SLO1 is not configured with the TCM function and AU-3
services, the N3SLO1 can substitute for the N2SLO1.
When you configure the MSP or SNCP, you cannot configure the N3SLO1 as the protection board if the
working board is the N2SLO1 on which the TCM function is enabled or AU-3 services are configured.
10.5.2 Application
The SLO1 is a line board. The SLO1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The SLO1 converts the received optical signals
SLO1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLO1 transmits and receives 8xSTM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-23 provides the functions and features of the SLO1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
324

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the SLO1 board

Function and
Feature
SLO1
Basic functions
Receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 optical signals.
Specifications of
the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2.
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-1.2 type

comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the detection and query of the information about the

optical module.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the

setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module,

which facilitates the maintenance and upgrading of the optical
module.
The N2SLO1 supports the AU-3 services.
Processes the path overheads.
Supports one to eight channels of ECC communication.
Specifications of
the optical module
Service processing
Overhead
processing
Alarms and
performance events

Protection schemes
Maintenance
features
The N3SLO1 supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not
affect services.

services.
The N2SLO1 supports the TCM function.
The N3SLO1 supports the PRBS function in the line direction,

cross-connect direction and Cause by Cross function.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
325

System
10 SDH Boards

The SLO1 consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
Figure 10-14 shows the functional block diagram of the SLO1.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLO1
Backplane
155 MHz
O/E
155 Mbit/s
E/O
155
Mbit/s
SPI
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
....
E/O
Reference clock
155 Mbit/s
....
O/E
155 Mbit/s
CDR
155
Mbit/s
155 MHz
PLL
RST MST MSA HPT
CDR
SPI
High-speed
bus
DCC
155 Mbit/s
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E converting
module
Frame header
Logic and
Communication
control module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
326

System
10 SDH Boards
RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
327

System
10 SDH Boards

require.
10.5.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLO1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-15 and Figure 10-16 show the appearance of the front panel of the SLO1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLO1 (with level optical interfaces)
SLO1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O U T 1 IN 1 O U T 2 IN 2
O U T 3 IN 3
O U T 4 IN 4
O U T 5 IN 5
O U T 6 IN 6
O U T 7 IN 7
O U T 8 IN 8
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
SLO1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
328

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the SLO1 (with slanting optical interfaces)
SLO1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
SLO1
The front panel of the SLO1 has eight optical interfaces. Table 10-24 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SLO1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
329

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SLO1

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1-IN8/RX1-RX8
LC
OUT1-OUT8/TX1TX8
LC
For SLO1 boards with level optical interfaces, use optical attenuators only on the ODF side.
10.5.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SLO1 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SLO1 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLO1 can be installed in slots 18
and 1117. In this case, eight optical interfaces can be configured.
10.5.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the SLO1 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-25 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLO1 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLO1 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
Type of Optical interface
SSN2SLO110 and
SSN3SLO110
10
S-1.1
SSN2SLO111 and
SSN3SLO111
11
L-1.1
SSN2SLO112 and
SSN3SLO112
12
L-1.2
SSN2SLO113 and
SSN3SLO113
13
Ve-1.2
SSN2SLO114 and
SSN3SLO114
14
I-1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
330

System
10 SDH Boards

You can set the parameters for the SLO1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLO1 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

The technical specifications of the SLO1 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-26 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLO1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLO1
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1261 to
1360
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-3 to 0
(dBm)
-23
-28
-34
-34
-34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
331

System
Parameter
Value
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
10 SDH Boards
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the N2SLO1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.1
The mechanical specifications of the N3SLO1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.2

The maximum power consumption of the N2SLO1 at room temperature (25C) is 26 W.
10.6 SLT1
technical specifications of the SLT1 (12xSTM-1 optical interface board).

The SLT1 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.6.2 Application
The SLT1 is a line board. The SLT1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The SLT1 converts the received optical signals
SLT1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
332

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLT1 transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-27 provides the functions and features of the SLT1.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SLT1
Function and
Feature
SLT1
Basic functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Supports S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 standard optical interfaces whose

characteristics comply with ITU-T G.957.
Specifications
of the optical
module
module.
facilitates the maintenance of the optical module.
Supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the

single-fiber bidirectional optical module does not support loopbacks
at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.
Service
processing
Overhead
processing

overheads.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
333

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLT1
Supports one to twelve channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to

port 8 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1D12. Port
9 to port 12 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1D3.
Supports the time synchronization feature and transmission of the

time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Maintenance
features
services.

services.
Supports the Cause by Cross function.

The SLT1 consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, logic and control module, and power module. The external services are accessed by
the external interface boards EU08 and OU08. The EU08 is an electrical interface board and
the OU08 is an optical interface board.
Figure 10-18 shows the functional block diagram of the SLT1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
334

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLT1

155 MHz
O/E
155 Mbit/s
E/O
155
Mbit/s
SPI
E/O
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
....
155 Mbit/s
155
Mbit/s
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
155 Mbit/s
....
O/E
CDR
155 MHz
PLL
RST MST MSA HPT
CDR
SPI
High-speed
bus
DCC
155 Mbit/s
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E converting
module
Frame header
Logic and
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
Copyright Huawei
335

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
10.6.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLT1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
336

System
10 SDH Boards
label.

Figure 10-19 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLT1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLT1
SLT1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
O U T 1 IN 1 O U T 2 IN 2
O U T 3 IN 3
O U T 4 IN 4
O U T 5 IN 5
O U T 6 IN 6
O U T 7 IN 7
O U T 8 IN 8
O U T 9 IN 9 O U T 1 0 IN 1 0 O U T 1 1 IN 1 1 O U T 1 2 IN 1 2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
SLT1

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
337

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SLT1 has 12 optical interfaces. Table 10-28 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SLT1.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SLT1
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1IN12
LC
OUT1OUT12
LC
The optical interfaces of the SLT1 are level optical interfaces. Hence, use an optical attenuator
only on the ODF side.
10.6.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SLT1 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLT1 can be installed in slots 18 and
1116. When the SLT1 is installed in slots 14, 15, and 16, one to eight optical interfaces
can be configured. When the SLT1 is installed in slots 58 and 1114, one to twelve
optical interfaces can be configured.
10.6.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the SLT1 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-29 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLT1 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLT1 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
Type of Optical interface
SSN1SLT123
23
S-1.1
SSN1SLT124
24
L-1.1
SSN1SLT125
25
L-1.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
338

System
10 SDH Boards

You can set the parameters for the SLT1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLT1 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

The technical specifications of the SLT1 include the parameters specified for optical
interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-30 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLT1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLT1
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC

(nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-28
-34
-34
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)
8.2
10
10

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
339

System
10 SDH Boards
of the SLT1.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the SLT1
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
S-1.1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.1
(km)
2 to 15
2 to 15
15 to 40
15 to 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Singlemode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-32
-32
-32
-32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5
8.5
10
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode



The mechanical specifications of the SLT1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
340

System
10 SDH Boards

The maximum power consumption of the SLT1 at room temperature (25C) is 22 W.
10.7 SLH1
technical specifications of the SLH1 (16xSTM-1 signal processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SLH1.

The SLH1 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.7.2 Application
The SLH1 is a line board. The SLH1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical/electrical signals. The SLH1 converts the received optical
signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side, or
directly sends the received electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLH1
converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLH1 processes STM-1 optical and electrical signals.
Table 10-32 provides the functions and features of the SLH1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
341

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SLH1

Function and
Feature
SLH1
Basic functions
Processes 16xSTM-1 signals.
Specifications of
the optical
module

optical module.


single-fiber bidirectional optical module does not support loopbacks
at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.
Service
processing
Overhead
processing

overheads. Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2
bytes.
Supports one to sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to

port 8 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1-D12.
Port 9 to port 16 support the ECC communication by using bytes
D1-D3.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface board and
the switching and bridging board.
Supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
affect services.

services.
Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
342

System
10 SDH Boards
When the SLH1 works with different interface boards and electrical interface switching
boards, the access capabilities for the STM-1 signals are different. For details, refer to Table
10-33.
Figure 1.2 Access capabilities of the SLH1 when the SLH1 works with different interface boards
and electrical interface switching boards
Interface Board
SLH1
None
The SLH1 cannot transmit/receive signals.
EU08
Transmits/Receives and processes 8-channel or 16-channel electrical

signals.
OU08
Transmits/Receives and processes 8-channel or 16-channel optical

signals.
EU08 + OU08
Transmits/Receives and processes 8-channel electrical signals and 8channel optical signals.
EU08 + TSB8
Transmits/Receives and processes 8-channel or 16-channel STM-1

electrical signals, and realizes the 1:N (N3) TPS protection.

The SLH1 consists of the CDR module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control
module, and power module. The external services are accessed by the external interface
boards EU08 and OU08. The EU08 is an electrical interface board and the OU08 is an optical
interface board.
Figure 10-21 shows the functional block diagram of the SLH1 when the SLH1 works with the
EU08 by describing how to process 1xSTM-1 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
343

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLH1 when the SLH1 works with the EU08
Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
155 MHz
SPI
EU08
155 Mbit/s
155
Mbit/s
Encode/
Decode
K1 and K2
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
High-s peed
bus
....
155 Mbit/s
CDR
Cross-connect
unit
155 Mbit/s
CMI
Transformer
155
Mbit/s
Reference clock
RST MST MSA HPT
High-s peed
bus
CDR
DCC
155 Mbit/s
SDH overhead
processing module
Frame header
Logic and
control module
LOS
+3.3 V
Power
module
Communication
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
Power
module
Cross-connect
unit A
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
Figure 10-22 shows the functional block diagram of the SLH1 when the SLH1 works with the
OU08 by describing how to process 1xSTM-1 signals.
Figure 1.2 Functional block diagram of the SLH1 when the SLH1 works with the OU08
Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
155 MHz
155
155
Mbit/s CDR Mbit/s
OU08
155 Mbit/s
K1 and K2
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
....
SPI
High-speed
bus
RST
MST MSA HPT
CDR
E/O
SDH overhead
processing module
LOS
Laser shutdown
Frame header
Logic and
Communication
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
High-speed
bus
DCC
155 Mbit/s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Cross-connect
unit
155 Mbit/s
O/E
155 Mbit/s
Reference clock
Power
module

Copyright Huawei
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit A
Cros s-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy
344

System
10 SDH Boards

termination

termination

adaptation

termination


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Copyright Huawei
345

System
10 SDH Boards
Controls the laser.

require.
10.7.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLH1 has indicators and a bar code.

The front panel of the SLH1 does not have an interface. Hence, the SLH1 must be used with
the EU08 or OU08. Figure 10-23 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLH1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
346

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLH1
SLH1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SLH1

The SLH1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
347

System
10 SDH Boards
10.7.7 Valid Slots

The SLH1 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLH1 fails to work
normally.
The slots valid for the SLH1 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The SLH1
needs to work with the OU08/EU08 and TSB8. The slots valid for the SLH1 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLH1 can be installed in slots 25
and 1316.
10.7.8 Board Protection

The SLH1 supports the 1:N (N3) tributary protection switching (TPS) protection.
1.1.1.1.387 Protection Principle

The TPS protection is equipment-level protection. When the working board fails, the accessed
signals are switched to the protection board. Hence, complex network-level protection
operations such as the MSP and SNCP are not triggered. In addition, the reliability of the
equipment is enhanced.
The SLH1 can work with the EU08 and TSB8 to realize one 1:N (N3) TPS protection group
for 8xSTM-1 or 16xSTM-1 electrical signals. Figure 10-24 shows the TPS protection
provided by the SLH1.
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the SLH1
Service signal
Service signal
Switching
control bus
Crossconnect and
timing board
Interface board N
Working board N
Working board
Working board 1
Protection board
Interface board
Interface board 1
Protection
switching board
Failed
Normal state
When each working board functions normally, the traffic signal is directly transmitted to
the corresponding working board through position 1 of the control switch on the
interface board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Switching state
Copyright Huawei
348

System
10 SDH Boards
When a working board detects a failure and requires the switching operation, the control
switch of the corresponding interface board switches from position 1 to position 2. At the
same time, the control switch of the protection switching board switches to the
corresponding position so that the protection board can protect the failed working board.
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing
board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system control board cannot be detected or is faulty.
1.1.1.1.388 Hardware Configuration

Figure 10-25 shows the slot configuration for two 1:3 TPS protection groups for 16xSTM-1
signals of the SLH1.
PIU
S
L
O
T
3
1
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
AUX
PIU
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
Working 1
Working 1
XCS
XCS
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
Working 2
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
Working 2
S
L
O
T
4
FAN
Working 2
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
1 2 3
Working 1
S
L
O
T
3
2
FAN
Protection 1
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
GSCC
S
L
O
T
2
8
TSB8
S
L
O
T
2
7
TSB8
S
L
O
T
2
6
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
3
Protection 2
S
L
O
T
2
5
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
2
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
4
TSB8
EU08
EU08
EU08
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
1
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
0
EU08
S
L
O
T
1
9
TSB8
Figure 1.2 Slot configuration for two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the SLH1
Fiber routing area
In Figure 10-25, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3-5. The board in slot 16
protects the boards in slots 13-15.
Table 10-34 lists the slots for the SLH1, EU08, and TSB8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
349

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Slots for the SLH1, EU08, and TSB8

Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
SLH1 (protection
board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8
Slots 19-20
Slots 35-36
SLH1 (working
board)
Slots 3-5
Slots 13-15
EU08
Slots 21-26
Slots 29-34
When the equipment is configured for two 1:3 TPS protection groups for 8xSTM-1 signals of the SLH1,
the TSB8 and EU08 can be inserted only in the odd slots.


correct.
----End

Disabled.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
350

System
10 SDH Boards

----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the SLH1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLH1 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
C2

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
351

System
10 SDH Boards
Table 10-35 lists the faults that occur on the SLH1 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SLH1 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Service interruption
The optical fiber,

cable, or
connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
Bit error
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Copyright Huawei
352

System
Fault Symptom
10 SDH Boards
Common Fault
Cause
Equipment
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SLH1, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.7.12.1 Alarms of N1SLH1(B)

ALM_ALS
AU_LOP
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
B2_EXC
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B3_EXC_VC3
B2_SD
B3_EXC
BD_STATUS
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BIP_SD
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_FAIL
C2_PDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
HP_TIM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
J0_MM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LOOP_ALM
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_REI_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
LSR_NO_FITED
MS_REI
R_LOF
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
353

System
10 SDH Boards
MS_RDI
NO_BD_SOFT
RELAY_FAIL
OH_LOOP
OUT_PWR_ABN
SUBCARD_ABN
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
TEM_LA
R_LOS
R_OOF
TPS_ALM
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TU_AIS_VC3
T_LOSEX
TEM_HA
W_R_FAIL
TEST_STATUS
TF
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
PS
PATCH_ERR
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

10.7.13.1 Performance Events of N1SLH1(B)

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
354

System
TPLCUR
10 SDH Boards
TPLMAX

The technical specifications of the SLH1 include the parameters specified for optical
1.1.1.1.395 Parameters Specified for Interfaces

The OU8 or EU08 provides interfaces for the SLH1. For the parameters specified for the
interfaces, see Technical Specifications of the EU08 and Technical Specifications of the
OU08.

The mechanical specifications of the SLH1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the SLH1 at room temperature (25C) is 27 W.
10.8 SEP1
technical specifications of the SEP1 (8xSTM-1 line processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SEP1.

The SEP1 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.8.2 Application
The SEP1 is a line board. The SEP1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical/electrical signals. The SEP1 converts the received optical
signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side, or
directly sends the received electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SEP1
converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
355

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SEP1 processes STM-1 signals. When the interfaces are available on the front panel of
the SEP1 (the logical board of the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 on the U2000), the SEP1
processes 2xSTM-1 electrical signals. When the SEP1 is used with the interface board (the
logical board of the SEP1 is displayed as SEP on the U2000), the SEP1 processes 8xSTM-1
optical/electrical signals or 4xSTM-1 electrical signals. The physical boards of the two types
of logical boards (SEP1 and SEP) are the SEP1. When the logical boards do not need to be
differentiated, both the SEP1 and SEP are defined as SEP1.
Table 10-36 provides the functions and features of the SEP1.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SEP1
Function and
Feature
SEP1
Basic functions
Processes 2xSTM-1 signals when the interfaces are available on the

front panel.
Processes 8xSTM-1 or 4xSTM-1 signals when the SEP1 works with

an interface board.
Service
processing
Overhead
processing

overheads.
Supports one or two channels of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performance
events
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)


Copyright Huawei
356

System
10 SDH Boards
Function and
Feature
SEP1
Protection
schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface board and
services.

services.
Maintenance
features
When the SEP1 works with different interface boards and electrical interface switching
boards, the access capabilities for the STM-1 signals are different. For details, refer to Table
10-37.
Figure 1.2 Access capabilities of the SEP1 when the SEP1 works with different interface boards
and electrical interface switching boards
Interface Board
SEP1
None
Transmits/Receives and processes 2xSTM-1 electrical signals, but

does not support the TPS protection.
EU04
Transmits/Receives and processes 4xSTM-1 electrical signals.
EU08
Transmits/Receives and processes 8xSTM-1 electrical signals.
OU08
Transmits/Receives and processes 8xSTM-1 optical signals.
EU04 + TSB4
Transmits/Receives and processes 4xSTM-1 electrical signals, and

supports the TPS protection.
EU08 + TSB8

EU04 + TSB8

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
357

System
10 SDH Boards
One SEP1 can transmit/receive services from only one interface board. When the SEP1 works with an
interface board, the two interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1 are invalid.

The SEP1 consists of the line interface module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, logic and control module, and power module. The external services are accessed by
the external interface boards EU04//EU08/OU08. The EU04/EU08 is an electrical interface
board and the OU08 is an optical interface board.
Figure 10-27 shows the functional block diagram of the SEP1.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SEP1
155 MHz
PLL
155 MHz
SPI
Port 1
155 Mbit/s
Port 2
CMI
155 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
CDR
Transformer
Encode/
Decode
155
Mbit/s
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
155 Mbit/s
....
155 Mbit/s
CMI Encode/
Decode
Transform er
NRZ
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
NRZ CDR
High-speed
bus
155
Mbit/s
RST MST
MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
155 Mbit/s
SDH overhead
processing module
LOS
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Power
module
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
Figure 10-28 shows the functional block diagram of the SEP when the SEP works with the
EU08. When the SEP works with the EU04, the function block diagram is the same except
that the number of signals accessed and processed by the SEP is different.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
358

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Functional block diagram of the SEP when the SEP works with the EU08
Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
Reference clock
K1 and K2
EU08
SPI
155 Mbit/s
CMI
Encode/
Port 1
Transformer
155 Mbit/s
Decode
155 Mbit/s
CDR
155 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
CMI
Port 8
Encode/
155 Mbit/s Transformer
Decode
CDR
155 Mbit/s
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
155 Mbit/s
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
LOS
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
Figure 10-29 shows the functional block diagram of the SEP when the SEP works with the
OU08.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
359

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.3 Functional block diagram of the SEP when the SEP works with the OU08
Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
155 OU08
Mbit/s
O/E
155
Port 1 Mbit/s
E/O
155
Mbit/s O/E
Port 8 155
E/O
Mbit/s
Reference clock
K1 and K2
NRZ
SP
I
NRZ
K1 and K2
155
Mbit/s
CDR
155 Mbit/s
155
Mbit/s
CDR
155 Mbit/s
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
Logic and
control module
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
If the SEP works with the OU08 that uses electrical modules, it works in the same way as it does when it
works with the EU08.
1.1.1.1.398 Line Interface Module and CDR Module
In the receive direction, the received electrical signals (CMI codes) are isolated through
the converter and then transmitted to the decoding unit. The CDR module restores the
clock signals after decoding.
In the transmit direction, the SDH signals, which are processed by the SDH overhead
processing module, are transmitted to the encoding unit. The converter isolates the 155
Mbit/s electrical signals (CMI codes) and sends the signals. The encoding and decoding
units monitor R_LOS alarms.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
360

System
10 SDH Boards
RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
361

System
10 SDH Boards

require.
10.8.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SEP1 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Figure 10-30 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SEP1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SEP1
SEP1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
AOUT
AIN
BOUT
BIN
SEP1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
362

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SEP1 has two pairs of electrical interfaces. Table 10-38 describes the
types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the SEP1.
Figure 1.1 Electrical interfaces of the SEP1
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
AINBIN
75-ohm SMB
Receives the STM-1 signals.
AOUTBOUT
75-ohm SMB
Transmits the STM-1 signals.
Note: The SEP1 can be used with the interface board EU04, EU08, or OU08. In this case,
the SEP1 is defined as SEP. When the SEP1 is used with the interface board, the two
interfaces on the front panel are invalid.

The SEP1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.8.7 Valid Slots

The SEP1 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SEP1 cannot work
normally.
When the SEP1 is used with the interface board, the logical board of the SEP1 is displayed as SEP on
the .
The slots valid for the SEP1 are as follows:
When the SEP1 is connected to cables by using the interfaces on its front panel, the
SEP1 can be installed in slots 16 and 1316 in the subrack.
When the SEP1 is used with the interface board, the SEP1 can be installed in slots 25

The TPS protection is equipment-level protection. When the working board fails, the accessed
services are switched to the protection board. Hence, complex network-level protection
operations such as the MSP and SNCP are not triggered. In addition, the reliability of the
equipment is enhanced.
When the SEP1 is used with the interface board, the logical board of the SEP1 is displayed as SEP on
the .
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
363

System
10 SDH Boards

The SEP can work with the EU08 and TSB8 to provide two 1:N (N3) TPS protection groups
for 8xSTM-1 electrical signals.
The SEP can also work with the EU04 and TSB4 to provide two 1:N (N3) TPS protection
groups for 4xSTM-1 electrical signals.
When the SEP works with the EU08 and TSB8 to realize the TPS protection, the protection
principle and valid slots of the involved boards are the same as the protection principle and
valid slots of the involved boards when the SEP works with the EU04 and TSB4 to realize the
TPS protection. Figure 10-31 shows the TPS protection provided by the SEP.
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the SEP
Service signal
Service signal
Switching
control bus
Crossconnect and
timing board
Interface board N
Working board N
Working board
Working board 1
Protection board
Interface board
Interface board 1
Protection
switching board
Failed
Normal state
interface board.
Switching state

Figure 10-32 shows the slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the SEP.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
364

System
10 SDH Boards
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
Working 1
Working 1
XCS
XCS
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
GSCC
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
S
L
O
T
3
6
FAN
Working 2
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
AUX
S
L
O
T
3
2
TSB8
S
L
O
T
3
1
Working 2
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
1 2 3
Working 1
S
L
O
T
3
0
FAN
Protection 1
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
Working 2
S
L
O
T
2
8
Protection 2
S
L
O
T
2
7
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
6
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
5
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
4
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
3
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
2
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
1
EU08
S
L
O
T
2
0
TSB8
S
L
O
T
1
9
PIU
Figure 1.2 Slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the SEP
Fiber routing area
Table 10-39 lists the slots for the SEP, EU08, and TSB8.
Figure 1.1 Slots for the SEP, EU08, and TSB8
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
SEP (working board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
SEP (working board)
Slots 3-5
Slots 13-15
EU08
Slots 21, 23, and 25
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
365

System
10 SDH Boards
10.8.9 Feature Code

The IFSD1 does not have a feature code.

When the SEP1 works with the EU08, ensure that the EU08 is installed before the SEP1.
Otherwise, the opposite end may receive the R_LOF alarm.

correct.
----End

Disabled.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
366

System
10 SDH Boards
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the SEP1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SEP1 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

Table 10-40 lists the faults that occur on the SEP1 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
367

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SEP1 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The optical fiber,

cable, or
connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
Bit error
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Equipment
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
An SDH overhead
Interruptions.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Faults.

Copyright Huawei
368

System
Fault Symptom
10 SDH Boards
Common Fault
Cause
occurs.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SEP1, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.8.13.1 Alarms of N1SEP1

AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_FAIL
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FSELECT_STG
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
LP_RDI_VC12
J0_MM
LOOP_ALM
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
R_LOF
R_LOS
R_OOF
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
369

System
10 SDH Boards
TU_LOP_VC3
W_R_FAIL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PS
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
WRG_BD_TYPE

10.8.14.1 Performance Events of N1SEP1

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
RSUAS
RSSES

The technical specifications of the SEP1 include the parameters specified for interfaces,
1.1.1.1.413 Parameters Specified for Interfaces

Table 10-41 lists the parameters specified for the interfaces of the SEP1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the interfaces of the SEP1
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
CMI and NRZ
Connector
SMB
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
370

System
10 SDH Boards

The mechanical specifications of the SEP1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the SEP1 at room temperature (25C) is 17 W.
10.9 SL4

The SL4 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2. The difference between
the two versions is with regard to whether they support the TCM function and AU-3 services.
The N1SL4 is no longer manufactured.
Item
Description
Functional versions
The SL4 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and

N2.
Differences
Maintenance features: loopbacks on VC-4 paths.
Substitution
Through the board version replacement function, the N1SL4A can

substitute for the N1SL4.
When you configure the MSP or SNCP, you cannot configure the N1SL4 as the protection board if the
working board is the N2SL4 on which the TCM function is enabled or AU-3 services are configured.
10.9.2 Application
The SL4 is a line board. The SL4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit
and receive STM-4 optical signals. The SL4 converts the received optical signals into
electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
371

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SL4 transmits and receives 1xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Function and
Feature
SL4
Basic functions
Receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals, and processes

1xSTM-4 standard or concatenation services.
Specifications of
the optical
interface

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2.



optical module.

Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module,

module.
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and

VC-4-4c concatenation services.
Specifications of
the optical
module
Service
processing
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
372

System
10 SDH Boards
Function and
Feature
SL4
Overhead
processing

overheads. Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, J2, and C2
bytes.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets of
K bytes. One SL4 supports a maximum of two MSP protection
rings.
The N1SL4 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
affect services.

services.
Maintenance
features

The SL4 consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
Figure 10-34 shows the functional block diagram of the .SL4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
373

System
10 SDH Boards

155 MHz
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
622
Mbit/s
CDR
Reference clock
155 MHz
PLL
622
Mbit/s
K1 and K2
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
622 Mbit/s
High-speed bus
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
....
....
622 Mbit/s
622
Mbit/s
CDR
622
Mbit/s
RST
MST
MSA
HPT
High-speed
bus
622 Mbit/s
DCC
IIC
Logic and
control
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
DC/DC
converter
DC/DC
converter
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
SCC unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery


RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
374

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
375

System
10 SDH Boards
10.9.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

SL4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
SL4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
376

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SL4 has one optical interface. Table 10-44 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SL4.
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC
The SL4 can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.
10.9.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SL4 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SL4 are as follows:
1117.
10.9.7 Feature Code

Table 10-45 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SL4 and the type of
optical interface.
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL410 and
SSN2SL410
10
S-4.1
SSN1SL411 and
SSN2SL411
11
L-4.1
SSN1SL412 and
SSN2SL412
12
L-4.2
SSN1SL413 and
SSN2SL413
13
Ve-4.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
377

System
10 SDH Boards
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL414 and
SSN2SL414
14
I-4

You can set the parameters for the SL4 by using the U2000.
J0
J1
J2
C2

The technical specifications of the SL4 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces,
laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum
-8
-8
-8
-8
-13
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
378

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
overload (dBm)
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the N1SL4 and N2SL4 are as follows:

10.10 SL4A

The SL4A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.10.2 Application
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
379

System
10 SDH Boards

NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SL4A transmits and receives 1xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-47 provides the functions and features of the SL4A.
Function and
Feature
SL4A
Basic functions

Specifications of
the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-4,

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T
G.957. The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type
Supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The
optical interface uses the LC connector. The CWDM optical interface
supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distance of 120 km.
Specifications of
the optical
module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

optical module.


Copyright Huawei
380

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SL4A

module.

single-fiber bidirectional optical module does not support
Service
processing
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-44c concatenation services.
Overhead
processing

overheads. Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, J2, and C2
bytes.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
K bytes. One SL4A supports a maximum of two MSP protection
rings.
affect services.

services.
Maintenance
features

The SL4A consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
module, logic and control module, power module.
Figure 10-37 shows the functional block diagram of the SL4A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
381

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SL4A

155 MHz
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
622
Mbit/s
CDR
Reference clock
155 MHz
PLL
622
Mbit/s
K1 and K2
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
622 Mbit/s
High-speed bus
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
....
....
622 Mbit/s
622
Mbit/s
CDR
622
Mbit/s
RST
MST
MSA
HPT
High-speed
bus
622 Mbit/s
DCC
IIC
Logic and
control
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
DC/DC
converter
DC/DC
converter
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
SCC unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery


RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
382

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
383

System
10 SDH Boards
10.10.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

SL4A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
SL4A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
384

System
10 SDH Boards
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC
The SL4A can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.
10.10.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SL4A vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SL4A are as follows:
and 1117.
10.10.7 Feature Code

Table 10-49 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SL4A and the type of
optical interface.
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL4A10
10
S-4.1
SSN1SL4A11
11
L-4.1
SSN1SL4A12
12
L-4.2
SSN1SL4A13
13
Ve-4.2
SSN1SL4A14
14
I-4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
385

System
10 SDH Boards

J0
J1
J2
C2
10.10.9 Technical Specifications of SL4A


Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-8
-13
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
386

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30
30
of the SL4A.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the SL4A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-4.1
S-4.1
Transmission
distance (km)
10
10
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1490
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1490
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
(dBm)
-19.5
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
387

System
10 SDH Boards
Table 10-52 and Table 10-53 list the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of
the SL4A.
Figure 1.3 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SL4A
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
80

(dBm)
0 to 5
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
1600
8.2
Maximum -20 dB spectral width

(nm)
Minimum side mode suppression

ratio (dB)
30
Figure 1.4 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SL4A
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
120

(dBm)
-1 to 3
192.10 to 196.00

(GHz)
10
-28
-9
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
388

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM

(ps/nm)
2400
8.2

width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

30


Weight (kg): 0.6

The maximum power consumption of the SL4A at room temperature (25C) is 17 W.
10.11 SLD4
technical specifications of the SLD4 (2xSTM-4 optical interface board).

The SLD4 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2. The difference
services. The N1SLD4 is no longer manufactured.
Table 10-54 describes the versions of the SLD4.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the SLD4
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The SLD4 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2.
Differences
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
389

System
Item
10 SDH Boards
Description
modules.
Substitution
Maintenance features: loopbacks on VC-4 paths and TCM function.
The versions cannot be substituted with each other.
When you configure the MSP or SNCP, you cannot configure the N1SLD4 as the protection board if the
working board is the N2SLD4 on which the TCM function is enabled or AU-3 services are configured.
10.11.2 Application
The SLD4 is a line board. The SLD4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The SLD4 converts the received optical signals
SLD4 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLD4 transmits and receives 2xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-55 provides the functions and features of the SLD4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
390

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the SLD4

Function and
Feature
SLD4
Basic functions

Specifications of
the optical
interface

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2.



optical module.


module.
The N1SLD4 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical

module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module does not
support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and

The N2SLD4 supports the AU-3 services.

overheads.
Specifications of
the optical
module
Service
processing
Overhead
processing
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes four sets
of K bytes. A single optical interface supports two MSP protection
rings, and one SLD4 supports a maximum of four MSP protection
rings.
The N1SLD4 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
affect services.
Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
391

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLD4

services.
The N2SLD4 supports the TCM function.

The SLD4 consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
Figure 10-40 shows the functional block diagram of the SLD4.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLD4
155 MHz
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
622
Mbit/s
CDR
Reference clock
155 MHz
PLL
622
Mbit/s
K1 and K2
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
622 Mbit/s
High-speed bus
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
....
....
622 Mbit/s
622
Mbit/s
CDR
622
Mbit/s
RST
MST
MSA
HPT
High-speed
bus
622 Mbit/s
DCC
IIC
Logic and
control
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
DC/DC
converter
DC/DC
converter
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
SCC unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
392

System
10 SDH Boards


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Copyright Huawei
393

System
10 SDH Boards
Controls the laser.

require.
10.11.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLD4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-41 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLD4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
394

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLD4
SLD4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
SLD4
The front panel of the SLD4 has two optical interfaces. Table 10-56 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SLD4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
395

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SLD4

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN2
LC
OUT1-OUT2
LC
The SLD4 can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.
10.11.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SLD4 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SLD4 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLD4 can be installed in slots 18
and 1117.

The feature code of the SLD4 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-57 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLD4 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLD4 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLD410 and
SSN2SLD410
10
S-4.1
SSN1SLD411 and
SSN2SLD411
11
L-4.1
SSN1SLD412 and
SSN2SLD412
12
L-4.2
SSN1SLD413 and
SSN2SLD413
13
Ve-4.2
SSN1SLD414 and
SSN2SLD414
14
I-4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
396

System
10 SDH Boards

You can set the parameters for the SLD4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLD4 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

The technical specifications of the SLD4 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-58 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLD4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLD4
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-8
-13
Minimum
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
397

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
of the N1SLD4.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the N1SLD4
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-4.1
S-4.1
Transmission
distance (km)
10
10
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1490
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1490
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
(dBm)
-19.5
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
398

System
10 SDH Boards


The mechanical specifications of the N1SLD4 and N2SLD4 are as follows:
Weight of the N1SLD4 (kg): 0.6
Weight of the N2SLD4 (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the N1SLD4 at room temperature (25C) is 17 W.
10.12 SLD4A
technical specifications of the SLD4A (2xSTM-4 optical interface board).

The SLD4A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Through the board version replacement function, the N1SLD4 can substitute for the
N1SLD4A.
10.12.2 Application
The SLD4A is a line board. The SLD4A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The SLD4A converts the received optical signals
SLD4A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
399

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLD4A transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-60 provides the functions and features of the SLD4A.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SLD4A
Function and
Feature
SLD4A
Basic functions

Specifications of
the optical
interface

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2.



optical module.


module.
Specifications of
the optical
module
Service
processing
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC4-4c concatenation services.
Overhead
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
400

System
10 SDH Boards
Function and
Feature
SLD4A
processing

overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes four sets
of K bytes. A single optical interface supports two MSP protection
rings, and one SLD4A supports a maximum of four MSP
protection rings.
affect services.

services.
Maintenance
features

The SLD4A consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
Figure 10-43 shows the functional block diagram of the SLD4A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
401

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLD4A

155 MHz
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
622
Mbit/s
CDR
Reference clock
155 MHz
PLL
622
Mbit/s
K1 and K2
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
622 Mbit/s
High-speed bus
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
....
....
622 Mbit/s
622
Mbit/s
CDR
622
Mbit/s
RST
MST
MSA
HPT
High-speed
bus
622 Mbit/s
DCC
IIC
Logic and
control
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
DC/DC
converter
DC/DC
converter
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
SCC unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery


RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
402

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
403

System
10 SDH Boards
10.12.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLD4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-44 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLD4A.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLD4A
SLD4A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
SLD4A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
404

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SLD4A has two optical interfaces. Table 10-61 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SLD4A.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SLD4A
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN2
LC
OUT1OUT2
LC
The SLD4A can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.
10.12.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SLD4A vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SLD4A are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLD4A can be installed in slots 18
and 1117.

The feature code of the SLD4A indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-62 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLD4A and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLD4A and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLD4A10
10
S-4.1
SSN1SLD4A11
11
L-4.1
SSN1SLD4A12
12
L-4.2
SSN1SLD4A13
13
Ve-4.2
SSN1SLD4A14
14
I-4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
405

System
10 SDH Boards

You can set the parameters for the SLD4A by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLD4A by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

The technical specifications of the SLD4A include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-63 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLD4A.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLD4A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-8
-13
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
406

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the SLD4A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.6

The maximum power consumption of the SLD4A at room temperature (25C) is 17 W.
10.13 SLQ4

The SLQ4 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2. The difference
services. The N1SLQ4 is no longer manufactured.
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The SLQ4 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2.
Differences
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
407

System
Item
10 SDH Boards
Description
modules.
Substitution
Through the board version replacement function, the N3SLQ41 can

substitute for the N1SLQ4 and N2SLQ4 at the same line rate.
When you configure the MSP or SNCP, you cannot configure the N1SLQ4 as the protection board if the
working board is the N2SLQ4 on which the TCM function is enabled or AU-3 services are configured.
10.13.2 Application
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLQ4 transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
408

System
10 SDH Boards

Function and
Feature
SLQ4
Basic functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface


module.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which
The N1SLQ4 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module,

and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module does not support
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC4-4c concatenation services.

overheads.
Specifications
of the optical
module
Service
processing
Overhead
processing
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes eight sets of
K bytes. A single optical interface supports two MSP protection
rings, and one SLQ4 supports a maximum of eight MSP protection
rings.
The N1SLQ4 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
services.
Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
409

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLQ4
services.

155 MHz
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
622
Mbit/s
CDR
Reference clock
155 MHz
PLL
622
Mbit/s
K1 and K2
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
622 Mbit/s
High-speed bus
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
....
....
622 Mbit/s
622
Mbit/s
CDR
622
Mbit/s
RST
MST
MSA
HPT
High-speed
bus
622 Mbit/s
DCC
IIC
Logic and
control
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
DC/DC
converter
DC/DC
converter
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
SCC unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
410

System
10 SDH Boards


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module

Copyright Huawei
411

System
10 SDH Boards
Controls the laser.

require.
10.13.5 Front Panel

label.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
412

System
10 SDH Boards
SLQ4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
SLQ4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
413

System
10 SDH Boards

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN4
LC
OUT1-OUT4
LC
The SLQ4 can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.
10.13.6 Valid Slots

The SLQ4 can be installed in slots 18 and 1116 in the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLQ4 can be installed in slots 18
and 1116. When the SLQ4 is installed in slots 14, 15, and 16, two optical interfaces
can be configured. When the SLQ4 is installed in slots 58 and 1114, four optical
interfaces can be configured.

optical interface.
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLQ410 and
SSN2SLQ410
10
S-4.1
SSN1SLQ411 and
SSN2SLQ411
11
L-4.1
SSN1SLQ412 and
SSN2SLQ412
12
L-4.2
SSN1SLQ413 and
SSN2SLQ413
13
Ve-4.2
SSN1SLQ414 and
SSN2SLQ414
14
I-4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
414

System
10 SDH Boards

J0
J1
J2
C2


Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-8
-13
Minimum
extinction ratio
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
415

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
of the N1SLQ4.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the N1SLQ4
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-4.1
S-4.1
Transmission
distance (km)
10
10
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1490
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1490
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
(dBm)
-19.5
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
416

System
10 SDH Boards


The mechanical specifications of the SLQ4 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

10.14 SLQ4A

The SLQ4A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Through the board version replacement function, the N1SLQ4 can substitute for the
N1SLQ4A.
10.14.2 Application
The SLQ4A is a line board. The SLQ4A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The SLQ4A converts the received optical signals
SLQ4A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
417

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLQ4A transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
Table 10-70 provides the functions and features of the SLQ4A.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SLQ4A
Function and
Feature
SLQ4A
Basic functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface


module.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which
Specifications
of the optical
module
Service
processing
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-44c concatenation services.
Overhead
processing
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
418

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLQ4A
overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes eight sets of
K bytes. A single optical interface supports two MSP protection
rings, and one SLQ4A supports a maximum of eight MSP protection
rings.
services.

services.
Maintenance
features

The SLQ4A consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
Figure 10-49 shows the functional block diagram of the SLQ4A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
419

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLQ4A

155 MHz
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
622
Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
E/O
S
P
I
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
....
O/E
622
Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
....
622 Mbit/s
CDR
Reference clock
155 MHz
PLL
622
Mbit/s
RST
622
CDR Mbit/s
MST
MSA
HPT
High-speed
bus
622 Mbit/s
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
DCC
SCC unit
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control
module
+3.3
V
DC/DC
converter
DC/DC
converter
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup
power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
CDR: clock and data

recovery


RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
420

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
421

System
10 SDH Boards
10.14.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-50 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ4A.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLQ4A
SLQ4A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
SLQ4A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
422

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SLQ4A has four optical interfaces. Table 10-71 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ4A.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ4A
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN4
LC
OUT1OUT4
LC
The SLQ4A can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.
10.14.6 Valid Slots

The SLQ4A can be installed in slots 18 and 1116 in the subrack.
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLQ4A can be installed in slots 18
and 1116. When the SLQ4A is installed in slots 14, 15, and 16, two optical interfaces
can be configured. When the SLQ4A is installed in slots 58 and 1114, four optical

The feature code of the SLQ4A indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-72 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLQ4A and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLQ4A and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLQ4A10
10
S-4.1
SSN1SLQ4A11
11
L-4.1
SSN1SLQ4A12
12
L-4.2
SSN1SLQ4A13
13
Ve-4.2
SSN1SLQ4A14
14
I-4

You can set the parameters for the SLQ4A by using the U2000.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
423

System
10 SDH Boards
You can set the following parameters for the SLQ4A by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

The technical specifications of the SLQ4A include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-73 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ4A.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ4A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-8
-13
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5
Maximum -20
dB spectral
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
424

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the SLQ4A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the SLQ4A at room temperature (25C) is 17 W.
10.15 SL16

The SL16 is available in three functional versions, namely, N1, N2, and N3. The difference
between the three versions is with regard to whether they support the TCM function and AU-3
services. The N1SL16 and N2SL16 are discontinued.
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The SL16 is available in three functional versions, namely, N1, N2, and N3.
Differences
Specifications of optical interfaces: DWDM colored optical interfaces.
REG specifications: REG function.
Substitutio
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The N1SL16 and N2SL16 cannot be substituted with each other.

Copyright Huawei
425

System
10 SDH Boards
Item
Description
The N3SL16 supports the board version replacement function.
The N3SL16 can substitute for the N1SL16.
When the AU-3 services are not required, the N3SL16 can substitute for
the N2SL16.
After the N3SL16 substitutes for the N1SL16 or N2SL16, the configuration
and service status of the N3SL16 are the same as the configuration and
service status of the N1SL16 or N2SL16.
In the case of the board of different versions, adhere to the following principles when configuring the
MSP or SNCP:
You cannot configure the N1SL16 as the protection board if the working board is the N2SL16 or
N3SL16 on which the TCM function is enabled. Otherwise, the services are interrupted when a
switching operation is performed.
You cannot configure the N1SL16 or N3SL16 as the protection board if the working board is the
N2SL16 on which the AU-3 services are configured. Otherwise, the services are interrupted when a
switching operation is performed.
10.15.2 Application
The SL16 is a line board. The SL16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals. The SL16 converts the received optical signals
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
426

System
10 SDH Boards

The SL16 receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Function and
Feature
SL16
Basic functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the L16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (with the booster amplifier (BA)), and U16.2Je (with the BA and pre-amplifier (PA)). The characteristics of
the optical interface of the L-16.2 type comply with ITU-T G.957
and ITU-T G.692. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the
L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (with the BA), and U-16.2Je (with the BA and
PA) types comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with

ITU-T G.692. The U-16.2Je optical interface can be directly
connected to the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
equipment.
The N3SL16 supports DWDM colored optical interfaces, which use

LC connectors and support the transmission distances of 170 km and
640 km.
Specifications
of the optical
module
module.
Service
processing
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c

concatenation services, VC-4-8c concatenation services, and VC-416c concatenation services.

overheads.
Overhead
processing
Alarms and
performance
events

Specifications
of the REG
The N2SL16/N3SL16 board supports the setting and query of the REG
working mode.
Protection
schemes
SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP.
K bytes. One SL16 supports a maximum of two MSP protection
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
427

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SL16
rings.
Maintenance
features
The N1SL16 supports inloops on VC-4 paths. The N3SL16 board

supports inloops and outloops on paths.
services.
The N2SL16 and N3SL16 support the TCM function.

services.
The N2SL16/N3SL16 board supports the TCM function.
The N3SL16 board supports the PRBS function in the line direction
and Cause by Cross function.

The SL16 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, power module.
Figure 10-52 shows the functional block diagram of the SL16.
155 MHz
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
SPI 2.488 DEMUX 16x155

E/O
Gbit/s
Mbit/s
. .
. .
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
SPI
O/E
converting
module
2.488
Gbit/s
MUX
16x155
Mbit/s
155 MHz
PLL
K1 and K2
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
K1 and K2
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V

Copyright Huawei
Cross-connect
unit
+3.3 V backup power

428

System
10 SDH Boards
hierarchy
termination

termination

adaptation

termination
1.1.1.1.489 MUX/DEMUX Module
In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals
into multiple parallel electrical signals, and recovers the clock signal at the same time.
In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals
received from the SDH overhead processing module into high rate electrical signals.

This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1
byte.
MST sub-module
MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after
detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC
alarm after checking the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an
AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs
pointer justifications.
HPT sub-module
Copyright Huawei
429

System
10 SDH Boards
sub-module detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the
HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting
the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte.
Controls the laser.

require.
10.15.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label,
and an APD alarm label.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
430

System
10 SDH Boards
SL16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
APD
Receiver
MAX:-9dBm
OUT
IN
SL16
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
431

System
10 SDH Boards

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC
10.15.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SL16 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SL16 are as follows:
1114.

Table 10-77 describes the relationship between the feature code of the SL16 and the type of
optical interface
Board
Feature Code
Type of Optical
Interface
SSN1SL1600, SSN3SL1600
00
Fixed-wavelength
optical interface
SSN1SL1601, SSN2SL1601, and SSN3SL1601
01
L-16.2
02
L-16.2Je
03
V-16.2Je
04
U-16.2

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
J0
Copyright Huawei
432

System
J1
J2
C2
10 SDH Boards
10.15.9 Technical Specifications of SL16

The technical specifications of the SL16 include the parameters specified for optical

Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
L-16.2
L-16.2Je
V-16.2Je (BA)
U-16.2Je (BA+PA)
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
50 to 80
80 to 100
100 to 140
140 to 170
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1500 to
1580
1530 to
1560
1530 to 1565
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)
-2 to +3
5 to 7
-2 to +3
(without
the BA)
-2 to +3
(without
the BA
or PA)
15 to 18
(with the
BA)
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-28
-28
-28
-28
(without
the PA
or BA)
-32 (with
the PA)
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-9
-9
-9
-9
(without
the PA
or BA)
-10 (with
the PA)
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
1600
2000
2800
3400
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
13 to 15
(with the
BA)
433

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width (nm)
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
30
Note: The optical interface of the Le-16.2 type is the same as the optical interface of the L16.2Je type.
The launched optical power of the optical interface of the V-16.2Je type is measured when
the BA is added. The launched optical power of the optical interface of the U-16.2Je type is
measured when the BA and PA are added. When no amplifier is added, the launched optical
power of the optical interfaces of the V-16.2Je and U-16.2Je types ranges from -2 dBm to 3
dBm.
Table 10-79 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N3SL16.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N3SL16
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Dispersion-limited distance (km)
170
640

(dBm)
-2 to +3
-5 to -1
-28
-28
-9
-9

(ps/nm)
3400
10880
8.2
10
Central frequency deviation (GHz)
20
20

ratio (dB)
30
35

(nm)
0.4
0.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
434

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM
Maximum optical path penalty (dB)
Optical signal-to-noise ratio (dB)
20
20


The mechanical specifications of the SL16 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.1

The maximum power consumption of the N1SL16 and N2SL16 at room temperature (25C)
is 19 W.
10.16 SL16A
technical specifications of the SL16A (1xSTM-16 optical interface board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SL16A.

The SL16A is available in the following functional versions: N3, N2, and N1. The N1SL16A
and N2SL16A are discontinued.
Table 10-80 describes the versions of the SL16A.
Item
Description
Functional versions
The SL16A is available in the following functional versions: N3,

N2, and N1. The N1SL16A and N2SL16A are discontinued.
Differences
Specifications of optical interfaces: DWDM colored optical

interfaces.
REG specifications: REG function.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
435

System
Item
10 SDH Boards
Description
Substitution

function.
The N1SL16A and N2SL16A cannot be substituted with each

other.
The N3SL16A supports the board version replacement function.
The N3SL16A can substitute for the

N1SL16A.
When the AU-3 services are not

configured, the N3SL16A can
substitute for the N2SL16A.
After the N3SL16A substitutes for the N1SL16A or N2SL16A,

the configuration and service status of the N3SL16A are the
same as the configuration and service status of the N1SL16A or
N2SL16A.
In the case of the board of different versions, adhere to the following principles when configuring the
MSP or SNCP:
You cannot configure the N1SL16A as the protection board if the working board is the N2SL16A or
N3SL16A on which only the TCM function is enabled. Otherwise, the services are interrupted when
a switching operation is performed.
You cannot configure the N3SL16A or N1SL16A as the protection board if the working board is the
N2SL16A on which only the AU-3 services are configured. Otherwise, the services are interrupted
when a switching operation is performed.
10.16.2 Application
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
436

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SL16A receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and
performs the MSP.
Table 10-81 describes the functions and features of the SL16A.
Function and
Feature
SL16A
Basic functions
optical interface

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.692.
The N3SL16A supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical
interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The
CWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 80
km, and the DWDM optical interface supports the transmission
distance of 120 km.
optical module
Service processing
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

optical module.


module.
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services,

VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c concatenation
services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
The N2SL16A supports the AU-3 services.

Copyright Huawei
437

System
10 SDH Boards
Function and
Feature
SL16A
Overhead processing
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the

path overheads.
Alarms and
performance events

REG
The N2SL16A/N3SL16A board supports the setting and query of

the REG working mode.
Protection schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes two sets of K

bytes. One SL16A supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
The N1SL16A supports inloops on VC-4 paths. The N3SL16A

board supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the

board.
The N2SL16A/N3SL16A board supports the TCM function.

services.
The N3SL16A board supports the PRBS function in the line

direction and Cause by Cross function.
Maintenance features

The N1SL16A/N2SL16A/N3SL16A consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX
module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 10-55 shows the functional block diagram of the N1SL16A/N2SL16A/N3SL16A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
438

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the N1SL16A/N2SL16A/N3SL16A

155 MHz
2.488
Gbit/s
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
16x155
DEMUX
Mbit/s
SPI
2.488
Gbit/s
E/O
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
converting
module
MUX
16x155
Mbit/s
155 MHz
PLL
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
Frame header
Logic and
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination

RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
439

System
10 SDH Boards
byte.
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
10.16.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL16A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label,
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
440

System
10 SDH Boards

SL16A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
APD
Receiver
MAX:-9dBm
OUT
IN
SL16A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
441

System
10 SDH Boards
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SL16A does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.16.7 Valid Slots

The SL16A must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SL16A fails to
work normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SL16A vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the SL16A are as follows:
and 1114.

Table 10-83 describes the relationship between the feature code of the SL16A and the type of
optical interface.
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL16A01,
SSN2SL16A01,
SSN3SL16A01
01
I-16
SSN1SL16A02,
SSN2SL16A02,
SSN3SL16A02
02
S-16.1
SSN1SL16A03,
03
L-16.1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
442

System
Board
10 SDH Boards
Feature Code
SSN1SL16A04,
SSN2SL16A04,
SSN3SL16A04
04
L-16.2
SSN3SL16A06
06
I-16
SSN3SL16A07
07
S-16.1
SSN3SL16A08
08
L-16.1
SSN3SL16A09
09
L-16.2
SSN2SL16A03,
SSN3SL16A03


correct.
----End

Disabled.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
443

System
10 SDH Boards

----End

----End

Boards.
----End

J0
J1
J2
C2

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
444

System
10 SDH Boards
Table 10-84 lists the faults that occur on the SL16A frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The SL16A uses the SFP optical module. When the SL16A operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
the optical interface, check whether the optical module is properly installed. To check whether the
optical module is properly installed, you can re-seat the optical module.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SL16A frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
Bit error
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Copyright Huawei
445

System
Fault Symptom
10 SDH Boards
Common Fault
Cause
unreachable to
the .
Equipment
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SL16A, see Replacing an SDH Board.

This topic lists the alarms that may occur when the board operates.
10.16.12.1 Alarms of N1SL16A

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_FAIL
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FSELECT_STG
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
LASER_MOD_ERR
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LP_RDI_VC12
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
446

System
10 SDH Boards
LSR_NO_FITED
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
R_LOF
POWER_ABNORMAL
OUT_PWR_ABN
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
R_LOC
TEM_HA
SPARE_PATH_ALM
R_OOF
TF
TEM_LA
T_LOSEX
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TEST_STATUS
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
TU_LOP_VC3
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
PS
PATCH_ERR
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

ALM_ALS
ALM_AU3AIS
ALM_AU3B3OVER
ALM_AU3B3SD
ALM_AU3LOP
ALM_AU3RDI
ALM_AU3REI
ALM_AU3SLM
ALM_AU3TIM
ALM_AU3UNEQ
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_FAIL
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FSELECT_STG
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
LASER_MOD_ERR
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LP_RDI_VC12
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
447

System
10 SDH Boards
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
R_LOF
POWER_ABNORMAL
OUT_PWR_ABN
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
R_LOC
TC_DEG
SPARE_PATH_ALM
R_OOF
TC_LTC
TC_EXC
T_LOSEX
TC_RDI
TC_ODI
TC_INCAIS
TC_UNEQ
TC_REI
TC_OEI
TEST_STATUS
TEM_HA
TC_TIM
TU_AIS_VC12
TF
TEM_LA
TU_LOP_VC3
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
PATCH_ERR
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
PS
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

ALM_ALS
ALM_AU3AIS
ALM_AU3B3OVER
ALM_AU3B3SD
ALM_AU3LOP
ALM_AU3RDI
ALM_AU3REI
ALM_AU3SLM
ALM_AU3TIM
ALM_AU3UNEQ
AU_LOP
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
B2_EXC
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B3_EXC_VC3
B2_SD
B3_EXC
BD_STATUS
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BIP_SD
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
448

System
10 SDH Boards
HP_UNEQ
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_UNEQ_VC3
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
LSR_WILL_DIE
NO_BD_SOFT
OH_LOOP
MS_REI
R_LOS
POWER_ABNORMAL
OUT_PWR_ABN
SPARE_PATH_ALM
R_LOC
R_LOF
TC_EXC
T_LOSEX
SLAVE_WORKING
TC_ODI
TC_INCAIS
TC_DEG
TC_REI
TC_OEI
TC_LTC
TEM_HA
TC_TIM
TC_RDI
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TC_UNEQ
TU_AIS_VC12
TF
TEMP_OVER
TU_LOP_VC3
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
PS
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

This topic lists the performance events that may occur when the board operates.
10.16.13.1 Performance Events of N1SL16A

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
449

System
10 SDH Boards
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TCBBE
TCFEBBE
TCOBBE
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
450

System
10 SDH Boards
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TCBBE
TCFEBBE
TCOBBE
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
10.16.14 Technical Specifications of SL16A


Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code
type
NRZ
Application
code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
451

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-10 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
-9
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
12
1600
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
Table 10-86 and Table 10-87 list the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of
the N3SL16A.
Figure 1.2 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N3SL16A
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
80

(dBm)
0 to 5
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
452

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
CWDM
-9

(ps/nm)
1600
8.2

(nm)

ratio (dB)
30
Figure 1.3 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N3SL16A
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
120

(dBm)
-1 to 3
192.10 to 196.00

(GHz)
10
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
2400
8.2

width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

30

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
453

System
10 SDH Boards

Weight of the N1SL16A (kg): 0.6

The maximum power consumption of the N1SL16A at room temperature (25C) is 20 W.
10.17 SLD16

The SLD16 is available in one functional version, namely, N1. The N1SLD16 is discontinued.
10.17.2 Application
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
454

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLD16 receives and transmits 2xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and
performs the MSP.
Table 10-88 provides the functions and features of the SLD16.
Function and
Feature
SLD16
Basic functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical

ITU-T G.692.
module.
Specifications
of the optical
module
Service
processing

concatenation services, VC-4-8c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c
Overhead
processing

overheads.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
455

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLD16
Supports the time synchronization feature and transmission of the

time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and
performance
events

Specifications
of the REG
Does not support the REG.
Protection
schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes four sets of K bytes. A

single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SLD16
supports a maximum of four MSP rings.
services.

services.
Maintenance
features

The SLD16 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 10-58 shows the functional block diagram of the SLD16 by describing how to process
1xSTM-16 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
456

System
10 SDH Boards

155 MHz
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E

E/O
Gbit/s
Mbit/s
. .
. .
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
SPI
2.488
Gbit/s
MUX
16x155
Mbit/s
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
O/E
converting
module
155 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination

RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
457

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
458

System
10 SDH Boards
10.17.5 Front Panel

label.

SLD16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
SLD16
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
459

System
10 SDH Boards
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN2
LC
OUT1OUT2
LC

The SLD16 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.17.7 Valid Slots

The SLD16 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD16 cannot
work normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SLD16 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the SLD16 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLD16 can be installed in slots 7, 8,
11, and 12.

Table 10-90 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLD16 and the type of
optical interface.
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLD1600
00
SSN1SLD1601
01
I-16
SSN1SLD1602
02
S-16.1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
460

System
10 SDH Boards
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLD1603
03
L-16.1
SSN1SLD1604
04
L-16.2


correct.
----End

Disabled.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
461

System
10 SDH Boards
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

J0
J1
J2
C2

Table 10-91 lists the faults that occur on the SLD16 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The SLD16 uses the SFP optical module. When the SLD16 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
462

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SLD16 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
Bit error
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Equipment
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
An SDH overhead
occurs.
Interruptions.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Faults.

Copyright Huawei
463

System
10 SDH Boards

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SLD16, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.17.12.1 Alarms of N1SLD16

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FSELECT_STG
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FPGA_ABN
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MS_RDI
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
R_LOF
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
SPARE_PATH_ALM
OH_LOOP
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEM_LA
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
TF
R_LOS
SLAVE_WORKING
TU_AIS_VC3
T_LOSEX
TEM_HA
W_R_FAIL
TEMP_OVER
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
464

System
10 SDH Boards
TEST_STATUS
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
PATCH_ERR
PS
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

10.17.13.1 Performance Events of N1SLD16

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
465

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code
type
NRZ
Application
code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)
-10 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
-9
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
12
1600
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width (nm)
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
466

System
10 SDH Boards


The mechanical specifications of the SLD16 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.9

The maximum power consumption of the SLD16 at room temperature (25C) is 23 W.
10.18 SLQ16
technical specifications of the SLQ16 (4xSTM-16 optical interface board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the SLQ16.

The SLQ16 is available in three functional versions, namely, N1, N2, and N4.The N2SLQ16
is discontinued.
Item
Description
Functional versions
The SLQ16 is available in three functional versions, namely, N1,

N2, and N4.
Differences
Specifications of optical interfaces: CWDM and DWDM

colored optical interfaces.
Specifications of optical modules: single-fiber bidirectional

optical modules.

function.
Substitution
When the AU-3 services and TCM function are not required, the
N1SLQ16 and N2SLQ16 can be substituted with each other.
The N4SLQ16 supports the board version replacement function to
substitute for the N1SLQ16/N2SLQ16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
467

System
10 SDH Boards
When you configure the MSP or SNCP, you cannot configure the N1SLQ16 as the protection board if
the working board is the N2SLQ16 on which the TCM function is enabled or AU-3 services are
configured. Otherwise, the services are interrupted when a switching operation is performed.
10.18.2 Application
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLQ16 receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and
performs the MSP.
Table 10-94 describes the functions and features of the SLQ16.
Function and
Feature
SLQ16
Basic functions
Specifications of
the optical
interface
The N4SLQ16 supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical
interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The CWDM
optical interface supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
468

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLQ16
DWDM optical interface supports the transmission distances of 120
km.
Specifications of
the optical module
Service processing
Overhead
processing

optical module.


module.
The N4SLQ16 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical

support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c concatenation services, and
Supports the configuration of the D1-D12, E1, and E2 bytes as

transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads
bytes.

overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events

Specifications of
the REG
Protection schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes eight sets of K

bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes.
One SLQ16 supports a maximum of eight MSP rings.
The N1SLQ16 supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
469

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLQ16
The N4SLQ16 supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
affect services.

services.
The N4SLQ16 supports detection and query of the voltage.
The N4SLQ16 supports the PRBS function in the line direction


The SLQ16 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
Figure 10-61 shows the functional block diagram of the SLQ16 by describing how to process
1xSTM-16 signals.
155 MHz
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E

E/O
Gbit/s
Mbit/s
. .
. .
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
SPI
O/E
converting
module
2.488
Gbit/s
MUX
16x155
Mbit/s
155 MHz
PLL
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
470

System
10 SDH Boards
termination
termination
adaptation

termination

RST sub-module
MST sub-module
overhead (MSOH). That is, the MST sub-module detects K2 bytes, and upon errors,
generates MS_AIS or MS_RDI alarms; it also verifies B2 bytes, and upon errors,
generates B2_SD or B2_EXC alarms and sends MS_REI signals to its opposite end.
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
471

System
10 SDH Boards
That is, the HPT sub-module verifies B3 bytes, and upon errors, sends HP_REI
signals to its opposite end; it also detects J1 and C2 bytes, and upon errors, generates
HP_TIM, HP_SLM, or HP_UNEQ (if VC-4 paths are unloaded) alarms.
Controls the laser.

require.
10.18.5 Front Panel

label.

Figure 10-62 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SLQ16/N4SLQ16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
472

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N1SLQ16/N4SLQ16
SLQ16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
SLQ16
Figure 10-63 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N2SLQ16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
473

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the N2SLQ16
SLQ16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
SLQ16
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
474

System
10 SDH Boards

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN4
LC
OUT1-OUT4
LC

The SLQ16 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.18.7 Valid Slots

The SLQ16 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLQ16 fails to
work normally.
The slots valid for the SLQ16 are as follows:
The SLQ16 can be installed in slots 14, 15, and 16. In this case, two optical interfaces
can be configured.
The SLQ16 can be installed in slots 58 and 1114. In this case, four optical interfaces
can be configured.

Table 10-96 describes the relationship between the feature code of the SLQ16 and the type of
optical interface.
Board
Feature
Code
Type of Optical
Interface
SSN1SLQ1601, SSN2SLQ1601
01
I-16
02
S-16.1
03
L-16.1
04
L-16.2
SSN1SLQ16A10
10
I-16
SSN1SLQ16A11
11
S-16.1
SSN1SLQ16A12
12
L-16.1
SSN1SLQ16A13
13
L-16.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
475

System
10 SDH Boards


correct.
----End

Disabled.

----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
476

System
10 SDH Boards
----End

Boards.
----End

J0
J1
J2
C2

Table 10-97 lists the faults that occur on the SLQ16 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The SLQ16 uses the SFP optical module. When the SLQ16 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SLQ16 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
477

System
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
10 SDH Boards
abnormal.
Bit error
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Equipment
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Faults.

Copyright Huawei
478

System
10 SDH Boards

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SLQ16, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.18.12.1 Alarms of N1SLQ16

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FSELECT_STG
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
J0_MM
LASER_MOD_ERR
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
MS_RDI
MS_REI
MS_AIS
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
R_LOF
POWER_ABNORMAL
PATCH_ERR
SLAVE_WORKING
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEM_HA
R_LOS
R_LOC
TEST_STATUS
R_OOF
T_LOSEX
TU_AIS_VC12
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TEM_LA
TU_LOP_VC3
TF
TEMP_OVER
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TU_AIS_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
479

System
10 SDH Boards
TR_LOC
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
PS
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FPGA_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_INVALID
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
OUT_PWR_ABN
R_LOC
POWER_ABNORMAL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
R_OOF
R_LOF
PS
T_LOSEX
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
TEMP_OVER
TEM_HA
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TF
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
480

System
10 SDH Boards
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

10.18.13.1 Performance Events of N1SLQ16

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN

RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
INVOLTCUR
RSOFS
MSBBE
MSES
MSUAS
MSCSES
MSSES
MSFEBBE
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFECSES
AUPJCHIGH
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
481

System
10 SDH Boards
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
INVOLTMAX
INVOLTMIN
10.18.14 Technical Specifications of SLQ16


Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code type
NRZ
Application code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to
1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-10 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
(dBm)
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
-9
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
482

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Dispersion tolerance
(ps/nm)
12
1600
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30
30
of the N4SLQ16.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the
N4SLQ16
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-16.1
S-16.1
Transmission
distance (km)
2 to 15
2 to 15
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1490
1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1490
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-18
-18
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Maximum allowed
dispersion (ps/nm)
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
483

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
Table 10-100 and Table 10-101 list the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces
of the N4SLQ16.
Figure 1.3 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N4SLQ16
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
80

(dBm)
0 to 5
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
1600
8.2

(nm)

ratio (dB)
30
Figure 1.4 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N4SLQ16
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
120
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
484

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM

(dBm)
-1 to 3
192.10 to 196.00

(GHz)
10
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
2400
8.2

width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

30


Weight of the N1SLQ16 (kg): 0.9

10.19 SLO16
technical specifications of the SLO16 (8xSTM-16 optical interface board). This topic also
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
485

System
10 SDH Boards
describes how to configure and commission the SLO16.

The SLO16 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N4.
Table 10-102 describes the versions of the SLO16.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the SLO16
Item
Description
Functional versions
The SLO16 is available in the following functional versions: N1

and N4.
Differences
Interface specifications:
The N4SLO16 supports CWDM and DWDM colored optical

interfaces, whereas the N1SLO16 does not.
The N4SLO16 supports single-fiber bidirectional optical

modules, whereas the N1SLO16 does not.
Others:
The N4SLO16 detects and reports voltage performance, whereas

the N1SLO16 does not.
The N4SLO16 supports the PRBS function, whereas the

N1SLO16 does not.
10.19.2 Application
The SLO16 is a line board. The SLO16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 converts the received optical signals
SLO16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
486

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLO16 receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and
performs the MSP protection.
Table 10-103 provides the functions and features of the SLO16.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the SLO16
Function and
Feature
SLO16
Basic functions
Specifications of
the optical
interface
The N4SLO16 supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical
km.
Specifications of
the optical module
Service processing
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

optical module.


module.
The N4SLO16 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical

support loopbacks as the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Copyright Huawei
487

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLO16
Overhead
processing
Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, and E2 bytes as

transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads
bytes.

overheads.
Supports one to eight channels of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performance
events

Specifications of
the REG
Protection schemes
Supports SNCP.
Supports SNCMP.
Supports SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes 16 sets of K bytes. A

single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One
SLO16 supports a maximum of 16 MSP rings.
affect services.

services.
The N4SLO16 supports detection and query of the voltage.
The N4SLO16 supports the PRBS function in the line direction

Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
488

System
10 SDH Boards

The SLO16 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
Figure 10-65 shows the functional block diagram of the SLO16 by describing how to process
1xSTM-16 signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLO16
155 MHz
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E

E/O
Gbit/s
Mbit/s
. .
. .
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
SPI
2.488
Gbit/s
MUX
16x155
Mbit/s
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
O/E
converting
module
155 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
489

System
10 SDH Boards

RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
490

System
10 SDH Boards

require.
10.19.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLO16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-66 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLO16.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLO16
SLO16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
SLO16
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
491

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SLO16 has eight optical interfaces. Table 10-104 describes the types
and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLO16.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SLO16
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
RX1RX8
LC
TX1TX8
LC

The SLO16 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.19.7 Valid Slots

The SLO16 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLO16 cannot
work normally.
The SLO16 can be installed in slots 7, 8, 11, and 12 in the subrack.

The feature code of the SLO16 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-105 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLO16 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLO16 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLO1610
10
I-16
SSN1SLO1611
11
S-16.1
SSN1SLO1612
12
L-16.1
SSN1SLO1613
13
L-16.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
492

System
10 SDH Boards


correct.
----End

Disabled.

----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
493

System
10 SDH Boards
----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the SLO16 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLO16 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

Table 10-106 lists the faults that occur on the SLO16 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The SLO16 uses the SFP optical module. When the SLO16 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SLO16 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
494

System
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
10 SDH Boards
abnormal.
Bit error
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Equipment
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Faults.

Copyright Huawei
495

System
10 SDH Boards

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SLO16, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.19.12.1 Alarms of N1SLO16

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
C2_PDI
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_ABN
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MS_RDI
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
PATCH_ERR
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
R_LOC
OH_LOOP
OUT_PWR_ABN
SLAVE_WORKING
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PS
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOF
R_LOS
T_LOSEX
TEM_HA
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TEMP_OVER
TU_AIS_VC12
TF
TR_LOC
TU_LOP_VC3
R_OOF
DCN_FAIL
BIP8_ECC
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
496

System
10 SDH Boards
LSR_INVALID
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
MOD_TYPE_MISMATC
H
AU_CMM
CHIP_FAIL
SPARE_PATH_ALM
W_R_FAIL
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
WRG_BD_TYPE
10.19.12.2 Alarms of N4SLO16

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FPGA_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_INVALID
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
OUT_PWR_ABN
R_LOC
POWER_ABNORMAL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
R_OOF
R_LOF
PS
T_LOSEX
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
TEMP_OVER
TEM_HA
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TF
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
497

System
10 SDH Boards
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

10.19.13.1 Performance Events of N1SLO16

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
XCSTMPMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
XCSTMPCUR
XCSTMPMAX
10.19.13.2 Performance Events of N4SLO16

RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
INVOLTCUR
RSOFS
MSBBE
MSES
MSUAS
MSCSES
MSSES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
498

System
10 SDH Boards
MSFEBBE
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFECSES
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
INVOLTMAX
INVOLTMIN
10.19.14 Technical Specifications of SLO16

The technical specifications of the SLO16 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-107 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLO16.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLO16
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to
1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-10 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
499

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
(dBm)
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
-9
(ps/nm)
12
1600
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30
30
Table 10-108 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N4SLO16.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the
N4SLO16
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-16.1
S-16.1
(km)
2 to 15
2 to 15
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1310
1490
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1490
1310
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
(dBm)
-18
-18
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Maximum allowed
dispersion (ps/nm)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
500

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

Figure 1.3 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N4SLO16
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
80

(dBm)
0 to 5
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
1600
8.2

(nm)

ratio (dB)
30
Figure 1.4 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N4SLO16
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
120
-1 to 3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
501

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM
(dBm)
192.10 to 196.00

(GHz)
10
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
2400
8.2

width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

30


The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

10.20 SF16
technical specifications of the SF16 (1xSTM-16 optical interface board with the out-band
FEC function).

The SF16 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
502

System
10 SDH Boards
10.20.2 Application
The SF16 is a line board. The SF16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals. The SF16 converts the received optical signals
SF16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SF16 receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with the out-band
FEC function) and processes overhead bytes.
Table 10-111 provides the functions and features of the SF16.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SF16
Function and
Feature
SF16
Basic
functions
Receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with

the out-band FEC function).
Supports the enabling or disabling of the FEC function.
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue16.2c, Ue-16.2d, and Ue-16.2f. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the DWDM equipment.
Supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface

uses the LC connector. The DWDM optical interface supports the
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
503

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SF16
transmission distance of 640 km.
Specifications
of the optical
module
module.
Service
processing

Encapsulates and encodes the signals with the FEC function, and
processes overhead bytes, which comply with ITU-T G.709.

overheads.
Overhead
processing
Alarms and
performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events.
Specifications
of the REG
Protection
schemes
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets of K
bytes. One SF16 supports a maximum of two MSP protection rings.
services.
Maintenance
features

The SF16 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, FEC module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 10-68 shows the functional block diagram of the SF16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
504

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SF16

Backplane
2.666 Gbit/s
O/E
conversion
DEMUX
2.666 Gbit/s
E/O
conversion
MUX
EFEC
processing
module
SDH
overhead
processing
module
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
Fuse
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
The functional modules are described as follows:
1.1.1.1.574 FEC Module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
In the upstream direction, the reverse process is performed. The FEC encoding and
decoding module receives the 2.666 Gbit/s signals from the DEMUX module. After
frame searching, FEC encoding, data packets encapsulation, and scrambling in the FEC
module, the 2.488 Gbit/s signals are recovered and then transmitted to the SDH overhead
processing module. The frame format of the 2.666 Gbit/s signals complies with ITU
G.709.
Copyright Huawei
505

System
10 SDH Boards
In the downstream direction, the FEC encoding and decoding module receives 2.488
Gbit/s SDH signals, which are sent by the SDH overhead processing module. After
frame searching, FEC encoding, data packet encapsulation, and scrambling, the 2.488
Gbit/s SDH signals are converted into 2.666 Gbit/s signals and then transmitted to the
MUX module.
The FEC processing module is connected to the logic and control module through a CPU
bus. The CPU controls the working modes of the FEC module by configuring the
internal register. The working mode can be the regenerator mode, namely, REG mode.
The CPU can monitor the performance through the internal register.

RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
506

System
10 SDH Boards
Controls the laser.

require.
10.20.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SF16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-69 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SF16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
507

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SF16
SF16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF16
The front panel of the SF16 has one optical interface. Table 10-112 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SF16.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
508

System
10 SDH Boards
The SF16 uses the unswappable optical module.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SF16

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC
10.20.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SF16 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SF16 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SF16 can be installed in slots 58 and
1114.

The feature code of the SF16 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-113 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SF16 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SF16 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SF1600
00
Colored optical interface
SSN1SF1601
01
Ue-16.2c/Ue-16.2d/Ue-16.2f

You can set the parameters for the SF16 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SF16 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
509

System
10 SDH Boards
C2
10.20.9 Technical Specifications of SF16

The technical specifications of the SF16 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-114 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SF16.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SF16
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2666057.143 kbit/s
Processing capability
1xSTM-16 standard services or concatenation services
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application codea
Ue-16.2c
Ue-16.2d
Ue-16.2f
FEC + BA (14)
+ PA
FEC + BA (17) +
PA
FEC + BA (17) + RA + PA
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1550.12
Launched optical
power range (dBm)b
-5 to -1
-5 to -1
-5 to -1
Launched optical
power range (dBm)c
13 to 15
13 to 15
15 to 18
(dBm)b
-27.5
-27.5
-27.5
(dBm)d
-37
-37
-42
Minimum overload
(dBm)d
-10
-10
-10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)b
10
10
10
(ps/nm)
12800
12800
12800
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
30
30
30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
510

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
(dB)
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example,
"BA (14)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA +
PA + RA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the
FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier are used.
b: The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules. The parameter values of
the amplifier are not provided.
c: The parameter values are applicable to the BA.
d: The parameter values are applicable to the PA.
Table 10-115 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SF16.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SF16
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
2666057.143 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
640
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-2 to 2.5
192.1 to 196.0
20
-28
-9
Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm)
10880
10
Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm)
0.1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio

(dB)
35
With the FEC: 16

Without the FEC: 21

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
511

System
10 SDH Boards

The mechanical specifications of the SF16 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.1

The maximum power consumption of the SF16 at room temperature (25C) is 26 W.
10.21 SF16E
technical specifications of the SF16E (1xSTM-16 optical interface board with the out-band
EFEC function).

The SF16E is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.21.2 Application
SF16E boards are line boards. They can transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals when
being used on the OptiX OSN equipment, and can achieve ultra-long distance transmission
when working with BPA, OBU1, OBU2, RPC01, or RPC02 boards.
SF16E boards can be used in four typical scenarios, as shown in Figure 10-70.
Application 1: SF16E boards can achieve 72 dB span transmission if working with

OBU1/OBU2 boards, RPC02 boards, and PAs.
Application 2: SF16E boards can achieve 67 dB span transmission if working with

OBU1/OBU2 boards and PAs.
Application 3: SF16E boards can achieve 75 dB span transmission if working with BAs,
RPC01 boards, RPC02 boards, and PAs.
Application 4: SF16E boards can achieve 61 dB span transmission if working with BAs
and PAs.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
512

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Typical networking and application of SF16E boards

Appl i cati on 1:
Appl i cati on 2:
67 dB
72 dB
RPC
02
OBU1/
OBU2
OBU1/
OBU2
PA
SF16E
SF16E
PA
SF16E
OBU1/
OBU2
RPC
02
Appl i cati on 4:
75 dB
61 dB
RPC
02
RPC
01
BA
PA
SF16E
SF16E
PA
OBU1/
OBU2
PA
Appl i cati on 3:
BA
PA
SF16E
RPC
02
RPC
01
PA
SF16E
SF16E
BA
PA
BA

The SF16E receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with the out-band
EFEC function) and processes overhead bytes.
Table 10-116 provides the functions and features of the SF16E.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SF16E
Function and
Feature
SF16E
Basic
functions
Receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with

the out-band EFEC function).
Supports the enabling or disabling of the EFEC function.
Specifications
of the optical
interface

ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the DWDM equipment.

Specifications
of the optical
module
module.
Service
processing

Encapsulates and encodes the signals with the EFEC function, and
processes overhead bytes, which comply with ITU-T G.709.
Overhead
processing
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
513

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SF16E

overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events
Specifications
of the REG
Supported.
Protection
schemes
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets of K
bytes. One SF16E supports a maximum of two MSP protection rings.
services.
Supports the PRBS function in the line direction and Cause by Cross
function.
Maintenance
features

The SF16E consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, EFEC module,
SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 10-71 shows the functional block diagram of the SF16E.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
514

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SF16E

Backplane
2.666 Gbit/s
O/E
conversion
DEMUX
2.666 Gbit/s
E/O
conversion
MUX
EFEC
processing
module
SDH
overhead
processing
module
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
Fuse
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
1.1.1.1.587 EFEC Module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
In the upstream direction, the reverse process is performed. The EFEC encoding and
frame searching, EFEC encoding, data packets encapsulation, and scrambling in the
EFEC module, the 2.488 Gbit/s signals are recovered and then transmitted to the SDH
overhead processing module. The frame format of the 2.666 Gbit/s signals complies with
ITU G.709.
Copyright Huawei
515

System
10 SDH Boards
In the downstream direction, the EFEC encoding and decoding module receives 2.488
frame searching, EFEC encoding, data packet encapsulation, and scrambling, the 2.488
MUX module.
The EFEC processing module is connected to the logic and control module through a
CPU bus. The CPU controls the working modes of the EFEC module by configuring the
internal register. The CPU can monitor the performance through the internal register.

RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
516

System
10 SDH Boards

require.
10.21.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SF16E has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-72 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SF16E.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
517

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SF16E
SF16E
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF16E
The front panel of the SF16E has one optical interface. Table 10-117 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SF16E.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
518

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SF16E

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SF16E does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.21.7 Valid Slots

The SF16E must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF16E cannot work
properly.
The SF16E can be installed in slots 5-8 and 11-14 in a subrack.

SF16E boards do not have feature codes.


correct.
----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
519

System
10 SDH Boards
Disabled.

----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the SF16E by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SF16E by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
520

System
10 SDH Boards

Table 10-118 lists the faults that occur on the SF16E frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The SF16E uses the SFP optical module. When the SF16E operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on the
optical interface, check whether the optical module is properly installed. To check whether the optical
module is properly installed, you can re-seat the optical module.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SF16E frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
Bit error
failure
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Faults.

Copyright Huawei
521

System
Fault Symptom
10 SDH Boards
Common Fault
Cause
switching fails.
NEs being
unreachable to the
Equipment
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Unreachable.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SF16E, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.21.12.1 Alarms of N1SF16E

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_SD
B1_EXC
BIP_EXC
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_SD
BEFFEC_EXC
CHIP_FAIL
C2_VCAIS
FEC_LOF
COMMUN_FAIL
FSELECT_STG
HP_TIM
HP_SLM
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
J0_MM
LOOP_ALM
LASER_SHUT
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
522

System
10 SDH Boards
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
NO_BD_SOFT
MS_RDI
MS_REI
MS_AIS
DCN_FAIL
ODU_AIS
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
ODU_OCI
OH_LOOP
ODU_LCK
OTU_LOF
OTU_LOM
OTU_AIS
PM_BIP8_OVER
PM_BDI
PS
POWER_ABNORMAL
PM_BIP8_SD
PM_BEI
R_LOS
R_LOC
PM_TIM
SM_BIP8_SD
SM_BEI
SLAVE_WORKING
SM_BDI
SM_IAE
SM_BIP8_OVER
SM_TIM
T_LOSEX
TEM_HA
TF
TEM_LA
R_LOF
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TEST_STATUS
TU_LOP_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
IN_PWR_LOW
IN_PWR_HIGH
WRG_BD_TYPE
TEMP_OVER
LASER_MOD_ERR
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH

10.21.13.1 Performance Events of N1SF16E

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
FEC_AFT_COR_ER
FEC_BEF_COR_ER
FEC_COR_0BIT_CNT
FEC_COR_1BIT_CNT
FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT
FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
523

System
10 SDH Boards
MSSES
MSUAS
ODU2PMBIP8
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OTU2SMBIP8
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
INVOLTCUR
INVOLTMAX
INVOLTMIN
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
10.21.14 Technical Specifications of SF16E

The technical specifications of the SF16E include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-119 lists the parameters specified for the fixed colored optical interfaces of the
SF16E.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the fixed colored optical interfaces of the SF16E
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
2666057.143 kbit/s
Single-mode LC
120
0 to 4
193.4
10
-28
-8
2400
8.2
0.3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
524

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM

(dB)
30

the optical interfaces is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

The mechanical specifications of the SF16E are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.6
1.1.1.1.603 Power consumption

The maximum power consumption of the SF16E at room temperature (25C) is 26 W.
10.22 SL64

The SL64 is available in several functional versions. The N2SL64 is discontinued. The
functions provided by the functional versions are different.
Item
Description
Functional versions
The SL64 is available in the following functional versions: N4, N2

and N1.
Differences
The N1SL64/N4SL64 supports the board version replacement

function, but does not support the TCM function or AU-3
services.
The N2SL64 does not support the board version replacement

function, but supports the TCM function and AU-3 services, the
TCM function and AU-3 services cannot be available at the
same time.
The N4SL64 supports pluggable XFP optical modules.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
525

System
Item
10 SDH Boards
Description
Substitution
The N4SL64 detects and reports voltage performance.
SL64 boards of different versions support different loopback

functions. For details, see 10.22.3 Functions and Features.
When the TCM function and AU-3 services are not required, the
N1SL64 can substitute for the N2SL64.
The N4SL64 supports the board version replacement function to
substitute for the N1SL64/N2SL64.
When you configure the MSP or SNCP, you cannot configure the N1SL64 as the protection board if
the working board is the N2SL64 on which the TCM function is enabled or AU-3 services are
configured. Otherwise, the services are interrupted when a switching operation is performed.
10.22.2 Application
The SL64 is a line board. The SL64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 converts the received optical signals
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SL64 receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 10-121 describes the functions and features of the SL64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
526

System
10 SDH Boards

Function
and Feature
SL64
Basic
functions
Specifications
of the optical
interface
The N1SL64/N2SL64 supports different types of standard optical

interfaces, namely, the I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b (BA), Le-64.2,
Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b (BA + PA + dispersion compensation unit
(DCU)). The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the S-64.2b, L64.2b, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691 and ITUT G.692. The characteristics of the optical interface of the Le-64.2 type
The N4SL64 supports different types of standard optical interfaces,

namely, the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-2D2, and V-64.2b (BA + PA
+ DCU). The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-64.1, S64.2b, Le-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691. The
characteristics of the optical interface of the P1L1-2D2 type comply
with ITU-T G.959.
The N1SL64/N2SL64 supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces,

which use LC connectors. The DWDM optical interface supports the
The N4SL64 supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical

DWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 40 km
and 80 km.
Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.
module.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of
the on/off state of a laser.
The N4SL64 supports the usage and detection of the pluggable XFP
optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and upgrading of the
optical module.
The N1SL64 and N2SL64 support the VC-4-4c concatenation services,

VC-4-8c concatenation services, Vc-4-16c concatenation services, and

overheads.
Specifications
of the optical
module
Service
processing
Overhead
processing
Alarms and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
527

System
Function
and Feature
10 SDH Boards
SL64
performance
events
Specifications
of the REG
Supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
Protection
schemes
Supports SNCP.
Supports SNCMP.
Supports SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes two sets of K bytes. One
SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
The N1SL64/N4SL64 supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
services.
The N4SL64 detects and reports voltage performance.
The N4SL64 supports the PRBS function in the line direction and
Cause by Cross function.
Maintenance
features

The SL64 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX Module, SDH overhead
Figure 10-74 shows the functional block diagram of the N1SL64/N2SL64/N4SL64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
528

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the N1SL64/N2SL64/N4SL64

622 MHz
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
DEMUX 16x622
Mbit/s
SPI
9.953
Gbit/s
E/O
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
converting
module
MUX
16x622
Mbit/s
MUX/
DEMUX
622 MHz
PLL
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
Frame header
Logic and
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination

RST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
529

System
10 SDH Boards
byte.
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
10.22.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label,
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
530

System
10 SDH Boards

Figure 10-75 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SL64/N2SL64.
Figure 1.1 Appearance of the front panel of the N1SL64/N2SL64
SL64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
APD
Receiver
MAX:-9dBm
OUT
IN
SL64
Figure 10-76 shows the appearance of the N4SL64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
531

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Appearance of the front panel of the N4SL64
SL64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SL64
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
532

System
10 SDH Boards

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SL64 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.22.7 Valid Slots

The SL64 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SL64 fails to work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SL64 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the SL64 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the N1SL64 can be installed in slots 7, 8,
11, and 12; the N4SL64 can be installed in slots 5-8 and 11-14.

Table 10-123 describes the relationship between the feature code of the SL64 and the type of
optical interface.
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL6400
00
Fixed-wavelength optical
interface
SSN4SL6401M01
01M01
interface
SSN1SL6401
01
I-64.2
SSN1SL6402,
SSN4SL6402
02
S-64.2b
SSN1SL6403
03
Le-64.2
SSN1SL6404
04
Ls-64.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
533

System
10 SDH Boards
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SL6405
05
L-64.2b
SSN1SL6406
06
V-64.2b
SSN2SL6400
00
interface
SSN2SL6411
11
I-64.2
SSN2SL6412
12
S-64.2b
SSN2SL6413
13
Le-64.2
SSN2SL6404
04
Ls-64.2
SSN2SL6415
15
L-64.2b
SSN2SL6416
16
V-64.2b
SSN4SL6401
01
I-64.1
SSN4SL6403
03
P1L1-2D2
SSN4SL6404
04
V-64.2b
SSN4SL6405
05
Le-64.2


correct.
----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
534

System
10 SDH Boards
Disabled.

----End

----End

Boards.
----End

J0
J1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
535

System
J2
C2
10 SDH Boards

Table 10-124 lists the faults that occur on the SL64 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SL64 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
Bit error
failure
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Faults.

Copyright Huawei
536

System
10 SDH Boards
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
NEs being
unreachable to the
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
Equipment
An SDH overhead
occurs.
Unreachable.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SL64, see Replacing an SDH Board.


ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FPGA_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
537

System
10 SDH Boards
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MS_RDI
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
R_LOF
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
SLAVE_WORKING
OH_LOOP
OUT_PWR_ABN
TC_DEG
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
TC_LTC
R_LOS
R_OOF
TC_RDI
SPARE_PATH_ALM
T_LOSEX
TC_UNEQ
TC_EXC
TC_INCAIS
TEMP_OVER
TC_ODI
TC_OEI
TR_LOC
TC_REI
TC_TIM
TU_LOP_VC12
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
TEST_STATUS
TF
PS
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
W_R_FAIL
PATCH_ERR
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH

ALM_ALS
ALM_AU3AIS
ALM_AU3B3OVER
ALM_AU3B3SD
ALM_AU3LOP
ALM_AU3RDI
ALM_AU3REI
ALM_AU3SLM
ALM_AU3TIM
ALM_AU3UNEQ
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
DID_ERROR
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BIP8_ECC
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
538

System
10 SDH Boards
FPGA_ABN
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
R_LOF
OH_LOOP
OUT_PWR_ABN
SLAVE_WORKING
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
TC_DEG
R_LOS
R_OOF
TC_LTC
SPARE_PATH_ALM
T_LOSEX
TC_RDI
TC_EXC
TC_INCAIS
TC_UNEQ
TC_ODI
TC_OEI
TEST_STATUS
TC_REI
TC_TIM
TU_AIS_VC12
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
TU_LOP_VC3
TF
TR_LOC
PATCH_ERR
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
W_R_FAIL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PS
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
539

System
10 SDH Boards
C2_VCAIS
FPGA_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_INVALID
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
OUT_PWR_ABN
R_LOC
POWER_ABNORMAL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
R_OOF
R_LOF
PS
T_LOSEX
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
TEMP_OVER
TEM_HA
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TF
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL


AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
540

System
10 SDH Boards
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TCBBE
TCFEBBE
TCOBBE
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TCBBE
TCFEBBE
TCOBBE
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
541

System
10 SDH Boards

RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
INVOLTCUR
RSOFS
MSBBE
MSES
MSUAS
MSCSES
MSSES
MSFEBBE
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFECSES
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
INVOLTMAX
INVOLTMIN
10.22.14 Technical Specifications of SL64

The technical specifications of the SL64 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-125 and Table 10-126 list the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the
SL64.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N1SL64/N2SL64
Paramete
r
Value
Nominal
bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Line code
type
NRZ
Applicati
on code
I-64.1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
I-64.2
S64.2b
L-64.2b (BA)

Copyright Huawei
Le64.2
Ls64.2
V-64.2b (BA +
PA + DCU)
542

System
10 SDH Boards
Paramete
r
Value
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
0 to 2
0 to
25
2 to
40
35 to 80
35 to
60
55 to
80
80 to 120
Type of
fiber
Singl
emode
LC
Singl
emode
LC
Single
-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Singl
emode
LC
Singl
emode
LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelengt
h range
(nm)
1290
to
1330
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1530 to 1565
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1550.12
Mean
launched
optical
power
(dBm)
-6 to
-1
-5 to
-1
-1 to
+2
-4 to +2
(without the
BA)
0 to 4
4 to 7
-4 to -1 (without
the BA, PA, or
DCU)
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-11
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1
-1
-1
-1
-8
-8
-1
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Dispersio
n
tolerance
(ps/nm)
6.6
500
800
1600
1200
1600
2040
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
(nm)
Minimum
side mode
suppressi
on ratio
(dB)
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
13 to 15 (with
the BA)
-14
-14
-14
13 to 15 (with the
BA)
-21
-21
-14 (without the

PA, BA, or DCU)
-26 (with the PA)
"BA + PA + DCU" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical interface are
measured when the BA, PA, and DCU are used.
The dispersion coefficient is 17 ps/nm when signals are transmitted by the G.652 fibers at
the wavelength of 1550.12 nm. Hence, the dispersion tolerance is 2040 ps/nm for a 120-km
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
543

System
Paramete
r
10 SDH Boards
Value
distance.
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Line code type
NRZ
Application
code
I-64.1
S-64.2b
Le-64.2
P1L12D2
V-64.2b (BA + PA +
DCU)
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 40
35 to 60
40 to 80
80 to 120
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode
LC
Singlemode
LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290 to
1330
1530 to
1565
1530 to
1565
1530 to
1565
1550.12
Mean
launched
optical power
(dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
0 to 4
-4 to -1 (without the BA,

PA, or DCU)
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-11
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1
-1
-8
-7
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
200
800
1600
1600
800
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
30
30
30
30
30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
13 to 15 (with the BA)

-14
-21
-24
-14 (without the PA, BA,

or DCU)
-26 (with the PA)

Copyright Huawei
544

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
ratio (dB)
"BA + PA + DCU" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical interface are
measured when the BA, PA, and DCU are used.
Table 10-127 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N1SL64
and N2SL64.
of the N4SL64.
Figure 1.3 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N1SL64 and N2SL64
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
40
-4 to -1
192.1 to 196.0
12.5
-14
-1
800
10
0.3
Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB)
35
22
Figure 1.4 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N4SL64
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
545

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
CWDM
(km)
70

range (dBm)
0 to 4
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
1451 to 1551 nm: -23
1571 nm: -22
1591 to 1611 nm: -21
-9
Maximum allowed
dispersion (ps/nm)
1400

(dB)
8.2

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30
Figure 1.5 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N4SL64
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
40
80

range (dBm)
-1 to 2
-1 to 3
192.1 to 196.0
192.1 to 196.0

(GHz)
10
10
-17
-24
-1
-9
Maximum allowed
dispersion (ps/nm)
800
1600
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
546

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM

(dB)
9.5
8.2

width (nm)
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

35
30


The mechanical specifications of the SL64 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.1

10.23 SLD64

The SLD64 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N4.
Table 10-130 describes the versions of the SLD64.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the SLD64
Item
Description
Functional versions
The SLD64 is available in the following functional versions: N1

and N4.
Differences
Interface specifications:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
547

System
Item
10 SDH Boards
Description
The N4SLD64 supports CWDM and DWDM colored optical

interfaces, whereas the N1SLD64 does not.
The N4SLD64 supports single-fiber bidirectional optical

modules, whereas the N1SLD64 does not.
Others:
Substitution
The N4SLD64 detects and reports voltage performance, whereas

the N1SLD64 does not.
The N4SLD64 supports the PRBS function, whereas the

N1SLD64 does not.
None
10.23.2 Application
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLD64 receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and
performs the MSP protection.
Table 10-131 describes the functions and features of the SLD64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
548

System
10 SDH Boards

Function and
Feature
SLD64
Basic functions
Provides two optical interfaces to transmit and receive 2xSTM-64

optical signals. Processes 2xSTM-64 standard services or
concatenated services, which are encapsulated in XFP format.
Specifications of
the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply
with ITU-T G.691.
The N4SLD64 provides standard P1L1-2D2 optical ports, whose
specifications comply with ITU-T G.959.
The N4SLD64 supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical
km.
Specifications of
the optical module

optical module. The SLD64 also reports the performance events
that indicate the performance of the optical module.
Supports the default off state of the laser, and the setting and
query of the on/off state of the laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the XFP optical module,

therefore facilitating maintenance of the optical module.
Service processing

concatenation services, VC-4-8c concatenation services, VC-4-16c
concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Overhead
processing

overheads.
Supports two channels of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performance events
Specifications of
the REG
Protection schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes four sets of K bytes.

A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
549

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLD64
SLD64 supports a maximum of four MSP rings.
Maintenance
features
affect services.

services.
The N4SLD64 supports detection and query of the voltage.
The N4SLD64 supports the PRBS function in the line direction


The SLD64 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
Figure 10-78 shows the functional block diagram of the SLD64.
Backplane
622 MHz
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
SPI 9.953
E/O
Gbit/s
DEMUX 16x622
Mbit/s
. .
. .
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
9.953
SPI Gbit/s
MUX
16x622
Mbit/s
E/O
O/E
converting
module
622 MHz
PLL
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
550

System
10 SDH Boards
termination
termination
adaptation

termination

RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
551

System
10 SDH Boards
Controls the laser.

require.
10.23.5 Front Panel

label.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
552

System
10 SDH Boards
SLD64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
SLD64
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
553

System
10 SDH Boards

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN2
LC
OUT1OUT2
LC

The SLD64 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.23.7 Valid Slots

The SLD64 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD64 fails to
work normally.
The SLD64 can be installed in slots 7, 8, 11, and 12.

Table 10-133 describes the relationship between the feature code of the SLD64 and the type
of optical interface.
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SLD6401
01
I-64.1
SSN1SLD6402
02
S-64.2b


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
554

System
10 SDH Boards
correct.
----End

Disabled.

----End

----End

Boards.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
555

System
10 SDH Boards

J0
J1
J2
C2

Table 10-134 lists the faults that occur on the SLD64 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The SLD64 uses the XFP optical module. When the SLD64 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SLD64 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
Bit error
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
556

System
Fault Symptom
10 SDH Boards
Common Fault
Cause
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Equipment
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SLD64, see Replacing an SDH Board.


ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
557

System
10 SDH Boards
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FSELECT_STG
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FPGA_ABN
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MS_RDI
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
R_LOF
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
SPARE_PATH_ALM
OH_LOOP
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEM_LA
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
TF
R_LOS
SLAVE_WORKING
TU_AIS_VC3
T_LOSEX
TEM_HA
W_R_FAIL
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
PATCH_ERR
PS
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
IN_PWR_LOW
IN_PWR_HIGH
WRG_BD_TYPE
DCN_FAIL

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
558

System
10 SDH Boards
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FPGA_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_INVALID
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
OUT_PWR_ABN
R_LOC
POWER_ABNORMAL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
R_OOF
R_LOF
PS
T_LOSEX
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
TEMP_OVER
TEM_HA
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TF
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL


AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
559

System
10 SDH Boards
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX

RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
INVOLTCUR
RSOFS
MSBBE
MSES
MSUAS
MSCSES
MSSES
MSFEBBE
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFECSES
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
INVOLTMAX
INVOLTMIN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
560

System
10 SDH Boards
10.23.14 Technical Specifications of SLD64


SLD64 boards only of the N4 version support P1L1-2D2 interfaces.
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Line code type
NRZ
Application code
I-64.1
S-64.2b
P1L1-2D2
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 40
40 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Mean launched optical

power (dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
(dBm)
-11
-14
-24
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-1
-1
-7

(dB)
8.2
(ps/nm)
6.6
800
1600
Minimum side mode

30
30
30
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
of the N4SLD64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
561

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N4SLD64
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
(km)
70

range (dBm)
0 to 4
range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
1451 to 1551 nm: -23
1571 nm: -22
1591 to 1611 nm: -21
-9
Maximum allowed
dispersion (ps/nm)
1400

(dB)
8.2

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30
Figure 1.3 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the N4SLD64
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
(km)
80

range (dBm)
-1 to 3
192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
562

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM
(dBm)
-24
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-9
Maximum allowed
dispersion (ps/nm)
1600
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

30


The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.2

10.24 SF64
technical specifications of the SF64 (1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC
function). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the SF64.

The SF64 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N4.
Table 10-138 describes the versions of the SF64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
563

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Versions of the SF64

Item
Description
Functional versions
The SF64 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and

N4.
Differences
Specifications of optical interfaces: DWDM colored optical

interfaces.
Specifications of optical modules: pluggable XFP optical

modules.
Maintenance features: voltage monitoring and reporting, and

PRBS function.
Substitution
The N4SF64 supports the board version replacement function to

substitute for the N1SF64.
10.24.2 Application
The SF64 is a line board. The SF64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SF64 converts the received optical signals
SF64 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
The SF64 can be interconnected with the WDM equipment.

The SF64 receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
564

System
10 SDH Boards
Table 10-139 describes the functions and features of the SF64.

Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the SF64
Function and
Feature
SF64
Basic functions

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the
optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the DWDM
equipment.
The N1SF64/N4SF64 supports the DWDM colored optical

interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The
DWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 40
km.

optical module.

The N4SF64 supports the usage and detection of the XFP optical
module, therefore facilitating maintenance of the optical module.
Specifications of
the optical
interface
Specifications of
the optical module
Service processing

Overhead
processing

overheads.
Alarms and
performance events
Specifications of
the REG
Protection schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes two sets of K bytes.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
565

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SF64
One SF64 supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
Maintenance
features
affect services.

services.
The N4SF64 supports detection and query of the voltage.
The N4SF64 supports the PRBS function in the line direction and
Cause by Cross function.

The SF64 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, FEC module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 10-81 shows the functional block diagram of the SF64.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SF64
622 MHz
622 MHz
PLL
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
DEMU 16x669
X
Mbit/s
SPI
10.71
Gbit/s
E/O
O/E
converting
module
10.71
Gbit/s
MUX
16x622
Mbit/s
FEC 16x622
16x669
Mbit/s
Mbit/s
622 MHz
PLL
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/DE
MUX
669 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Fuse +3.3 V
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60
V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
566

System

termination
10 SDH Boards
G.709.
MUX module.

RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
567

System
10 SDH Boards
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
10.24.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SF64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-82 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SF64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
568

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N1SF64
SF64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64
Figure 10-83 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N4SF64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
569

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the N4SF64
SF64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64
The front panel of the SF64 has one optical interface. Table 10-140 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SF64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
570

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SF64

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SF64 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.24.7 Valid Slots

The SF64 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF64 fails to work
normally.
The slots valid for the SF64 are as follows:
The N1SF64 can be installed in slots 7, 8, 11, and 12.
The N4SF64 can be installed in slots 5-6, 7-8, 11-12, and 13-14.

The feature code of the SF64 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-141 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SF64 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SF64 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1SF6400,
SSN4SF6400
00
interface
SSN1SF6401,
SSN4SF6401
01
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue64.2e


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
571

System
10 SDH Boards
correct.
----End

Disabled.

----End

----End

Boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
572

System
10 SDH Boards
----End

You can set the parameters for the SF64 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SF64 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

Table 10-142 lists the faults that occur on the SF64 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The N4SF64 uses the XFP optical module. When the N4SF64 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SF64 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
Bit error
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
573

System
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
10 SDH Boards
abnormal.
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Equipment
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SF64, see Replacing an SDH Board.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
574

System
10 SDH Boards
10.24.12.1 Alarms of N1SF64

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_SD
BEFFEC_EXC
BIP_EXC
C2_VCAIS
BIP8_ECC
C2_PDI
FEC_LOF
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
FSELECT_STG
FEC_OOF
FPGA_ABN
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
LASER_MOD_ERR
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LP_RDI_VC12
LASER_SHUT
LOOP_ALM
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
ODU_AIS
NO_BD_SOFT
ODU_OCI
OH_LOOP
ODU_LCK
OTU_LOF
OTU_LOM
OTU_AIS
PM_BIP8_OVER
PM_BDI
OUT_PWR_ABN
POWER_ABNORMAL
PM_BIP8_SD
PM_BEI
R_LOS
R_LOC
PM_TIM
SM_BDI
R_OOF
R_LOF
SM_BIP8_SD
SM_BEI
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
SM_IAE
SM_BIP8_OVER
TC_EXC
T_LOSEX
SM_TIM
TC_ODI
TC_INCAIS
TC_DEG
TC_REI
TC_OEI
TC_LTC
TEM_HA
TC_TIM
TC_RDI
TF
TEM_LA
TC_UNEQ
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
575

System
10 SDH Boards
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TEST_STATUS
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
TU_LOP_VC3
CHIP_ABN
TEMP_OVER
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
PS
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
10.24.12.2 Alarms of N4SF64

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FPGA_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_INVALID
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
OUT_PWR_ABN
R_LOC
POWER_ABNORMAL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
R_OOF
R_LOF
PS
T_LOSEX
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
576

System
10 SDH Boards
TEMP_OVER
TEM_HA
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TF
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
FEC_OOF
BEFFEC_EXC
TU_LOP_VC3
ODU_OCI
ODU_AIS
FEC_LOF
OTU_LOM
OTU_AIS
ODU_LCK
PM_BIP8_OVER
PM_BDI
OTU_LOF
SM_BDI
PM_BIP8_SD
PM_BEI
SM_BIP8_SD
SM_BEI
PM_TIM
SM_TIM
SM_IAE
SM_BIP8_OVER

10.24.13.1 Performance Events of N1SF64

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
FEC_AFT_COR_ER
FEC_BEF_COR_ER
FEC_COR_0BIT_CNT
FEC_COR_1BIT_CNT
FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT
FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
ODU2PMBIP8
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OTU2SMBIP8
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TCBBE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
577

System
10 SDH Boards
TCFEBBE
TCOBBE
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
10.24.13.2 Performance Events of N4SF64

RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
ODU2PMBIP8
RSOFS
MSBBE
MSES
MSUAS
MSCSES
MSSES
MSFEBBE
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFECSES
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
INVOLTMAX
INVOLTMIN
INVOLTCUR
FEC_COR_0BIT_CNT
FEC_COR_1BIT_CNT
FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT
FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CN
T
FEC_BEF_COR_ER
FEC_AFT_COR_ER
OTU2SMBIP8
10.24.14 Technical Specifications of SF64

The technical specifications of the SF64 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-143 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SF64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
578

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Specifications of optical interfaces of the SF64

Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
10709225kbit/s
Line code type
NRZ
Application
code
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e
FEC + BA (14 dB)

+ PA + DCU (60 +
80)
FEC + BA (17 dB) + PA

+ DCU (80 x 2)
FEC + BA (17 dB) +

RA + PA + DCU (60
x 3)
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-3 to 2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-14
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
10
Maximum
allowed
dispersion
(ps/nm)
800
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
NOTE
The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)"
indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that
the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier are
used.
The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not provided.
Table 10-144 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SF64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
579

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SF64
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
10709225 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
40
-4 to -1
192.1 to 196.0
12.5
-14
-1
800
10
0.3

(dB)
35
With the FEC: 20

Without the FEC: 22


The mechanical specifications of the SF64 are as follows:
Weight of the N1SF64 (kg): 1.1
Weight of the N4SF64 (kg): 1.2
At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the N1SF64 is 33 W.
At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the N4SF64 is 26 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
580

System
10 SDH Boards
10.25 SF64A
technical specifications of the SF64A (1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC
function).

The SF64A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.25.2 Application
The SF64A is a line board. The SF64A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SF64A converts the received optical signals
SF64A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
The SF64A can also be used for interconnecting with the WDM equipment.
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
The SF64A can also be used for interconnecting with the WDM equipment.

The SF64A receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 10-145 provides the functions and features of the SF64A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
581

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SF64A

Function and
Feature
SF64A
Basic functions

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the
optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the DWDM
equipment. Supports the variable-wavelength DWDM.
Supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical

interface uses the LC connector. The DWDM optical interface
supports the transmission distance of 40 km.

optical module.

Specifications of
the optical
interface
Specifications of
the optical module
Service processing

Overhead
processing

overheads.
Alarms and
performance events
Specifications of
the REG
Protection schemes
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets
of K bytes. One SF64A supports a maximum of two MSP
protection rings.
affect services.

services.
Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
582

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SF64A

The SF64A consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, FEC module,
SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, power module.
Figure 10-85 shows the functional block diagram of the SF64A.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SF64A
622 MHz
622 MHz
PLL
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
SPI
10.71
Gbit/s
E/O
O/E
converting
module
16x622
Mbit/s
DEMU 16x669
X
Mbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
MUX
FEC 16x622
16x669
Mbit/s
Mbit/s
622 MHz
PLL
Backplane
Reference clock
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/DE
MUX
669 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Fuse +3.3 V
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60
V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
583

System
10 SDH Boards

MUX module.
G.709.

RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
584

System
10 SDH Boards
Controls the laser.

require.
10.25.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SF64A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-86 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SF64A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
585

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SF64A
SF64A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64A
The front panel of the SF64A has one optical interface. Table 10-146 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SF64A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
586

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the SF64A

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC
10.25.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SF64A vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SF64A are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SF64A can be installed in slots 7, 8,
11, and 12.

You can set the parameters for the SF64A by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SF64A by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2
10.25.8 Technical Specifications of SF64A

The technical specifications of the SF64A include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-147 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SF64A.
Figure 1.1 Specifications of optical interfaces of the SF64A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
10709225 kbit/s
Line code type
DRZ
Application code
Ue-64.2c
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Ue-64.2d

Copyright Huawei
Ue-64.2e
587

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Meaning of the
code
FEC + BA (14 dB)

+ PA + DCU (60 +
80)
FEC + BA (17 dB) +

PA + DCU (80 x 2)
FEC + BA (17 dB) +

RA + PA + DCU (60
x 3)
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1550.12
1550.12
1550.12
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-4 to -1
-4 to -1
-4 to -1
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-14
-14
-14
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1
-1
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
10
10
10
Dispersion
tolerance (ps/nm)
800
800
800
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
NOTE
the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier
(RA) are used.
The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier
and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided.
Table 10-148 list the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
10709225 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
588

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM
40
-4 to -1
192.1 to 196.0
12.5
-14
-1
800
10
0.3

(dB)
35
With the FEC: 20

Without the FEC: 22


The mechanical specifications of the SF64A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.1

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the SF64A is 33 W.
10.26 SFD64
technical specifications of the SFD64 (2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC
function). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the SFD64.

The SFD64 is available in one functional version, namely, N4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
589

System
10 SDH Boards
10.26.2 Application
The SFD64 is a line board. The SFD64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SFD64 converts the received optical signals
SFD64 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
The SFD64 can also be used for interconnecting with the WDM equipment.

The SFD64 receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 10-149 provides the functions and features of the SFD64.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SFD64
Functions and
Features
Value
Basic functions
Enables and disables the FEC function.
Supports the optical interfaces compliant with Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d,

and Ue-64.2e system specifications. The optical interfaces compliant
with Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e system specifications are
defined by Huawei.
Supports the standard wavelength output compliant with ITU-T

G.692 and the direct access of the WDM equipment.

Specifications
of the optical
interface
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
590

System
Functions and
Features
10 SDH Boards
Value
Specifications
of the optical
module
Supports the usage and detection of the XFP optical module,

facilitating the maintenance of the optical module.
module.

Service
processing
Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services, VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c,

and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Overhead
processing
Processes the section overheads of STM-64 signals.

overheads.
Supports two channels of ECC communication.
Alarms and
performance
events

REG
specifications
Not supported.
Protection
schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports optical-path-shared MSP. Each optical interface can process

two sets of K bytes. One SFD64 can support a maximum of four
MSP rings.
Supports the warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not
affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information about a board.

services.
Supports detection and query of the voltage.
Supports the PRBS function in the line direction and Cause by Cross
function.
Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
591

System
Functions and
Features
10 SDH Boards
Value

The SFD64 consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, FEC module,
SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 10-88 shows the functional block diagram of the SFD64.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SFD64
622MHz
622 MHz PLL

10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
conversion
module
DEMUX
MUX
MUX/
DEMUX
module
IIC
LOS
ALS
4x2.67
Gbit/s
4x2.67
Gbit/s
4x2.5
Gbit/s
FEC
4x2.5
Gbit/s
Reference Backplane
clock
Clock unit
622MHz PLL
Insertion and extraction

of K1 and K2
K1 and K2
Highspeed bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH OH processing module

669 MHz PLL
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Fuse +3.3V
SCC unit
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V
+3.3V standby
power

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
592

System
10 SDH Boards
MUX module.
G.709.

RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
593

System
10 SDH Boards
Controls the laser.

require.
10.26.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SFD64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 10-89 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SFD64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
594

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SFD64
SFD64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
SFD64
The front panel of the SFD64 has two optical interfaces. Table 10-150 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the SFD64.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
595

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Description of the optical interfaces of the SFD64

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
RX1-RX2
LC
TX1-TX2
LC

The SFD64 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.26.7 Valid Slots

The SFD64 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SFD64 fails to
work normally.
The SFD64 can be installed in any of slots 7-8 and slots 11-12.

The feature code of the SFD64 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-151 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SFD64 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SFD64 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN4SFD6400
00
interface
SSN4SFD6401
01
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
596

System
10 SDH Boards
correct.
----End

Disabled.

----End

----End

Boards.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
597

System
10 SDH Boards

You can set the parameters for the SFD64 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SFD64 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
C2

Table 10-152 lists the faults that occur on the SFD64 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The SFD64 uses the SFP optical module. When the SFD64 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
Figure 1.1 Methods used to rectify the faults that occur on the SFD64 frequently
Symptom
Common Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
Bit error
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
598

System
Symptom
10 SDH Boards
Common Cause
clock source is
very low.
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
NMS
Equipment
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the NMS.
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the NMS.
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the NMS
frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SFD64, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.26.12.1 Alarms of N4SFD64

ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP8_ECC
BIP_EXC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
599

System
10 SDH Boards
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
C2_PDI
C2_VCAIS
FPGA_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
HP_RDI
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
HP_SLM
J0_MM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_INVALID
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_REI
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
OH_LOOP
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
OUT_PWR_ABN
R_LOC
POWER_ABNORMAL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
R_OOF
R_LOF
PS
T_LOSEX
SLAVE_WORKING
R_LOS
TEMP_OVER
TEM_HA
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TU_AIS_VC3
TR_LOC
TF
W_R_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
FEC_OOF
BEFFEC_EXC
TU_LOP_VC3
ODU_OCI
ODU_AIS
FEC_LOF
OTU_LOM
OTU_AIS
ODU_LCK
PM_BIP8_OVER
PM_BDI
OTU_LOF
SM_BDI
PM_BIP8_SD
PM_BEI
SM_BIP8_SD
SM_BEI
PM_TIM
SM_TIM
SM_IAE
SM_BIP8_OVER

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
600

System
10 SDH Boards
10.26.13.1 Performance Events of N4SFD64

RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
ODU2PMBIP8
RSOFS
MSBBE
MSES
MSUAS
MSCSES
MSSES
MSFEBBE
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFECSES
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
INVOLTMAX
INVOLTMIN
INVOLTCUR
FEC_COR_0BIT_CNT
FEC_COR_1BIT_CNT
FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT
FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CN
T
FEC_BEF_COR_ER
FEC_AFT_COR_ER
OTU2SMBIP8
10.26.14 Technical Specifications of SFD64

The technical specifications of the SFD64 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-153 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SFD64.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SFD64
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
10709225 kbit/s
Line code type
NRZ
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
601

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
Application code
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e
Meaning of the
code
FEC + BA (14 dB)

+ PA + DCU (60 +
80)
FEC + BA (17 dB) +

PA + DCU (80 x 2)
FEC + BA (17 dB) +

RA + PA + DCU (60
x 3)
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1550.12
1550.12
1550.12
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-4 to -1
-4 to -1
-4 to -1
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-14
-14
-14
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1
-1
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
10
10
10
Dispersion
tolerance (ps/nm)
800
800
800
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
NOTE
the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier
(RA) are used.
The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier
and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided.
Table 10-154 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
10709225 kbit/s

Copyright Huawei
602

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
DWDM
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
40

(dBm)
-1 to +2
192.1 to 196.0

(GHz)
10
-17
-1

(ps/nm)
800
9.5

width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

35


The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 are as follows:
Weight: 1.1 kg

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the SFD64 is 37 W.
10.27 SLQ41
technical specifications of the SLQ41 (4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the SLQ41.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
603

System
10 SDH Boards

The SLQ41 is available in one functional version, namely, N3. The SLQ41 supports the autosensing of optical interfaces.
10.27.2 Application
transmit and receive STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLQ41 converts the received optical
signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLQ41 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLQ41 transmits and receives STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E
conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and
generates alarm signals on the line.
Function and
Feature
SLQ41
Basic functions
Transmits and receives 4xSTM-1 or 4xSTM-4 optical signals.
optical interface
The STM-1 optical module or STM-4 optical module can be used.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLQ41 supports

different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-1, S1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2. The characteristics of the optical

Copyright Huawei
604

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLQ41
interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with
ITU-T G.957. The characteristics of the optical interface of the
Ve-1.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-4, S4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with
ITU-T G.957. The characteristics of the optical interface of the
Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The

optical interface uses the LC connector. The CWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the
DWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 120
km.
optical module
Service processing
Overhead processing

optical module.

module.

The SLQ41 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical

module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module does
not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber
jumpers.

the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.

the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c
Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4

signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the

path overheads.
Alarms and
performance events

Protection schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
605

System
Function and
Feature
10 SDH Boards
SLQ41
Maintenance
features
Supports the SNCTP.
affect services.

board.

services.
Supports the PRBS function in the line direction, cross-connect

direction and Cause by Cross function.

This topic describes the working principle and signal flow of the SLQ41 by describing how to
process STM-1/STM-4 signals.
Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
STM-1/
STIM-4
O/E
E/O
SPI
O/E
E/O
SPI
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
Cross-connect
unit
K1 and K2
CDR
High-speed
bus
....
....
STM-1/
STIM-4
Reference clock
RST MST MSA HPT
CDR
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E converting
module
Frame header
Logic and
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
+3.3 V
Power
module

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Power
module

Copyright Huawei
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power

606

System
10 SDH Boards
hierarchy
termination

termination

adaptation

termination


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Copyright Huawei
607

System
10 SDH Boards
Controls the laser.

require.
10.27.5 Front Panel

label.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
608

System
10 SDH Boards
SLQ41
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
SLQ41
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
609

System
10 SDH Boards

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN4
LC
OUT1OUT4
LC

The SLQ41 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.27.7 Valid Slots

The SLQ41 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLQ41 cannot
work normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the slots valid for the SLQ41 are as
follows:
The SLQ41 can be installed in slots 14, 15, and 16. In this case, one or two optical
The SLQ41 can be installed in slots 58 and 1114. In this case, one to four optical

optical interface.
Board
Feature Code
SSN3SLQ414
14
I-4
SSN3SLQ410
10
S-4.1
SSN3SLQ411
11
L-4.1
SSN3SLQ412
12
L-4.2
SSN3SLQ413
13
Ve-4.2
SSN3SLQ114
14
I-1
SSN3SLQ110
10
S-1.1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
610

System
10 SDH Boards
Board
Feature Code
SSN3SLQ111
11
L-1.1
SSN3SLQ112
12
L-1.2
SSN3SLQ113
13
Ve-1.2


correct.
----End

Disabled.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
611

System
10 SDH Boards
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

J0
J1
J2
C2

Table 10-158 lists the faults that occur on the SLQ41 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
612

System
10 SDH Boards
The SLQ41 uses the SFP optical module. When the SLQ41 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SLQ41 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault
Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
switching fails.
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the .
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the .
An NE becomes
unreachable to
Bit error
failure
NEs being
unreachable to the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Faults.

Unreachable.

Copyright Huawei
613

System
Fault Symptom
10 SDH Boards
Common Fault
Cause
the frequently.
Equipment
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SLQ41, see Replacing an SDH Board.


ALM_ALS
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
C2_PDI
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_ABN
HP_LOM
FPGA_ABN
FSELECT_STG
HP_SLM
HP_RDI
HP_REI
IN_PWR_ABN
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
LASER_SHUT
J0_MM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LP_SLM_VC3
LOOP_ALM
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_COOL_ALM
MS_RDI
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
PATCH_ERR
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
R_LOF
OH_LOOP
OUT_PWR_ABN
T_LOSEX
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
614

System
10 SDH Boards
POWER_ABNORMAL
PS
R_LOS
SLAVE_WORKING
TEM_LA
TF
TU_AIS_VC12
TEM_HA
DCN_FAIL
TU_LOP_VC3
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
R_LOC
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
WRG_BD_TYPE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW


AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
TPLMIN
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
10.27.14 Technical Specifications of SLQ41

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
615

System
10 SDH Boards

The SLQ41 supports the STM-1 and STM-4 optical modules.
Table 10-159 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ41 when the
STM-1 optical module is used.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ41 when the STM-1 optical module is used
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Application
code
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1260 to 1360
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-3 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-28
-34
-34
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
Table 10-160 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ41 when the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
616

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLQ41 when the STM-4 optical
module is used
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Mean launched
optical power
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-3 to -2
-3 to -2
-3 to -2
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-8
-13
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30
of the SLQ41.
Figure 1.3 Parameters specified for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the SLQ41
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.1
S-4.1
S-4.1
Transmission
2 to 15
2 to 15
15 to 40
15 to
2 to 15
2 to 15
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
617

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
distance (km)
40
Type of fiber
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode
LC
Singlemode
LC
Singlemode LC
Singlemode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550
1310
1550
1310
1490
1310
Operating
receive
wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1310
1550
1310
1490
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-32
-32
-32
-32
-19.5
-28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-10
-10
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.5
8.5
10
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
of the SLQ41.
Figure 1.4 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SLQ41
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s or 622080 kbit/s
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
80

(dBm)
0 to 5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
618

System
10 SDH Boards
Parameter
Value
CWDM
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
1600
8.2

(nm)

ratio (dB)
30
Figure 1.5 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SLQ41
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
120

(dBm)
-1 to 3
192.10 to 196.00

(GHz)
10
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
2400
8.2

width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
619

System
10 SDH Boards


Weight (kg): 0.6

The maximum power consumption of the SLQ41 at room temperature (25C) is 12 W.
10.28 SLH41
technical specifications of the SLH41 (16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical interface board with the
variable rate). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the SLH41.

The functional version of the SLH41 is N3.
10.28.2 Application
The SLH41 is a line board. The SLH41 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 converts the received optical
signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLH41 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
620

System
10 SDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SLH41 is used to transmit and receive 16xSTM-1/STM-14 optical signals, to perform
O/E conversion for the STM-1/STM-4 optical signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and
to report alarms generated on the line.
Table 10-164 provides the functions and features of the SLH41.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the SLH41
Functions and
Features
Value
Basic functions
Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals.
Specifications
of the optical
interface
The STM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used, which supports the

adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
When the STM-1 optical module is used, the standard S-1.1 and L1.1 optical interfaces are supported. The optical interfaces of the S1.1 and L-1.1 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the standard S-4.1 optical
interface is supported. The optical interface of the S-4.1 type
complies with ITU-T G.957.
Supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical
interface uses the LC connector. The CWDM optical interface supports
the transmission distance of 80 km, and the DWDM optical interface
supports the transmission distance of 120 km.
Specifications
of the optical
module
Service
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Uses the SFP optical module.
module.

When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 supports VC-12

Copyright Huawei
621

System
Functions and
Features
Value
processing
Overhead
processing
10 SDH Boards
services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 supports VC-12
services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation
services.
Processes the section overheads of the STM-1/STM-4 signals.

overheads.
Supports one to sixteen channels of ECC communication. The first

eight optical interfaces support the ECC communication in D1-D12
mode. The last eight optical interfaces support the ECC
communication in D4-D12 mode.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not
affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information about a board.

services.
Supports the PRBS function in the line direction and Cause by

Cross function.
Maintenance
features

The SLH41 consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing
This topic describes the working principle and signal flow of the SLH41 by describing how to
process STM-1/STM-4 signals.
Figure 10-94 shows the functional block diagram of the SLH41.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
622

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SLH41

Backplane
Reference clock
Clock unit
155 MHz PLL
O/E
STM-1/
STM-4
E/O
S
P
I
E/O
S
P
I
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
....
....
O/E
STM-1/
STM-4
Insertion and extraction of

K1 and K2
CDR
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
CDR
DCC
SDH OH processing module
O/E
conversion module
IIC
LOS
Logic and
control module
SCC unit
SCC unit
Frame header
Clock unit
Communication
SCC unit
ALS
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

hierarchy

termination

termination

adaptation

termination


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST sub-module
Copyright Huawei
623

System
10 SDH Boards
MST sub-module
MSA sub-module
HPT sub-module
Controls the laser.

require.
10.28.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLH41 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
624

System
10 SDH Boards

Figure 10-95 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLH41.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SLH41
SM SFP W ORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657B
SLH41
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RX 1
2 TX
TX 15
16 RX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
625

System
10 SDH Boards
The front panel of the SLH41 has 16 optical interfaces. A silkscreen "16SFP" is marked below
the indicators.
Table 10-165 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLH41.
Figure 1.1 Description of the optical interfaces of the SLH41
Interface
Type of interface
Usage
RX1-RX16
LC
TX1-TX16
LC
The G.657B fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted
into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 10-96 shows the G.657B
fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
626

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 G.657B fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper
G.652D fiber jumper
58.25
50.75
G.657B fiber jumper
42.5

The SLH41 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
10.28.7 Valid Slots

The SLH41 must be installed in a valid slot on the subrack. Otherwise, the SLH41 fails to
work normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the SLH41 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the equipment. The
slots valid for the SLH41 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s or 80 Gbit/s, the SLH41 cannot be installed
on the subrack.
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the SLH41 can be installed in any of slots
5-8 and slots 11-14.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
627

System
10 SDH Boards

The feature code of the SLH41 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 10-166 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SLH41 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the SLH41 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN3SLH4101
01
12xS-1.1, 4xS-4.1
SSN3SLH4102
02
8xS-1.1, 8xS-4.1
SSN3SLH4103
03
16xS-1.1
SSN3SLH4104
04
4xL-1.1, 12xS-4.1
SSN3SLH4106
05
16xS-4.1
The G.657B fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over
the interface.


correct.
----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
628

System
10 SDH Boards
Disabled.

----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the SLH41 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SLH41 by using the U2000:
J0
J1
J2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
629

System
10 SDH Boards
C2

Table 10-167 lists the faults that occur on the SLH41 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The SLH41 uses the SFP optical module. When the SLH41 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SLH41 frequently
Symptom
Common Cause
The optical fiber

or connector
becomes
abnormal.
An incorrect
operation is
performed.
The types or
settings of the
boards are
inconsistent.
The optical
power becomes
abnormal.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The clock
configuration is
incorrect.
The precision of
the external
clock source is
very low.
The MSP
switching fails.
The SNCP
switching fails.
The clock
protection
Bit error
failure
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Faults.

Copyright Huawei
630

System
Symptom
10 SDH Boards
Common Cause
switching fails.
NEs being
unreachable to the
NMS
Equipment
A single NE
becomes
unreachable to
the NMS.
All the NEs in a

subnet become
unreachable to
the NMS.
An NE becomes
unreachable to
the NMS
frequently.
An SDH overhead
occurs.

Unreachable.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SLH41, see Replacing an SDH Board.

10.28.12.1 Alarms of N3SLH41

R_LOS
WRG_BD_TYPE
R_LOF
R_OOF
R_LOC
B1_EXC
B1_SD
J0_MM
B2_EXC
B2_SD
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MS_REI
TF
IN_PWR_ABN
OUT_PWR_ABN
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
LASER_SHUT
LSR_NO_FITED
LASER_MOD_ERR
ALM_ALS
SPARE_PATH_ALM
TEST_STATUS
OH_LOOP
FSELECT_STG
NO_BD_SOFT
TR_LOC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
631

System
10 SDH Boards
T_LOSEX
COMMUN_FAIL
W_R_FAIL
CHIP_FAIL
POWER_ABNORMAL
BIP8_ECC
BD_STATUS
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
HP_TIM
HP_SLM
HP_UNEQ
HP_RDI
HP_REI
B3_EXC
B3_SD
AU_CMM
C2_VCAIS
C2_PDI
FPGA_ABN
SLAVE_WORKING
HP_LOM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
LSR_INVALID
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
CHIP_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_REI_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_LOP_VC12
BIP_SD
BIP_EXC
TEMP_OVER
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
TIME_NOT_SUPPORT
PS
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
DCN_FAIL

10.28.13.1 Performance Events of N3SLH41

RSBBE
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
RSCSES
INVOLTCUR
RSOFS
MSBBE
MSES
MSUAS
MSCSES
MSSES
MSFEBBE
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSFECSES
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
632

System
10 SDH Boards
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
INVOLTMAX
INVOLTMIN
10.28.14 Technical Specifications of SLH41

The technical specifications of the SLH41 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-168 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLH41 when the
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLH41 when the STM-1 optical
module is used
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
S-1.1
L-1.1
0 to 15
15 to 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC

(nm)
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-28
-34
Overload optical power

(dBm)
-8
-10

(dB)
8.2
10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
633

System
10 SDH Boards
Table 10-169 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLH41 when the
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SLH41 when the STM-4 optical
module is used
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
S-4.1
0 to 15

(nm)
1274 to 1356
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC

range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-28
-8

(dB)
8.2
of the SLH41.
Figure 1.3 CWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SLH41
Parameter
Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
80

(dBm)
0 to 5
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-9
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
634

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
CWDM

(ps/nm)
1600
8.2

(nm)

ratio (dB)
30
Figure 1.4 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SLH41
Parameter
Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
120

(dBm)
-1 to 3
192.10 to 196.00

(GHz)
10
-28
-9

(ps/nm)
2400
8.2

width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

30

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
635

System
10 SDH Boards

The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 are as follows:
Weight: 1.5 kg

The maximum power consumption of the SLH41 at room temperature (25C) is 49 W.
10.29 EU04

The EU04 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.29.2 Application
The EU04 is an STM-1 electrical interface board. The EU04 can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to transmit and receive signals for the STM-1 electrical processing board.

The EU04 receives and transmits 4xSTM-1 electrical signals. The EU04 must work with the
SEP.

The EU04 consists of the interface module, switch matrix module, and power module.
Figure 10-97 shows the functional block diagram of the EU04 by describing how to process
1xSTM-1 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
636

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EU04

Backplane
Cross-connect board
STM-1 electrical
signal
Interface
module
Switch
matrix
module
STM-1 electrical
signal
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
SEP
TSB4/TSB8
TSB4/TSB8
SEP
+3.3 V power
1.1.1.1.727 Interface Module

The interface module receives and transmits the STM-1 electrical signals.
1.1.1.1.728 Switch Matrix Module

In the receive direction, the switch matrix module receives the signal sent from the interface
module and selects the output direction of the signal according to the TPS protection control
signal sent from the cross-connect board. When the TPS is not performed, the switch matrix
module transmits the signal to the SEP. When the TPS is performed, the switch matrix module
transmits the signal to the TSB4 or TSB8 for bridging.
In the transmit direction, the switch matrix module performs the reverse process.

The power module provides all the modules of the EU04 with the required DC voltages.
10.29.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EU04 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 10-98 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EU04.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
637

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EU04
EUO4
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
EUO4
The front panel of the EU04 has four pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 10-172 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EU04.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EU04
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN4
SMB
Receives the 1st to the 4th channels of STM-1

electrical signals.
OUT1OUT4
SMB
Transmits the 1st to the 4th channels of STM-1

electrical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
638

System
10 SDH Boards
10.29.6 Valid Slots

The EU04 can be installed in slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 in the subrack and works
as the interface board of the SEP.
Table 10-173 lists the slots valid for the SEP and the corresponding slots for the EU04.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the SEP and the corresponding slots for the EU04
Slot Valid for the SEP
Corresponding Slot for the EU04
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35

The technical specifications of the EU04 include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 10-174 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EU04.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EU04
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
CMI
Signal bit rate at the output interface
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Allowed frequency deviation at the input

interface
Allowed attenuation at the input interface

The mechanical specifications of the EU04 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
639

System
10 SDH Boards
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the EU04 at room temperature (25C) is 6 W.
10.30 EU08

The EU08 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
10.30.2 Application
The EU08 is an STM-1 electrical interface board. The EU08 can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to transmit and receive signals for the STM-1 electrical processing board.

The EU08 receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 electrical signals. The EU08 must work with the
SLH1 or SEP1.

The EU08 consists of the interface module, switch matrix module, and power module.
Figure 10-99 shows the functional block diagram of the EU08.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EU08
Backplane
Cross-connect board
STM-1 electrical
signal
Interface
module
Switch
matrix
module
STM-1 electrical
signal
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
SEP/SLH1
TSB8
TSB8
SEP/SLH1
+3.3 V power

The interface module receives and transmits the STM-1 electrical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
640

System
10 SDH Boards

module transmits the signal to the SLH1 or SEP. When the TPS is performed, the switch
matrix module transmits the signal to the TSB8 for bridging.

The power module provides all the modules of the EU08 with the required DC voltages.
10.30.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EU08 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 10-100 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EU08.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
641

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EU08
EUO8
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
OUT5
IN5
OUT6
IN6
OUT7
IN7
OUT8
IN8
EUO8
The front panel of the EU08 has eight pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 10-175 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EU08.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EU08
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1IN8
SMB
Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of STM-1

electrical signals.
OUT1OUT8
SMB
Transmits the 1st to the 8th channels of STM-1

electrical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
642

System
10 SDH Boards
10.30.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the EU08 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the EU08 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the EU08 can be installed in slots 19-26
and 29-36.
Table 10-176 lists the slots valid for the SLH1 and the corresponding slots for the EU08. The
EU08 installed in the slot with a smaller number transmits/receives the 1st to the 8th channels
of STM-1 electrical signals. The EU08 installed in the slot with a larger number
transmits/receives the 9th to the 16th channels of STM-1 electrical signals.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the SLH1 and the corresponding slots for the EU08
Slot Valid for the SLH1
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36
Table 10-177 lists the slots valid for the SEP and the corresponding slots for the EU08.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the SEP and the corresponding slots for the EU08
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
643

System
10 SDH Boards
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35

The technical specifications of the EU08 include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 10-178 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EU08.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EU08
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
CMI
Allowed frequency deviation at the

input interface
Allowed attenuation at the input
interface

The mechanical specifications of the EU08 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the EU08 at room temperature (25C) is 11 W.
10.31 OU08
technical specifications of the N1OU08 (8xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board) and the
N2OU08 (8xSTM-1 optical interface board).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
644

System
10 SDH Boards

The OU08 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N2. The difference
between the two versions is with regard to the connector type for the optical/electrical
interfaces and whether the optical/electrical module is swappable.
Table 10-179 describes the versions of the OU08.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the OU08
Item
Description
Functional versions
The OU08 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and

N2.
Common points
The working principle of the N1OU08 is the same as the working

principle of the N2OU08.
Differences
The optical interface of the N1OU08 uses the LC connector, whereas

the optical interface of the N2OU08 uses the SC connector.
The N1OU08 uses the swappable optical/electrical module, whereas
the N2OU08 does not use the swappable optical/electrical module.
The N1OU08 supports optical power query when using pluggable
optical modules, whereas the N2OU08 does not.
Substitution
None
10.31.2 Application
The N1OU08 is an STM-1 optical/electrical interface board, and the N2OU08 is an STM-1
optical interface board. The OU08 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive signals for the STM-1 optical processing board.

The N1OU08 receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, and the N2OU08
receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 optical signals. The OU08 must work with the SLH1 or
SEP1.

The OU08 consists of the interface module and power module.
Figure 10-101 shows the functional block diagram of the N1OU08/N2OU08.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
645

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the N1OU08/N2OU08

Backplane
STM-1
optical/electrical
signal
SEP/SLH1
Interface
module
STM-1
optical/electrical
signal
SEP/SLH1
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
+3.3 V power
N2OU08 boards receive and transmit 8xSTM-1 optical signals but do not receive or transmit electrical
signals, whereas N1OU08 boards receive and transmit 8xSTM-1 optical and electrical signals.

In the receive direction, the interface module performs O/E conversion for STM-1 signals and
transmits the signals to the SLH1 or SEP.
In the transmit direction, the interface module performs E/O conversion for STM-1 signals
and transmits the signals to an optical/electrical interface.
If an electrical module is installed, the interface module does not perform O/E conversion in both the
receive and transmit directions.

The power module provides all the modules of the OU08 with the required DC voltages.
10.31.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the OU08 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 10-102 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1OU08. Figure 10-103 shows
the appearance of the front panel of the N2OU08.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
646

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N1OU08 with optical interfaces
OU08
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
OUT5 IN5
OUT6 IN6
OUT7 IN7
OUT8 IN8
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OU08
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
647

System
10 SDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the N2OU08
OU08
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
OUT5
IN5
OUT6
IN6
OUT7
IN7
OUT8
IN8
OU08
The front panel of the N1OU08 has eight optical/electrical interfaces. The front panel of the
N2OU08 has eight optical interfaces.
Table 10-180 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the N1OU08. Table 10-181
describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the N2OU08.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the N1OU08
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1IN8
LC/SAA
Receives the first to the eighth channels of STM-1

optical/electrical signals.
OUT1OUT8
LC/SAA
Transmits the first to the eight channels of STM-1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
648

System
Interface
Type of
Interface
10 SDH Boards
Usage
optical/electrical signals.
Figure 1.2 Interfaces of the N2OU08

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1IN8
SC
Receives the first to the eighth channels of STM-1

optical signals.
OUT1OUT8
SC
Transmits the first to the eighth channels of STM-1

optical signals.
10.31.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the OU08 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the OU08 can be installed in slots 1926
and 2936.
Table 10-182 lists the slots valid for the SLH1 and the corresponding slots for the OU08. The
OU08 installed in the slot with a smaller number transmits/receives the 1st to the 8th channels
of STM-1 optical signals. The OU08 installed in the slot with a larger number
transmits/receives the 9th to the 16th channels of STM-1 optical signals.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the SLH1 and the corresponding slots for the OU08
Corresponding Slot for the OU08
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
649

System
10 SDH Boards
Table 10-183 lists the slots valid for the SEP1 and the corresponding slots for the OU08.
Figure 1.4 Slots valid for the SEP1 and the corresponding slots for the OU08
Slot Valid for the SEP1
Corresponding Slot for the OU08
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35

The technical specifications of the OU08 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 10-184 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OU08.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OU08
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
S-1.1
range (nm)
N1OU08: 1260-1360
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC

power (dBm)
-15 to -8
(dBm)
-28
N2OU08: 1261-1360
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
650

System
10 SDH Boards
of the OU08.
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the Single-fiber Bidirectional optical interfaces of the OU08
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Optical interface type
S-1.1
S-1.1
2 to 15
2 to 15
Fiber type
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating transmit wavelength

(nm)
1550
1310
Operating receive wavelength

(nm)
1310
1550

(dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
-32
-32
-8
-8
8.5
8.5

width (nm)
Minimum side mode


Table 10-186 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the N1OU08.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the N1OU08
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
CMI
Type of interface
SAA
Signal bit rate at the

output port
Allowed frequency
deviation at the input
interface
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
651

System
Parameter
10 SDH Boards
Value
Allowed attenuation at
the input interface


The mechanical specifications of the OU08 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the OU08 at room temperature (25C) is 6 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
652

System
11 PDH Boards
11
PDH Boards
About This Chapter

The PDH boards include the PDH service interface boards and PDH service processing
boards, to transmit/receive and process E1/T1 signals, E3/T3 signals, E4/STM-1 electrical
signals, and DDN signals.
11.1 PQ1
technical specifications of the PQ1 (63xE1 service processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PQ1.
11.2 PQM
technical specifications of the PQM (63xE1/T1 service processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PQM.
11.3 PFL1
technical specifications of the PFL1 (8xE1 optical processing board). This topic also describes
how to configure and commission the PFL1.
11.4 PL3
technical specifications of the PL3 (3xE3/T3 service processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PL3.
11.5 PL3A
technical specifications of the PL3A (3xE3/T3 service processing board with the interfaces on
the front panel). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PL3A.
11.6 PD3
technical specifications of the PD3 (6xE3/T3 service processing board).
11.7 PQ3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
653

System
11 PDH Boards
technical specifications of the PQ3 (12xE3/T3 service processing board).
11.8 DX1
technical specifications of the DX1 (DDN service accessing and converging board). This
topic also describes how to configure and commission the DX1.
11.9 DXA
technical specifications of the DXA (DDN service converging and processing board).
11.10 SPQ4
technical specifications of the SPQ4 (4xE4/STM-1 electrical processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the SPQ4.
11.11 D12B
technical specifications of the D12B (32xE1/T1 access board).
11.12 D12S
technical specifications of the D12S (32xE1/T1 switching access board).
11.13 D75S
technical specifications of the D75S (32xE1 switching access board).
11.14 D34S
11.15 C34S
technical specifications of the C34S (3xE3/T3 switching access board).
11.16 MU04
technical specifications of the MU04 (4xE4/STM-1 electrical interface board).
11.17 DM12
technical specifications of the DM12 (DDN service interface board).
11.18 TSB4
technical specifications of the TSB4 (4-channel electrical interface protection switching
board).
11.19 TSB8
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
654

System
11 PDH Boards
board).
11.1 PQ1
technical specifications of the PQ1 (63xE1 service processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PQ1.

The PQ1 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N2. The functions provided
by the functional versions are different. The N1PQ1 is discontinued.
Depending on the port impedance, the PQ1 is available in PQ1A (75 ohms) and PQ1B (120 ohms).
Except this, the two boards are the same in function and feature. When the port impedance does not need
to be present, the PQ1A and PQ1B are referred to as the PQ1.
Table 11-1 describes the versions of the PQ1.

Figure 1.1 Versions of the PQ1
Item
Description
Functional versions
The PQ1 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and

N2.
Differences
Service processing: E13 function.
Maintenance features: CRC function.
Substitution
When the tributary re-timing function is not required, the N1PQ1A

can be replaced with the N2PQ1A.
When the tributary re-timing function is not required, the N1PQ1B
can be replaced with the N2PQ1B.
Note: The PQ1 boards are classified into the PQ1A boards (75 ohms) and PQ1B boards
(120 ohms) according to the interface impedance. When the interface impedance is not
considered, the PQ1A and PQ1B are called PQ1 hereafter.
11.1.2 Application
The PQ1 is a PDH processing board. The PQ1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to add and drop PDH signals. To transmit/receive and process 63xE1 signals, the PQ1
must be used with the interface board.
Figure 11-1 shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards
add tributary signals to line signals and drops tributary signals to line signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
655

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The PQ1 processes E1 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance
events, provides maintenance features, and supports the TPS protection.
Table 11-2 provides the functions and features of the PQ1.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the PQ1
Function
and
Feature
PQ1
N1PQ1
N2PQ1
Basic
functions
Processes 63xE1
signals.
Processes 63xE1 signals.
Service
processing
Processes 63xE1
electrical signals
when working with
the interface board.
Processes 63xE1 electrical signals when working

with the interface board.
Supports the E13 function, which is used to

converge E1 services into E3 services.
Overhead
processing
Supports the processing of the path overheads at the VC-12 level, such as the
J2 byte.
Alarms and
performanc
e events

Maintenan
ce features
Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
656

System
Function
and
Feature
PQ1
N1PQ1
N2PQ1
The N1PQ1 supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and in the
cross-connect direction.
The N2PQ1:
Protection
schemes
11 PDH Boards
Supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction

and in the cross-connect direction in the normal
mode.
Does not support the PRBS test in the MUX

mode or Server mode.
The N1PQ1 does not support the CRC function, but the N2PQ1 supports
the CRC function.
Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board.
The N1PQ1 supports hybrid protection. When the working board is the
N1PQ1, the protection board can be the N1PQ1, N2PQ1, or N1PQM.
The N2PQ1 does not support hybrid protection. When the working board
is the N2PQ1, the protection board can only be the N2PQ1.

The PQ1 consists of the interface module, mapping/demapping module, interface converting
Figure 11-2 shows the functional block diagram of the PQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
657

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PQ1

Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
2 MHz
OSC
E1
63x2 Mbit/s
LIU
PPI
E1
LIU
Mapping/
Demapping
module
63x2 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
Reference
clock
High-speed
bus
Interface
converting
High-speed
module
bus
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
Interface
module
LOS
Outloop/Inloop
control
Cross-connect
unit
Frame header
Communication
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
SCC unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48V/-60V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power
LIU: logic interface unit
PPI: PDH physical interface
OSC: oscillator
Figure 11-3 shows the functional block diagram of the mapping/demapping module.
Figure 1.2 Functional block diagram of the mapping/demapping module
Mapping/demapping module
E1
LPA
PDH AIS
detector
E1
LPA
LPT
LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4) insertion
LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4) extraction
LPT
HPA
HPT
STM-1
TU-AIS/TULOP detector
HPA
HPT
STM-1

The interface module consists of LIUs and provides the inloop and outloop functions. The
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
658

System
11 PDH Boards
interface module performs the following functions:
Encodes and decodes signals.
Restores the data signal and the clock signal.
Processes the PDH LOS signals.
1.1.1.1.753 Mapping/Demapping Module
LPA sub-module
The 2 Mbit/s (1.5 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a VC-12 container to be
adapted so that the stream can be transported to the synchronous network for check of
the PDH AIS.
LPT sub-module
The virtual container (VC-12) is formatted. The VC-12 is structured so that its octets are
distributed within a 125 us interval (for example, one STM1 period), and consists of the
C-12 container and POH. The POH contains nine octets equally distributed within the
frame bytes for VC-12, namely, V5, J2, N2, and K4.
HPA sub-module
The HPA sub-module generates and processes the channel-level TU-PTR. In the receive
direction, the signals are split into VC-12s, which are located and isolated in TU-12s.
The TU-PTR is processed. TU-AIS and TU-LOP alarms are monitored. In the transmit
direction, VC-12s are located precisely and added with the TU-PTR. Sixty-three TU-12s
are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes interleaving. The sequence is as follows: TUG2>TUG3->VC-4
HPT sub-module
C4 container and POH.
MST sub-module and RST sub-module

These sub-modules are required to create a proprietary STM1 signal so that the E1
mapping/demapping module can interface with the multiplex unit.
1.1.1.1.754 Interface Converting Module

The interface converting module converts the 622 Mbit/s LVDS bus of the SDH system into
the parallel bus. The high-rate backplane interface is connected to the low-rate interface chip
of the transmit system through the interface converting module.
Control the indicators on the board.

require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
659

System
11 PDH Boards
11.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PQ1 has indicators.

Figure 11-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQ1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PQ1
PQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PQ1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
660

System
11 PDH Boards
The front panel of the PQ1 does not have an interface.
The D75S, D12S, and D12B provide 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces for the PQ1. For
details, see the topics that describe the D75S, D12S, and D12B.

The PQ1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
11.1.7 Valid Slots

The PQ1 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the PQ1 fails to work
normally.
The PQ1 can be installed in slots 15 and 1316 in the main subrack.
Table 11-3 lists the slots valid for the PQ1 and the corresponding slots for the D75S, D12S,
and D12B in the main subrack.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the PQ1 and the corresponding slots for the D75S, D12S, and D12B in
the main subrack
Slot Valid for the PQ1
Corresponding Slots for the D75S, D12S, and

D12B
Slot 1
Without an interface board
Slot 2
Slot 19 (132 channels of services)

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 13

Slot 14

Slot 15

Slot 16

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
661

System
11 PDH Boards
Slot 1 can house a protection board for the TPS protection. The board in slot 1 protects the boards in
slots 25 and 1316.
If the interface board for the boards in slots 25 and 1316 is the D12B, the boards in slots 25 and
1316 cannot be protected by the TPS protection scheme.
11.1.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the PQ1 indicates the type of interface impedance.
Table 11-4 provides the relationship between the feature code of the PQ1 and the type of
interface impedance.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the PQ1 and the type of interface impedance
Board
Feature Code
Type of Interface Impedance
SSN1PQ1A01 and SSN2PQ1A01
A01
75-ohm
SSN1PQ1B01 and SSN2PQ1B01
B01
120-ohm

The PQ1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

The PQ1 boards work with the D75S or D12S boards to realize one 1:N (N8) TPS protection
group.
Figure 11-5 shows the TPS protection provided by the PQ1. When the cross-connect and
timing board detects that a working PQ1 is faulty, the cross-connect and timing board issues a
service switching command to control the interface board to switch the services from the
faulty PQ1 to the protection PQ1, which realizes the protection of the services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
662

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the PQ1

Service signal
Service signal
Switching
control bus
Interface board
Protection bus
Protection bus
Crossconnect and
timing board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Working board N
Working board
Working board 1
Protection board
Failed

Table 11-5 shows the slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1.
Figure 1.1 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1
Working Board
Protection Board
Slot Configuration
PQ1A (75-ohm)
PQ1A (75-ohm)
PQ1B (120-ohm)
PQ1B (120-ohm) or PQM
Slot 1 can house a protection board.

The board in slot 1 protects the
boards in slots 2-5 and 13-16. Figure
11-6 shows the slot configuration for
the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
663

System
11 PDH Boards
PIU
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
XCS
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
3
7
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
Working
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
S
L
O
T
3
6
FAN
Working
S
L
O
T
4
XCS
FAN
S
L
O
T
3
5
AUX
PIU
S
L
O
T
3
1
Working
Working
Working
Protection
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
1 2 3
S
L
O
T
3
0
Working
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
GSCC
S
L
O
T
2
8
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
7
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
4
Working
S
L
O
T
2
6
D12S
D12S
D12S
D12S
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
3
Working
S
L
O
T
2
5
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
2
D12S
D12S
D12S
D12S
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
1
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
0
D12S
S
L
O
T
1
9
D12S
Fiber routing area


impedance of the cable matches the impedance of the board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
664

System
11 PDH Boards
correct.
----End

Step 5 Required: Set the PDH interface.
Generally, use the default value. The default value of the J2 to be sent is HuaWei SBS
and the default value of the J2 to be received is Disabled.
V5 byte: The setting of the V5 byte on the interconnected equipment must be consistent.
Generally, use the default value. The default value of the V5 byte is Asynchronous.
Service load indication: When a service channel does not process its carried services,
select Non-Loaded. When the service channel processes its carried services, select
Load.

Step 6 Optional: Create the protection. For details, see Creating a TPS Protection Group for Boards.
Before you configure services, learn the type of protection subnet configured for the ring network. For
the method for querying the protection subnet, see 27.1 Querying the Protection Subnet.
Step 8 Set parameters on the . For the parameters to be set, see 26.6 PDH Boards.
----End

Step 1 Required: Test the connection between the cable and the service interface. For details, see
Testing Connection Between the Cables and the PDH Service Interfaces.
Step 9 Optional: Test the TPS of the electrical interface. For details, see Testing the TPS of the
Electrical Interfaces.
----End

Boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
665

System
11 PDH Boards
----End

You can set parameters for the PQ1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PQ1 by using the U2000:
J2 byte
V5 byte
Tributary loopback
Service loading indication

Table 11-6 lists the faults that occur on the PQ1 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PQ1 frequently
Fault
Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption
The cable or connector

becomes abnormal.
An incorrect operation
is performed.
The types or settings of

the boards are
inconsistent.
Bit error
The equipment becomes

faulty.
Pointer
justification
The clock configuration

is incorrect.
The precision of the

external clock source is
very low.
Protection
switching
failure
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The TPS fails.
Interruptions.


Faults.

Copyright Huawei
666

System
11 PDH Boards

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PQ1, see Replacing a PDH Board.

11.1.13.1 Alarms of N1PQ1

BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
DOWN_E1_AIS
E1_LOC
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_RFI
LP_SIZE_ERR
LP_SLM
LP_TIM
LP_UNEQ
NO_BD_SOFT
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
POWER_ABNORMAL
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
SUBCARD_ABN
T_ALOS
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
UP_E1_AIS
V5_VCAIS
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
WRG_BD_TYPE
11.1.13.2 Alarms of N2PQ1

B3_EXC
B3_SD
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
CRC4_ERR_OVER
DOWN_E1_AIS
LFA
LMFA
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_RFI
LP_SLM
LP_UNEQ
NO_BD_SOFT
P_AIS
P_LOF
P_RAI
LP_TIM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
667

System
11 PDH Boards
POWER_ABNORMAL
SLAVE_WORKING
SUBCARD_ABN
T_ALOS
T_LOSEX
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
UP_E1_AIS
V5_VCAIS
PATCH_ERR
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
WRG_BD_TYPE

11.1.14.1 Performance Events of N1PQ1

LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
11.1.14.2 Performance Events of N2PQ1

CRC4_ERR
E1_LCV_SDH
E1_LES_SDH
E1_LLOSS_SDH
E1_LSES_SDH
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS

The technical specifications of the PQ1 include the parameters specified for electrical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
668

System
11 PDH Boards

The D75S, D12S, or D12B provides electrical interfaces for the PQ1. For the parameters
specified for the electrical interfaces, see Technical Specifications of the D75S, Technical
Specifications of the D12S and Technical Specifications of the D12B.

The mechanical specifications of the PQ1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the N1PQ1 at room temperature (25C) is 19 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N2PQ1 at room temperature (25C) is 13 W.
11.2 PQM
technical specifications of the PQM (63xE1/T1 service processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PQM.

The PQM is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.2.2 Application
The PQM is a PDH processing board. The PQM can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to add and drop PDH signals. To transmit/receive and process 63xE1/T1 signals, the
PQM must be used with the interface board.
Figure 11-7 shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards
add tributary signals to line signals and drops tributary signals to line signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
669

System
11 PDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The PQM processes E1/T1 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance
Table 11-7 provides the functions and features of the PQM.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the PQM
Function and
Feature
PQM
Basic
functions
Processes 63xE1/T1 signals.
Service
processing
Transmits/Receives and processes 63xE1/T1 electrical signals when

working with the interface board. Each channel can be configured as E1 or
T1.
Overhead
processing
Supports the processing of the path overheads at the VC-12 level, such as
the J2 byte.
Alarms and
performance
events

Maintenance
features
services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
670

System
Function and
Feature
11 PDH Boards
PQM
Protection
schemes
Supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and in the crossconnect direction.
Supports the CRC function.
Supports the TPS Protection when working with the interface board.
When the working board is the N1PQ1, the protection board can be the
N1PQ1, N2PQ1 or N1PQM. In this case, the hybrid protection is
provided.
When the working board is the N1PQM, the protection board can only
be the N1PQM.

The PQM consists of the interface module, mapping/demapping module, interface converting
Figure 11-8 shows the functional block diagram of the PQM.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PQM
Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
1.5 MHz/2 MHz

OSC
E1/T1
63x1.5 Mbit/s
63x2 Mbit/s
LIU
PPI
E1/T1
LIU
Mapping/
Demapping
63x1.5 Mbit/s
module
63x2 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
Reference
clock
High-speed
bus
Interface
converting
module High-speed
bus
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
Interface
module
LOS
Outloop/Inloop
control
Frame header
Communication
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
OSC: oscillator
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48V/-60V
+3.3 V backup power
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
671

System
11 PDH Boards

E1/T1
LPA
PDH AIS
detector
HPA
LPT
LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4) insertion
LPOH(V5/J2/N2/
K4) extraction
STM-1
E1/T1
LPT
LPA
HPT
HPA
HPT
STM-1

LPA sub-module
The 2 Mbit/s (1.5 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a VC-12 container to be
adapted so that the stream can be transported to the synchronous network for check of
the PDH AIS.
LPT sub-module
frame bytes for VC-12, namely, V5, J2, N2, and K4.
HPA sub-module
direction, the signals are split into VC-12s, which are located and isolated in TU-12s.
The TU-PTR is processed. TU-AIS and TU-LOP alarms are monitored. In the transmit
direction, VC-12s are located precisely and added with the TU-PTR. Sixty-three TU-12s
are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes interleaving. The sequence is as follows: TUG2>TUG3->VC-4
HPT sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
672

System
11 PDH Boards
These sub-modules are required to create a proprietary STM1 signal so that the E1
mapping/demapping module can interface with the multiplex unit.

Control the indicators on the board.

require.
11.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PQM has indicators.

Figure 11-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQM.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
673

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PQM
PQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PQM
The front panel of the PQM does not have an interface. The D12S and D12B provide 120ohm E1 interfaces or 100-ohm T1 interfaces for the PQM. For details, see the topics that
describe the D12S and D12B.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
674

System
11 PDH Boards

The PQM does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
11.2.7 Valid Slots

The PQM must be used with the D12S or D12B. In addition, the PQM must be installed in a
valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the PQM fails to work normally.
The PQM board can be installed in slots 15 and 1316 in the main subrack.
Table 11-8 lists the slots valid for the PQM and the corresponding slots for the D12S and
D12B in the main subrack.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the PQM and the corresponding slots for the D12S and D12B in the
main subrack
Slot Valid for the PQM
Corresponding Slots for the D12S and D12B
Slot 1
Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 13

Slot 14

Slot 15

Slot 16

slots 25 and 1316.
If the interface board for the boards in slots 25 and 1316 is the D12B, the boards in slots 25 and
1316 cannot be protected by the TPS protection scheme.
11.2.8 Feature Code

The PQM does not have a feature code.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
675

System
11 PDH Boards

The PQM supports the 1:N TPS protection.

The PQM boards can work with the D12S boards to realize one 1:N (N8) TPS protection
group.
Figure 11-11 shows the TPS protection provided by the PQM.
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the PQM (E1 services are provided as an example)
Service signal
Service signal
Switching
control bus
Interface board
Protection bus
Protection bus
Crossconnect and
timing board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Working board N
Working board
Working board 1
Protection board
Failed
When the cross-connect and timing board detects that a working PQM is faulty, the crossconnect and timing board issues a service switching command. Then, the interface board
switches the services from the faulty PQM to the protection PQM, which realizes the
protection of the services.

Table 11-9 shows the slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQM.
Figure 1.1 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQM
Working
Board
Protection Board
Slot Configuration
PQM (E1)
PQM (E1)
PQM (T1)
PQM (T1)
Slot 1 can house a protection board. The

board in slot 1 protects the boards in slots 2-5
and 13-16. Figure 11-12 shows the slot
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
676

System
Working
Board
11 PDH Boards
Protection Board
Slot Configuration
configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of
the PQM.
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
AUX
S
L
O
T
3
1
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
1
0
Working
Working
XCS
XCS
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
GSCC
S
L
O
T
9
Working
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
FAN
Working
S
L
O
T
4
Working
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
1 2 3
Working
S
L
O
T
3
0
FAN
Protection
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
8
D12S
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
7
Working
Working
S
L
O
T
2
6
D12S
D12S
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
4
D12S
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
5
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
3
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
2
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
1
D12S
D12S
D12S
S
L
O
T
2
0
D12S
D12S
S
L
O
T
1
9
D12S
D12S
Figure 1.2 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQM
Fiber routing area


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
677

System
11 PDH Boards
correct.
----End

Load.

----End

----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
678

System
11 PDH Boards

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the PQM by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PQM by using the U2000:
J2 byte
V5 byte
Tributary loopback

Table 11-10 lists the faults that occur on the PQM frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PQM frequently
Fault
Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption

becomes abnormal.
is performed.

the boards are
inconsistent.
Bit error

faulty.
Pointer
justification

is incorrect.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.


Copyright Huawei
679

System
Fault
Symptom
11 PDH Boards
Common Fault Cause

very low.
Protection
switching
failure
The TPS fails.

Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PQM, see Replacing a PDH Board.

11.2.13.1 Alarms of N1PQM

BIP_EXC
BD_STATUS
BIP_SD
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
CRC4_ERR_OVER
CRC6_ERR_OVER
DOWN_E1_AIS
DOWN_T1_AIS
E1_LOC
LFA
LMFA
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_SIZE_ERR
LP_SLM
LP_RFI
LP_TIM
LP_UNEQ
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
RMFA
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
SUBCARD_ABN
T_ALOS
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
TS16_AIS
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
UP_E1_AIS
UP_T1AIS
V5_VCAIS
RFA
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
POWER_ABNORMAL
WRG_BD_TYPE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
680

System
11 PDH Boards

11.2.14.1 Performance Events of N1PQM

CRC4_ERR
CRC6_ERR
E1_LCV_SDH
E1_LES_SDH
E1_LSES_SDH
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
T1_LCV_SDH
T1_LES_SDH
T1_LSES_SDH
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW

The technical specifications of the PQM include the parameters specified for electrical

The D12S or D12B provides electrical interfaces for the PQM. For the parameters specified
for the electrical interfaces, see Technical Specifications of the D12S and Technical
Specifications of the D12B.

The mechanical specifications of the PQM are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the PQM at room temperature (25C) is 22 W.
11.3 PFL1
technical specifications of the PFL1 (8xE1 optical processing board). This topic also describes
how to configure and commission the PFL1.

The PFL1 is available in one functional version, N1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
681

System
11 PDH Boards
11.3.2 Application
The PFL1 is a PDH processing board. The PFL1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to receive/transmit and process 8xE1 optical signals.
Figure 11-13 shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing
boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops tributary signals to line signals.
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The PFL1 processes E1 optical signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance
events, and maintenance features.
Table 11-11 provides the functions and features of the PFL1.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the PFL1
Function and
Feature
PFL1
Basic functions
Processes 8xE1 optical signals.
Service
processing
Receives/Transmits and processes 8xE1 optical signals.
Optical port
specifications
Supports I-2M optical ports, which comply with standards defined by

Huawei.
Optical module
specifications
Supports the detection and query of information about an optical

module.
Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and supports the automatic
laser shutdown (ALS) function.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
682

System
Function and
Feature
11 PDH Boards
PFL1
Supports the usage and monitoring of eSFP optical modules,

facilitating optical module maintenance.
Overhead
processing
Processes path overheads at the VC-12 level, such as J2 bytes.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment

management and maintenance.
Maintenance
features
Supports inloops and outloops at optical ports.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect
ongoing services.
Supports the query of board manufacturer information.
Supports in-service FPGA loading.
Supports board software upgrades without affecting ongoing services.
Supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and in the crossconnect direction.
Protection
scheme
TPS protection is not supported.

The PFL1 consists of the client-side receive/transmit module, mapping/demapping module,
interface converting module, logic and control module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 11-14 shows the functional block diagram of the PFL1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
683

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PFL1

Backplane
E1
Clientside
interface
module
Interface
converting
module
Mapping/Demappi
ng module
Cross-connect
unit A/B
Cross-connect
unit A/B
Communication
Logic and control module
32 MHz
38 MHz
58 MHz
66 MHz
Clock
module
Reference clock and frame header
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A/B
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup
power
1.1.1.1.790 Client-Side Receive/Transmit Module

The client-side receive/transmit module performs the following functions:
In the receive direction, converts received optical signals into electrical signals.
In the transmit direction, converts received electrical signals into E1 optical signals.
Detects the T_ALOS alarm and provides the ALS function.

The mapping/demapping module maps 8xE1 signals into VC-4 signals or demaps VC-4
signals into 8xE1 signals by using asynchronous mapping.

The interface converting module converts the signal bus into a parallel bus. The interface
converting module connects the high-rate backplane interface to the low-rate interface chip of
the transmit system.

The logic control module collects and reports information about board status. This module
contains basic logic units and performs the following functions:
Recovers clock signals from an optical module.
Realizes inter-board communication using internal Ethernet interfaces.
Selects and traces clock signals from the active and standby cross-connect units.
Selects clock signals and frame header signals from the active and standby cross-connect
units.
Controls board indicators.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
684

System
11 PDH Boards

The clock module provides the desired reference clock to boards.

The power module converts the -48 V/-60 V power supply into required DC voltages.
11.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PFL1 has indicators.

Figure 11-15 shows the front panel of the PFL1.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PFL1
PFL1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1 RX1
TX2 RX2
TX3 RX3
TX4 RX4
TX5 RX5
TX6 RX6
TX7 RX7
TX8 RX8
PFL1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
685

System
11 PDH Boards
The front panel of the PFL1 has eight optical interfaces. Table 11-12 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces on the PFL1.
Figure 1.1 Electrical ports on the PFL1
Port
Port Type
Usage
RX1-RX8
LC
TX1-TX8
LC

The PFL1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches for board settings.
11.3.7 Valid Slots

The PFL1 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the PFL1 fails to work
properly.
The PFL1 can be installed in slots 1-8 and slots 11-16.
11.3.8 Feature Code

The PFL1 does not have a feature code.

following tasks need to be performed: checking the board hardware, configuring the board,
commissioning the board, and checking the operation of the board.
1.1.1.1.799 Checking the Board Hardware

Step 1 Required: Check the board hardware.
The labels on the front panel of the board are correct and clear.
The daughter board of the board is properly installed.
All the components on both surfaces of the board are available and intact.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
686

System
11 PDH Boards
Step 2 Required: Verify that cables match the board.

Step 3 Required: Insert the board. For details, see Replacing Boards Onsite. Ensure that the board is
in proper contact with the bottom of the subrack and the front panel of the board is properly
locked.
Step 4 Required: Verify that the version of the board software matches the version of the NE
software and the version of the U2000 software.
----End

Step 1 Required: Add a logical board. For details, see Adding Boards.
Step 5 Required: Set the PDH port.
J2 byte: The settings of the J2 byte on the interconnected equipment must be consistent.
V5 byte: The settings of the V5 byte on the interconnected equipment must be consistent.
Service load indication: If a service channel does not process its carried services, select
Non-Loaded. If a service channel processes its carried services, select Load.

Step 7 Optional: Set parameters on the U2000. For details, see 26.6 PDH Boards.
----End

Step 1 Required: Test the optical port specifications. For details, see Testing Specifications of
Optical Interfaces.
----End

Boards.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
687

System
11 PDH Boards

You can set parameters for the PFL1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PFL1 by using the U2000:
J2 byte
V5 byte
Tributary loopback

Table 11-13 lists the faults that occur on the PFL1 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
The PFL1 uses an SFP optical module. If the PFL1 operates and an abnormal alarm occurs on the optical
interface, check whether the optical module is properly installed. To check whether the optical module is
properly installed, you can reseat the optical module.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to rectify the faults that occur on the PFL1 frequently
Fault
Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption
The optical fiber or

connector is faulty.
is performed.

the boards are
inconsistent.
The equipment
becomes faulty.
The optical power

becomes abnormal.

is incorrect.

very low.
Bit error
Pointer
justification
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
688

System
11 PDH Boards

replace the board.
For information about how to replace the PFL1, see Replacing a PDH Board.

11.3.12.1 Alarms of N1PFL1

T_ALOS
LP_SIZE_ERR
UP_E1_AIS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
LP_RFI
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
LP_UNEQ
LP_TIM
LP_SLM
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LOOP_ALM
CHIP_FAIL
NO_BD_SOFT
POWER_ABNORMAL
TEST_STATUS
T_LOSEX
TR_LOC
V5_VCAIS
SLAVE_WORKING
DOWN_E1_AIS
COMMUN_FAIL
BD_STATUS
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
TF
IN_PWR_ABN
OUT_PWR_ABN
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_COOL_ALM
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
LASER_SHUT
LSR_NO_FITED
LASER_MOD_ERR
ALM_ALS
WRG_BD_TYPE

11.3.13.1 Performance Events of N1PFL1

LPBBE
LPES
LPUAS
LPCSES
LPSES
LPFEBBE
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPFECSES
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
689

System
11 PDH Boards
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPICCVCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR

The technical specifications of the PFL1 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 11-14 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PFL1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PFL1
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2048 kbit/s
Code type
NRZ
I-2M
0 to 2

(nm)
1260 to 1360
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC

(dBm)
-15 to -8
Optical receiver sensitivity

(dBm)
-23
-8

(dB)
8.2

width (nm)
Side mode suppression ratio

(dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
690

System
11 PDH Boards


The mechanical specifications of the PFL1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0
1.1.1.1.808 Power consumption

The maximum power consumption of the PFL1 at room temperature (25C) is 17 W.
11.4 PL3
technical specifications of the PL3 (3xE3/T3 service processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the PL3.

The PL3 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2. The difference between
the two versions is with regard to their functions. The N1PL3 is discontinued.
Table 11-15 describes the versions of the PL3.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the PL3
Item
Description
Functional versions
The PL3 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and

N2.
Differences
Service processing: E13 function and M13 function.
Maintenance features: PRBS function and CRC function.
Substitution
The N2PL3 can replace the N1PL3.
11.4.2 Application
The PL3 is a PDH processing board. The PL3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to add and drop PDH signals. To transmit/receive and process 3xE3/T3 signals, the PL3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
691

System
11 PDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The PL3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance
Table 11-16 provides the functions and features of the PL3.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the PL3
Function and
Feature
PL3
Basic functions
Service processing
Transmits/Receives and processes 3xE3/T3 electrical signals.

The N2PL3 supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1
services into E3 services.
The N2PL3 supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1
services into T3 services.
Overhead
processing
Supports the setting and query of all the path overhead bytes at the
VC-3 level.
Alarms and
performance
events

Maintenance
features
affect services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
692

System
Function and
Feature
PL3

services.
The N1PL3 supports the PRBS test in only the tributary direction.
The N2PL3:
Protection
schemes
11 PDH Boards
Supports the PRBS test in the tributary

direction and in the cross-connect
direction in the normal mode.
Does not support the PRBS test in the

Server mode.
Support the PRBS test in the electrical

interface direction in the MUX mode.
The N1PL3 does not support the CRC function, but the N2PL3
supports the CRC function.
Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board
and the switching and bridging board.

The PL3 consists of the interface module, mapping/demapping module, interface converting
Figure 11-17 shows the functional block diagram of the PL3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
693

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PL3

Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
34 MHz/45 MHz
OSC
E3/T3
3x34 Mbit/s
3x45 Mbit/s
LIU
PPI
E3/T3
LIU
2x155 Mbit/s
Mapping/
Demapping
3x34 Mbit/s
2x155 Mbit/s
module
3x45 Mbit/s
Reference
clock
High-speed
bus
Interface
converting
High-speed
module
bus
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
Interface
module
LOS
Outloop/Inloop
control
Cross-connect
unit
Frame header
Communication
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
SCC unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48V/-60V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power
OSC: oscillator
E3/T3
LPA
PDH AIS
detector
E3/T3
LPA
LPT
LPOH (J1/C2/
B3) insertion
LPOH (J1/C2/
B3) extraction
LPT
HPA
HPT
STM-1
HPA
HPT
STM-1
LPA: low order path adaptation
LPT: low order path termination
HPA: high order path adaptation
HPT: high order path termination
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
694

System
11 PDH Boards

Processes the P_LOS alarm.
LPA sub-module
The 45 Mbit/s (34 Mbit/s) plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C3 container to be
adapted so that the stream can be transported to the synchronous network.
LPT sub-module
frame bytes for VC-3, namely, J1, B3, C2, G1, F2, H4, F3, K3, and N1.
HPA sub-module
direction, the signals are split into VC-3s, which are located and isolated in TU-3s. The
TU-PTR is processed. In the transmit direction, VC-3s are located precisely and added
with the TU-PTR. Three TUG-3s are multiplexed into a VC-4 by bytes interleaving. The
sequence is as follows: TU-3->TUG3->VC-4
HPT sub-module

These sub-modules are required to create a proprietary STM1 signal so that the
interface converting module can be connected.


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
695

System
11 PDH Boards
require.
11.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PL3 has indicators.

Figure 11-19 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PL3.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PL3
PL3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PL3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
696

System
11 PDH Boards
The front panel of the PL3 does not have an interface.
The C34S provides E3/T3 interfaces for the PL3. For details, see the topic that describes the
C34S.

The PL3 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
11.4.7 Valid Slots

The PL3 must be used with the C34S. In addition, the PL3 must be installed in a valid slot in
the subrack. Otherwise, the PL3 cannot work normally.
The PL3 can be installed in slots 25 and 1316 in the main subrack.
The PL3 must be used with the C34S.
Table 11-17 lists the slots valid for the PL3 and the corresponding slots for the C34S in the
main subrack.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the PL3 and the corresponding slots for the C34S in the main subrack
Slot Valid for the PL3
Corresponding Slot for the C34S
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35
11.4.8 Feature Code


The PL3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
697

System
11 PDH Boards

The PL3 can be configured into two 1:N (N3) TPS protection groups when the PL3 works
with the C34S and TSB8/TSB4.
Figure 11-20 shows the TPS protection provided by the PL3.
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the PL3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
Service signal
Service signal
Switching
control bus
Crossconnect and
timing board
Interface board N
Working board N
Working board
Working board 1
Protection board
Interface board
Interface board 1
Protection
switching board
Failed
Normal state
interface board.
Switching state

Table 11-18 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PL3.
Figure 1.1 Slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PL3
Working
Board
Protection Board
Slot Configuration
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (E3)/PD3 (E3)
If the working board is the PL3, the PD3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
698

System
11 PDH Boards
Working
Board
Protection Board
Slot Configuration
PL3 (T3)
PL3 (T3)/PD3 (T3)
can be the protection board. Figure 11-21

shows the slot configuration for the 1:3
TPS protection of the PL3.
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
GSCC
Working 1
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
3
6
FAN
Working 2
Working 1
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
3
5
AUX
S
L
O
T
3
2
TSB8/TSB4
S
L
O
T
3
1
Working 2
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
XCS
S
L
O
T
4
XCS
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
1 2 3
Working 1
S
L
O
T
3
0
FAN
Protection 1
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
Working 2
S
L
O
T
2
8
Protection 2
S
L
O
T
2
7
C34S
S
L
O
T
2
6
C34S
S
L
O
T
2
5
C34S
S
L
O
T
2
4
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
3
C34S
S
L
O
T
2
2
C34S
S
L
O
T
2
1
C34S
S
L
O
T
2
0
TSB8/TSB4
S
L
O
T
1
9
PIU
Figure 1.2 Slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the PL3
Fiber routing area
Table 11-19 lists the slots for the PL3, C34S, and TSB8/TSB4.
Figure 1.2 Slots for the PL3, C34S, and TSB8/TSB4
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
PL3 (working board)
Slots 3, 4, and 5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
699

System
11 PDH Boards
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
PL3 (protection board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8/TSB4
Slot 19
Slot 35
C34S


correct.
----End

Load.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
700

System
11 PDH Boards
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the PL3 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PL3 by using the U2000:
J1 byte
C2 byte
Tributary loopback
Path service type

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
701

System
11 PDH Boards
Table 11-20 lists the faults that occur on the PL3 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PL3 frequently
Fault
Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption

becomes abnormal.
is performed.

the boards are
inconsistent.
Bit error

faulty.
Pointer
justification

is incorrect.

very low.
Protection
switching
failure
The TPS fails.
Interruptions.


Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PL3, see Replacing a PDH Board.

11.4.13.1 Alarms of N1PL3

A_LOC
B3_EXC
B3_SD
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LP_R_FIFO
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_SLM
LP_T_FIFO
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
702

System
11 PDH Boards
LP_TIM
LP_UNEQ
NO_BD_SOFT
P_AIS
P_LOS
PLL_FAIL
POWER_ABNORMAL
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
SUBCARD_ABN
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
W_R_FAIL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
11.4.13.2 Alarms of N2PL3

B3_EXC
B3_SD
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
CRC6_ERR_OVER
DOWN_E1_AIS
DOWN_T1_AIS
DS3_IDLE
CRC4_ERR_OVER
LFA
LMFA
LOOP_ALM
LP_RFI
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_TIM
LP_SLM
NO_BD_SOFT
P_AIS
LP_UNEQ
P_LOF
P_LOS
P_RAI
SUBCARD_ABN
POWER_ABNORMAL
SLAVE_WORKING
TEST_STATUS
T_LOSEX
TEMP_OVER
TU_AIS
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
UP_T1AIS
TU_LOP
UP_E1_AIS
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
V5_VCAIS
PATCH_ERR
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
P_FFM
WRG_BD_TYPE

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
703

System
11 PDH Boards
11.4.14.1 Performance Events of N1PL3

E3_LCV_SDH
E3_LES_SDH
E3_LSES_SDH
T3_LCV_SDH
T3_LES_SDH
T3_LSES_SDH
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
11.4.14.2 Performance Events of N2PL3

CRC4_ERR
CRC6_ERR
E3_LCV_SDH
E3_LES_SDH
E3_LSES_SDH
LPBBE
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
T3_LCV_SDH
T3_LES_SDH
T3_LSES_SDH
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
TUPJCNEW
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
VC3FECSES
LPCSES
LPFECSES

The technical specifications of the PL3 include the parameters specified for electrical

The C34S provides electrical interfaces for the PL3. For the parameters specified for the
electrical interfaces, see Technical Specifications of the C34S.

The mechanical specifications of the PL3 are as follows:
Weight of the N1PL3 (kg): 1.0
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
704

System
11 PDH Boards
Weight of the N2PL3 (kg): 0.9

The maximum power consumption of the N1PL3 at room temperature (25C) is 15 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N2PL3 at room temperature (25C) is 12 W.
11.5 PL3A
technical specifications of the PL3A (3xE3/T3 service processing board with the interfaces on
the front panel). This topic also describes how to configure and commission the PL3A.

The PL3A is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2. The difference between
the two versions is with regard to whether they support the E13/M13 function. The N1PL3A
is discontinued.
Table 11-21 describes the versions of the PL3A.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the PL3A
Item
Description
Functional versions
The PL3A is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and

N2.
Differences
Maintenance features: PRBS function and CRC function.
Substitution
The N2PL3A can replace the N1PL3A.
11.5.2 Application
The PL3A is a PDH processing board. The PL3A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
PL3A uses the interfaces on its front panel.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
705

System
11 PDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The PL3A processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance
Table 11-22 provides the functions and features of the PL3A.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the PL3A
Function and
Feature
PL3A
Basic functions
Service processing

The N2PL3A supports the E13 function, which is used to converge
E1 services into E3 services.
The N2PL3A supports the M13 function, which is used to converge
T1 services into T3 services.
Overhead
processing
Supports the setting and query of all the path overhead bytes at the
VC-3 level.
Alarms and
performance events

Maintenance
features
affect services.

board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
706

System
Function and
Feature
11 PDH Boards
PL3A

services.
The N1PL3A supports the PRBS test in only the tributary

direction.
The N2PL3A:

direction and in the cross-connect
direction in the normal mode.
Does not support the PRBS test in the

Server mode.

The N1PLS3A does not support the CRC function, but the
N2PL3A supports the CRC function.

The PL3A consists of the interface module, mapping/demapping module, interface converting
Figure 11-23 shows the functional block diagram of the PL3A.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PL3A
Backplane
155 MHz
PLL
34 MHz/45 MHz
OSC
E3/T3
3x34 Mbit/s
3x45 Mbit/s
LIU
PPI
E3/T3
LIU
2x155 Mbit/s
Mapping/
Demapping
3x34 Mbit/s
2x155 Mbit/s
module
3x45 Mbit/s
Reference
clock
High-speed
bus
Interface
converting
module High-speed
bus
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
Interface
module
LOS
Outloop/Inloop
control
+3.3 V
Power
module

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Frame header
Communication
Logic and
control module
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48V/-60V
+3.3 V backup power

Copyright Huawei
707

System
11 PDH Boards
OSC: oscillator
E3/T3
LPA
HPA
LPT
LPOH (J1/C2/
B3) insertion
PDH AIS
detector
LPOH (J1/C2/
B3) extraction
E3/T3
STM-1
HPA
LPT
LPA
HPT
HPT
STM-1
LPA: low order path adaptation
LPT: low order path termination
HPA: high order path adaptation
HPT: high order path termination

LPA sub-module
LPT sub-module
HPA sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
708

System
11 PDH Boards
HPT sub-module



require.
11.5.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PL3A has indicators and interfaces.

Figure 11-25 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PL3A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
709

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PL3A
PL3A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
PL3A
The front panel of the PL3A has three pairs of 75-ohm unbalanced interfaces, which are of the
SMB type.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
710

System
11 PDH Boards

The PL3A does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
11.5.7 Valid Slots

The PL3A must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the PL3A cannot work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the PL3A vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the PL3A are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the PL3A can be installed in slots 18
and 1117 in the main subrack.
11.5.8 Feature Code



correct.
----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
711

System
11 PDH Boards
Load.

----End

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the PL3A by using the U2000.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
712

System
11 PDH Boards
You can set the following parameters for the PL3A by using the U2000:
J1 byte
C2 byte
Tributary loopback
Path service type

Table 11-23 lists the faults that occur on the PL3A frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the PL3A frequently
Fault
Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption

becomes abnormal.
is performed.

the boards are
inconsistent.
Bit error

faulty.
Pointer
justification

is incorrect.

very low.
Protection
switching
failure
The TPS fails.
Interruptions.


Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the PL3A, see Replacing a PDH Board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
713

System
11 PDH Boards

11.5.12.1 Alarms of N1PL3A

A_LOC
B3_EXC
B3_SD
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
C2_VCAIS
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
LOOP_ALM
LP_R_FIFO
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_SLM
LP_T_FIFO
LP_TIM
LP_UNEQ
NO_BD_SOFT
P_AIS
P_LOS
PLL_FAIL
POWER_ABNORMAL
SLAVE_WORKING
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TR_LOC
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
W_R_FAIL
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSO
FT
WRG_BD_TYPE
11.5.12.2 Alarms of N2PL3A

BD_STATUS
B3_EXC
B3_SD
BIP_SD
C2_VCAIS
BIP_EXC
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
CHIP_ABN
CRC6_ERR_OVER
DOWN_E1_AIS
CRC4_ERR_OVER
DS3_IDLE
LOOP_ALM
DOWN_T1_AIS
LMFA
LP_REI
LFA
LP_RDI
NO_BD_SOFT
LP_RFI
LP_SLM
P_LOF
LP_TIM
LP_UNEQ
P_AIS
P_FFM
P_RAI
TPS_ALM
UP_E1_AIS
SLAVE_WORKING
SUBCARD_ABN
P_LOS
TEMP_OVER
TEST_STATUS
POWER_ABNORMAL
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
T_LOSEX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
714

System
11 PDH Boards
V5_VCAIS
PATCH_ERR
TR_LOC
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
UP_T1AIS
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
WRG_BD_TYPE

11.5.13.1 Performance Events of N1PL3A

E3_LCV_SDH
E3_LES_SDH
E3_LSES_SDH
T3_LCV_SDH
T3_LES_SDH
T3_LSES_SDH
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
TUPJCNEW
11.5.13.2 Performance Events of N2PL3A

CRC4_ERR
CRC6_ERR
E3_LCV_SDH
E3_LES_SDH
E3_LSES_SDH
LPBBE
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
T3_LCV_SDH
T3_LES_SDH
T3_LSES_SDH
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
TUPJCNEW
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
VC3FECSES
LPCSES
LPFECSES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
715

System
11 PDH Boards

The technical specifications of the PL3A include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 11-24 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PL3A.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PL3A
Nominal bit rate
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
Line code pattern
HDB3
B3ZS
Waveform at the output

interface
Signal bit rate at the output

interface
Allowed attenuation at the
input interface
Allowed frequency deviation
at the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.823.
Complies with ITU-T

G.824.
Anti-interference capability at
the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.703.
Reflection attenuation at the

input/output interface
Output jitter
Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.
Mapping jitter
Combined jitter
Jitter transfer function
Complies with ITU-T

G.751.
Impedance (ohm)
75

The mechanical specifications of the PL3A are as follows:
Weight of the N1PL3A (kg): 1.0
Weight of the N2PL3A (kg): 0.9
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
716

System
11 PDH Boards

The maximum power consumption of the N1PL3A at room temperature (25C) is 15 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N2PL3A at room temperature (25C) is 12 W.
11.6 PD3
technical specifications of the PD3 (6xE3/T3 service processing board).

The PD3 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2. The difference between
the two versions is with regard to whether they support the E13/M13 function. The N1PD3 is
no longer manufactured.
Table 11-25 describes the versions of the PD3.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the PD3
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The PD3 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2.
Differences
Maintenance features: CRC function.
Substitution
The N2PD3 can replace the N1PD3.
11.6.2 Application
The PD3 is a PDH processing board. The PD3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to add and drop PDH signals. To transmit/receive and process 6xE3/T3 signals, the PD3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
717

System
11 PDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The PD3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance
Table 11-26 provides the functions and features of the PD3.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the PD3
Function and
Feature
PD3
Basic
functions
Service
processing
The N2PD3 supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1

services into E3 services.
The N2PD3 supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1

services into T3 services.
Overhead
processing
Supports the setting and query of all the path overhead bytes at the VC-3
level.
Alarms and
performance
events

Maintenance
features
services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
718

System
Function and
Feature
PD3
The N1PD3 supports the PRBS test in only the tributary direction.
The N2PD3:
Protection
schemes
11 PDH Boards

direction and in the cross-connect direction in
the normal mode.
Does not support the PRBS test in the MUX

mode or Server mode.
The N1PD3 does not support the CRC function, but the N2PD3
supports the CRC function.
Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board and

The PD3 consists of the PPI module, E3/T3 mapping/demapping module, interface converting
module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
Figure 11-27 shows the functional block diagram of the PD3.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PD3
34 MHz/
45 MHz
OSC
E3/T3
E3/T3
LIU
LIU
P
I
155 MHz
PLL
6x34 Mbit/s/
6x45 Mbit/s
2x155 Mbit/s
E3/T3
Interface
mapping/
converting
6x34 Mbit/s/
demapping
module
2x155 Mbit/s
6x45 Mbit/s
module
LOS
Outloop/Inloop
control
+3.3 V
OSC: Oscillator
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
DC/DC
converter
Cross-connect unit
Highspeed bus
Highspeed bus
Frame header
Communication
Logic and
control module
DC/DC
converter
Reference
clock
Fuse
Fuse
Cross-connect unit
SCC Unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

Copyright Huawei
719

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 11-28 shows the functional block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping module.
Figure 1.2 Functional block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping module
E3/T3
LPA
HPA
LPT
LPOH (J1/C2/
B3) insertion
PDH AIS
detector
LPOH (J1/C2/
B3) extraction
E3/T3
STM-1
HPA
LPT
LPA
HPT
HPT
STM-1
LPA: Low order path adaptation
LPT: Low order path termination
HPA: High order path adaptation
HPT: High order path termination
1.1.1.1.845 PPI Module

The PPI module consists of LIUs and provides the inloop and outloop functions. The PPI
1.1.1.1.846 E3/T3 Mapping/Demapping Module
LPA sub-module

LPT sub-module
VC-3 container and POH. The POH contains nine octets equally distributed within the
HPA sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
720

System
11 PDH Boards
HPT sub-module

1.1.1.1.849 DC/DC Converter

It converts the 48/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board
require.
11.6.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PD3 has indicators.

Figure 11-29 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PD3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
721

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PD3
PD3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PD3
The front panel of the PD3 does not have an interface.
The D34S provides E3/T3 interfaces for the PD3. For details, see the topic that describes the
D34S.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
722

System
11 PDH Boards
11.6.6 Valid Slots

The PD3 must be used with the D34S.
The PD3 can be installed in slots 25 and 1316 in the main subrack.
Table 11-27 lists the slots valid for the PD3 and the corresponding slots for the D34S in the
main subrack.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the PD3 and the corresponding slots for the D34S in the main subrack
Slot Valid for the PD3
Corresponding Slot for the D34S
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35

The PD3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

The PD3 can be configured into two 1:N (N3) TPS protection groups when the PD3 works
with the D34S and TSB8. Figure 11-30 shows the TPS protection provided by the PD3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
723

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the PD3

6xE3/T3
TSB8
6xE3/T3
D34S
6xE3/T3
Sw itching
control
D34S
signal
D34S
Crossconnect
and timing
board
Slot 9/10
Protection
PD3
Working
PD3
Working
PD3
Working
PD3
Failed
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Normal state
the PD3 through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S.
Switching state
switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same
time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches to the corresponding position so that the
protection board can protect the failed working board.

Table 11-28 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3.
Figure 1.1 Slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3
Working
Board
Protection Board
Slot Configuration
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (T3)
PD3 (T3)
Figure 11-31 shows the slot configuration

for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
724

System
11 PDH Boards
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
GSCC
Working 1
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
3
6
FAN
Working 2
Working 1
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
3
5
AUX
S
L
O
T
3
2
TSB8
S
L
O
T
3
1
Working 2
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
XCS
S
L
O
T
4
XCS
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
1 2 3
Working 1
S
L
O
T
3
0
FAN
Protection 1
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
Working 2
S
L
O
T
2
8
Protection 2
S
L
O
T
2
7
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
6
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
5
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
4
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
3
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
2
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
1
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
0
TSB8
S
L
O
T
1
9
PIU
Figure 1.2 Slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3
Fiber routing area
Table 11-29 lists the slots for the PD3, D34S, and TSB8.
Figure 1.2 Slots for the PD3, D34S, and TSB8
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
PD3 (working board)
Slots 3-5
Slots 13-15
PD3 (protection board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
D34S
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
725

System
11 PDH Boards

You can set the parameters for the PD3 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PD3 by using the U2000:
J1 byte
C2 byte
Tributary loopback
Path service type

The technical specifications of the PD3 include the parameters specified for electrical

The C34S provides electrical interfaces for the PD3. For the parameters specified for the
electrical interfaces, see Technical Specifications of the D34S.

The mechanical specifications of the PD3 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.1

The maximum power consumption of the N1PD3 at room temperature (25C) is 19 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N2PD3 at room temperature (25C) is 12 W.
11.7 PQ3
technical specifications of the PQ3 (12xE3/T3 service processing board).

The PQ3 is available in one functional version, namely, N2.
11.7.2 Application
The PQ3 is a PDH processing board. The PQ3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
PQ3 must be used with the interface board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
726

System
11 PDH Boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The PQ3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance
Table 11-30 provides the functions and features of the PQ3.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the PQ3
Function and
Feature
PQ3
Basic
functions
Service
processing
Supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1 services into

E3 services.
Supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1 services into

T3 services.
Overhead
processing
Supports the setting and query of all the path overhead bytes at the VC-3
level.
Alarms and
performance
events

Maintenance
features
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
727

System
Function and
Feature
11 PDH Boards
PQ3
services.
PRBS function:
Protection
schemes

direction and in the cross-connect direction
in the normal mode.
Does not support the PRBS test in the Server

mode.

Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board and

The PQ3 consists of the PPI module, E3/T3 mapping/demapping module, interface converting
module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
Figure 11-33 shows the functional block diagram of the PQ3.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PQ3
34 MHz/
45 MHz
OSC
E3/T3
E3/T3
LIU
LIU
P
I
155 MHz
PLL
12x34 Mbit/s/
12x45 Mbit/s
2x155 Mbit/s
E3/T3
Interface
mapping/
converting
12x34 Mbit/s/
demapping
module
2x155 Mbit/s
12x45 Mbit/s
module
LOS
Outloop/Inloop
control
+3.3 V
OSC: Oscillator
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
DC/DC
converter
Cross-connect unit
Highspeed bus
Highspeed bus
Frame header
Communication
Logic and
control module
DC/DC
converter
Reference
clock
Fuse
Fuse
Cross-connect unit
SCC Unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

Copyright Huawei
728

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 11-34 shows the functional block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping module.
Figure 1.2 Functional block diagram of the E3/T3 mapping/demapping module
E3/T3
LPA
HPA
LPT
LPOH (J1/C2/
B3) insertion
PDH AIS
detector
LPOH (J1/C2/
B3) extraction
E3/T3
STM-1
HPA
LPT
LPA
HPT
HPT
STM-1
LPA: Low order path adaptation
LPT: Low order path termination
HPA: High order path adaptation
HPT: High order path termination
1.1.1.1.858 PPI Module

1.1.1.1.859 E3/T3 Mapping/Demapping Module
LPA sub-module

LPT sub-module
VC-3 container and POH. The POH contains nine octets equally distributed within the
HPA sub-module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
729

System
11 PDH Boards
HPT sub-module


require.
11.7.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PQ3 has indicators.

Figure 11-35 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQ3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
730

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PQ3
PQ3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PQ3
The front panel of the PQ3 does not have an interface.
The D34S provides E3/T3 interfaces for the PQ3. For details, see the topic that describes the
D34S.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
731

System
11 PDH Boards
11.7.6 Valid Slots

The PQ3 can be installed in slots 25 and 1316, and must be used with the D34S.
Table 11-31 lists the slots valid for the PQ3 and the corresponding slots for the D34S.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the PQ3 and the corresponding slots for the D34S
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36

The PQ3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

The PQ3 boards can be configured into two 1:N (N3) TPS protection groups when the PQ3
boards work with two D34S boards and two TSB8 boards. Figure 11-36 shows the TPS
protection provided by the PQ3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
732

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the PQ3

12xE3/T3 12xE3/T3 12xE3/T3 12xE3/T3 12xE3/T3 12xE3/T3
TSB8
3 2
TSB8
D34S
D34S
D34S
D34S
Sw itching
control
D34S signal
D34S
Crossconnect
and timing
board
Slot 9/10
Protection
Working
PQ3
PQ3
Slot 2
Slot 3
Working
PQ3
Working
Failed
Slot 4
PQ3
Slot 5
Normal state
the PQ3 through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S.
Switching state
switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same
time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches to the corresponding position so that the
protection board can protect the failed working board.

When you configure the N2PQ3 as the TPS protection board, two TSB8 boards are required.
Table 11-32 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PQ3.
Working
Board
Protection Board
Slot Configuration
PQ3 (E3)
PQ3 (E3)
PQ3 (T3)
PQ3 (T3)
Figure 11-37 shows the slot configuration

for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PQ3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
733

System
11 PDH Boards
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
AUX
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
Working 2
S
L
O
T
1
0
Working 2
S
L
O
T
9
FAN
Working 2
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
XCS
FAN
GSCC
PIU
S
L
O
T
3
2
TSB8
PIU
S
L
O
T
3
1
XCS
Working 1
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
1 2 3 4
S
L
O
T
3
0
Working 1
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
TSB8
S
L
O
T
2
8
Protection 2
S
L
O
T
2
7
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
4
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
6
D34S
D34S
D34S
D34S
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
3
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
5
TSB8
S
L
O
T
2
2
D34S
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
1
D34S
S
L
O
T
2
0
D34S
S
L
O
T
1
9
TSB8
Figure 1.2 Slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the PQ3
Fiber routing area
Table 11-33 lists the slots for the PQ3, D34S, and TSB8.
Figure 1.2 Slots for the PQ3, D34S, and TSB8
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
PQ3 (working board)
Slots 3-5
Slots 13-15
PQ3 (protection board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8
Slots 19 and 20
Slots 35 and 36
D34S
Slots 21-26
Slots 29-34

You can set the parameters for the PQ3 by using the U2000.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
734

System
11 PDH Boards
You can set the following parameters for the PQ3 by using the U2000:
J1 byte
C2 byte
Tributary loopback
Path service type

The technical specifications of the PQ3 include the parameters specified for electrical

The D34S provides electrical interfaces for the PQ3. For the parameters specified for the
electrical interfaces, see Technical Specifications of the D34S.

The mechanical specifications of the PQ3 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.9

The maximum power consumption of the PQ3 at room temperature (25C) is 13 W.
11.8 DX1
technical specifications of the DX1 (DDN service accessing and converging board). This
topic also describes how to configure and commission the DX1.

The DX1 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.8.2 Application
The DX1 is a DDN service processing board. The DX1 can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to add and converge the DDN services. To receive eight channels of Nx64
kbit/s signals and eight channels of framed E1 services and to cross-connect the 48 channels
of Nx64 kbit/s signals on the system side, the DX1 must be used with the interface board.
Figure 11-38 shows the application of the DDN service processing boards. The DDN service
processing boards add DDN service signals to line signals and drops line signals to DDN
service signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
735

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the DDN service processing boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The DX1 cross-connects 48xE1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.
Table 11-34 provides the functions and features of the DX1.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the DX1
Function
and Feature
DX1
Basic
functions
Processes eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services and eight channels of

framed E1 services.
Cross-connects 48 channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals on the system side.
Transmits/Receives eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s and eight channels of

framed E1 services and realizes the 1:N TPS protection when working
with the DM12.
One DX1 board needs to work with two DM12 boards.
Service
processing
Alarms and
performance
events

Maintenance
features
Supports the PRBS test in the cross-connect direction and in the

electrical interface direction.
Connectors
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The DB28 connectors and DB44 connectors are present on the front panel
of the DM12. The DB28 connector is used for the Nx64 kbit/s signals, and
the DB44 connector is used for the framed E1 signals.
Copyright Huawei
736

System
11 PDH Boards
Function
and Feature
DX1
Protection
schemes
Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board.

The DX1 consists of the interface and frame processing module, encoding/decoding module,
timeslot cross-connect module, framing/deframing module, mapping/demapping module,
logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 11-39 shows the functional block diagram of the DX1.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the DX1
Backplane
DM12
8xFrame E1
Framed E1
interface
module
4xNx64 kbit/s
Nx64 kbit/s
interface
module
DX1 Framed E1
encoding/
decoding and
frame processing
module
Power
DM12
4xNx64 kbit/s
Backplane
Nx64 kbit/s
interface
module
Nx64 kbit/s
interface
and frame
processing
module
64 kbit/s
timeslot
cross-connect
module
Framing/
Deframing
module
Logic and
control module
Power
Framed E1
interface
module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Mapping/
Demapping
module for
48 channels
of signals
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power
1.1.1.1.871 In the Transmit Direction

The mapping/demapping module demaps the VC-4 signals sent from the SDH cross-connect
unit and sends the demapped signals to the framing/deframing module. Then, the
framing/deframing module converts the signals into the framed E1 signals and sends the
framed E1 signals to the timeslot cross-connect module. Finally, the timeslot cross-connect
module cross-connects and grooms the signals at the 64 kbit/s granularity, and transmits the
signals that need to be dropped on the local NE to the interface module.
1.1.1.1.872 In the Receive Direction

The DX1 transmits/receives eight channels of framed E1 signals from the framed E1 interface
module of the DM12 and eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals from the Nx64 kbit/s interface
module of the DM12. In addition, the DX1 restores the data signal and clock signal.
In the case of the framed E1 signals, the DX1 decodes the signals and processes the frames. In
the case of the Nx64 kbit/s signals, the DX1 converts the signals and processes the frames.
Then, the DX1 transmits the signals to the 64 kbit/s timeslot cross-connect module. The
timeslot cross-connect module cross-connects and grooms the signals at the 64 kbit/s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
737

System
11 PDH Boards
granularity, and transmits the signals to the framing/deframing module. Finally, the
framing/deframing module maps the signals into VC-4s and transmits the signals to the SDH
cross-connect unit.

The logic and control module performs the board communication, board control, and service
configuration functions. In addition, the logic and control module traces and selects the clock
signals and frame header signals sent from the active and standby cross-connect boards.

The power module provides all the modules of the DX1 with the required DC voltages.
11.8.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the DX1 has indicators.

Figure 11-40 shows the appearance of the front panel of the DX1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
738

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the DX1
DX1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
DX1
The front panel of the DX1 does not have an interface.
One DX1 board needs to work with two DM12 boards to receive and transmit the framed E1
signals and Nx64 kbit/s signals. For details, see the topic that describes the DM12.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
739

System
11 PDH Boards

The DX1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
11.8.7 Valid Slots

The DX1 must be used with the DM12. In addition, the DX1 must be installed in a valid slot
in the subrack. Otherwise, the DX1 cannot work normally.
The DX1 can be installed in slots 15 and 1316.
Table 11-35 lists the slots valid for the DX1 and the corresponding slots for the DM12.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the DX1 and the corresponding slots for the DM12
Slot Valid for the DX1
Corresponding Slot for the DM12
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36
slots 25 and 1316.
One DX1 needs to work with two DM12 boards to transmit/receive eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s
signals. The DM12 in the slot with a smaller slot number is used to transmit/receive eight channels
of framed E1 signals and four channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals. The DM12 in the slot with a larger
slot number is used to transmit/receive four channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals.
11.8.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the DX1 indicates the type of interface impedance.
Table 11-36 provides the relationship between the feature code of the DX1 and the type of
interface impedance.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the DX1 and the type of interface impedance
Board
Feature Code
Type of Interface Impedance
SSN1DX1A01
A01
75-ohm
SSN1DX1B01
B01
120-ohm
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
740

System
11 PDH Boards

The DX1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

The DX1 can be configured into one 1:N (N8) TPS protection group when the DX1 works
with the DM12.
Figure 11-41 shows the TPS protection provided by the DX1.
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the DX1
Service signal
Service signal
Switching
control bus
Interface board
Protection bus
Protection bus
Crossconnect and
timing board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Working board N
Working board
Working board 1
Protection board
Failed
When the cross-connect and timing board detects that a working DX1 is faulty, the crossconnect and timing board issues a service switching command to control the interface board
to switch the services from the faulty board to the protection board, which realizes the
protection of the services.

Figure 11-42 shows the slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the DX1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
741

System
11 PDH Boards
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
Working
Working
S
L
O
T
1
0
FAN
Working
Working
S
L
O
T
9
XCS
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
S
L
O
T
3
7
AUX
PIU
S
L
O
T
3
2
DM12
PIU
S
L
O
T
3
1
XCS
S
L
O
T
4
Working
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
1 2 3
Working
S
L
O
T
3
0
FAN
Protection
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
GSCC
S
L
O
T
2
8
DM12
S
L
O
T
2
7
Working
S
L
O
T
2
6
DM12
S
L
O
T
2
3
Working
S
L
O
T
2
5
DM12
S
L
O
T
2
2
DM12
DM12
DM12
S
L
O
T
2
4
DM12
DM12
DM12
DM12
DM12
S
L
O
T
2
1
DM12
S
L
O
T
2
0
DM12
DM12
S
L
O
T
1
9
DM12
Figure 1.2 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the DX1
Fiber routing area
In Figure 11-42, the board in slot 1 protects the boards in slots 25 and 1316.
Table 11-37 lists the slots for the DX1 and DM12.
Figure 1.1 Slots for the DX1 and DM12
Board
Protection Group
DX1 (working board)
Slots 25 and 1316
DX1 (protection board)
Slot 1
DM12
Slots 1926 and 2936

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
742

System
11 PDH Boards

correct.
----End

Load.

----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
743

System
11 PDH Boards
----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the DX1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the DX1 by using the U2000:
J2 byte
Tributary loopback
Protocol mode of serial ports
DDN clock source management

Table 11-38 lists the faults that occur on the DX1 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the DX1 frequently
Fault
Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption

becomes abnormal.
is performed.

the boards are
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
744

System
Fault
Symptom
11 PDH Boards
Common Fault Cause
inconsistent.
Bit error

faulty.
Pointer
justification

is incorrect.

very low.
Protection
switching
failure
The TPS fails.


Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the DX1, see Replacing a PDH Board.

11.8.13.1 Alarms of N1DX1

BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CHIP_ABN
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
CRC4_ERR_OVER
CTS
DCD
DDN_AIS
DDN_ALOS
DDN_CRC4_ERR_OVER
DDN_LFA
DDN_LMFA
DDN_LOOP_ALM
DDN_RFA
DDN_RMFA
DOWN_E1_AIS
DSR
DTR
E1_LOC
FPGA_ABN
LFA
LMFA
LOOP_ALM
LP_R_FIFO
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_RFI
LP_SLM
LP_T_FIFO
LP_TIM
LP_UNEQ
NO_BD_SOFT
PLL_FAIL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
745

System
11 PDH Boards
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_FIFO_E
RFA
RMFA
RTS
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
SUBCARD_ABN
TEMP_OVER
T_FIFO_E
T_LOSEX
TR_LOC
TEST_STATUS
TPS_ALM
UP_E1_AIS
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
V5_VCAIS
PATCH_ERR
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE

11.8.14.1 Performance Events of N1DX1

LPBBE
LPCSES
LPFECSES
LPFEUAS
LPES
LPSES
LPUAS
LPFEBBE
LPFEES
LPFESES
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
CRC4_ERR
DDN_CRC4_ERR

The technical specifications of the DX1 include the parameters specified for electrical

The DM12 provides electrical interfaces for the DX1. For the parameters specified for the
electrical interfaces, see Technical Specifications of the DM12.

The mechanical specifications of the DX1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the DX1 at room temperature (25C) is 15 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
746

System
11 PDH Boards
11.9 DXA
technical specifications of the DXA (DDN service converging and processing board).

The DXA is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.9.2 Application
The DXA is a DDN service processing board. The DXA can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to transmit/receive and converge DDN services. To cross-connect the 63
channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals and framed E1 signals on the system side.
Figure 11-43 shows the application of the DDN service processing boards. The DDN service
processing boards add DDN service signals to line signals and drops line signals to DDN
service signals.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the DDN service processing boards
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The DXA cross-connects 63xE1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.
Table 11-39 provides the functions and features of the DXA.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the DXA
Function and
Feature
DXA
Basic functions
Cross-connects 63 channels of framed E1 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
747

System
11 PDH Boards
Function and
Feature
DXA
Alarms and
performance events

Maintenance
features


The DXA consists of the timeslot cross-connect module, framing/deframing module,
mapping/demapping module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 11-44 shows the functional block diagram of the DXA.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the DXA
Backplane
64 kbit/s
timeslot
crossconnect
module
Framing/
Deframing
module
Signal
mapping/
demapping
module
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Crossconnect unit
SCC unit
Fuse
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V
backup power

The mapping/demapping module demaps the VC-4 signals sent from the SDH cross-connect
unit and sends the demapped signals to the framing/deframing module. Then, the
framing/deframing module converts the signals into the framed E1 signals and sends the
framed E1 signals to the timeslot cross-connect module. Finally, the timeslot cross-connect
module cross-connects and grooms the signals at the 64 kbit/s granularity.

The timeslot cross-connect module cross-connects and grooms the signals at the 64 kbit/s
granularity, and transmits the signals to the framing/deframing module. Then, the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
748

System
11 PDH Boards
framing/deframing module maps the signals into VC-4s and transmits the signals to the SDH
cross-connect unit.

The logic and control module performs the board communication, board control, and service
configuration functions. In addition, the logic and control module traces and selects the clock
signals and frame header signals sent from the active and standby cross-connect boards.

The power module provides all the modules of the DX1 with the required DC voltages.
11.9.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the DXA has indicators.

Figure 11-45 shows the appearance of the front panel of the DXA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
749

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the DXA
DXA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
DXA
The front panel of the DXA does not have an interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
750

System
11 PDH Boards
11.9.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the DXA vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
The slots valid for the DXA are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the DXA can be installed in slots 18 and
1117.

You can set the parameters for the DXA by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the DXA by using the U2000:
J2 byte
Tributary loopback
Protocol mode of serial ports
DDN clock source management

The technical specifications of the DXA include the mechanical specifications and power
consumption.

The mechanical specifications of the DXA are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.8

The maximum power consumption of the DXA at room temperature (25C) is 10 W.
11.10 SPQ4
technical specifications of the SPQ4 (4xE4/STM-1 electrical processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the SPQ4.

The SPQ4 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2. The difference between
the two versions is with regard to their functions. The N1SPQ4 is discontinued.
Table 11-40 describes the versions of the SPQ4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
751

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Versions of the SPQ4

Item
Description
Functional versions
The SPQ4 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and

N2.
Differences
The equipment of the V100R001 and V100R002 versions supports

the N1SPQ4. The equipment of the V100R003 and later versions
supports the N2SPQ2.
Substitution
The N1SPQ4 can be replaced with the N2SPQ4. When the N1SPQ4
is replaced with the N2SPQ4, the NE software needs to be
upgraded.
11.10.2 Application
The SPQ4 is a PDH processing board. The SPQ4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to transmit and receive E4/STM-1 electrical signals. To transmit/receive and process
4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals, the SPQ4 must be used with the interface board.
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The SPQ4 processes 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms
and performance events, provides maintenance features, and supports protection schemes.
Table 11-41 provides the functions and features of the SPQ4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
752

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the SPQ4

Function and
Feature
SPQ4
Basic functions
Processes 4xSTM-1/E4 signals.
Service
processing
Transmits/Receives and processes 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals. The

E4 signals and STM-1 signals are compatible on each channel.
Overhead
processing
Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals, such as B1,

B2, K1, K2, M1, F1, and D1D12.

overhead bytes including J1, B3, C2, G1, and H4.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Alarms and
performance
events

Maintenance
features
affect services.

services.
Does not support the CRC function.
Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board
and the switching and bridging board.
Supports the SNCP.
Protection
schemes

The SPQ4 consists of the interface module, mapping/demapping module, SDH overhead
processing module, interface converting module, logic and control module, and power
module.
Figure 11-47 shows the functional block diagram of the SPQ4. Figure 11-48 shows the
functional block diagram of the mapping/demapping module. Figure 11-49 shows the
functional block diagram of the SDH overhead processing module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
753

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the SPQ4
155 MHz
PLL
34 MHz
OSC
LIU
LIU
4x139 Mbit/s
PPI/SPI
E4/STM-1
4x155 Mbit/s
Interface
module
Mapping/
Demapping 4x155 Mbit/s
module
SDH
overhead
processing
module
4x155 Mbit/s
Logic and
control module
Outloop/Inloop control
High-speed
bus
Interface
converting
module High-speed
bus
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
DCC
K1 and K2
EN 140 Mbit/s/155 Mbit/s

LOS
Backplane
Reference
Cross-connect
clock
unit
+3.3 V
Power
module
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
Frame header
Communication
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
OSC: oscillator
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

139 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
LPA
HPT
PDH AIS E4 AIS

detector insertion
139 Mbit/s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
SIPO
PG
J1/C2/B3
E4 AIS
insertion
LPA
HPT

Copyright Huawei
MST
RST
MST
RST
155 Mbit/s
754

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.3 Functional block diagram of the SDH overhead processing module
K1 and K2 insertion/
extraction
Cross-connect unit
155 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s
RST
MST
MSA
HPT
155 Mbit/s
DCC
SCC unit

The SPI module consists of LIUs and provides the inloop and outloop functions. The SPI
Processes the R_LOS signals.
1.1.1.1.899 SDH Overhead Processing Module (155 Mbit/s SDH Signals)

The SDH overhead processing module performs the functions that are required to manage 155
Mbit/s SDH signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
RST Sub-Module
In the receive direction, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1
and A2), restores the regenerator section trace byte (J0), detects a J0 mismatch, and
counts BIP-8 errored blocks.
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module inserts the frame alignment bytes,
inserts the J0 byte, and performs BIP-8 calculation and byte insertion.
MST Sub-Module
In the receive direction, the MST sub-module counts BIP-24 errored blocks, restores
the MS_REI, and detects the MS_RDI and MS_AIS.
In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module performs BIP-24 calculation and
Copyright Huawei
755

System
11 PDH Boards
insertion and inserts the MS_REI, MS_RDI, and MS_AIS.
The MST sub-module extracts or inserts the K1 byte and K2 byte.
MSA Sub-Module
In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module interprets the AU-4 pointer, detects the
LOP and AIS, and performs pointer justifications.
AU-4 pointer and the AU_AIS.
HPT Sub-Module
Terminates the overheads.
Restores the J1 path trace message.
Restores the REI information.
Detects the HP_RDI (monitors the status of the path).
Detects the UNEQ and AIS (monitors the signal label).
Counts the VC-4 BIP-8 errored blocks.
1.1.1.1.900 Mapping/Demapping Module (140 Mbit/s PDH Signals)

The mapping/demapping module performs the functions that are required to manage 140
Mbit/s PDH signals.
LPA Sub-Module
The 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C4 container to be adapted so that
the stream can be transported to the synchronous network. The PDH AIS is monitored
and the E4 AIS in inserted.
HPT Sub-Module
C4 container and POH. The POH contains nine octets equally distributed within the
frame. The following overhead bytes can be extracted: J1, B3. C2, G1, F2, H4, F3, K3,
and N1. The E4 AIS can be inserted in the downstream direction.
Pointer generator (PG)

A fixed pointer value is inserted into the SOH to structure the AU-4 signal.
MST Sub-Module and RST Sub-Module

interface converting module can be connected. In the receive direction, these submodules detect the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2).

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
756

System
11 PDH Boards
when the GSCC cannot be detected.

require.
11.10.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the SPQ4 has indicators.

Figure 11-50 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SPQ4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
757

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the SPQ4
SPQ4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SPQ4
The front panel of the SPQ4 does not have an interface. Hence, the SPQ4 needs to work with
the MU04 to receive and transmit the E4/STM-1 signals. For details, see the topic that
describes the MU04.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
758

System
11 PDH Boards

The SPQ4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
11.10.7 Valid Slots

The SPQ4 must be used with the MU04. In addition, the SPQ4 must be installed in a valid
slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SPQ4 fails to work normally.
The SPQ4 can be installed in slots 25 and 1316.
Table 11-42 lists the slots valid for the SPQ4 and the corresponding slots for the MU04.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the SPQ4 and the corresponding slots for the MU04
Slot Valid for the SPQ4
Corresponding Slot for the MU04
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35

The SPQ4 does not have a feature code.

The SPQ4 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

The SPQ4 can be configured into two 1:N (N3) TPS protection groups when the SPQ4
works with the MU04 and TSB8/TSB4.
Figure 11-51 shows the TPS protection provided by the SPQ4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
759

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 TPS protection provided by the SPQ4

Service signal
Service signal
Switching
control bus
Crossconnect and
timing board
Interface board N
Working board N
Working board
Working board 1
Protection board
Interface board
Interface board 1
Protection
switching board
Failed
Normal state
the working board through position 1 of the control switch on the interface board.
Switching state

Figure 11-52 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
760

System
11 PDH Boards
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
Working 1
Working 1
XCS
XCS
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
GSCC
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
S
L
O
T
3
6
FAN
Working 2
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
AUX
S
L
O
T
3
2
TSB8/TSB4
S
L
O
T
3
1
Working 2
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
1 2 3
Working 1
S
L
O
T
3
0
FAN
Protection 1
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
Protection 2
S
L
O
T
2
8
Working 2
S
L
O
T
2
7
MU04
S
L
O
T
2
6
MU04
S
L
O
T
2
5
MU04
S
L
O
T
2
4
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
3
MU04
S
L
O
T
2
2
MU04
S
L
O
T
2
1
MU04
S
L
O
T
2
0
TSB8/TSB4
S
L
O
T
1
9
PIU
Figure 1.2 Slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the SPQ4
Fiber routing area
Table 11-43 lists the slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8/TSB4.
Figure 1.1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8/TSB4
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
SPQ4 (working
board)
Slots 3-5
Slots 13-15
SPQ4 (protection
board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
MU04
TSB8/TSB4
Slot 19
Slot 35
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
761

System
11 PDH Boards


correct.
----End

Load.

----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
762

System
11 PDH Boards

----End

Boards.
----End

You can set the parameters for the SPQ4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SPQ4 by using the U2000:
J1 byte
C2 byte

Table 11-44 lists the faults that occur on the SPQ4 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the SPQ4 frequently
Fault
Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption

becomes abnormal.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
763

System
Fault
Symptom
11 PDH Boards
Common Fault Cause
is performed.

the boards are
inconsistent.
Bit error

faulty.
Pointer
justification

is incorrect.

very low.
Protection
switching
failure
The TPS fails.


Faults.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the SPQ4, see Replacing a PDH Board.

11.10.13.1 Alarms of N1SPQ4

AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BIP8_ECC
C4_R_LAISD
C4_T_LAISD
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
EXT_LOS
FPGA_ABN
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
J0_MM
LOOP_ALM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
764

System
11 PDH Boards
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
OH_LOOP
PLL_FAIL
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
R_LOF
R_LOS
R_OOF
RELAY_FAIL
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
SUBCARD_ABN
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
W_R_FAIL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BIP8_ECC
C4_R_LAISD
C4_T_LAISD
CHIP_FAIL
COMMUN_FAIL
EXT_LOS
FPGA_ABN
FSELECT_STG
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
J0_MM
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
OH_LOOP
PLL_FAIL
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
11.10.13.2 Alarms of N2SPQ4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
765

System
11 PDH Boards
R_LOF
R_LOS
R_OOF
RELAY_FAIL
SLAVE_WORKING
SPARE_PATH_ALM
SUBCARD_ABN
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
W_R_FAIL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PS
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE

11.10.14.1 Performance Events of N1SPQ4

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
RSSES
RSUAS
11.10.14.2 Performance Events of N2SPQ4

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
766

System
11 PDH Boards
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSFEUAS
MSSES
MSUAS
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSOFS
RSSES
RSUAS

The technical specifications of the SPQ4 include the parameters specified for electrical

The MU04 provides electrical interfaces for the SPQ4. For the parameters specified for the
electrical interfaces, see Technical Specifications of the MU04.

The mechanical specifications of the SPQ4 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.9

The maximum power consumption of the SPQ4 at room temperature (25C) is 24 W.
11.11 D12B
technical specifications of the D12B (32xE1/T1 access board).

The D12B is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.11.2 Application
The D12B is a PDH interface board. The D12B can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to transmit and receive signals for the PDH processing board. To transmit/receive and
process signals, the interface board must be used with its corresponding processing board.

The D12B receives and transmits 32xE1/T1 electrical signals. The D12B must work with the
PQ1, or PQM.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
767

System
11 PDH Boards

The D12B has the interface module.
Figure 11-53 shows the functional block diagram of the D12B by describing how to process
1xE1/T1 signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the D12B
Backplane
PQ1/PQM/PO1
E1/T1 electrical signal

Interface
module
E1/T1 electrical signal
PQ1/PQM/PO1

The interface module receives and transmits the E1/T1 electrical signals.
11.11.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the D12B has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 11-54 shows the appearance of the front panel of the D12B.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
768

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the D12B
D12B
1~8
9~16
17~24
25~32
D12B
The front panel of the D12B has four DB44 interfaces. Table 11-45 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the D12B.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the D12B
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
18
DB44
Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of E1/T1

signals.
916
DB44
Receives the 9th to the 16th channels of E1/T1

signals.
1724
DB44
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
769

System
Interface
11 PDH Boards
Type of
Interface
Usage
signals.
2532
DB44
Receives the 25th to the 32nd channels of E1/T1

signals.
Table 11-46 provides the pin assignments of the DB44 interface.

Figure 1.2 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface
Front View
30
15
44
Pin
Usage
Pin
Usage
38
Receives the 1st

channel of
signals (R1).
34
Receives the 5th

channel of signals
(R5).
Receives the 2nd

channel of
signals (R2).
33
Receives the 3rd

channel of
signals (R3).
32
Receives the 4th

channel of
signals (R4).
31
Transmits the 1st

channel of
signals (T1).
11
Transmits the
2nd channel of
signals (T2).
10
Transmits the 3rd

channel of
signals (T3).
Transmits the 4th

channel of
signals (T4).
23
37
22
36
21
35
31
16
20
15
30
14
29
13
28
12
27
19
18
17
16
26
25
24
Receives the 6th

channel of signals
(R6).
Receives the 7th
channel of signals
(R7).
Receives the 8th
channel of signals
(R8).
Transmits the 5th
channel of signals
(T5).
Transmits the 6th
channel of signals
(T6).
Transmits the 7th
channel of signals
(T7).
Transmits the 8th
channel of signals
(T8).
11.11.6 Valid Slots

The D12B can work as the interface board of the PQ1, or PQM.
The D12B can be installed in slots 1926 and 2936 in the main subrack.
Table 11-47 lists the slots valid for the PQ1/PQM and the corresponding slots for the D12B.
The D12B installed in the slot with a smaller number transmits/receives the 1st to the 32nd
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
770

System
11 PDH Boards
channels of E1/T1 electrical signals. The D12B installed in the slot with a larger number
transmits/receives the 33rd to the 63rd channels of E1/T1 electrical signals.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the PQ1/PQM and the corresponding slots for the D12B
Slot Valid for the PQ1/PQM
Corresponding Slot for the D12B
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36

The technical specifications of the D12B include the parameters specified for the electrical
interfaces, mechanical specifications and power consumption.

Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the D12B
Nominal bit rate
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Line code pattern
B8ZS and AMI
HDB3

interface

interface
input interface
Allowed frequency deviation at
the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.824.
Complies with ITU-T

G.823.
the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.703.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
771

System
11 PDH Boards
Nominal bit rate
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Output jitter
Mapping jitter
Combined jitter
Impedance (ohm)
75/120 (E1), 100 (T1)
Complies with ITU-T

G.742.

The mechanical specifications of the D12B are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.3

The maximum power consumption of the D12B at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
11.12 D12S

The D12S is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.12.2 Application
The D12S is a PDH interface switching board. The D12S can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to transmit and receive signals for the PDH processing board. In addition,
when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS protection, the
interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.

The D12S receives and transmits 32xE1/T1 electrical signals. The D12S must work with the
PQ1, or PQM.

The D12S consists of the interface module, switch matrix module, and power access circuit.
Figure 11-55 shows the functional block diagram of the D12S by describing how to process
1xE1/T1 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
772

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the D12S

Backplane
Cross-connect board
E1/T1 electrical
signal
Interface
module
Switch
matrix
module
E1/T1 electrical
signal
PQ1/PQM/PO1
PQ1/PQM/PO1
+3.3 V
Fuse
+3.3 V power


module transmits the signal to the PQ1 or PQM. When the TPS is performed, the switch
matrix module transmits the signal to the protection board for bridging.
1.1.1.1.926 Power Access Circuit

The power access circuit provides all the modules of the D12S with the required DC voltages.
11.12.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the D12S has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 11-56 shows the appearance of the front panel of the D12S.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
773

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the D12S
D12S
1~8
9~16
17~24
25~32
D12S
The front panel of the D12S has four DB44 interfaces. Table 11-49 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the D12S.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the D12S
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
18
DB44

signals.
916
DB44

signals.
1724
DB44
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
774

System
Interface
11 PDH Boards
Type of
Interface
Usage
signals.
2532
DB44
Receives the 25th to the 32nd channels of E1/T1

signals.

Front View
30
15
44
Pin
Usage
Pin
Usage
38
Receives the 1st

channel of signals
(R1).
34
Receives the 5th

channel of signals
(R5).
Receives the 2nd

channel of signals
(R2).
33
Receives the 3rd

channel of signals
(R3).
32
Receives the 4th

channel of signals
(R4).
31
Transmits the 1st

channel of signals
(T1).
11
Transmits the 2nd

channel of signals
(T2).
10
Transmits the 3rd

channel of signals
(T3).
Transmits the 4th

channel of signals
(T4).
23
37
22
36
21
35
31
16
20
15
30
14
29
13
28
12
27
19
18
17
16
26
25
24
Receives the 6th

channel of signals
(R6).
Receives the 7th
channel of signals
(R7).
Receives the 8th
channel of signals
(R8).
Transmits the 5th
channel of signals
(T5).
Transmits the 6th
channel of signals
(T6).
Transmits the 7th
channel of signals
(T7).
Transmits the 8th
channel of signals
(T8).
11.12.6 Valid Slots

The D12S can be installed in slots 1926 and 2936 in the main subrack. The D12S works as
the interface board of the PQ1, or PQM.
Table 11-51 lists the slots valid for the PQ1/PQM and the corresponding slots for the D12S.
The D12S installed in the slot with a smaller number transmits/receives the 1st to the 32nd
channels of E1/T1 electrical signals. The D12S installed in the slot with a larger number
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
775

System
11 PDH Boards
transmits/receives the 33rd to the 63rd channels of E1/T1 electrical signals.

Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the PQ1/PQM and the corresponding slots for the D12S
Slot Valid for the PQ1/PQM
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36

The technical specifications of the D12S include the parameters specified for the electrical

Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the D12S
Nominal bit rate
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Line code pattern
B8ZS and AMI
HDB3

interface

interface
input interface
the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.824.
Complies with ITU-T

G.823.
the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.703.

Output jitter
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
776

System
11 PDH Boards
Nominal bit rate
1544 kbit/s
Mapping jitter
2048 kbit/s
Combined jitter
Impedance (ohm)
120 (E1), 100 (T1)
Complies with ITU-T

G.742.

The mechanical specifications of the D12S are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the D12S is 0 W.
11.13 D75S
technical specifications of the D75S (32xE1 switching access board).

11.13.2 Application

The D75S receives and transmits 32xE1 electrical signals. The D75S must work with the
PQ1.

1xE1 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
777

System
11 PDH Boards

Backplane
Cross-connect board
E1 electrical signal
Interface
module
Switch
matrix
module
PQ1/PD1
PQ1/PD1
+3.3 V
Fuse
+3.3 V power
Backplane
Cross-connect board
Interface
module
Switch
matrix
module
PQ1
PQ1
+3.3 V
Fuse
+3.3 V power

The interface module receives and transmits the E1 electrical signals.

module transmits the signal to the PQ1. When the TPS is performed, the switch matrix
module transmits the signal to the protection board for bridging.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
778

System
11 PDH Boards
11.13.5 Front Panel


D75S
1~8
9~16
17~24
25~32
D75S
The front panel of the D75S has four DB44 interfaces. Table 11-53 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the D75S.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
779

System
11 PDH Boards

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
18
DB44
Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of E1 signals.
916
DB44
Receives the 9th to the 16th channels of E1 signals.
1724
DB44
Receives the 17th to the 24th channels of E1

signals.
2532
DB44
Receives the 25th to the 32nd channels of E1

signals.

Front View
30
15
44
Pin
Usage
Pin
Usage
38
Receives the 1st

channel of
signals (R1).
34
Receives the 5th

channel of signals
(R5).
Receives the 2nd

channel of
signals (R2).
33
Receives the 3rd

channel of
signals (R3).
32
Receives the 4th

channel of
signals (R4).
31
Transmits the 1st

channel of
signals (T1).
11
Transmits the
2nd channel of
signals (T2).
10
Transmits the 3rd

channel of
signals (T3).
Transmits the 4th

channel of
signals (T4).
23
37
22
36
21
35
31
16
20
15
30
14
29
13
28
12
27
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
19
18
17
16
26
25
24
Receives the 6th

channel of signals
(R6).
Receives the 7th
channel of signals
(R7).
Receives the 8th
channel of signals
(R8).
Transmits the 5th
channel of signals
(T5).
Transmits the 6th
channel of signals
(T6).
Transmits the 7th
channel of signals
(T7).
Transmits the 8th
channel of signals
(T8).
780

System
11 PDH Boards
11.13.6 Valid Slots

The D75S can work as the interface board of the PQ1.
The D75S can be installed in slots 1926 and 2936 in the main subrack.
Table 11-55 lists the slots valid for the PQ1 and the corresponding slots for the D75S. The
D75S installed in the slot with a smaller number transmits/receives the 1st to the 32nd
channels of E1 electrical signals. The D75S installed in the slot with a larger number
transmits/receives the 33rd to the 63rd channels of E1 electrical signals.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the PQ1 and the corresponding slots for the D75S
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36

The technical specifications of the D75S include the parameters specified for the electrical

Nominal bit rate
2048 kbit/s
Line code pattern
HDB3
Waveform at the output interface

Allowed attenuation at the input interface
Allowed frequency deviation at the input
interface

Anti-interference capability at the input
interface
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
781

System
Nominal bit rate
11 PDH Boards
2048 kbit/s
Reflection attenuation at the input/output

interface
Output jitter
Mapping jitter
Combined jitter
Impedance (ohm)
75

Weight (kg): 0.4

11.14 D34S

11.14.2 Application

The D34S receives and transmits 6xE3/T3 electrical signals. The D34S must work with the
PD3 or PQ3.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
782

System
11 PDH Boards
1xE3/T3 signals.
Backplane
Cross-connect board
E3/T3 electrical
signal
Interface
module
Switch
matrix
module
+3.3 V
Fuse
E3/T3 electrical
signal
PD3/PQ3
TSB8
TSB8
PD3/PQ3
+3.3 V power


module transmits the signal to the PD3 or PQ3. When the TPS is performed, the switch matrix
module transmits the signal to the TSB8 for bridging.

11.14.5 Front Panel


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
783

System
11 PDH Boards
D34S
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
OUT5
IN5
OUT6
IN6
D34S
The front panel of the D34S has six pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 11-57 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the D34S.
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1IN6
SMB

electrical signals.
OUT1OUT6
SMB
Transmits the 1st to the 6th channels of E3/T3

electrical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
784

System
11 PDH Boards
11.14.6 Valid Slots

The D34S can be installed in slots 1926 and 2936 in the subrack.

The technical specifications of the D34S include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 11-58 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the D34S.
Nominal bit rate
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
Line code pattern
HDB3
B3ZS

interface
interface
input interface
the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.823.
Complies with ITU-T

G.824.
the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.703.

Output jitter
Mapping jitter
Combined jitter
Complies with ITU-T

G.751.
Impedance (ohm)
75

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
785

System
11 PDH Boards
Weight (kg): 0.4

11.15 C34S
technical specifications of the C34S (3xE3/T3 switching access board).

The C34S is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.15.2 Application
The C34S is a PDH interface switching board. The C34S can be used on the OptiX OSN

The C34S receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 electrical signals. The C34S must work with the
PL3.

The C34S consists of the interface module, switch matrix module, and power access circuit.
Figure 11-61 shows the functional block diagram of the C34S by describing how to process
1xE3/T3 signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the C34S
Backplane
Cross-connect board
E3/T3 electrical
signal
Interface
module
Switch
matrix
module
E3/T3 electrical
signal
+3.3 V
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Fuse

Copyright Huawei
PL3
TSB4/TSB8
TSB4/TSB8
PL3
+3.3 V power
786

System
11 PDH Boards


module transmits the signal to the PL3. When the TPS is performed, the switch matrix module
transmits the signal to the TSB4 or TSB8 for bridging.

The power access circuit provides all the modules of the C34S with the required DC voltages.
11.15.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the C34S has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 11-62 shows the appearance of the front panel of the C34S.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
787

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the C34S
C34S
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
C34S
The front panel of the C34S has three pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 11-59 describes the type and usage of the interface of the C34S.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the C34S
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN3
SMB
Receives the 1st to the 3rd channels of E3/T3

electrical signals.
OUT1OUT3
SMB
Transmits the 1st to the 3rd channels of E3/T3

electrical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
788

System
11 PDH Boards
11.15.6 Valid Slots

The C34S can be installed in slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 in the main subrack.
Table 11-60 lists the slots valid for the PL3 and the corresponding slots for the C34S.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the PL3 and the corresponding slots for the C34S
Corresponding Slot for the C34S
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35

The technical specifications of the C34S include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 11-61 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the C34S.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the C34S
Nominal bit rate
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
Line code pattern
HDB3
B3ZS

interface

interface
input interface
the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.823.
Complies with ITU-T

G.824.
Complies with ITU-T
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
789

System
11 PDH Boards
Nominal bit rate
34368 kbit/s
the input interface
G.703.
44736 kbit/s

Output jitter
Mapping jitter
Combined jitter
Complies with ITU-T

G.751.
Impedance (ohm)
75

The mechanical specifications of the C34S are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.3

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the C34S is 0 W.
11.16 MU04
technical specifications of the MU04 (4xE4/STM-1 electrical interface board).

The MU04 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.16.2 Application
The MU04 is an E4/STM-1 electrical interface board. The MU04 can be used on the OptiX
OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals for the E4/STM-1 electrical processing
board.

The MU04 receives and transmits 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals. The MU04 must work with
the SPQ4.

The MU04 consists of the interface module, switch matrix module, and power module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
790

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 11-63 shows the functional block diagram of the MU04 by describing how to process
1xE4/STM-1 signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the MU04
Backplane
Cross-connect board
E4/STM-1 electrical
signal
Interface
module
E4/STM-1 electrical
signal
+3.3 V
Switch
matrix
module
Power
module
Fuse
SPQ4
TSB4/TSB8
TSB4/TSB8
SPQ4
+3.3 V power

The interface module receives and transmits the E4/STM-1 electrical signals.

module transmits the signal to the SPQ4. When the TPS is performed, the switch matrix
module transmits the signal to the TSB4 or TSB8 for bridging.

The power module provides all the modules of the MU04 with the required DC voltages.
11.16.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the MU04 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 11-64 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MU04.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
791

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the MU04
MUO4
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
MUO4
The front panel of the MU04 has four pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 11-62 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the MU04.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the MU04
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1IN4
SMB
Receives the 1st to the 4th channels of E4/STM-1

electrical signals.
OUT1OUT4
SMB
Transmits the 1st to the 4th channels of E4/STM-1

electrical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
792

System
11 PDH Boards
11.16.6 Valid Slots

The MU04 can be installed in slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 in the subrack and works
as the interface board of the SPQ4.
Table 11-63 lists the slots valid for the SPQ4 and the corresponding slots for the MU04.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the SPQ4 and the corresponding slots for the MU04
Corresponding Slot for the MU04
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35

The technical specifications of the MU04 include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 11-64 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the MU04.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the MU04
Nominal bit rate
139264 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
CMI
CMI

interface

interface
input interface
Allowed frequency deviation
at the input interface
Complies with ITU-T

G.823.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Complies with ITU-T

G.825.
793

System
11 PDH Boards
Nominal bit rate
139264 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
the input interface

Output jitter
Mapping jitter
Complies with ITU-T

G.783.
Complies with ITU-T

G.751.
Impedance (ohm)
75
Combined jitter

The mechanical specifications of the MU04 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the MU04 at room temperature (25C) is 2 W.
11.17 DM12
technical specifications of the DM12 (DDN service interface board).

The DM12 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.17.2 Application
The DM12 is a DDN service interface board. The DM12 can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to transmit and receive electrical signals of the DDN service.

The DM12 receives and transmits four channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals and eight channels of
framed E1 electrical signals. The DM12 must work with the DX1.

The DM12 consists of the interface module, switch matrix module, and power module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
794

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 11-65 shows the functional block diagram of the DM12 by describing how to process
one channel of Nx64 kbit/s or framed E1 electrical signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the DM12
Backplane
Cross-connect board
Nx64 kbit/s/
Framed E1
electrical signal
Switch
matrix
module
Interface
module
Nx64 kbit/s/
Framed E1
electrical signal
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
DX1
DX1
+3.3 V backup power

The interface module receives and transmits the Nx64 kbit/s or framed E1 electrical signals.

module transmits the signal to the DX1. When the TPS is performed, the switch matrix
module transmits the signal to the protection DX1 for bridging.

The power module provides all the modules of the DM12 with the required DC voltages.
11.17.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the DM12 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 11-66 shows the appearance of the front panel of the DM12.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
795

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the DM12
DM12
E1(1-8)
DDN1
DDN2
DDN3
DDN4
DM12
The front panel of the DM12 has DB44 and DB28 interfaces. Table 11-65 describes the types
and usage of the interfaces of the DM12.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the DM12
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
E1 (18)
DB44
Transmits/Receives eight channels of framed E1

signals.
DDN1DDN4
DB28
Transmits/Receives the 1st to the 4th channels of

Nx64 kbit/s signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
796

System
11 PDH Boards

Front View
Pin
30
44
30
15
29
14
28
13
27
31
16
12
26
11
25
10
24
9
38
23
37
22
Usage
Pin
Usage
Transmits the
1st channel of
signals (T1).
Transmits the 8th

channel of signals
(T8).
Transmits the
2nd channel of
signals (T2).
36
Transmits the
3rd channel of
signals (T3).
35
Transmits the
4th channel of
signals
(T4).
1
34
Transmits the
5th channel of
signals (T5).
33
Transmits the
6th channel of
signals (T6).
32
Transmits the
7th channel of
signals (T7).
31
Receives the
1st channel of
signals (R1).
4439 and
61
15
Receives the 3rd

channel of signals
(R3).
21
Receives the 4th

channel of signals
(R4).
20
Receives the 5th

channel of signals
(R5).
19
Receives the 6th

channel of signals
(R6).
18
Receives the 7th

channel of signals
(R7).
17
Receives the 8th

channel of signals
(R8).
16
Grounding
Receives the
2nd channel of
signals (R2).

Front View
Pin
Usage
Pin
Usage
Transmits data
signals.
19
Receives data
signals.
Transmits
clock signals.
21
Grounding
22
Receives the
loopback control
2
3
4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
20
797

System
Front View
11 PDH Boards
Pin
Usage
Pin
Usage
signal.
28
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Detects the
carrier.
23
Requests for
transmission.
25
Receives the
clock to be
used in the
transmit
1
direction
from
the external
equipment.
27
Receives clock
signals.
24
26
28
Permits the
transmission.
Receives the DCE
ready signal.
Transmits the DTE
ready signal.
11.17.6 Valid Slots

The DM12 can be installed in slots 1926 and 2936 in the subrack and works as the interface
board of the DX1.
Table 11-68 lists the slots valid for the DX1 and the corresponding slots for the DM12. The
DM12 installed in the slot with a smaller number transmits/receives eight channels of framed
E1 signals and four channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals. The DM12 installed in the slot with a
larger number transmits/receives only four channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals.
Figure 1.4 Slots valid for the DX1 and the corresponding slots for the DM12
Slot Valid for the DX1
Corresponding Slot for the DM12
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
798

System
11 PDH Boards

The technical specifications of the DM12 include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 11-69 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the DM12.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the DM12
Interface Type
Description of the Interface
Specification of the Interface
Framed E1
interface (DB44)
Framed E1 signals
The physical and electrical

characteristics of the interface
comply with ITU-T G.703. The
frame structure of the interface
complies with ITU-T G.704.
NX64 kbit/s
interface (DB28)
V.35 interface
Complies with ITU-T V.35.
V.24 interface
Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface
Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449 interface
Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS423A and RS-422A).
RS-530 interface
Complies with EIA RS-530.
RS-530A interface
Complies with EIA RS-530A.

The mechanical specifications of the DM12 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the DM12 is 0 W.
11.18 TSB4
board).

The TSB4 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
799

System
11 PDH Boards
11.18.2 Application
The TSB4 is a PDH electrical interface protection switching board. The TSB4 can be used on
the OptiX OSN equipment series to realize the TPS protection on the PDH board.

The TSB4 is used to provide the TPS protection.
The TSB4 can work with the MU04, C34S, or EU04 to realize the TPS protection on different
processing boards.
The TSB4 can work with the MU04 to realize the TPS protection on the SPQ4.
The TSB4 can work with the C34S to realize the TPS protection on the PL3.
The TSB4 can work with the EU04 to realize the TPS protection on the SEP.

The TSB4 consists of the switch matrix module and power module.
Figure 11-67 shows the functional block diagram of the TSB4.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the TSB4
Backplane
Backplane
Cross-connect board
Interface board 1
Interface board 2
Standby processing board
Interface board 3
Switch matrix
module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

In the receive direction, the switch matrix module selects signals from one of the three
interface boards according to the TPS protection control signal sent from the cross-connect
board, and transmits the signals to the standby processing board.

The power module provides all the modules of the TSB4 with the required DC voltages.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
800

System
11 PDH Boards
11.18.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the TSB4 has a bar code.

Figure 11-68 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TSB4.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the TSB4
TSB4
TSB4
11.18.6 Valid Slots

When the TSB4 works with different processing boards and interface boards to realize the
TPS protection, the TSB4 can be installed in different slots.
The TSB4 can be installed in slots 19 and 35 in the main subrack.
Table 11-70 lists the slots valid for the TSB4 and the corresponding slots for the SPQ4 and
MU04.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
801

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the TSB4 and the corresponding slots for the SPQ4 and MU04
Slot Valid for the TSB4

MU04
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 35
Table 11-71 lists the slots valid for the TSB4 and the corresponding slots for the SEP1 and
EU04.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the TSB4 and the corresponding slots for the SEP1 and EU04

EU04
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 6
Slot 29
Slot 13
Slot 31
Slot 14
Slot 33
Slot 35
The SEP1 is displayed as SEP or SEP1 on the U2000. When the interfaces are available on the front
panel of the SEP1, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 on the U2000. When the SEP1 works with the
interface board to realize the TPS protection, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP on the U2000.
Table 11-72 lists the slots valid for the TSB4 and the corresponding slots for the PL3 and
C34S.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the TSB4 and the corresponding slots for the PL3 and C34S

C34S
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 35
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
802

System
11 PDH Boards

C34S
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33

The technical specifications of the TSB4 include the mechanical specifications and power
consumption.

The mechanical specifications of the TSB4 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.3

The maximum power consumption of the TSB4 at room temperature (25C) is 3 W.
11.19 TSB8
board).

The TSB8 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
11.19.2 Application
The TSB8 is a PDH electrical interface protection switching board. The TSB8 can be used on
the OptiX OSN equipment series to realize the TPS protection on the PDH board.

The TSB8 is used to provide the TPS protection.
The TSB8 can work with the C34S, EU04, EU08, ETS8, MU04 and D34S to realize the TPS
protection on different processing boards.
The TSB8 can work with the MU04 to realize the TPS protection on the SPQ4.
The TSB8 can work with the C34S to realize the TPS protection on the PL3.
The TSB8 can work with the D34S to realize the TPS protection on the PD3.
The TSB8 can work with the D34S to realize the TPS protection on the PQ3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
803

System
11 PDH Boards
The TSB8 can work with the EU04 to realize the TPS protection on the SEP1.
The TSB8 can work with the EU08 to realize the TPS protection on the SLH1/SEP1.
The TSB8 can work with the ETS8 to realize the TPS protection on the EFS0.
The TSB8 can work with the ETS8 to realize the TPS protection on the EFS0A.

The TSB8 consists of the switch matrix module and power module.
Figure 11-69 shows the functional block diagram of the TSB8 by describing how to process
one channel of signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the TSB8
Backplane
Backplane
Cross-connect board
Interface board 1
Interface board 2
Standby processing board
Interface board 3
Switch matrix
module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

In the receive direction, the switch matrix module selects signals from one of the three
interface boards according to the TPS protection control signal sent from the cross-connect
board, and transmits the signals to the standby processing board.

The power module provides all the modules of the TSB8 with the required DC voltages.
11.19.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the TSB8 has a bar code.

Figure 11-70 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TSB8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
804

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the TSB8
TSB8
TSB8
11.19.6 Valid Slots

The TSB8 can be installed in slots 19, 20, 35, and 36 in the main subrack.
Table 11-73 lists the slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the SPQ4 and
MU04.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the SPQ4 and MU04

MU04
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
805

System
11 PDH Boards

MU04
Slot 35
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Table 11-74 lists the slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the PL3 and
C34S.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the PL3 and C34S

C34S
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 35
Table 11-75 lists the slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the PD3 and
D34S.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the PD3 and D34S
Slot Valid for the PD3

D34S
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 35
Table 11-76 lists the slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the PQ3 and
D34S.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
806

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.4 Slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the PQ3 and D34S

D34S
Slots 19 and 20
Slots 25
Slots 2126
Slots 35 and 36
Slots 1316
Slots 2934
EU04.

EU04
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 35
EU08.

EU08
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 6
Slot 29
Slot 13
Slot 31
Slot 14
Slot 33
Slot 35
Table 11-79 lists the slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the SLH1 and
EU08.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
807

System
11 PDH Boards
Figure 1.7 Slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the SLH1 and EU08

EU08
Slot 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slot 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slot 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slot 25 and 26
Slot 6
Slot 29 and 30
Slot 13
Slot 31 and 32
Slot 14
Slot 33 and 34
Slot 35 and 36
The SEP1 is displayed as SEP or SEP1 on the U2000. When the interfaces are available on the front
panel of the SEP1, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 on the U2000. When the SEP1 works with the
interface board to realize the TPS protection, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP on the U2000.
Table 11-80 lists the slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the EFS0 and
ETS8.
Figure 1.8 Slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the EFS0 and ETS8
Slot Valid for the EFS0

ETS8
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 6
Slot 29
Slot 13
Slot 31
Slot 14
Slot 33
Slot 35
Table 11-81 lists the slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the EFS0A and
ETS8.
Figure 1.9 Slots valid for the TSB8 and the corresponding slots for the EFS0A and ETS8
Slot Valid for the EFS0A

ETS8
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 6
Slot 29
Slot 35
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
808

System
11 PDH Boards

ETS8
Slot 13
Slot 31
Slot 14
Slot 33

The technical specifications of the TSB8 include the mechanical specifications and power
consumption.

The mechanical specifications of the TSB8 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.3

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the TSB8 is 0 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
809

System
12 EoS Boards
12
EoS Boards
About This Chapter

The EoS boards include the interface boards and processing boards for FE and GE services.
12.1 EFT8
technical specifications of the EFT8 (8xFE/16xFE transparent transmission board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the EFT8.
12.2 EFT8A
technical specifications of the EFT8A (8xFE transparent transmission board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the EFT8A.
12.3 EGT2
technical specifications of the EGT2 (2xGE transparent transmission board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the EGT2.
12.4 EFS0
technical specifications of the EFS0 (8xFE switching and processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the EFS0.
12.5 EFS0A
technical specifications of the EFS0A (16xFE switching and processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the EFS0A.
12.6 EFS4
12.7 EGS2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
810

System
12 EoS Boards
technical specifications of the EGS2 (2xGE switching and processing board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the EGS2.
12.8 EMS2
technical specifications of the EMS2 (2xGE and 16xFE switching and processing board). This
topic also describes how to configure and commission the EMS2.
12.9 EMS4
12.10 EGS4
12.11 EAS2
technical specifications of the EAS2 (2-port 10xGE switching and processing board). This
topic also describes how to configure and commission the EAS2.
12.12 EFF8
technical specifications of the EFF8 (8x100M Ethernet optical interface board).
12.13 EFF8A
technical specifications of the EFF8A (8x100M Ethernet optical interface board).
12.14 ETF8
technical specifications of the ETF8 (8x100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board).
12.15 ETF8A
technical specifications of the ETF8A (8x100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board).
12.16 ETS8
technical specifications of the ETS8 (8x10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface switching
board).
12.1 EFT8
technical specifications of the EFT8 (8xFE/16xFE transparent transmission board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the EFT8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
811

System
12 EoS Boards

The EFT8 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N2.
Table 12-1 describes the versions of the EFT8.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the EFT8
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The EFT8 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N2.
Differences
Regarding service specifications: frame length
Regarding protection schemes: LPT
Regarding maintenance features: ETH OAM
Regarding other points:
Substitution
The N2EFT8 supports the alarm

indicating that the traffic crosses the
associated threshold.
The N2EFT8 supports the command for

loading MAC addresses in a unified
manner.
The N2EFT8 can substitute for the N1EFT8.
12.1.2 Application
The EFT8 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge
Ethernet services.
Figure 12-1 shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet transparent
transmission board. The Ethernet transparent transmission board realizes point-to-point
transparent transmission of Ethernet services. The Ethernet transparent transmission board
provides the following functions by using the interfaces on the board: data receipt, data
transmission, data mapping, and traffic control. In addition, the Ethernet transparent
transmission board performs port-based point-to-point transparent transmission,
encapsulation/decapsulation, overhead bytes and pointers processing, virtual concatenation,
SDH mapping/demapping, and LCAS function.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
812

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the Ethernet transparent transmission board
NMS
User A2
NE1
PORT 1
NE2
MSP ring
PORT 2
NE4
NE3
User B2
Service flow
Line board
PORT 1
PORT 2
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User B1
User A1

EFT8 boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and
test frames.
Table 12-2 lists the functions and features supported by EFT8 boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by EFT8 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Transparently transmits 8xFE or 16xFE services.
Port
types
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals. The electrical ports comply with

IEEE 802.3u.
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8

board. The electrical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Supports 100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX signals when working with an EFF8

board. The optical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Provides 16 electrical ports to receive/transmit Ethernet signals when working
Functi
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
813

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Port
charac
teristic
s
12 EoS Boards
Description
with an ETF8 board.
Provides 8 optical ports and 8 electrical ports to receive/transmit Ethernet

signals when working with an EFF8 board.
Working
modes
100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, auto-negotiation
Traffic
control at
ports
Auto-negotiation mode
Not supported
Non-autonegotiation mode
Supported
Query/Se
tting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of optical
power
threshold
s
Not supported
Pluggabl
e optical
module
Not supported
Servic
e
catego
ries
EPL
service
Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1q TAG
Supported
Frame
length
range
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N1EFT8 boards support the setting of the packet length, which

ranges from 1518 bytes to 1535 bytes. Ports 1-4 and 9-12 on the
board support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 6144
bytes, whereas ports 5-8 and 13-16 support a jumbo frame with a

Copyright Huawei
814

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N2EFT8 boards support the setting of the packet length, which

ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
N2EFT8 boards support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of

9600 bytes.
Bound
bandwidt
h
24xVC-3, or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X 63), and VC-3-Xv (X 3)

granularities.
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC
Supported
LAPS
Supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy
Supports VLAN transparent transmission.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. An EFT8 board can

adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 16

Configuration principles are as follows:
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a

maximum of 63 VC-12s.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at

one time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-12 and VC3 paths at the same time.
Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels.
VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 8 can be bound with VC-3s 1-12 or

VC-12s 1-63.
VCTRUNK 9-VCTRUNK 16 can be bound with VC-3s 13-24 or

VC-12s 64-126.
A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 1-63 and

VC-3s numbered 10-12 at the same time. In addition, a

Copyright Huawei
815

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 64-126 and

VC-3s numbered 22-24 at the same time.
Protec
tion
schem
es
VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12

paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
In the case of the configuration of cross-connection, VC-12s

numbered 163 should be configured into the fourth VC-4, and
VC-12s numbered 64126 should be configured into the eighth
VC-4.
TPS
Not supported
LCAS

LPT
Supports P2P LPT, which comply with ITU-T G.7042.
LAG
Not supported
Clock
synchr
onizati
on
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
ETH
OAM
N1EFT8 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
N2EFT8 boards support OAM auto-discovery, link performance

detection, fault detection, remote loopback and selfloop test. These
Test
Frame
Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Not supported
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
PHY layer at Ethernet ports
Supports inloops.
MAC layer at Ethernet ports
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMON
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N2EFT8 boards support CC, LB, LT. These functions comply with
IEEE 802.1ag.
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.

Copyright Huawei
816

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
Warm
resets
Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

QoS
Not supported
Traffic
contro
l
Supports the FE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE
802.3x.

The EFT8 consists of the Ethernet access module, mapping module, interface converting
module, logic and control module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 12-2 shows the functional block diagram of the EFT8 by describing how to process
1xFE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
817

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EFT8

Backplane
FE
Cross-connect unit
ENCP
Ethernet
access
module
Interface
converting
module
VCP
DENCP
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
Laser
shutdown
LOS
Logic and
control module
Communication
+3.3 V
Clock module
50 77 125 155
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Power
module
ENCP: data encapsulation module
Power
module
SCC unit
SCC unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power
Fuse
DENCP: decapsulation module
VCP: virtual concatenation processing module
1.1.1.1.982 Ethernet Access Module

In the receive direction, the optical signals from Ethernet equipment such as switches or
routers are converted into electrical signals. If the signals are accessed through electrical
interfaces, O/E conversion is not required. At the PHY layer, the electrical signals are decoded
and the ETH_LOS alarm is detected. The electrical signals are converted from serial signals
into parallel signals and then sent to the network processor module.
In the transmit direction, the parallel signals are converted into serial signals. At the PHY
layer, signals are encoded and converted from electrical signals to optical signals.
1.1.1.1.983 Mapping Module

The mapping module performs encapsulation and mapping functions.
In the upstream direction, this module first encapsulates Ethernet signals in LAPS, HDLC, or
GFP format. The concatenation is performed. Then, the Ethernet signals are converted into
SDH signals.
In the downstream direction, SDH signals are demapped. The delay of virtual concatenation is
compensated. After aligning, packets are decapsulated according to the encapsulation format.
The decapsulated data is finally transmitted to the network processor module in packets.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
818

System
12 EoS Boards

The logic and control module consists of the CPU, register, oscillator, Ethernet port, and
HDLC controller. This module is connected to external circuits through the bus. The logic and
control module performs the following functions:
Manages and configures other modules of the board.
The control module also contains basic logic units. This module performs the following
functions:
Writes and reads the register.
Provides interfaces for the CPU.
Checks and selects the clock.
Performs phase discrimination and frequency division on the clock.
Checks the in-service state of the cross-connect, SCC, and line boards.
Controls the shutting down of the optical module.
Implements communication.
Controls indicators.

for each chip. The frequency of the clock can be 50 MHz, 77 MHz, 125 MHz, or 155 MHz.

require.
12.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFT8 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Figure 12-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFT8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
819

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EFT8
EFT8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
FE7
FE8
EFT8
The front panel of the EFT8 has eight FE interfaces. Table 12-3 describes the types and usage
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
820

System
12 EoS Boards
of the interfaces of the EFT8. For information about the cables connected to the interfaces, see
22.4.6 Straight-Through Cable and 22.4.7 Crossover Cable.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EFT8
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
FE1
RJ-45
Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

signals.
FE2
RJ-45

signals.
FE3
RJ-45

signals.
FE4
RJ-45

signals.
FE5
RJ-45

signals.
FE6
RJ-45

signals.
FE7
RJ-45

signals.
FE8
RJ-45

signals.
Table 12-4 describes the pins of the RJ45 connector.

Figure 1.2 Pins of the RJ45 connector
Pin
Description
Positive data transmit end
Negative data transmit end
Positive data receive end
Grounding
Grounding
Negative data receive end
Grounding
Grounding
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
821

System
12 EoS Boards

The EFT8 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
The daughter board of the N1EFT8 has only one push-button switch, which is used for resetting the
N1EFT8. When the N1EFT8 operates normally, do not push the switch. Otherwise, a cold reset is
performed on the N1EFT8 and the services may be lost.
12.1.7 Valid Slots

The EFT8 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EFT8 cannot work
normally.
The slots valid for an EFT8 board are determined by whether the EFT8 board works with an
interface board.
The slots valid for the EFT8 are as follows:
When the EFT8 does not work with an interface board:

the EFT8 can be installed in slots 16 and 1316. In this case, the bandwidth is 622
Mbit/s.
When the EFT8 works with an interface board: the EFT8 can be installed in slots 25
and 1316. In this case, the bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s.
12.1.8 Feature Code

The EFT8 does not have the feature code.


cable matches the board.
correct.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
822

System
12 EoS Boards

Step 6 Required: Configure services. For details, see Configuring EPL Services on Ethernet
Transparent Transmission Board.
Step 7 Required: Set the Ethernet interface.
Set the overhead byte as follows:
J1/J2 byte: The setting of the J1/J2 byte on the interconnected equipment must be
consistent. Generally, use the default value. The default mode of the J1/J2 to be sent
is 16-Byte CRC Mode and the default value of the J1/J2 to be sent is HuaWei SBS
; the default mode of the J1/J2 to be received is Single-Byte Mode and the default
value of the J1/J2 to be received is 0x00.
Set the Ethernet interface as follows:
Port enabled/disabled: When you configure services on a port of the Ethernet board,
the port must be set to Enabled.
Working mode: Generally, the Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment

are required to work in the same working mode. If the working modes on two sides
do not match, packets may be lost or the bit rate may decrease. In the case of large
volume of traffic, services may be completely interrupted.

For more information about the parameters of the board, see 26.4.2 Ethernet Parameters.
Step 8 Optional: Configure the test frame. For details, see Configuring Test Frames.
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

The EFT8 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as LCAS and LPT.
Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
823

System
12 EoS Boards
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EFT8 by using the U2000:
LCAS
LPT
Test Frame

You can set parameters for the EFT8 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EFT8 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
For information about more parameters and the description of each parameter, see 26
Parameter Settings.

Table 12-5 lists the faults that occur on the EFT8 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EFT8 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption
The services on a VCTRUNK

port are interrupted.
The services on a single

Ethernet port are interrupted.
The services on all the

Ethernet ports are interrupted.

port are transiently interrupted.

Ethernet port are transiently
interrupted.
The protocol becomes

abnormal.
The negotiated working mode

of the Ethernet ports is the
half-duplex mode.
Bit errors occur on the line

side.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.
See Troubleshooting Transient

Service Interruptions.
See Troubleshooting Service

Packet Loss.
824

System
12 EoS Boards
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Interconnection
fault
The interconnection fault

occurs on a single Ethernet
port.

occurs on the VCG port.
The LCAS interconnection

fault occurs.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EFT8, see Replacing an EOS Board.

12.1.13.1 Alarms of N1EFT8

ALM_GFP_dLFD
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BOOTROM_BAD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
LCT
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LCAS_BAND_DECREAS
ED
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_TLCT
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LP_RDI_VC3
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_INEFFECT
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
MSSW_DIFFERENT
NO_BD_SOFT
SLAVE_WORKING
SUBCARD_ABN
TEST_STATUS
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
825

System
12 EoS Boards
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
W_R_FAIL
TR_LOC
T_LOSEX
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
ETH_NO_FLOW
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
ALM_GFP_dLFD
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BOOTROM_BAD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FA
IL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_F
AULT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CN
FLCT
FCS_ERR
FLOW_OVER
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_INEFFECT
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
NESOFT_MM
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SLAVE_WORKING
SUBCARD_ABN
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
WRG_BD_TYPE
12.1.13.2 Alarms of N2EFT8
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
826

System
VCAT_SQM_VC3
12 EoS Boards
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
W_R_FAIL
PORTMODE_MISMATCH

12.1.14.1 Performance Events of N1EFT8

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPSES
LPUAS
DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors
Figure 1.2 RMON alarm

Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)
Fragments(packets)
Packets Received and

Transmitted(64 Octets in
Length)(packets)
Packets Received(65~127
Octets in Length)(packets)
Packets
Received(512~1023 Octets
in Length)(packets)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
827

System
12 EoS Boards

Packets Transmitted(64
Packets Transmitted(65~127
Packets
Transmitted(128~255
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Packets
Transmitted(512~1023 Octets
in Length)(packets)
Packets
Transmitted(1024~1518

Length)(packets)

Transmitted(65~127 Octets in
Length)(packets)

Transmitted(128~255

Transmitted(256~511

in Length)(packets)

Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Transmitted(packets)
Pause Frames
Received(frames)
Pause Frames
Transmitted(frames)
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Received(Byte)
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
Bad Octets Received(Byte)
Bad Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)
12.1.14.2 Performance Events of N2EFT8

Figure 1.5 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPSES
LPUAS
HPFEUAS
LPFEUAS
BDTEMPCUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN

UndersizePkts
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
OversizePkts

Copyright Huawei
Fragments
828

System
12 EoS Boards

ETHFRG
ETHOVER
ETHUNDER
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXPKT1024
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT64
RXPKT65

ETHFCS
PKT1024
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT64
PKT65
RXBBAD
RXBGOOD
RXPAUSE
RXUNICAST
TXBBAD
TXBGOOD
TXBRDCAST
TXMULCAST
TXPAUSE
TXPKT1024
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXUNICAST
12.1.15 Technical Specifications of EFT8

The technical specifications of the EFT8 include the Ethernet performance specifications,

Table 12-14 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFT8.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EFT8
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s
Line code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10M) or MLT-3 encoding signal

(100M)
interface
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
829

System
12 EoS Boards
1.1.1.1.998 Ethernet Performance Specifications

The following part lists the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case of overloading, delay
specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EFT8 board of the N1 version.
Figure 12-4 shows the connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in
the case of overloading, and latency specifications of the EFT8.
Figure 1.1 Connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case of
overloading, and latency specifications
Port 1
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Figure 12-5 shows the connection for testing the back-to-back specifications of the EFT8.
Figure 1.2 Connection for testing the back-to-back specifications
Tested
equipment 1
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-15 lists the throughput specifications of the EFT8. Table 12-16 lists the packet loss
ratio in the case of overloading of the EFT8. Table 12-17 lists the latency specifications of the
EFT8. Table 12-18 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EFT8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
830

System
12 EoS Boards
The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment and
the VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual
environment are used.
The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EPL services are
configured and 63 VC-12s are bound on the FE port.
The data network performance is measured by using the SmartBits. The specification values in the
following tables are obtained by using the SmartApplication software of the SmartBits analyzer.
The specific test results depend on the settings on the SmartApplication. The values listed in the
following tables are the values displayed on the SmartBits analyzer.
In the following tables, the value such as (01,01,01) indicates the equipment No., slot No., and port
No. "(01,01,01) to (01,01,02)" and "(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)", however, indicate the forward and
reverse tests values, respectively. For details about the parameters, see SmartApplications Help.
Table 12-15 lists the throughput specifications of the EFT8. The values are obtained when the
SmartApplication is set as follows:
The specifications in the table are obtained in the scenario wherein point-to-point
transparent transmission services are configured and the flow control function is
disabled.
The permitted packet loss ratio is set to 0% and the resolution rate is set to 0.1%.
The test duration is set to 60 seconds.
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the EFT8

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02)
(pks/sec)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
148810
148810
297620
128
100.00
84459
84459
168918
256
100.00
45290
45290
90580
512
100.00
23496
23496
46992
1024
100.00
11973
11973
23946
1280
100.00
9615
9615
19230
1518
100.00
8127
8127
16254
Table 12-16 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EFT8. The values are
obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
The tested traffic starts from the throughput and increases to 100% in 10% steps.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
831

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EFT8
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) (%)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
Table 12-17 lists the latency specifications of the EFT8. The values are obtained when the
disabled.
The latency modes are classified into two modes, namely, cut through mode and store
forward mode. In cut through mode, the analyzer calculates the difference between the
time when the first bit of the transmitted frame reaches the output port of the tested
equipment and the time when the first bit of the transmitted frame reaches the input port
of the tested equipment. In store forward mode, the analyzer calculates the difference
between the time when the first bit of the transmitted frame reaches the output port of the
tested equipment and the time when the last bit of the transmitted frame reaches the input
port of the tested equipment. In the table, the CT values are obtained in cut through mode
and the S&F values are obtained in store forward mode.
Figure 1.3 Latency specifications of the EFT8

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
506.4
506.4
501.2
501.2
128
100.00
518.8
518.8
508.5
508.5
256
100.00
536.2
536.2
515.8
515.8
512
100.00
578.9
578.9
538.0
538.0
1024
100.00
653.4
653.4
571.4
571.4
1280
100.00
688.1
688.1
585.6
585.6
1518
100.00
720.6
720.6
599.1
599.1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
832

System
12 EoS Boards
Table 12-18 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EFT8. The values are obtained when
the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
The frame size is set to the range from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes, the packet transmission
rate is set to 100%, the test duration is set to 2 seconds, and the number of repetitions is
set to a value more than 50 on the Smart Application.
The tested traffic is set to the wire speed.
Figure 1.4 Back-to-back specifications of the EFT8

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
297620
297620
595240
128
100.00
168918
168918
337836
256
100.00
90580
90580
181160
512
100.00
46992
46992
93984
1024
100.00
23946
23946
47892
1280
100.00
19230
19230
38460
1518
100.00
16254
16254
32508

The mechanical specifications of the EFT8 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the EFT8 at room temperature (25C) is 26 W.
12.2 EFT8A
technical specifications of the EFT8A (8xFE transparent transmission board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the EFT8A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
833

System
12 EoS Boards

The EFT8A is available in the following functional version: N1 and N2.
Table 12-19 describes the versions of the EFT8A.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the EFT8A
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The EFT8A is available in the following functional versions: N1 and

N2.
Differences
Regarding service specifications: frame length
Regarding protection schemes: LPT
Regarding other points:
Substitution
The N2EFT8A supports the alarm

indicating that the traffic crosses the
associated threshold.
The N2EFT8A supports the command for

loading MAC addresses in a unified
manner.
The N2EFT8A can substitute for the N1EFT8A.
12.2.2 Application
The EFT8A is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge
Ethernet services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
834

System
12 EoS Boards
NMS
User A2
NE1
PORT 1
NE2
MSP ring
PORT 2
NE4
NE3
User B2
Service flow
Line board
PORT 2
PORT 1
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User B1
User A1

EFT8A boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and
test frames.
Table 12-20 lists the functions and features supported by EFT8A boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by EFT8A boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Transparently transmits 8xFE services.
Port
types
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
Electrical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
Provides ports on the front panel to receive/transmit 8xFE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
835

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation
Traffic
control at
ports
Not supported
Supported
Query/Se
tting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of optical
power
threshold
s
Not supported
Pluggabl
e optical
module
Not supported
Servic
e
catego
ries
EPL
service
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1q TAG
Supported
Frame
length
range
EFT8A boards support the setting of the method used for

processing frames with less than 64 bytes or error frames.
N1EFT8A boards support the setting of the packet length, which

ranges from 1518 bytes to 1535 bytes. The first four ports support
a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 6144 bytes, whereas the
last four ports support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of
9600 bytes.
N2EFT8A boards support the setting of the packet length, which
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
836

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Protec
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N2EFT8A boards support a jumbo frame with a maximum length

of 9600 bytes.
Bound
bandwidt
h
12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties

granularities.
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC
Supported
LAPS
Supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
622 Mbit/s
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
TPS
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a

A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at

one time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-12 and VC3 paths at the same time.
Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels.
A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 1-63 and

VC-3s numbered 10-12 at the same time.
VC-4 numbered 4 supports the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths.

The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
VCTRUNK 1VCTRUNK 8 can be bound with VC-3s numbered

112 or VC-12s numbered 163.
Not supported

Copyright Huawei
837

System
12 EoS Boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
tion
schem
es
LCAS

LPT
Supports P2P LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LAG
Not supported
Clock
synchr
onizati
on
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
ETH
OAM
Not supported by N1EFT8A boards
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N2EFT8A boards support CC, LB, and LT. These functions comply
with IEEE 802.1ag.
N2EFT8A boards support OAM auto-discovery, link performance
monitoring, fault detection, remote loopback tests, and self-loop tests.
These functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Test
Frame
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Not supported
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
Supports inloops.
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMON
Warm
resets
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events


Copyright Huawei
838

System
12 EoS Boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
QoS
Not supported
Traffic
contro
l
Supports the FE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE
802.3x.

The EFT8A consists of the Ethernet access module, mapping module, interface converting
Figure 12-7 shows the functional block diagram of the EFT8A by describing how to process
1xFE signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EFT8A
Backplane
FE
ENCP
Ethernet
access
module
Interface
converting
module
VCP
DENCP
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
LOS
Logic and
control module
Communication
SCC unit
SCC unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V
Clock
module
Power
module
50 77 125 155
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Power
module
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

In the receive direction, the Ethernet access module receives the Ethernet electrical signals
from Ethernet equipment such as switches or routers. At the PHY layer, the electrical signals
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
839

System
12 EoS Boards
are decoded and the ETH_LOS alarm is detected. The electrical signals are converted from
serial signals into parallel signals and then sent to the network processor module.
layer, signals are encoded.

SDH signals.


functions:


require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
840

System
12 EoS Boards
12.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFT8A has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Figure 12-8 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFT8A.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EFT8A
EFT8A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
FE7
FE8
EFT8A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
841

System
12 EoS Boards
The front panel of the EFT8A has eight FE interfaces. Table 12-21 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EFT8A. For information about the cables connected to the
interfaces, see 22.4.6 Straight-Through Cable and 22.4.7 Crossover Cable.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EFT8A
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
FE1
RJ-45

signals.
FE2
RJ-45

signals.
FE3
RJ-45

signals.
FE4
RJ-45

signals.
FE5
RJ-45

signals.
FE6
RJ-45

signals.
FE7
RJ-45

signals.
FE8
RJ-45

signals.

Pin
Description
Grounding
Grounding
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
842

System
Pin
Description
Grounding
Grounding
12 EoS Boards

The EFT8A does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
The daughter board of the N1EFT8A has only one push-button switch, which is used for resetting the
N1EFT8A. When the N1EFT8A operates normally, do not push the switch. Otherwise, a cold reset is
performed on the N1EFT8A and the services may be lost.
12.2.7 Valid Slots

The EFT8A must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EFT8A cannot
work normally.
The EFT8A can be installed in slots 18 and 1116 in the subrack. In this case, the bandwidth
is 622 Mbit/s.
12.2.8 Feature Code

The EFT8A does not have the feature code.


correct.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
843

System
12 EoS Boards



----End

----End

Boards.
----End

The EFT8A supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as LCAS and LPT.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
844

System
12 EoS Boards
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EFT8A by using the U2000:
LCAS
LPT
Test Frame

You can set parameters for the EFT8A by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EFT8A by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Byte packet
CRC error frame
Parameter Settings.

Table 12-23 lists the faults that occur on the EFT8A frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EFT8A frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.

Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.
845

System
Fault Symptom
12 EoS Boards
Common Fault Cause
half-duplex mode.
Interconnection
fault

side.

port.


fault occurs.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EFT8A, see Replacing an EOS Board.

12.2.13.1 Alarms of N1EFT8A

ALM_GFP_dLFD
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BOOTROM_BAD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFL
CT
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LCAS_BAND_DECREASE
D
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_INEFFECT
LPT_RFI
NO_BD_SOFT
SLAVE_WORKING
TEST_STATUS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
846

System
12 EoS Boards
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
W_R_FAIL
TR_LOC
T_LOSEX
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
ETH_NO_FLOW
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
12.2.13.2 Alarms of N2EFT8A

ALM_GFP_dLFD
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BOOTROM_BAD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FA
IL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_F
AULT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CN
FLCT
FCS_ERR
FLOW_OVER
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LPT_INEFFECT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_RFI
NO_BD_SOFT
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SLAVE_WORKING
TU_LOP_VC3
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
PORTMODE_MISMATCH
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
W_R_FAIL
WRG_BD_TYPE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
847

System
12 EoS Boards

12.2.14.1 Performance Events of N1EFT8A

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPSES
LPUAS
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPSES
LPUAS
DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors
Figure 1.2 SDH

Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)
Fragments(packets)

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
848

System
12 EoS Boards
Length)(packets)
Packets
in Length)(packets)

Packets
Transmitted(128~255
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Packets
in Length)(packets)
Packets

Length)(packets)

Length)(packets)

Transmitted(128~255

Transmitted(256~511

in Length)(packets)

Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Pause Frames
Received(frames)
Pause Frames
Transmitted(frames)
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Received(Byte)
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
Bad Octets Received(Byte)
Bad Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)
12.2.14.2 Performance Events of N2EFT8A

Figure 1.6 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPSES
LPUAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
849

System
12 EoS Boards
HPFEUAS
LPFEUAS
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR

UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments

ETHFRG
ETHOVER
ETHUNDER
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXPKT1024
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT64
RXPKT65

ETHFCS
PKT1024
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT64
PKT65
RXBBAD
RXBGOOD
RXPAUSE
RXUNICAST
TXBBAD
TXBGOOD
TXBRDCAST
TXMULCAST
TXPAUSE
TXPKT1024
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXUNICAST
12.2.15 Technical Specifications of EFT8A

The technical specifications of the EFT8A include the Ethernet performance specifications,

Table 12-33 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFT8A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
850

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EFT8A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
Line code pattern

(100M)
interface

specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EFT8A board of the N1 version.
the case of overloading, and latency specifications of the EFTA.
overloading, and latency specifications
Port 1
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Figure 12-10 shows the connection for testing the back-to-back specifications of the EFT8A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
851

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Connection for testing the back-to-back specifications

Tested
equipment 1
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-34 lists the throughput specifications of the EFT8A. Table 12-35 lists the packet loss
ratio in the case of overloading of the EFT8A. Table 12-36 lists the latency specifications of
the EFT8A. Table 12-37 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EFT8A.
configured and 63 VC-12s are bound on the FE port.
Table 12-34 lists the throughput specifications of the EFT8A. The values are obtained when
disabled.
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the EFT8A

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02)
(pks/sec)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
148810
148810
297620
128
100.00
84459
84459
168918
256
100.00
45290
45290
90580
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
852

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02)
(pks/sec)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
512
100.00
23496
23496
46992
1024
100.00
11973
11973
23946
1280
100.00
9615
9615
19230
1518
100.00
8127
8127
16254
Table 12-35 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EFT8A. The values are
disabled.
Figure 1.2 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EFT8A
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) (%)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
Table 12-36 lists the latency specifications of the EFT8A. The values are obtained when the
disabled.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
853

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.3 Latency specifications of the EFT8A
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
506.4
506.4
501.2
501.2
128
100.00
518.8
518.8
508.5
508.5
256
100.00
536.2
536.2
515.8
515.8
512
100.00
578.9
578.9
538.0
538.0
1024
100.00
653.4
653.4
571.4
571.4
1280
100.00
688.1
688.1
585.6
585.6
1518
100.00
720.6
720.6
599.1
599.1
Table 12-37 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EFT8A. The values are obtained when
disabled.
Figure 1.4 Back-to-back specifications of the EFT8A

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
297620
297620
595240
128
100.00
168918
168918
337836
256
100.00
90580
90580
181160
512
100.00
46992
46992
93984
1024
100.00
23946
23946
47892
1280
100.00
19230
19230
38460
1518
100.00
16254
16254
32508
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
854

System
12 EoS Boards

The mechanical specifications of the EFT8A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the EFT8A at room temperature (25C) is 26 W.
12.3 EGT2
technical specifications of the EGT2 (2xGE transparent transmission board). This topic also
describes how to configure and commission the EGT2.

The EGT2 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and N2.
Table 12-38 describes the versions of the EGT2.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the EGT2
Item
Description
Functional versions
The EGT2 is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and

N2.
Differences
Regarding interface specifications: interface types, interface

characteristics
Regarding service specifications: VCTRUNK specifications,

Mapping granularities
Substitution
The N2EGT2 can substitute for the N1EGT2.
12.3.2 Application
The EGT2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge
Ethernet services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
855

System
12 EoS Boards

NMS
User A2
NE1
PORT 1
NE2
MSP ring
PORT 2
NE4
NE3
User B2
Service flow
Line board
PORT 1
PORT 2
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User B1
User A1

EGT2 boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and
test frames.
Table 12-39 lists the functions and features supported by EGT2 boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by EGT2 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Transparently transmits 2xGE services.
Port
types
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
EGT2 boards support 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The

optical ports support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE
802.3z. The optical ports use SFP optical modules and support hot swapping.
When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission
distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum
transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different
Copyright Huawei
856

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also

be used.
N2EGT2 boards also support 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical ports.

The electrical ports support the 1000M full-duplex working mode. N2EGT2
boards use SFP electrical ports and support hot swapping. The maximum
transmission distance is 100 m.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Provides ports on the front panel.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation
Traffic
control at
ports
Not supported
Supported
Query/Se
tting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of optical
power
threshold
s
Not supported
Pluggabl
e optical
module
EPL
servic
e
Servic
e
specifi
Formats
of
Ethernet
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported

Copyright Huawei
857

System
12 EoS Boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
cation
s
data
frames
IEEE 802.1q TAG
Frame
length
range
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518
bytes to 9600 bytes.
Bound
bandwidt
h
16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties

granularities.
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC
Supported
LAPS
Supported
GFP-F
Supported
Protec
tion
schem
es
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. An EGT2 board can

VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions

A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or a

maximum of 24 VC-3s. A VCTRUNK can be bound with VC-4s
numbered 1-16 or VC-3s numbered 1-48.
The virtual concatenation modes of the two VCTRUNKs of the

board should be the same. That is, the two VCTRUNKs should be
of the VC-4 virtual concatenation or of the VC-3 virtual
concatenation.
TPS
Not supported
LCAS

LPT
Supports P2P LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.

Copyright Huawei
858

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
12 EoS Boards
Description
LAG
Not supported
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
ETH
OAM
N1EGT2 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
N2EGT2 boards support CC, LB test, and LT test. These functions

comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
Test
Frame
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Not supported
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
Supports inloops.
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
Not supported
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMON
Warm
resets
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

QoS
Not supported
Traffic
contro
l
Supports the GE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE
802.3x.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
859

System
12 EoS Boards

The EGT2 consists of the Ethernet access module, mapping module, interface converting
Figure 12-12 shows the functional block diagram of the EGT2 by describing how to process
1xGE signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2
Backplane
GE
ENCP
Ethernet
access
module
VCP
DENCP
Interface
converting
module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
Laser
shutdown
LOS
Logic and
control module
Communication
+3.3 V
Clock module
Power
module
50 77 125 155
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Power
module
SCC unit
SCC unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power
Fuse


SDH signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
860

System
12 EoS Boards


functions:


require.
12.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGT2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 12-13 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2 that has the
GE optical interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
861

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2 that has the GE optical interface
EGT2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EGT2
The N2EGT2 can also be installed with the GE electrical interface. Figure 12-14 shows the
appearance of the front panel of the N2EGT2 that has the GE electrical interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
862

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the N2EGT2 that has the GE electrical interface
EGT2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EGT2
The front panel of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2 has two GE optical interfaces. Table 12-40
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
863

System
12 EoS Boards
describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1/OUT1
LC (swappable)
Transmits and receives 1000BASESX/LX/ZX/VX signals.
IN2/OUT2
LC (swappable)
The two GE electrical interfaces of the N2EGT2 are of the same type and have the same
usage. Table 12-41 describes the types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the N2EGT2.
Figure 1.2 Electrical interfaces of the N2EGT2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
GE
RJ-45 (swappable)
Transmits and receives 1000BASE-T

signals.
Table 12-42 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N2EGT2.
Figure 1.3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N2EGT2
Pin
Description
BI_DA+
BI_DA
BI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DC
BI_DB
BI_DD+
BI_DD

The EGT2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
12.3.7 Valid Slots

The EGT2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EGT2 cannot work
normally.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
864

System
12 EoS Boards
The N1EGT2 can be installed in slots 14, 58, 1114, and 1516. When the N1EGT2 is
installed in slots 14 and 1516, the bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. When the N1EGT2 is installed
in slots 58 and 1114, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
The N2EGT2 can be installed in slots 18 and 1116. In this case, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
12.3.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the EGT2 indicates the type of interface.
Table 12-43 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EGT2 and the type of
interface.
Figure 1.4 Relationship between the feature code of the EGT2 and the type of interface
Board
Feature Code
Type of Interface
SSN1EGT210 and
SSN2EGT210
10
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
SSN1EGT211 and
SSN2EGT211
11
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
SSN1EGT212 and
SSN2EGT212
12
1000BASE-VX (40 km)
SSN1EGT213 and
SSN2EGT213
13
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)
SSN2EGT214
14
1000BASE-T (100 m)


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
865

System
12 EoS Boards
correct.
----End



----End

----End

Boards.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
866

System
12 EoS Boards

The EGT2 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as LCAS and LPT.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EGT2 by using the U2000:
LCAS
LPT
Test Frame

You can set parameters for the EGT2 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EGT2 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.

Table 12-44 lists the faults that occur on the EGT2 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EGT2 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.
Transient service
interruption
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.

867

System
12 EoS Boards
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Packet loss

half-duplex mode.

side.

port.


fault occurs.
Interconnection
fault
Packet Loss.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EGT2, see Replacing an EOS Board.

12.3.13.1 Alarms of N1EGT2

ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC3
B3_SD_VC4
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_BAND_DECREAS
ED
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LINK_ERR
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
NO_BD_SOFT
TEST_STATUS
TU_AIS_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
868

System
12 EoS Boards
TU_LOP_VC3
W_R_FAIL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
T_LOSEX
TR_LOC
ETH_NO_FLOW
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
12.3.13.2 Alarms of N2EGT2

ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_SD_VC3
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC4
BD_STATUS
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
LCT
FCS_ERR
FLOW_OVER
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LINK_ERR
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
LTEMP_OVER
MOD_TYPE_MISMATC
H
NO_BD_SOFT
PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
OUT_PWR_HIGH
OUT_PWR_LOW
T_LOSEX
TD
TEMP_OVER
TF
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC4
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
WRG_BD_TYPE

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
869

System
12 EoS Boards
12.3.14.1 Performance Events of N1EGT2

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPSES
DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
FCSErrors
LPUAS

Packets Received(64
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Octets in Length)(packets/s)
Packets
Received(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
in Length)(packets/s)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Drop Events(times/s)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Fragments(packets/s)
Jabbers(packets/s)
Octets Received(Byte/s)
Packets Received(packets/s)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Packets
Transmitted(65~127
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)

Copyright Huawei
870

System
12 EoS Boards
Packets
Packets
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Unicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Unicast Packets
Transmitted(packets/s)
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Pause Frames
Received(frames/s)
Pause Frames
Transmitted(frames/s)
FCS Errors(frames/s)

Length)(packets/s)

Length)(packets/s)


Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)


12.3.14.2 Performance Events of N2EGT2

Figure 1.5 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
XCSTMPCUR
XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN

DropEvent
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
UndersizePkts
Copyright Huawei
OversizePkts
871

System
12 EoS Boards
Fragments
Jabbers
FCSErrors

Packets Received(64
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Received(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Multicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Jabbers(packets/s)
Packets
Transmitted(65~127
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Packets
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Unicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Pause Frames
Received(frames/s)
Pause Frames
Transmitted(frames/s)

Length)(packets/s)

Length)(packets/s)


Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
872

System
12 EoS Boards

The technical specifications of the EGT2 include the parameters specified for optical
interfaces, laser safety class, Ethernet performance specifications, mechanical specifications,
and power consumption.

Table 12-53 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGT2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGT2
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASEZX (80 km)
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASELX (10 km)
1000BASE-SX
(0.5 km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode LC
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-2 to 5
-5 to 0
-9 to -3
-9.5 to -2.5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1500 to 1580
1275 to 1350
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-23
-23
20
-17
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
1.1.1.1.1036 Ethernet Electrical Interfaces

Table 12-54 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EGT2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
873

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EGT2
Type of Interface
Code Type
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5
Only the EGT2 boards of the N2 version supports the GE electrical interfaces.

specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EGT2 board of the N1 version.
Figure 12-15 shows the connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio
in the case of overloading, and latency specifications of the N1EGT2.
overloading, and latency specifications of the N1EGT2
Port 1
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Figure 12-16 shows the connection for testing the back-to-back specifications of the N1EGT2.
Figure 1.2 Connection for testing the back-to-back specifications of the N1EGT2
Tested
equipment 1
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
874

System
12 EoS Boards
Table 12-55 lists the throughput specifications of the N1EGT2. Table 12-56 lists the packet
loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N1EGT2. Table 12-57 lists the latency
specifications of the N1EGT2. Table 12-58 lists the back-to-back specifications of the
N1EGT2.
configured and 24 VC-3s are bound on the GE port.
Table 12-55 lists the throughput specifications of the N1EGT2. The values are obtained when
disabled.
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the N1EGT2

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,02,01) to
(01,02,02)
(pks/sec)
(01,02,02) to
(01,02,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
1488095
1488095
2976190
128
100.00
844595
844595
1689190
256
100.00
452899
452899
905798
512
100.00
234962
234962
469924
1024
100.00
119732
119732
239464
1280
100.00
96154
96154
192308
1518
100.00
81274
81274
162548
Table 12-56 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N1EGT2. The values
are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
875

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N1EGT2
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,02,01) to
(01,02,02) (%)
(01,02,02) to
(01,02,01) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
Table 12-57 lists the latency specifications of the N1EGT2. The values are obtained when the
disabled.
Figure 1.3 Latency specifications of the N1EGT2

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,02,01) to
(01,02,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,02,02) to
(01,02,01)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
35.7
35.7
35.2
35.2
128
100.00
37.1
37.1
36.1
36.1
256
100.00
39.5
39.5
37.4
37.4
512
100.00
44.1
44.1
40.1
40.1
1024
100.00
53.2
53.2
45.1
45.1
1280
100.00
57.6
57.6
47.4
47.4
1518
100.00
61.9
61.9
49.7
49.7
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
876

System
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
12 EoS Boards
(01,02,01) to
(01,02,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,02,02) to
(01,02,01)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
Table 12-58 lists the back-to-back specifications of the N1EGT2. The values are obtained
when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Figure 1.4 Back-to-back specifications of the N1EGT2

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,02,01) to
(01,02,02) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,02,02) to
(01,02,01)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
2976190
2976190
5952380
128
100.00
1689190
1689190
3378380
256
100.00
905798
905798
1811596
512
100.00
469924
469924
939848
1024
100.00
239464
239464
478928
1280
100.00
192308
192308
384616
1518
100.00
162548
162548
325096
specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EGT2 board of the N2 version.
in the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the
N2EGT2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
877

System
12 EoS Boards
overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the N2EGT2
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-59 lists the throughput specifications of the N2EGT2. Table 12-60 lists the packet
loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N2EGT2. Table 12-61 lists the latency
specifications of the N2EGT2. Table 12-62 lists the back-to-back specifications of the
N2EGT2.
configured and two VC-3s are bound on the GE port.
Table 12-59 lists the throughput specifications of the N2EGT2. The values are obtained when
disabled.
Minimum frame size (byte): 64
Maximum frame size (byte): 1518
Step frame size (byte): Custom
Number of pairs: 1
Initial rate (%): 15
Maximum rate (%): 15
Mode: Uni-directional
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
878

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.5 Throughput specifications of the N2EGT2

Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,05,02) to (01,05,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
11.23
167112
334224
128
10.48
88527
177054
256
9.75
44138
88276
512
9.74
22894
45788
1024
9.75
11674
23348
1280
9.75
9373
18746
1518
9.75
7922
15844
Table 12-60 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N2EGT2. The values
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Initial rate (%): 11.23
Maximum rate (%): 10.00
Resolution rate (%): None
Figure 1.6 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N2EGT2
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,05,02) to (01,05,01)
(%)
Average (%)
64
11.23
0.000
0.000
128
10.48
0.000
0.000
256
9.75
0.000
0.000
512
9.74
0.000
0.000
1024
9.75
0.000
0.000
1280
9.75
0.000
0.000
1518
9.75
0.000
0.000
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
879

System
12 EoS Boards
Table 12-61 lists the latency specifications of the N2EGT2. The values are obtained when the
disabled.
Measure on one receiving card only
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.7 Latency specifications of the N2EGT2

Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,05,02) to
(01,05,01) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,05,02) to
(01,05,01)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
11.23
92.7
92.7
92.1
92.1
128
10.48
97.7
97.7
96.6
96.6
256
9.75
109.5
109.5
107.5
107.5
512
9.74
133.1
133.1
129.0
129.0
1024
9.75
178.8
178.8
170.6
170.6
1280
9.75
204.1
204.1
193.9
193.9
1518
9.75
224.0
224.0
211.9
211.9
Table 12-62 lists the back-to-back specifications of the N2EGT2. The values are obtained
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
880

System
12 EoS Boards
disabled.
set to a value more than 1 on the SmartApplication.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.8 Back-to-back specifications of the N2EGT2

Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,05,02) to (01,05,01)
Burst Size (frames)
Total (frames)
64
11.23
334224
668448
128
10.48
177054
354108
256
9.75
88276
176552
512
9.74
45754
91508
1024
9.75
23348
46696
1280
9.75
18752
37504
1518
9.75
15848
31696


The mechanical specifications of the EGT2 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.9

The maximum power consumption of the N1EGT2 at room temperature (25C) is 29 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N2EGT2 at room temperature (25C) is 15 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
881

System
12 EoS Boards
12.4 EFS0

The EFS0 is available in several functional versions. Select a functional board according to
actual requirements.
The EFS0 is available in the following functional versions: N1, N2, N4, and N5. The
N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N1EFS0 is discontinued.
Table 12-63 describes the versions of the EFS0.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the EFS0
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The EFS0 is available in the following functional versions: N1, N2, N4,
and N5.
Differences
Regarding interface specifications: interface types, functions when

being used with an interface board
Regarding service specifications: bound bandwidth, maximum

uplink bandwidth, VCTRUNK specifications
Regarding protection schemes: TPS, LCAS, LPT, LAG
Regarding maintenance features: ETH OAM, test frame, , port

mirroring, loopback capability, warm resets
QoS
Traffic monitoring
Substitution
The N2EFS0 supports the board version replacement function and can
replace the N1EFS0.
replace the N2EFS0/N1EFS0.
replace the N4EFS0/N2EFS0/N1EFS0.
12.4.2 Application
The EFS0 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer
2 switching of Ethernet services.
Figure 12-18 shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board.
the Ethernet switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the
Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the
Ethernet switching board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and
SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be interconnected with
the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time,
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
882

System
12 EoS Boards
thus to provide a network-level solution.

Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

EFS0 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.
Table 12-64 lists the functions and features supported by EFS0 boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by EFS0 boards
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic functions
Processes 8xFE services.
Port types
An EFS0 board supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when

working with an ETF8 board. The electrical ports comply with
IEEE 802.3u.
An EFS0 board supports 100BASE-FX/LX/VX/ZX signals when

working with an EFF8 board. The optical ports comply with IEEE
802.3u.
An N5EFS0 board supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals

when working with an ETF8A board. The electrical ports comply
with IEEE 802.3u.
An N5EFS0 board supports 100BASE-FX/LX signals when

working with an EFF8A board. The optical ports comply with
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
883

System
Function and
Feature
12 EoS Boards
Description
IEEE 802.3u.
Functions when
being used with an
interface board
Port characteristics
Service categories
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
An EFS0 board provides eight electrical ports to receive/transmit

FE signals when working with an ETF8 board.
An EFS0 board provides eight optical ports to receive/transmit FE

signals when working with an EFF8 board.
An EFS0 board provides the TPS protection for FE signals

received/transmitted through eight electrical ports when working
with an ETS8 board and a TSB8 board.
An N5EFS0 board provides eight electrical ports to

receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8A board.
An N5EFS0 board provides eight optical ports to receive/transmit

FE signals when working with an EFF8A board.
Workin
g
modes
FE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex,

100M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and 10M halfduplex
FE optical port: 100M full-duplex
An N5EFS0 board supports only the auto-negotiation

and 100M full-duplex working mode when working
with an EFF8A board.
Traffic
control
at ports
Supported (Not supported

by FE optical ports)
Supported (not supported if

an EFS0 board works with
an EFF8 board)
Query/
Setting
of port
status
Supported
Query
of port
types
Supported
Setting
of
optical
power
thresho
lds
Not supported
Plugga
ble
optical
module
Not supported
EPL
service

Copyright Huawei
884

System
Function and
Feature
12 EoS Boards
Description
EVPL
service
Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
EPLA
N
service
Service
specifications
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The services are isolated by

VLAN tags.

MPLS tags.

QinQ tags.
Supports a maximum of 4096 links.
N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support the EPLAN services that

are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.
Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and

also the static MAC address table that can contain 2K
records. The sum of the number of records in the
blacklist and the number of addresses in the static MAC
address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist
function of N5EFS0 boards supports verification of
destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address.

The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The
aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support the query of dynamic

MAC addresses.
The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The

maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 30.
Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses

based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP.
EVPL
AN
service
s
Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN

services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the

IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge.
Format
s of
Etherne
t data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1 q/p
Supported
Frame
length
range
Supports the setting of the frame length to a value

ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of

9600 bytes.
Bound
bandwi
N1EFS0: 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3

Copyright Huawei
885

System
Function and
Feature
12 EoS Boards
Description
dth
N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0: 24xVC-3, or 126xVC-12 +

18xVC-3
Concat
enation
granula
rities
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X 63), and VC-3-Xv

(X 12) granularities.
Encaps
ulation
formats
HDLC
Not supported
LAPS
Not supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
technol
ogy
Supports the MPLS.
VLAN
technol
ogy
Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply

with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Maxim
um
uplink
bandwi
dth
The maximum uplink bandwidth of an N1EFS0 board

is 622 Mbit/s.
The maximum uplink bandwidth of an

N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board is 1.25 Gbit/s.
An EFS0 board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
VCTR
UNK
specific
ations
The number of supported VCTRUNKs is as follows:
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by an N1EFS0

board is 12.
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by an

N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board is 24.
Protection
schemes
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
TPS
VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 12 can be bound only with

lower order paths in VC-4s numbered 1-4. VCTRUNK
13-VCTRUNK 24 can be bound only with lower order
paths in VC-4s numbered 5-8.
VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3

and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding
of VC-3 paths only.
A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at

the same time.
Not supported by N1EFS0 boards

Supported by N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards
BPS
Not supported
PPS
Not supported
DLAG
Not supported

Copyright Huawei
886

System
Function and
Feature
12 EoS Boards
Description
LAG
N1EFS0 boards do not support link aggregation, but

N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support manual link
aggregation and the load sharing mode that comply with
IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS
Not supported by N1EFS0/N2EFS0 boards

Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and
protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
This protection scheme is supported by N4EFS0/N5EFS0
boards.
Clock
synchronization
Maintenance
features
LPT
N1EFS0/N2EFS0 boards support P2P LPT.

N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
LPT functions comply with ITU-T G.7042.
STP/R
STP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and

RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP
Not supported
Synchr
onous
Etherne
t
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
ETH
OAM
N1EFS0 and N2EFS0 boards do not support the ETH

OAM function.
N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 boards support CC, LB tests, and

LT tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, LM and DM
in compliance with ITU-T Y.1731, and OAM ping in
compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 boards support OAM autodiscovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and link
performance detection in compliance with IEEE
802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with
Huawei proprietary protocol.
N1EFS0/N2EFS0 boards support test frames in

Ethernet bearer mode.
N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support test frames in

Ethernet/GFP bearer mode.
Test
Frame
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Respon
se to
ping
Not supported
Port
mirrori
ng
N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 boards do not support port

mirroring. N5EFS0 boards support ingress mirroring.
Loopba

Copyright Huawei
Supports inloops.
887

System
Function and
Feature
Description
ck
capabili
ty
QoS
IGMP snooping
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0
boards support inloops and
outloops. N5EFS0 boards
do not support inloops or
outloops.
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMON
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port

level.
Warm
resets
N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support warm

resets. If a warm reset is performed on an
N1EFS0/N2EFS0 board, traffic on the board is interrupted,
whereas if a warm reset is performed on an
N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board, traffic on the board is not
interrupted. If an N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board substitutes for an
N1EFS0/N2EFS0 board, traffic on the N4EFS0/N5EFS0
board is not interrupted.
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
perfor
mance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which

facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
N1EFS0 boards support the service classification based on PORT,

PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN PRI.
N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 boards support the flow

classification based on PORT, PORT++VLAN ID, or
PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
N5EFS0 boards support the traffic classification based on

PORT+S-VLAN ID.
Protoco
l
enablin
g
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
Not supported by N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 boards

Copyright Huawei
888

System
Function and
Feature
12 EoS Boards
Description
leave
Supported by N5EFS0 boards
Discard
ing of
unkno
wn
broadca
st
packets
Not supported by N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 boards
Static
broadca
st entry
Not supported
Supported by N5EFS0 boards
Traffic control
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with

IEEE 802.3x.
Traffic monitoring
N5EFS0 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic

monitoring.

The EFS0 consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, mapping
module, interface converting module, logic and control module, clock module, and power
module.
Figure 12-19 shows the functional block diagram of the EFS0 by describing how to process
1xFE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
889

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EFS0

Backplane
Control
Switch
fabric
Data
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
Network processor module

Laser
shutdown
Interface
converting
module
VCP
Network
processor
DENCP
Ethernet
access
module
ENCP
FE
LOS
Logic and
control module
Communication
+3.3 V
Clock module
Power
module
50 77 125 155
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Power Fuse
module
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power
Fuse

1.1.1.1.1042 Network Processor Module

The network processor module consists of the network processor and switch fabric. The
network processor first performs MAC functions, which include code conversion, framing of
Ethernet packets, CRC check, and Ethernet performance statistics.
After the striped Ethernet frames enter the core of network processor, the flow is classified
according to the service type and configuration requirement. The frames are encapsulated or
decapsulated. The following formats are supported:
Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)
L2 MPLS VPN
Ethernet/VLAN
In the receive direction, services are mapped and forwarded after the Tunnel and VC tags are
added according to the service configuration. In the transmit direction, the Tunnel or VC tag is
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
890

System
12 EoS Boards
extracted based on the level (P or PE) of the equipment. Services are then routed or
forwarded.
The network processor module supports the following functions:
Flow sense and flow classification
Unicast, multicast, and broadcast of the flow
Setting of data priorities
Weighted fair queuing (WFQ)
Four classes of service (CoSs)

In the upstream direction, this module first encapsulates Ethernet signals in GFP format. The
concatenation is performed. Then, the Ethernet signals are converted into SDH signals.


functions:

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
891

System
12 EoS Boards

require.
12.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFS0 has indicators and a bar code.

Figure 12-20 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFS0.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EFS0
EFS0
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EFS0
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
892

System
12 EoS Boards
The front panel of the EFS0 has no interfaces. The interfaces are available on the ETF8 or on
the EFF8. When the N5EFS0 is used with the ETF8A or EFF8A, the interfaces are available
on the ETF8A or on the EFF8A.

The EFS0 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
12.4.7 Valid Slots

The EFS0 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EFS0 cannot work
normally.
The EFS0 must be used with the ETF8, EFF8, and ETS8. When the ETS8 is used as the
interface board, the TSB8 must be used as the bridging board. For the slots valid for the
EFS0, ETS8, and TSB8 when the EFS0 works with the ETS8 and TSB8, see 12.4.9 Board
Protection.
The N5EFS0 can be used with the ETF8A and EFF8A. When the N5EFS0 works with the
ETF8A or EFF8A, the slots valid for the N5EFS0 are the same as the slots valid for the
N5EFS0 when the N5EFS0 works with the ETF8 or EFF8.
The N1EFS0 can be installed in slots 25 and 1316. In this case, the bandwidth is 622
Mbit/s.
The N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 can be installed in slots 25 and 1316. In this case, the
bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s.
Table 12-65 lists the slots valid for the EFS0 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and
EFF8.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the EFS0 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8
Corresponding Slot for the ETF8 and EFF8
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
893

System
12 EoS Boards
Slot 16
Slot 35
12.4.8 Feature Code

The EFS0 does not have the feature code.

The EFS0 supports the 1:1 TPS protection.
Figure 12-21 shows the slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0.
S
L
O
T
2
8
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
XCS
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
1 2 3 4
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
FAN
XCS
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
AUX
S
L
O
T
2
7
FAN
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
GSCC
S
L
O
T
2
6
TSB8
S
L
O
T
2
5
Protection 2
S
L
O
T
2
4
Working 2
S
L
O
T
2
3
ETS8
S
L
O
T
2
2
ETS8
S
L
O
T
2
1
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
0
TSB8
S
L
O
T
1
9
PIU
Figure 1.1 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0
Fiber routing area
In Figure 12-21, the board in slot 2 protects the board in slot 3 and the board in slot 16
protects the board in slot 15. The ETS8 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 is used
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
894

System
12 EoS Boards
with the protection EFS0. Table 12-66 lists the slots for the EFS0, ETS8, and TSB8.
Figure 1.2 Slots for the EFS0, ETS8, and TSB8
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
EFS0 (protection)
Slot 2
Slot 16
EFS0 (working)
Slot 3
Slot 15
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
ETS8
Slot 21
Slot 33


correct.
----End

Step 6 Required: Configure services. For details, see Configuring Ethernet Services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
J2 byte: The setting of the J2 byte on the interconnected equipment must be

consistent. Generally, use the default value. The default value of the J2 to be sent is
HuaWei SBS

Copyright Huawei
895

System
12 EoS Boards


Step 8 Optional: Configure the Layer 2 switching management service, including the following
tasks:
Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol
Configuring the Spanning Tree
Setting the Aging Time for the Multicast Router Port
Step 9 Optional: Configure the QoS. For details, see Configuring QoS.
Creating a LAG.
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

The EFS0 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LCAS, and QoS. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EFS0 by using the U2000:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
LCAS
Copyright Huawei
896

System
QoS
LPT
LAG
ETH OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
IGMP Snooping
12 EoS Boards

You can set parameters for the EFS0 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EFS0 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.

Table 12-67 lists the faults that occur on the EFS0 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EFS0 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.


897

System
Fault Symptom
12 EoS Boards
Common Fault Cause

half-duplex mode.
Interconnection
fault

side.

port.


fault occurs.
Packet Loss.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EFS0, see Replacing an EOS Board.

12.4.14.1 Alarms of N1EFS0

ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
LCAS_BAND_DECREASED
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RFI
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
NO_BD_SOFT
SUBCARD_ABN
TEMP_OVER
T_LOS
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
898

System
12 EoS Boards
W_R_FAIL
PROTOCOL_MM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
WRG_BD_TYPE

ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
LAG_FAIL
LCAS_BAND_DECREASED
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
NO_BD_SOFT
SLAVE_WORKING
SUBCARD_ABN
T_LOS
TPS_ALM
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE

ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAI
L
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAU
LT
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOO
P
FLOW_OVER
FPGA_ABN
FCS_ERR
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
899

System
12 EoS Boards
HP_LOM
LAG_FAIL
HARD_BAD
LCAS_PLCR
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_TLCT
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_TLCR
LP_REI_VC12
LCAS_PLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_RDI_VC12
LINK_ERR
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
NO_BD_SOFT
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
SUM_INPWR_HI
LSR_WILL_DIE
LPT_RFI
SUM_OUTPWR_LOW
SLAVE_WORKING
LTEMP_OVER
TF
SUM_INPWR_LOW
SUBCARD_ABN
TU_AIS_VC3
T_LOS
SUM_OUTPWR_HI
VCAT_LOA
TPS_ALM
TD
VCAT_LOM_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
TR_LOC
VCAT_LOM_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
T_LOSEX
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LO
S
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFL
CT
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
ALM_GFP_dCSF
PATCH_ERR
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSO
FT
WRG_BD_TYPE

ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FA
IL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FA
ULT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_L
OOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
LCT
FCS_ERR
FLOW_OVER
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
900

System
12 EoS Boards
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LINK_ERR
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
LTEMP_OVER
NO_BD_SOFT
SUBCARD_ABN
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
OUT_PWR_HIGH
OUT_PWR_LOW
T_LOSEX
TD
TEMP_OVER
TF
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
WRG_BD_TYPE
PORTMODE_MISMATCH

12.4.15.1 Performance Events of N1EFS0

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
901

System
12 EoS Boards

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

Packets Received(64
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Received(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Drop Events(times)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)
Fragments(packets)
Jabbers(packets)
Collisions(times)
Octets Received(Byte)
Packets
Received(packets)

Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Packets
in Length)(packets)
Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
Alignment Errors(frames)
FCS Errors(frames)
Good Full Frame Speed

Received(Byte/s)
Good Full Frame Octets

Transmitted(Byte)

Received(Byte)

Transmitted(Byte/s)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
902

System
12 EoS Boards

Figure 1.5 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

Packets Received(64
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Received(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Drop Events(times)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)
Fragments(packets)
Jabbers(packets)
Collisions(times)
Packets
Received(packets)

Octets in Length)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
903

System
12 EoS Boards
(packets)
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Packets
in Length)(packets)
Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)

Received(Byte/s)

Transmitted(Byte)

Received(Byte)

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Figure 1.9 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

Packets Received(64
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
904

System
12 EoS Boards
Received(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Drop Events(times)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)
Fragments(packets)
Jabbers(packets)
Collisions(times)
Packets
Received(packets)

Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Packets
in Length)(packets)
Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)

Received(Byte/s)

Transmitted(Byte)

Received(Byte)

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Figure 1.13 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
905

System
12 EoS Boards
LPSES
LPUAS
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
XCSTMPCUR
XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

ETHCOL
ETHDROP
ETHFRG
ETHJAB
ETHOVER
ETHUNDER
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXOCTETS
RXPKT1024
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKTS

ETHALI
ETHFCS
RXFULLBGOOD
RXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
RXUNICAST
TXBGOOD
TXBRDCAST
TXFULLBGOOD
TXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
TXMULCAST
TXPKT1024
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXUNICAST
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
906

System
12 EoS Boards

The technical specifications of the EFS0 include the dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EFS0 board of the N4 version.
N4EFS0.
overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the N4EFS0
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-84 lists the throughput specifications of the N4EFS0. Table 12-85 lists the packet
loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N4EFS0. Table 12-86 lists the latency
specifications of the N4EFS0. Table 12-87 lists the back-to-back specifications of the
N4EFS0.
The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment, port
rate, and VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual
configured and five VC-12s are bound on the FE port.
Table 12-84 lists the throughput specifications of the N4EFS0. The values are obtained when
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
disabled.
Copyright Huawei
907

System
12 EoS Boards
Step frame size (byte): custom
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the N4EFS0

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05)
(pks/sec)
(01,02,05) to
(01,02,03)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
11.48
17088
17088
34176
128
11.25
9502
9502
19004
256
11.13
5042
5042
10084
512
11.12
2613
2613
5226
1024
11.07
1326
1326
2652
1280
11.10
1067
1067
2134
1518
11.12
904
904
1808
Table 12-85 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N4EFS0. The values
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Resolution rate (%): none
Mode: bidirectional
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
908

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N4EFS0
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05) (%)
(01,02,05) to
(01,02,03) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
88.507
88.507
88.507
128
100.00
88.730
88.745
88.737
256
100.00
88.851
88.831
88.841
512
100.00
88.876
88.846
88.861
1024
100.00
88.901
88.890
88.895
1280
100.00
88.878
88.878
88.878
1518
100.00
88.850
88.844
88.847
Table 12-86 lists the latency specifications of the N4EFS0. The values are obtained when the
disabled.
CT: cut through or FIFO; S&F: store forward or LIFO
Measure on one receiving card only. Mode: SmartMetrics Comp. Mode
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
909

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.3 Latency specifications of the N4EFS0

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
10.00
561.4
561.4
556.2
556.2
128
10.00
644.4
644.4
634.2
634.2
256
10.00
738.4
738.4
718.0
718.0
512
10.00
948.8
948.8
907.9
907.9
1024
10.00
1371.5
1371.5
1289.6
1289.6
1280
10.00
1604.1
1604.1
1501.7
1501.7
1518
10.00
1790.4
1790.4
1669.0
1669.0
Table 12-87 lists the back-to-back specifications of the N4EFS0. The values are obtained
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.4 Back-to-back specifications of the N4EFS0

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,02,05) to
(01,02,03)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
1333
1335
2668
128
100.00
848
850
1698
256
100.00
586
587
1173
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
910

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,02,05) to
(01,02,03)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
512
100.00
445
447
892
1024
100.00
224
224
448
1280
100.00
211
212
423
1518
100.00
201
201
402
N5EFS0.
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
N5EFS0.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
911

System
12 EoS Boards
configured 3 VC-3s are bound on the FE port.
disabled.
The permitted packet loss ratio is set to 0% and the resolution rate is set to 1%.
Number of pairs: 1
Maximum rate (%): None

Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,06,01) to (01,06,02)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
148810
148810
128
100.00
84459
84459
256
100.00
45290
45290
512
100.00
23496
23496
1024
100.00
11973
11973
1280
100.00
9615
9615
1518
100.00
8127
8127
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
912

System
12 EoS Boards
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,06,01) to (01,06,02)
(%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
disabled.
CT: Cut Through (or FIFO),S&F: Store & Forward (or LIFO)
Measure on one receiving card only, Mode: SmartMetrics Comp. Mode
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
913

System
Number of pairs: 1
12 EoS Boards

Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,06,01) to
(01,06,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,06,01) to
(01,06,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
124.3
124.3
119.2
119.2
128
100.00
137.4
137.4
127.2
127.2
256
100.00
169.6
169.6
149.2
149.2
512
100.00
211.5
211.5
170.6
170.6
1024
100.00
294.4
294.4
212.4
212.4
1280
100.00
334.5
334.5
232.1
232.1
1518
100.00
368.7
368.7
247.3
247.3
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
914

System
12 EoS Boards

Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,03) to (01,01,06)
Burst Size (frames)
Total (frames)
64
100.00
297620
297620
128
100.00
168918
168918
256
100.00
90580
90580
512
100.00
46992
46992
1024
100.00
23946
23946
1280
100.00
19230
19230
1518
100.00
16254
16254

The mechanical specifications of the EFS0 are as follows:
Weight of the N1EFS0 (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the N1EFS0 at room temperature (25C) is 35 W.
12.5 EFS0A
technical specifications of the EFS0A (16xFE switching and processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the EFS0A.

The EFS0A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
12.5.2 Application
The EFS0A is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
915

System
12 EoS Boards
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

EFS0A boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.
Table 12-92 lists the functions and features supported by EFS0A boards.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by EFS0A boards
Functi
on
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
916

System
12 EoS Boards
Functi
on
and
Featu
re
Description
Port
types
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8

board.
Supports 100BASE-FX signals when working with an EFF8 board. The

optical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Provides 16 electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with

an ETF8 board.
Provides 16 optical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an

EFF8 board.

an ETF8 board, and provides 8 optical ports to receive/transmit FE signals
when working with an EFF8 board.
Provides the TPS protection for FE signals received/transmitted through 16

electrical ports when working with an ETS8 board and a TSB8 board.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
Servic
e
catego
ries
FE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 10M full-duplex, and 10M half-duplex
FE optical port: 100M full-duplex
Traffic
control at
ports
Supported (Not supported by FE

optical ports)
Supported
Query/Se
tting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of optical
power
threshold
s
Not supported
Pluggabl
e optical
module
Not supported
EPL
service
EVPL
service
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.

Copyright Huawei
917

System
Functi
on
and
Featu
re
Description
EPLAN
service
EVPLA
N service
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
The services are isolated by MPLS tags.
The services are isolated by QinQ tags.
Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the
static MAC address table that can contain 2K records. The sum of
the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses
in the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist
function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The

capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the
MAC address can be set and queried.
N1EFS0, N2EFS0, and N5EFS0 boards support the query of

dynamic MAC addresses.
Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum

number of logical ports for each VB is 48.
Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on

VB+VLAN or VB+LP.
Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge.
Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q
virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1 q/p
Supported
Frame
length
range
Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from

1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Bound
bandwidt
h
48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties

granularities.

Copyright Huawei
918

System
Functi
on
and
Featu
re
Description
Encapsul
ation
formats
Protec
tion
schem
es
Synch
ronizat
ion
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
HDLC
Not supported
LAPS
Not supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Supports the MPLS.
VLAN
technolo
gy
Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE

802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
VCTRU
NK
specifica
tions
An EFS0A board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3 and

VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths
only.
A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same
time.
TPS
Supported
BPS
Not supported
PPS
Not supported
DLAG
Not supported
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and the load sharing mode that
comply with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS

LPT
Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
STP/RS
TP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, which

comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP
Not supported
Synchro
nous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
Not supported
Copyright Huawei
919

System
Functi
on
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
1588v2
Maint
enance
feature
s
QoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
ETH
OAM
Supports CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE

802.1ag, LM and DM in compliance with ITU-T Y.1731, and
OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection,

and link performance detection in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah,
and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.
Test
Frame
Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.
Respons
e to ping
Not supported
Port
mirrorin
g
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
Supports inloops.
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
Not supported
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMON
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports.
Warm
resets
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID,

PORT+SVLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Protocol
enabling
Supported
Port
aging
Supported
Copyright Huawei
920

System
Functi
on
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
time
Fast
leave
Not supported
Discardi
ng of
unknown
broadcas
t packets
Not supported
Static
broadcas
t entry
Not supported
Traffic
contro
l
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Traffic
monit
oring
Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

The EFS0A consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, mapping
module.
Figure 12-25 shows the functional block diagram of the EFS0A by describing how to process
1xFE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
921

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EFS0A

Backplane
Control
Switch
fabric
Data
Laser
shutdown
Interface
converting
module
VCP
Network
processor
DENCP
Ethernet
access
module
ENCP
FE
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
LOS
Logic and
control module
Communication
+3.3 V
Clock module
Power
module
50 77 125 155
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Power Fuse
module
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power
Fuse


MPLS
L2 MPLS VPN
Ethernet/VLAN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
922

System
12 EoS Boards
forwarded.
WFQ
Four CoSs

In the upstream direction, this module first encapsulates Ethernet signals in LAPS or GFP
format. The concatenation is performed. Then, the Ethernet signals are converted into SDH
signals.


functions:

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
923

System
12 EoS Boards

require.
12.5.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFS0A has indicators and a bar code.

Figure 12-26 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFS0A.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EFS0A
EFS0A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EFS0A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
924

System
12 EoS Boards
The front panel of the EFS0A has no interfaces. The interfaces are available on the ETF8
board or on the EFF8 board.

The EFS0A does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
12.5.7 Valid Slots

The EFS0A must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EFS0A cannot
work normally.
The EFS0A can be used with the ETF8, EFF8, and ETS8. When the ETS8 is used as the
interface board, the TSB8 must be used as the bridging board. For the slots valid for the
EFS0A, ETS8, and TSB8 when the EFS0A works with the ETS8 and TSB8, see 12.5.9 Board
Protection.
The slots valid for the EFS0A are as follows:
The EFS0A can be installed in slots 25 and 1316 in the subrack. In this case, the
bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
Table 12-93 lists the slots valid for the EFS0A and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and
EFF8.
Figure 1.1 Slots valid for the EFS0A and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
925

System
12 EoS Boards
12.5.8 Feature Code

The EFS0A does not have the feature code.

The EFS0A supports the 1:1 TPS protection.
Figure 12-27 shows the slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0A.
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
XCS
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
5 6 7 8
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S
L L L L
O O O O
T T T T
1 2 3 4
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
FAN
XCS
FAN
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
AUX
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
FAN
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S S S S S S
L L L L L L
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
GSCC
S
L
O
T
2
5
TSB8
S
L
O
T
2
4
Protection 2
S
L
O
T
2
3
ETS8
ETS8
TSB8
S
L
O
T
2
2
Working 2
TSB8
ETS8
ETS8
S
L
O
T
2
1
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
0
PIU
S
L
O
T
1
9
TSB8
Figure 1.1 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0A
Fiber routing area
The board in slot 2 protects the board in slots 3 and the board in slot 16 protects the board in
slot 15. The ETS8 is used with the working EFS0A and the TSB8 is used with the protection
EFS0A. Table 12-94 lists the slots for the EFS0A, ETS8, and TSB8.
Figure 1.2 Slots for the EFS0A, ETS8, and TSB8
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
EFS0A (protection)
Slot 2
Slot 16
EFS0A (working)
Slot 3
Slot 15
TSB8
Slots 19 and 20
Slots 35 and 36
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
926

System
12 EoS Boards
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
ETS8
Slots 21 and 22
Slots 33 and 34


correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
927

System
12 EoS Boards
tasks:
Creating a LAG.
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

The EFS0A supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EFS0A by using the U2000:
LCAS
QoS
LPT
LAG
ETH OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
IGMP Snooping
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
928

System
12 EoS Boards

You can set parameters for the EFS0A by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EFS0A by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.

Table 12-95 lists the faults that occur on the EFS0A frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EFS0A frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.

half-duplex mode.

side.

port.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.

929

System
Fault Symptom
12 EoS Boards
Common Fault Cause

fault occurs.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EFS0A, see Replacing an EOS Board.

12.5.14.1 Alarms of N1EFS0A

ALM_GFP_dLFD
ALM_GFP_dCSF
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LPT_RFI
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
NO_BD_SOFT
TEMP_OVER
TD
T_LOSEX
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_NO_FLOW
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FA
IL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FA
ULT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_L
OOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
FLOW_OVER
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
930

System
12 EoS Boards
LCT
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LINK_ERR
LSR_WILL_DIE
LTEMP_OVER
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
OUT_PWR_HIGH
OUT_PWR_LOW
SUBCARD_ABN
TF
TPS_ALM
TR_LOC
WRG_BD_TYPE
PORTMODE_MISMATCH

12.5.15.1 Performance Events of N1EFS0A

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
BDTEMPCUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
931

System
AlignmentErrors
12 EoS Boards
FCSErrors

ETHCOL
ETHDROP
ETHFRG
ETHJAB
ETHOVER
ETHUNDER
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXOCTETS
RXPKT1024
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKTS

ETHALI
ETHFCS
RXFULLBGOOD
RXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
RXUNICAST
TXBGOOD
TXBRDCAST
TXFULLBGOOD
TXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
TXMULCAST
TXPKT1024
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXUNICAST
Figure 1.5 Statistics of RMON VCG performance

VCG_RXGOODPACKETS
VCG_RXOCTETS
VCG_RXPACKETS
VCG_RXSPEED
VCG_TXGOODPACKETS
VCG_TXOCTETS
VCG_TXPACKETS
VCG_TXSPEED

The technical specifications of the EFS0A include the dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EFS0A board of the N1 version.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
932

System
12 EoS Boards
EFS0A.
overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-101 lists the throughput specifications of the EFS0A. Table 12-102 lists the packet
loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EFS0A. Table 12-103 lists the latency
specifications of the EFS0A. Table 12-104 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EFS0A.
configured, one VC-3 is bound on the FE port, and the MAC port is set to auto-negotiation mode.
Table 12-101 lists the throughput specifications of the EFS0A. The values are obtained when
Test duration (sec): 3
Number of pairs: 1
Resolution rate (%): 0.01
Mode: bidirectional
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
933

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the EFS0A

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,11,01) to
(01,11,02)
(pks/sec)
(01,11,02) to
(01,11,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
53.50
79618
79618
159236
128
51.21
43253
43253
86506
256
49.95
22624
22624
45248
512
49.31
11585
11585
23170
1024
49.14
5884
5884
11768
1280
49.15
4726
4726
9452
1518
49.19
3998
3998
7996
Table 12-102 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EFS0A. The values
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.2 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EFS0A
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,11,01) to
(01,11,02) (%)
(01,11,02) to
(01,11,01) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
46.497
46.497
46.497
128
100.00
48.820
48.820
48.820
256
100.00
50.127
50.127
50.127
512
100.00
50.804
50.804
50.804
1024
100.00
51.115
51.115
51.115
1280
100.00
51.159
51.159
51.159
1518
100.00
51.176
51.176
51.176
Table 12-103 lists the latency specifications of the EFS0A. The values are obtained when the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
934

System
12 EoS Boards
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.3 Latency specifications of the EFS0A

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,11,01) to
(01,11,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,11,01) to
(01,11,02) (us)S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
40.00
164.3
164.3
159.2
159.2
128
40.00
199.0
199.0
188.8
188.8
256
40.00
247.0
247.0
226.6
226.6
512
40.00
357.6
357.6
357.6
357.6
1024
40.00
514.8
514.8
432.9
432.9
1280
40.00
613.1
613.1
510.7
510.7
1518
40.00
699.4
699.4
578.0
578.0
Table 12-104 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EFS0A. The values are obtained
Number of pairs: 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
935

System
Mode: bidirectional
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.4 Back-to-back specifications of the EFS0A

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,11,01) to
(01,11,02) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,11,02) to
(01,11,01)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
353
353
706
128
100.00
342
342
684
256
100.00
380
380
761
512
100.00
368
368
736
1024
100.00
282
282
564
1280
100.00
279
279
559
1518
100.00
291
291
582

The mechanical specifications of the EFS0A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.7

The maximum power consumption of the EFS0A at room temperature (25C) is 32 W.
12.6 EFS4

The EFS4 is available in three functional versions, namely, N1, N2 and N3. The difference
between the three versions is their different maximum uplink bandwidths. The N1EFS4 and
N2EFS4 are discontinued.
Table 12-105 describes the versions of the EFS4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
936

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Versions of the EFS4

Item
Description
Functional versions
The EFS4 is available in three functional versions, namely, N1, N2

and N3.
Differences
Regarding service specifications: bound bandwidth, maximum

uplink bandwidth, VCTRUNK specifications
Regarding protection schemes: LCAS, LPT, LAG
Regarding maintenance features: ETH OAM, test frame, port

mirroring, loopback capability, warm resets
QoS
Traffic monitoring
The N2EFS4 can substitute for the N1EFS4.
The N3EFS4 can substitute for the N2EFS4 and N1EFS4.
Substitution
12.6.2 Application
The EFS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer
2 switching of Ethernet services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
937

System
12 EoS Boards
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

EFS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.
Table 12-106 lists the functions and features supported by EFS4 boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by EFS4 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Port
types
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals. The optical ports comply with IEEE

802.3u.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
Provides ports on the front panel to receive/transmit 4xFE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
938

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
an
interfa
ce
board
Port
charac
teristic
s
Servic
e
catego
ries
Working
modes
Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 10M fullduplex, and 10M half-duplex
Traffic
control
at ports
Supported
Supported
Query/S
etting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of
optical
power
threshol
ds
Not supported
Pluggabl
e optical
module
Not supported
EPL
service
EVPL
service
EPLAN
service
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards support the EPLAN services that are based

on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.
Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.

Copyright Huawei
939

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
function of N3EFS4 boards supports verification of destination

MAC addresses only.
EVPLA
N
services
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s

N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support the query of dynamic MAC

addresses.
N1EFS4 boards do not support the query of dynamic MAC

addresses.


VB+VLAN or VB+LP.
virtual bridge.
N3EFS4 boards support the EVPLAN services that are based on

the IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1 q/p
Supported
Frame
length
range

Bound
bandwid
th
N1EFS4: 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3
N2EFS4/N3EFS4: 24xVC-3 or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3
Concate
nation
granulari
ties

granularities.
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC
Not supported
LAPS
Not supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports the MPLS.

Copyright Huawei
940

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
technolo
gy
VLAN
technolo
gy

802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwid
th
The maximum uplink bandwidth of an N1EFS4 board is 622

Mbit/s.
The maximum uplink bandwidth of an N2EFS4 or N3EFS4 board

is 1.25 Gbit/s.
An EFS4 board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by an N1EFS4 board is 12.
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by an N2EFS4 or N3EFS4

board is 24.
VCTRU
NK
specifica
tions
Protec
tion
schem
es
VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 12 can be bound only with lower order

paths in VC-4s numbered 1-4. VCTRUNK 13-VCTRUNK 24 can
be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s numbered 5-8.
VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12

paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
time.
TPS
Not supported
BPS
Not supported
PPS
Not supported
DLAG
Not supported
LAG
N1EFS4 boards do not support this protection scheme. N2EFS4 and

N3EFS4 boards support manual link aggregation and the load sharing
mode that comply with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS

bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. This protection scheme
is supported by N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards.
LPT
STP/RS
TP
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N1EFS4 boards support P2P LPT.
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
LPT complies with ITU-T G.7042.

Copyright Huawei
941

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
12 EoS Boards
Description
MSTP
Not supported
Synchro
nous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
ETH
OAM
N1EFS4 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support CC, LB tests, and LT tests in

compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, LM and DM in compliance with
ITU-T Y.1731, and OAM ping in compliance with Huawei
proprietary protocol.
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support OAM auto-discovery, remote

loopbacks, fault detection, and link performance detection in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in
compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
Test
Frame
N1EFS4 boards support test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.
N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards support test frames in Ethernet/GFP

bearer mode.
Respons
e to ping
Not supported
Port
mirrorin
g
N3EFS4 boards support ingress mirroring.
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
Supports inloops
Supports inloops
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level

N1EFS4/N2EFS4 boards support
inloops and outloops.
VC-12 level
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Not supported
RMON
Warm
resets
N1EFS4/N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards support warm resets. If a warm

reset is performed on an N1EFS4 board, traffic on the board is
interrupted, whereas if a warm reset is performed on an
N2EFS4/N3EFS4 board, traffic on the board is not interrupted. If an
N2EFS4/N3EFS4 board substitutes for an N1EFS4 board, traffic on
the N2EFS4/N3EFS4 board is not interrupted.

Copyright Huawei
942

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
QoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
12 EoS Boards
Description
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

N1EFS4 boards support the service classification based on PORT,

PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN PRI.
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support the flow classification based on PORT,
PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
N3EFS4 boards support the flow classification based on PORT+S-VLAN ID.
Protocol
enabling
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Not supported
Discardi
ng of
unknow
n
broadcas
t packets
Not supported
Static
broadcas
t entry
Not supported
Traffic
contro
l
Traffic
monit
oring
N3EFS4 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

The EFS4 consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, mapping
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
943

System
12 EoS Boards
module.
Figure 12-30 shows the functional block diagram of the EFS4 by describing how to process
1xFE signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EFS4
Backplane
Switch
fabric
Data
Interface
converting
module
VCP
Control
DENCP
Network
processor
ENCP
Ethernet
FE
access
module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
LOS
Logic and
control module
Communication
+3.3 V
Power
module
Clock module
50 77 125 155
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Power Fuse
module
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power
Fuse

In the receive direction, the Ethernet access module receives the Ethernet electrical signals
from Ethernet equipment such as switches or routers. At the PHY layer, the electrical signals
are decoded and the ETH_LOS alarm is detected. The electrical signals are converted from
serial signals into parallel signals and then sent to the network processor module.
layer, signals are encoded.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
MPLS
Copyright Huawei
944

System
L2 MPLS VPN
Ethernet/VLAN
12 EoS Boards
forwarded.
WFQ
Four CoSs

signals.


functions:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
945

System
12 EoS Boards


require.
12.6.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFS4 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Figure 12-31 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFS4.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EFS4
EFS4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
EFS4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
946

System
12 EoS Boards
The front panel of the EFS4 has four FE interfaces. Table 12-107 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EFS4. For information about the cables connected to the
interfaces, see 22.4.6 Straight-Through Cable and 22.4.7 Crossover Cable.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EFS4
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
FE1
RJ-45

signals.
FE2
RJ-45

signals.
FE3
RJ-45

signals.
FE4
RJ-45

signals.

Pin
Description
Grounding
Grounding
Grounding
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
947

System
Pin
Description
Grounding
12 EoS Boards

The EFS4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
12.6.7 Valid Slots

The EFS4 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EFS4 cannot work
normally.
The relationship between the slots valid for the EFS4 and the bandwidth is as follows:
When the N1EFS4 is installed in slots 18 and 1117, the bandwidth is 622 Mbit/s.
When the N2EFS4/N3EFS4 is installed in slots 18 and 1117, the bandwidth is 1.25
Gbit/s.
12.6.8 Feature Code

The EFS4 does not have the feature code.


correct.
----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
948

System
12 EoS Boards

HuaWei SBS


Step 8 Optional: Configure the L2 switching management service. Perform the following tasks:
Step 9 Optional: Configure the aggregation function for the Ethernet port. For details, see Creating a
LAG.
----End

----End

Boards.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
949

System
12 EoS Boards

The EFS4 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EFS4 by using the U2000:
LCAS
QoS
LPT
LAG
ETH OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
IGMP Snooping

You can set parameters for the EFS4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EFS4 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.

Table 12-109 lists the faults that occur on the EFS4 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EFS4 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption




Transient service
interruption
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.

950

System
Fault Symptom
12 EoS Boards
Common Fault Cause
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault

interrupted.

abnormal.

half-duplex mode.

side.

port.


fault occurs.

Packet Loss.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EFS4, see Replacing an EOS Board.


ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
LCAS_BAND_DECREASED
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RFI
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
951

System
12 EoS Boards
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
TU_AIS_VC12
NO_BD_SOFT
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
T_LOS
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
TU_AIS_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC3
W_R_FAIL
VCAT_LOA
PATCH_ERR
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
VCAT_SQM_VC12
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PROTOCOL_MM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
WRG_BD_TYPE

ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_F
AIL
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_F
AULT
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_L
OOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFL
CT
FCS_ERR
FLOW_OVER
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LAG_FAIL
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LCAS_PLCT
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LOOP_ALM
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_REI_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_RFI
LP_UNEQ_VC12
NO_BD_SOFT
SLAVE_WORKING
TU_AIS_VC3
T_LOS
TU_AIS_VC12
VCAT_LOA
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC12
TR_LOC
T_LOSEX
ALM_GFP_dCSF
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
952

System
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
12 EoS Boards
WRG_BD_TYPE

ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FA
IL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FA
ULT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_L
OOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
LCT
FCS_ERR
FLOW_OVER
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_RFI
NO_BD_SOFT
T_LOSEX
TEMP_OVER
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
WRG_BD_TYPE
PORTMODE_MISMATCH

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
953

System
12 EoS Boards

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

Packets Received(64
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Received(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Drop Events(times)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)
Fragments(packets)
Jabbers(packets)
Collisions(times)
Packets
Received(packets)

Octets in Length)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
954

System
12 EoS Boards
(packets)
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Packets
in Length)(packets)
Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)

Received(Byte/s)

Transmitted(Byte)

Received(Byte)

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Figure 1.5 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

Packets Received(64
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
955

System
12 EoS Boards
Received(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Drop Events(times)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)
Fragments(packets)
Jabbers(packets)
Collisions(times)
Packets
Received(packets)

Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Packets
in Length)(packets)
Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)

Received(Byte/s)

Transmitted(Byte)

Received(Byte)

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Figure 1.9 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
956

System
12 EoS Boards
LPSES
LPUAS
XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN
XCSTMPCUR

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

ETHCOL
ETHDROP
ETHFRG
ETHJAB
ETHOVER
ETHUNDER
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXOCTETS
RXPKT1024
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKTS

ETHALI
ETHFCS
RXFULLBGOOD
RXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
RXUNICAST
TXBGOOD
TXBRDCAST
TXFULLBGOOD
TXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
TXMULCAST
TXPKT1024
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXUNICAST

The technical specifications of the EFS4 include the dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

Table 12-122 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFS4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
957

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EFS4
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
Line code pattern

(100M)
interface

N2EFS4.
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
N2EFS4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
958

System
12 EoS Boards
configured and five VC-12s are bound on the FE port.
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05)
(pks/sec)
(01,02,05) to
(01,02,03)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
11.41
16984
16984
33968
128
11.18
9441
9441
18882
256
11.10
5026
5026
10052
512
11.09
2605
2605
5210
1024
11.00
1317
1317
2634
1280
11.09
1066
1066
2132
1518
11.07
900
900
1800
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
959

System
12 EoS Boards
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05) (%)
(01,02,05) to
(01,02,03) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
88.510
88.513
88.512
128
100.00
88.724
88.729
88.726
256
100.00
88.858
88.859
88.859
512
100.00
88.858
88.861
88.859
1024
100.00
88.888
88.914
88.901
1280
100.00
88.895
88.875
88.885
1518
100.00
88.870
88.871
88.870
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
960

System
12 EoS Boards

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
10.00
586.1
586.1
581.0
581.0
128
10.00
644.4
644.4
634.2
634.2
256
10.00
726.3
726.3
705.9
705.9
512
10.00
969.0
969.0
928.1
928.1
1024
10.00
1382.6
1382.6
1300.6
1300.6
1280
10.00
1609.0
1609.0
1506.6
1506.6
1518
10.00
1804.9
1804.9
1683.4
1683.4
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,02,03) to
(01,02,05) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,02,05) to
(01,02,03)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
1337
1339
2676
128
100.00
852
852
1704
256
100.00
583
583
1166
512
100.00
441
441
882
1024
100.00
225
228
453
1280
100.00
210
210
420
1518
100.00
200
200
400
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
961

System
12 EoS Boards
N3EFS4.
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
N3EFS4.
configured and three VC-3s are bound on the FE port.
disabled.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
962

System
Number of pairs: 1
Maximum rate (%): None
12 EoS Boards

Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,04,01) to (01,04,02)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
148810
148810
128
100.00
84459
84459
256
100.00
45290
45290
512
100.00
23496
23496
1024
100.00
11973
11973
1280
100.00
9615
9615
1518
100.00
8127
8127
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,04,01) to (01,04,02)
(%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
963

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,04,01) to (01,04,02)
(%)
Average (%)
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
disabled.
Measure on one receiving card only
Number of pairs: 1

Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,04,01) to
(01,04,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,04,01) to
(01,04,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
129.3
129.3
124.2
124.2
128
100.00
142.6
142.6
132.4
132.4
256
100.00
171.1
171.1
150.6
150.6
512
100.00
215.7
215.7
174.7
174.7
1024
100.00
298.4
298.4
216.5
216.5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
964

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,04,01) to
(01,04,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,04,01) to
(01,04,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
1280
100.00
339.8
339.8
237.4
237.4
1518
100.00
374.7
374.7
253.3
253.3
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1

Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,03) to (01,01,06)
Burst Size (frames)
Total (frames)
64
100.00
297620
297620
128
100.00
168918
168918
256
100.00
90580
90580
512
100.00
46992
46992
1024
100.00
23946
23946
1280
100.00
19230
19230
1518
100.00
16254
16254

The mechanical specifications of the EFS4 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
965

System
12 EoS Boards

12.7 EGS2

The EGS2 is available in two functional versions, namely, N2 and N3. The N2EGS2 is
discontinued.
Table 12-131 describes the versions of the EGS2.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the EGS2
Item
Description
Functional version
The EGS2 is available in two functional versions, namely, N2 and

N3.
Difference
Regarding interface specifications: interface types
Regarding protection schemes: , LPT
Regarding maintenance features: ETH OAM, , , port mirroring,

loopback capability, warm resets
IGMP snooping
Traffic monitoring
Substitution
The N3EGS2 can substitute for the N2EGS2.
12.7.2 Application
The EGS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
966

System
12 EoS Boards
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1
When the service converging FE services into GE services is configured, the GE switching board can be
set to the 1000M full-duplex mode or auto-negotiation mode, the VLAN of the convergence service is
variable, and the binding granularity can be at the VC-3 or VC-12 level.

EGS2 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.
Table 12-132 lists the functions and features supported by EGS2 boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by EGS2 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Processes 2xGE services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
967

System
12 EoS Boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Port
types
EGS2 boards support 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The

802.3z. The optical ports use SFP optical modules and support hot swapping.
When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission
distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum
transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different
requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also
be used.
N3EGS2 boards also support 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical ports.

The electrical ports support the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate
can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. N3EGS2 boards support SFP
electrical ports and hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100
m.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
GE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex, 100M

full-duplex, and 10M full-duplex (only N3EGS2 boards support
GE electrical port.)
GE optical port: auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex
Traffic
control at
ports
Supported
Supported
Query/Se
tting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of optical
power
threshold
s
Not supported
Pluggabl

Copyright Huawei
968

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
e optical
module
Servic
e
catego
ries
EPL
service
EVPL
service
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
function of N3EGS2 boards supports verification of destination
MAC addresses only.


N3EGS2 supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE
802.1d MAC bridge.
EVPLA
N
services
virtual bridge.
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1 q/p
Supported
Frame
length
range

Bound
bandwidt
h
N2EGS2: 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3.
EPLAN
service
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
N3EGS2: 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3, 16xVC-4.

Copyright Huawei
969

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Protec
tion
schem
es
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
Description
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties
N2EGS2: VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X 63), VC-3-Xv (X 24).
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC
Not supported
LAPS
Not supported
GFP-F
Supported
N3EGS2: VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X 63), VC-3-Xv (X 24), VC4-Xv (x 8).
MPLS
technolo
gy
Supported
VLAN
technolo
gy

802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. An EGS2 board can

VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions

In the case of N2EGS2 boards, VCTRUNK 1VCTRUNK 12 can

be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s numbered 14.
VCTRUNK 13VCTRUNK 24 can be bound only with lower
order paths in VC-4s numbered 58. VCTRUNK 25VCTRUNK
36 can be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s numbered
912. VCTRUNK 37VCTRUNK 48 can be bound only with
lower order paths in VC-4s numbered 1316.
In the case of N3EGS2 boards, there is no requirement regarding

VCTRUNK binding. One VCTRUNK can be bound with up to 24
VC-3s.

only.
time.
TPS
Not supported
BPS
Not supported
PPS
Not supported
DLAG
Not supported
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and the load sharing mode that
Copyright Huawei
970

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
comply with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
LCAS

LPT
N2EGS2 boards support P2P LPT.
N3EGS2 boards support P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
STP/RST
P

MSTP
Not supported
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
ETH
OAM
N2EGS2 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
N3EGS2 boards support CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance

with IEEE 802.1ag, LM and DM in compliance with ITU-T
Y.1731, and OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.
N3EGS2 boards support OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks,

fault detection, and link performance detection in compliance with
IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei
proprietary protocol.
Test
Frame
Supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
N3EGS2 boards support ingress mirroring.
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
Supports inloops.
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
N2EGS2 boards support inloops

and outloops. N3EGS2 boards do
not support inloops or outloops.
VC-12 level
Not supported

Copyright Huawei
971

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
QoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
12 EoS Boards
Description
RMON
Warm
resets
N2EGS2/N3EGS2 boards support warm resets. If a warm reset is

performed on an N2EGS2 board, traffic on the board is interrupted,
whereas if a warm reset is performed on an N3EGS2 board, traffic on
the board is not interrupted. If an N3EGS2 board substitutes for an
N2EGS2 board, traffic on the N3EGS2 board is not interrupted.
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or

PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Protocol
enabling
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported by N3EGS2 boards
Discardi
ng of
unknown
broadcast
packets
Static
broadcast
entry
NOTE
N3EGS2 boards support the IGMP snooping fast-leave function when they
substitute for N2EGS2 boards using the board version replacement function.
Traffic
contro
l
Traffic
monit
oring
N3EGS2 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
972

System
12 EoS Boards

The EGS2 consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, mapping
module.
Figure 12-35 shows the functional block diagram of the EGS2 by describing how to process
1xGE signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EGS2
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
Interface
converting
module
VCP
Laser
shutdown
DENCP
ENCP
Network Control Switch

processor
fabric
Data
GE Ethernet
access
module
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
LOS
Communication
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Clock module
50
77
MHz MHz
Power
module
125 155
MHz MHz
Power
module
Fuse
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
973

System
12 EoS Boards

MPLS
L2 MPLS VPN
Ethernet/VLAN
forwarded.
WFQ
Four CoSs

signals.


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
974

System
12 EoS Boards
functions:


require.
12.7.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 12-36 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2 that has the
GE optical interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
975

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2 that has the GE optical interface
EGS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EGS2
The N3EGS2 can also be installed with the GE electrical interface. Figure 12-37 shows the
appearance of the front panel of the N3EGS2 that has the GE electrical interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
976

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the N3EGS2 that has the GE electrical interface
EGS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EGS2
The front panel of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2 has two GE optical interfaces. Table 12-133
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
977

System
12 EoS Boards
describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC (swappable)
OUT2/IN2
LC (swappable)
When the N3EGS2 has the electrical interfaces, the two GE electrical interfaces are of the
same type and have the same usage. Table 12-134 describes the types and usage of the
electrical interfaces of the N3EGS2.
Figure 1.2 Electrical interfaces of the N3EGS2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
GE
RJ-45 (swappable)
Transmits and receives 1000BASE-T signals.
Table 12-135 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N3EGS2.
Figure 1.3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N3EGS2
Pin
Description
BI_DA+
BI_DA
BI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DC
BI_DB
BI_DD+
BI_DD

The EGS2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
12.7.7 Valid Slots

The EGS2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EGS2 cannot work
normally.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
978

System
12 EoS Boards
The N2EGS2 can be installed in slots 18 and 1116. When the N2EGS2 is installed in
slots 14, 15, and 16, the bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. When the N2EGS2 is installed in
slots 58 and 1114, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
The N3EGS2 can be installed in slots 18 and 1116. In this case, the bandwidth is 2.5
Gbit/s.
12.7.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the EGS2 indicates the type of interface.
Table 12-136 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EGS2 and the type of
interface.
Figure 1.4 Relationship between the feature code of the EGS2 and the type of interface
Board
Feature Code
Type of Interface
SSN2EGS210 and
SSN2EGS310
10
SSN2EGS211 and
SSN2EGS311
11
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
SSN2EGS212 and
SSN2EGS312
12
1000BASE-VX (40 km)
SSN2EGS213 and
SSN2EGS213
13
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)
SSN3EGS214
14
1000BASE-T (100 m)


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
979

System
12 EoS Boards
correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS


tasks:
Creating a LAG.
----End

----End

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
980

System
12 EoS Boards
Boards.
----End

The EGS2 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EGS2 by using the U2000:
LCAS
QoS
LPT
LAG
ETH OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
IGMP Snooping

You can set parameters for the EGS2 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EGS2 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.

Table 12-137 lists the faults that occur on the EGS2 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
981

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EGS2 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.

half-duplex mode.

side.

port.


fault occurs.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EGS2, see Replacing an EOS Board.

12.7.13.1 Alarms of N2EGS2

ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
982

System
12 EoS Boards
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LAG_FAIL
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_TIM_VC12
LSR_NO_FITED
NO_BD_SOFT
LP_UNEQ_VC3
SUBCARD_ABN
T_LOS
SLAVE_WORKING
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TPS_ALM
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
TU_LOP_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
VCAT_LOM_VC12
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
TR_LOC
PATCH_ERR
T_LOSEX
ETH_NO_FLOW
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
WRG_BD_TYPE

ALM_GFP_dLFD
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FA
IL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAU
LT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_L
OOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFL
CT
FCS_ERR
FLOW_OVER
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LINK_ERR
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC12
HP_RDI
LP_REI_VC12
HP_REI
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
983

System
12 EoS Boards
LP_SLM_VC12
HP_SLM
LP_TIM_VC12
HP_TIM
LP_UNEQ_VC12
HP_UNEQ
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
LTEMP_OVER
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
NO_BD_SOFT
PORT_MODULE_OFFLI
NE
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
OUT_PWR_HIGH
OUT_PWR_LOW
T_LOSEX
TD
TEMP_OVER
TF
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
WRG_BD_TYPE
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
ALM_GFP_dCSF

12.7.14.1 Performance Events of N2EGS2

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments Jabbers
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors
AlignmentErrors
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
984

System
12 EoS Boards

Packets Received(64
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Multicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Jabbers(packets/s)

Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Transmitted(65~127
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Unicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte/s)
Alignment Errors(frames/s)

Figure 1.5 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
985

System
12 EoS Boards
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
BDTEMPCUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
VC3BBE
VC3ES
VC3UAS
VC3CSES
VC3SES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FECSES
VC3FEUAS
DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

ETHDROP
ETHFRG
ETHJAB
ETHOVER
ETHUNDER
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXOCTETS
RXPKT1024
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKTS

ETHALI
ETHFCS
RXUNICAST
TXBGOOD
TXBRDCAST
TXMULCAST
TXPKT1024
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXUNICAST
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
986

System
12 EoS Boards

VCG_RXGOODPACKETS
VCG_RXOCTETS
VCG_RXPACKETS
VCG_RXSPEED
VCG_TXGOODPACKETS
VCG_TXOCTETS
VCG_TXPACKETS
VCG_TXSPEED

The technical specifications of the EGS2 include the parameters specified for optical
1.1.1.1.1115 Parameter Specified for Optical Interfaces

Table 12-147 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGS2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGS2
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
1000BASEVX (40 km)
1000BASELX (10 km)
1000BASE-SX
(0.5 km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode LC
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-2 to 5
-5 to 0
-9 to -3
-9.5 to -2.5
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1500 to 1580
1275 to 1350
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-23
-20
-17
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
30
30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
987

System
Parameter
12 EoS Boards
Value
(dB)

Table 12-148 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EGS2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EGS2
Type of Interface
Code Type
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5
Only the EGS2 boards of the N3 version supports the GE electrical interfaces.


specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EGS2 board of the N2 version.
N2EGS2.
overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the N2EGS2
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-149 lists the throughput specifications of the N2EGS2. Table 12-150 lists the packet
loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N2EGS2. Table 12-151 lists the latency
specifications of the N2EGS2. Table 12-152 lists the back-to-back specifications of the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
988

System
12 EoS Boards
N2EGS2.
configured and five VC-12s are bound on the GE port.
Table 12-149 lists the throughput specifications of the N2EGS2. The values are obtained
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the N2EGS2

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02)
(pks/sec)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
1.15
17086
17086
34172
128
1.12
9501
9501
19002
256
1.12
5094
5094
10188
512
1.13
2660
2660
5320
1024
1.12
1346
1346
2692
1280
1.13
1088
1088
2176
1518
1.14
925
925
1850
Table 12-150 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N2EGS2. The values
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
989

System
12 EoS Boards
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.2 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N2EGS2
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) (%)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
98.846
98.846
98.846
128
100.00
98.869
98.868
98.868
256
100.00
98.874
98.875
98.874
512
100.00
98.866
98.863
98.865
1024
100.00
98.870
98.870
98.870
1280
100.00
98.863
98.861
98.862
1518
100.00
98.855
98.855
98.855
Table 12-151 lists the latency specifications of the N2EGS2. The values are obtained when
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
990

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.3 Latency specifications of the N2EGS2

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
1.00
555.8
555.8
555.3
555.3
128
1.00
615.2
615.2
614.2
614.2
256
1.00
734.6
734.6
732.6
732.6
512
1.00
914.0
914.0
909.9
909.9
1024
1.00
1313.7
1313.7
1305.6
1305.6
1280
1.00
1523.1
1523.1
1512.9
1512.9
1518
1.00
1706.6
1706.6
1694.4
1694.4
Table 12-152 lists the back-to-back specifications of the N2EGS2. The values are obtained
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.4 Back-to-back specifications of the N2EGS2

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,01,02) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
1236
1236
2472
128
100.00
1321
1323
2644
256
100.00
1070
1070
2140
512
100.00
934
934
1868
1024
100.00
468
468
936
1280
100.00
458
458
916
1518
100.00
450
453
903
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
991

System
12 EoS Boards
N3EGS2.
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
N3EGS2.
configured and 12 VC-3s are bound on the GE port.
disabled.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
992

System
Number of pairs: 1
Maximum rate (%): 65
12 EoS Boards

Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,04,01) to (01,04,02)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
60.00
892857
892857
128
58.73
496032
496032
256
57.98
262605
262605
512
58.08
136463
136463
1024
58.00
69444
69444
1280
58.04
55804
55804
1518
58.04
47170
47170
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,04,01) to (01,04,02)
(%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
39.033
39.033
128
100.00
40.323
40.323
256
100.00
41.081
41.081
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
993

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,04,01) to (01,04,02)
(%)
Average (%)
512
100.00
41.492
41.492
1024
100.00
41.703
41.703
1280
100.00
41.744
41.744
1518
100.00
41.769
41.769
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Step rate (%): 10.00

Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,04,01) to
(01,04,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,04,01) to
(01,04,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
60.00
89.9
89.9
89.4
89.4
128
58.73
94.8
94.8
93.8
93.8
256
57.98
97.4
97.4
95.3
95.3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
994

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,04,01) to
(01,04,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,04,01) to
(01,04,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
512
58.08
108.9
108.9
104.9
104.9
1024
58.00
123.4
123.4
115.3
115.3
1280
58.04
129.2
129.2
119.0
119.0
1518
58.04
138.0
138.0
125.8
125.8
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1

Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,04,01) to (01,04,02)
Burst Size (frames)
Total (frames)
64
60.00
1785714
1785714
128
58.73
992064
992064
256
57.98
525210
525210
512
58.08
272926
272926
1024
58.00
138888
138888
1280
58.04
111608
111608
1518
58.04
94340
94340
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
995

System
12 EoS Boards

The mechanical specifications of the EGS2 are as follows:
Weight of the N2EGS2 (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the N2EGS2 at room temperature (25C) is 43 W.
12.8 EMS2

The EMS2 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
12.8.2 Application
The EMS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
996

System
12 EoS Boards
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1
set only to the 1000M full-duplex mode, the VLAN of the convergence service is variable, and the
binding granularity can be at the VC-3 or VC-12 level.

EMS2 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link convergence, and multicast functions.
Table 12-157 lists the functions and features supported by EMS2 boards.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by EMS2 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits and processes 2xGE and 16xFE services.
Port
types
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports

support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The
optical ports use pluggable SFP optical modules. When the multi-mode optical
fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the singlemode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The
Copyright Huawei
997

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission
distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.
Supports 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical ports. The electrical ports

support the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The board supports pluggable SFP electrical ports.
The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8 board

and supports 100BASE-FX signals when working with an EFF8 board. The
electrical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board

an ETF8 board.

EFF8 board.

Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
GE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex, 100M

full-duplex, and 10M full-duplex
GE optical port: auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex
FE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 10M full-duplex, and 10M half-duplex (This working
mode is supported only when the EMS2 board works with the
ETF8 board.)
FE optical port: 100M full-duplex (This working mode is

supported only when the EMS2 board works with the EFF8
board.)
Traffic
control at
ports
Supported (Not supported by FE

optical ports)
Supported
Query/Se
tting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of optical
power
Not supported

Copyright Huawei
998

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
threshold
s
Servic
e
catego
ries
Pluggabl
e optical
module
EPL
service
EVPL
service
EPLAN
service
EVPLA
N service
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only.


MAC bridge.
Supports the configuration of up to 4096 VLAN services.
virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad virtual bridge.
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1q/p
Supported
Frame
length
range


Copyright Huawei
999

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Protec
tion
schem
es
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
Description
Bound
bandwidt
h
48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties
VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X 63), VC-3-Xv (X 12).
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC
Not supported
LAPS
Not supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy

802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
2.5 Gbit/s
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions


only.
time.
TPS
Not supported
BPS
Not supported
PPS
Not supported
DLAG
Not supported
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and load sharing link aggregation

in compliance with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS

LPT

Copyright Huawei
1000

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
Description
STP/RST
P

MSTP
Not supported
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
ETH
OAM


protocol.
Test
Frame
Supports test frames in Ethernet/GFP bearer mode.
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
Supports inloops.
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
Not supported
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMON
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and

VCTRUNKs.
Warm
resets
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events


Copyright Huawei
1001

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
QoS
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN,

PORT+SVLAN, and PORT+VLAN+PRI.
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protocol
enabling
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported
Discardi
ng of
unknown
broadcast
packets
Supported
Static
broadcast
entry
Supported
12 EoS Boards
Traffic
contro
l
Traffic
monit
oring
Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

The EMS2 consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, mapping
module.
Figure 12-41 shows the functional block diagram of the EMS2 by describing how to process
1xGE/FE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1002

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EMS2

Backplane
Cross-connect unit
Interface
converting
module
VCP
DENCP

Laser
shutdown
ENCP

processor
fabric
Data
GE/FE Ethernet
access
module
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
LOS
Communication
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Clock module
50
77
MHz MHz
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
125 155
MHz MHz


decapsulated. The Ethernet/VLAN format is supported.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1003

System
WFQ
Four CoSs
12 EoS Boards

In the upstream direction, this module first encapsulates Ethernet signals in LAPS, GFP-F, or
HDLC format. The concatenation is performed. The LCAS function is supported. Then, the
Ethernet signals are converted into SDH signals.


functions:


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1004

System
12 EoS Boards
require.
12.8.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EMS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 12-42 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMS2 that has the GE optical
interface.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EMS2 that has the GE optical interface
EMS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EMS2
Figure 12-43 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMS2 that has the GE electrical
interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1005

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the EMS2 that has the GE electrical interface
EMS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EMS2
The front panel of the EMS2 has two interfaces. Table 12-158 describes the types and usage
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1006

System
12 EoS Boards
of the interfaces of the EMS2 when the EMS2 has the optical interfaces. When the EMS2 has
the electrical interfaces, the two GE electrical interfaces are of the same type and have the
same usage. Table 12-159 describes the types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the
EMS2.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the EMS2
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC (swappable)
Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX

signals.
OUT2/IN2
LC (swappable)

signals.
Figure 1.2 Electrical interfaces of the EMS2

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
GE
RJ-45
(swappable)
Table 12-160 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the EMS2.
Figure 1.3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the EMS2
Pin
Description
BI_DA+
BI_DA
BI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DC
BI_DB
BI_DD+
BI_DD

The EMS2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1007

System
12 EoS Boards
12.8.7 Valid Slots

The EMS2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EMS2 cannot work
normally.
The EMS2 can be used with the ETF8 and EFF8.
The EMS2 can be installed in slots 16 and 1316. In this case, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
Table 12-161 lists the slots valid for the EMS2 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and
EFF8.
Figure 1.4 Slots valid for the EMS2 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8
Slot Valid for the EMS2
Corresponding Slots for the ETF8 and EFF8
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 6
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36
12.8.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the EMS2 indicates the type of interface.
Table 12-162 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EMS2 and the type of
interface.
Figure 1.5 Relationship between the feature code of the EMS2 and the type of interface
Board
Feature Code
Type of Interface
SSN1EMS210
10
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)
SSN1EMS211
11
SSN1EMS212
12
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
SSN1EMS213
13
1000BASE-VX (40 km)
SSN1EMS214
14
1000BASE-T (100 m)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1008

System
12 EoS Boards


correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS


tasks:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1009

System
12 EoS Boards
Creating a LAG.
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

The EMS2 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LCAS, and LPT. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EMS2 by using the U2000:
LCAS
LPT
LAG
ETH OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
IGMP Snooping

You can set parameters for the EMS2 by using the U2000.
You can use set the following main parameters for the EMS2 by using the U2000:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1010

System
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
12 EoS Boards
Parameter Settings.

Table 12-163 lists the faults that occur on the EMS2 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EMS2 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.

half-duplex mode.

side.

port.


fault occurs.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.

1011

System
12 EoS Boards

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EMS2, see Replacing an EOS Board.

12.8.13.1 Alarms of N1EMS2

ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAI
L
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FA
ULT
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
LCT
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
FLOW_OVER
HP_LOM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LINK_ERR
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC12
LP_REI_VC3
LP_REI_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_SLM_VC12
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC12
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
LTEMP_OVER
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
NO_BD_SOFT
PORT_MODULE_OFFLIN
E
SUBCARD_ABN
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
OUT_PWR_HIGH
OUT_PWR_LOW
T_LOSEX
TD
TEMP_OVER
TF
TR_LOC
TU_AIS_VC12
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3
LSR_WILL_DIE
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1012

System
12 EoS Boards
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
FCS_ERR
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LO
OP
VCAT_LOM_VC4
WRG_BD_TYPE
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC4
PORTMODE_MISMATCH

12.8.14.1 Performance Events of N1EMS2

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
BDTEMPCUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1013

System
12 EoS Boards

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors

ETHCOL
ETHDROP
ETHFRG
ETHJAB
ETHOVER
ETHUNDER
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXOCTETS
RXPKT1024
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKTS

ETHALI
ETHFCS
RXFULLBGOOD
RXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
RXUNICAST
TXBGOOD
TXBRDCAST
TXFULLBGOOD
TXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
TXMULCAST
TXPKT1024
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXUNICAST

The technical specifications of the EMS2 include the parameters specified for optical
interfaces, laser safety class, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Table 12-168 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EMS2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EMS2
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
1000BASE-ZX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
1000BASE-

Copyright Huawei
1000BASE-
1000BASE-SX
1014

System
12 EoS Boards
Parameter
Value
interface
(80 km)
VX (40 km)
LX (10 km)
(0.5 km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode LC
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-2 to 5
-5 to 0
-9 to -3
-9.5 to -2.5
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1500 to 1580
1275 to 1350
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-23
-20
-17
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30

Table 12-169 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EMS2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EMS2
Type of Interface
Code Type
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5

specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EMS2 board of the N1 version.
EMS2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1015

System
12 EoS Boards
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-170 and Table 12-171 list the throughput specifications of the EMS2. Table 12-172
and Table 12-173 list the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS2. Table 12174 and Table 12-175 list the latency specifications of the EMS2. Table 12-176 and Table 12177 list the back-to-back specifications of the EMS2.
configured and three VC-3s is bound on the FE port, or EPL services are configured and 48 VC-12s
are bound on the GE port.
Table 12-170 lists the throughput specifications of the EMS2 (three VC-3s is bound on the FE
port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Maximum rate (%): none
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1016

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the EMS2 (three VC-3s is bound on the FE port)
Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,09,01) to (01,09,02)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
148810
148810
128
100.00
84459
84459
256
100.00
45290
45290
512
100.00
23496
23496
1024
100.00
11973
11973
1280
100.00
9615
9615
1518
100.00
8127
8127
Table 12-171 lists the throughput specifications of the EMS2 (48 VC-12s are bound on the
GE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.2 Throughput specifications of the EMS2 (48 VC-12s are bound on the GE port)
Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,05,01) to (01,05,02)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
11.41
169837
339674
128
10.82
91374
182748
256
10.19
46160
92320
512
10.20
23965
47930
1024
10.20
12212
24424
1280
10.20
9809
19618
1518
10.20
8288
16576
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1017

System
12 EoS Boards
Table 12-172 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS2 (three VC-3s is
bound on the FE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.3 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS2 (three VC-3s is bound on the
FE port)
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,09,01) to (01,09,02)
(%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
Table 12-173 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS2 (48 VC-12s are
bound on the GE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1018

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.4 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS2 (48 VC-12s are bound on the
GE port)
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,05,01) to (01,05,02)
(%)
Average (%)
64
11.41
0.000
0.000
128
10.82
0.000
0.000
256
10.19
0.000
0.000
512
10.20
0.000
0.000
1024
10.20
0.000
0.000
1280
10.20
0.000
0.000
1518
10.20
0.000
0.000
Table 12-174 lists the latency specifications of the EMS2 (three VC-3s is bound on the FE
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1019

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.5 Latency specifications of the EMS2 (three VC-3s is bound on the FE port)
Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,09,01) to
(01,09,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,09,01) to
(01,09,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
127.1
127.1
121.9
121.9
128
100.00
144.1
144.1
133.9
133.9
256
100.00
172.2
172.2
151.8
151.8
512
100.00
215.3
215.3
174.4
174.4
1024
100.00
299.8
299.8
217.8
217.8
1280
100.00
341.7
341.7
239.3
239.3
1518
100.00
377.1
377.1
255.7
255.7
Table 12-175 lists the latency specifications of the EMS2 (48 VC-12s are bound on the GE
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.6 Latency specifications of the EMS2 (48 VC-12s are bound on the GE port)
Frame
Size
(byte)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)

Copyright Huawei
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
1020

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
128
10.82
663.9
663.9
662.8
662.8
256
10.19
683.6
683.6
681.6
681.6
512
10.20
717.3
717.3
713.3
713.3
1024
10.20
789.6
789.6
781.5
781.5
1280
10.20
822.1
822.1
811.9
811.9
1518
10.20
846.9
846.9
834.8
834.8
Table 12-176 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EMS2 (three VC-3s is bound on the
FE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.7 Back-to-back specifications of the EMS2 (three VC-3s is bound on the FE port)
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,03) to (01,01,06)
Burst Size (frames)
Total (frames)
64
100.00
297620
297620
128
100.00
168918
168918
256
100.00
90580
90580
512
100.00
46992
46992
1024
100.00
23946
23946
1280
100.00
19230
19230
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1021

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,03) to (01,01,06)
Burst Size (frames)
Total (frames)
1518
100.00
16254
16254
Table 12-177 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EMS2 (48 VC-12s are bound on the
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.8 Back-to-back specifications of the EMS2 (48 VC-12s are bound on the GE port)
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,03,01) to (01,03,02)
Burst Size (frames)
Total (frames)
64
11.41
339674
679348
128
10.82
182748
365496
256
10.19
92320
184640
512
10.20
47930
95860
1024
10.20
24424
48848
1280
10.20
19610
39220
1518
10.20
16576
33152

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1022

System
12 EoS Boards

The mechanical specifications of the EMS2 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.8

The maximum power consumption of the EMS2 at room temperature (25C) is 40 W.
12.9 EMS4

The EMS4 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
12.9.2 Application
The EMS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1023

System
12 EoS Boards
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

EMS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link convergence, and multicast functions.
Table 12-178 lists the functions and features supported by EMS4 boards.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features supported by EMS4 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits and processes 4xGE and 16xFE services
Port
types
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports

support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The
optical ports use SFP optical modules. When the multi-mode optical fiber is
used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode
optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical
Copyright Huawei
1024

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance
such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.
Supports 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical ports. The electrical ports

support the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s, or. 1000 Mbit/s. EMS4 boards support SFP electrical ports and hot
swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8 board

and supports 100BASE-FX signals when working with an EFF8 board. The
electrical/optical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board

an ETF8 board.

EFF8 board.

Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
1000M full-duplex
Traffic
control at
ports
Supported
Not supported
Query/Se
tting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of optical
power
threshold
s
Not supported
Pluggabl
e optical
module
EPL
service
EVPL
Servic
e
catego
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1025

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
ries
service
EPLAN
service
EVPLA
N service
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the
static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The
blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC
addresses only.


MAC bridge.
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1 q/p
Supported
Frame
length
range

Bound
bandwidt
h
16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 1008xVC-12
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X 64), VC-3-Xv (X 24), and

VC-4-Xv (X 8).
Encapsul
HDLC

Copyright Huawei
Supported
1026

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Protec
tion
schem
es
12 EoS Boards
Description
ation
formats
LAPS
Supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy

802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
2.5 Gbit/s.
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
Number of VCTRUNKs: 64
TPS
Not supported
BPS
Supported
PPS
Supported
DLAG
Supported
LAG
Notes for configuration:

The maximum bandwidth of a VCTRUNK is 1.256 Gbit/s. A
VCTRUNK can be bound to a maximum of eight VC-4s, 24 VC-3s,
or 63 VC-12s.

Synch
roniza
tion
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
LCAS

LPT
STP/RST
P

MSTP
Supported
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported

Copyright Huawei
1027

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
ETH
OAM
QoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards


protocol.
Test
Frame
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Not supported
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
Supports inloops.
Not supported
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
Not supported
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMON

VCTRUNKs.
Warm
resets
Supported
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or

PORT+SVLAN.
Protocol
enabling
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported

Copyright Huawei
1028

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Traffic
contro
l
12 EoS Boards
Description
Fast
leave
Supported
Discardi
ng of
unknown
broadcast
packets
Supported
Static
broadcast
entry
Supported

The EMS4 consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, mapping
module.
Figure 12-46 shows the functional block diagram of the EMS4 by describing how to process
1xGE/FE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1029

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EMS4

Backplane
Cross-connect unit
Interface
converting
module
VCP
DENCP

Laser
shutdown
ENCP

processor
fabric
Data
GE/FE Ethernet
access
module
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
LOS
Communication
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Clock module
50
77
MHz MHz
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
125 155
MHz MHz


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1030

System
WFQ
Four CoSs
12 EoS Boards

HDLC format. The concatenation is performed. The LCAS function is supported. Then, the


functions:


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1031

System
12 EoS Boards
require.
12.9.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EMS4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 12-47 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMS4 that has the GE optical
interface.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EMS4 that has the GE optical interface
EMS4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
LINK ACT
1
2
3
4
EMS4
Figure 12-48 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMS4 that has the GE electrical
interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1032

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the EMS4 that has the GE electrical interface
EMS4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
LINK ACT
1
2
3
4
EMS4
The front panel of the EMS4 has four interfaces. Table 12-179 describes the types and usage
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1033

System
12 EoS Boards
of the optical interfaces of the EMS4. When the EMS4 has the electrical interfaces, the four
GE electrical interfaces are of the same type and have the same usage. Table 12-180 describes
the types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the EMS4.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the EMS4
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC (swappable)

signals.
OUT2/IN2
LC (swappable)

signals.
OUT3/IN3
LC (swappable)

signals.
OUT4/IN4
LC (swappable)

signals.
Figure 1.2 Electrical interfaces of the EMS4

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
GE
RJ-45
(swappable)
Table 12-181 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the EMS4.
Figure 1.3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the EMS4
Pin
Description
BI_DA+
BI_DA
BI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DC
BI_DB
BI_DD+
BI_DD
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1034

System
12 EoS Boards

The EMS4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
12.9.7 Valid Slots

The EMS4 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EMS4 cannot work
normally.
The EMS4 can be used with the ETF8 and EFF8.
The EMS4 can be installed in slots 16 and 1316. When the EMS4 is installed in slots 14,
15, and 16, the bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. When the EMS4 is installed in slots 5, 6, 13, and 14,
the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
Table 12-182 lists the slots valid for the EMS4 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and
EFF8.
Figure 1.4 Slots valid for the EMS4 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8
Slot Valid for the EMS4
Corresponding Slots for the ETF8 and EFF8
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 6
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36
12.9.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the EMS4 indicates the type of interface.
Table 12-183 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EMS4 and the type of
interface.
Figure 1.5 Relationship between the feature code of the EMS4 and the type of interface
Board
Feature Code
Type of Interface
SSN1EMS410
10
1000BASE-LX (0.5 km)
SSN1EMS411
11
1000BASE-SX (10 km)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1035

System
12 EoS Boards
Board
Feature Code
Type of Interface
SSN1EMS412
12
1000BASE-VX (40 km)
SSN1EMS413
13
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)
SSN1EMS414
14
1000BASE-T (100 m)

The EMS4 supports the BPS, PPS, and distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection.

When the BPS protection is provided for the EMS4, the GE and FE ports are protected by
using the single-fed and selective-receiving scheme. The EMS4 has four GE ports and 16 FE
ports and hence may be connected to many sets of communication equipment. Normally, the
active board is working and services are transmitted in two directions of the active link. On
the standby link, the EMS4 disables the transmission of all ports. In this case, the ports of the
opposite board are in the link-down state. In addition, the opposite board enables the
transmission but does not transmit services. In this manner, the receive ports of the standby
EMS4 are not in the link-down state. The solid lines in Figure 12-49 show how the EMS4
normally works.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1036

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Normal working of the EMS4
No.1
Active
EMS4
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
No.2
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
XCS
B
Standby
communication
equipment
No.1
No.2
Standby
EMS4
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
BPS Protection
When the BPS protection is provided, if the active board detects the link-down state of any
link, any fault in the board, or the offline state of any board, the cross-connect board switches
all the services to the standby board. In this manner, services are protected. The solid lines in
Figure 12-50 show how the BPS protection functions. The services numbered 1, 2 and 3 are
all switched to the standby EMS4 and the corresponding communication equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1037

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Principle of the BPS protection for the EMS4
No.1
Active
EMS4
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
No.2
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
XCS
B
Standby
communication
equipment
No.1
No.2
Standby
EMS4
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
PPS Protection
When the PPS protection is provided, if the active board detects the link-down state of any
link, the cross-connect board switches all the services to the standby board. In this manner,
services are protected. The solid lines in Figure 12-51 show how the PPS protection functions.
Only the service numbered 1 is switched to the standby EMS4 and the standby
communication equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1038

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.3 Principle of the PPS protection for the EMS4
No.1
Active
communication
equipment
Active
EMS4
Standby
communication
equipment
No.2
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
XCS
B
Standby
communication
equipment
No.1
No.2
Standby
EMS4
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
In the case of the PPS, when a link failure occurs on a port, only the link services on the port are
switched generally. If the services of two ports are associated, for example, the services of port IP1 and
port IP2 are converged into the same VCTRUNK, port IP1 and port IP2 are defined as associated ports.
When one port of the associated ports is faulty, the services of the entire associated port group are
switched.
DLAG Protection
The DLAG is a group where the two mapping ports on two identical boards are aggregated to
from a protection group, providing 1+1 protection for the ports. By default, the port on the
active board is working, and the port on the standby board is protecting the working port.
When the DLAG is configured, the cross-connect board switches all services from the active
board to the standby board if the active board detects a link failure on a port, a board offline
event, or a board hardware failure. As shown in Figure 12-52, the services carried on port 1
are switched to port 1 of the standby EMS4 and the associated equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1039

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.4 Principle of the DLAG protection for the EMS4
PORT1
Active
PORT2
EMS4
PORT3
Active
communication
equipment
1#
A
2#
Standby
communication
equipment
VCG
3#
XCS
1#
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
VCG
2#
PORT1
Standby
EMS4
PORT2
PORT3
3#
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
When the board-level BPS/PPS protection is performed, the FE ports support only the 100M
full-duplex mode and the GE optical ports support the auto-negotiation and 1000M fullduplex mode.
1.1.1.1.1154 Board Configuration

Two EMS4 boards should be configured on an NE to provide the board-level protection. One
EMS4 is the active board and the other is the standby board. When you configure the EMS4
board protection, ensure that the access capacity of the slot that houses the standby board
must not be less than the access capacity of the slot that houses the active board.


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Copyright Huawei
1040

System
12 EoS Boards
correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS


tasks:
Creating a LAG.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1041

System
12 EoS Boards

----End

Boards.
----End

The EMS4 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EMS4 by using the U2000:
LCAS
LPT
LAG
ETH OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
MSTP
IGMP Snooping

You can set parameters for the EMS4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EMS4 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1042

System
12 EoS Boards
Table 12-184 lists the faults that occur on the EMS4 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EMS4 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.

half-duplex mode.

side.

port.


fault occurs.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EMS4, see Replacing an EOS Board.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1043

System
12 EoS Boards
12.9.14.1 Alarms of N1EMS4

B3_SD_VC4
ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BOOTROM_BAD
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAI
L
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FA
ULT
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
LCT
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
FLOW_OVER
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_CROSSTR
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_REI
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_PLCR
HP_UNEQ
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LCAS_PLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_CROSSTR
LINK_ERR
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI
LP_RDI
LP_SLM
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ
LP_TIM
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LTEMP_OVER
NO_BD_SOFT
LSR_WILL_DIE
SUBCARD_ABN
LAG_PORT_FAIL
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
TD
TEMP_OVER
TF
TU_AIS
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP
TU_LOP_VC3
VC3_CROSSTR
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC4
ETH_NO_FLOW
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
W_R_FAIL
TR_LOC
T_LOSEX
PORTMODE_MISMATCH
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LO
OP
DLAG_PROTECT_FAIL
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
PORT_MODULE_OFFLI
NE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1044

System
12 EoS Boards
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
OUT_PWR_HIGH
OUT_PWR_LOW
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_RDI
WRG_BD_TYPE

12.9.15.1 Performance Events of N1EMS4

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
XCSTMPCUR
XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN

UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
LateCollisions
DeferredTransmissions
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
FCSErrors
1045

System
12 EoS Boards

Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)

Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Pause Frames Received(frames)
Pause Frames
Transmitted(frames)
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Received(Byte)
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)

Received(Byte/s)

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Octets Transmitted(Byte)
Packets Received(packets)
Packets
Good Packets
Received(packets)
Good Packets
Full Frame Speed

Received(Byte/s)
Full Frame Speed

Transmitted(Byte/s)

The technical specifications of the EMS4 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 12-190 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EMS4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EMS4
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
1000BASEVX (40 km)
1000BASELX (10 km)
1000BASE-SX
(0.5 km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode LC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1046

System
12 EoS Boards
Parameter
Value
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-2 to 5
-5 to 0
-9 to -3
-9.5 to -2.5
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1500 to 1580
1275 to 1350
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-23
-20
-17
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30

Table 12-191 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EMS4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EMS4
Type of Interface
Code Type
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5


specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EMS4 board of the N1 version.
EMS4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1047

System
12 EoS Boards
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-192 and Table 12-193 list the throughput specifications of the EMS4. Table 12-194
and Table 12-195 list the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS4. Table 12196 and Table 12-197 list the latency specifications of the EMS4. Table 12-198 and Table 12199 list the back-to-back specifications of the EMS4.
configured and one VC-4 is bound on the FE port, or EPL services are configured and 24 VC-3s are
bound on the GE port.
Table 12-192 lists the throughput specifications of the EMS4 (one VC-4 is bound on the FE
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Maximum rate (%): none
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1048

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the EMS4 (one VC-4 is bound on the FE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,01,03) to (01,01,06)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
148810
148810
128
100.00
84459
84459
256
100.00
45290
45290
512
100.00
23496
23496
1024
100.00
11973
11973
1280
100.00
9615
9615
1518
100.00
8127
8127
Table 12-193 lists the throughput specifications of the EMS4 (24 VC-3s are bound on the GE
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.2 Throughput specifications of the EMS4 (24 VC-3s are bound on the GE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,03,01) to (01,03,02)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
1488095
1488095
128
100.00
844595
844595
256
100.00
452899
452899
512
100.00
234962
234962
1024
100.00
119732
119732
1280
100.00
96154
96154
1518
100.00
81274
81274
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1049

System
12 EoS Boards
Table 12-194 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS4 (one VC-4 is
bound on the FE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.3 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS4 (one VC-4 is bound on the FE
port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,03) to (01,01,06)
(%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
Table 12-195 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS4 (24 VC-3s are
bound on the GE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1050

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.4 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMS4 (24 VC-3s are bound on the
GE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,03,01) to (01,03,02)
(%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
Table 12-196 lists the latency specifications of the EMS4 (one VC-4 is bound on the FE port).
The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1051

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.5 Latency specifications of the EMS4 (one VC-4 is bound on the FE port)
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,01,03) to
(01,01,06) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,01,03) to
(01,01,06)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
110.6
110.6
105.5
105.5
128
100.00
123.8
123.8
113.6
113.6
256
100.00
149.2
149.2
128.8
128.8
512
100.00
195.5
195.5
154.6
154.6
1024
100.00
285.6
285.6
203.7
203.7
1280
100.00
344.6
344.6
240.5
240.5
1518
100.00
373.1
373.1
251.7
251.7
Table 12-197 lists the latency specifications of the EMS4 (24 VC-3s are bound on the GE
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.6 Latency specifications of the EMS4 (24 VC-3s are bound on the GE port)
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)

Copyright Huawei
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
1052

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
128
100.00
83.0
83.0
82.0
82.0
256
100.00
86.9
86.9
84.9
84.9
512
100.00
94.9
94.9
90.9
90.9
1024
100.00
108.8
108.8
100.7
100.7
1280
100.00
115.2
115.2
105.0
105.0
1518
100.00
120.7
120.7
108.6
108.6
Table 12-198 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EMS4 (one VC-4 is bound on the FE
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.7 Back-to-back specifications of the EMS4 (one VC-4 is bound on the FE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,03) to (01,01,06)
Burst Size (Number of
Frames)
Total (Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
1488100
1488100
128
100.00
844590
844590
256
100.00
452900
452900
512
100.00
234960
234960
1024
100.00
119730
119730
1280
100.00
96150
96150
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1053

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,03) to (01,01,06)
Frames)
Total (Number of
Frames)
1518
100.00
81270
81270
Table 12-199 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EMS4 (24 VC-3s are bound on the
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Figure 1.8 Back-to-back specifications of the EMS4 (24 VC-3s are bound on the GE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,03,01) to (01,03,02)
Frames)
Total (Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
2976190
2976190
128
100.00
1689190
1689190
256
100.00
905798
905798
512
100.00
469924
469924
1024
100.00
239464
239464
1280
100.00
192308
192308
1518
100.00
162548
162548

The mechanical specifications of the EMS4 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1054

System
Weight (kg): 1.1
12 EoS Boards

The maximum power consumption of the EMS4 at room temperature (25C) is 65 W.
12.10 EGS4

The EGS4 is available in three functional versions, namely, N1, N3 and N4. The N3EGS4 is
discontinued.
Table 12-200 describes the versions of the EGS4.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the EGS4
Item
Description
Functional versions
The EGS4 is available in three functional versions, namely, N1, N3

and N4.
Differences
Regarding interface specifications: interface types
Regarding service specifications: bound bandwidth, VCTRUNK

specifications
Protection schemes: MSTP
QoS
Traffic monitoring
Substitution
The N4EGS4 can substitute for the N3EGS4.
12.10.2 Application
The EGS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1055

System
12 EoS Boards
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

EGS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link aggregation, and multicast functions.
Table 12-201 lists the functions and features supported by EGS4 boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by EGS4 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits and processes 4xGE services.
Port
types
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
EGS4 boards support 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The

802.3z. The optical ports use SFP optical modules. When the multi-mode
optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the
single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10
Copyright Huawei
1056

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the
transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.
N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards also support 1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical

ports. The electrical ports support the auto-negotiation function. N1EGS4
boards support the negotiated rate of 1000 Mbit/s and N4EGS4 boards support
the negotiated rate of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. N1EGS4 and
N4EGS4 boards support SFP electrical ports and hot swapping. The maximum
transmission distance is 100 m.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
Servic
e
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
GE electrical port (available only on N1EGS4 and N4EGS4

boards): auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex,
and 10M full-duplex.
GE optical port: auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex.
Traffic
control at
ports
Supported
Supported
Query/Se
tting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Setting
of optical
power
threshold
s
Not supported
Pluggabl
e optical
module
EPL
service

Copyright Huawei
1057

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
catego
ries
EVPL
service
EPLAN
service
EVPLA
N service
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.
Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the
static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The
blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC
addresses only.

N1EGS4/N3EGS4 supports a maximum of two VBs. The

N4EGS4 supports a maximum of 16 VBs. The maximum number

of logical ports for each VB is 68.

VB+VLAN or VB+LP.
MAC bridge.
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1 q/p
Supported
Frame
length
range

Bound
bandwidt
h
N1EGS4: 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 1008xVC-12
N3EGS4/N4EGS4: 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 504xVC-12
Concaten
ation
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X 64), VC-3-Xv (X 24), and

Copyright Huawei
1058

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Protec
tion
schem
es
12 EoS Boards
Description
granulari
ties
VC-4-Xv (X 8).
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC
Supported
LAPS
Supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy

802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
2.5 Gbit/s
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
64
VC-4s numbered 1-4 and 9-12 of the N3EGS4/N4EGS4 support

the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support
the binding of VC-3 paths only.
VC-4s numbered 1-8 and VC-4s numbered 9-16 of the

N3EGS4/N4EGS4 belong to two areas. VC-4 binding must not
span the two areas. A maximum of 8 VC-4s can be bound to one
VCTRUNK.
VC-4s numbered 1-4 and VC-4s numbered 9-12 of the

N3EGS4/N4EGS4 belong to two areas. VC-12 binding must not
span the two areas.
TPS
Not supported
BPS
Supported
PPS
Supported
DLAG
Supported
LAG

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
LCAS

LPT
Copyright Huawei
1059

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
Description
STP/RST
P
Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP
The N1EGS4 supports the MSTP.
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
ETH
OAM
N1EGS4/N3EGS4 boards support CC and LB tests in compliance

with IEEE 802.1ag.
N4EGS4 boards support CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance

with IEEE 802.1ag, LM and DM in compliance with ITU-T
Y.1731, and OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.

protocol (N1EGS4/N3EGS4 boards can only initiate remote
loopbacks).
Test
Frame
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
N4EGS4 boards support ingress mirroring.
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
Supports inloops.
Not supported
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
Not supported
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMON

VCTRUNKs.
Warm
resets

Copyright Huawei
1060

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
QoS
IGMP
snoopi
ng
12 EoS Boards
Description
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. N1EGS4 boards support 512
rate modes, and N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards support 60 rate modes.
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or

PORT+SVLAN.
Protocol
enabling
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Discardi
ng of
unknown
broadcast
packets
Static
broadcast
entry
Not supported
Traffic
contro
l
Traffic
monit
oring
N4EGS4 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

The EGS4 consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, mapping
module.
Figure 12-55 shows the functional block diagram of the EGS4 by describing how to process
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1061

System
12 EoS Boards
1xGE signals.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EGS4
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
Interface
converting
module
VCP
Laser
shutdown
DENCP
ENCP

processor
fabric
Data
GE Ethernet
access
module
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
LOS
Communication
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Clock module
50
77
MHz MHz
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
125 155
MHz MHz


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1062

System
WFQ
Three CoSs
12 EoS Boards

HDLC format. The concatenation is processed. The LCAS function is supported. Then, the


The control module also contains basic logic units. This module has the following functions:


require.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1063

System
12 EoS Boards
12.10.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGS4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 12-56 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4 that
has the optical interface.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4 that has the optical interface
EGS4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
LINK ACT
1
2
3
4
EGS4
The N1EGS4/N4EGS4 can also has the GE electrical interface. Figure 12-57 shows the
appearance of the front panel of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4 that has the GE electrical interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1064

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 front panel of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4 that has the GE electrical interface
EGS4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
LINK ACT
1
2
3
4
EGS4
The front panel of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4 has four GE optical interfaces. Table 12Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1065

System
12 EoS Boards
202 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC (swappable)

signals.
OUT2/IN2
LC (swappable)

signals.
OUT3/IN3
LC (swappable)

signals.
OUT4/IN4
LC (swappable)

signals.
The four GE electrical interfaces of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4 are of the same type and have the
same usage. Table 12-203 describes the types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the
N1EGS4/N4EGS4.
Figure 1.2 Electrical interfaces of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
GE
RJ-45
(swappable)
Table 12-204 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4.
Figure 1.3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4
Pin
Description
BI_DA+
BI_DA
BI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DC
BI_DB
BI_DD+
BI_DD
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1066

System
12 EoS Boards

The EGS4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
12.10.7 Valid Slots

The EGS4 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EGS4 cannot work
normally.
When the EGS4 is installed in slots 14, 15, and 16, the bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. When the
EGS4 is installed in slots 58 and 1114, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.

The feature code of the EGS4 indicates the type of interface.
Table 12-205 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EGS4 and the type of
interface.
Figure 1.4 Relationship between the feature code of the EGS4 and the type of interface
Board
Feature Code
Type of Interface
SSN1EGS410,
SSN3EGS410, and
SSN4EGS10
10
SSN1EGS411,
SSN3EGS411, and
SSN4EGS411
11
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
SSN1EGS412,
SSN3EGS412, and
SSN4EGS412
12
1000BASE-VX (40 km)
SSN1EGS413,
SSN3EGS413, and
SSN4EGS413
13
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)
SSN1EGS414 and
SSN4EGS414
14
1000BASE-T (100 m)

The EGS4 supports the BPS, PPS, and DLAG protection.

When the BPS protection is provided for the EGS4, the GE and FE ports are protected by
using the single-fed and selective-receiving scheme. The EGS4 may be connected to many
sets of communication equipment. Normally, the active board is working and services are
transmitted in two directions of the active link. On the standby link, the EGS4 disables the
transmission of all ports. In this case, the ports of the opposite board are in the link-down
state. In addition, the opposite board enables the transmission but does not transmit services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1067

System
12 EoS Boards
In this manner, the receive ports of the standby EGS4 are not in the link-down state. The solid
lines in Figure 12-58 show how the EGS4 normally works.
Figure 1.1 Normal working of the EGS4
No.1
Active
EGS4
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
No.2
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
XCS
B
Standby
communication
equipment
No.1
No.2
Standby
EGS4
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
BPS Protection
When the BPS protection is provided, if the active board detects the link-down state of any
link, any fault in the board, or the offline state of any board, the cross-connect board switches
all the services to the standby board. In this manner, services are protected. The solid lines in
Figure 12-59 show how the BPS protection functions. The services numbered 1, 2 and 3 are
all switched to the standby EGS4 and the corresponding communication equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1068

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Principle of the BPS protection for the EGS4
No.1
Active
EGS4
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
No.2
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
XCS
B
Standby
communication
equipment
No.1
No.2
Standby
EGS4
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
PPS Protection
When the PPS protection is provided, if the active board detects the link-down state of any
link, the cross-connect board switches all the services to the standby board. In this manner,
services are protected. The solid lines in Figure 12-60 show how the PPS protection functions.
Only the service numbered 1 is switched to the standby EGS4 and the standby communication
equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1069

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.3 Principle of the PPS protection for the EGS4
No.1
Active
communication
equipment
Active
EGS4
Standby
communication
equipment
No.2
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
XCS
B
Standby
communication
equipment
No.1
No.2
Standby
EGS4
No.3
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
In the case of the PPS, when a link failure occurs on a port, only the link services on the port are
switched generally. If the services of two ports are associated, for example, the services of port IP1 and
port IP2 are converged into the same VCTRUNK, port IP1 and port IP2 are defined as associated ports.
When one port of the associated ports is faulty, the services of the entire associated port group are
switched.
DLAG Protection
The DLAG is a group where the two mapping ports on two identical boards are aggregated to
from a protection group, providing 1+1 protection for the ports. By default, the port on the
active board is working, and the port on the standby board is protecting the working port.
When the DLAG is configured, the cross-connect board switches all services from the active
board to the standby board if the active board detects a link failure on a port, a board offline
event, or a board hardware failure. As shown in Figure 12-61, the services carried on port 1
are switched to port 1 of the standby EGS4 and the associated equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1070

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.4 Principle of the DLAG protection for the EGS4
PORT1
Active
PORT2
EGS4
PORT3
1#
A
2#
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
VCG
3#
XCS
1#
VCG
2#
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
PORT1
Standby
EGS4
PORT2
PORT3
3#
Active
communication
equipment
Standby
communication
equipment
When the board-level protection is performed, the GE optical ports support the autonegotiation and 1000M full-duplex mode.
1.1.1.1.1178 Board Configuration

Two EGS4 boards should be configured on an NE to provide the board-level protection. One
EGS4 is the active board and the other is the standby board. When you configure the EGS4
board protection, ensure that the access capacity of the slot that houses the standby board
must not be less than the access capacity of the slot that houses the active board.


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1071

System
12 EoS Boards
correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS


tasks:
Creating a LAG.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1072

System
12 EoS Boards

----End

Boards.
----End

The EGS4 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EGS4 by using the U2000:
LCAS
LPT
LAG
ETH OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
MSTP
IGMP Snooping
Only N1EGS4 supports MSTP.

You can set parameters for the EGS4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EGS4 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1073

System
12 EoS Boards

Table 12-206 lists the faults that occur on the EGS4 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EGS4 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.

half-duplex mode.

side.

port.


fault occurs.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EGS4, see Replacing an EOS Board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1074

System
12 EoS Boards


ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC4
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC3
BIP_SD
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
ETH_LOS
BOOTROM_BAD
COMMUN_FAIL
FLOW_OVER
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
LCT
HP_CROSSTR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
LCAS_PLCT
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_PLCR
LINK_ERR
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LP_RDI
LOOP_ALM
LP_CROSSTR
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI
LP_TIM
LP_SLM
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ
LSR_WILL_DIE
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
OUT_PWR_HIGH
LTEMP_OVER
NO_BD_SOFT
IN_PWR_LOW
OUT_PWR_LOW
IN_PWR_HIGH
TD
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FA
ULT
TU_AIS
TEMP_OVER
TF
TU_LOP_VC3
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VC3_CROSSTR
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC4
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
W_R_FAIL
ETH_NO_FLOW
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
TR_LOC
T_LOSEX
LAG_PORT_FAIL
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOO
DLAG_PROTECT_FAIL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1075

System
12 EoS Boards
P
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
MOD_TYPE_MISMAT
CH
PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_RDI
WRG_BD_TYPE

ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD_VC4
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC3
BIP_SD
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
ETH_LOS
BOOTROM_BAD
COMMUN_FAIL
FLOW_OVER
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFL
CT
HP_CROSSTR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_REI
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
LCAS_PLCT
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_PLCR
LINK_ERR
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LP_RDI
LOOP_ALM
LP_CROSSTR
LP_REI_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI
LP_TIM
LP_SLM
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ
LSR_WILL_DIE
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
OUT_PWR_HIGH
LTEMP_OVER
NO_BD_SOFT
IN_PWR_LOW
OUT_PWR_LOW
IN_PWR_HIGH
TD
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_F
AIL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAU
LT
TU_AIS
TEMP_OVER
TF
TU_LOP_VC3
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VC3_CROSSTR
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1076

System
12 EoS Boards
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC4
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
W_R_FAIL
DLAG_PROTECT_FAIL
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_L
OOP
ETH_NO_FLOW
LAG_PORT_FAIL
T_LOSEX
TR_LOC
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
WRG_BD_TYPE

ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC3
B3_SD_VC4
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
BOOTROM_BAD
COMMUN_FAIL
DLAG_PROTECT_FAIL
ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAI
L
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FA
ULT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_L
OOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNF
LCT
FCS_ERR
FLOW_OVER
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_CROSSTR
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_HIGH
IN_PWR_LOW
LAG_PORT_FAIL
LASER_MOD_ERR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LINK_ERR
LOOP_ALM
LP_CROSSTR
LP_RDI
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM
LP_TIM_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1077

System
12 EoS Boards
LP_UNEQ
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LPT_RFI
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
LTEMP_OVER
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
NO_BD_SOFT
OUT_PWR_HIGH
OUT_PWR_LOW
PORT_MODULE_OFFLI
NE
T_LOSEX
TD
TEMP_OVER
TF
TR_LOC
TU_AIS
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP
TU_LOP_VC3
VC3_CROSSTR
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC12
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC12
VCAT_SQM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC4
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
W_R_FAIL
WRG_BD_TYPE


Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
TPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1078

System
XCSTMPCUR
12 EoS Boards
XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN

UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
LateCollisions
FCSErrors

Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)

Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Pause Frames
Transmitted(frames)
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Received(Byte)
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)

Received(Byte/s)

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Packets
Good Packets
Received(packets)
Good Packets
Full Frame Speed

Received(Byte/s)
Full Frame Speed

Transmitted(Byte/s)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1079

System
12 EoS Boards

Figure 1.6 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
TPLCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
XCSTMPCUR
XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN

UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
LateCollisions
FCSErrors

Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)

Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Unicast Packets

Copyright Huawei

1080

System
12 EoS Boards
Pause Frames
Transmitted(frames)
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Received(Byte)
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte)
FCS Errors(frames)

Received(Byte/s)

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Packets
Good Packets
Received(packets)
Good Packets
Full Frame Speed

Received(Byte/s)
Full Frame Speed

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Figure 1.11 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPFEUAS
LPSES
LPUAS
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FEUAS
VC3SES
VC3UAS
BDTEMPCUR
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1081

System
12 EoS Boards

UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
FCSErrors

ETHOVER
ETHUNDER
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST

ETHFCS
RXBGOOD
RXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
RXPAUSE
RXUNICAST
TXBGOOD
TXBRDCAST
TXGOODFULLFRAMESP
EED
TXMULCAST
TXPAUSE
TXUNICAST

VCG_RXGOODPACKETS
VCG_RXOCTETS
VCG_RXPACKETS
VCG_RXSPEED
VCG_TXGOODPACKETS
VCG_TXOCTETS
VCG_TXPACKETS
VCG_TXSPEED

The technical specifications of the EGS4 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 12-222 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGS4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGS4
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
1000BASEVX (40 km)
1000BASELX (10 km)
1000BASE-SX
(0.5 km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode LC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1082

System
12 EoS Boards
Parameter
Value
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-2 to 5
-5 to 0
-9 to -3
-9.5 to -2.5
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1500 to 1580
1275 to 1350
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-23
-20
-17
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30

Table 12-223 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EGS4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EGS4
Type of Electrical Interface
Code Pattern
1000BASE-T
4D-PAM5
Only the EGS4 boards of the N1 and N4 versions support the GE electrical interfaces.


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1083

System
12 EoS Boards
N1EGS4.
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
N1EGS4.
configured 24 VC-3s are bound on the GE port.
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1084

System
12 EoS Boards

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,03,01) to (01,03,02)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
1488095
1488095
128
100.00
844595
844595
256
100.00
452899
452899
512
100.00
234962
234962
1024
100.00
119732
119732
1280
100.00
96154
96154
1518
100.00
81274
81274
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,03,01) to (01,03,02)
(%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1085

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,03,01) to (01,03,02)
(%)
Average (%)
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
80.9
80.9
80.4
80.4
128
100.00
83.0
83.0
82.0
82.0
256
100.00
86.9
86.9
84.9
84.9
512
100.00
94.9
94.9
90.9
90.9
1024
100.00
108.8
108.8
100.7
100.7
1280
100.00
115.2
115.2
105.0
105.0
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1086

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,03,01) to
(01,03,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
1518
100.00
120.7
120.7
108.6
108.6
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,03,01) to (01,03,02)
Frames)
Total (Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
2976190
2976190
128
100.00
1689190
1689190
256
100.00
905798
905798
512
100.00
469924
469924
1024
100.00
239464
239464
1280
100.00
192308
192308
1518
100.00
162548
162548
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1087

System
12 EoS Boards

N4EGS4.
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
N4EGS4.
configured and one VC-4 are bound on the GE port.
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1088

System
12 EoS Boards

Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate (%)
(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
16.54
246063
492126
128
15.81
133547
267094
256
15.40
69754
139508
512
15.20
35714
71428
1024
15.10
18074
36148
1280
15.07
14488
28976
1518
15.06
12238
24476
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)
(%)
Average (%)
64
16.54
0.000
0.000
128
15.81
0.000
0.000
256
15.40
0.000
0.000
512
15.20
0.000
0.000
1024
15.10
0.000
0.000
1280
15.07
0.000
0.000
1518
15.06
0.000
0.000
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1089

System
12 EoS Boards
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1

Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,01,02) to
(01,01,01)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
16.54
103.3
103.3
102.8
102.8
128
15.81
115.2
115.2
114.2
114.2
256
15.40
126.7
126.7
124.7
124.7
512
15.20
154.4
154.4
150.4
150.4
1024
15.10
3721.4
3721.4
3713.3
3713.3
1280
15.07
223.9
223.9
213.7
213.7
1518
15.06
3447.5
3447.5
3435.4
3435.4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1090

System
12 EoS Boards
disabled.
Number of pairs: 1

Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested (%)
(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)
Burst Size (frames)
Total (frames)
64
16.54
7381890
14763780
128
15.81
4006410
8012820
256
15.40
2092620
4185240
512
15.20
1071420
2142840
1024
15.10
542220
1084440
1280
15.07
434640
869280
1518
15.06
367140
734280

The mechanical specifications of the EGS4 are as follows:
Weight of the N1EGS4 or N3EGS4 (kg): 1.1

The maximum power consumption of the N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 at room temperature (25C)
is 70 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1091

System
12 EoS Boards
12.11 EAS2
technical specifications of the EAS2 (2-port 10xGE switching and processing board). This
topic also describes how to configure and commission the EAS2.

The EAS2 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N3.
Table 12-232 describes the versions of the EAS2.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the EAS2
Item
Description
Functional
versions
The EAS2 is available in the following functional versions: N1 and

N3.
Differences
The N3EAS2 supports the ERPS function.
The maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EAS2

differs from that supported by the N3EAS2. In addition, the
VCTRUNK configuration principles for the N1EAS2 also differ
from those for the N3EAS2. For details, see 12.11.3 Functions and
Features.
The N3EAS2 supports a maximum of 4096 link services, whereas

the N1EAS2 supports a maximum of 2048 link services.
The N3EAS2 supports the MPLS function, whereas the N1EAS2

does not.
Substitution
None
12.11.2 Application
The EAS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1092

System
12 EoS Boards
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

EAS2 boards support the transmission of 10 GE Ethernet services, LCAS, and test frame
functions.
Table 12-233 lists the functions and features supported by EAS2 boards.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features supported by EAS2 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits 2x10 GE Ethernet services.
Port
types
Supports 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical ports, which comply

with IEEE 802.3ae.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1093

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Port
charac
teristic
s
Servic
e
catego
ries
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Worki
ng
mode
10GE full-duplex in both WAN mode and LAN mode
Traffic
contro
l at
ports
Not supported
Supported
Query
/Settin
g of
port
status
Supported
Query
of port
types
Supported
Settin
g of
optical
power
thresh
olds
Not supported
Plugg
able
optical
modul
e
XFP optical modules supported on N1EAS2 boards
Ethern
et
privat
e line
(EPL)
servic
e
Ethern
et
virtual
privat
e line
SFP+ optical modules supported on N3EAS2 boards

Copyright Huawei
1094

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
12 EoS Boards
Description
(EVP
L)
servic
e
Supports a maximum of 2048 links in the case of the N1EAS2;

supports a maximum of 4096 links in the case of the N3EAS2.
Ethern
et
privat
e LAN
(EPL
AN)
servic
e
Supports a maximum of one virtual bridge (VB) on N1EAS2 boards.

The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 26.
Supports a maximum of one VB on N3EAS2 boards. The maximum

number of logical ports for each VB is 19 (slot bandwidth: 10G bit/s)
or 36 (slot bandwidth: 20G bit/s)
Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static
media access control (MAC) address table that can contain 512
records.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity

of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC
address can be set and queried.
Supports the query of the aging time of an MAC address.
Supports the query of learned MAC addresses by VB+VLAN or

VB+LP.
Supports EPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1d MAC

bridges.
Ethern
et
virtual
privat
e LAN
(EVP
LAN)
servic
e
Supports EVPLAN services that use stack VLAN encapsulation.
Supports EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q virtual bridges

and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridges.
Forma
ts of
Ethern
et data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1q TAG
Supported
Frame
length
range
Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518
bytes to 9600 bytes.
Bound
bandw
idth
N1EAS2: 64xVC-4 or 192xVC-3
Conca
The following adjacent concatenation granularities are supported on
N3EAS2: 128xVC-4

Copyright Huawei
1095

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
tenatio
n
granul
arities
N1EAS2 boards: VC-4-Xv (X8), VC-3-Xv (X24), and VC-4-4c.
Encap
sulatio
n
format
s
HDLC
Not supported
LAPS
Not supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
techno
logy
Not supported on N1EAS2 boards
VLA
N
techno
logy

802.1q/p.
Maxi
mum
uplink
bandw
idth
An N1EAS2 board supports a maximum of 10 Gbit/s upstream

bandwidth and can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
VCTR
UNK
specifi
cation
s
An N1EAS2 board supports a maximum of 24 VCTRUNKs.
The following adjacent concatenation granularities are supported on

N3EAS2 boards: VC-4-Xv (X64) and VC-4-4c/16c/64c.
NOTE
For N3EAS2 boards, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK18 support VC-4-16c/64c
adjacent concatenation. Other VCTRUNKs only support VC-4-4c adjacent
concatenation.
Tunnel-based EVPL (transit) supported on N3EAS2 boards
An N3EAS2 board supports a maximum of 20 Gbit/s upstream

bandwidth and can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
Configuration guidelines are as follows:
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 8 VC-4s or a

A VCTRUNK can be bound only with VC-4 paths or VC-3 paths.

Different VCTRUNKs, however, can be bound with paths at different
levels.
N1EAS2 boards support VC-4-4c adjacent concatenation and VC3/VC-4 virtual concatenation.
Only VCTRUNKs numbered 1-4 support the Jumbo frame with a

length of 9600 bytes. The other VCG ports do not support the Jumbo
frame.
The maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N3EAS2 board

is as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
If the slot bandwidth is 10 Gbit/s, the maximum number is 17

(VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK17).
If the slot bandwidth is 20 Gbit/s, the maximum number is 34

(VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK34).

Copyright Huawei
1096

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
12 EoS Boards
Description
Configuration guidelines are as follows:
Protec
tion
schem
es
VCTRUNK 1 and VCTRUNK 18 can be bound with a maximum of

64 VC-4s, and other VCTRUNKs can be bound with a maximum of
8 VC-4s.
VCTRUNK 1 to VCTRUNK 17 can be bound only with VC-4-1 to

VC-4-64, and VCTRUNK 18 to VCTRUNK 34 can be bound only
with VC-4-65 to VC-4-128.
TPS
Not supported
BPS
Not supported
PPS
Not supported
DLA
G
Supported
LAG

LCAS

LPT
STP/R
STP

MSTP

Supported on N3EAS2 boards
ERPS

Supported on N3EAS2 boards
NOTE
ERPS does not support the following bridges:
Synch
roniza
tion
Maint
enanc
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
IEEE 802.1d bridge
IEEE 802.1ad bridge with SVL/ingress filter disabled
Synch
ronous
Ethern
et
Not supported
IEEE
1588v
2
Not supported
ETH
OAM

802.1ag, LM and DM in compliance with ITU-T Y.1731, and OAM

Copyright Huawei
1097

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
e
featur
es
ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

protocol.
Test
Frame
Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.
Respo
nse to
ping
Supported
Port
mirror
ing
Supports ingress and egress mirroring.
Loopb
ack
capabi
lity
Supports inloops.
Supports inloops.
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
Not supported
VC-12 level
Not supported
RMO
N
QoS
12 EoS Boards
Supports the query of the rate of a port.
Reports an alarm when the volume of traffic at a port exceeds the

threshold (this function is available on N3EAS2 boards).
Warm
resets
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarm
s and
perfor
mance
events

Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID,

PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, PORT+SVLAN ID, PORT+SVLAN
ID+CVLAN ID, MPLS labels, or MPLS label+EXP value.
Each port supports eight priority queues.
Supports shaping based on ports or queues.

Copyright Huawei
1098

System
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protoc
ol
enabli
ng
Supported
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Not supported
Discar
ding
of
unkno
wn
broadc
ast
packet
s
Not supported
Static
broadc
ast
entry
Supported
Traffic
contro
l
12 EoS Boards

The EAS2 consists of the interface processing module, mapping module, interface converting
Figure 12-65 shows the functional block diagram of the EAS2 by describing how to process
1x10 GE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1099

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EAS2

Backplane
10GE
Interface
processing
module
Laser
shutdown
Service
processing
module
Interface
converting
module
Encapsulation
module
Digital encapsulation module
Mapping module
Virtual
concatenation
processing
module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
LOS
Communication
Logic and
control module
Clock reference and frame delimitation
+3.3 V
Clock module
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

The encapsulation or conversion module demaps and decapsulates the signals received from
the cross-connect unit. Then, the interface converting module performs the interface
converting operations and transmits the signals to the service processing module. The service
processing module implements the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service.
After the interface processing module converts parallel signals to serial signals and encodes
the serial signals, the Ethernet interface module transmits the serial signals.

The XFP/SFP+ optical module performs O/E conversion on the 10 GE Ethernet signals, and
then transmits the signals to the Ethernet interface module. The Ethernet interface module
transmits the parallel signals to the service processing module to realize the functions of the
Layer 2 switching and private line service. The encapsulation module encapsulates and maps
the Ethernet GFP-F frames, and then transmits the signals to the cross-connect unit.

The logic and control module provides the communication, control, and service configuration
functions of the board.

The clock module traces the system reference clock, and generates the required clock signals
when the board is working.

require.
12.11.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EAS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1100

System
12 EoS Boards
label.

Figure 12-66 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EAS2.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EAS2
EAS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EAS2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1101

System
12 EoS Boards
The front panel of the EAS2 has two 10 GE interfaces. Table 12-234 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EAS2.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EAS2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN2
LC
Receives 10 GE signals.
OUT1OUT2
LC
Transmits 10 GE signals.

The EAS2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
12.11.7 Valid Slots

An EAS2 board must be installed in a valid slot in a subrack.
An N1EAS2 board can be installed in any of slots 5-8 and 11-14 in a subrack and provides a
bandwidth of 10 Gbit/s. An N3EAS2 board can also be installed in any of slots 5-8 and 11-14
in a subrack. When an N3EAS2 board is installed in slot 5, 6, 13, or 14, it provides a
bandwidth of 10 Gbit/s; when an N3EAS2 board is installed in slot 7, 8, 11, or 12, it provides
a bandwidth of 20 Gbit/s.

The EAS2 does not have the feature code.


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1102

System
12 EoS Boards
correct.
----End

Step 7 Required: Configure the Ethernet interface.

consistent. Generally, use the default value. The default value of the J1 byte to be sent
is Huawei SBS
and the default value of the J1 byte is Disabled.
Set the parameters of the Ethernet interface as follows:

are required to work in the same mode. If the working modes on two sides do not
match, packets may be lost or the bit rate may decrease. In the case of large volume

Step 8 Optional: Configure the Layer 2 switching management service. Perform the following tasks:
LAG.
Step 11 Optional: Configure test frames. For details, see Configuring Test Frames.
----End

----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1103

System
12 EoS Boards

Boards.
----End

The EAS2 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LCAS, and LAG. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EAS2 by using the U2000:
LCAS
LPT
LAG
DLAG
ETH OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
MSTP
IGMP Snooping
QoS
ERPS

You can set parameters for the EAS2 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EAS2 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1104

System
12 EoS Boards
Table 12-235 lists the faults that occur on the EAS2 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EAS2 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.

half-duplex mode.

side.

port.


fault occurs.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EAS2, see Replacing an EOS Board.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1105

System
12 EoS Boards
12.11.13.1 Alarms of N1EAS2

ALM_GFP_dCSF
ALM_GFP_dLFD
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC3
B3_SD_VC4
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
BOOTROM_BAD
CHIP_ABN
COMMUN_FAIL
DLAG_PROTECT_FAIL
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_C
NFLCT
ETH_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
HP_RDI
FCS_ERR
HARD_BAD
IN_PWR_ABN
HP_SLM
HP_UNEQ
LASER_MOD_ERR
LAG_PORT_FAIL
LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_TLCT
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LP_RDI_VC3
LINK_ERR
LOOP_ALM
LPT_RFI
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_WILL_DIE
LSR_BCM_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
SLAVE_WORKING
NO_BD_SOFT
OUT_PWR_ABN
TEM_HA
SO_SK_MISMATCH
T_LOSEX
TEST_STATUS
TEM_LA
TEMP_OVER
TU_AIS_VC3
TF
TR_LOC
VCAT_LOM_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCTRUNK_NO_FLOW
ETH_NO_FLOW
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOF
T
WRG_BD_TYPE
12.11.13.2 Alarms of N3EAS2

LCAS_FOPR
LOOP_ALM
HARD_BAD
HARD_ERR
B3_SD_VC4
B3_EXC_VC4
HP_UNEQ
HP_SLM
HP_RDI
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
VCAT_LOM_VC4
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LP_RDI_VC3
B3_SD_VC3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1106

System
12 EoS Boards
B3_EXC_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC3
HP_TIM
MULTI_RPL_OWNER
LP_TIM_VC3

12.11.14.1 Performance Events of N1EAS2

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFEUAS
HPFECSES
VC3BBE
VC3ES
VC3SES
VC3UAS
VC3CSES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3FECSES
VC3FEUAS
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
OSPITMPCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
TPLCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TLBCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RPLCUR
XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN
XCSTMPCUR

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
FCSErrors

Packets Received(64 Octets
in Length)(packets)
Packets
Received(1024~1518
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1107

System
12 EoS Boards
Multicast Packets
Received(packets)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets)
Drop Events(times)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets)
Fragments(packets)
Jabbers(packets)

Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
in Length)(packets)
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets)
Packets
Unicast Packets
Received(packets)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Pause Frames
Received(frames)
Pause Frames
Transmitted(frames)
FCS Errors(frames)

Length)(packets)

in Length)(packets)

Transmitted(128~255
Octets in Length)
(packets)

Length)(packets)


Octets in Length)
(packets)

Received(Byte/s)

Transmitted(Byte/s)

Received(Byte)

Transmitted(Byte)
Control Frames
Received(frames)
Control Frames
Transmitted(frames)
Packets Transmitted(packets)

Packets
Good Packets
Received(packets)
Good Packets
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1108

System
Full Frame Speed

Received(Byte/s)
12 EoS Boards
Full Frame Speed

Transmitted(Byte/s)
12.11.14.2 Performance Events of N3EAS2

Figure 1.6 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPFEUAS
TPLMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
BDTEMPMAX
BDTEMPMIN
BDTEMPCUR

RXOCTETS
RXPKTS
RXBRDCAST
RXMULCAST
RXPKT64
RXPKT65
RXPKT128
RXPKT256
RXPKT512
RXPKT1024
ETHJAB
ETHDROP
ETHUNDER
ETHOVER
ETHFRG

RXUNICAST
TXUNICAST
TXBRDCAST
RXCTLPKTS
PKT64
TXOCTETS
TXPKTS
RXPAUSE
TXPAUSE
RXFULLBGOOD
TXFULLBGOOD
TXGOODFULLFRAMES
PEED
RXGOODFULLFRAMESPE
ED
TXPKT64
TXPKT65
TXPKT128
TXPKT256
TXPKT512
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1109

System
12 EoS Boards
TXPKT1024
TXMULCAST
ETHFCS
PKT65
PKT128
PKT256
PKT512
PKT1024
Figure 1.9 VCG RMON

VCG_TXGOODPACKETS
VCG_TXPACKETS
VCG_TXOCTETS
VCG_RXGOODPACKETS
VCG_RXPACKETS
VCG_RXOCTETS
VCG_TXSPEED
VCG_RXSPEED
12.11.15 Technical Specifications of EAS2

The technical specifications of the EAS2 include the parameters specified for optical
interfaces, safety class of the laser, Ethernet performance specifications, mechanical
specifications, and power consumption.

Table 12-245 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N1EAS2.
Table 12-246 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N3EAS2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N1EAS2
Parameter
Value
Transmission rate
10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s
2x10GE signals
10GBASE-LR/LW
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
(km)
10
Maximum mean launched

power (dBm)
-1
Minimum mean launched

power (dBm)
-6
-11

(dB)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1110

System
12 EoS Boards
Parameter
Value
Connector type
LC

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the N3EAS2
Parameter
Value
Transmission rate
10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s
2x10GE signals
10GBASE-LR/LW
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
(km)
10
Maximum mean launched

power (dBm)
0.5
Minimum mean launched

power (dBm)
-8.2
-12.6

(dB)
3.5
Connector type
LC

width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1111

System
12 EoS Boards

EAS2.
overloading and latency specifications
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 12-247 lists the throughput specifications of the N1EAS2. Table 12-249 lists the packet
loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N1EAS2. Table 12-251 lists the latency
specifications of the N1EAS2.
Table 12-248 lists the throughput specifications of the N3EAS2. Table 12-250 lists the packet
loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N3EAS2. Table 12-252 lists the latency
specifications of the N3EAS2.
configured and 64 VC-4s are bound on the 10xGE port.
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the N1EAS2

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
Number of Tx
Frames (pks/sec)
Number of Rx
Frames (pks/sec)
Total (%)
64
100.00000
148809440
148613326
99.29688
128
100.00000
84459360
84457314
99.29688
256
99.29687
44974080
44719807
98.59375
512
97.89062
23001600
22892340
97.1875
1024
96.48437
11552000
11552000
96.48438
1280
96.48437
9277280
9277280
96.48438
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1112

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
Number of Tx
Frames (pks/sec)
Number of Rx
Frames (pks/sec)
Total (%)
1518
96.48437
7841440
7831693
95.78125
Figure 1.2 Throughput specifications of the N3EAS2

Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
Tx Frames
(pks/sec)
Rx Frames
(pks/sec)
Total (%)
64
98.00000
14534882
14534882
100.00000
128
98.00000
8278145
8278145
100.00000
256
98.00000
4432624
4432624
100.00000
512
98.00000
2302025
2286388
99.32000
1024
97.00000
1161710
1156436
99.55000
1280
97.00000
932835
927296
99.41000
1518
97.00000
788146
783050
99.35000
Figure 1.3 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N1EAS2
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
Number of Tx
Frames (pks/sec)
Number of Rx
Frames (pks/sec)
Total (%)
64
100.00000
148809440
148614523
0.13
128
100.00000
84459360
84457396
0.00
256
100.00000
45289760
44709723
1.28
512
100.00000
23496160
22868728
2.67
1024
100.00000
11973120
11566750
3.39
1280
100.00000
9615360
9274900
3.54
1518
100.00000
8127360
7832064
3.63
Figure 1.4 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the N3EAS2
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
Tx Frames
(pks/sec)
Rx Frames
(pks/sec)
Total (%)
64
97.00000
14367816
14367816
0.00
128
97.00000
8169934
8169934
0.00
256
97.00000
4385964
4385964
0.00
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1113

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
Tx Frames
(pks/sec)
Rx Frames
(pks/sec)
Total (%)
512
97.00000
2281021
2281021
0.00
1024
97.00000
1161710
1156431
0.45
1280
97.00000
932835
927296
0.59
1518
97.00000
788146
783050
0.64
Figure 1.5 Latency specifications of the N1EAS2

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
Number
of Tx
Frames
(pks/sec)
Number of
Rx Frames
(pks/sec)
Minimum
Latency
(us)
Average
Latency
(us)
Maximu
m
Latency
(us)
64
100.0000
0
14880950
14880950
59.7
90.798
98.2
128
100.0000
0
8445940
8445940
55.9
92.201
99.5
256
100.0000
0
4528980
4528980
61
96.178
103.7
512
100.0000
0
2349620
2349620
72.7
102.403
109.9
1024
100.0000
0
1197310
1197310
81.8
116.101
123.7
1280
100.0000
0
961530
961530
88.2
122.479
130.2
1518
100.0000
0
812740
812740
99.1
128.928
136.3
Figure 1.6 Latency specifications of the N3EAS2

Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
Tx
Frames
(pks/sec)
Rx Frames
(pks/sec)
Min
Latency
(us)
Ave
Latency
(us)
Max
Latency
(us)
64
97.00000
14367816
14367816
15.9
17.158
18.4
128
97.00000
8169934
8169934
16.3
17.485
18.9
256
97.00000
4385964
4385964
16.9
18.099
21.0
512
97.00000
2281021
2281021
18.2
19.163
20.5
1024
96.00000
1148897
1148897
19.6
20.780
22.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1114

System
12 EoS Boards
Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
Tx
Frames
(pks/sec)
Rx Frames
(pks/sec)
Min
Latency
(us)
Ave
Latency
(us)
Max
Latency
(us)
1280
96.00000
923190
923190
20.5
21.649
23.1
1518
96.00000
780274
780274
21.2
22.410
23.9

The mechanical specifications of the EAS2 board are as follows:
Weight (kg):
N1EAS2: 1.2
N3EAS2: 1.1

The maximum power consumption of the N1EAS2 is 70 W at room temperature (25C).
The maximum power consumption of the N3EAS2 is 83 W at room temperature (25C).
12.12 EFF8
technical specifications of the EFF8 (8x100M Ethernet optical interface board).

The EFF8 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
12.12.2 Application
The EFF8 is an Ethernet optical interface board. The EFF8 can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to transmit and receive 100M Ethernet optical signals for the data board.

The EFF8 receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet optical signals. The EFF8 must work with
the Ethernet processing board.

The EFF8 consists of the interface module and power module.
Figure 12-68 shows the functional block diagram of the EFF8 by describing how to process
1x100 Mbit/s Ethernet signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1115

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EFF8

Backplane
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
EFT8/EFS0/EMS4/EMR0
Interface
module
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
+3.3 V
EFT8/EFS0/EMS4/EMR0
Power
module
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

In the receive direction, the interface module performs O/E conversion for the Ethernet
signals and transmits the signals to the EFT8, EFS0, EMS4, or EMR0.
In the transmit direction, the interface module performs E/O conversion for the Ethernet
signals and transmits the signals to the optical interface.

The power module provides all the modules of the EFF8 with the required DC voltages.
12.12.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFF8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 12-69 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1116

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EFF8
EFF8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LINK ACT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
OUT5 IN5
OUT6 IN6
OUT7 IN7
OUT8 IN8
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
EFF8
Eight connection status indicators (LINK) one color (green)
Eight data receiving and transmission indicators (ACT) one color (orange)
The front panel of the EFF8 has eight optical interfaces.
Table 12-253 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EFF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1117

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EFF8

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN8
LC
Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet

optical signals.
OUT1OUT8
LC
Transmits the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet

optical signals.
12.12.6 Valid Slots

The EFF8 can be installed in slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 in the subrack and works
as the interface board of the EFT8, EFS0 or EMR0. The EFF8 can be installed in slots 1926
and 2936 in the subrack and works as the interface board of the EMS4, EMS2 or EFS0A.
Table 12-254 lists the slots valid for the EFT8/EFS0/EMR0 and the corresponding slots for
the EFF8.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the EFT8/EFS0/EMR0 and the corresponding slots for the EFF8
Slot Valid for the EFT8/EFS0/EMR0
Corresponding Slot for the EFF8
Slot 2
Slots 19
Slot 3
Slots 21
Slot 4
Slots 23
Slot 5
Slots 25
Slot 13
Slots 29
Slot 14
Slots 31
Slot 15
Slots 33
Slot 16
Slots 35
Table 12-255 lists the slots valid for the EMS4/EMS2/EFS0A and the corresponding slots for
the EFF8.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the EMS4/EMS2/EFS0A and the corresponding slots for the EFF8
Slot Valid for the EMS4/EMS2/EFS0A
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1118

System
12 EoS Boards
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36

The technical specifications of the EFF8 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 12-256 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EFF8.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EFF8
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
100 Mbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZI encoding signal (100M)
100BASE-LX
100BASE-FX
range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1270 to 1380
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC (15 km)
Multi-mode LC (2 km)

power (dBm)
-15 to -8
-19 to -14
(dBm)
-28
-30
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-14
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10


The mechanical specifications of the EFF8 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1119

System
12 EoS Boards
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the EFF8 at room temperature (25C) is 6 W.
12.13 EFF8A
technical specifications of the EFF8A (8x100M Ethernet optical interface board).

The EFF8A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
12.13.2 Application
The EFF8A is an Ethernet optical interface board. The EFF8A can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to transmit and receive 100M Ethernet optical signals for the data board.

The EFF8A receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet optical signals. The EFF8A must work
with the N5EFS0.

The EFF8A consists of the interface module and power module.
Figure 12-70 shows the functional block diagram of the EFF8A by describing how to process
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EFF8A
Backplane
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
N5EFS0
Interface
module
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
+3.3 V
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
N5EFS0
Power
module
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

Copyright Huawei
1120

System
12 EoS Boards

signals and transmits the signals to the N5EFS0.

The power module provides all the modules of the EFF8A with the required DC voltages.
12.13.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFF8A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 12-71 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFF8A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1121

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EFF8A
EFF8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LINK ACT
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
OUT5 IN5
OUT6 IN6
OUT7 IN7
OUT8 IN8
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
EFF8
Eight connection status indicators (LINK) one color (green)
Eight data receiving and transmission indicators (ACT) one color (orange)
The front panel of the EFF8A has eight optical interfaces.
Table 12-257 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EFF8A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1122

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EFF8A

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN8
LC

optical signals.
OUT1OUT8
LC
Transmits the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet

optical signals.
12.13.6 Valid Slots

The EFF8A can be installed in slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 in the subrack and works as
the interface board of the N5EFS0.
Table 12-258 lists the slots valid for the N5EFS0 and the corresponding slots for the EFF8A.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the N5EFS0 and the corresponding slots for the EFF8A
Slot Valid for the N5EFS0
Corresponding Slot for the EFF8A
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35

The technical specifications of the EFF8A include the parameters specified for optical

Table 12-259 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EFF8A.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EFF8A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
100 Mbit/s
Line code pattern
MLT-3 encoding signal (100M)
Type of optical
100BASE-FX/LX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1123

System
Parameter
12 EoS Boards
Value
interface
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
100BASE-LX (15 km): 1261 to 1360
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC (10 km), Multi-mode LC (2 km)
Mean launched
optical power (dBm)
100BASE-LX (15 km): -15 to -8
(dBm)
100BASE-LX (15 km): -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
100BASE-LX (15 km): -8
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
100BASE-LX (15 km): 8.2
100BASE-FX (2 km): 1270 to 1380
100BASE-FX (2 km): -19 to -14
100BASE-FX (2 km): -30
100BASE-FX (2 km): -14
100BASE-FX (2 km): 10

The mechanical specifications of the EFF8A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the EFF8A at room temperature (25C) is 15 W.
12.14 ETF8
technical specifications of the ETF8 (8x100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board).

The ETF8 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
12.14.2 Application
The ETF8 is an Ethernet electrical interface board. The ETF8 can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to transmit and receive 100M Ethernet electrical signals for the data board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1124

System
12 EoS Boards

The ETF8 receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet electrical signals. The ETF8 must work
with the Ethernet processing board.

The ETF8 consists of the interface module and power module.
Figure 12-72 shows the functional block diagram of the ETF8 by describing how to process
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the ETF8
Backplane
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
EFT8/EFS0/EMS4/EMR0
Interface
module
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
+3.3 V
EFT8/EFS0/EMS4/EMR0
Power
module
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

signals and transmits the signals to the EFT8, EFS0, EMS4, or EMR0.

The power module provides all the modules of the ETF8 with the required DC voltages.
12.14.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the ETF8 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 12-73 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ETF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1125

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the ETF8
ETF8
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
FE7
FE8
ETF8
The front panel of the ETF8 has eight electrical interfaces.
Table 12-260 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the ETF8. For information
about the cables connected to the interfaces, see 22.4.6 Straight-Through Cable and 22.4.7
Crossover Cable.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the ETF8
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
FE1FE8
RJ-45

electrical signals.
Table 12-261 provides the pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1126

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.2 Pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETF8

Front View
8 7
6 5
3 2
Pin
Description
Transmitting (+)
Transmitting ()
Receiving (+)
Grounding
Grounding
Receiving ()
Grounding
Grounding
12.14.6 Valid Slots

The ETF8 can be installed in slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 in the subrack and works
as the interface board of the EFT8, EFS0 or EMR0. The ETF8 can be installed in slots 1926
and 2936 in the subrack and works as the interface board of the EMS4, EMS2 or EFS0A.
Table 12-262 lists the slots valid for the EFT8/EFS0/EMR0 and the corresponding slots for
the ETF8.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the EFT8/EFS0/EMR0 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8
Slot Valid for the EFT8/EFS0/EMR0
Corresponding Slot for the ETF8
Slot 2
Slots 19
Slot 3
Slots 21
Slot 4
Slots 23
Slot 5
Slots 25
Slot 13
Slots 29
Slot 14
Slots 31
Slot 15
Slots 33
Slot 16
Slots 35
Table 12-263 lists the slots valid for the EMS4/EMS2/EFS0A and the corresponding slots for
the ETF8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1127

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.4 Slots valid for the EMS4/EMS2/EFS0A and the corresponding slots for the ETF8
Corresponding Slot for the ETF8
Slot 2
Slots 19 and 20
Slot 3
Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5
Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13
Slots 29 and 30
Slot 14
Slots 31 and 32
Slot 15
Slots 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slots 35 and 36

The technical specifications of the ETF8 include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 12-264 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the ETF8.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ETF8
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
Line code pattern

(100M)
interface

The mechanical specifications of the ETF8 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the ETF8 at room temperature (25C) is 2 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1128

System
12 EoS Boards
12.15 ETF8A
technical specifications of the ETF8A (8x100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board).

The ETF8A is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
12.15.2 Application
The ETF8A is an Ethernet electrical interface board. The ETF8A can be used on the OptiX
OSN equipment series to transmit and receive 100M Ethernet electrical signals for the data
board.

The ETF8A receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet electrical signals. The ETF8A must
work with the N5EFS0.

The ETF8A consists of the interface module and power module.
Figure 12-74 shows the functional block diagram of the ETF8A by describing how to process
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the ETF8A
Backplane
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
N5EFS0
Interface
module
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
+3.3 V
N5EFS0
Power
module
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power

signals and transmits the signals to the N5EFS0.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1129

System
12 EoS Boards

The power module provides all the modules of the ETF8A with the required DC voltages.
12.15.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the ETF8A has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 12-75 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ETF8A.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the ETF8A
ETF8A
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
FE7
FE8
ETF8A
The front panel of the ETF8A has eight electrical interfaces.
Table 12-265 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the ETF8A. For information
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1130

System
12 EoS Boards
Crossover Cable.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the ETF8A
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
FE1FE8
RJ-45

electrical signals.
Table 12-266 provides the pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETF8A.
Figure 1.2 Pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETF8A
Front View
8 7
6 5
3 2
Pin
Description
Transmitting (+)
Transmitting ()
Receiving (+)
Grounding
Grounding
Receiving ()
Grounding
Grounding
12.15.6 Valid Slots

The ETF8A can be installed in slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 in the subrack and works as
the interface board of the N5EFS0.
Table 12-267 lists the slots valid for the N5EFS0 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8A.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the N5EFS0 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8A
Corresponding Slot for the ETF8A
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1131

System
12 EoS Boards
Corresponding Slot for the ETF8A
Slot 16
Slot 35

The technical specifications of the ETF8A include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 12-268 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the ETF8A.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ETF8A
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
Line code pattern

(100M)
interface

The mechanical specifications of the ETF8A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the ETF8A at room temperature (25C) is 11 W.
12.16 ETS8
technical specifications of the ETS8 (8x10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface switching
board).

The ETS8 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1132

System
12 EoS Boards
12.16.2 Application
The ETS8 is an Ethernet electrical interface protection switching board. The ETS8 can be
used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to realize the TPS protection on the data board.

The ETS8 is used to provide the TPS protection for 8xFE signals at the electrical interface.
The ETS8 must work with the EFS0 or EFS0A.

The ETS8 consists of the interface module, switch matrix module, and power module.
Figure 12-76 shows the functional block diagram of the ETS8 by describing how to process
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the ETS8
Backplane
Cross-connect board
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
Interface
module
100 Mbit/s
Ethernet signal
+3.3 V
Switch
matrix
module
Power
module
Fuse
EFS0
TSB8
TSB8
EFS0
+3.3 V backup power

The interface module receives and transmits the Ethernet optical signals.

module transmits the signal to the EFS0. When the TPS is performed, the switch matrix
module transmits the signal to the TSB8 for bridging.

The power module provides all the modules of the ETS8 with the required DC voltages.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1133

System
12 EoS Boards
12.16.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the ETS8 has interfaces and a bar code.

Figure 12-77 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ETS8.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the ETS8
ETS8
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
FE7
FE8
ETS8
The front panel of the ETS8 has eight electrical interfaces.
Table 12-269 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the ETS8. For information
Crossover Cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1134

System
12 EoS Boards
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the ETS8

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
FE1FE8
RJ-45

electrical signals.
Table 12-270 provides the pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETS8.
Figure 1.2 Pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETS8
Front View
8 7 6 5 4
Pin
Description
Transmitting (+)
Transmitting ()
Receiving (+)
Grounding
Grounding
3 2
Receiving ()
Grounding
Grounding
12.16.6 Valid Slots

The ETS8 can be installed in slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 in the subrack and works
as the interface board of the EFS0. The ETS8 can be installed in slots 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 34, and 35 in the subrack and works as the interface board of the EFS0A.
Table 12-271 lists the slots valid for the EFS0 and the corresponding slots for the ETS8.
Figure 1.3 Slots valid for the EFS0 and the corresponding slots for the ETS8
Corresponding Slot for the ETS8
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1135

System
12 EoS Boards
Slot 16
Slot 35
Table 12-272 lists the slots valid for the EFS0A and the corresponding slots for the ETS8.
Figure 1.4 Slots valid for the EFS0A and the corresponding slots for the ETS8
Slot 2
Slot 19
Slot 3
Slot 21 and 22
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33 and 34
Slot 16
Slot 35

The technical specifications of the ETS8 include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 12-273 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the ETS8.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ETS8
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
Line code pattern

(100M)
interface

The mechanical specifications of the ETS8 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1136

System
12 EoS Boards
Weight (kg): 0.4

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the ETS8 is 0 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1137

System
13 ATM Boards
13
ATM Boards
About This Chapter

The ATM boards include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM service processing boards.
13.1 ADL4
technical specifications of the ADL4 (1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the ADL4.
13.2 ADQ1
technical specifications of the ADQ1 (4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the ADQ1.
13.3 IDL4
technical specifications of the IDL4 (1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the IDL4.
13.4 IDQ1
technical specifications of the IDQ1 (4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the IDQ1.
13.1 ADL4
technical specifications of the ADL4 (1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the ADL4.

The ADL4 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1138

System
13 ATM Boards
13.1.2 Application
The ATM board is used in the network that is based on ATM switching and transmission. The
ATM board can carry various types of ATM services.
The ADL4 provides one standard STM-4 optical interface and can be interconnected with the
switch or DSLAM to transmit the ATM services. In addition, the ADL4 can switch cell
headers to converge and multiplex bandwidths so that the bandwidths are not wasted. The
ADL4 supports the following types of application of the ATM services:
Application of the ATM services that occupy bandwidths exclusively
Application of the ATM services that share bandwidths
1.1.1.1.1249 Application of the ATM Services That Occupy Bandwidths Exclusively

When the ATM services do not share bandwidths, only the ATM service processing boards on
the source NE and sink NE perform ATM layer processing for the ATM services. The
intermediate NEs that the ATM services traverse do not perform ATM layer processing and
only pass through the ATM services on the SDH timeslots. In this case, each ATM service
occupies the VC-3 or VC-4 channel exclusively. The ATM services can be converged at the
central node and then transmitted on the STM-4 optical interface. Figure 13-1 shows the
networking and application of the ATM services that occupy bandwidths exclusively.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the ATM services that occupy bandwidths exclusively
DSLAM
34 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
Service
convergence
NE1
155 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
622 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
2.5 Gbit/s
SDH ring
NE2
NE4
DSLAM
Router
NE3
34 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
DSLAM
1.1.1.1.1250 Application of the ATM Services That Share Bandwidths

The VP-ring and VC-ring realize bandwidth sharing and statistical multiplexing for the ATM
services. The ATM services on each NE share one VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-Xv) channel. In
this case, each NE performs ATM layer processing for the ATM services. Figure 13-2 shows
the networking and application of the ATM services that share bandwidths.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1139

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.2 Networking and application of the ATM services that share bandwidths
The ATM services on NE1 are
dropped on NE2, then converged DSLAM
with the other ATM services, and
finally sent to the VP/VC-ring.
NE1
34 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
155 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
NE4
VC4-Xv
VP/VC-ring
DSLAM
Router
622 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
NE2
NE3
34 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
DSLAM

The ADL4 supports the ATM switching and ATM protection.
Table 13-1 provides the functions and features of the ADL4.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the ADL4
Function and Feature
ADL4
Basic functions
Transmits/Receives and processes 1xSTM-4 ATM services.
Type of optical
interface
Supports the following types of optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2 and Ve-4.2.
Connector type
LC
Type of optical module
SFP
E3 ATM interface
Supports 12xE3 signals, which are accessed through the PD3,

PL3, or N1PL3A.
IMA function
Does not support the IMA function.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
Supports a bandwidth of 8xVC-4s, or a bandwidth of 12xVC-3s

and 4xVC-4s.
NOTE
Only VC-4s numbered 5-8 support the binding of VC-3 paths.
ATM switching
capability
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Unidirectional: 1.2 Gbit/s; bidirectional: 600 Mbit/s

Copyright Huawei
1140

System
13 ATM Boards
ADL4
Supports VC-3, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X = 14) granularities.
Service types
Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.
Number of supported
ATM connections
2048
Statistical multiplexing
Supports the statistical multiplexing.
Flow types and QoS
Complies with IETF RFC2514 and ATM forum TM4.0.
ATM multicast
connection
Supports the spatial multicast and logical multicast.
ATM protection (ITUT I.630)
Supports the unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1,

unidirectional/bidirectional 1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring
protection schemes.
OAM functions (ITUT I.610)
Supports the AIS, RDI, LB, and CC.
Supports inloops at the ATM layer and on optical interfaces.

Supports outloops at the ATM layer.
These features can be used to locate faults quickly.
Alarms and
performance events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be

used to locate faults and maintain the equipment.

The ADL4 consists of the O/E converting module, physical layer module, ATM module, E3
module, mapping module, logic and control module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 13-3 shows the functional block diagram of the ADL4 by describing how to process
1xSTM-4 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1141

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the ADL4

Backplane
622
Mbit/s
E/O
622
Mbit/s
O/E
622
Mbit/s
High-speed
bus
Physical
layer
622 module
Mbit/s
Cross-connect unit
Mapping
module
ATM
module
E3
module
High-speed
bus
Cross-connect unit
O/E converting
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
Communication
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
50 MHz
77 MHz
100 MHz
Clock
module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
Power
module
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power

In the receive direction, optical signals are converted into electrical signals. In the transmit
direction, electrical signals are converted into optical signals.
1.1.1.1.1252 Physical Layer Module

The physical layer module mainly performs the following functions:
Maps ATM cells into SDH frames.
Demaps SDH frames to ATM cells.
Implements the following functions at the ATM service physical layer: cell delimitation,
and test and generation of header error control (HEC) sequence.
1.1.1.1.1253 ATM Module

The ATM module mainly performs the following ATM layer functions that are specified in
ATM protocols:
Flow control
Extraction and generation of cell headers
ATM switching
1.1.1.1.1254 E3 Module
The E3 module mainly processes ATM services at the E3 rate. This module performs the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1142

System
13 ATM Boards
following functions:
Maps the ATM cells into E3 containers.
Demaps E3 containers to ATM cells.
Implements functions at the ATM physical layer for ATM services at the E3 rate.

The mapping module performs the following functions:
Maps ATM cells into SDH frame payloads.
Demaps SDH frame payloads to ATM cells.
Implements functions at the ATM physical layer.
Implements the VC4-Xv (X4) virtual concatenation.

The logic and control module performs the following functions:
Controls writing and reading of each chip.
Communicates with the NE.
Issues configured services.
Reports alarms of each functional module.
Detects R_LOS alarms of optical modules.
Controls the shutting down of the laser.

This module mainly generates the required working clock for each chip. The frequency of the
clock can be 50 MHz, 77 MHz, or 100 MHz.

require.
13.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the ADL4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 13-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ADL4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1143

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the ADL4
ADL4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
ADL4
The front panel of the ADL4 has one optical interface. Table 13-2 describes the type and
usage of the optical interface of the ADL4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1144

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interface of the ADL4

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC
(swappable)
Transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals.

The ADL4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
13.1.7 Valid Slots

The ADL4 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the ADL4 cannot work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the ADL4 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the ADL4 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the ADL4 can be installed in slots 18
13.1.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the ADL4 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 13-3 provides the relationship between the feature code of the ADL4 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the ADL4 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1ADL410
10
S-4.1
SSN1ADL411
11
L-4.1
SSN1ADL412
12
L-4.2
SSN1ADL413
13
Ve-4.2

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1145

System
13 ATM Boards

correct.
----End

Step 6 Required: Configure services. For details, see Configuring ATM and IMA Services.
Step 7 Required: Set the interface.

HuaWei SBS
C2 byte: Check whether the ATM parameter is set on both ends. The setting of the
C2 byte on the interconnected equipment must be consistent.

----End

Step 1 Connect the ATM instrument to the external optical interface of the board.
Step 8 Perform an outloop at the ATM port on the cross-connect side of the board. For the settings,
see 27.7 Checking Board Parameters.
Step 9 Configure the basic ATM services on the instrument.
Step 10 Send the ATM services on the instrument.
Step 11 Check whether the services received on the instrument are normal and check whether certain
cells are discarded.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1146

System
13 ATM Boards

Boards.
----End

You can set parameters for the ADL4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the ADL4 by using the U2000:
Port type
Flow type
Service type
Peak cell rate (PCR)
Sustainable cell rate (SCR)
Maximum cell burst size
Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)
Parameter Settings.

Table 13-4 lists the faults that occur on the ADL4 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the ADL4 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption

The services on an ATM port

are interrupted.
The services on all the ATM

ports are interrupted.
Packet loss
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Bit errors occur on the line side.

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.

Packet Loss.
1147

System
13 ATM Boards
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Interconnection
fault

occurs on a single ATM port.

occurs on the VCTRUNK port.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the ADL4, see Replacing an ATM Board.

13.1.12.1 Alarms of N1ADL4

AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
CC_LOC
CHCS
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_LOM
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LCD
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
OCD
OUT_PWR_ABN
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOF
R_LOS
R_LOSYNC
R_OOF
SLAVE_WORKING
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
TF
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
UHCS
VC_AIS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1148

System
13 ATM Boards
VC_RDI
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC4
VP_AIS
VP_RDI
W_R_FAIL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE

13.1.13.1 Performance Events of N1ADL4

Figure 1.1 SDH
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSSES
MSUAS
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3SES
VC3UAS
Figure 1.2 ATM

ATM_INGCELL
ATM_EGCELL
ATM_CORRECTED_HCS
ERR
ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCS
ERR
ATM_RECV_CELL
ATM_RECV_IDLECELL
ATM_TRAN_CELL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1149

System
13 ATM Boards

The technical specifications of the ADL4 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 13-7 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ADL4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ADL4
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-13
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
10
10
10.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the ADL4 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1150

System
13 ATM Boards
Weight (kg): 0.9

The maximum power consumption of the ADL4 at room temperature (25C) is 41 W.
13.2 ADQ1
technical specifications of the ADQ1 (4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the ADQ1.

The ADQ1 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
13.2.2 Application
The ATM board is used in the network that is based on ATM switching and transmission. The
ATM board can carry various types of ATM services.
The ADQ1 provides four standard STM-1 optical interfaces and can be interconnected with
the switch or DSLAM to transmit the ATM services. In addition, the ADQ1 can switch cell
headers to converge and multiplex bandwidths so that the bandwidths are not wasted. The
ADQ1 supports the following types of application of the ATM services:
Application of the ATM Services That Occupy Bandwidths Exclusively
Application of the ATM Services That Share Bandwidths
1.1.1.1.1272 Application of the ATM Services That Occupy Bandwidths Exclusively

When the ATM services do not share bandwidths, only the ATM service processing boards on
the source NE and sink NE perform ATM layer processing for the ATM services. The
intermediate NEs that the ATM services traverse do not perform ATM layer processing and
only pass through the ATM services on the SDH timeslots. In this case, each ATM service
occupies the VC-3 or VC-4 channel exclusively. The ATM services can be converged at the
central node and then transmitted on the STM-4 optical interface. Figure 13-5 shows the
networking and application of the ATM services that occupy bandwidths exclusively.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1151

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the ATM services that occupy bandwidths exclusively
DSLAM
34 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
Service
convergence
NE1
155 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
622 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
2.5 Gbit/s
SDH ring
NE2
NE4
DSLAM
Router
NE3
34 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
DSLAM
1.1.1.1.1273 Application of the ATM Services That Share Bandwidths

The VP-ring and VC-ring realize bandwidth sharing and statistical multiplexing for the ATM
services. The ATM services on each NE share one VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-Xv) channel. In
this case, each NE performs ATM layer processing for the ATM services. Figure 13-6 shows
the networking and application of the ATM services that share bandwidths.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1152

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.2 Networking and application of the ATM services that share bandwidths
The ATM services on NE1 are
dropped on NE2, then converged DSLAM
with the other ATM services, and
finally sent to the VP/VC-ring.
NE1
34 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
155 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
NE4
VC4-Xv
VP/VC-ring
DSLAM
Router
622 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
NE2
NE3
34 Mbit/s
ATM traffic
DSLAM

The ADQ1 supports the ATM switching and ATM protection.
Table 13-8 provides the functions and features of the ADQ1.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the ADQ1
Function and
Feature
ADQ1
Basic functions
Type of optical
interface

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2. The characteristics of
the optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types
comply with ITU-T G.957. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces of the Ie-1 and Ve-1.2 types comply with the standards
defined by Huawei.
Connector type
LC
Optical module type
SFP
E3 ATM interface
Supports 12xE3 signals, which are accessed through the PD3,

PL3, or N1PL3A.
IMA function
Does not support the IMA function.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth

and 4xVC-4s.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1153

System
Function and
Feature
13 ATM Boards
ADQ1
NOTE
Only VC-4s numbered 5-8 support the binding of VC-3 paths.
ATM switching
capability
Supports VC-3, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X = 14) granularities.
Service types
Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR.
Number of supported
ATM connections
2048
Statistical
multiplexing
Flow types and QoS
ATM multicast
connection
ATM protection (ITUT I.630)

unidirectional/bidirectional 1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring protection
schemes.
OAM functions (ITUT I.610)

Alarms and
performance events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be

used to locate faults and maintain the equipment.

The ADQ1 consists of the O/E converting module, physical layer module, ATM module, E3
Figure 13-7 shows the functional block diagram of the ADQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1154

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the ADQ1

Backplane
4x155
Mbit/s
4x155
Mbit/s
E/O
4x155
Mbit/s
O/E
Physical
layer
4x155 module
Mbit/s
ATM
module
High-speed
bus
Cross-connect unit
High-speed
bus
Cross-connect unit
Mapping
module
E3
module
O/E converting
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
Communication
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
50 MHz
77 MHz
100 MHz
Clock
module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
Power
module
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power


1.1.1.1.1276 ATM Module

ATM protocols:
Flow control
ATM switching
1.1.1.1.1277 E3 Module
The E3 module mainly processes ATM services at the E3 rate. This module performs the
following functions:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1155

System
13 ATM Boards
Maps the ATM cells into E3 containers.
Demaps E3 containers to ATM cells.
Implements functions at the ATM physical layer for ATM services at the E3 rate.




require.
13.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the ADQ1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 13-8 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ADQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1156

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the ADQ1
ADQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
ADQ1
The front panel of the ADQ1 has four optical interfaces. Table 13-9 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the ADQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1157

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the ADQ1

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC (swappable)
OUT2/IN2
LC (swappable)
OUT3/IN3
LC (swappable)
OUT4/IN4
LC (swappable)

The ADQ1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
13.2.7 Valid Slots

The ADQ1 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the ADQ1 cannot work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the ADQ1 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the ADQ1 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the ADQ1 can be installed in slots 18
13.2.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the ADQ1 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 13-10 provides the relationship between the feature code of the ADQ1 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the ADQ1 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1ADQ110
10
S-1.1
SSN1ADQ111
11
L-1.1
SSN1ADQ112
12
L-1.2
SSN1ADQ113
13
Ve-1.2
SSN1ADQ114
14
Ie-1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1158

System
13 ATM Boards


correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS

----End

Step 1 Connect the ATM instrument to the external optical interface of the board.
Step 8 Perform an outloop at the ATM port on the cross-connect side of the board. For the settings,
see 27.7 Checking Board Parameters.
Step 9 Configure the basic ATM services on the instrument.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1159

System
13 ATM Boards
Step 10 Send the ATM services on the instrument.

Step 11 Check whether the services received on the instrument are normal and check whether certain
cells are discarded.
----End

Boards.
----End

You can set parameters for the ADQ1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the ADQ1 by using the U2000:
Port type
Flow type
Service type
PCR
SCR
CDVT
Parameter Settings.

Table 13-11 lists the faults that occur on the ADQ1 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the ADQ1 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)


Interruptions.

Copyright Huawei
1160

System
Fault Symptom
13 ATM Boards
Common Fault Cause

are interrupted.

Packet loss

Packet Loss.
Interconnection
fault




replace the board.
For information on how to replace the ADQ1, see Replacing an ATM Board.

13.2.12.1 Alarms of N1ADQ1

AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_SD
B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS
CC_LOC
CHCS
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT
LCD
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
OCD
OUT_PWR_ABN
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOF
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1161

System
13 ATM Boards
R_LOS
R_LOSYNC
R_OOF
SLAVE_WORKING
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
TF
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
UHCS
VC_AIS
VC_RDI
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC4
VP_AIS
VP_RDI
W_R_FAIL
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE

13.2.13.1 Performance Events of N1ADQ1

Figure 1.1 SDH
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSSES
MSUAS
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
TUPJCHIGH
TUPJCLOW
VC3BBE
VC3CSES
VC3ES
VC3FEBBE
VC3FECSES
VC3FEES
VC3FESES
VC3SES
VC3UAS
Figure 1.2 ATM

ATM_INGCELL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
ATM_EGCELL
Copyright Huawei
ATM_CORRECTED_HCS
1162

System
13 ATM Boards
ERR
ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCS
ERR
ATM_RECV_CELL
ATM_RECV_IDLECELL
ATM_TRAN_CELL

The technical specifications of the ADQ1 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 13-14 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ADQ1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ADQ1
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Type of fiber
Multimode LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1270 to
1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 0.5
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-3 to 0
Receive optical
power (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
10
8.2
10
10
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression
30
30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1163

System
Parameter
13 ATM Boards
Value
ratio (dB)


The mechanical specifications of the ADQ1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the ADQ1 at room temperature (25C) is 41 W.
13.3 IDL4
technical specifications of the IDL4 (1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the IDL4.

The IDL4 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
13.3.2 Application
The IMA technology demultiplexes the assembled ATM cell flow into multiple low-speed
links, and multiplexed the multiple low-speed links on the remote end to restore the original
assembled cell flow. The IMA technology realizes the interconnection between high-speed
links and low-speed links.
The IMA board is applicable to the transmission of the ATM cells on the E1 interface or
interfaces at the other rates. The IMA board only provides a channel and does not process the
service type or ATM cells. That is, the IMA board transparently transmits the ATM layer
signals and higher-layer signals. Figure 13-9 shows the networking and application of the
IMA services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1164

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the IMA services

RNC
NE1
NMS
25 km
NodeB 1
40 km
NE2
NE4
Two-fiber bidirectional
MSP ring
NodeB 4
35 km
30 km
NE3
NodeB 2
NodeB 3

The IDL4 supports the ATM switching, IMA, and ATM protection.
Table 13-15 provides the functions and features of the IDL4.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the IDL4
Function and
Feature
IDL4
Basic functions
Type of optical
interface
Supports the following types of optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L4.2 and Ve-4.2.
Connector type
LC
Optical module type
SFP
E3 ATM interface
Does not support the E3 ATM interface.
IMA functions
(ATM Forum IMA
1.1)
Transmits/Receives and processes IMA services when the IDL4

is used with the E1 service processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQM.
Supports a maximum of 63 E1 IMA services.
Supports the mapping between ATM ports and a maximum of 16

IMA groups. Each IMA group supports 132 E1 signals.

E1 links that belong to non-IMA groups.
Supports the maximum IMA multichannel delay of 226 ms.
Maximum uplink
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1165

System
Function and
Feature
IDL4
bandwidth
and 7xVC-4s.
13 ATM Boards
NOTE
Only the first VC-4 supports the binding of VC-12 paths.
ATM switching
capability
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-12, VC-4, VC4-Xc (X = 14), and VC12-Xv (X = 1

32) granularities.
Service types
Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR.
Number of
supported ATM
connections
2048
Statistical
multiplexing
Flow types and QoS
ATM multicast
connection
ATM protection
(ITU-T I.630)

unidirectional/bidirectional 1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring protection
schemes.
Board-level 1+1
protection
Supports the board-level 1+1 protection.
OAM functions
(ITU-T I.610)
Maintenance
features

Alarms and
performance events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be used

to locate faults and maintain the equipment.
Note: The IMA function can encapsulate ATM cells into E1 signals. The IMA group can
coexist with a single E1 signal. The IMA group can dynamically increase or decrease the
bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization. The IMA group can also be used to
converge 2 Mbit/s services and to interconnect with other IMA equipment.

The IDL4 consists of the O/E converting module, physical layer module, ATM module, IMA
Figure 13-10 shows the functional block diagram of the IDL4 by describing how to process
1xSTM-4 signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1166

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the IDL4

Backplane
622
Mbit/s
E/O
622
Mbit/s
O/E
622
Mbit/s
622
Mbit/s
Physical
layer
module
ATM
module
High-speed
bus
High-speed
bus
Mapping
module
IMA
module
O/E converting
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
Communication
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
50 MHz
77 MHz
100 MHz
Clock
module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
Power
module
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power


1.1.1.1.1297 ATM Module

ATM protocols:
Flow control
ATM switching
1.1.1.1.1298 IMA Module

This module mainly performs the following functions that are specified in IMA protocols:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1167

System
Separation and re-creation of ATM cells
Frame synchronization
Insertion and extraction of IMA control protocol (ICP) cells
Management of IMA groups
13 ATM Boards




require.
13.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the IDL4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 13-11 shows the appearance of the front panel of the IDL4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1168

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the IDL4
IDL4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
IDL4
The front panel of the IDL4 has one optical interface. Table 13-16 describes the type and
usage of the optical interface of the IDL4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1169

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interface of the IDL4

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC
(swappable)

The IDL4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
13.3.7 Valid Slots

The IDL4 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the IDL4 cannot work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the IDL4 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the IDL4 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the IDL4 can be installed in slots 18 and
1117. In this case, the bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s.
13.3.8 Feature Code

Table 13-17 provides the relationship between the feature code of the IDL4 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the IDL4 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1IDL410
10
S-4.1
SSN1IDL411
11
L-4.1
SSN1IDL412
12
L-4.2
SSN1IDL413
13
Ve-4.2

The IDL4 supports the 1+1 board-level protection. The working IDL4 and protection IDL4
should be installed in paired slots.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1170

System
13 ATM Boards
The paired slots valid for the IDL4 vary with the cross-connect capacity.
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: (slot 8, slot 11), (slot 7, slot 12), (slot 6,
slot 13), (slot 5, slot 14), (slot 4, slot 15), (slot 3, slot 16), and (slot 2, slot 17)


correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS

----End

Step 1 Use the ATM instrument (for example, AX4000) to test the ATM services.
1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Connect the ATM instrument to the external optical interface of the board.
Copyright Huawei
1171

System
13 ATM Boards
2.
Perform an outloop at the ATM port on the cross-connect side of the board. For the
settings, see 27.7 Checking Board Parameters.
3.
Configure the basic ATM services on the instrument.
4.
Send the ATM services on the instrument.
5.
Check whether the services received on the instrument are normal and check whether
certain cells are discarded.
Step 8 Use the IMA instrument (for example, AX4000) to test the IMA services.
1.
Connect the IMA instrument to the cross-connect side of the board. The connection can
be realized by using the E1 tributary board.
2.
Perform an outloop on the optical interface side of the board by using optical fiber pairs.
3.
Configure the basic IMA services on the instrument.
4.
Send the IMA services on the instrument.
5.
----End

Boards.
----End

You can set parameters for the IDL4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the IDL4 by using the U2000:
Port type
Flow type
Service type
PCR
SCR
CDVT
Parameter Settings.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1172

System
13 ATM Boards

Table 13-18 lists the faults that occur on the IDL4 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the IDL4 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption


are interrupted.



are transiently interrupted.

abnormal.
Transient service
interruption
Interruptions.

Packet loss

Packet Loss.
Interconnection
fault



The IMA interconnection fault

occurs.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the IDL4, see Replacing an ATM Board.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1173

System
13 ATM Boards
13.3.13.1 Alarms of N1IDL4

ALM_E1AIS
ALM_IMA_LIF
ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD
ALM_IMA_LODS
ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSAB
LE
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSAB
LE
ALM_IMA_RFI
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_SD
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CC_LOC
CHCS
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LASER_MOD_ER
R
LASER_SHUT
LCD
LFA
LMFA
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_SLM
LP_TIM
LP_UNEQ
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
OCD
OUT_PWR_ABN
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOF
R_LOS
R_LOSYNC
R_OOF
SLAVE_WORKIN
G
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
TF
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
UHCS
VC_AIS
VC_RDI
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC4
VCG_MM
VP_AIS
VP_RDI
VPG_MM
W_R_FAIL
WRG_BD_TYPE
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SWDL_PKG_NOB
DSOFT
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1174

System
13 ATM Boards

13.3.14.1 Performance Events of N1IDL4

Figure 1.1 SDH
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPSES
LPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
Figure 1.2 ATM

ATM_INGCELL
ATM_EGCELL
ATM_CORRECTED_HCS
ERR
ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCS
ERR
ATM_RECV_CELL
ATM_RECV_IDLECELL
ATM_TRAN_CELL

The technical specifications of the IDL4 include the parameters specified for optical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1175

System
13 ATM Boards

Table 13-21 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the IDL4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the IDL4
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
(dBm)
-28
-28
-28
-34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-8
-8
-13
Minimum
extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
10.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio (dB)
30
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the IDL4 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the IDL4 at room temperature (25C) is 41 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1176

System
13 ATM Boards
13.4 IDQ1
technical specifications of the IDQ1 (4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the IDQ1.

The IDQ1 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
13.4.2 Application
The IMA technology demultiplexes the assembled ATM cell flow into multiple low-speed
links, and multiplexed the multiple low-speed links on the remote end to restore the original
assembled cell flow. The IMA technology realizes the interconnection between high-speed
links and low-speed links.
The IMA board is applicable to the transmission of the ATM cells on the E1 interface or
interfaces at the other rates. The IMA board only provides a channel and does not process the
service type or ATM cells. That is, the IMA board transparently transmits the ATM layer
signals and higher-layer signals. Figure 13-12 shows the networking and application of the
IMA services.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the IMA services
RNC
NE1
NMS
25 km
NodeB 1
40 km
NE2
NE4
Two-fiber bidirectional
MSP ring
NodeB 4
35 km
30 km
NE3
NodeB 2
NodeB 3

The IDQ1 supports the ATM switching, IMA, and ATM protection.
Table 13-22 provides the functions and features of the IDQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1177

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the IDQ1

Function and
Feature
IDQ1
Basic functions
Type of optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ie1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T
G.957. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the Ie-1 and Ve1.2 types comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Connector type
LC
Optical module
type
SFP
E3 ATM interface
Does not support the E3 ATM interface.
IMA functions
(ATM Forum
IMA 1.1)
Transmits/Receives and processes IMA services when the IDQ1 is

used with the E1 service processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQM.
Supports a maximum of 63 E1 IMA services.

IMA groups. Each IMA group supports 132 E1 signals.

E1 links that belong to non-IMA groups.
Supports the maximum IMA multichannel delay of 226 ms.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
Supports a bandwidth of 8xVC-4s, or a bandwidth of 63xVC-12s and

7xVC-4s. The IDQ1 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
NOTE
Only the first VC-4 supports the binding of VC-12 paths.
ATM switching
capability
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-12, VC-4, VC4-Xc (X = 14), and VC12-Xv (X = 132)

granularities.
Service types
Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.
Number of
supported ATM
connections
2048
Statistical
multiplexing
Flow types and

QoS
ATM multicast
connection
ATM protection
(ITU-T I.630)
Supports unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1, unidirectional/bidirectional

1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring protection schemes.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1178

System
13 ATM Boards
Function and
Feature
IDQ1
Board-level 1+1
protection
Supports the board-level 1+1 protection.
OAM functions
(ITU-T I.610)
Maintenance
features

Alarm and
performance event
Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be used to

locate faults and maintain the equipment.
Note: The IMA function can encapsulate ATM cells into E1 signals. The IMA group can
coexist with a single E1 signal. The IMA group can dynamically increase or decrease the
bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization. The IMA group can also be used to
converge 2 Mbit/s services and to interconnect with other IMA equipment.

The IDQ1 consists of the O/E converting module, physical layer module, ATM module, IMA
Figure 13-13 shows the functional block diagram of the IDQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1179

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the IDQ1

Backplane
4x155
Mbit/s
4x155
Mbit/s
E/O
4x155
Mbit/s
O/E
Physical
layer
4x155 module
Mbit/s
ATM
module
High-speed
bus
High-speed
bus
Mapping
module
IMA
module
O/E converting
module
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
Communication
Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
50 MHz
77 MHz
100 MHz
Clock
module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
Power
module
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power


1.1.1.1.1318 ATM Module

ATM protocols:
Flow control
ATM switching
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1180

System
13 ATM Boards
1.1.1.1.1319 IMA Module

This module mainly performs the following functions that are specified in IMA protocols:
Separation and re-creation of ATM cells
Frame synchronization
Insertion and extraction of IMA control protocol (ICP) cells
Management of IMA groups




require.
13.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the IDQ1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 13-14 shows the appearance of the front panel of the IDQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1181

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the IDQ1
IDQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
IDQ1
The front panel of the IDQ1 has four optical interfaces. Table 13-23 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the IDQ1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1182

System
13 ATM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the IDQ1

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC (swappable)
OUT2/IN2
LC (swappable)
OUT3/IN3
LC (swappable)
OUT4/IN4
LC (swappable)

The IDQ1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
13.4.7 Valid Slots

The IDQ1 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the IDQ1 cannot work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the IDQ1 vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. The slots
valid for the IDQ1 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the IDQ1 can be installed in slots 18
13.4.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the IDQ1 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 13-24 provides the relationship between the feature code of the IDQ1 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the IDQ1 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN1IDQ110
10
S-1.1
SSN1IDQ111
11
L-1.1
SSN1IDQ112
12
L-1.2
SSN1IDQ113
13
Ve-1.2
SSN1IDQ114
14
Ie-1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1183

System
13 ATM Boards

The IDQ1 supports the 1+1 board-level protection. The active and standby IDQ1 should be
housed in paired slots.
The valid paired slots for the IDQ1 vary with the cross-connect capacity.
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: (slot 8, slot 11), (slot 7, slot 12), (slot 6,
slot 13), (slot 5, slot 14), (slot 4, slot 15), (slot 3, slot 16), (slot 2, slot 17)


correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS

----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1184

System
13 ATM Boards

Step 1 Use the ATM instrument (for example, AX4000) to test the ATM services.
1.
Connect the ATM instrument to the external optical interface of the board.
2.
Perform an outloop at the ATM port on the cross-connect side of the board. For the
settings, see 27.7 Checking Board Parameters.
3.
Configure the basic ATM services on the instrument.
4.
Send the ATM services on the instrument.
5.
Step 8 Use the IMA instrument (for example, AX4000) to test the IMA services.
1.
Connect the IMA instrument to the cross-connect side of the board. The connection can
be realized by using the E1 tributary board.
2.
Perform an outloop on the optical interface side of the board by using optical fiber pairs.
3.
Configure the basic IMA services on the instrument.
4.
Send the IMA services on the instrument.
5.
----End

Boards.
----End

You can set parameters for the IDQ1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the IDQ1 by using the U2000:
Port type
Flow type
Service type
PCR
SCR
CDVT
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1185

System
13 ATM Boards
Parameter Settings.

Table 13-25 lists the faults that occur on the IDQ1 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the IDQ1 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption


are interrupted.



are transiently interrupted.

abnormal.
Transient service
interruption
Interruptions.

Packet loss

Packet Loss.
Interconnection
fault



The IMA interconnection fault

occurs.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the IDQ1, see Replacing an ATM Board.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1186

System
13 ATM Boards
13.4.13.1 Alarms of N1IDQ1

ALM_E1AIS
ALM_IMA_LIF
ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD
ALM_IMA_LODS
ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSAB
LE
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSAB
LE
ALM_IMA_RFI
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B1_EXC
B1_SD
B2_EXC
B2_SD
B3_EXC
B3_SD
BD_STATUS
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
CC_LOC
CHCS
COMMUN_FAIL
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
J0_MM
LASER_MOD_ER
R
LASER_SHUT
LCD
LFA
LMFA
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI
LP_REI
LP_SLM
LP_TIM
LP_UNEQ
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
MS_AIS
MS_RDI
MS_REI
NO_BD_SOFT
OCD
OUT_PWR_ABN
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOF
R_LOS
R_LOSYNC
R_OOF
SLAVE_WORKIN
G
TEM_HA
TEM_LA
TF
TU_AIS
TU_LOP
UHCS
VC_AIS
VC_RDI
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC4
VCAT_SQM_VC4
VCG_MM
VP_AIS
VP_RDI
VPG_MM
W_R_FAIL
WRG_BD_TYPE
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
SWDL_PKG_NOB
DSOFT
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1187

System
13 ATM Boards

13.4.14.1 Performance Events of N1IDQ1

Figure 1.1 SDH
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
AUPJCNEW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
LPBBE
LPCSES
LPES
LPFEBBE
LPFECSES
LPFEES
LPFESES
LPSES
LPUAS
MSBBE
MSCSES
MSES
MSFEBBE
MSFECSES
MSFEES
MSFESES
MSSES
MSUAS
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
RSBBE
RSCSES
RSES
RSSES
RSUAS
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
Figure 1.2 ATM

ATM_INGCELL
ATM_EGCELL
ATM_CORRECTED_HCS
ERR
ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCS
ERR
ATM_RECV_CELL
ATM_RECV_IDLECELL
ATM_TRAN_CELL

The technical specifications of the IDQ1 include the parameters specified for optical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1188

System
13 ATM Boards

Table 13-28 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the IDQ1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the IDQ1
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Type of fiber
Multimode LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode
LC
Singlemode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1270 to
1380
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 0.5
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-3 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
-10
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
10
8.2
10
10
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30


The mechanical specifications of the IDQ1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1189

System
13 ATM Boards

The maximum power consumption of the IDQ1 at room temperature (25C) is 41 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1190

System
14 RPR Boards
14
RPR Boards
About This Chapter

The RPR boards include FE/GE Ethernet ring processing boards.
14.1 EGR2
technical specifications of the EGR2 (2xGE ring processing board). This topic also describes
how to configure and commission the EGR2.
14.2 EMR0
technical specifications of the EMR0 (12xFE and 1xGE ring processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the EMR0.
14.1 EGR2
technical specifications of the EGR2 (2xGE ring processing board). This topic also describes
how to configure and commission the EGR2.

The EGR2 is available in one functional version, namely, N2.
14.1.2 Application
The EGR2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Figure 14-1 shows the typical networking and application of the RPR board. The RPR board
accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following
data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic control, VLAN
management, and priority configuration. In addition, the RPR board performs
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data.
The RPR board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data
communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1191

System
14 RPR Boards
variable, and the binding granularity is at the VC-3 or VC-4 level.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the RPR board
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

The EGR2 supports the Layer 2 switching, port aggregation, and RPR functions.
Table 14-1 provides the functions and features of the EGR2.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the EGR2
Function and
Feature
EGR2
Basic functions
Transmits/Receives and processes 2xGE services.

Supports the RPR feature.
Functions when
being used with the
interface board
Transmits/Receives 2xGE signals by providing interfaces on the

front panel.
optical interface
The optical interfaces are 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet

optical interfaces.
The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1192

System
Function and
Feature
14 RPR Boards
EGR2
compliance with IEEE 802.3z.
Format of service
frames
The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support
hot swapping.
When the multi-mode optical fiber is

used, the maximum transmission
distance is 550 m.
When the single-mode optical fiber is

used, the maximum transmission
distance is 10 km.
The optical modules that can meet

different requirements for the
transmission distance such as 40 km
and 80 km can also be used.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG

formats.

Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-3, VC3-Xv (X2), VC-4 and VC4-Xv (X8)

granularities.
The EGR2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
NOTE
VC-3 virtual concatenation on the SDH side supports only one or two VC-3s.
In addition, only the first two VC-3 timeslots of the first VC-4 in the first
STM-4 frame of each VCTRUNK can be used.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP-F and LAPS protocols.
EVPL services
Supports EVPL services. The frame format can be Ethernet II,

IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG, or MPLS Martini.
Supports the MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on

PORT or PORT+VLAN.
Supports five types of LSPs, including ingress LSP, egress LSP,

transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP.
Supports a maximum of 512 LSPs.
Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN

encapsulation.

capacity of the MAC address table in the N2 functional version
is 64K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and
queried.
static MAC address table that can contain 4K records. The sum
EVPLAN services
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1193

System
Function and
Feature
14 RPR Boards
EGR2
of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of
addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 4K.
Supports the configuration of the static MAC routes. A

maximum of 4K static MAC routes can be configured.
Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The

maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum
MPLS
Supports MartinioE.
Stack VLAN
Supports the stack VLAN.
VLAN
Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the addition, deletion, and

exchanging of VLAN tags in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Supports the replacement of VLAN tags in Ethernet signal

frames.
Link aggregation
function
Supports the aggregation of the links of two GE ports.
RPR
Supports the RPR feature that complies with IEEE 802.17.
Supports a maximum of 255 nodes on the ring network, and

supports stripping at the destination node and weighted fairness
algorithm.
Supports five priority levels, including A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR,

and C, and supports automatic discovery of topologies, which
can display the network status in real time.
Supports three protection modes, including Steering, Wrapping,

and Wrapping+Steering. Hence, the signal failure time is less
than 50 ms.
Supports the manual configuration of routes for the services on

the RPR ring network.
Supports the self-learning of routes on the ring, that is, supports

the learning of mapping between MAC addresses and node
numbers.
RSTP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply

with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP snooping
Supports the IGMP snooping function.
QoS
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN

ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
LCAS function

LPT function
Supports the P2MP LPT.
Flow control
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1194

System
14 RPR Boards
Function and
Feature
EGR2
function
IEEE 802.3x.
IEEE 1588v2
Not supported.
Echo test frames
Supports the echo function specified in the RPR OAM function,

which is used to test the connectivity of the link.
Port mirroring
Does not support port mirroring.
Loopback function
Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC

layer).
Protection schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network

level:
STP/RSTP
LCAS
LPT
LAG
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Alarms and
performance events

Warm resets
EGR2 boards support warm resets. If a warm reset is performed on

an EGR2 board, traffic on the board is interrupted.
Cold resets
Supported
Weighted fairness
algorithm
Supports the weighted fairness algorithm.
Automatic discovery
of topologies
Supports the automatic discovery of topologies.
Maximum number
of supported nodes
255
Service priority
levels
Supports A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C.

The EGR2 consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, RPR protocol
processing module, mapping module, interface converting module, logic and control module,
clock module, and power module.
Figure 14-2 shows the functional block diagram of the EGR2 by describing how to process
1xGE/FE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1195

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EGR2

Backplane
RPR
MAC
(west)
RPR protocol
processing module
Logic and
control module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
Laser shutdown
LOS
Interface
converting
module
VCP
RPR
MAC
(east)
DENCP
Control
Network signal Switch
processor
fabric
Data
ENCP
GE/FE Ethernet
access
module
Communication
SCC unit
50 MHz
77 MHz
125 MHz Clock module
100 MHz
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
Cross-connect unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power
RPR: resilient package ring


MPLS
L2 MPLS VPN
Ethernet/VLAN
forwarded.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1196

System
14 RPR Boards
WFQ
Four CoSs
1.1.1.1.1339 RPR Protocol Processing Module

The RPR implements the weighted fairness algorithm and statistical multiplexing for the ring
bandwidth. In addition, the RPR provides protection switching schemes. By using the RPR
protocol and RPR weighted fairness algorithm, the RPR protocol processing module controls
the bandwidth of each node accessed by the ring network. In addition, the RPR ring has the
features of spatial reuse and statistical multiplexing. Hence, the bandwidth utilization is
improved.
Topology auto-discovery ensures the plug-and-play feature of the RPR. The protocol for
topology auto-discovery provides correct and reliable ways of discovering topologies of all
nodes and changes occurring on these topologies.
RPR unicast frames are striped at the destination node and thus the bandwidth on the ring is
reused spatially.
The RPR ring supports a maximum of 255 nodes.

In the upstream direction, virtual concatenation services support the LCAS function. The
encapsulation formats are LAPS and GFP-F.
The decapsulated data is finally transmitted to the RPR protocol processing module in
packets.


functions:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1197

System
14 RPR Boards


require.
14.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGR2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 14-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EGR2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1198

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EGR2
EGR2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EGR2
The front panel of the EGR2 has two optical interfaces. Table 14-2 describes the types and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1199

System
14 RPR Boards
usage of the optical interfaces of the EGR2.

Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the EGR2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC (swappable)
OUT2/IN2
LC (swappable)

The EGR2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
14.1.7 Valid Slots

The EGR2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EGR2 cannot work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The EGR2 can be installed in slots 18 and 1116 in the subrack. The relationship between
the slots valid for the EGR2 and the bandwidth is as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the EGR2 can be installed in slots 18
and 1116. When the EGR2 is installed in slots 14, 15, and 16, the bandwidth is 1.25
Gbit/s. When the EGR2 is installed in slots 58 and 1114, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
14.1.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the EGR2 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 14-3 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EGR2 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the EGR2 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN2EGR210
10
SSN2EGR211
11
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
SSN2EGR212
12
1000BASE-VX (40 km)
SSN2EGR213
13
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1200

System
14 RPR Boards


correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1201

System
14 RPR Boards
LAG.
----End

----End

Boards.
----End

The EGR2 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching and
LCAS. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EGR2 by using the U2000:
STP/RSTP
LCAS
LPT
LAG
Test Frame
IGMP Snooping

You can set parameters for the EGR2 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EGR2 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1202

System
14 RPR Boards
Parameter Settings.

Table 14-4 lists the faults that occur on the EGR2 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EGR2 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault

port.


fault occurs.
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EGR2, see Replacing an EOS Board.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1203

System
14 RPR Boards
14.1.13.1 Alarms of N2EGR2

AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC3
B3_SD_VC4
BD_STATUS
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
LAG_FAIL
LCAS_BAND_DECREASE
D
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
NO_BD_SOFT
RPR_DUPLICATE_MAC
RPR_ECHO_DLOC
RPR_ECHO_LOC
RPR_MISCONFIG
RPR_NB_INCONSIS
RPR_PM_INCONSIS
RPR_PS_CHANGE
RPR_STATIONS_EXCEED
RPR_SUM_A0_EXCEED
SLAVE_WORKING
T_LOS
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC4
LASER_MOD_ERR
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
LINK_ERR
LPT_RFI
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE

14.1.14.1 Performance Events of N2EGR2

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1204

System
14 RPR Boards

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors
rprSpanErrorUnavailableSeconds
rprSpanErrorTtlExpFram
es
rprSpanErrorTooLongF
rames
rprSpanErrorTooShortFrames
rprSpanErrorBadHecFra
mes
rprSpanErrorBadFcsFr
ames
rprSpanErrorSelfSrcUcastFrames
rprSpanErrorPmdAbortF
rames
rprSpanErrorBadAddrF
rames
rprSpanErrorBadParityFrames
rprSpanErrorContainedF
rames
rprSpanErrorBadDataF
csFrames
rprSpanErrorBadCtrlFcsFrames
rprSpanErrorScffErrors
rprSpanErrorErroredSe
conds
rprSpanErrorSeverelyErroredSecond
s

Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Multicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Jabbers(packets/s)
Collisions(times/s)
Packets
Received(packets/s)

Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
Packets
Packets
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1205

System
14 RPR Boards
(packets/s)
Unicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte/s)
Figure 1.5 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (receive frame count at Span side)
rprSpanRxUcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassAByt
es(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassBCirFr
ames(frames/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassBCirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassBEirF
rames(frames/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassBEirBy
tes(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassCByte
s(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassAFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassAByt
es(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassBCir
Frames(frames/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassBCirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassBEirF
rames(frames/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassBEir
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassCFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassCByte
s(Byte/s)
Figure 1.6 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (transmit frame count at Span side)
rprSpanTxUcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassAByte
s(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassBCirFr
ames(frames/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassBCirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassBEirF
rames(frames/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassBEirBy
tes(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassCFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassCByte
s(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassAFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassAByte
s(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassBCir
Frames(frames/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassBCirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassBEirF
rames(frames/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassBEir
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassCFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassCByte
s(Byte/s)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1206

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.7 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (count of control layer frames)
rprSpanTxCtrlFrames(frame
s/s)
rprSpanTxOamEchoFrames
(frames/s)
rprSpanTxOamFlushFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanTxOamOrgFrames(f
rames/s)
rprSpanTxTopoAtdFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanTxTopoChkSumFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanTxTopoTpFrames(fr
ames/s)
rprSpanRxCtrlFrames(fram
es/s)
rprSpanRxOamEchoFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanRxOamFlushFrames
(frames/s)
rprSpanRxOamOrgFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanRxTopoAtdFrames(fr
ames/s)
rprSpanRxTopoChkSumFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanRxTopoTpFrames(f
rames/s)
Figure 1.8 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (frames received by Client)

rprClientTxUcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassAByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassBCirF
rames(frames/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassBCir
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassBEir
Frames(frames/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassBEirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassCByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassAByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassBCir
Frames(frames/s)
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassBEir
Frames(frames/s)
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassCByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientTxBcastFrames(fra
mes/s)
Figure 1.9 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (frames transmitted by client)

rprClientRxUcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassABy
tes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassBCirF
rames(frames/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassBCir
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassBEir
Frames(frames/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassBEirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassCByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassABy
tes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassBCir
Frames(frames/s)
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassBEir
Frames(frames/s)
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassCByt
rprClientRxBcastFrames(fr
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1207

System
es(Byte/s)
14 RPR Boards
ames/s)
Figure 1.10 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (count of error frames)

rprSpanErrorTtlExpFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanErrorTooLongFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorTooShortFrame
s(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadHecFrames
(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadFcsFrames
(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorSelfSrcUcastFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorPmdAbortFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadAddrFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadParityFrame
s(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorContainedFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadDataFcsFr
ames(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadCtrlFcsFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorScffErrors(fra
mes/s)
rprSpanErrorErroredSecond
s(seconds/s)
rprSpanErrorSeverelyErrored
Seconds(seconds/s)
rprSpanErrorUnavailableSe
conds(seconds/s)

The technical specifications of the EGR2 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 14-15 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGR2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGR2
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
1000BASEVX (40 km)
1000BASELX (10 km)
1000BASE-SX
(0.5 km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode LC
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-2 to 5
-5 to 0
-9 to -3
-9.5 to -2.5
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1500 to 1580
1275 to 1350
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1208

System
14 RPR Boards
Parameter
Value
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-23
-20
-17
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum -20
dB spectral width
(nm)
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
(dB)
30
30


specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EGR2 board of the N2 version.
the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EGR2.
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 14-16 lists the throughput specifications of the EGR2. Table 14-17 lists the packet loss
ratio in the case of overloading of the EGR2. Table 14-18 lists the latency specifications of the
EGR2. Table 14-19 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EGR2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1209

System
14 RPR Boards
The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EVPL bidirectional
unicast services are configured and eight VC-4s are bound on the GE port.
Table 14-16 lists the throughput specifications of the EGR2. The values are obtained when the
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the EGR2

Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,08,01) to
(01,08,02)
(pks/sec)
(01,08,02) to
(01,08,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
80.77
1201923
1201923
2403846
128
94.87
801282
801282
1602564
256
100.00
452899
452899
905798
512
100.00
234962
234962
469924
1024
100.00
119732
119732
239464
1280
100.00
196154
96154
192308
1518
100.00
81274
81274
162548
Table 14-17 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EGR2. The values are
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1210

System
14 RPR Boards
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.2 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EGR2
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,08,01) to
(01,08,02) (%)
(01,08,02) to
(01,08,01) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
16.719
16.720
16.719
128
100.00
4.315
4.328
4.321
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
Table 14-18 lists the latency specifications of the EGR2. The values are obtained when the
time when the first bit of the transmitted frame reaches the output port of the equipment
and the time when the first bit of the transmitted frame reaches the input port of the
equipment. In store forward mode, the analyzer calculates the difference between the
and the time when the last bit of the transmitted frame reaches the input port of the
equipment. In the table, the CT values are obtained in cut through mode and the S&F
values are obtained in store forward mode.
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1211

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.3 Latency specifications of the EGR2

Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,08,01) to
(01,08,02) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,08,01) to
(01,08,02)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
80.77
117.8
117.8
117.3
117.3
128
94.87
121.2
121.2
120.2
120.2
256
100.00
126.6
126.6
124.6
124.6
512
100.00
137.7
137.7
133.7
133.7
1024
100.00
159.9
159.9
151.8
151.8
1280
100.00
170.2
170.2
160.0
160.0
1518
100.00
182.9
182.9
170.8
170.8
Table 14-19 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EGR2. The values are obtained when
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.4 Back-to-back specifications of the EGR2

Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,08,01) to
(01,08,02) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,08,02) to
(01,08,01)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
298
300
598
128
100.00
650
650
1300
256
100.00
905798
905798
1811596
512
100.00
469924
469924
939848
1024
100.00
239464
239464
478928
1280
100.00
192308
192308
384616
1518
100.00
162548
162548
325096
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1212

System
14 RPR Boards

The mechanical specifications of the EGR2 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.1

The maximum power consumption of the EGR2 at room temperature (25C) is 40 W.
14.2 EMR0
technical specifications of the EMR0 (12xFE and 1xGE ring processing board). This topic
also describes how to configure and commission the EMR0.

The EMR0 is available in one functional version, namely, N2.
14.2.2 Application
The EMR0 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Figure 14-5 shows the typical networking and application of the RPR board. The RPR board
accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following
data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic control, VLAN
management, and priority configuration. In addition, the RPR board performs
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data.
The RPR board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data
communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.
variable, and the binding granularity is at the VC-3 or VC-4 level.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1213

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the RPR board
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

The EMR0 supports the Layer 2 switching, port aggregation, and RPR functions.
Table 14-20 provides the functions and features of the EMR0.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the EMR0
Function and
Feature
EMR0
Basic functions
Transmits/Receives and processes 12xFE services and 1xGE

services.
Supports the RPR feature.
Functions when
being used with the
interface board
optical interface
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports four FE ports and one GE port.
Transmits/Receives 12xFE signals through the electrical

interface when the EMR0 is used with the ETF8.
Transmits/Receives 8xFE signals through the optical interface

when the EMR0 is used with the EFF8.
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMR0 is

used with the ETF8. The maximum transmission distance is 100
m.
Supports 100BASE-FX signals in compliance with IEEE 802.3u

when the EMR0 is used with the EFF8.

Copyright Huawei
1214

System
14 RPR Boards
Function and
Feature
EMR0
Format of service
frames
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG

formats.
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from

Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-3, VC3-Xv (X2), VC-4 and VC4-Xv (X8)

granularities.
The EMR0 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
NOTE
VC-3 virtual concatenation on the SDH side supports only one or two VC3s. In addition, only the first two VC-3 timeslots of the first VC-4 in the first
STM-4 frame of each VCTRUNK can be used.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP-F and LAPS protocols.
EPL services
Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.
EVPL services
Supports EVPL services. The frame format can be Ethernet II,

IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG, or MPLS Martini.
Supports the MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on

PORT or PORT+VLAN.
Supports five types of LSPs, including ingress LSP, egress LSP,

transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP.
Supports a maximum of 512 LSPs.
Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN

encapsulation.

capacity of the MAC address table in the N2 functional version
is 64K. The capacity of the MAC address table in the N1
functional version is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address
can be set and queried.
static MAC address table that can contain 4K records. The sum
of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of
addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 4K.
Supports the configuration of the static MAC routes. A

maximum of 4K static MAC routes can be configured.
Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The

maximum number of VBs supported by the N2EMR0 is 16. The
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE

802.1q virtual bridge.
EVPLAN services
MPLS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Supports MartinioE.
Copyright Huawei
1215

System
14 RPR Boards
Function and
Feature
EMR0
Stack VLAN
Supports the stack VLAN.
VLAN
Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the addition, deletion, and

exchanging of VLAN tags in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Supports the replacement of VLAN tags in Ethernet signal

frames.
Link aggregation
function
Supports the aggregation of the links of a maximum of eight FE

ports.
RPR
Supports the RPR feature that complies with IEEE 802.17.
Supports a maximum of 255 nodes on the ring network, and

supports stripping at the destination node and weighted fairness
algorithm.
Supports five priority levels, including A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR,

and C, and supports automatic discovery of topologies, which
can display the network status in real time.
Supports three protection modes, including Steering, Wrapping,

and Wrapping+Steering. Hence, the signal failure time is less
than 50 ms.
Supports the self-learning of routes on the ring, that is, supports

the learning of mapping between MAC addresses and node
numbers.
The N2EMR0 supports the manual configuration of routes for

the services on the RPR ring network.
RSTP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which

IGMP snooping
Supports the IGMP snooping function.
QoS function
The N2EMR0 supports the flow classification based on PORT,

PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
LCAS function

Flow control
function
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with

IEEE 802.3x.
Echo test frames
Supports the echo function specified in the RPR OAM function,

which is used to test the connectivity of the link.
Loopback function
Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC

layer).
Protection schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network

level:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
STP/RSTP

Copyright Huawei
1216

System
Function and
Feature
14 RPR Boards
EMR0
LCAS
LAG
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Alarms and
performance events

Warm resets
EMR0 boards support warm resets. If a warm reset is performed on

an EMR0 board, traffic on the board is interrupted.
Cold resets
Supported
Weighted fairness
algorithm
Supports the weighted fairness algorithm.
Automatic discovery
of topologies
Supports the automatic discovery of topologies.
Maximum number
of supported nodes
255
Service priority
levels
Supports A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C.

The EMR0 consists of the Ethernet access module, network processor module, RPR protocol
processing module, mapping module, interface converting module, logic and control module,
clock module, and power module.
Figure 14-6 shows the functional block diagram of the EMR0 by describing how to process
1xGE/FE signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1217

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the EMR0

Backplane
RPR
MAC
(west)
RPR protocol
processing module
Logic and
control module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Mapping module
Laser shutdown
LOS
Interface
converting
module
VCP
RPR
MAC
(east)
DENCP
Control
Network signal Switch
processor
fabric
Data
ENCP
GE/FE Ethernet
access
module
Communication
SCC unit
50 MHz
77 MHz
125 MHz Clock module
100 MHz
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
Cross-connect unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power
RPR: resilient package ring


MPLS
L2 MPLS VPN
Ethernet/VLAN
forwarded.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1218

System
14 RPR Boards
WFQ
Four CoSs
1.1.1.1.1361 RPR Protocol Processing Module

The RPR implements the weighted fairness algorithm and statistical multiplexing for the ring
bandwidth. In addition, the RPR provides protection switching schemes. By using the RPR
protocol and RPR weighted fairness algorithm, the RPR protocol processing module controls
the bandwidth of each node accessed by the ring network. In addition, the RPR ring has the
features of spatial reuse and statistical multiplexing. Hence, the bandwidth utilization is
improved.
Topology auto-discovery ensures the plug-and-play feature of the RPR. The protocol for
topology auto-discovery provides correct and reliable ways of discovering topologies of all
nodes and changes occurring on these topologies.
RPR unicast frames are striped at the destination node and thus the bandwidth on the ring is
reused spatially.
The RPR ring supports a maximum of 255 nodes.

In the upstream direction, virtual concatenation services support the LCAS function. The
encapsulation formats are LAPS and GFP-F.
The decapsulated data is finally transmitted to the RPR protocol processing module in
packets.


functions:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1219

System
14 RPR Boards


require.
14.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EMR0 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.

Figure 14-7 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMR0.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1220

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EMR0
EMR0
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK
ACT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
EMR0
The front panel of the EMR0 has five interfaces. Table 14-21 describes the types and usage of
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1221

System
14 RPR Boards
the interfaces of EMR0.

Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the EMR0
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
OUT1/IN1
LC (swappable)
Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX

signals.
FE1
RJ-45

signals.
FE2
RJ-45

signals.
FE3
RJ-45

signals.
FE4
RJ-45

signals.

The EMR0 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
14.2.7 Valid Slots

The EMR0 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EMR0 cannot work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The EMR0 can be used with the ETF8 and EFF8.

The slots valid for the EMR0 are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the EMR0 can be installed in slots 16
and 1316. When the EMR0 is installed in slots 14, 15, and 16, the bandwidth is 1.25
Gbit/s. When the EMR0 is installed in slots 5, 6, 13, and 14, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
Table 14-22 lists the slots valid for the EMR0 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and
EFF8.
Figure 1.2 Slots valid for the EMR0 and the corresponding slots for the ETF8 and EFF8
Slot Valid for the EMR0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 19
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1222

System
14 RPR Boards
Slot Valid for the EMR0
Slot 3
Slot 21
Slot 4
Slot 23
Slot 5
Slot 25
Slot 6
Slot 13
Slot 29
Slot 14
Slot 31
Slot 15
Slot 33
Slot 16
Slot 35
14.2.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the EMR0 indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 14-23 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EMR0 and the type of
optical interface.
Figure 1.3 Relationship between the feature code of the EMR0 and the type of optical interface
Board
Feature Code
SSN2EMR010
10
SSN2EMR011
11
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
SSN2EMR012
12
1000BASE-VX (40 km)
SSN2EMR013
13
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1223

System
14 RPR Boards
correct.
----End


HuaWei SBS


LAG.
----End

----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1224

System
14 RPR Boards

Boards.
----End

The EMR0 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching and
LCAS. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EMR0 by using the U2000:
STP/RSTP
LCAS
LAG
Test Frame
IGMP Snooping

You can set parameters for the EMR0 by using the U2000.
You can set the following main parameters for the EMR0 by using the U2000:
Working mode
LCAS
Mapping protocol
Parameter Settings.

Table 14-24 lists the faults that occur on the EMR0 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1225

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the EMR0 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption





interrupted.

abnormal.
Transient service
interruption
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault

port.


fault occurs.
Interruptions.


Packet Loss.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the EMR0, see Replacing an EOS Board.

14.2.13.1 Alarms of N2EMR0

AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC_VC3
B3_EXC_VC4
B3_SD_VC3
B3_SD_VC4
BD_STATUS
COMMUN_FAIL
ETH_LOS
FCS_ERR
FPGA_ABN
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1226

System
14 RPR Boards
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
LAG_FAIL
LCAS_BAND_DECREASE
D
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT
LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT
LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT
LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI_VC3
LP_REI_VC3
LP_SLM_VC3
LP_TIM_VC3
LP_UNEQ_VC3
LSR_NO_FITED
NO_BD_SOFT
RPR_DUPLICATE_MAC
RPR_ECHO_DLOC
RPR_ECHO_LOC
RPR_MISCONFIG
RPR_NB_INCONSIS
RPR_PM_INCONSIS
RPR_PS_CHANGE
RPR_STATIONS_EXCEED
RPR_SUM_A0_EXCEED
SLAVE_WORKING
SUBCARD_ABN
T_LOS
TU_AIS_VC3
TU_LOP_VC3
VCAT_LOA
VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_LOM_VC4
LASER_MOD_ERR
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
ETH_NO_FLOW
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE

14.2.14.1 Performance Events of N2EMR0

Figure 1.1 SDH
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS

DropEvent
UndersizePkts
OversizePkts
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions
AlignmentErrors
FCSErrors
rprSpanErrorUnavailableSeconds
rprSpanErrorTtlExpFram
es
rprSpanErrorTooLongF
rames
rprSpanErrorTooShortFrames
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1227

System
14 RPR Boards
rprSpanErrorBadHecFra
mes
rprSpanErrorBadFcsFr
ames
rprSpanErrorSelfSrcUcastFrames
rprSpanErrorPmdAbortF
rames
rprSpanErrorBadAddrF
rames
rprSpanErrorBadParityFrames
rprSpanErrorContainedF
rames
rprSpanErrorBadDataF
csFrames
rprSpanErrorBadCtrlFcsFrames
rprSpanErrorScffErrors
rprSpanErrorErroredSe
conds
rprSpanErrorSeverelyErroredSecond
s

Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Multicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Broadcast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Undersize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Oversize Packets
Received(packets/s)
Jabbers(packets/s)
Collisions(times/s)
Packets
Received(packets/s)

Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Packets
Transmitted(256~511
Octets in Length)
(packets/s)
Packets
Packets
Unicast Packets
Received(packets/s)
Unicast Packets
Multicast Packets
Broadcast Packets
Good Octets
Transmitted(Byte/s)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1228

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.5 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (receive frame count at Span side)
rprSpanRxUcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassAByt
es(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassBCirFr
ames(frames/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassBCirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassBEirF
rames(frames/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassBEirBy
tes(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanRxUcastClassCByte
s(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassAFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassAByt
es(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassBCir
Frames(frames/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassBCirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassBEirF
rames(frames/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassBEir
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassCFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanRxMcastClassCByte
s(Byte/s)
Figure 1.6 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (transmit frame count at Span side)
rprSpanTxUcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassAByte
s(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassBCirFr
ames(frames/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassBCirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassBEirF
rames(frames/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassBEirBy
tes(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassCFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanTxUcastClassCByte
s(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassAFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassAByte
s(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassBCir
Frames(frames/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassBCirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassBEirF
rames(frames/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassBEir
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassCFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanTxMcastClassCByte
s(Byte/s)
Figure 1.7 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (count of control layer frames)
rprSpanTxCtrlFrames(frame
s/s)
rprSpanTxOamEchoFrames
(frames/s)
rprSpanTxOamFlushFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanTxOamOrgFrames(f
rames/s)
rprSpanTxTopoAtdFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanTxTopoChkSumFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanTxTopoTpFrames(fr
ames/s)
rprSpanRxCtrlFrames(fram
es/s)
rprSpanRxOamEchoFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanRxOamFlushFrames
(frames/s)
rprSpanRxOamOrgFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanRxTopoAtdFrames(fr
ames/s)
rprSpanRxTopoChkSumFra
rprSpanRxTopoTpFrames(f
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1229

System
mes(frames/s)
14 RPR Boards
rames/s)
Figure 1.8 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (frames received by Client)

rprClientTxUcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassAByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassBCirF
rames(frames/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassBCir
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassBEir
Frames(frames/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassBEirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientTxUcastClassCByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassAByt
es(Byte/s)
Frames(frames/s)
Bytes(Byte/s)
Frames(frames/s)
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientTxMcastClassCByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientTxBcastFrames(fra
mes/s)
Figure 1.9 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (frames transmitted by client)

rprClientRxUcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassABy
tes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassBCirF
rames(frames/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassBCir
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassBEir
Frames(frames/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassBEirB
ytes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientRxUcastClassCByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassAFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassABy
tes(Byte/s)
Frames(frames/s)
Bytes(Byte/s)
Frames(frames/s)
Bytes(Byte/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassCFra
mes(frames/s)
rprClientRxMcastClassCByt
es(Byte/s)
rprClientRxBcastFrames(fr
ames/s)
Figure 1.10 Statistics of RMON VCG performance (count of error frames)

rprSpanErrorTtlExpFrames(
frames/s)
rprSpanErrorTooLongFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorTooShortFrame
s(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadHecFrames
(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadFcsFrames
(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorSelfSrcUcastFra
mes(frames/s)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1230

System
14 RPR Boards
rprSpanErrorPmdAbortFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadAddrFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadParityFrame
s(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorContainedFram
es(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadDataFcsFr
ames(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorBadCtrlFcsFra
mes(frames/s)
rprSpanErrorScffErrors(fra
mes/s)
rprSpanErrorErroredSecond
s(seconds/s)
rprSpanErrorSeverelyErrored
Seconds(seconds/s)
rprSpanErrorUnavailableSe
conds(seconds/s)

The technical specifications of the EMR0 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 14-35 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EMR0.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EMR0
Parameter
Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASE-ZX (80
km)
1000BASE-LX
(10 km)
1000BASE-SX (0.5
km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Multi-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-2 to 5
-9 to -3
-9.5 to -2.5
range (nm)
1500 to 1580
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
-3
(dBm)
-23
-20
-17
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
Minimum side mode

30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1231

System
14 RPR Boards


specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EMR0 board of the N2 version.
the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EMR0.
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Table 14-36 and Table 14-37 list the throughput specifications of the EMR0. Table 14-38 and
Table 14-39 list the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMR0. Table 14-40 and
Table 14-41 list the latency specifications of the EMR0. Table 14-42 and Table 14-43 list the
back-to-back specifications of the EMR0.
The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EVPL bidirectional
unicast services are configured and eight VC-4s are bound on the FE port, or EVPL bidirectional
unicast services are configured and eight VC-4s are bound on the GE port.
Table 14-36 lists the throughput specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the FE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1232

System
14 RPR Boards
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.1 Throughput specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the FE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,06,05) to
(01,06,06)
(pks/sec)
(01,06,06) to
(01,06,05)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
100.00
148810
148810
297620
128
100.00
84459
84459
168918
256
100.00
45290
45290
90580
512
100.00
23496
23496
46992
1024
100.00
11973
11973
23946
1280
100.00
9615
9615
19230
1518
100.00
8127
8127
16254
Table 14-37 lists the throughput specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the
Number of pairs: 1
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.2 Throughput specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the GE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,04,01)
(pks/sec)
(01,04,01) to
(01,01,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
64
72.41
1077586
1077586
2155172
128
94.87
801282
801282
1602564
256
100.00
452899
452899
905798
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1233

System
14 RPR Boards
Frame Size
(Byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,04,01)
(pks/sec)
(01,04,01) to
(01,01,01)
(pks/sec)
Total (pks/sec)
512
100.00
234962
234962
469924
1024
100.00
119732
119732
239464
1280
100.00
96154
96154
192308
1518
100.00
81274
81274
162548
Table 14-38 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s
are bound on the FE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as
follows:
Number of pairs: 1
Step rate: 10.00
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.3 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the
FE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,06,05) to
(01,06,06) (%)
(01,06,06) to
(01,06,05) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
128
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
Table 14-39 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s
are bound on the GE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as
follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1234

System
14 RPR Boards
Number of pairs: 1
Step rate: 10.00
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.4 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the
GE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,04,01) (%)
(01,04,01) to
(01,01,01) (%)
Average (%)
64
100.00
29.833
29.827
29.830
128
100.00
4.306
4.309
4.307
256
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
512
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1024
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1280
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
1518
100.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
Table 14-40 lists the latency specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the FE
Number of pairs: 1
Step rate: 10.00
Mode: bidirectional
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1235

System
14 RPR Boards
Figure 1.5 Latency specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the FE port)
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,06,05) to
(01,06,06) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,06,05) to
(01,06,06)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
100.00
126.1
126.1
121.0
121.0
128
100.00
131.0
131.0
120.8
120.8
256
100.00
149.2
149.2
128.8
128.8
512
100.00
176.9
176.9
136.0
136.0
1024
100.00
237.0
237.0
155.1
155.1
1280
100.00
266.7
266.7
164.3
164.3
1518
100.00
289.3
289.3
167.9
167.9
Table 14-41 lists the latency specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the GE
Number of pairs: 1
Step rate: 10.00
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.6 Latency specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the GE port)
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,04,01) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,01,01) to
(01,04,01)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
64
72.41
130.1
130.1
129.6
129.6
128
94.87
143.1
143.1
142.1
142.1
256
100.00
123.4
123.4
121.4
121.4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1236

System
14 RPR Boards
Frame
Size
(Byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,04,01) (us)CT (us)
Average
(CT) (us)
(01,01,01) to
(01,04,01)
(us)-S&F (us)
Average
(S&F) (us)
512
100.00
130.7
130.7
126.7
126.7
1024
100.00
154.4
154.4
146.3
146.3
1280
100.00
164.6
164.6
154.4
154.4
1518
100.00
174.4
174.4
162.3
162.3
Table 14-42 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the
FE port). The values are obtained when the SmartApplication is set as follows:
Number of pairs: 1
Step rate: 10.00
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.7 Back-to-back specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the FE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,06,05) to
(01,06,06) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,06,06) to
(01,06,05)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
297620
297620
595240
128
100.00
168918
168918
337836
256
100.00
90580
90580
181160
512
100.00
46992
46992
93984
1024
100.00
23946
23946
47892
1280
100.00
19230
19230
38460
1518
100.00
16254
16254
32508
Table 14-43 lists the back-to-back specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1237

System
14 RPR Boards
Number of pairs: 1
Step rate: 10.00
Mode: bidirectional
Figure 1.8 Back-to-back specifications of the EMR0 (eight VC-4s are bound on the GE port)
Frame Size
(Byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
(01,01,01) to
(01,04,01) Burst
Size (Number of
Frames)
(01,04,01) to
(01,01,01)
(Number of
Frames)
Total
(Number of
Frames)
64
100.00
3410
3410
6820
128
100.00
29054
29054
58108
256
100.00
905798
905798
1811596
512
100.00
469924
469924
939848
1024
100.00
239464
239464
478928
1280
100.00
192308
192308
384616
1518
100.00
162548
162548
325096

The mechanical specifications of the EMR0 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.2

The maximum power consumption of the EMR0 at room temperature (25C) is 50 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1238

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
15
SAN/Video Boards
About This Chapter

The SAN boards are multi-service transparent transmission processing boards.
15.1 MST4
technical specifications of the MST4 (4-port multi-service transparent transmission board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the MST4.
15.2 VST4
technical specifications of the VST4 (4-port video-service transparent transmission board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the VST4.
15.1 MST4
technical specifications of the MST4 (4-port multi-service transparent transmission board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the MST4.

The MST4 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
15.1.2 Application
The MST4 is a multi-service transparent transmission board. The MST4 is used in remote
disaster recovery, remote backup and data centralization, and integration of storage resources.
The MST4 is used in the fields of the SAN services and video services. The MST4 can
transmit/receive the FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, and DVB-ASI services, and provides
the FC100 and FC200 services with the distance extension function. Hence, the MST4 is
applicable to the long-distance transmission of the FC services on the SDH network. In
addition, the MST4 meets the transmission requirements of the storage network and extends
the types of services supported by the equipment. Figure 15-1 shows the networking and
application of the SAN services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1239

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the SAN services

NE1
NE2
MST4
MST4
FC Switch
FC Switch

The MST4 supports the access of multiple services, alarms, and other maintenance functions.
Table 15-1 provides the functions and features of the MST4.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the MST4
Function and
Feature
MST4
Basic functions
Provides four independent ports to transmit/receive multiple services.

Supports the transparent transmission of the SAN and Video services.
Connector type
LC
Optical module
type
SFP
Service types
Supports FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, and DVB-ASI services.

Table 15-2 describes types and rates of the services.
Transmits/Receives four-channel FC services (FC100/FICON and

FC200) at the same time, and the total bandwidth is less than 2.5
Gbit/s.
Supports the full-rate transmission of FC services (one-channel

FC200 services or two-channel FC100 services).
Transmits/Receives four-channel ESCON or DVB-ASI services, and

the total bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.
Distance
extension
Maximum
uplink
bandwidth
The first and second ports support the distance extension function on the
SDH side.
FC100 services: 3000 km
FC200 services: 1500 km
2.5 Gbit/s
The backplane provides four 622 Mbit/s buses that are directly
connected to the cross-connect unit.
The MST4 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1240

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Function and
Feature
MST4
Mapping
granularity
Supports the VC-4-Xc (X = 4, 8, or 16) granularity.
ESCON
services
Transmits/Receives four-channel ESCON services, and the total

bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.
DVB-ASI
services
Transmits/Receives four-channel DVB-ASI services, and the total

bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP-T protocol, which complies with ITU-T G.7041.
Maintenance
features
Supports inloops and outloops on ports on the customer side, which can
be used to locate faults quickly.
Supports port-based RMON performance management.
Alarms and
performance
events

Figure 1.2 Service types and service rates supported by the MST4
Service Type
Rate
Remarks
FC100/FICON
1062.5 Mbit/s
SAN service
FC200
2125 Mbit/s
SAN service
ESCON
200 Mbit/s
SAN service
DVB-ASI
270 Mbit/s
Video service

The MST4 consists of the client-side access module, FC protocol processing module,
encapsulation and mapping module, logic and control module, clock module, and power
module.
Figure 15-2 shows the functional block diagram of the MST4 by describing how to process
1xFC100 signals, 1xFC200 signals, 1xFICON signals, 1xDVB-ASI signals, or 1xESCON
signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1241

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the MST4

Backplane
FC100
FC200
FICON
DVB-ASI
ESCON
Clientside
access
module
FC1_
RCV
FC1_
SND
FC2
FC2
FC1_
SND
FC1_
RCV
FC protocol
processing module

100 MHz
125 MHz
135 MHz
212.5 MHz
622 MHz
Clock
module
Encapsulation
Decapsulation
Interface
converting
module
Mapping
Encapsulation and
mapping module
Communication
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
Fuse
Cross-connect unit A/B

SCC unit
Cross-connect unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup power
1.1.1.1.1381 Client-Side Access Module

The client-side access module transmits/receives FC100, FC200, FICON, DVB-ASI, and
ESCON services. The client-side interface unit performs O/E conversion for services and
monitors the optical signals on the client side.
In the upstream direction, the client-side data interface (CDI) receives serial data signals
accessed through the SFP optical module. The serial data signals are then transmitted to the
PCS functional module for physical layer and 8B/10B line performance monitoring.
In the downstream direction, 8B/ 10B conversion is performed for the signals from FC. The
signals are then adapted into client reference clocks by inserting or discarding idle packets.
After being converted from parallel signals into serial signals, the signals are transmitted
through the CDI interface to the optical module on the client side.
1.1.1.1.1382 FC Protocol Processing Module

The FC protocol processing unit mainly extends the distance of FC service transmission. This
module supports the maximum transmission distance of 3000 km for 2xFC100 services or the
maximum transmission distance of 1500 km for 1xFC200 services.
The FC protocol processing unit performs FC1 layer and FC2 layer functions. The FC1 layer
functions include the following:
8B/10B conversion
Synchronous processing
Extraction of primitive signal and primitive sequence
The FC2 layer functions include the following:
Check and counting of all special frames
Modification of values of certain special frames (FLOG1, PLOG1, and ELP)
CRC check
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1242

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
1.1.1.1.1383 Encapsulation and Mapping Module

The encapsulation and mapping module mainly performs the following functions:
Encapsulates and maps data.
Decapsulates and demaps data.
According to the direction of the signal flow, the functional modules inside the chip can be
classified into modules in the ingress direction and modules in the egress direction. In the
ingress direction, signals from the client side to the line side are processed. In the egress
direction, signals from the line side to the client side are processed.
Ingress direction
Through GFP encapsulation, 64B/65B conversion is performed for data bytes after decoding.
The data bytes are then mapped in compliance with the GFP protocol.
Egress direction
SDH data frames are received from the line-side interface module. After overheads are
processed, GFP data frames are extracted from SDH concatenated channels and are then
transmitted to the decapsulation module for decapsulation.

HDLC controller. This module is connected to external circuits through buses. The logic and
control module manages and configures other modules of the board. This module contains
basic logic units and performs the following functions:

This module provides required reference clocks for boards. The clock frequency can be 100
MHz or 125 MHz.

require.
15.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the MST4 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1243

System
15 SAN/Video Boards

Figure 15-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MST4.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the MST4
MST4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
MST4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1244

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
The front panel of the MST4 has four pair of optical interfaces. Table 15-3 describes the types
and usage of the optical interfaces of the MST4.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the MST4
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1IN4
LC
Receives multi-service optical signals.
OUT1OUT4
LC
Transmits multi-service optical signals.

The MST4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
15.1.7 Valid Slots

The MST4 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the MST4 cannot work
normally.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The MST4 can be installed in slots 18 and 1116 in the subrack.
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the MST4 can be installed in slots 18
and 1116. When the MST4 is installed in slots 14, 15, and 16, the bandwidth is 1.25
Gbit/s. When the MST4 is installed in slots 58 and 1114, the bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
15.1.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the MST4 indicates the type of supported services, type of optical
interface, and transmission distance.
Table 15-4 provides the relationship between the feature code of the MST4, the type of
supported services, type of optical interface, and transmission distance.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the MST4, the type of supported services,
type of optical interface, and transmission distance
Board
Feature
Code
Type of Supported Services

(Type of Optical Interface)
Transmission
Distance
SSN1MST410
10
2xFC (SM)
2 km
SSN1MST411
11
2xFC (SM)
15 km
SSN1MST412
12
2xFC (MM)
0.5 km
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1245

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Board
Feature
Code
Type of Supported Services

(Type of Optical Interface)
Transmission
Distance
SSN1MST413
13
4xESCON/DVB-ASI (SM)
15 km
SSN1MST414
14
4xESCON/DVB-ASI (MM)
2 km
SSN1MST415
15
1xFC2 (MM)
ESCON/DVB-ASI (MM)
SSN1MST416
16
1xFC2 (MM)
ESCON/DVB-ASI (SM)
SSN1MST417
SSN1MST418
17
18
1xFC (SM)
2 km
2xESCON/DVB-ASI (SM)
1xFC (SM)
2 km
2xESCON/DVB-ASI (MM)


correct.
----End

Step 6 Required: Configure services. For details, see Configuring the SAN Service.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1246

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
----End

Step 1 Required: Test the SAN service channel. For details, see 27.8 Testing the SAN Service
Channel.
----End

Boards.
Step 7 Required: Query the alarms of the board. Modify the connections or configurations of the
board according to the alarms until the alarms are cleared. For the method for querying the
alarms of a board, see Viewing the Current Alarms.
----End

You can set parameters for the MST4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the MST4 by using the U2000:
J1 byte
C2 byte

Table 15-5 lists the faults that occur on the MST4 frequently and the troubleshooting methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the MST4 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption



Transient service
interruption
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Interruptions.

1247

System
Fault Symptom
15 SAN/Video Boards
Common Fault Cause
abnormal.
Packet loss
Interconnection
fault

occurs on a single service port.


Packet Loss.

replace the board.
For information on how to replace the MST4, see Replacing an SAN/Video Board.

15.1.12.1 Alarms of N1MST4

AU_AIS
AU_CMM
AU_LOP
B3_EXC
B3_SD
BD_STATUS
BDID_ERROR
COMMUN_FAIL
HARD_BAD
HP_RDI
HP_REI
HP_SLM
HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ
IN_PWR_ABN
LASER_MOD_ERR
LOOP_ALM
LSR_COOL_ALM
LSR_NO_FITED
LSR_WILL_DIE
NO_BD_SOFT
NO_LSR_PARA_FILE
PLL_FAIL
POWER_ABNORMAL
R_LOC
R_LOS
TEM_LA
T_LOSEX
TEM_HA
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
TF
TR_LOC
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCH_ERR
SPARE_PATH_ALM
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
WRG_BD_TYPE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1248

System
15 SAN/Video Boards

15.1.13.1 Performance Events of N1MST4

Figure 1.1 SDH
AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
HPBBE
HPCSES
HPES
HPFEBBE
HPFECSES
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPSES
HPUAS
OSPICCVCUR
OSPICCVMAX
OSPICCVMIN
OSPITMPCUR
OSPITMPMAX
OSPITMPMIN
RPLCUR
RPLMAX
RPLMIN
TLBCUR
TLBMAX
TLBMIN
TPLCUR
TPLMAX
TPLMIN
Figure 1.2 FC
WSys_los_cnt
Client_Invld_Words
Client_Crc_Err
LinkRst_Cnt
Client_RxFrmCnt_C1
Client_RxFrmCnt_C2
Client_RxFrmCnt_C3
Client_RxFrmCnt_C4
Client_RxFrmCnt_Cf
Client_RxFrmCnt_Sum
Client_TxFrmCnt_C1
Client_TxFrmCnt_C2
Client_TxFrmCnt_C3
Client_TxFrmCnt_C4
Client_TxFrmCnt_Cf
Client_TxFrmCnt_Sum
Client_RxByteCnt_sum
Client_TxByteCnt_sum
Client_unsupos_cnt

The specifications of the MST4 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces, laser
safety class, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

The optical interfaces of the MST4 can use several types of optical modules. Table 15-8 lists
the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MST4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1249

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MST4
Parameter
Value
Service type
ESCON/DVB-ASI
Service rate
Optical interface type
ESCON: 200
Mbit/s
FC200/FC100/FICON
FC200: 2125 Mbit/s
FC100/FICON: 1062.5 Mbit/s
DVB-ASI: 270
Mbit/s
X3.296/(DVB-ASI)
EN50083-9
200-M5-SN-I
200-SM-LC-I
Fiber type
Singlemode LC
Multimode LC
Single-mode LC
range (nm)
1310
850
1310
(km)
15
0.5
15
Maximum launched
optical power (dBm)
-8
-14
-2.5
-3
Minimum launched
optical power (dBm)
-15
-19
-9.5
-10
-5
(dBm)
-31
-30
-17
-21
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8
-14
-3
Multimode LC


The mechanical specifications of the MST4 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.9

The maximum power consumption of the MST4 at room temperature (25C) is 26 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1250

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
15.2 VST4
technical specifications of the VST4 (4-port video-service transparent transmission board).
This topic also describes how to configure and commission the VST4.

The VST4 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
15.2.2 Application
The VST4 is a transparent transmission board used for receiving/transmitting various types of
video services.
The VST4 can transmit/receive DVB-ASI, SD-SDI, and HD-SDI services. Figure 15-4 shows
the networking and application of the VST4.
Figure 1.1 Networking and application of the VST4
NE1
NE2
VST4
VST4
SDI/DVB-ASI
Switch
SDI/DVB-ASI
Switch

The VST4 receives/transmits video services, alarms, and other maintenance functions.
Table 15-9 provides the functions and features of the VST4.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the VST4
Function and
Feature
VST4
Basic functions
Provides four independent ports to transmit/receive services; supports

the transparent transmission of four-channel video services.
Interface type
SMB (SMB interfaces can be converted into BNC interfaces by means

of transit cables.)
Service types
Supports DVB-ASI, SD-SDI, and HD-SDI services. Table 15-10

describes types and rates of the services.
Maximum
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
When a VST4 board is installed in any slot of slots 1-4 and 15-16,

Copyright Huawei
1251

System
Function and
Feature
15 SAN/Video Boards
VST4
upstream
bandwidth
the maximum upstream bandwidth is 5 Gbit/s. A VST4 board can

adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
When a VST4 board is installed in any slot of slots 5-8 and 11-14,
the maximum upstream bandwidth is 10 Gbit/s. A VST4 board can
Concatenation
granularity
VC-4-Xc (X=4 or 16)
DVB-ASI
Transmits/Receives four-channel DVB-ASI services.
SD-SDI
Transmits/Receives four-channel SD-SDI services.
HD-SDI
When a VST4 is installed in any slot of slots 1-4 and 15-16, it

transmits/receives two-channel HD-SDI services. The VST4 can
When a VST4 is installed in any slot of slots 5-8 and 11-14, it

transmits/receives four-channel HD-SDI services. The VST4 can
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP protocol, which complies with ITU-T G.7041.
Maintenance
features
Supports inloops and outloops on electrical ports for locating faults

quickly.
Supports port-based RMON performance management.
Alarms and
performance
events

Figure 1.2 Service types and service rates supported by the VST4
Service Type
Rate
Remarks
DVB-ASI
270 Mbit/s
Video service
SD-SDI
270 Mbit/s
Video service
HD-SDI
1.485 Gbit/s
Video service

The VST4 consists of the client-side access module, encapsulation and mapping module,
logic and control module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 15-5 shows the functional block diagram of the VST4 with the processing of 1xSDSDI signal, 1xHD-SDI signal, or 1xDVB-ASI signal.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1252

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the VST4

Backplane
Encaps
ulation
SD- SDI
HD- SDI
DVB- ASI
Clientside
access
module
Bus
converting
module
Mapping
Decaps
ulation

Encapsulation and
mapping module
Communication
66 MHz
100 MHz
155 MHz
SCC unit
Clock
module
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Fuse
- 48 V/- 60 V
- 48V/- 60V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup power
1.1.1.1.1400 Client-Side Access Module

The client-side access module transmits/receives SD-SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI services.
The client-side interface unit processes input/output electrical signals.
In the upstream direction, the client-side access module receives serial data signals received
through the SMB interface. The serial data signals are then transmitted to the encapsulation
and mapping module and finally to the backplane through the bus conversion module.
In the downstream direction, bus conversion is performed for the signals from the backplane.
The signals are then transmitted to the encapsulation and mapping module. After being
decapsulated and demapped, the signals are transmitted to the client-side access module.
1.1.1.1.1401 Encapsulation and Mapping Module

The encapsulation and mapping module mainly performs the following functions:
encapsulating/mapping data, decapsulating/demapping data, processing LCAS and
SDH/SONET overheads, converging services, and encapsulating services.

HDLC controller. This module is connected to external circuits through buses. The logic and
control module manages and configures other modules of the board. This module contains
basic logic units and performs the following functions:
Writes into and reads from the register.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1253

System
15 SAN/Video Boards

This module provides required reference clocks for the board.

This module converts the -48 V/-60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of
the board require.
15.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the VST4 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Figure 15-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the VST4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1254

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the VST4
VST4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
VST4
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) - one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) - two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - three colors (red, green, and yellow)
For the meanings of indicator states, see 23 Indicators.
The front panel of the VST4 has four electrical interfaces. Table 15-11 describes the types and
usage of the electrical interfaces of the VST4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1255

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Figure 1.1 Electrical interfaces of the VST4

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1-IN4
SMB (BNC
interfaces can also
be provided after
conversion cables
are connected to
the SMB
interfaces.)
75-ohm interfaces that are used to receive

electrical signals.
OUT1-OUT4
SMB (BNC
interfaces can also
be provided after
conversion cables
are connected to
the SMB
interfaces.)
75-ohm interfaces that are used to transmits

electrical signals.

The VST4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
15.2.7 Valid Slots

The VST4 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the VST4 cannot work
properly.
The VST4 can be installed in slots 1-8 and 11-16. When the VST4 is installed in slots 1-4, 15,
and 16, the bandwidth is 5 Gbit/s. When the VST4 is installed in slots 5-8 and 11-14, the
bandwidth is 10 Gbit/s.
15.2.8 Feature Code

VST4 boards do not have feature codes.
15.2.9 Configuring and Commissioning a Board

following tasks need to be performed: checking the board hardware, configuring the board,
commissioning the board, and checking the operation of the board.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1256

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
correct.
----End

Step 1 Required: Add a logical board. For details, see Adding Boards.
Step 6 Required: Configure services. For details, see Configuring Video Services.
----End

Step 1 Required: Test SDI service channels. For details, see 27.9 Testing the SDI Service Channel.
----End

Step 1 Required: Check the status of the indicators on the front panel of the board to check whether
the board starts working properly. If all the indicators are on and green, the board operates
properly. For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see 23.2 Alarm Indicators on the
Boards.
Step 7 Required: Query the board alarms. Modify the connections or configurations of the board
according to the alarms until the alarms are cleared. For the method of querying the alarms of
a board, see Viewing the Current Alarms.
----End

You can set parameters for the VST4 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the VST4 by using the U2000:
J1 byte
C2 byte

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1257

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Table 15-12 lists the faults that occur on the VST4 frequently and the troubleshooting
methods.
Figure 1.1 Methods used to troubleshoot the faults that occur on the VST4 frequently
Fault Symptom
Common Fault Cause
Service
interruption
The services on a VCTRUNK port

are interrupted.

Interruptions.
Transient service
interruption


abnormal.

Packet loss

Packet Loss.
Interconnection
fault
The interconnection fault occurs

on a single service port.


replace the board.
For information on how to replace the VST4, see Replacing an SAN/Video Board.

15.2.12.1 Alarms of N1VST4

BD_STATUS
COMMUN_FAIL
R_LOS
R_LOC
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
HP_TIM
HP_SLM
HP_UNEQ
HP_RDI
HP_REI
B3_EXC
B3_SD
AU_CMM
LOOP_ALM
NO_BD_SOFT
TR_LOC
T_LOSEX
SPARE_PATH_ALM
BDID_ERROR
PLL_FAIL
HARD_BAD
PATCH_ERR
PATCH_NOT_CONFIRM
PATCHFILE_NOTEXIST
WRG_BD_TYPE
POWER_ABNORMAL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1258

System
TEMP_OVER
15 SAN/Video Boards
TEST_STATUS

15.2.13.1 Performance Events of N1VST4

AUPJCHIGH
AUPJCLOW
HPBBE
HPES
HPSES
HPUAS
HPCSES
HPFEBBE
HPFEES
HPFESES
HPFECSES
XCSTMPMAX
XCSTMPMIN
XCSTMPCUR

The technical specifications of the VST4 include the parameters specified for electrical

Table 15-13 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the VST4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the VST4
Parameter
Value
Rate
270 Mbit/s
1.485 Gbit/s
270 Mbit/s
Code type
NRZI
NRZI
MPEG-2
Interface type
SD-SDI
HD-SDI
DVB-ASI
Connector
SMB (A BNC connector is available by connecting a

conversion cable to the SMB connector.)
Transmission distance (m)
100
100
100
Interface standard
compliance
SMPTE
259M
SMPTE 292M
EN 50083-9

The mechanical specifications of the VST4 are:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Dimensions (H x W x D): 254.1 mm x 25.4 mm x 220 mm

Copyright Huawei
1259

System
15 SAN/Video Boards
Weight: 0.8 kg

The maximum power consumption of the VST4 at room temperature (25C) is 37 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1260

System
16 WDM Boards
16
WDM Boards
About This Chapter

The WDM boards include the CMR2, CMR4, MR2, MR2A, MR2C, MR4, LWX, and FIB.
16.1 CMR2
technical specifications of the TN11CMR2 (2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).
16.2 CMR4
16.3 CMD2
technical specifications of the CMD2 (2-channel bidirectional CWDM optical add/drop
multiplexing board).
16.4 MR2
technical specifications of the TN11MR2 (2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).
16.5 MR2A
technical specifications of the MR2A (2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).
16.6 MR2C
technical specifications of the MR2C (2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).
16.7 MR4
16.8 LWX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1261

System
16 WDM Boards
technical specifications of the LWX (arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board).
16.9 FIB
technical specifications of the FIB (filter isolating board).
16.1 CMR2

The CMR2 is available in one functional version, namely, TN11.
16.1.2 Application
The CMR2 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of wavelength signals
to/from the multiplexed signals.
Figure 16-1 shows the application of the CMR2 in the CWDM system.
Figure 1.1 Application of the CMR2 in the CWDM system
Optical transmission
network
CMR2
CMR2
Line
board
Line
board
Line
board
Remarks: The line board in this figure supports CWDM wavelength signals.

The CMR2 is applied to the coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) system. The
channel spacing is 20 nm. The CMR2 supports the add/drop multiplexing function and
channel expansion function.
Table 16-1 provides the functions and features of the CMR2.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the CMR2
Function and
Feature
CMR2
Basic functions
Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1262

System
Function and
Feature
16 WDM Boards
CMR2
signals.
Channel expansion
Provides the interface to cascade another optical add/drop

multiplexing board to realize the expansion of the add/drop channel.

The CMR2 consists of the OADM module, communication and control module, and power
module.
Figure 16-2 shows the functional block diagram of the CMR2.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the CMR2
D1
IN
D2
MO
MI
Drop optical
module
A1
A2
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Control and communication module

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
The CMR2 contains the OADM module that adds, drops, and multiplexes two channels of
signals. In addition, the CMR2 provides the interface to cascade another optical add/drop
multiplexing board to increase the add/drop capability. The CMR2 is a passive board and does
not have an interface with the backplane.
1.1.1.1.1417 OADM Module

The board receives one multiplexed optical signal that is sent by the upstream station on the
IN interface. Then, the drop optical module drops two wavelengths from the signal through
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1263

System
16 WDM Boards
optical interfaces D01 and D02. The two dropped wavelengths are transmitted through the
MO optical interface.
The board receives one multiplexed signal that travels over the main optical path on the MI
optical interface. Then, the add optical module adds two wavelengths through optical
interfaces A01 and A02 and multiplexes them with the signal on the main optical path into
one signal. This multiplexed signal is transmitted through the OUT interface.
Controls the operations of the entire board.
Collects the following information of each functional module of the board: alarms,
performance events, working status, and voltage detection.
Communicates data with the SCC.

It converts 48 V DC or 60 V DC into a voltage required by each module of the board.
16.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the CMR2 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 16-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CMR2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1264

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the CMR2

CMR2
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT V IEW DIRE CT LY
WITH OPT ICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
CMR2
1.1.1.1.1421 Indicator
The front panel of the CMR2 has one indicator as follows: board hardware status indicator
(STAT) two colors (red and green)
For the meanings of the status of the indicator, see 23 Indicators.
The front panel of the CMR2 has eight optical interfaces. Table 16-2 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the CMR2.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the CMR2
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
A1A2
LC
Receives the signals sent from the optical wavelength

converting board or centralized client-side equipment.
D1D2
LC
Transmits signals to the optical wavelength converting

board or centralized client-side equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1265

System
16 WDM Boards
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals.
OUT
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals.
MO
LC
Works as a cascading output optical interface and is

connected to the input optical interface of an OADM board.
MI
LC
Works as a cascading input optical interface and is

connected to the output optical interface of an OADM
board.
16.1.6 Valid Slots

The CMR2 can be installed in slots 18 and 1117 in the main subrack.
16.1.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the CMR2 contains eight characters, which indicate the wavelengths of
the two channels of optical signals processed by the CMR2.
Table 16-3 describes the feature code of the CMR2.
Figure 1.2 Feature code of the CMR2
Feature Code
Indication
Description
First four characters
Wavelength of optical
signals
Indicates the wavelength of

the first channel of optical
signals processed by the
CMR2.
Last four characters
signals
Indicates the wavelength of

the second channel of
optical signals processed by
the CMR2.
Consider the TN11CMR2 whose feature code is "14711571" as an example. The meaning of
the feature code of the TN11CMR2 is as follows:
"1471" indicates that the wavelength of the first channel of optical signals is 1471 nm.
"1571" indicates that the wavelength of the second channel of optical signals is 1571 nm.

The technical specifications of the CMR2 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 16-4 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CMR2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1266

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CMR2
Optical Interface
Parameter
Value

(nm)
1271 to 1611
Channel spacing (nm)
20
IN-D1
0.5 dB passband bandwidth

(nm)
6.5
Insertion loss (dB) on the

drop channel
1.5
Adjacent channel isolation

(dB)
> 25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 35

(nm)
6.5

add channel
1.5
IN-MO
Insertion loss (dB)
1.0
MI-OUT
Isolation (dB)
> 13
Return loss (dB)
> 40
IN-D2
A1-OUT
A2-OUT

The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1M. The maximum launched optical power
of the optical interfaces is within the range from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).

The mechanical specifications of the CMR2 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.8

The power consumption of the CMR2 at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
16.2 CMR4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1267

System
16 WDM Boards

The CMR4 is available in one functional version, namely, TN11.
16.2.2 Application
The CMR4 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex four channels of wavelength signals
Figure 16-4 shows the application of the CMR4 in the CWDM system.
Figure 1.1 Application of the CMR4 in the CWDM system
network
CMR4
Line
board
Line
board
CMR4
Line
board
Line
board

The CMR4 is applied to the CWDM system. The channel spacing is 20 nm. The CMR4
supports the add/drop multiplexing function and channel expansion function.
Table 16-5 provides the functions and features of the CMR4.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the CMR4
Function and
Feature
CMR4
Basic functions
Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed

signals.
Channel expansion


The CMR4 consists of the OADM module, communication and control module, and power
module.
Figure 16-5 shows the functional block diagram of the CMR4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1268

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the CMR4

D01 D02 D03 D04
MO
MI
A01 A02 A03 A04
Drop
IN
Add
OUT
OADM module
Communication and control module
Pow er module
DC/DC
converter
Delayed
startup
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
SCC

IN interface. Then, the drop optical module drops four wavelengths from the signal through
optical interfaces D01D04. The four dropped wavelengths are transmitted through the MO
optical interface.
optical interface. Then, the add optical module adds four wavelengths through optical
interfaces A01A04 and multiplexes them with the signal on the main optical path into one
signal. This multiplexed signal is transmitted through the OUT interface.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1269

System
16 WDM Boards
16.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the CMR4 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 16-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CMR4.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the CMR4
CMR4
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT V IEW DIRE CT LY
WIT H OP TICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
CMR4
The front panel of the CMR4 has one indicator as follows: board hardware status indicator
The front panel of the CMR4 has 12 optical interfaces. Table 16-6 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the CMR4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1270

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the CMR4

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
A1A4
LC

D1D4
LC
Transmits signals to the optical wavelength

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MO
LC

connected to the input optical interface of an OADM
board.
MI
LC

board.
16.2.6 Valid Slots

The CMR4 can be installed in slots 18 and 1117 in the main subrack.
16.2.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the CMR4 contains eight characters, which indicate the wavelengths of
the four channels of optical signals processed by the CMR4.
Table 16-7 describes the feature code of the CMR4.
Figure 1.2 Feature code of the CMR4
Feature Code
Indication
Description
1st and 2nd characters
signals
The two characters are the

two middle characters of the
figure that indicates the
wavelength of the first
channel of optical signals
processed by the CMR4.
3rd and 4th characters
signals

wavelength of the second
5th and 6th characters
signals

wavelength of the third
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1271

System
Feature Code
16 WDM Boards
Indication
Description
7th and 8th characters
signals

wavelength of the fourth
Consider the TN11CMR4 whose feature code is "47495961" as an example. The meaning of
the feature code of the TN11CMR4 is as follows:
"47" indicates that the wavelength of the first channel of optical signals is 1471 nm.
"49" indicates that the wavelength of the second channel of optical signals is 1491 nm.
"59" indicates that the wavelength of the third channel of optical signals is 1591 nm.
"61" indicates that the wavelength of the fourth channel of optical signals is 1611 nm.

The technical specifications of the CMR4 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 16-8 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CMR4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CMR4
Optical Interface
Parameter
Value

(nm)
1291 to 1611 (1371 nm excluded)
20
IN-D1

(nm)
6.5

drop channel

(dB)
> 25
isolation (dB)
> 35

(nm)
6.5

add channel
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1272

System
Optical Interface
16 WDM Boards
Parameter
Value
IN-MO
Insertion loss (dB)
1.5
MI-OUT
Isolation (dB)
> 13
Return loss (dB)
> 40
A4-OUT


The mechanical specifications of the CMR4 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.9

The power consumption of the CMR4 at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
16.3 CMD2
technical specifications of the CMD2 (2-channel bidirectional CWDM optical add/drop
multiplexing board).

The CMD2 is available in one functional version, namely, SSN1.
16.3.2 Application
The CMD2 adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed channel in two
directions. The CMD2 complies with CWDM technical specifications.
The CMD2 supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. Figure 16-7 shows the application
of the CMD2 in a CWDM system.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1273

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Application of the CMD2 in a CWDM system
network
CMD2
Line board
Line board
CMD2
Line board
Line board

The CMD2 is used to add/drop two channels of signals in a CWDM system.
Table 16-9 provides the functions and features of the CMD2.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the CMD2
Function and
Feature
CMD2
Basic functions
Adds/Drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed

channel in two directions.
CWDM
specifications
Complies with CWDM technical specifications.

The CMD2 consists of an OADM module and a communication module.
Figure 16-8 shows the functional block diagram of the CMD2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1274

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the CMD2

D11 D12
A11
Drop
IN1
A12
Add
A21 A22
D21 D22
Add
OADM
module
Drop
IN2
OADM
module
OUT1
OUT2
1.1.1.1.1437 Signal Flow

Optical port IN1 receives a multiplexed channel of signals from an upstream station and sends
the signals to the OADM module. The OADM module then demultiplexes two channels of
signals from the multiplexed channel, and sends one channel of signals to optical port D11
and the other channel of signals to optical port D12.
Optical ports A11 and A12 each receive one channel of signals from the local station and send
the received signals to the OADM module. The OADM module then multiplexes the two
channels of signals and sends the multiplexed channel of signals to optical port OUT1.
Optical ports IN2 and OUT2 process signals in the same way as optical ports IN1 and OUT1
do, but in different directions.
1.1.1.1.1438 Functions of the Board Modules
OADM module
Adds/Drops two CWDM channels of signals to/from the multiplexed channel.
16.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the CMD2 has optical interfaces.

Figure 16-9 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CMD2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1275

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the CMD2
CMD2
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
IN1 OUT1 A11 D11 A12 D12 IN2 OUT2 A21 D21 A22 D22
CMD2
The number in the silkscreen under an optical interface on the front panel indicates one of the
wavelengths that are supported by the optical interface.
The front panel of the CMD2 does not have any indicators.
The front panel of the CMD2 has 12 optical interfaces. Table 16-10 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the CMD2.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the CMD2
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1
LC
Receives the first multiplexed channel of signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1276

System
16 WDM Boards
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
OUT1
LC
Transmits the first multiplexed channel of signals.
A11/A12
LC
Receives the first channel of signals transmitted from an

optical transponder board or the integrated client equipment.
D11/D12
LC
Transmits the first channel of signals to an optical

transponder board or the integrated client equipment.
IN2
LC
Receives the second multiplexed channel of signals.
OUT2
LC
Transmits the second multiplexed channel of signals.
A21/A22
LC
Receives the second channel of signals transmitted from an

optical transponder board or the integrated client equipment.
D21/D22
LC
Transmits the second channel of signals to an optical

transponder board or the integrated client equipment.
16.3.6 Valid Slots

The CMD2 occupies one slot.
The CMD2 can be installed in slots 19-26 and 29-36 in a main subrack. If an extended
subrack is connected to the main subrack, the CMD2 can also be installed in slots 69-76 and
79-86 in the extended subrack.
16.3.7 Feature Code

No feature code is defined for the CMD2.


Step 3 Required: Check whether the wavelength specified on the label, attached to the front panel of
the board, is the same as the actually used wavelength.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1277

System
16 WDM Boards
----End

Step 1 Required: The CMD2 is a passive board, and therefore a logical board needs to be added for
it on the NMS. For information on how to add a logical board for the CMD2 on the NMS, see
Adding Boards.
----End

Step 1 Required: Test the insertion loss of the board. For details, see 16.3.10 Maintaining the Board.
----End

Step 1 Required: Verify that the input/output directions of fibers connected to the board are correct.
Step 5 Required: Verify that the optical wavelength used by each optical port on the board is the
same as the information specified on the label.
----End

The CMD2 does not have any parameters to be set.

1.1.1.1.1446 Testing Insertion Loss

Insertion loss is a key specification of an optical add/drop multiplexing board. If the insertion
loss of a board is normal, the board is not faulty; otherwise, the board is faulty or optical ports
on the board need to be cleaned. The methods of testing the insertion loss of an optical
multiplexer and demultiplexer board are as follows.
Figure 16-10 shows the diagram for testing the insertion loss of the CMD2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1278

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Diagram for testing the insertion loss of the CMD2
D11 D12
D21 D22
IN1
IN2
CMD2
OUT1
OUT2
A11 A12
A21 A22
Step 1 Required: Measure the input optical power Pi at the A11 port and the output optical power Po
at the OUT1 port on the CMD2. The optical power is expressed in dBm.
The value obtained by subtracting Po from Pi represents the insertion loss from the A11 port
to the OUT1 port.
In the case of the CMD2, use the preceding method to measure the insertion loss of IN1-D11,
A11-OUT1, IN1-D12, A12-OUT1, IN2-D21, A21-OUT2, IN2-D22, and A22-OUT2.
For the normal insertion loss value of the board, see 16.3.13 Technical Specifications.
----End
When all services on an NE are interrupted or a service on a WDM-side channel of the CMD2
is interrupted, the CMD2 may be faulty.
Step 1 Required: Check whether the insertion loss of the CMD2 is normal. For details, see the
insertion loss specification of the CMD2. If the insertion loss is excessively high, go to the
next step.
Step 2 Required: Use a fiber cleaning tool to clean the internal and external fibers and optical ports
on the CMD2. Then, test the insertion loss again. If the insertion loss returns to normal, the
fault is rectified; if the insertion loss is still excessively high, go to the next step.
Step 3 Optional: The CMD2 is faulty. In this case, replace the CMD2.
----End

No alarm is defined for the CMD2.

No performance event is defined for the CMD2.

The technical specifications of the CMD2 include the parameters specified for optical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1279

System
16 WDM Boards

Table 16-11 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CMD2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CMD2
Optical Interface
Parameter
Value

(nm)
1471 to 1611
20
IN1-D11

(nm)
13.0

drop channel
< 1.5

(dB)
> 30
isolation (dB)
> 40

(nm)
13.0
< 1.5
A22-OUT2

add channel
Reflectance (dB)
< -40
IN1-D12
IN2-D21
IN2-D22
A11-OUT1
A12-OUT1
A21-OUT2


The mechanical specifications of the CMD2 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.6

The power consumption of the CMD2 at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
16.4 MR2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1280

System
16 WDM Boards

The MR2 is available in one functional version, namely, TN11.
16.4.2 Application
The MR2 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of wavelength signals
Figure 16-11 shows the application of the MR2 in the DWDM system.
Figure 1.1 Application of the MR2 in the DWDM system
network
MR2
Line
board
Line
board
MR2
Line
board
Line
board
Remarks: The line board in this figure supports DWDM wavelength signals.

The MR2 is applied to the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) system. The
channel spacing is 0.8 nm. The MR2 supports the add/drop multiplexing function and channel
expansion function.
Table 16-12 provides the functions and features of the MR2.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the MR2
Function and
Feature
MR2
Basic functions
Adds/Drops and multiplexes any two signals to/from the

multiplexed signals.
Channel expansion


The MR2 consists of the OADM module, communication and control module, and power
module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1281

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 16-12 shows the functional block diagram of the MR2.

Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the MR2
D1
IN
D2
MO
MI
Drop optical
module
A1
A2
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Control and communication module

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC


Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1282

System
16 WDM Boards
16.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the MR2 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 16-13 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MR2.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the MR2
MR2
STAT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTL Y
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
MR2
The front panel of the MR2 has one indicator as follows: board hardware status indicator
The front panel of the MR2 has eight optical interfaces. Table 16-13 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the MR2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1283

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the MR2

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
A1A2
LC

D1D2
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MO
LC

board.
MI
LC

board.
16.4.6 Valid Slots

The MR2 can be installed in slots 18 and 1117 in the main subrack.
16.4.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the MR2 contains eight characters, which indicate the frequencies of the
two channels of optical signals processed by the MR2.
Table 16-14 describes the feature code of the MR2.
Figure 1.2 Feature code of the MR2
Feature Code
Indication
Description
First four (14) characters
Frequency of optical signals
The four characters are the

last four characters of the
frequency of the first
processed by the MR2.
Last four (58) characters

frequency of the second
Consider the TN11MR2 whose feature code is "93609370" as an example. The meaning of
the feature code of the TN11MR2 is as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1284

System
16 WDM Boards
"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first channel of optical signals is 193.60 THz.
"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 193.70
THz.

The technical specifications of the MR2 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 16-15 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MR2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MR2
Optical Interface
Parameter
Value

(nm)
1529 to 1561
Channel spacing (GHz)
100
IN-D1

(nm)
0.11

drop channel
1.5

(dB)
> 25
isolation (dB)
> 35

(nm)
0.11

add channel
1.5
IN-MO
Insertion loss (dB)
1.0
MI-OUT
Isolation (dB)
> 13
Return loss (dB)
> 40
IN-D2
A1-OUT
A2-OUT


The mechanical specifications of the MR2 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1285

System
16 WDM Boards
Weight (kg): 0.9

The power consumption of the MR2 at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
16.5 MR2A
technical specifications of the MR2A (2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).

The MR2A is available in one functional version, namely, N1. The N1MR2A is discontinued.
16.5.2 Application
The MR2A is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of wavelength signals
Figure 16-14 shows the application of the MR2A in the DWDM system.
Figure 1.1 Application of the MR2A in the DWDM system
network
MR2A
Line
board
MR2A
Line
board
Line
board
Line
board

The MR2A is applied to the DWDM system. The channel spacing is 0.8 nm. The MR2A
supports the add/drop multiplexing function between any two adjacent wavelengths.
Table 16-16 provides the functions and features of the MR2A.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the MR2A
Function and
Feature
MR2A
Basic functions
Adds/Drops any two adjacent standard wavelengths defined in ITU-
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1286

System
Function and
Feature
16 WDM Boards
MR2A
T G.692 (DWDM). The signals are transparently transmitted and the
operating wavelength ranges from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.
OTM function
One MR2A board can work as a two-channel add/drop OTM station,

as shown in Figure 16-15. Two MR2A boards can be cascaded to
work as a four-channel add/drop OTM station, as shown in Figure
16-16.
OADM function
Works as a two-channel add/drop OADM station when working with

the LWX. For details, see Figure 16-17.
Central wavelength
Supports the standard wavelengths defined in ITU-T

Recommendations. The channel spacing is 100 GHz.
Figure 1.1 One MR2A board working as a two-channel add/drop OTM station
D1
IN
D2
MO
Drop
OUT
MI
Add
MR2A
A1
A2
Figure 1.2 Two MR2A boards being cascaded to work as a four-channel add/drop OTM station
D1
IN
D2
MO IN
Drop
OUT
MR2A
D2
Drop
MI OUT
Add
MO
MI
Add
MR2A
A1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
D1
A2
A1
A2

Copyright Huawei
1287

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.3 MR2A and LWX working as a two-channel add/drop OADM station
LWX
A2
D2
MO
Out
MR2A
In
D1
MI
A1
LWX

The MR2A consists of the OADM module.
Figure 16-18 shows the functional block diagram of the MR2A.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the MR2A
D01
IN
D02
MO
MI
A01
Drop
A02
Add
OUT
OADM
module
The MR2A contains the OADM module that adds, drops, and multiplexes two channels of
signals. In addition, the MR2A provides the interface to cascade another optical add/drop
multiplexing board to increase the add/drop capability. The MR2A is a passive board and does

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1288

System
16 WDM Boards
16.5.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the MR2A has interfaces and a laser safety class label.

Figure 16-19 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MR2A.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the MR2A
MR2A
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2 A2
MR2A
The front panel of the MR2A has four LC optical interfaces. Table 16-17 describes the types
and usage of the optical interfaces of the MR2A.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1289

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the MR2A

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
A01A02
LC
Adds two wavelengths of signals from the local

equipment.
D01D02
LC
Drops two wavelengths of signals to the local equipment.
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals of two wavelengths.
OUT
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals of two wavelengths.
MO/MI
LC
Works as a cascading interface and cascades several

MR2A boards.
16.5.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the MR2A vary with the cross-connect capacity and subrack of the
equipment.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the MR2A are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the MR2A can be installed in slots 18

The technical specifications of the MR2A include the parameters specified for optical

Table 16-18 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MR2A.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MR2A
Parameter
Value
range (nm)
The operating wavelength range is from 1535.82 nm to

1560.61 nm. The working wavelengths can be any two
adjacent standard wavelengths defined in ITU-T G.692
(DWDM).
Line code pattern
NRZ
100
Insertion loss on the add
<2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1290

System
Parameter
16 WDM Boards
Value
channel or drop channel

(dB)
(dB)
> 25
isolation (dB)
> 35
-0.5 dB channel bandwidth

(nm)
< 0.11


The mechanical specifications of the MR2A are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the MR2A at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
16.6 MR2C
technical specifications of the MR2C (2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).

The MR2C is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
16.6.2 Application
The MR2C is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of wavelength signals
Figure 16-20 shows the application of the MR2C in the DWDM system.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1291

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Application of the MR2C in the DWDM system
network
MR2C
Line
board
Line
board
MR2C
Line
board
Line
board

The MR2C is applied to the DWDM system. The channel spacing is 0.8 nm. The MR2C
supports the add/drop multiplexing function between any two adjacent wavelengths.
Table 16-19 provides the functions and features of the MR2C.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the MR2C
Function and
Feature
MR2C
Basic functions
Adds/Drops any two adjacent standard wavelengths defined in ITUT G.692 (DWDM). The signals are transparently transmitted and
the operating wavelength ranges from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.
OTM function
One MR2C board can work as a two-channel add/drop OTM

station, as shown in Figure 16-21. Two MR2C boards can be
cascaded to work as a four-channel add/drop OTM station, as
shown in Figure 16-22.
OADM function
Works as a two-channel add/drop OADM station when working

with the LWX. For details, see Figure 16-23.
Central wavelength
Supports the standard wavelengths defined in ITU-T

Recommendations. The channel spacing is 100 GHz.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1292

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 One MR2C board working as a two-channel add/drop OTM station
D1
IN
D2
MO
Drop
OUT
MI
Add
MR2C
A1
A2
Figure 1.2 Two MR2C boards being cascaded to work as a four-channel add/drop OTM station
D1
IN
D2
D1
MO IN
Drop
OUT
Drop
MI OUT
Add
MR2C
D2
MO
MI
Add
MR2C
A1
A2
A1
A2
Figure 1.3 MR2C and LWX working as a two-channel add/drop OADM station
LWX
A2
D2
MO
Out
MR2C
In
D1
MI
A1
LWX

The MR2C consists of the OADM module.
Figure 16-24 shows the functional block diagram of the MR2C.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1293

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the MR2C

D01
IN
D02
MO
MI
A01
Drop
A02
Add
OUT
OADM
module
The MR2C contains the OADM module that adds, drops, and multiplexes two channels of
signals. In addition, the MR2C provides the interface to cascade another optical add/drop
multiplexing board to increase the add/drop capability. The MR2C is a passive board and does

16.6.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the MR2C has interfaces and a laser safety class label.

Figure 16-25 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MR2C.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1294

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the MR2C
MR2C
OUT AO1
AO2
MI
MO
DO2
DO1
IN
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
MR2C
The front panel of the MR2C has four pairs of LC optical interfaces. Table 16-20 describes
the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the MR2C.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the MR2C
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
A01A02
LC
Adds two wavelengths of signals from the local

equipment.
D01D02
LC
Drops two wavelengths of signals to the local equipment.
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals of two wavelengths.
OUT
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals of two wavelengths.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1295

System
16 WDM Boards
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
MO/MI
LC
Works as a cascading interface and cascades several

MR2C boards.
16.6.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the MR2C vary with the cross-connect capacity and subrack of the
equipment.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the MR2C are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the MR2C can be installed in slots 1926

The technical specifications of the MR2C include the parameters specified for optical

Table 16-21 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MR2C.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MR2C
Parameter
Value
range (nm)
The operating wavelength range is from 1535.82 nm to

1560.61 nm. The working wavelengths can be any two
adjacent standard wavelengths defined in ITU-T G.692
(DWDM).
Line code pattern
NRZ
100
Insertion loss on the add

channel or drop channel
(dB)
<2

(dB)
> 25
isolation (dB)
> 35
-0.5 dB channel bandwidth
< 0.11
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1296

System
Parameter
16 WDM Boards
Value
(nm)


The mechanical specifications of the MR2C are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the MR2C at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
16.7 MR4

The MR4 is available in one functional version, namely, TN11.
16.7.2 Application
The MR4 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex four channels of wavelength signals
Figure 16-26 shows the application of the MR4 in the DWDM system.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1297

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Application of the MR4 in the DWDM system
network
MR4
Line
board
Line
board
MR4
Line
board
Line
board

The MR4 is applied to the DWDM system. The channel spacing is 0.8 nm. The MR4 supports
the add/drop multiplexing function and channel expansion function.
Table 16-22 provides the functions and features of the MR4.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the MR4
Function and
Feature
MR4
Basic functions
Adds/Drops and multiplexes four continuous signals to/from the

multiplexed signals.
Channel expansion


The MR4 consists of the OADM module, communication and control module, and power
module.
Figure 16-27 shows the functional block diagram of the MR4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1298

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the MR4

D01 D02 D03 D04
MO
MI
A01 A02 A03 A04
Drop
IN
Add
OUT
OADM module
Pow er module
DC/DC
converter
Delayed
startup
Fuse
SCC
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
SCC

IN interface. Then, the drop optical module drops four wavelengths from the signal through
optical interfaces D01D04. The four dropped wavelengths are transmitted through the MO
optical interface.
optical interface. Then, the add optical module adds four wavelengths through optical
interfaces A01A04 and multiplexes them with the signal on the main optical path into one
signal. This multiplexed signal is transmitted through the OUT interface.

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1299

System
16 WDM Boards
16.7.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the MR4 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 16-28 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MR4.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the MR4
MR4
STAT
OUT
IN
MO
IN
D1
A1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT V IEW DIRECTL Y
WITH OP TICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
MR4
The front panel of the MR4 has one indicator as follows: board hardware status indicator
The front panel of the MR4 has 12 optical interfaces. Table 16-23 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the MR4.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1300

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the MR4

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
A1A4
LC

D1D4
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MO
LC

board.
MI
LC

board.
16.7.6 Valid Slots

The MR4 can be installed in slots 18 and 1117 in the subrack.
16.7.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the MR4 contains eight characters, which indicate the frequencies of the
first channel and fourth channel of optical signals processed by the MR4.
Table 16-24 describes the feature code of the MR4.
Figure 1.2 Feature code of the MR4
Feature Code
Indication
Description
First four (14) characters

frequency of the first
Last four (58) characters

frequency of the fourth
Consider the TN11MR4 whose feature code is "92109240" as an example. The meaning of
the feature code of the TN11MR4 is as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1301

System
16 WDM Boards
"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first channel of optical signals is 192.10 THz.
"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth channel of optical signals is 192.40
THz.
The four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 are successive. Hence, we can
infer the following:
The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.
The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.

The technical specifications of the MR4 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 16-25 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MR4.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the MR4
Optical Interface
Parameter
Value
1529 to 1561
100
IN-D1
0.5 dB passband bandwidth (nm)
0.11
IN-D2
Insertion loss on the drop channel (dB)
2.2
Adjacent channel isolation (dB)
> 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB)
> 35
A1-OUT
0.5 dB passband bandwidth (nm)
0.11
A2-OUT
Insertion loss on the add channel (dB)
2.2
IN-MO
Insertion loss (dB)
1.5
MI-OUT
Isolation (dB)
> 13
Return loss (dB)
> 40
IN-D3
IN-D4
A3-OUT
A4-OUT


The mechanical specifications of the MR4 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1302

System
16 WDM Boards
Weight (kg): 0.9

The power consumption of the MR4 at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
16.8 LWX
technical specifications of the LWX (arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board).

The LWX is available in one functional version, namely, N1. The N1LWX is discontinued.
16.8.2 Application
The LWX is a wavelength conversion board. The LWX converts a wavelength at an arbitrary
rate (10 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s) into a standard wavelength defined in ITU-T G.692, and
performs the reverse process.
Figure 16-29 shows the application of the LWX in the DWDM system.
Figure 1.1 Application of the LWX in the DWDM system
Multiplexing
LWX
10 Mbit/s-2.7 Gbit/s
Client side
Demultiplexing
G.692
WDM side
G.692
LWX
WDM side
Client s ide

The LWX converts a wavelength at an arbitrary rate (10 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s, NRZ code) on
the client side into a standard wavelength defined in ITU-T G.692, and performs the reverse
process.
The LWX supports the optical wavelength conversion, 3R function, protection, and loopback
function.
Table 16-26 provides the functions and features of the LWX.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1303

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the LWX

Function
and Feature
LWX
Basic
functions
Converts a wavelength on the client side into a standard wavelength

defined in ITU-T G.692 (DWDM), and performs the reverse process.
Transparently transmits signals.
3R function
Provides the 3R function for the signals at a rate ranging from 10 Mbit/s to
2.7 Gbit/s on the client side, restores the clock, and monitors the rate.
Protection
schemes
Single fed and single

receiving
Supports the inter-board protection and 1+1 interboard hot standby protection. The protection
switching time is less than 50 ms.
Dual fed and

selective receiving
Supports the intra-board protection. One board can

realize the optical channel protection. The
protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
ALS function
Supports the ALS function. When the LWX does not receive light, the
LWX automatically turns off the corresponding optical transmit module.
Loopback
function
Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces so that faults can be

located quickly.
Performance
and alarm
monitoring

maintenance of the equipment.
Central
wavelength
Supports the standard wavelengths defined in ITU-T Recommendations.

The channel spacing is 100 GHz.

The LWX consists of the O/E converting module, cross-connect module, CDR module, logic
and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
Figure 16-30 shows the functional block diagram of the LWX.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1304

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the LWX

Loopback control
Reference clock
10 Mbit/s to 2.7
Gbit/s
Optical module on
the client side
10 Mbit/s to 2.7
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
2x2 crossconnection
WDM side
loopback
Data
LOS
Laser
Communication
shutdown
and control
module
LOS
10 Mbit/s to 2.7
Gbit/s
Optical module 2
on the WDM side
Multi-rate
CDR
Client side
loopback
O/E
2x2 crossconnection
Multi-rate
CDR
Loopback control
10 Mbit/s to 2.7
Gbit/s
Optical module 1
on the WDM side
O/E
Clock
10 Mbit/s to 2.7
Gbit/s
Optical
splitter
Reference
clock
E/O
Data
LOS
Communication
and control
module
Communication
Laser shutdown
+3.3
V
DC/DC
converter
DC/DC
converter
Fuse
SCC unit
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V backup
power
The optical module on the client side applies SFP encapsulation and can be configured as
different types of optical modules. This module can transmit/receive the optical signals at
a rate ranging from 10 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s.
The optical module on the WDM side can be configured as an optical transceiver
module, or both an optical transceiver module and an optical receiver module. When two
modules are configured on the WDM side, an optical splitter is used to perform dual
feeding.
In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1305

System
16 WDM Boards
signals.
In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical
signals and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission.
Detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
1.1.1.1.1487 Cross-Connect Module
Supports the data selection from the client side to the WDM side and the data selection
from the WDM side to the client side.
Supports the selection of WDM-side optical modules.
Supports the loopback of client-side signals.
Supports the loopback of WDM-side signals.
1.1.1.1.1488 CDR Module
Restores the data and clock signals from the signals that are at a rate ranging from 10
Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s.
Reads the rates of the accessed services.
Supports Ethernet communication.
Supports the reference clock of the CDR module.
Selects and configures the services of the other modules.
Controls the laser.
Selects the clock signal from the active and standby cross-connect boards.

require.
16.8.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the LWX has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 16-31 shows the appearance of the front panel of the LWX.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1306

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the LWX
LWX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX
RX
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
LWX
The front panel of the LWX has six optical interfaces. Table 16-27 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the LWX.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1307

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the LWX

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1IN2
LC
Receives the signals sent from the MR2A.
OUT1OUT2
LC
Transmits signals to the MR2A.
TX
LC
Transmits signals to the client-side equipment.
RX
LC
Receives the signals sent from the client-side

equipment.
16.8.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the LWX vary with the cross-connect capacity and subrack of the
equipment.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the LWX are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the LWX can be installed in slots 18 and
1117 in the subrack.
16.8.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the LWX indicates the scheme that the optical interfaces use to receive
and transmit signals.
Table 16-28 provides the relationship between the feature code of the LWX and the signal
receive/transmit scheme.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the LWX and the signal receive/transmit
scheme
Board
Feature Code
Signal Receive/Transmit Scheme
SSN1LWX01
01
Single fed and single receiving
SSN1LWX02
02
Dual fed and selective receiving

You can set the parameters for the LWX by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the LWX by using the U2000:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1308

System
16 WDM Boards
Path use status
Optical interface loopback
Service type
Client service bearer rate (M)
Laser status
Automatic laser shutdown
Current bearer rate (M)
Actual wavelength No./wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz)
Actual band type
Configure wavelength No./wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz)
Configure band type
SD trigger condition

The technical specifications of the LWX include the parameters specified for optical
interfaces, the safety class of the laser, mechanical specifications and power consumption.

Table 16-29 and Table 16-30 list the parameters specified for the client-side and WDM-side
optical interfaces of the LWX.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the client-side optical interfaces of the LWX
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
10 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
15
40
80
Characteristics of the transmitter at point S

Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1500 to 1580
Maximum mean
launched power
(dBm)
+3
+3
Minimum mean
launched power
(dBm)
-5
-2
-2
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
+8.2
+8.2
+8.2
Minimum side mode
30
30
30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1309

System
Parameter
16 WDM Boards
Value
suppression ratio
(dB)
Eye pattern mask
Complies with the

mask defined in
ITU-T G.957.
Complies with the

mask defined in
ITU-T G.957.
Complies with the

mask defined in
ITU-T G.957.
Characteristics of the receiver at point S

Receiver type
PIN
APD
APD
Receiver wavelength
range (nm)
1200 to 1600
1200 to 1600
1200 to 1600
(dBm)
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance (dB)
-27
-27
-27
Figure 1.2 Parameters specified for the WDM-side optical interfaces of the LWX
Parameter
Value
Channel
spacing (GHz)
100
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Characteristics of the transmitter at point Sn

Transmission
distance (km)
640
170 (2 mW)
170 (10 mW)
360
Maximum
mean launched
power (dBm)
+3
+3
+7
+3
Minimum mean
launched power
(dBm)
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
+10
+10
+10
+10
Nominal central
frequency
(THz)
192.10 to
196.00
192.10 to
196.00
192.10 to
196.00
192.10 to
196.00
Central
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1310

System
Parameter
16 WDM Boards
Value
frequency
deviation (GHz)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width (nm)
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.4
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio (dB)
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
compensation
(ps/nm)
12800
3400
3400
7200
Eye pattern
mask
Complies with
the mask
defined in ITUT G.957.
Complies with
the mask
Complies with
the mask
Complies with
the mask
Characteristics of the receiver at point Rn

Receiver type
APD
PIN
Receiver
wavelength
range (nm)
1200 to 1600
1200 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-28
-18
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-9
Maximum
reflectance (dB)
-27
-27


The mechanical specifications of the LWX are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1311

System
16 WDM Boards

The maximum power consumption of the LWX at room temperature (25C) is 30 W.
16.9 FIB
technical specifications of the FIB (filter isolating board).

The FIB is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
16.9.2 Application
The FIB is used in the remote optical pumping amplifier system. The FIB can realize longdistance optical regeneration transmission when it works with the single-wavelength longdistance board ROP.
Figure 16-32 shows the position of the FIB in an optical transmission system.
Figure 1.1 Position of the FIB in an optical transmission system
C (single span)
Optical
transmitter
BA17
G.652 fiber
FIB
b (18 dB)
a (54 dB)
Erbium
ROP
doped fiber G.652 fiber
->
ISO
Filter
1550.12
Optical
receiver

The FIB filters and isolates one optical signals.
Table 16-31 provides the functions and features of the FIB.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the FIB
Function and
Feature
FIB
Optical isolator
The isolator allows optical signals to pass in a single direction. The

operating wavelength ranges from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
Optical filter
The filter filters out the wavelengths other than the 1550.12 nm
wavelength.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1312

System
16 WDM Boards

The FIB consists of an isolator and a filter.
Figure 16-33 shows the functional block diagram of the FIB.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the FIB
Isolator
Filter
Optical signals are heavily attenuated and degraded after they travel for a long distance in
fibers. The degraded signals cannot be normally received by an optical receiver. Hence, an
ROP needs to be used to amplify the gain of the optical signals. To prevent other factors from
affecting the ROP because the ROP has high optical power, the FIB needs to be used to filter
wavelengths.
The isolator of the FIB allows the optical signals to pass in a single direction. The filter of the
FIB filters out the wavelengths other than the 1550.12 nm wavelength. As a result, the optical
receiver receives the optical signals normally.
16.9.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the FIB has one channel of optical interface.

Figure 16-34 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FIB.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1313

System
16 WDM Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the FIB
FIB
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
FIB
The front panel of the FIB has one optical interface. The optical interface is used to receive
and transmit one channel of optical signals. Table 16-32 describes the types and usage of the
optical interfaces of the FIB.
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the FIB
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN
LSH
Receives one channel of optical signals.
OUT
LC
Transmits one channel of optical signals.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1314

System
16 WDM Boards
16.9.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the FIB vary with the cross-connect capacity and subrack of the equipment.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the FIB are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the FIB can be installed in slots 18 and
1117 in the main subrack.

The technical specifications of the FIB include the parameters specified for optical interfaces,

Table 16-33 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the FIB.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the FIB
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Central wavelength
(nm)
1550.120.05
-0.5 dB bandwidth
(nm)
> 0.4


The mechanical specifications of the FIB are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the FIB at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1315

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
17
Auxiliary Boards
About This Chapter

This topic describes the auxiliary boards including the AUX and FAN.
17.1 AUX
technical specifications of the AUX (system auxiliary interface board).
17.2 FAN
technical specifications of the FAN (fan board).
17.1 AUX
technical specifications of the AUX (system auxiliary interface board).

The AUX is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
17.1.2 Application
The AUX is a system auxiliary interface board. The AUX can be used on the OptiX OSN
equipment series to provide various management interfaces and auxiliary interfaces.

The AUX provides various management and auxiliary interfaces for the system, and provides
the centralized backup for the +3.3 V power supply of the boards in the subrack.
Table 17-1 provides the functions and features of the AUX.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1316

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the AUX

Item
AUX
Management
interface
Provides the OAM interface, which supports the X.25 protocol.
Provides the management serial interface F&f.
Provides the 10M/100M NM interface.
Provides the serial interfaces Serial 1Serial 4, which can

function as four broadcast data interfaces or two pairs of time
interfaces. The two functions of the interfaces are mutually
exclusive.
The two pairs of time interfaces work in full-duplex mode and

support synchronous time input and output of two channels.
Both the time interface and the broadcast data interface support
the RS-422 level and RS-232 level.
Provides one F1 interface for the 64 kbit/s codirectional data

channel.
Supports the input and output of two channels of time signals,

with the external time transmitted in 1pps+TOD mode.
For details about the external time input and output interfaces,
see Table 17-2 and Table 17-3.
Provides two BITS clock input interfaces and two BITS clock
output interfaces (impedance: 120 ohms).
Provides two BITS clock input interfaces and two BITS clock
output interfaces (impedance: 75 ohms).
Provides 16-input and 4-output alarm interfaces.
Provides 4-output alarm cascading interfaces.
Cabinet alarm
indicator
Provides four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces.
Provides four cabinet alarm indicator input cascading

interfaces.
Orderwire interface
Provides two NNI connection signaling interfaces.
Provides one orderwire phone interface.
Provides two NNI voice interfaces.
Auxiliary interface
External time
interface
Clock interface
Alarm interface
Commissioning
interface
Provides one commissioning interface COM.
Internal
communication
Realizes communication between boards in the subrack.
Power supply backup

and checking
Monitors the two independent 48 V power supplies, detects

the overvoltage (72 V) and undervoltage (38.4 V) conditions,
and reports alarms to the SCC unit in the case of overvoltage or
undervoltage occurs.
Provides the centralized backup for the +3.3 V power supply of

the boards in the subrack, which realizes the 1:N protection for
the secondary power supply of each board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1317

System
Item
17 Auxiliary Boards
AUX
Detects the overvoltage (+3.8 V) and undervoltage (+3.1 V)

conditions for the +3.3 V backup power supply.
Audible alarm
Supports the audible alarm and the clearing of the audible alarm.
Ethernet port
connection status
checking
Supports the checking of the Ethernet port connection status.
Note: The COM interface is used for internal commissioning only. That is, the COM
interface cannot be used for equipment monitoring. Otherwise, the Ethernet communication
between boards may become abnormal.
Figure 1.2 External time input interfaces

External Time Input
TOD-Related Interfacea
1pps-Related Interface
Channel 1
S1
S3 (using the RS422 level)
S1
ALMI4 (using the TTL

level)
S2
S2
ALMI4 (using the TTL

level)
Channel 2
a: The TOD-related interfaces can use the RS232 level or RS422 level as required.
Figure 1.3 External time input interfaces

External Time Output
TOD-Related Interfacea
1pps-Related Interface
Channel 1
S1
Channel 2
S2
a: The TOD-related interfaces can use the RS232 level or RS422 level as required.

The AUX consists of the communication module, interface module, and power module.
Figure 17-1 shows the functional block diagram of the AUX.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1318

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the AUX

Backplane
F&f
OAM
One orderwire phone
interface
Two NNI voice interfaces
S1~S4
F1
16-input and 4-output alarm
interfaces
2-input and 2-output clock
interfaces
SCC A
SCC B
Interface
module
Cross-connect
unit
Four channels of subrack

indicator interface
Alarm cascading interface
ETH interface
(VLAN A)
COM interface
(VLAN B)
100/10 Mbit/s
EXT interface
(VLAN B)
100/10 Mbit/s
100/10 Mbit/s
19x100/10 Mbit/s
Ethernet bus
Communication
module
100/10 Mbit/s
100/10 Mbit/s
Power supply
module
Other units (VLAN B)

SCC A (VLAN A)
SCC B (VLAN A)
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V backup
power supply
1.1.1.1.1504 Communication Module

This module provides the network management interface for the active and standby GSCC
boards, OAM interface for remote maintenance, and interface for communication between
boards.

This module provides various auxiliary interfaces, including the F&f interface, OAM
interface, F1 interface, and clock input\output interface.

This module provides the working power supply for the board and centralized +3.3 V backup
power supply for the other boards.
17.1.5 Jumpers
The jumper J9 is available in the lower right corner of the side panel of the AUX. The jumper
J9 is used to specify the subrack that works as the main subrack or extended subrack.
Figure 17-2 and Figure 17-3 show the position of the jumper J9 on the AUX.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1319

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Figure 1.1 Position of the jumper J9 on the AUX(version B)
Power
Module
J9
Figure 1.2 Position of the jumper J9 on the AUX(version C)
The AUX is available in two versions: version B and version C. For the AUX of version C, jumper J9 is
under the daughter board. You can find it only after the daughter board is removed.
Set the jumper J9 as follows:
To enable the subrack to work as the main subrack, cap the jumper J9.
To enable the subrack to work as the extended subrack, do not cap the jumper J9.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1320

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
17.1.6 Front Panel

The front panel of the AUX has indicators and interfaces of various types.

Figure 17-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the AUX
AUX
STAT
CLKI2
CLKO2
CLKI1
CLKO1
CLK2
CLK1
ETH
REV
COM
F&f
EXT
F1
LAMP1
PHONE
LAMP2 ALMO1 ALMO2
V1
V2
OAM
ALMI1
S1
ALMI2
S2
ALMI3
S3
ALMI4
S4
AUX
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1321

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
The front panel of the AUX has 28 interfaces. Table 17-4 describes the types and usage of the
interfaces of the AUX.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the AUX
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
CLKO1
SMB
75-ohm clock output interface 1
CLKO2
SMB
75-ohm clock output interface 2
CLK1
RJ-45
120-ohm clock input/output interface 1
REV
RJ-45
Reserved
F&f
RJ-45
F&f interface
F1
RJ-45
F1 interface
PHONE
RJ-45
Orderwire phone interface
V1
RJ-45
NNI voice interface 1
V2
RJ-45
NNI voice interface 2
OAM
RJ-45
OAM interface
S1
RJ-45
Serial 1
S2
RJ-45
Serial 2
S3
RJ-45
Serial 3
S4
RJ-45
Serial 4
CLKI1
SMB
75-ohm clock input interface 1
CLKI2
SMB
75-ohm clock input interface 2
CLK2
RJ-45
120-ohm clock input/output interface 2
ETH
RJ-45
NM interface
COM
RJ-45
Commissioning interface
EXT
RJ-45
Interface for connection to the extended subrack
LAMP1
RJ-45
Cabinet alarm indicator output interface
LAMP2
RJ-45
Cabinet alarm indicator cascading input interface
ALMO1
RJ-45
Interface for the 1st to the 4th channels of alarm

outputs
ALMO2
RJ-45
Alarm signal cascading interface
ALMI1
RJ-45
Interface for the 1st to the 4th channels of alarm
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1322

System
Interface
17 Auxiliary Boards
Type of
Interface
Usage
inputs
ALMI2
RJ-45
Interface for the 5th to the 8th channels of alarm

inputs
ALMI3
RJ-45
Interface for the 9th to the 12th channels of alarm

inputs
ALMI4
RJ-45
Interface for the 13th to the 16th channels of

alarm inputs
Note: S1/S3 and S2/S4 form a pair of time input and output interfaces.
Table 17-5 describes the pins of the CLK1 and CLK2 interfaces.
Figure 1.2 Pins of the CLK1 and CLK2 interfaces
Front View
Pin
Usage
Receiving ()
Receiving (+)
Grounding
Transmitting ()
Transmitting (+)
Grounding
7, 8
Unspecified
Table 17-6 describes the pins of the ETH, COM, EXT, and F1 interfaces.
Figure 1.3 Pins of the ETH, COM, EXT, and F1 interfaces
Front View
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Pin
Usage
Transmitting (+)
Transmitting ()
Receiving (+)
Unspecified
Unspecified
Receiving ()
7, 8
Unspecified

Copyright Huawei
1323

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Table 17-7 describes the pins of the F&f interface.

Figure 1.4 Pins of the F&f interface
Front View
Pin
Usage
Receive end for RS-232 data
Grounding
Transmit end for RS-232 data
1, 2, 3, 6, 7
Unspecified
Table 17-8 describes the pins of the PHONE, V1, and V2 interfaces.
Figure 1.5 Pins of the PHONE, V1, and V2 interfaces
Front View
Pin
Usage
Signal 1
Signal 2
1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8
Unspecified
Table 17-9 describes the pins of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces.
Figure 1.6 Pins of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces
Front View
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Pin
Usage
Critical alarm signal (+)
Critical alarm signal ()
Major alarm signal (+)
Power indicator driving signal

(+)
Power indicator driving signal

()
Major alarm signal ()
Minor alarm signal (+)
Minor alarm signal ()

Copyright Huawei
1324

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Table 17-10 describes the pins of the ALM01 and ALM02 interfaces.
Figure 1.7 Pins of the ALM01 and ALM02 interfaces
Front View
Pin
Usage
Critical and major alarm signal output

(+)
Critical and major alarm signal output

()
Minor and warning alarm signal

output (+)
Alarm signal output 1 (+)
Alarm signal output 1 ()
Minor and warning alarm signal

output ()
Alarm signal output 1 ()
Table 17-11 describes the pins of the OAM interface.

Figure 1.8 Pins of the OAM interface
Front View
Pin
Usage
Requests for transmission.
Transmits the DTE ready signal.
Transmits data.
Grounding
Grounding
Receives data.
Transmits the DCE ready signal.
Ready for receiving signals.
Table 17-12 describes the pins of the S1, S2, S3, and S4 interfaces.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1325

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Figure 1.9 Pins of the S1, S2, S3, and S4 interfaces of the AUX
Front View
Pin
Usage
RS-422 data transmitting (+)
RS-422 data transmitting ()
RS-422 data receiving (+)
Receive end for RS-232 data
Grounding
RS-422 data receiving ()
Unspecified
Transmit end for RS-232 data
Table 17-13 describes the pins of the ALMI1 interface.

Figure 1.10 Pins of the ALMI1 interface
Front View
Pin
Usage
Alarm input 1
Ground for alarm input 1
Alarm input 2
Alarm input 3
Alarm input 4
Table 17-14 lists the pins of the ALMI2 interface.

Front View
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Pin
Usage
Alarm input 5
Alarm input 6
Alarm input 7

Copyright Huawei
1326

System
Front View
17 Auxiliary Boards
Pin
Usage
Alarm input 8

Front View
Pin
Usage
Alarm input 9
Alarm input 10
Alarm input 11
Alarm input 12

Front View
Pin
Usage
Alarm input 13
Alarm input 14
Alarm input 15
Alarm input 16
1.1.1.1.1510 Connections for Alarm Cascading
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Connections for alarm signal cascading

Copyright Huawei
1327

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Figure 17-5 shows the connections when one or multiple cabinets input or output alarm
signals. Connect the alarm output interface to the alarm cascading interface of a lower level.
Make the connections one by one until the alarm output is connected to the centralized alarm
system.
Figure 1.2 Connections for alarm input, alarm cascading, and alarm output
Cabinet1
Cabinet2
Subrack1
Centralized
alarm system
Subrack3
ALMO1
ALMO1
ALMO2
ALMO2
ALMI1
ALMI1
Subrack2
Subrack4
ALMO1
ALMO1
ALMO2
ALMO2
ALMI1
ALMI1
Connections of cabinet alarm indicators
Figure 17-6 shows the connections of the 4-channel cabinet alarm indicators. Connect
LAMP1 of subrack 2 to LAMP2 of subrack 1. Finally, connect LAMP1 of subrack 1 to the
indicator interface at the top of the cabinet.
Figure 1.3 Connections of cabinet alarm indicators
4 cabinet
alarm indicators
Cabinet indicator
subrack 1
LAMP1
LAMP2
subrack 2
LAMP1
LAMP2
17.1.7 Valid Slots

The AUX can be installed in slot 37 in the subrack.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1328

System
17 Auxiliary Boards

The technical specifications of the AUX include the mechanical specifications and power
consumption.

The mechanical specifications of the AUX are as follows:
Weight: 1.0 kg

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the AUX is 19 W.
17.2 FAN
technical specifications of the FAN (fan board).

The FAN is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
The logical board of fan tray assembly XE1FAN is displayed as N1FAN on the . The
XE1FAN is of the two-layer structure. The one-layer fan is no longer manufactured.
17.2.2 Application
The FAN is a system fan board. The FAN can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
provide the heat dissipation function.

The FAN adjusts the fan speed, checks the fan status, reports the fault of the fan control
board, and reports the off-position alarm of the fan.
Table 17-17 provides the functions and features of the FAN.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the FAN
Function and
Feature
FAN
Function of
intelligent speed
adjustment
Provides the following functions of intelligent speed adjustment:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Automatically adjusts the fan speed.
When the temperature difference in the

local area is more than 43C, the fans
operate at low speed.

local area is less than 43C, the fans

Copyright Huawei
1329

System
Function and
Feature
17 Auxiliary Boards
FAN
operate at medium speed.

local area is less than 33C, the fans
operate at high speed.
Ensures that the fan operates at full speed when the speed
adjustment signal is abnormal.
In normal situations, all the fan tray assemblies operate normally.

When one fan tray assembly reports an alarm, the other fan tray
assemblies adjust the fan speed to operate at full speed.
Hot swapping
function
Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.
Backup function
Provides the mutual backup function for the power supplies of the
fans in the fan tray assemblies.
Status checking
Supports the checking of the fan status.
Alarm function
Reports the fan alarm and in-service information.
Fan backup
The two fans in the fan tray assembly function as a backup for each
other. The two fans operate at the same time. When one fan is faulty,
the other fan adjusts the speed to operate at full speed.
When one fan of the three fan tray assemblies fails, the system can work normally for 96 hours at the
ambient temperature ranging from 0C to 45C.
The fan tray assembly must be replaced when one of the following situations occurs.
One or more fans in each fan tray assembly of the three fan tray assemblies are faulty.
Two fans in a fan tray assembly are faulty.
When a fan tray assembly works normally, the upper fan and lower fan in the fan tray assembly
operate at the same speed.

The FAN consists of the fan control unit and fan power supply unit.
Figure 17-7 shows the functional block diagram of the XE1FAN.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1330

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the XE1FAN

Status signal
Speed adjusting signal
Status signal
Fan control
unit
Fan
Alarm signal
Power
Fan power
supply
unit

1.1.1.1.1513 Fan Power Supply Unit

This unit provides the driving voltage for the fan to operate.
1.1.1.1.1514 Fan Control Unit

The fan control unit controls the operation speed of the fan through the speed adjusting signal.
The fan control unit also detects its faults, faults in the fans, and faults in the fan power supply
unit. When detecting any fault, the fan control unit reports alarm information and the SCC
then issues commands to enable other fans to operate at full speed. The fan control unit also
receives commands from the SCC when the temperature is very low, and stops the fans. The
fan control unit detects the fault in the fan power supply unit, speed adjusting signal, fan state,
and in-position state of the FAN.
17.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the FAN has indicators.

The OptiX OSN equipment series use a modular fan platform.
One subrack uses three fan tray assemblies, as shown in Figure 17-8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1331

System
17 Auxiliary Boards
Figure 1.1 Modular fan tray assembly
The indicator (STATE) on the front panel of the board indicates the running state of the
hardware. This indicator is red, green, or yellow when it is on.
17.2.6 Valid Slots

The FAN can be installed in slots 3840 in the subrack.

The technical specifications of the FAN include the mechanical specifications, power
consumption, and working voltages.

The mechanical specifications of the FAN are as follows:
Weight of the XE1FAN: 1.5 kg

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of each fan assembly of the
XE1FAN is 16 W when the input voltage is -48 V.
1.1.1.1.1519 Working Voltages

The working voltages of the FAN can be -48 V20% DC or -60 V20% DC.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1332

System
18
18 Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion

Compensation Boards
Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion

Compensation Boards
About This Chapter

This topic describes the optical amplifier boards such as the and the dispersion compensation
boards.
18.1 BA2
technical specifications of the BA2 (optical booster amplifier board).
18.2 BPA
technical specifications of the BPA (optical booster and pre-amplifier board).
18.3 COA
technical specifications of the COA (case-shaped optical amplifier).
18.4 RPC01
technical specifications of the RPC01 (forward Raman driving board).
18.5 RPC02
technical specifications of the RPC02 (backward Raman driving board).
18.6 OBU1
technical specifications of the OBU1 (optical booster amplifier board).
18.7 OBU2
technical specifications of the TN12OBU2 (optical booster amplifier board).
18.8 DCU
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1333

System

Compensation Boards
technical specifications of the DCU (dispersion compensation board).
18.1 BA2
technical specifications of the BA2 (optical booster amplifier board).

The BA2 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
18.1.2 Application
The BA2 is a two-channel optical power amplifier board. The BA2 amplifies the power of
optical signals and is applicable to the long-distance optical fiber transmission.
Figure 18-1 shows the position of the BA in an optical transmission system.
Figure 1.1 Position of the BA in an optical transmission system
Tx
BA
Rx

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high.
Hence, the BA is required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal optical
signals.
The BA2 amplifies the power of two-channel optical signals. Table 18-1 provides the
functions and features of the BA2.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the BA2
Function and
Feature
BA2
Basic functions
Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 1315

dBm or 1518 dBm. As a result, when the G.652 optical fiber with a
loss of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120
km, 130 km, or above.
Supporting the
EDFA
Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and optical

power of the EDFA module.
Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output optical
power of the EDFA module and query of the optical power of the
EDFA module.
Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When no
optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned off.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1334

System
Function and
Feature

Compensation Boards
BA2
When optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned
on.
Performance events
and alarms
monitoring
Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser.

Software upgrade
Supports the software upgrade and expansion without interrupting

services.
The wavelength of the optical signal transmitted to the BA2 must be within the range from
1530 nm to 1565 nm. Otherwise, the input optical signal cannot be amplified correctly.
Hence, make sure that the output wavelength of the line board that is interconnected with the
BA2 is within the required range.
The BA2 provides the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function. When the IPA function is enabled
and no input signals are detected on the receive side of a line board, the pumping laser is turned off to
prevent high laser power from damaging the eyes.

The BA2 consists of the EDFA module, control module, communication module, and DC/DC
converter module.
Figure 18-2 shows the functional block diagram of the BA2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1335

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the BA2

Optical
input
Fiber
distributor
EDFA module
Doped
erbium
fiber
WDM
Input
Output
isolate
isolate
coupler
Input
power
monitor
(Pin1)
Input
power
Optical
splitter
Filter
Optical
output
Output
power
monitor
(Pin2)
Laser pump
Pump Pump Temperat

current
ure
current detect
Laser
shutdown
Manual
LOS in
control
AD/DA
Output
power
Pump
temperature
control
Control&Generation alarms
Control module
Communication
module
+3.3 V
DC/DC
converter
module
DC/DC
converter
module
Communication
SCC unit
Fuse
-48 V/ -60 V
-48 V/ -60 V
Fuse
+3.3 V
backup
power
1.1.1.1.1520 EDFA Module

The optical amplifier unit consists of two EDFA modules. One module is the BA and the other
module is the PA. When the board is used as a PA, an optical filter with 1550.12 nm as the
central wavelength is added to the optical output end of the module. A BA does not have the
filter. A semi-conductor laser bump with 980 nm as the central wavelength is in the erbium
fiber inside the EDFA module. Bump light and input signal light are coupled into the erbium
fiber through an optical coupler. The input and output optical signals of the module are led out
by two fiber splitters according to a specific coupling ratio. Then, the optical signals are
converted into optical current by two PIN photoelectrical diodes. The input and output power
of the EDFA module is determined according to the optical signals. The module also applies
optical isolating measures at the input and output ends to improve the performance of the
module.
1.1.1.1.1521 Control Module

The control module performs the following functions:
Detects and drives bump electricity.
Controls the temperature of the bump laser.
Detects the input and output power.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1336

System

Compensation Boards
Reports alarms.
The control module consists of the A/D converting unit, D/A converting unit, and CPU. The
A/D converting unit converts the temperature value of the cooling electricity and the
input/output optical power from analog values into digital values. The converted values are
sent to the CPU, which generates performance reporting events or alarms. The A/D converting
unit also converts bump electricity from analog values into digital values. The converted
values are also sent to the CPU. After the CPU processes the converted values, the D/A
converting unit precisely controls the driving analog circuit of the bump laser of the EDFA
optical module. The internal temperature of the bump laser module remains at 25C. The
temperature sensor inside the bump laser outputs temperature change to drive the cooler to
keep the internal temperature of the bump laser module at 25C.

The communication module supports Ethernet communication.
1.1.1.1.1523 DC/DC Converter Module

require.
18.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the BA2 has indicators and interfaces.

The BA2 is available in two types, namely, one-interface BA2 and two-interface BA2.
Figure 18-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the one-interface BA2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1337

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the one-interface BA2
BA2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT V IEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
BA2
Figure 18-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the two-interface BA2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1338

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the two-interface BA2
BA2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2 IN2
BA2
The front panel of the one-interface BA2 has one optical interface. The optical interface
transmits and receives one channel of optical signals. The one-interface BA2 uses the
swappable optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and upgrading of the optical
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1339

System

Compensation Boards
module.
The front panel of the two-interface BA2 has two optical interfaces. The optical interfaces
transmit and receive two channels of optical signals. The two-interface BA2 uses the
swappable optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and upgrading of the optical
module.
If the front panel of the one-interface BA2 has two LC optical interfaces, only the upper
optical interface (IN1/OUT1) is valid. In the case of the BA2 whose front panel has two LC
optical interfaces, determine whether the BA2 is a one-interface BA2 or a two-interface BA2
according to 18.1.7 Feature Code.
Table 18-2 describes the type and usage of the optical interface of the one-interface BA2.
Figure 1.1 Optical interface of the one-interface BA2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC
Table 18-3 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the two-interface BA2.
Figure 1.2 Optical interfaces of the two-interface BA2
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1
LC
Receives the first channel of optical signals.
OUT1
LC
Transmits the first channel of optical signals.
IN2
LC
Receives the second channel of optical signals.
OUT2
LC
Transmits the second channel of optical signals.
18.1.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the BA2 vary with the cross-connect capacity and subrack of the OptiX
OSN equipment.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the BA2 are as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the BA2 can be installed in slots 18 and
Copyright Huawei
1340

System

Compensation Boards
18.1.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the BA2 indicates the output optical power of the optical interfaces.
Table 18-4 provides the relationship between the feature code of the BA2 and the output
optical power.
Figure 1.3 Relationship between the feature code of the BA2 and the output optical power
Board
Feature Code
Output Optical Power
SSN1BA201
01
Dual-channel optical power

amplification: 14 dBm
SSN1BA202
02

amplification: 17 dBm
SSN1BA203
03
Optical power amplification:

14 dBm
SSN1BA204
04
Optical power amplification:

17 dBm
SSN1BA205
05

amplification: 14 dBm and 17
dBm

The technical specifications of the BA2 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces,

Table 18-5 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the BA2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the BA2
Parameter
Value
Input wavelength
(nm)
1530 to 1565
Input optical power

(dBm)
-6 to +3
Output optical power

(dBm)
14 to 14.5 or 17 to 17.5
Noise figure (dB)
< 6.5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1341

System

Compensation Boards


The mechanical specifications of the BA2 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.0

The maximum power consumption of the BA2 at room temperature (25C) is 20 W.
18.2 BPA
technical specifications of the BPA (optical booster and pre-amplifier board).

The BPA is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N2. The N1BPA is
discontinued.
Table 18-6 describes the versions of the BPA.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the BPA
Item
Description
Functional Versions
The BPA is available in two functional versions, namely, N1

and N2.
Differences
The N1BPA consists of two EDFA optical modules, whereas

the N2BPA has only one EDFA optical module.
Substitution
The two versions can substitute for each other when certain
conditions are met. If the ALS function is required and the
N2BPA is used to substitute for the N1BPA, enable the ALS
function on the N2BPA. If the ALS function is required and
the N1BPA is used to substitute for the N2BPA, enable the
ALS function on the line board. If the ALS function is not
required, this restriction is not applicable.
18.2.2 Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA provides a BA and a PA,
which are respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 18-5 shows the position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1342

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system
Optical
transmitter
BA
PA
Optical
receiver
1550.12nm

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high.
Hence, the BA and PA are required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal
optical signals.
Table 18-7 provides the functions and features of the BPA.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the BPA
BPA
Basic functions
Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 1315

dBm or 1517 dBm. As a result, when the G.652 optical fiber
with a loss of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can
be 120 km, 130 km, or above.
Pre-amplification
function
Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical

signals. Increases the power of the small-volume optical signals
by 22-25 dB (N1BPA) or 22-33 dB (N2BPA).
Supporting the EDFA
Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and

optical power of the EDFA module.
Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output

optical power of the EDFA module and query of the optical
power of the EDFA module.
Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When

no optical signals are received, the laser is automatically
turned off. When optical signals are received, the laser is
automatically turned on.
Performance events
and alarms monitoring
Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser.

Software upgrade
Supports the software upgrade and expansion without

interrupting services.

The BPA consists of the optical part, driving and detecting part, and data processing and
communication part.
Figure 18-6 shows the functional block diagram of the N1BPA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1343

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the N1BPA

Optical output
Optical input
Optical input
Drive
module
Optical
part
EDFA optical module 2
EDFA optical module 1
Pump current
check
Optical output
Module
temperature
control
Input/output
power
check
Pump
Drive
current
module
check
Module
temperature
control
Output
power
check
Input
power
check
Driving
and
detecting
Fixed filter
part
A/D or D/A conversion
Communication
module
SCC
Data processing and

communication part
Control
module
Figure 18-7 shows the functional block diagram of the N2BPA.

Figure 1.2 Functional block diagram of the N2BPA
Optical input
Optical output
Optical input
Optical output
Fixed
filter
For pre-amplification
Optical part
EDFA optical module
Pump current
check
Drive
module
Module
temperature
control
Input/output
power
check
Pump
current
check
Module
Drive
temperature
module
control
Input/output
power
check
Driving and
detecting part
SCC
Communication
module
Control
module
Data processing and

communication part
1.1.1.1.1531 Optical Part

The N1BPA consists of two EDFA optical modules. The N2BPA has only one EDFA optical
module. The EDFA optical module magnifies the optical power.
1.1.1.1.1532 Driving and Detecting Part

The driving and detecting part provides the EDFA optical module with the driving current. It
also checks the working status of each part in the EDFA optical module. In addition, it
predicts and handles possible faults.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1344

System

Compensation Boards
The driving and detecting part performs the following functions: checking the pump current,
driving the optical module, controlling the temperature of the optical module, and checking
the input and output optical power.
1.1.1.1.1533 Data Processing and Communication Part

The data processing and communication part consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. The
data processing and communication part analyzes the test result of the tested circuit. Then, it
adjusts the driving circuit based on the analysis result so that the gain or output optical power
of the EDFA optical module remains in the range of the rated value. It also classifies the
abnormal states represented by the measured values and reports the abnormal states to the
NMS.
18.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the BPA has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 18-8 shows the appearance of the front panel of the BPA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1345

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the BPA
BPA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
BOUT
BIN
POUT
PIN
BPA
The front panel of the BPA has two LC optical interfaces. Table 18-8 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the BPA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1346

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the BPA

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
BIN
LC
Receives one channel of optical signals for

amplification.
BOUT
LC
Transmits one channel of amplified optical signals.
PIN
LC
Receives one channel of optical signals for preamplification.
POUT
LC
Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical

signals.
18.2.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the BPA vary with the cross-connect capacity and subrack of the OptiX
OSN equipment.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the BPA are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the BPA can be installed in slots 18 and
18.2.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the BPA indicates the output optical power of the optical interfaces.
Table 18-9 provides the relationship between the feature code of the BPA and the output
optical power.
Figure 1.2 Relationship between the feature code of the BPA and the output optical power
Board
Feature Code
Description
SSN1BPA01 and
SSN2BPA01
01
The output optical power of the BA

module is 14 dBm.
SSN1BPA02
02
The output optical power of the BA

module is 17 dBm.

The technical specifications of the BPA include the parameters specified for optical interfaces,
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1347

System

Compensation Boards

Table 18-10 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the BPA.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the BPA
Parameter
Value
Input wavelength (nm)
BA: 1530 to 1565

PA: 1550.12
Input optical power

(dBm)
BA: -6 to +3
Output optical power

(dBm)
N1BPA: 14 to 14.5 or 17 to 17.5 (BA)
PA: -44 to -10

N1BPA: -16 to +15 (PA)
N2BPA: 14 to 14.5 (BA)
N2BPA: -16 to +23 (PA)
Noise figure (dB)
BA: < 6.5

PA: < 6
Minimum signal gain

(dB)
+22
When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA, prevent the damage caused by high input
optical power to the optical module.


The mechanical specifications of the BPA are as follows:
Weight of the N1BPA (kg): 1.0
Weight of the N2BPA (kg): 1.2

The maximum power consumption of the N1BPA at room temperature (25C) is 20 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N2BPA at room temperature (25C) is 11 W.
18.3 COA
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1348

System

Compensation Boards
technical specifications of the COA (case-shaped optical amplifier).

The COA is available in three functional versions, namely, 61, 62, and N1.
The working principle of the 62COA is basically the same as the working principle of the
61COA or N1COA. The difference between the 62COA and the 61COA (N1COA) is with
regard to the used optical amplifier modules. The 62COA uses the Raman optical amplifier
module, whereas the 61COA and N1COA use the EDFA optical amplifier module.
The COA that occurs in the following text includes the 61COA, N1COA, and 62COA. The
characteristics of the COA are the common characteristics of the three types of COAs.
Table 18-11 describes the versions of the COA.

Figure 1.1 Versions of the COA
Item
Description
Functional versions
The COA is available in three functional versions, namely, 61, 62,

and N1.
Differences
The 61COA can function as a BA or a PA. The BA is the EDFA

optical amplifier in the 1530 nm to 1560 nm fiber communication
window; the PA is the EDFA optical amplifier in the 1550 nm fiber
communication window.
The N1COA can function as a PA. The PA is the EDFA optical
amplifier in the 1530 nm to 1560 nm fiber communication window.
The N1COA does not have a filter and is a multi-wavelength
amplifier.
The 62COA uses the Raman optical amplifier module.
Substitution
The versions cannot be substituted with each other.
18.3.2 Application
The COA is a case-shaped optical amplifier that is not installed in a slot of the subrack. The
COA is mainly used to amplify optical signals and is applicable to the long-distance optical
fiber transmission.
The application of the COA is the same as that of the BA and PA on the OptiX OSN
equipment series. For details, see Figure 18-5.

The COA integrates the optical amplifier module, the driving circuit, and the communication
circuit in an aluminium case.
The COA is an external and independent amplifier and does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
The COA can work independently. The equipment supports a maximum of two 61COAs, two
N1COAs, or one 62COA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1349

System

Compensation Boards
1.1.1.1.1541 61COA and N1COA

The 61COA/N1COA is equipped with only one EDFA optical module. The 61COA/N1COA
can work as a power amplifier, a pre-amplifier, or a line amplifier. Figure 18-9 shows the
appearance of the 61COA/N1COA.
The optical characteristics of the 61COA/N1COA are the same as the optical characteristics of
the optical amplifier boards such as the BPA and BA2. The difference between the
61COA/N1COA and the optical amplifier boards is that the 61COA/N1COA is an external
optical amplifier unit, which does not occupy a slot in the subrack. The 61COA/N1COA can
be directly installed in the ETSI cabinet but requires separate power supply.
Figure 1.1 Appearance of the 61COA/N1COA (PA)
The application of the 61COA/N1COA in the optical transmission system is the same as the
application of the BA2 and BPA in the optical transmission system. Table 18-12 provides the
functions and features of the 61COA/N1COA.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the 61COA/N1COA
Function and
Feature
61COA/N1COA
Power amplification
function
The 61COA increases the launched optical power of the line

board. As a result, the valid transmission distance of optical
signals is extended.
Pre-amplification
function
The 61COA/N1COA provides the pre-amplification function.
ALS function
Supports the ALS function.
Communication
through serial ports
Communicates with the GSCC through the RS-232 serial port,

reports the alarms and performance events of the COA to the
NMS, and receives the configuration commands issued by the
NMS.
1.1.1.1.1542 62COA
The 62COA is a case-shaped Raman optical amplifier and is used at the receive end of the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1350

System

Compensation Boards
SDH equipment.
The 62COA transmits counter-propagated pumping optical signals to fibers for distributed
Raman amplification. The gain medium of distributed Raman amplification is the line fiber
that can realize better noise performance. This is different from the 61COA. Hence, the
62COA can extend the transmission distance, reduce the signal-to-noise ratio, and realize ultra
long hop transmission for a single span.
Figure 18-10 shows the appearance of the 62COA.
Figure 1.2 Appearance of the 62COA
4
2
3
1. Captive screw
4. ESD jack
2. Ejector lever
5. Power access board
3. COA board
The 62COA is a case-shaped Raman optical amplifier and is used at the receive end of the
optical transmission system. The optical signals are amplified during transmission based on
the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber. The 62COA needs to work with the EDFA
to realize the transmission of optical signals for more than 170 km. For details, see Figure 1811.
Figure 1.3 Application of the 62COA
Raman amplifier
Signal light
EDFA
Pump light
Fiber
Transmitting end
Pump light
Coupler
EDFA
Laser
Receiving end
The Raman amplifier amplifies optical signals during transmission by transmitting counterpropagated pumping optical signals to fibers for distributed Raman amplification. As a result,
the phase of optical signals is significantly different from the phase of pump signals. The
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1351

System

Compensation Boards
power fluctuation of the Raman pumping is offset in the counter-propagation. Hence, the
noise caused by the pump can be effectively suppressed.
Table 18-13 provides the functions and features of the 62COA.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the 62COA
Function and
Feature
62COA
Basic functions
Is configured at the receive end of the SDH system, and realizes

extra long-haul transmission (more than 170 km) when working
with an EDFA whose output power is 17 dBm at the transmit end.
Pre-amplification
function
The 62COA provides the pre-amplification function.
ALS function
Supports the ALS function.
Communication
through serial ports
Communicates with the GSCC through the RS-232 serial port,

reports the alarms and performance events of the COA to the
NMS, and receives the configuration commands issued by the
NMS.

The 61COA and N1COA consist of the EDFA module, control module, communication
module, and DC/DC converter module.
The working principle of the N1COA is similar to the working principle of the 61COA. The
61COA has the filter unit, whereas the N1COA does not have the filter unit.
Figure 18-12 shows the functional block diagram of the 61COA/N1COA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1352

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the 61COA/N1COA

Optical output
Optical input
Fixed
filter
For pre-amplification
EDFA optical
module
Pump
power check
Drive
module
Module
temperature
control
Optical part
Input/Output
Power check
Driving and
detecting part
SCC
Communication
module
Control
module
Data processing and

communication part
1.1.1.1.1543 EDFA Module

The optical amplifier unit consists of two EDFA modules. One module is the BA and the other
module is the PA. When the board is used as a PA, an optical filter with 1550.12 nm as the
central wavelength is added to the optical output end of the module. A BA does not have the
filter. A semi-conductor laser bump with 980 nm as the central wavelength is in the erbium
fiber inside the EDFA module. Bump light and input signal light are coupled into the erbium
fiber through an optical coupler. The input and output optical signals of the module are led out
by two fiber splitters according to a specific coupling ratio. Then, the optical signals are
converted into optical current by two PIN photoelectrical diodes. The input and output power
of the EDFA module is determined according to the optical signals. The module also applies
optical isolating measures at the input and output ends to improve the performance of the
module.
1.1.1.1.1544 Control Module

The control module performs the following functions:
Detects and drives bump electricity.
Controls the temperature of the bump laser.
Detects the input and output power.
Reports alarms.
The control module consists of the A/D converting unit, D/A converting unit, and CPU. The
A/D converting unit converts the temperature value of the cooling electricity and the
input/output optical power from analog values into digital values. The converted values are
sent to the CPU, which generates performance reporting events or alarms. The A/D converting
unit also converts bump electricity from analog values into digital values. The converted
values are also sent to the CPU. After the CPU processes the converted values, the D/A
converting unit precisely controls the driving analog circuit of the bump laser of the EDFA
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1353

System

Compensation Boards
optical module. The internal temperature of the bump laser module remains at 25C. The
temperature sensor inside the bump laser outputs temperature change to drive the cooler to
keep the internal temperature of the bump laser module at 25C.

The communication module supports Ethernet communication.
1.1.1.1.1546 DC/DC Converter Module

require.
18.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the COA has indicators and interfaces.

Figure 18-13 shows the appearance of the front panel of the 61COA/N1COA.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the 61COA/N1COA
9
10
1. ID DIP switch
2. Running indicator
4. RS-232-1
7. MONITOR-2
5. RS-232-2
6. MONITOR-1
8. IN: input optical interface
9. OUT: output optical interface 10. Power switch
11
3. Alarm indicator
11. -48 V power interface
Figure 18-14 shows the appearance of the front panel of the 62COA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1354

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the 62COA
1. SC/PC optical interface (OUT)
2. LSH optical interface (IN)
3. Air filter
4. Fan board
5. RJ-45 interface
6. RS-232-1
7. RS-232-2
8. DIP switch (bits 8-5)
9. DIP switch (bits 4-1)
10. Power input interface
11. Power switch
Board running status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Fan alarm indicator (ALM) one color (red)
The front panel of the 61COA/N1COA has one SC/PC optical interface. The optical interface
receives and transmits one channel of optical signals. The input optical interface of the
62COA is connected to the LSH flange and the output optical interface is connected to the SC
flange. Figure 18-15 shows the SC/PC fiber connector that the SC/PC optical interfaces of the
61COA and N1COA use.
Figure 1.3 SC/PC fiber connector
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1355

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 18-16 shows the flange and fiber connector that the input optical interface of the
62COA uses.
Figure 1.4 LSH flange and fiber connector
The protective cap of the LSH fiber jumper is specially designed. When you connect the LSH fiber
jumper to an LSH flange, do not remove the protective cap but insert the LSH fiber jumper into the LSH
flange directly.
The COA has two RS-232 serial ports, which function as the control and communication
ports. The serial ports communicate with the SCC unit and report alarms and performance
events.
Table 18-14 provides the pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port
Front View
Pin of RS-232-2
Definition
Used to receive
data.
Used to transmit
data.
Used for common

grounding.
Pin of RS-232-1
To realize the communication between the COA and the GSCC, use a serial port control line to connect
the RS-232-1 serial port of the COA to the F&f port of the subrack.
The RS-232-2 serial port is used in the scenario where several COAs are used at a single
station.
To enable each COA to communicate with the SCC unit, use a serial port line to connect the
RS-232-2 port of COA 1 to the RS-232-1 port of COA 2, and use another serial port line to
connect the RS-232-2 port of COA 2 to the RS-232-1 port of COA 3. Connect the other COAs
similarly. In this case, each COA communicates with the SCC unit through the RS-232-1
serial port of COA 1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1356

System

Compensation Boards
When you cascade COAs, set the last four digits of the DIP switch on the front panel of each COA to a
unique value. The values are used to identify the COAs. One OptiX OSN 3500 subrack supports a
maximum of two COAs. When bit 1 of the DIP switch is set downwards, the logical slot of the COA on
the NMS is slot 101. When bit 2 of the DIP switch is set downwards, the logical slot of the COA on the
NMS is slot 102.
The COA has two MONITOR interfaces. When the 61COA is used alone, the MONITOR-1
interface and MONITOR-2 interface are the alarm output interfaces. In this case, the two
MONITOR interfaces have the same functions. Table 18-15 provides the pin assignments of
the MONITOR interfaces.
Figure 1.2 Pin assignments of the MONITOR interfaces
Front View
Pin of
MONITOR-2
Definition
1 and 6
1 and 6
The input optical power of the

EDFA module is very low.
2 and 7
2 and 7
The working current of the

pump laser of the EDFA module
exceeds the threshold.
3 and 8
3 and 8
The cooling current of the pump

laser of the EDFA module
exceeds the threshold.
4 and 9
4 and 9
The ambient temperature of the

EDFA module exceeds the
threshold.
Digital ground
Pin of
MONITOR-1
The 62COA has one RJ45 connector, through which the 62COA is connected to the computer
for software loading. Table 18-16 provides the pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the
62COA.
Figure 1.3 Pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the 62COA
Front View
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Pin
Description
Transmitting (+)
Transmitting ()
Receiving (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Receiving ()
78
Not defined

Copyright Huawei
1357

System

Compensation Boards
The COA has one 48 V power interface. The 48 V power interface receives the 48 V
power provided by the PIU in the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack or the PDU at the top of the
cabinet. The working voltage under normal working conditions ranges from 38.4 V to 57.6
V (48 V20%).
The COA has one DIP switch.
The DIP switches of the 61COA/N1COA are in the lower left corner of the front panel.
The DIP switches are used to set the ID of the 61COA/N1COA. When a bit of the DIP
switch is set upwards, the bit is in the OFF position. When the bit is set downwards, the
bit is in the ON position. The SCC identifies a 61COA/N1COA through the ID of the
61COA/N1COA. The SCC communicates with the 61COAs/N1COAs whose IDs are
different in the master-slave calling mode.
The DIP switch of the 62COA is used to set the ID of the 62COA and the type of fiber.
The DIP switch has eight bits. The bit on the leftmost side is numbered "8" and the bit on
the rightmost side is numbered "1". When a bit of the DIP switch is set upwards, the bit
indicates "0". When the bit is set downwards, the bit indicates "1". The first four bits (1
4) are used to set the board ID, which ranges from 20 to 35. In actual situations, the first
four bits indicate only the range from 20 to 27. The fifth bit is used to set the type of
fiber. When bit 5 indicates "0", the fiber is of the G.652 type. When bit 5 indicates "1",
the fiber is of the G.655 type.
18.3.6 Valid Slots

The COA adopts the case-shape design. Hence, the COA does not require a slot in the
subrack.
In the ETSI cabinet, the 61COA or N1COA is installed on a special bracket, and the 62COA is
installed directly in the cabinet through the mounting ears. On the NMS, the logical slots of
the 61COA, N1COA, and 62COA are slots 101 and 102.
1.1.1.1.1550 Installation Position of the 61COA or N1COA

The installation of the 61COA is considered as an example. The bracket is fixed on the
crossbars on both sides of the cabinet. There are guide rails on the bracket. The 61COA is
pushed onto the bracket along the guide rails and is fixed on the bracket. One bracket can hold
two 61COAs horizontally. The front panels of the two 61COAs are on the front side of the
cabinet, as shown in Figure 18-17.
Figure 1.1 Position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1358

System

Compensation Boards
1.1.1.1.1551 Installation Position of the 62COA

The case-shaped 62COA can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet through
mounting ears and screws. If the upward-wiring scheme is applied, the 62COA is installed at
the bottom of the ETSI cabinet (positions of the first and third floating nuts). If the
downward-wiring scheme is applied, the 62COA is installed in any idle place of the 2.6 m
high cabinet or in the ETSI cabinet that is not fully configured.
18.3.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the 61COA indicates the output optical power of the optical interfaces.
Table 18-17 provides the relationship between the feature code of the 61COA and the output
optical power.
Figure 1.1 Relationship between the feature code of the 61COA and the output optical power
Board
Feature Code
Description
SS61COA01
01
The output optical power of

the BA module is 14 dBm.
SS61COA02
02
The output optical power of

the BA module is 17 dBm.

The technical specifications of the COA include the parameters specified for optical

Table 18-18 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the COA.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the COA
Parameter
Value
61COA
N1COA
62COA
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
BA: 1530 to 1565
PA: 1550.12
1550.12
Input optical
power range
(dBm)
BA: -6 to +3
PA: -28 to -10

(when the BPA
works with the line
board at the rate of
10 Gbit/s)
-43 to -20
PA: 1550.12
PA: -28 to -10

(when the BPA
works with the line
10 Gbit/s)
PA: -38 to -10
(when the BPA
works with the line
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
(The LOS alarm is

reported when the input
optical power reaches
-45 dBm.)
PA: -38 to -10

(when the BPA
works with the line
board at the rate

Copyright Huawei
1359

System
Parameter

Compensation Boards
Value
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
61COA
N1COA
board at the rate less

than 10 Gbit/s)
less than 10 Gbit/s)
BA: 14 to 14.5 or
17 to 17.5
PA: -2 to +16
(when the BPA
works with the line
10 Gbit/s)
PA: -2 to +16 (when

the BPA works with
the line board at the
rate of 10 Gbit/s)
PA: -12 to +16
(when the BPA
works with the line
board at the rate less
than 10 Gbit/s)
Signal gain (dB)
PA: > 22
Noise figure (dB)
<6
62COA
PA: -12 to +16

(when the BPA
works with the line
board at the rate
less than 10 Gbit/s)
> 22
13
< -1.5


The mechanical specifications of the 61COA and N1COA are as follows:
Dimensions (mm): 240 (W) x 190 (D) x 50 (H)
Weight (kg): 3.5
The mechanical specifications of the 62COA are as follows:
Dimensions (mm): 294 (W) x 436 (D) x 86 (H)
Weight (kg): 8.0

The maximum power consumption of the 61COA at room temperature (25C) is 10 W.
The maximum power consumption of the 62COA at room temperature (25C) is 75 W.
The maximum power consumption of the N1COA at room temperature (25C) is 10 W.
18.4 RPC01
technical specifications of the RPC01 (forward Raman driving board).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1360

System

Compensation Boards

The RPC01 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
18.4.2 Application
The RPC01 is an external forward Raman driving board that must work with the EDFA.
Figure 18-18 shows the position of the RPC01 in an optical transmission system.
Figure 1.1 Position of the RPC01 in an optical transmission system
Transmitting
Receiving
RPC01

The RPC01 supports the online optical performance monitoring function and other functions.
Table 18-19 provides the functions and features of the RPC01.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the RPC01
Function and
Feature
RPC01
Basic functions
Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, which

provides energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.
Realizes the distributed online amplification of signals over long

distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.
Online optical
performance
monitoring function
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical

signal can be transmitted to the spectrum analyzer through the
interface so that the spectrum and optical performance of the
multiplexed optical signal can be monitored without a service
interruption.
Performance events
and alarms
monitoring
Detects the pump optical power, temperature control current,

pump current, and back facet current.
Supports the setting of the LOS value to disable the output port
of the laser.

The RPC01 consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detecting module,
communication and control module, and power supply module.
The RPC01 is used at the transmit end of the system. The RPC01 utilizes the stimulated
Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1361

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the RPC01 (forward pump)

Splitter Signal light
Signal light
LINE
Pump light
Pump source
Control the
pumping current
and temperature.
SYS
MON
Raman pump optical module
Detect the pump

light power and
current.
PIN
Detect the
temperature.
Driving and detecting module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Voltages required
by the board
DC power provided
by the backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by
the SCC)

The signal light is received at the SYS interface and transmitted to the optical line through the
LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are transmitted to the test instrument through the
MON interface for online optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated
by the RPC01 is transmitted to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same
direction of the signal light, to realize the distributed amplification of the optical signal. The
Ethernet interface of the RPC01 is connected to the COM interface of an NE directly or
through a hub to realize the communication with the SCC.
1.1.1.1.1557 Functional Modules
The laser in the pump source module generates the pump light and sends the pump
light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module utilizes the
stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during
transmission.
The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into
two channels of signals of different power. One channel of signals are transmitted
through the SYS interface to the main optical path. The other channel of signals are
transmitted to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Detects the optical power of the service signals in real time.

Copyright Huawei
1362

System

Compensation Boards
Detects the driving current, back facet current, cooling current, and operating
temperature of the pump inside the pump optical module in real time.
Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the logic and control module.
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the CPU
instructions.
Collects the alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection
information of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC.
Power supply module

Converts the DC power provided by the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
18.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the RPC01 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 18-20 shows the appearance of the front panel of the RPC01.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the RPC01
03793010860000002 Y SSN1 RPC 01
Board manufacturing
information
MON
SYS
Board serial
number and name
LINE
LASER
RADIA TION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN
EXPOSURE TO DIRECT O R
SCATTERED RADIATION
CRPC
CLASS 4 LASER
PRODUCT
ALM
RUN
WARNING: FIBERS MUST

BE CONNECTED SEFORE
POWER UP
RS232-1
RS232-2
LAN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1363

System

Compensation Boards
The front panel of the RPC01 has six interfaces. Table 18-20 describes the types and usage of
the interfaces of the RPC01.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the RPC01
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
LINE
LSH/APC
Transmits the amplified signals to the fibers.
SYS
LC
Is connected to the BA and receives the optical

signals transmitted from the BA.
NOTE
The permissible input power for the SYS interface on the
RPC01 board ranges from +5 dBm to +8 dBm. Therefore,
when the output power of a BA is +14 dBm or +17 dBm,
you need to add an optical attenuator ranging from 5 dB to
10 dB in front of the SYS interface.
MON
LC
Monitors the optical performance.

The power of the MON interface is 1/99 of the power
of the SYS interface. That is, the power of the MON
interface is 20 dB less than the power of the SYS
interface.
LAN
RJ-45
Is connected to the COM interface of an NE directly

or through a hub to realize the communication with
the SCC.
RS2321/RS232-2
Is an RS-232 communication interface.
18.4.6 Valid Slots

The RPC01 is an external forward Raman driving board. Hence, the RPC01 is not installed in
the subrack. The RPC01 is connected to the COM interface of an NE directly or through a
hub to realize the communication with the SCC. The logical slot of the RPC01 on the NMS is
slot 104/106.

The RPC01 has two groups of jumpers, namely, group J3 and group J4.
Figure 18-21 shows the jumpers of the RPC01.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1364

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Jumpers of the RPC01

RPC01
10
10
J3
J4
CPU
To ensure that the board can operate normally, set the jumpers as follows:
Short-circuit jumpers 1 and 2 of group J4.

When jumpers 9 and 10 of group J4 are short-circuited, the logical slot of the RPC01 on the NMS is slot
106. When jumpers 9 and 10 of group J4 are not short-circuited, the logical slot of the RPC01 on the
NMS is slot 104.
18.4.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the RPC01 contains three characters, which indicate the gain of the
optical signal processed by the RPC01.
Table 18-21 describes the feature code of the RPC01.
Figure 1.2 Feature code of the RPC01
Feature Code
Indication
Description
The first character
Is always "G".
The second and third

characters
Gain
Indicates the gain.
Consider the N1RPC01 whose feature code is "G10" as an example. "G10" indicates that the
maximum gain of the optical signal is 10 dB.

You can set the parameters for the RPC01 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the RPC01 by using the U2000:
Laser status
Board work type
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1365

System
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

Compensation Boards
For the description of each parameter, see 26.9 Optical Amplifier Boards.
1.1.1.1.1561 Interface Display

Table 18-22 shows the serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the
RPC01 on the NMS.
Figure 1.1 Serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the RPC01 on the NMS
Interface on the Front Panel
Serial Number of the NMS Interface
LINE
SYS
MON

The technical specifications of the RPC01 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 18-23 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the RPC01.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the RPC01
Parameter
Value
Pump wavelength (nm)
1400 to 1500
Operating wavelength (nm)
1529 to 1561
Maximum pump power (dBm)
29
Gain on the G.652 fiber (dB)
10
Gain on the LEAF fiber (dB)
12
Equivalent noise figure on the G.652 fiber

(dB)
Equivalent noise figure on the LEAF fiber

(dB)
-1
Polarization dependent loss (dB)
0.5
Type of output connector
LSH/APC or LC/PC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1366

System

Compensation Boards

the optical interfaces is more than 27 dBm (500 mW).
Weight (kg): 4.0

The maximum power consumption of the RPC01 at room temperature (25C) is 70 W.
18.5 RPC02
technical specifications of the RPC02 (backward Raman driving board).

The RPC02 is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
18.5.2 Application
The RPC02 is an external backward Raman driving board that must work with the EDFA.
Figure 18-22 shows the position of the RPC02 in an optical transmission system.
Figure 1.1 Position of the RPC02 in an optical transmission system
Transmitting
RPC02
Receiving

The RPC02 supports the online optical performance monitoring function and other functions.
Table 18-24 provides the functions and features of the RPC02.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the RPC02
Function and
Feature
RPC02
Basic functions
Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, which

provides energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.
Realizes the distributed online amplification of signals over long

distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1367

System

Compensation Boards
Function and
Feature
RPC02
Online optical
performance
monitoring function

interruption.
Performance events
and alarms
monitoring
Detects the pump optical power, temperature control current,

pump current, and back facet current.
Supports the setting of the LOS value to disable the output port
of the laser.

The RPC02 consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detecting module,
The RPC02 is used at the receive end of the system. The RPC02 utilizes the stimulated
Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The
pump light travels in the reverse direction of the signal light. The RPC02 must work with the
EDFA.
Figure 18-23 shows the functional block diagram of the RPC02.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1368

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the RPC02 (backward pump)

Splitter Signal light
Signal light
LINE
Pump light
Pump source
Control the
pumping current
and temperature.
SYS
MON
Detect the pump

light power and
current.
PIN
Detect the
temperature.
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Voltages required
by the board
DC power provided
by the backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by
the SCC)

The pump source of the RPC02 sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE
optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed
amplification are received through the LINE interface. Then, the splitter splits the signals into
two channels. The service optical signals are transmitted through the SYS interface. A few
supervisory signals are transmitted to the test instrument through the MON interface for
online optical performance monitoring. The Ethernet interface of the RPC02 is connected to
the COM interface of an NE directly or through a hub to realize the communication with the
SCC.
1.1.1.1.1567 Functional Modules
The laser in the pump source module generates the pump light and sends the pump
light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module utilizes the
stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during
transmission.
The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into
two channels of signals of different power. One channel of signals are transmitted
through the SYS interface to the main optical path. The other channel of signals are
transmitted to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1369

System

Compensation Boards
Controls the operations on the board.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the CPU
instructions.
Collects the alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection
information of each functional module of the board.
Communicates with the SCC.
Power supply module

Converts the DC power provided by the backplane into the power required by each
module of the board.
18.5.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the RPC02 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 18-24 shows the appearance of the front panel of the RPC02.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the RPC02
03793010860000002 Y SSN1 RPC02
Board manufacturing
information
MON
Board serial
number and name
SYS
LINE
LASER
RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN
EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR
SCATTERED RADIATION
CRPC
CLASS 4 LASER
PRODUCT
ALM
RUN
WARNING: FIBERS MUST

BE CONNECTED SEFORE
POWER UP
RS232-1
RS232-2
LAN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1370

System

Compensation Boards
The front panel of the RPC02 has six interfaces. Table 18-25 describes the types and usage of
the interfaces of the RPC02.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the RPC02
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
LINE
LSH/APC
Receives the optical signals transmitted from the line.
SYS
LC
Is connected to the BA and transmits the amplified

signals to the fibers.
MON
LC
Monitors the optical performance.

The power of the MON interface is 1/99 of the power
of the SYS interface. That is, the power of the MON
interface is 20 dB less than the power of the SYS
interface.
LAN
RJ-45
Is connected to the COM interface of an NE directly

or through a hub to realize the communication with
the SCC.
RS2321/RS232-2
Is an RS-232 communication interface.
18.5.6 Valid Slots

The RPC02 is an external backward Raman driving board. Hence, the RPC02 is not installed
in the subrack. The RPC02 is connected to the COM interface of an NE directly or through a
hub to realize the communication with the SCC. The logical slot of the RPC02 on the NMS is
slot 105/107.

The RPC02 has two groups of jumpers, namely, group J3 and group J4.
Figure 18-25 shows the jumpers of the RPC02.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1371

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Jumpers of the RPC02

RPC02
10
10
J3
J4
CPU
To ensure that the board can operate normally, set the jumpers as follows:
Do not short-circuit jumpers 9 and 10 of group J3.

When jumpers 9 and 10 of group J4 are short-circuited, the logical slot of the RPC02 on the NMS is slot
107. When jumpers 9 and 10 of group J4 are not short-circuited, the logical slot of the RPC02 on the
NMS is slot 105.
18.5.8 Feature Code

The feature code of the RPC02 contains three characters, which indicate the gain of the
optical signal processed by the RPC02.
Table 18-26 describes the feature code of the RPC02.
Figure 1.2 Feature code of the RPC02
Feature Code
Indication
Description
The first character
Is always "G".

characters
Gain
Indicates the gain.
Consider the N1RPC02 whose feature code is "G10" as an example. "G10" indicates that the
maximum gain of the optical signal is 10 dB.

You can set the parameters for the RPC02 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the RPC02 by using the U2000:
Laser status
Board work type
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1372

System
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

Compensation Boards
For the description of each parameter, see 26.9 Optical Amplifier Boards.
1.1.1.1.1571 Interface Display

Table 18-27 shows the serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the
RPC02 on the NMS.
Figure 1.1 Serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the RPC02 on the NMS
Interface on the Front Panel
Serial Number of the NMS Interface
LINE
SYS
MON

The technical specifications of the RPC02 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 18-28 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the RPC02.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the RPC02
Parameter
Value
Pump wavelength (nm)
1400 to 1500
Operating wavelength (nm)
1529 to 1561
Maximum pump power (dBm)
29.5
Gain on the G.652 fiber (dB)
> 10
Gain on the LEAF fiber (dB)
NA
Equivalent noise figure on the G.652 fiber (dB)
NA
Equivalent noise figure on the LEAF fiber (dB)
NA
0.5
Type of output connector
LSH/APC or LC/PC
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1373

System

Compensation Boards

the optical interfaces is more than 27 dBm (500 mW).

The mechanical specifications of the RPC02 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 4.2

The maximum power consumption of the RPC02 at room temperature (25C) is 110 W.
18.6 OBU1
technical specifications of the OBU1 (optical booster amplifier board).

The OBU1 is available in the following functional version: TN11.
18.6.2 Application
The OBU1 is an optical booster amplifier board that amplifies optical signals.
The OBU1 is available in two types, namely, OBU101 and OBU103. The OBU101 is used at
the receive end and the OBU103 is used at the transmit end. Figure 18-26 shows the position
of the OBU1 in an optical transmission system.
Figure 1.1 Position of the OBU1 in an optical transmission system
Transmitting
Transmitting
OBU103
OBU101
Receiving
Receiving

The OBU1 supports the online optical performance monitoring function, gain lock, transient
control, and other functions.
Table 18-29 provides the functions and features of the OBU1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1374

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the OBU1

Function and
Feature
OBU1
Basic functions
Amplifies a maximum of 40 channels of optical signals with the

channel spacing of 100 GHz at the same time.
Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
Typical gain
The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB and the typical gain of the
OBU103 is 23 dB.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
function

interruption.
Gain lock function
The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. When one or
more channels are added or dropped, or optical signals of certain
channels fluctuate, the signal gain of other channels is not affected.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path to realize the smooth upgrading and
expansion.
Performance
events and alarms
monitoring
Checks and reports the optical power.

Controls the temperature of the pump laser.
Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, cooling current,
temperature of the pump laser, and ambient temperature of the board.
The OBU1 is available in two types, namely, OBU101 and OBU103. The OBU101 is used at the receive
end and the OBU103 is used at the transmit end.

The OBU1 consists of the EDFA optical module, splitter, driving and detecting module,
Figure 18-27 shows the functional block diagram of the OBU1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1375

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the OBU1
Splitter
EDFA optical module

IN
OUT
Driving
current
MON
Detect the pump

current and
temperature.
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Voltages required
by the board
Fuse
DC power provided
by the backplane
Backplane
(controlled
by the
SCC
SCC)

The OBU1 receives the multiplexed optical signals, which are amplified by the EDFA optical
module. Then, the OBU1 sends the amplified optical signals to the splitter and transmits the
signals through the OUT interface. The OBU1 also sends a few supervisory signals to the test
instrument for online optical performance monitoring.
1.1.1.1.1577 EDFA Optical Module

The EDFA optical module amplifies the input optical signals. The EDFA optical module
adopts the automatic gain control technology. Hence, the gain of each operating wavelength
signal can remain in the allowed range.
1.1.1.1.1578 Splitter
The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the EDFA optical module into two
channels of signals of different power. One channel of signals is transmitted through the OUT
interface to the main optical path. The other channel of signals is transmitted to the MON
interface for spectrum detection and supervising.
The power of the MON interface is 1/99 of the power of the OUT interface. That is, the power
of the MON interface is 20 dB less than the power of the OUT interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1376

System

Compensation Boards
1.1.1.1.1579 Driving and detecting module
1.1.1.1.1580 Communication and control Module
The communication and control module controls and monitors the functional modules of
the board, and manages the communication.
The communication and control module collects the alarms, performance events,
working status, voltage detection information, and other information of each functional
module of the board, and reports the collected information to the SCC.
The communication and control module receives the commands issued by the SCC to
control and coordinate the operation of each functional module.
1.1.1.1.1581 Power supply module

Converts the DC power provided by the backplane into the power required by each module of
the board.
18.6.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the OBU1 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 18-28 shows the appearance of the front panel of the OBU1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1377

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the OBU1
OBU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
MON
OUT
IN
OBU1
The front panel of the OBU1 has three optical interfaces. Table 18-30 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the OBU1.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1378

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the OBU1

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals to be amplified.
OUT
LC
Transmits the amplified multiplexed signals.
MON
LC
Is connected to the test instrument to monitor the inservice performance.
18.6.6 Valid Slots

The OBU1 can be installed in slots 18 and 1117 in the main subrack.
18.6.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the OBU1 contains six characters, which indicate the gain and maximum
nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the OBU1.
Table 18-31 describes the feature code of the OBU1.
Figure 1.2 Feature code of the OBU1
Feature Code
Indication
Description
The first character
Is always "G".

characters
Gain
Indicates the gain.
The fourth character
Is always "I".
The fifth and sixth

characters
Maximum nominal input

optical power
Indicates the maximum

nominal input optical power.
Consider the TN11OBU1 whose feature code is "G23I-3" as an example. "G23I-3" indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.

You can set the parameters for the OBU1 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the OBU1 by using the U2000:
Threshold of input power loss
Laser status
Gain
Nominal gain upper threshold
Nominal gain lower threshold
Rated optical power
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1379

System
Configure band
Configure working band parity
Actual band
Actual working band parity

Compensation Boards

The technical specifications of the OBU1 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 18-32 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OBU1.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OBU1
Parameter
Value
TN11OBU101
TN11OBU103

(nm)
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
Nominal input power range

(dBm)
-32 to -4
-32 to -3
Input power range per

channel (dBm)
40
channe
ls
-32 to -20
-32 to -19
80
channe
ls
-32 to -23
-32 to -22
40
channe
ls
-20
-19
80
channe
ls
-23
-22
40
channe
ls
80
channe
ls
-3
Noise figure (dB)
5.5
6.0
Nominal gain (dB)
20
23
Gain response time on
< 10
< 10
Nominal singlewavelength input

optical power (dBm)
Nominal singlewavelength output

optical power (dBm)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1380

System
Parameter

Compensation Boards
Value
TN11OBU101
TN11OBU103
Channel gain (dB)
201.5
231.5
Gain flatness (dB)
2.0
2.0
Input reflectance (dB)
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance (dB)
< -40
< -40
Pump leakage at input (dBm)
< -30
< -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance

at input (dB)
-27
-27
Maximum reflectance tolerance

at output (dB)
-27
-27
Maximum total output optical

power (dBm)
16
20
Multi-channel gain slope

(dB/dB)
2.0
2.0
0.5
0.5
VI-VO (dB)
Inhere
nt
inserti
on loss
1.5
Dyna
mic
attenua
tion
range
20
adding/dropping of channels
(ms)
Adjustment accuracy (dB)


The mechanical specifications of the OBU1 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1381

System

Compensation Boards
The maximum power consumption of the TN11OBU101 at room temperature (25C) is

16 W.

13 W.
18.7 OBU2
technical specifications of the TN12OBU2 (optical booster amplifier board).

The OBU2 is available in the following functional version: TN12.
18.7.2 Application
OBU2 boards are optical booster amplifier boards, and they are available in only one type:
OBU205.
Figure 18-29 shows the position of OBU2 boards in an optical transmission system.
Figure 1.1 Position of OBU2 boards in an optical transmission system
Transmitting
Transmitting
Receiving
OBU2
OBU2
Receiving

The OBU2 supports the online optical performance monitoring function, gain lock, transient
control, and other functions.
Table 18-33 provides the functions and features of the OBU2.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the OBU2
Function and
Feature
OBU2
Basic functions
Amplifies a maximum of 40 channels of optical signals with the

channel spacing of 100 GHz at the same time.
Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
Typical gain
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.

Copyright Huawei
1382

System

Compensation Boards
Function and
Feature
OBU2
Online optical
performance
monitoring
function

interruption.
Gain lock function
The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. When one or
more channels are added or dropped, or optical signals of certain
channels fluctuate, the signal gain of other channels is not affected.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path to realize the smooth upgrading and
expansion.
Performance
events and alarms
monitoring
Checks and reports the optical power.

Controls the temperature of the pump laser.
Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, cooling current,
temperature of the pump laser, and ambient temperature of the board.
The OBU2 is available in only one type: OBU205.

The OBU2 consists of the EDFA optical module, splitter, driving and detecting module,
Figure 18-30 shows the functional block diagram of the OBU2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1383

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the OBU2

Splitter
EDFA optical module
IN
Driving
current
VO
OUT
MON
VOA
Detect the pump

current and
temperature.
PIN
VI
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Voltages required
by the board
Fuse
DC power provided
by the backplane
Backplane
(controlled by the
SCC
SCC)

One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the
EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and
locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT
interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station.
After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO
interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
1.1.1.1.1590 EDFA Optical Module

The EDFA optical module amplifies the input optical signals. The EDFA optical module
adopts the automatic gain control technology. Hence, the gain of each operating wavelength
signal can remain in the allowed range.
1.1.1.1.1591 Splitter
The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the EDFA optical module into two
channels of signals of different power. One channel of signals is transmitted through the OUT
interface to the main optical path. The other channel of signals is transmitted to the MON
interface for spectrum detection and supervising.
The power of the MON interface is 1/99 of the power of the OUT interface. That is, the power
of the MON interface is 20 dB less than the power of the OUT interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1384

System

Compensation Boards
1.1.1.1.1592 Driving and detecting module
1.1.1.1.1593 Communication and control Module
The communication and control module controls and monitors the functional modules of
the board, and manages the communication.
The communication and control module collects the alarms, performance events,
working status, voltage detection information, and other information of each functional
module of the board, and reports the collected information to the SCC.
The communication and control module receives the commands issued by the SCC to
control and coordinate the operation of each functional module.
1.1.1.1.1594 Power supply module

Converts the DC power provided by the backplane into the power required by each module of
the board.
18.7.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the OBU2 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 18-31 shows the appearance of the front panel of the OBU2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1385

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the OBU2
OBU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE
LASERRADIATION
DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH
NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS
MO
N
OUT
I
N
V
O
V
I
OBU2
The front panel of the OBU2 has five optical interfaces. Table 18-34 describes the types and
usage of the optical interfaces of the OBU2.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1386

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Optical interfaces of the OBU2

Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals to be amplified.
OUT
LC
Transmits the amplified multiplexed signals.
MON
LC
Is connected to the test instrument to monitor the inservice performance.
VO
LC
Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN

interface.
VI
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal to be adjusted.
18.7.6 Valid Slots

An OBU2 board occupies two slots and can be installed in slots 2-8 and 12-17 in a subrack.
Although an OBU2 board occupies two adjacent slots, the slot ID shown on the NMS is the ID of the
right-side slot. This is because the connector at the rear of the OBU2 board fits into the backplane
through the right-side slot only.
18.7.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the OBU2 contains six characters, which indicate the gain and maximum
nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the OBU2.
Table 18-35 describes the feature code of the OBU2.
Figure 1.2 Feature code of the OBU2
Feature Code
Indication
Description
The first character
Is always "G".

characters
Gain
Indicates the gain.
The fourth character
Is always "I".
The fifth and sixth

characters
Maximum nominal input

optical power
Indicates the maximum

nominal input optical power.
Consider the TN12OBU2 whose feature code is "G23I00" as an example. "G23I00" indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

You can set the parameters for the OBU2 by using the U2000.
You can set the following parameters for the OBU2 by using the U2000:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1387

System
Threshold of input power loss
Laser status
Gain
Nominal gain upper threshold
Nominal gain lower threshold
Rated optical power
Configure band
Configure working band parity
Actual band
Actual working band parity

Compensation Boards

The technical specifications of the OBU2 include the parameters specified for optical

Table 18-36 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OBU2.
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OBU2
Parameter
Value
OBU205
1529 to 1561
Nominal input power range (dBm)
-24 to 0
Input power range per channel

(dBm)
Nominal single-wavelength input

optical power (dBm)
Nominal single-wavelength output

optical power (dBm)
40
channels
-24 to -16
80
channels
-24 to -19
40
channels
-16
80
channels
-19
40
channels
80
channels
Noise figure (dB)
7.0
Nominal gain (dB)
23
Gain response time on adding/dropping of
< 10
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1388

System

Compensation Boards
Parameter
Value
OBU205
channels (ms)
Channel gain (dB)
231.5
Gain flatness (dB)
2.0
Input reflectance (dB)
< -40
Output reflectance (dB)
< -40
Pump leakage at input (dBm)
< -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at input (dB)
-27
Maximum reflectance tolerance at output (dB)
-27
Maximum total output optical power (dBm)
23
Multi-channel gain slope (dB/dB)
2.0
0.5
VI-VO (dB)
Adjustment accuracy (dB)
Inherent
insertion
loss
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
20


The mechanical specifications of the OBU2 are as follows:
Weight (kg): 1.6
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

14 W.

Copyright Huawei
1389

System

Compensation Boards
18.8 DCU
technical specifications of the DCU (dispersion compensation board).

The DCU is available in the following functional versions: N1 and N2. The difference
between the two versions is with regard to the insertion attenuation and compensation.
Table 18-37 describes the versions of the DCU.
Figure 1.1 Versions of the DCU
Item
Description
Functional versions
The DCU is available in two functional versions, namely, N1 and

N2.
Commonness
The working principle of the N1DCU is the same as the working

principle of the N2DCU.
Differences
The insertion loss of the N2DCU is 3 to 5 dB less than the insertion

loss of the N1DCU.
In the case of the N1DCU, two compensation modes are available,
namely, 60 km and 80 km. In the case of the N2DCU, three
compensation modes are available, namely, 40 km, 60 km, and 80
km.
Substitution
Use attenuators to prevent overloaded optical power when you use

the N2DCU to substitute for the N1DCU.
18.8.2 Application
The DCU is a dispersion compensation board. The DCU compensates for the dispersion that
is accumulated in the fiber during the transmission of the optical signals in the 10 Gbit/s
system, and compresses optical signal pulse. In this manner, the optical signals that are
transmitted can be restored. In addition, the DCU can realize long-haul optical transmission
when it works with an optical amplifier board.
During the long-haul transmission (more than 80 km) of 10 Gbit/s signals, the pulse width of
the optical signals is expanded and the signals are severely distorted due to the impact of
dispersion. As a result, the optical signals cannot be normally received by the optical receiver.
Therefore, the DCU is required to compensate for the dispersion. Figure 18-32 shows the
position of the DCU in an optical transmission system.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1390

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Position of the DCU in an optical transmission system

Pulse broadening Pulse compression
PA
Optical
receiver
Optical
transmitter
BA
DCU
1550.12 nm
1550.12 nm
The operating wavelength of the chirp grating of the DCU is 1550.12 nm. Therefore, the central
wavelength of the optical signals transmitted by the optical interface board on the opposite end must also
be 1550.12 nm. Otherwise, the dispersion of the optical signals cannot be compensated for and the
insertion loss is high. As a result, no optical signals can be transmitted.

The DCU can compensate for the dispersion for a maximum of two channels of optical
signals. The DCU can be used with the BA and PA.
Table 18-38 provides the functions and features of the DCU.
Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the DCU
Function
and Feature
N1DCU
N2DCU
Basic
functions
Compensates for the dispersion of a

maximum of two channels of
optical signals at the same time.
Supports the compensated
dispersion of 1020 ps/nm (for the
dispersion caused by the 60 km
G.652 optical fiber), 1360 ps/nm
(for the dispersion caused by the 80
km G.652 optical fiber), or any
combination.
Compensates for the dispersion of a

maximum of two channels of optical
signals at the same time. Supports
the compensated dispersion of 680
ps/nm (for the dispersion caused by
the 40 km G.652 optical fiber), 1020
the 60 km G.652 optical fiber), 1360
the 80 km G.652 optical fiber), or
any combination.
Dispersion
compensatio
n method
Compensates for the dispersion accumulated during the transmission by

using the chirp grating and suppresses the pulse signals to restore the
optical signals.
Long haul
transmission
with optical
regeneration
Realizes long haul transmission with optical regeneration when working

with the BA and PA.

The DCU consists of the dispersion compensation module.
Figure 18-33 shows the functional block diagram of the DCU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1391

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the DCU

IN
OUT
module
The dispersion compensation module is used behind the PA to provide optical signals of
required compensation and path penalty.
18.8.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the DCU has interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Figure 18-34 shows the appearance of the front panel of the one-interface DCU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1392

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the one-interface DCU
DCU
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
DCU
Figure 18-35 shows the appearance of the front panel of the two-interface DCU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1393

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.2 Front panel of the two-interface DCU
DCU
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT2 IN2
DCU
The front panel of the one-interface DCU has one optical interface. The optical interface
transmits and receives one channel of optical signals.
The front panel of the two-interface DCU has two optical interfaces. The optical interfaces
transmit and receive two channels of optical signals.
If the front panel of the one-interface DCU has two LC optical interfaces, only the upper
optical interface (IN1/OUT1) is valid. In the case of the DCU whose front panel has two LC
optical interfaces, determine whether the DCU is a one-interface DCU or a two-interface
DCU according to 18.8.7 Feature Code.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1394

System

Compensation Boards
Table 18-39 describes the type and usage of the optical interface of the one-interface DCU.
Figure 1.1 Optical interface of the one-interface DCU
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN
LC
OUT
LC
Table 18-40 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the two-interface DCU.
Figure 1.2 Optical interfaces of the two-interface DCU
Interface
Type of
Interface
Usage
IN1
LC
Receives the first channel of optical signals.
OUT1
LC
Transmits the first channel of optical signals.
IN2
LC
Receives the second channel of optical signals.
OUT2
LC
Transmits the second channel of optical signals.
18.8.6 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the DCU vary with the cross-connect capacity and subrack of the OptiX
OSN equipment.
Slot bandwidth
Board version
The slots valid for the DCU are as follows:
When the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s, the DCU can be installed in slots 18 and
18.8.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the DCU indicates the compensated dispersion for the optical signals.
Table 18-41 provides the relationship between the feature code of the DCU and the
compensated dispersion.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1395

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.3 Relationship between the feature code of the DCU and the compensated dispersion
Board
Feature Code
Compensated Dispersion
SSN1DCU01
01
Compensated dispersion for a single channel: 60

km
SSN1DCU02
02

km
SSN1DCU03
03
Compensated dispersion for dual channels: 60

km/60 km
SSN1DCU04
04

km/80 km
SSN1DCU05
05

km/80 km
SSN2DCU01
01

km
SSN2DCU02
02

km
SSN2DCU03
03

km
SSN2DCU04
04

km/40 km
SSN2DCU05
05

km/60 km
SSN2DCU06
06

km/80 km
SSN2DCU07
07

km/60 km
SSN2DCU08
08

km/80 km
SSN2DCU09
09

km/80 km

The technical specifications of the DCU include the parameters specified for optical

Table 18-42 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the DCU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1396

System

Compensation Boards
Figure 1.1 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the DCU
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Central wavelength
(nm)
1550.120.05
-0.5 dB bandwidth
(nm)
> 0.4
Compensated
dispersion (ps/nm)
N1DCU: 1020 (60 km); 1360 (80 km)
Insertion loss (dB)
Less than 8.3 dB in the case of the N1DCU and less than 3 dB in
the case of the N2DCU
N2DCU: 680 (40 km); 1020 (60 km); 1360 (80 km)


The mechanical specifications of the DCU are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.4

The maximum power consumption of the DCU at room temperature (25C) is 0 W.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1397

System
19 Power Boards
19
Power Boards
About This Chapter

This topic describes the power boards such as the UPM, PIU and PIUA.
19.1 UPM
technical specifications of the UPM (uninterruptible power module).
19.2 PIU
technical specifications of the PIU (power interface board).
19.3 PIUA
technical specifications of the PIUA (power interface board).
19.4 PIUB
The PIUB board is the power interface unit between the DC power distribution box and each
board on the subrack. This section describes the versions, functions, working principle, front
panel, configuration, and technical specifications of the PIUB board.
19.1 UPM
technical specifications of the UPM (uninterruptible power module).

None.
19.1.2 Application
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110
V/220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The
UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1398

System
19 Power Boards
requires batteries.
Figure 19-1 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series.
Figure 1.1 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series
OptiX OSN equipment
110 V/220 V
Backplane
-48 V
UPM
PIU
Board A
-48 V
PIU
Board B
-48 V
Table 19-1 shows different mapping policies of UPM.

Figure 1.1 Mapping policies of UPM on the OptiX OSN 3500
Type of Subrack
Mapping PDU
Mapping PIU
Mapping UPM
General OptiX OSN

3500 subrack
N1PDU, DPD100-28 PDU
N1PIU, N1PIUA
EPS75-4815AF
Enhanced OptiX
OSN 3500 subrack
(1100 W)
N1PDU, DPD100-28 PDU
N1PIUA
EPS75-4815AF
OptiX OSN 3500

type III subrack
(2300 W)
TN51PDU, DPD638-8 PDU
N1PIUB
EPS75-4815AF

The UPM is a special power supply system and is numbered EPS75-4815AF. The UPM can
directly convert 110 V/220 V AC power into 48 V DC power that the transmission
equipment requires. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide 48 V
DC power for the equipment or telecom carriers who require storage batteries.
The UPM consists of the rectifier module, monitoring module, and DC/AC power distribution
frame. The rectifier module and monitoring module are hot-swappable so that faulty modules
can be replaced without the system being shut down.
The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 1700 W. The EPS75-4815AF
power system is 3U high. Figure 19-2 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power
system.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1399

System
19 Power Boards
Figure 1.1 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system
The UPM power box can be installed in an ETSI cabinet.

The storage batteries of the UPM work with one EPS75-4815AF power system. When the
external AC power system supplies power normally, the batteries store power. When the 110
V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To
supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment, only one power system is required to be
connected to the batteries.
The full configuration of an EPS75-4815AF power system includes five rectifier modules and
one monitoring module.
The storage batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF power system. They need to be configured
separately. If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the
equipment cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
Table 19-2 provide the functions and features of the UPM.

Figure 1.2 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Function and
Feature
EPS75-4815AF
Hot-swappable
function
The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When

you replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can
still work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is
improved.
Storage battery
protection function
The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When

the mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment
automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the
equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a
capacity of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.
Lightning-proof
function
The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof

protector. The rectifier module can bear 5 lightning-simulated
surges with an 8/20 s current waveform at the amplitude of 5 kA.
When the lightning current enters the rectifier module along with
the power cable, install category-C and category-B light arresters
before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system to
prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1400

System
Function and
Feature
19 Power Boards
EPS75-4815AF
damaging the rectifier module.

The UPM is fed by one 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts
the input power into 48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch.
The UPM consists of the rectifier module and the monitoring module. Figure 19-3 shows the
block diagram of the UPM.
Figure 1.1 Block diagram of the UPM
110 V/220 V AC
Rectifier
module
48 V DC
PIU
Monitoring
module
System control unit
1.1.1.1.1608 Rectifier Module

The rectifier module converts the 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply into 48 V DC
voltage required by the transmission equipment.
1.1.1.1.1609 Monitoring Module

When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings.
The monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains
supply fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the
monitoring module reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the
battery voltage starts to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring
module reports the DC undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery
group enables the power-off protection function to interrupt the connection between the
battery group and the equipment. As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1401

System
19 Power Boards
19.1.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the UPM has indicators and ports of many types.

Figure 19-4 shows the front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system (subject to the UPM
onsite).
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1
5 6
14
11
12
10
13
15
1. Control circuit breaker of

the AC input (30 A)

the battery branch (80 A)

load 1 (10 A)

load 2 (30 A)

load 3 (40 A)

load 4 (40 A)
7. AC phase line terminal
8. AC zero line terminal
9. Negative 48 V terminal of
the battery branch
10. Negative 48 V terminal

of the load branch
11. Positive 48 V terminal

of the battery branch
12. Positive 48 V terminal of

the load branch
13. Connecting terminal of

the PGND cable
14. DB44 signal port
15. Communication port

(COM)
1.1.1.1.1611 Indicators of the EPS75-4815AF

The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators:
Running status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) one color (yellow)
Faulty state indicator (FAULT) one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators:
Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1402

System
19 Power Boards
1.1.1.1.1612 Ports of the EPS75-4815AF Power System

The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has six ports. Table 19-3 describes the types and usage
of these ports.
Figure 1.1 Ports of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Port
Type
Usage
Power input port
Power port
"7" and "8" indicate the AC mains input

terminals, which receive 110 V/220 V AC
power.
Power output port
Power port
The power output ports are in the lower left

corner on the front panel of the UPM. The
terminals indicated by "9" and "11" form a
battery port, through which the power system
is connected to the battery input socket at the
back of the storage battery box through a
battery cable. "10" and "12" indicate the output
ports of four loads. The output ports can
supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment by
using power cables.
Connecting
terminal of the
PGND cable
Power port
The UPM is grounded through the cabinet.
DB44 signal port
DB44
The backplane of the subrack can be connected

to the sensor transfer box (an optional device)
through the DB44 signal port and to the
monitoring module through the 96-pin DIN
connector. In addition, the sensor transfer box
can be connected to multiple sensors. As a
result, the monitoring function is extended.
Communication
port (COM)
RJ-45
Reserved
Switch button
Button
The switch buttons are on the left of the UPM,

as shown in Figure 19-4. "1" indicates the
control circuit breaker of the AC input (30 A),
which enables and disables the input of the AC
mains supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate
the load control switches, which enable and
disable the load output.
Table 19-4 provides the definition of DB44 signal pins.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1403

System
19 Power Boards
Figure 1.2 Definition of DB44 signal pins

Pin Diagram
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Pin
Definitio
n
Function
Pin
Definiti
on
Function
24 V
Auxiliary power
output
23
SMOK
E
Smoke sensor
12 V
Auxiliary power
output
24
WATER
Water damage detection
12 V
Auxiliary power
output
25
DOOR
Door status switch (DSS)

signal detection
GND
Signal ground
26
WIRE
Distribution frame
connection
GND
Signal ground
27
JK1+
Positive terminal of dry

contact 1
SIM1
Voltage
detection of the
first battery pack
28
JK1-
Negative terminal of dry

contact 1
SIM2
Voltage
detection of the
second battery
pack
29
JK2+
Positive terminal of dry

contact 2
30
JK2-
Negative terminal of dry

contact 2
31
CONT1
O+
Positive terminal for output

control of optical coupler 1
10
GND
Signal ground
32
CONT1
O-
Negative terminal for output

11
VHUM
Ambient
humidity
measurement
33
CONT2
O+
Positive terminal for output

12
VBTEM
1
Battery
temperature
measurement 1
34
CONT2
O-
Negative terminal for output

13
VBTEM
2
Battery
temperature
measurement 2
35
FANCT
R1+
Positive terminal for fan

rotation control
14
VTEM1
Ambient
temperature
measurement 1
36
FANCT
R1-
Negative terminal for fan

rotation control
15
VTEM2
Ambient
temperature
measurement 2
37
JKM1+
Positive terminal for a surge

protector failure alarm
16
JTD1
Backup 1
38
JKM1-
Negative terminal for a surge

Copyright Huawei
1404

System
Pin Diagram
Pin
Definitio
n
Function
19 Power Boards
Pin
Definiti
on
Function
protector failure alarm
17
JTD2
Backup 2
39
JKM2+
Positive terminal for an AC

power-off alarm
18
JTD3
Backup 3
40
JKM2-
Negative terminal for an AC

power-off alarm
19
JTD4
Backup 4
41
JKM3+
Positive terminal for a

battery undervoltage alarm
20
JTD5
Backup 5
42
JKM3-
Negative terminal for a

battery undervoltage alarm
21
JTD6
Backup 6
43
JKM4+
Positive terminal for power

supply system failure
22
JTD7
Backup 7
44
JKM4-
Negative terminal for power

supply system failure
19.1.6 Valid Slots

The UPM is case shaped. Hence, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.

The technical specifications of the UPM include the power parameters and mechanical
specifications.
The equipment supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an uninterrupted power
modules (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into -48 V DC, and to provide
power supply for the equipment.
The type of UPM supported by the OptiX OSN equipment is EPS75-4815AF. If the 110
V/220 V AC power fails, the storage battery can provide power supply for 4 hours.
1.1.1.1.1613 Power Parameters

Table 19-5 lists the power parameters of the UPM.
Figure 1.1 Power parameters of the EPS75-4815AF
Parameter
Value
Voltage range of
the AC input
90-290 V AC
AC input
One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz
Rated input current
28 A
Output nominal
voltage
53.50.5 V
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1405

System
Parameter
Value
Rated output
current
DC output branches
19 Power Boards
Load MCB 1: 10 A
Load MCB 2: 3 0A
Load MCB 3: 40 A
Load MCB 4: 40 A
Battery MCB: 80 A
Total output DC current
37.53 A to 753 A
Regulated voltage
precision
1%
Non-balance of
load sharing
5% (50%-100% load)
Rated efficiency of
the integrated
equipment
89%
Power factor
0.99 (nominal input or output)
Peak-to-peak noise
voltage
200mV (within the range of 20 MHz)
Electrical network
adjustment rate
0.1%
Lightning
protection
performance
When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated
lightning surge current whose waveform is 8/20s and amplitude is 5
kA for five times in both directions. The interval between two surges
must not be less than one minute. If the lightning surge current is
higher than the preceding indexes, the UPM may be damaged and
cannot work normally.
Cooling method
The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.

The mechanical specifications of the EPS75-4815AF are as follows:
Dimensions of the UPM (mm): 133mm (W) x 255mm (D) x 436mm (H)
Weight: 15 kg
19.2 PIU
technical specifications of the PIU (power interface board).

The PIU is available in one functional version, namely, N1. The N1PIU is discontinued.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1406

System
19 Power Boards
19.2.2 Application
The PIU is a power interface board that is mainly used to receive the power supply for the
OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 19-5 shows the application of the PIU on the OptiX OSN equipment series.
Figure 1.1 Application of the PIU on the OptiX OSN equipment series
OptiX OSN equipment
-48 V
PIU
Backplane
-48 V
PIU
Board A
Board B
-48 V
-48 V

The PIU is used to receive the power supply and to provide the lightning protection function
and filtering function.
Table 19-6 provides the functions and features of the PIU.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the PIU
Function and
Feature
PIU
Lightning
protection function
Provides the lightning protection function and reports the alarm that
indicates a surge protection failure.
Filtering function
Enhances the electromagnetic compatibility of the system by filtering

the power supply interface and shielding the structure of the board.
Power supply
interface
Provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as the

COA.
Power supply of
the FAN
Provides the FAN with normal working voltages.
Alarm monitoring
Reports the board in-position alarm.
Power supply
Supports the 1+1 hot backup. Any one PIU can supply power to an
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1407

System
Function and
Feature
PIU
backup
entire subrack.
19 Power Boards
One PIU can supply power to an entire subrack.

The PIU consists of the power access unit, filtering unit, and unit that detects whether the
lightning-proof unit fails.
Figure 19-6 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PIU
COA power supply unit
Power
access
unit
Unit that detects

whether the
lightning-proof
unit f ails
Filtering
unit
Filtering
unit
Backplane
Alarm indicating a
lightning-proof unit f ailure
Sy stem controlunit
1.1.1.1.1615 Power Access Unit

This unit receives the 48 V or 60 V power supply for the system.
1.1.1.1.1616 Unit That Detects Whether the Lightning-Proof Unit Fails

This unit protects the equipment from overcurrent and lightning and reports the alarm that
indicates its failure to the SCC unit.
1.1.1.1.1617 Filtering Unit

This unit filters the electromagnetic interference signals to ensure that the equipment operates
stably.
19.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PIU has power interfaces.

Figure 19-7 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1408

System
19 Power Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PIU
PIU
PWR
PS1
PS2
PIU
The front panel of the PIU has two power interfaces. Table 19-7 describes the types and usage
of the interfaces of the PIU.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the PIU
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
PWR
3V3 terminal
Receives the 48 V power supply.
PS1/PS2
Four-phase socket
Provides the 50 W power output and can supply

power to the COA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1409

System
19 Power Boards
19.2.6 Valid Slots

The PIU can be installed in slots 27 and 28 in the subrack.

The technical specifications of the PIU include the mechanical specifications, power
consumption, input voltage, and fuse.

The mechanical specifications of the PIU are as follows:
Weight: 1.2 kg

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the PIU is 8W.
1.1.1.1.1622 Input Voltage

The input voltage range of the PIU is as follows:
If the standard voltage of the input power is -48 V, the power voltage ranges from -38.4
V to -57.6 V.
If the standard voltage of the input power is -60 V, the power voltage ranges from -48 V
to -72 V.
1.1.1.1.1623 Fuse
The main loop fuse F7 of the PIU is 250 V-20 A-0.00355 ohms.
19.3 PIUA
technical specifications of the PIUA (power interface board).

The PIUA is available in one functional version, namely, N1.
19.3.2 Application
The PIUA is a power interface board that is mainly used to receive the power supply for the
Figure 19-8 shows the application of the PIUA on the OptiX OSN equipment series.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1410

System
19 Power Boards
Figure 1.1 Application of the PIUA on the OptiX OSN equipment series
OptiX OSN equipment
-48 V
PIUA
Backplane
-48 V
PIUA
Board A
Board B
-48 V
-48 V

The PIUA is used to receive the power supply and to provide the lightning protection function
and filtering function.
Table 19-8 provides the functions and features of the PIUA.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the PIUA
Function and
Feature
PIUA
Lightning
protection function
Filtering function

Power supply
interface
Provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as the

COA and hub.
Alarm monitoring
Power supply
backup
Supports the 1+1 hot backup. Any one PIUA can supply power to the
entire subrack.

The PIUA consists of the power access unit, filtering unit, and unit that detects whether the
lightning-proof unit fails.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1411

System
19 Power Boards
Figure 19-9 shows the functional block diagram of the PIUA.

Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PIUA
Power
access
unit
Unit that detects

whether the lightningproof unit fails
Filtering
unit
Backplane
Alarm indicating a
lightning-proofunitfailure
System control unit
1.1.1.1.1624 Power Access Unit

This unit receives the 48 V or 60 V power supply for the system.
1.1.1.1.1625 Unit That Detects Whether the Lightning-Proof Unit Fails

This unit protects the equipment from overcurrent and lightning and reports the alarm that
indicates a lightning-proof unit failure to the SCC unit.

This unit filters the electromagnetic interference signals to ensure that the equipment can
operate stably.
19.3.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PIUA has indicators and power interfaces.

Figure 19-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIUA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1412

System
19 Power Boards
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PIUA
PIUA
POWER
NEG(-)
PWR
RTN(+)
PS1
RTN(+)
NEG(-)
PS2
RTN(+)
NEG(-)
PIUA
The front panel of the board has a power supply indicator (POWER). The POWER indicator
is green when it is on.
The front panel of the PIUA has two power interfaces. Table 19-9 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the PIUA.
Figure 1.1 Interfaces of the PIUA
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
PWR
3V3 terminal
Receives the 48 V power supply.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1413

System
19 Power Boards
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
PS1/PS2
Four-phase socket
Provides the 50 W power output and can supply

power to the COA.
19.3.6 Valid Slots

The PIUA can be installed in slots 27 and 28 in the subrack.

The technical specifications of the PIUA include the mechanical specifications, power
consumption, input voltage, and the fuse.

The mechanical specifications of the PIUA are as follows:
Weight: 0.5 kg

At room temperature (25C), the maximum power consumption of the PIUA is 3 W.

The input voltage range of the PIUA is as follows:
V to -57.6 V.
If the standard voltage of the input power is -60 V, the power voltage ranges from -48V
to -72 V.
1.1.1.1.1633 Fuse
The main loop fuse of the PIUA is 250 V-32 A-0.00355 ohms.
19.4 PIUB
The PIUB board is the power interface unit between the DC power distribution box and each
board on the subrack. This section describes the versions, functions, working principle, front
panel, configuration, and technical specifications of the PIUB board.

The PIUB is available in one functional version, namely, N1. The PIUB board only can be
used on a type III subrack (2300 W).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1414

System
19 Power Boards
19.4.2 Application
The PIUB board is a power interface board that provides power supply for the OptiX OSN
3500.
Figure 19-11 shows the application of the PIUB board in the OptiX OSN system.
Figure 1.1 Application of the PIUB board in the OptiX OSN system
OptiX OSN equipment
-48 V
PIU
Backplane
-48 V
PIU
Board A
Board B
-48 V
-48 V

The PIUB is a power interface board that provides power supply, lightning protection, and
filtering functions.
Table 19-10 provides the functions and features of the PIUB board.
Figure 1.1 Functions and features of the PIUB board
Functions and
Features
Description
Lightning
protection function
Filtering function

Power supply
interface
Provides two 50 W power interfaces for external units such as the

COA.
Alarm monitoring
Power supply
backup
Supports 1+1 hot backup. Any one PIUB can supply power to an
entire subrack.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1415

System
19 Power Boards

The PIUB board consists of the filtering unit, protection unit, protection circuit failure
detecting unit, and power detecting unit.
Figure 19-12 shows the functional block diagram of the PIUB.
Figure 1.1 Functional block diagram of the PIUB
COA power supply interface
COA
NEG(-)
NEG(-)
Protection
unit
Filtering
unit
RTN(+)
RTN(+)
Protection
circuit failure
detecting unit
System control unit
Power
detecting
unit
LED
indication

This unit filters the electromagnetic interference signals to ensure that the equipment operates
stably.
1.1.1.1.1635 Protection Unit

This unit protects the equipment from overcurrent and lightning.
1.1.1.1.1636 Protection Circuit Failure Detecting Unit

This unit monitors the protection unit and reports the alarm that indicates a protection unit
failure to the SCC unit.
1.1.1.1.1637 Power Detecting Unit

This unit checks whether the input power supply is valid, and uses the indicator to indicate the
status of the input power supply.
19.4.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the PIUB has indicators and power interfaces.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1416

System
19 Power Boards

Figure 19-13 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIUB board.
Figure 1.1 Front panel of the PIUB
PIUB
POWER
RTN(+)
NEG(-)
PS1
RTN(+)
NEG(-)
PS2
RTN(+)
NEG(-)
PIUB
The front panel of the board has a power supply indicator (POWER). The POWER indicator
is green when it is on.
The front panel of the PIUB board has two power interfaces. Table 19-11 provides the types
and usage of the power interfaces of the PIUB board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1417

System
19 Power Boards
Figure 1.1 Description of the interfaces on the PIUB board

Interface
Silkscreen
Type of
Interface
Usage
PWR
RTN(+),
NEG(-)
Dual-OT
terminal
Provides -48 V power input.
PWS
PS1, PS2
Four-phase
socket
Provides two 50 W power outputs for the

COA.
Table 19-12 provides the pin description of the PS1 and PS2 interfaces on the PIUB board.
Figure 1.2 Pin description of the PWS interfaces on the PIUB board
Front View
4
2
Pin
Usage
48 V
48 V
3
4
3
1
Grounding
Not defined
19.4.6 Valid Slots

The PIUB board can be installed in slots 27 and 28 on the subrack.

The technical specifications of the PIUB board include the mechanical specifications, power
consumption, input voltage.

The mechanical specifications of the PIUB are as follows:
Weight (kg): 0.6

The maximum power consumption of the PIUB at room temperature (25C) is 6 W.

The input voltage range of the PIUB is as follows:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1418

System
19 Power Boards
V to -57.6 V.
If the standard voltage of the input power is -60 V, the power voltage ranges from -48 V
to -72 V.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1419

System
20
20 Pluggable Optical Module
Pluggable Optical Module
About This Chapter

Certain boards on the OptiX OSN equipment supports the small form-factor pluggable (SFP),
enhanced small form-factor pluggable (eSFP), and 10 Gigabit small form-factor pluggable
(XFP) optical modules. When you need to adjust the type of accessed services or replace such
a faulty optical module, you just need to directly replace the pluggable optical module without
replacing its board.
20.1 Overview
The SFP/eSFP is a small form-factor pluggable optical transceiver. It is mainly used for SDH
optical communication and Ethernet data communication. The XFP is a 10-Gigabit small
form-factor pluggable optical transceiver. It is mainly for SDH optical communication,
GE/10GE data communication, and DWDM communication.
20.2 SFP/eSFP/SFP+
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the
SFP/eSFP optical modules.
20.3 XFP
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the XFP
optical modules.
20.4 CWDM/DWDM
CWDM/DWDM optical modules.
20.1 Overview
The SFP/eSFP is a small form-factor pluggable optical transceiver. It is mainly used for SDH
optical communication and Ethernet data communication. The XFP is a 10-Gigabit small
form-factor pluggable optical transceiver. It is mainly for SDH optical communication,
GE/10GE data communication, and DWDM communication.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1420

System
1.1.1.1.1644 Appearance
Figure 20-1 shows the appearances of the SFP and eSFP optical modules, and Figure 20-2
shows the appearance of the XFP optical module.
Figure 1.1 SFP/eSFP optical module
The dimensions of the SFP and eSFP optical modules are 13.4 mm (W) x 56.5 mm (D) x 8.5
mm (H).
Figure 1.2 XFP optical module
The dimensions of the XFP optical module are 18.3 mm (W) x 78 mm (D) x 8.5 mm (H).
1.1.1.1.1645 BOM
The BOM of a pluggable optical module is used to identify different types of optical modules.
The BOM can be marked on a label that is attached to each pluggable optical module.
Figure 20-3 shows the label of a pluggable optical module.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1421

System
Figure 1.3 Label of a pluggable optical module
You can check the specifications of an optical module in this manual according to the BOM of the
optical module.
20.2 SFP/eSFP/SFP+
SFP/eSFP optical modules.
Table 20-1 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the SFP/eSFP optical modules.
Figure 1.1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the SFP/eSFP optical modules
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
340605
88
2 Mbit/s eSFP
optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP,

1310 nm, 2.048 Mb/s, 15
dBm, 8 dBm, 26 dBm, LC,
SM, 2 km
N1PFL1
340602
87
155 Mbit/s SFP

optical module
Optical transceiver, SFP,

1310 nm, STM1, -19 to -14
dBm, -30 dBm, LC, MM, 2
km
N1ADQ1, N1EFF8,
N1IDQ1, N1MST4,
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A,
N1IDQ1A, N1EFF8A,
N1PEFF8, R1PEF4F
340602
76
155 Mbit/s eSFP

optical module

1310 nm, STM1, -15 to -8
dBm, -31 dBm, LC, SM, 15
km
N1OU08, N1SL1, N2SL1,

N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1,
R1SLQ1, R1SL1, N1ADQ1,
N1EFF8, N1IDQ1, N1SLT1,
N2SLO1, N1SL1A,
N1SLQ1A, N1IDQ1A,
N3SLO1, R3SL1, R3SLQ1,
N1EFF8A, R1PCXLN,
N1CQ1, N1PEFF8,
R1PEF4F, N1EDQ41,
TNN1CO1, TNN1AFO1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Specifications
Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Wavelength-RateMinimum Output Optical
Power-Maximum Output
Optical Power-Receiver
Sensitivity-Optical
Interface Type-Optical
Fiber Type-Transmission
Distance)

Copyright Huawei
1422

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Specifications
Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Sensitivity-Optical
Distance)
340602
81

1310 nm, STM1, -5 to 0
km
N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SLQ1,

N2SLQ1, N1ADQ1,
N1IDQ1, N2SLO1,
N1SL1A, N1SLQ1A,
N3SLO1, R1SL1, R3SL1,
R1SLQ1, R3SLQ1,
N1SLT1, R1PCXLN,
N1PEFF8, R1PEF4F,
N1EDQ41, TNN1CO1,
TNN1AFO1
340602
82

1550 nm, STM1, -5 to 0
km
N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SLQ1,

N2SLQ1, R1SLQ1, R1SL1,
N1ADQ1, N1IDQ1,
N1SL1A, N1SLQ1A,
N3SLO1, R3SL1, R3SLQ1,
N1SLT1, N1PEFF8,
R1PEF4F, N1EDQ41,
TNN1CO1, TNN1AFO1

1310 nm, STM4, -15 to -8
km
N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SL4A,

N1SLD4, N2SLD4,
N1SLD4A, N1SLQ4,
N2SLQ4, N1SLQ4A,
R1PCXLN, N1EDQ41,
R1SL4, R3SL4, R1SLD4,
R3SLD4, MST4
340602
80

1310 nm, STM4, -3 to 2
km
N2SLQ4, N2SL4, N1SL4,

N1SLD4, N2SLD4,
N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, R1SL4,
R1SLD4, N1ADL4,
N1IDL4, N1MST4,
N1SL4A, N1SLD4A,
N1SLQ4A, R3SL4,
R3SLD4, R1PCXLN,
N1EDQ41
340602
84

1550 nm, STM4, -3 to
2dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SLD4,

N2SLD4, N1SLQ4,
N2SLQ4, R1SL4, R1SLD4,
N1ADL4, N1IDL4,
N1SL4A, N1SLD4A,
N1SLQ4A, N1SL4A,
340602
77
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
622 Mbit/s eSFP

optical module

Copyright Huawei
1423

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Specifications
Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Sensitivity-Optical
Distance)
N1SLD4A, N1SLQ4A,
R3SL4, R3SLD4,
R1PCXLN, N1EDQ41
340602
85

1550 nm, STM4, -3 to +2
dBm, -36 dBm, LC, SM,
100 km
N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SL4A,

N1SLD4, N2SLD4,
N1SLD4A, N2SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A, R1SL4, R3SL4,
R1SLD4, R3SLD4

1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 to
-3 dBm, -20 dBm, LC, SM,
10 km
N2EGS2, N1EGT2,
N2EGR2, N2EMR0,
N1EGS4, N1EMS4,
N3EGS4, N2EGT2,
N3EGS2, N4EGS4,
N1EMS2, N1PEG16,
N1PEG8, R1PEGS1,
Q1PEGS2, TNN1EG8
340602
98

1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -5 to
-0 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
N2EGS2, N3EGS2,
N1EGT2, N2EGT2,
N2EGR2, N2EMR0,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4,
N4EGS4, N1EMS4,
N1EMS2, N1PEG16,
N1PEG8, R1PEGS1,
Q1PEGS2, TNN1EG8
340603
60

1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -2 to
5 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
N1EGT2, N3EGS2,
N2EGT2, N4EGS4,
N1PEG16, N1PEG8,
R1PEGS1, Q1PEGS2,
TNN1EG8
340604
87

1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9.5
to -3 dBm, -20 dBm, LC,
SM, 10 km
TNN1EG16

850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/s (multi
rate), -9.5 to -2.5 dBm,
-17dBm, LC, MM, 0.5 km
N2EGS2, N1EGT2,
N2EMR0, N1EGS4,
N1EMS4, N3EGS4,
N2EGT2, N3EGS2,
N4EGS4, N1EMS2,
340604
73
340602
86
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP

optical module
2.125 Gbit/s eSFP

optical module

Copyright Huawei
1424

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Specifications
Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Sensitivity-Optical
Distance)
N1PEG16, N1PEG8,
R1PEGS1, Q1PEGS2,
TNN1EG8
340603
17

850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/s (multi
rate), -9 to -3.5 dBm,
-18dBm, LC, MM, 0.5 km
TNN1EG16
Optical Transceiver, eSFP,

1310 nm, STM16, -5 to 0
km
N1SLD16, N2SLQ16
340602
88

1310 nm, STM16, -10 to -3
km
N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16,
N1SLD16
340604
84
Optical Transceiver, eSFP,

1310 nm, 155 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, -10 to -3 dBm, -21
dBm, LC, SM, 2 km
N1SLO16, N4SLO16,
N4SLQ16, N3SL16A
340604
85

1310 nm, 155 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, -5 to 0 dBm, -21
dBm, LC, SM, 15 km
N2SL16A, N3SL16A,
N1SLO16, N4SLO16,
R1PCXLN
340604
88

1550 nm, STM16, -2 to 3
km
N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16,
N2SL16A, N3SL16A,
N1SLD16, N1SLO16,
N4SLQ16, R1PCXLN
03030
GGV
OptiX HPLAT,
SSX2T1SA02, 2.5 Gbit/s
ESFP transceiver (-30 dBm
to -9 dBm, 1310 nm, 40 km,
-2 dBm to +3 dBm, LC)
N1SLD16, N1SLO16,
N4SLO16, N1SLQ16,
N2SLQ16, N4SLQ16,
N3SL16A
03030
GBQ
OptiX HPLAT,
SSX2T1SA01, 2.5 Gbit/s
ESFP transceiver (-31 dBm
to -9 dBm, 1550 nm, 1600
ps/nm, 80 km, -2 to +3
N4SLO16, N4SLQ16
340602
78
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
2.5 Gbit/s eSFP

optical module

Copyright Huawei
1425

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Specifications
Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Sensitivity-Optical
Distance)
dBm, LC)
1.1.1.1.1646 SFP+
Table 20-2 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the SFP+ optical modules.
Figure 1.1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the SFP+ optical modules
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Specifications
340604
95
10 Gbit/s SFP+
optical module
Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Sensitivity-Optical
Distance)
Optical transceiver, SFP+,
1310 nm, 10 Gbit/s, -8.2 to
+0.5 dBm, -12.6 dBm, LC,
SM, 10 km
N3EAS2
1.1.1.1.1647 Single-Fiber Bidirectional Optical Module

Table 20-3 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the single-fiber bidirectional eSFP
optical modules.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1426

System
Figure 1.1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the single-fiber bidirectional
SFP/eSFP optical modules
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Sensitivity-Optical
Distance)
Compatible Board
340606
39
155 Mbit/s singlefiber bidirectional

eSFP optical
module
BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx

1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, 0.1 to
1.25Gb/s, -3 dBm, -2 dBm,
-25 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
R1PEF4F, N1PEFF8,
TNN1EFF8
340606
38

1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, 0.1 to
1.25Gb/s, -3 dBm, -2 dBm,
340603
64

1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm,
STM1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm,
-32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15
km
340603
63

1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm,
155M, -15 dBm, -8 dBm,
-32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15
km
340603
29

1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm,
155M, -5 dBm, -0 dBm, -32
dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 km
340603
28

1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm,
155M, -5 dBm, -0 dBm, -32
dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 km
340604
75
340604
70
340605
39
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
1.25 Gbit/s
single-fiber
bidirectional
eSFP optical
module

1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm,
-19.5 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
N1SLQ1, N1SLT1,
N1SLH1, R1SLQ1,
N1SL1A, N1OU08,
N3SLQ41
N1SLD4, N1SLQ4,
N1SL4A, N3SLQ41,
R1PEGS1, R1PEGS2,
N1PEG8, TNN1EG8

1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm,
-19.5 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25

Copyright Huawei
R1PEGS1, R1PEGS2,
1427

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Sensitivity-Optical
Distance)
Compatible Board
Gbit/s, -2 dBm, -3 dBm, -23

dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
N1PEG8, TNN1EG8
340605
40

1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm, 1.25
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
340605
95

1570 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25
dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
340605
96

1490 nm/Rx 1570 nm, 1.25
dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
340606
21
340606
22
2.5 Gbit/s singlefiber bidirectional

SFP optical
module
BiDi transceiver, SFP, Tx

1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm, 2.5G,
-5 dBm to 0 dBm, -18 dBm,
LC, SMF, 15 km
N4SLQ16, N4SLO16
BiDi transceiver, SFP, Tx

1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 2.5G,
-5 dBm, 0 dBm, -18 dBm,
LC, SMF, 15 km
Optical module data is subject to product versions, so contact Huawei local office for latest data.
20.3 XFP
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the XFP
optical modules.
Table 20-4 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the XFP optical modules.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1428

System
Figure 1.2 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the XFP optical modules
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Specifications
Compatible Board
340603
13
9.95 Gbit/s to
10.71 Gbit/s XFP
optical module
Optical transceiver, XFP,

1310 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
10.71 Gbit/s, -6 dBm to -1
km
N1SLD64, N1EAS2,
N4SL64, N1PEX1,
N2PEX1, N1PEX2,
TNN1EX2
03030J
CB
9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s XFP
optical module

1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, -1 dBm to 2 dBm,
N1SLD64, N4SL64
340603
62
10.3 Gbit/s XFP

optical module

850 nm, 10.3 Gbit/s, -7.3
dBm to -1.3 dBm, -7.5 dBm,
LC, MM, 0.3 km
N1PEX1
340603
22
9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s XFP
optical module

1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, -1 dBm to 2 dBm,
N1PEX1, N2PEX1,
N1PEX2, TNN1EX2
340603
61
9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s XFP
optical module

1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, 0 dBm to 4 dBm, -24
dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
N1PEX1, N2PEX1,
N1PEX2, TNN1EX2,
N4SL64
03030J
HE
10.71 Gbit/s XFP

optical module
Optical transceiver (-19

dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm,
800 ps/nm, -1 dBm to +2
dBm, 193.4 THz, LC/PC),
100 GHz spacing
wavelength, FEC, EA
N4SL64
(Name-Encapsulation
Form-Operating
Sensitivity-Optical
Distance)
20.4 CWDM/DWDM
CWDM/DWDM optical modules.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1429

System
1.1.1.1.1648 CWDM Optical Module

Table 20-5 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the 2.5 Gbit/s CWDM eSFP optical
modules. Table 20-6 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the 10 Gbit/s CWDM XFP
optical modules.
Figure 1.1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the 2.5 Gbit/s CWDM eSFP
optical modules
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
(Name, Encapsulation
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output
Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical
Interface Type, Optical
Fiber Type, Transmission
Distance)
Compatible Board
340604
83
2.5 Gbit/s
CWDM eSFP
optical module
Transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm,

100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0
dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC,
80 km
N3SLH41, N1SL4A,
N3SLQ41, N3SL16A,
N1PEG8, N4SLO16,
N4SLQ16, TNN1EG8
340604
81

80 km
340604
79

80 km
340604
82

80 km
340604
78

80 km
340604
76

80 km
340604
77

80 km
340604
80

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1430

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
Compatible Board

80 km
340604
16

single mode, 40 km
340604
17

single mode, 40 km
340604
18

single mode, 40 km
340604
19

single mode, 40 km
340604
20

single mode, 40 km
340604
21

single mode, 40 km
340604
22

single mode, 40 km
340604
23

single mode, 40 km
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
N1PEG16, R1PEGS1,
Q1PEGS2, N1PEG8,
TNN1EG8
1431

System
Figure 1.2 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the 10 Gbit/s CWDM XFP
optical modules
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
Compatible Board
340605
47
9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s
CWDM XFP
optical module
Transceiver, XFP, 1471 nm,

9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1
70 km
TNN1EX2, N4SL64,
N4SLD64, N1PEX2,
N2PEX1
340605
48

70 km
340605
49

70 km
340605
50

70 km
340605
51

70 km
340605
52

70 km
340605
53

70 km
340605
54

70 km
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1432

System
1.1.1.1.1649 DWDM Optical Module

Table 20-7 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the 2.5 Gbit/s DWDM eSFP optical
modules. Table 20-8 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the 10 Gbit/s DWDM XFP
optical modules.
Figure 1.1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the 2.5 Gbit/s DWDM eSFP
optical modules
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
Compatible Board
340603
66
2.5 Gbit/s
DWDM eSFP
optical module

1560.61 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm,
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
N3SLH41, N1SL4A,
N3SLQ41, N3SL16A,
N1PEG8, TNN1EG8,
N1SF16E, N4SLO16,
N4SLQ16
340603
72

1559.79 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
73

1558.98 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
74

1558.17 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
2.67 G bit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm,
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
75

1557.36 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
76

1556.55 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
77

1555.75 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
78

1554.94 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1433

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
Compatible Board

-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
79

1554.13 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
80

1553.33 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
81

1552.52 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
82

1551.72 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
83

1550.92 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
84

1550.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
85

1549.32 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
86

1548.51 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
87

1547.72 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1434

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
Compatible Board
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km

340603
88

1546.92 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
89

1546.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
90

1545.32 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
91

1544.53 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
92

1543.73 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
93

1542.94 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
94

1542.14 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
95

1541.35 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
96

1540.56 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1435

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
340603
97

1539.77 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
98

1538.98 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340603
99

1538.19 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
00

1537.40 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
01

1536.61 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
02

1535.82 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
03

1535.04 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
04

1534.25 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
05

1533.47 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Compatible Board
1436

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
06
1532.68 nm, 125 Mbit/s to

-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
07

1531.90 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
08

1531.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
09

1530.33 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
340604
10

1529.55 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
Compatible Board
Figure 1.2 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the 10 Gbit/s DWDM XFP
optical modules
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
Compatible Board
03030J
GQ
9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s
DWDM XFP
optical module

1560.61 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm,
N1SL64, N1PEX2,
N2PEX1, N4SL64,
TNN1EX2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1437

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
03030J
GR

1559.79 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
GS

1558.98 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
GT

1558.17 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
GU

1557.36 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
GV

1556.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
GW

1555.75 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
GX

1554.94 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
GY

1554.13 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HA

1553.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Compatible Board
1438

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
HB
1552.52 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to

03030J
HC

1551.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HD

1550.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HE

1550.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HF

1549.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HG

1548.51 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HH

1547.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HJ

1546.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HK

1546.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HL

1545.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Compatible Board
1439

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
Compatible Board

03030J
HM

1544.53 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HN

1543.73 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HP

1542.94 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HQ

1542.14 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HR

1541.35 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HS

1540.56 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HT

1539.77 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HU

1538.98 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HV

1538.19 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1440

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
Compatible Board

03030J
HW

1537.40 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HX

1536.61 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
HY

1535.82 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
JA

1535.04 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
JB

1534.25 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
JC

1533.47 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
JD

1532.68 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
JE

1531.90 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
JF

1531.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1441

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
03030J
JG

1530.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
03030J
JH

1529.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
33

1551.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
01

1550.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
02

1550.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
14

1549.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
31

1548.51 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
34

1532.68 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
03

1531.90 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Compatible Board
N1PEX2, N2PEX1,
N4SLD64, N4SL64,
TNN1EX2
1442

System
BOM
Numbe
r
Name
Form, Operating
Wavelength, Rate,
Distance)
04
1531.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to

340605
15

1530.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
340605
32

1529.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Compatible Board
1443

System
21
21 Pluggable Electrical Module
Pluggable Electrical Module
A pluggable electrical module is used at an SFP interface to transmit/receive electrical signals.
1.1.1.1.1650 Appearance
Figure 21-1 and Figure 21-2 show the appearance of the SFP electrical module.
Figure 1.1 Appearance of the GE SFP electrical module
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1444

System
21 Pluggable Electrical Module
Figure 1.2 Appearance of the STM-1 SFP electrical module
1.1.1.1.1651 SFP electrical module

Table 21-1lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the pluggable electrical modules.
Figure 1.1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the electrical modules
BOM Number
Name
Specifications
Compatible Board
34100052
1000BASE-T SFP
electrical module
1000BASE-T
(RJ45) SFP
electrical module,
100 m
TNN1EG8,
N1PEG8,
TNN1ETMC,
Q1PEGS2,
R1PEGS1, N3EGS2,
N2EGT2, N1EGS4,
N4EGS4, N1EMS4,
N1EMS2
34100104
STM-1 SFP
electrical module
Electrical active
module, electrical
transceiver, SFP,
STM-1e
N1OU08
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1445

System
22 Cables
22
Cables
About This Chapter

This topic describes the cables that the equipment uses, including the fiber jumper, power
cable, alarm cable, management cable, signal cable, and clock cable.
22.1 Fiber Jumper
This topic describes the categories and connectors of the fiber jumpers.
22.2 Power Cable and Ground Cable
The power cables and ground cables include the cabinet power cable, subrack power cable,
COA power cable, and ground cable of the cabinet door.
22.3 Alarm Cable
The alarm cables that the equipment uses include the cabinet indicator cable, alarm cascading
cable, and alarm input/output cable.
22.4 Management Cable
The management cables include the serial cable, ordinary phone line, COA cascading cable,
and network cable.
22.5 Signal Cable
The signal cables include the E1/E3 signal cable, framed E1 signal cable, and Nx64 kbit/s
signal cable.
22.6 Clock Cable
The clock cables include the 75-ohm/120-ohm clock cable and clock transit cable.
22.1 Fiber Jumper

This topic describes the categories and connectors of the fiber jumpers.
22.1.1 Categories of the Fiber Jumpers

The OptiX OSN equipment uses various types of fiber jumpers.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1446

System
22 Cables
Table 22-1 lists the categories of the fiber jumpers that the OptiX OSN equipment uses.
Figure 1.2 Categories of the fiber jumpers that the OptiX OSN equipment uses
Usage
Connector
1
Connector
2
Fiber
Available Length
Used to connect
the OptiX OSN
equipment to the
ODF or to
connect an
interface board
of the OptiX
OSN equipment
to other
equipment
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm singlemode fiber
6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30
m, and 50 m
2 mm multimode fiber
3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m,
30 m, and 50 m
5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30
m, and 50 m
10 m, 20 m, 30 m,
and 50 m
Used to connect
the OptiX OSN
equipment
LC/PC
SC/PC
SC/PC
SC/PC
2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m,
30 m, 50 m, and 80 m
LC/PC
LC/PC
1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10
m, 20 m, and 30 m
3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m,
and 30 m
LC/PC
FC/PC
6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30
m, and 50 m
LC/PC
SC/PC
5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30
m, and 50 m
Select the fiber connector and fiber length according to the on-site survey.
22.1.2 Connector
The OptiX OSN equipment uses various types of fiber connectors.
The four types of fiber connectors are described as follows:
Most of the optical interfaces on the front panels of the boards are the LC/PC optical
interfaces. See Figure 22-1.
The N2OU08 and 61COA provide the SC/PC optical interfaces.
The "IN" interface on the case-shaped 62COA that is externally installed uses the
LSH/APC connector. See Figure 22-4.
Generally, the ODF on the client side provides the FC/PC or SC/PC optical interface.
Figure 22-3 and Figure 22-2 show the corresponding FC/PC and SC/PC fiber connectors.
Table 22-2 describes the four types of fiber connectors.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1447

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.3 Types of fiber connectors

Type of Internal
Fiber Connector
Description
LC/PC
Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished
LSH/APC
Connector with a dust-proof cover/protruding polished (eight

degrees)
FC/PC
Round fiber connector/protruding polished
SC/PC
Square fiber connector/protruding polished
1.1.1.1.1652 LC/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 22-1 shows the appearance of the LC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 1.1 Appearance of the LC/PC fiber connector
The axial operation instead of rotation is required to insert or remove an LC/PC fiber
connector.
To insert a fiber jumper that uses an LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with
the optical interface and apply proper force. To remove the fiber jumper, first, press the clip,
then, slightly push the fiber connector inward, and finally, pull out the connector.
1.1.1.1.1653 SC/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 22-2 shows the appearance of the SC/PC fiber connector.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1448

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.2 Appearance of the SC/PC fiber connector
1.1.1.1.1654 FC/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 22-3 shows the appearance of the FC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 1.3 Appearance of the FC/PC fiber connector
1.1.1.1.1655 LSH/APC Fiber Connector

Figure 22-4 shows the appearance of the LSH/APC fiber connector.
Figure 1.4 Appearance of the LSH/APC fiber connector
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1449

System
22 Cables
22.2 Power Cable and Ground Cable

The power cables and ground cables include the cabinet power cable, subrack power cable,
COA power cable, and ground cable of the cabinet door.
22.2.1 Power Cable of the Cabinet

The -48 V power cable, BGND power cable, and PGND power cable are used to supply
power to the equipment in a cabinet. One end of the power cable is connected to the power
distribution cabinet and the ground bar in the equipment room, and the other end is connected
to the DC PDU at the top of the cabinet.
1.1.1.1.1656 Structure
Figure 22-5 shows the structure of the -48 V/BGND power cable of the cabinet. Figure 22-6
and Figure 22-7 show the structure of the PGND power cable of the cabinet.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the -48 V/BGND power cable of the cabinet
1
1. Cord end terminal
2. Bare crimping terminal - type OT
3. Cable tie
Figure 1.2 Structure of the PGND power cable of the cabinet (JG2)
2. Cable tie
3. Bare crimping terminal (JG2)
4. Heat shrink tubing
5. Main label
6. Wire
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1450

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.3 Structure of the PGND power cable of the cabinet (OT)
2. Cable tie
3. Bare crimping terminal (OT)
5. Main label
6. Wire

Figure 1.1 Technical specifications of the cabinet power cable
Item
-48 V power
cable of the
cabinet
BGND power
cable of the
cabinet
PGND power
cable of the
cabinet
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Description
Terminal 2
(telecommu
nications
room side)
Bare crimping terminal - type OT - M8 - tin plated - round

bare terminal - 16 mm2/25 mm2
Terminal 1
(PDU side)
Single cord end terminal - 0.024 m - insertion depth of 12

mm - 80 A - green - 16 mm2/25 mm2
Cable type
Power cable - 450 V/750 V - blue - 85 A - 16 mm2/25 mm2
Terminal 2

Terminal 1
Single cord end terminal - 0.024 m - insertion depth of 12

mm - 80 A - green - 16 mm2/25 mm2
Cable type
Power cable - 450 V/750 V - black - 16 mm2/25 mm2
Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Cable type
Power cable - 450 V/750 V - yellow/green - 16 mm2/25

mm2

Copyright Huawei
1451

System
22 Cables
Item
Description
Fireproof class
IEC60332-3A
Length
Determined by the site survey result.
Figure 22-8 shows the structure of the -48 V/BGND power cable of the cabinet. Figure 22-9
shows the structure of the PGND power cable of the cabinet.
Figure 1.4 Structure of the -48 V/BGND power cable
Figure 1.5 Structure of the PGND power cable
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1452

System
22 Cables

Item
-48 V power
cable of the
cabinet
BGND power
cable of the
cabinet
PGND power
cable of the
cabinet
Description
Terminal 2
(telecommu
nications
room side)

bare terminal - 16 mm2/25 mm2/35 mm2
Terminal 1
(PDU side)
Bare crimping terminal - type JG2 - M6 - tin plated round bare terminal - 16 mm2/25 mm2/35 mm2
Cable type
Power cable - 450 V/750 V - blue - 16 mm2/25 mm2/35

mm2
Terminal 2

Terminal 1
Bare crimping terminal - type JG2 - M6 - tin plated round bare terminal - 16 mm2/25 mm2/35 mm2
Cable type
Power cable - 450 V/750 V - black - 16 mm2/25 mm2/35

mm2
Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Cable type
Power cable - 450 V/750 V - yellow/green - 16 mm2/25

mm2/35 mm2
Fireproof class
IEC60332-3A
Length
Determined by the site survey result.
Figure 22-10 shows the structure of the -48 V/BGND power cable of the cabinet. Figure 2211 shows the structure of the PGND power cable of the cabinet.
Figure 1.6 Structure of the -48 V/BGND power cable
Bare crimping terminal (JG2)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Bare crimping terminal (type OT)

Copyright Huawei
1453

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.7 Structure of the PGND power cable

Item
Description
Terminal
Bare crimping terminal - type JG2 - 25 mm2 -M6 - 95 A - in plated

Bare crimping terminal - type OT - 25 mm2- M8 - tin plated - round
bare terminal
Select cables with proper cross-sectional areas according to the required length of cabinet power cables:
If the length of the cabinet power cable is required to be not more than 20 m, select the cable with a
cross-sectional area of 16 mm2.
If the length of the cabinet power cable is required to be in the range from 21 m to 30 m, select the
cable with a cross-sectional area of 25 mm 2.
If the length of the cabinet power cable is required to be in the range from 31 m to 50 m, select the
cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm 2.
1.1.1.1.1662 Pin Assignments

None.
22.2.2 Ground Cable of the Cabinet Door

The ground cable of the cabinet door grounds the front door, rear door and side panels of the
cabinet. The ground cables of the cabinet door are correctly connected before delivery.
Figure 22-12 shows the structure of the ground cable of the cabinet door.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1454

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Structure of the ground cable of the cabinet door
3. Main label

None.

Item
Description
Terminal X1/X2
Bare crimping terminal - OT - 6 mm2 - M6 - tin plated - round

insulated terminal - 12 to 10 AWG
Cable
Type
Wire - 600 V - UL1015 - 10 AWG - 105-core twisted pair yellow and green, round - 50 A
Fireproof
class
UL1015
Length
0.35 m
22.2.3 Subrack Power Cable

The subrack power cable connects the DC PDU at the top of the cabinet and the PIU in the
subrack. The subrack power cable leads the -48 V power from the top of the cabinet to the
subrack. The subrack power cable is correctly connected before delivery.
A type III subrack (2300 W) uses different power cables from those used by a general subrack or an
enhanced subrack (1100 W).
Figure 22-13 shows the structure of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced
subrack (1100 W).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1455

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Structure of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced subrack (1100 W)
1. Cable connector
2. Main label
3. Cable tie
4. Label
Figure 22-14 shows the structure of the power cable for the type III subrack (2300 W).
Figure 1.2 Structure of the power cable for the type III subrack (2300 W)
1
W1
W1
W2
W2
X1
X2

Table 22-6 provides the pin assignments of the power cable for the general subrack and
enhanced subrack (1100 W).
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced subrack
(1100 W)
Cable
Connector
Bare Crimping
Terminal
Connection
Color of the Core
X1.A1
X2
A1 is connected to X2.
Blue (-48 V power)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1456

System
22 Cables
Cable
Connector
Bare Crimping
Terminal
Connection
Color of the Core
X1.A3
X3
A3 is connected to X3.
Black (power ground)

Figure 1.1 Technical specifications of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced
subrack (1100 W)
Item
Description
Cable connector X1
Cable connector - type D - 3-pin - female - without intermediate

male terminals
Bare crimping terminals

X2 and X3
Single cord end terminal - 4 mm2 - 20 A - insertion depth of 10

mm - gray
Cable
Type
Power cable - 600 V - 5.26 mm2 - 10 AWG - black (the core is in

blue and black) - 41 A
Number of
cores
Fireproof
class
CM
Color
The core is in blue and black.
Length
2.5 m, 3 m, and 3.5 m
Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the power cable for the type III subrack (2300 W)
Item
Description
Cable connector
Bare crimping terminal - OT2- 10 mm2 - 60 A - tin plated
Cable
Wire - 450 V/750 V - H07Z - K UL3386 - 10 mm2 - blue
Wire - 450 V/750 V - H07Z - K UL3386 - 10 mm2 - black
Type
22.2.4 COA Power Cable

The PIU can supply power to a maximum of two pieces of external equipment (for example,
the COA).
The COA power cable connects a power interface on the PIU to a power interface of the
external equipment. Both ends of the COA power cable use the 4-pin connector. One end of
the COA power cable is connected to the PIU and the other end is connected to the power
interface of the external equipment (for example, the COA).
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1457

System
22 Cables
Figure 22-15 shows the structure of the COA power cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the COA power cable
1
A-A
W1
3 1
4 2
X1
A 2
X3
W2
X2
W1.1
W1
W1.2
W2.1
B
W2
X3
W2.2
1. Common terminal female
2. Common connector
- 4-pin
3. Main
label
A-A. Sectional view in

direction A

Table 22-9 provides the pin assignments of the COA power cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the COA power cable
Connectors X1
and X2
Cables W1 and W2
Color
Connector X3
X1.1
W1.1
Brown
X3.1
X2.1
W2.1
X1.3
W1.2
Black
X3.3
X2.3
W2.2

Item
Description
Connector X3
Common connector - 4-pin - double rows/4.20 mm
Connector X1/X2
Common terminal - female - 4-pin - 18/26 AWG - 13.7 mm in

length
Model of wire W1/W2
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 0 ohms - UL2464 - 0.64 mm -
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1458

System
Item
22 Cables
Description
22 AWG - one pair - black
Number of cores
Fireproof class
CM
Color
Black
Length
1.8 m
22.2.5 RPC Power Cable

One end of the RPC power cable is connected to the power input interface of the case-shaped
Raman amplifier, and the other end is connected to the output interface of the DC power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet.
Figure 22-16 shows the structure of the RPC power cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the RPC power cable
Label 3
Main label
Label 1
Label 2
1. Bare crimping
terminal
2. Common
connector - 4-pin
3. Common terminal
- female
A-A. Sectional view in

direction A

Table 22-10 provides the pin assignments of the RPC power cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the RPC power cable
Connectors X1
and X2
Cables W1 and W2
Color
Connector X3
X1
W1
Blue
X3.1
X2
W1
Black
X3.3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1459

System
Connectors X1
and X2
22 Cables
Cables W1 and W2
Color
Connector X3

Table 22-11 lists the technical specifications of the RPC power cable.
Figure 1.1 Technical specifications of the RPC power cable
Item
Description
Connector X3
Common terminal - female - 18/26 AWG 13.7 mm in length, common connector - 4pin - double rows - 4.2 mm
Connector X1/X2
Bare crimping terminal - single cord end

terminal - 1 mm2 - 5 A - tin plated - insertion
depth of 6 mm - yellow
Model of wire W1/W2
Power cable - 600 V - UL1015 - 18 AWG black - OA
Number of cores
Fireproof class
VM-1
Color
Blue and black
Length
3.5 m
22.3 Alarm Cable

The alarm cables that the equipment uses include the cabinet indicator cable, alarm cascading
cable, and alarm input/output cable.
22.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX in the subrack to the cabinet
indicators. The cabinet indicator cable leads the indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet
indicators.
Figure 22-17 shows the structure of the cabinet indicator cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1460

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable
X2
X3
X1
X4
X5
A-A. Sectional view in direction A
B-B. Sectional view in direction B

Table 22-12 provides the pin assignments of the cabinet indicator cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the cabinet indicator cable
Connector
X1
Direction
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5
Relationshi
p
Print on the
Label
X1.4
Out
X2.2
Green
X1.5
Out
X2.1
Twisted
pair
X1.1
Out
X3.2
Red
X1.2
Out
X3.1
Twisted
pair
X1.3
Out
X4.2
Orange
X1.6
Out
X4.1
Twisted
pair
X1.7
Out
X5.2
Yellow
X1.8
Out
X5.1
Twisted
pair

Item
Description
Connector X1
Network interface connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded RJ45 connector
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5
Common connector - 2-pin - single row/2.5 mm
Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms SEYPVPV - 0.5 mm - 24 AWG - 8-core - PANTONE
430U
Number of cores
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1461

System
22 Cables
Item
Description
Fireproof class
CM
Diameter of the core
0.5 mm
Length
2.5 m, 3 m, and 3.5 m
22.3.2 Indicator Cascading Cable Between Subracks or Alarm

Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment
The indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm cascading cable between the
OptiX OSN equipment cascades the indicator signals or alarm signals between the subracks of
the OptiX OSN equipment.
Both ends of the cable use the RJ45 connector. One end of the cable is connected to the
LAMP1 or ALMO2 interface of the AUX in one subrack. The other end of the cable is
connected to the LAMP2 or ALMO1 interface of the AUX in another subrack.
Figure 22-18 shows the structure of the indicator cascading cable between subracks or the
alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm cascading
cable between the OptiX OSN equipment
1. RJ-45 network interface connector
2. Label 1

Table 22-13 provides the pin assignments of the indicator cascading cable between subracks
or the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm
cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment
Connecto
r X1
Direction
Connecto
r X2
Relationship
Alarm Output
X1.1
Out
X2.1
Twisted pair
Critical alarm output and major

alarm output (+)
X1.2
Out
X2.2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Critical alarm signal output and

1462

System
Connecto
r X1
Direction
Connecto
r X2
22 Cables
Relationship
Alarm Output
major alarm signal output (-)
X1.3
Out
X2.3
X1.6
Out
X2.6
X1.4
Out
X2.4
X1.5
Out
X2.5
X1.7
Out
X2.7
X1.8
Out
X2.8
Twisted pair
Minor alarm signal output and

warning alarm signal output (+)
Minor alarm signal output and
warning alarm signal output (-)
Twisted pair

Alarm signal output 1 (-)
Twisted pair

Alarm signal output 2 (-)

Item
Description
Connector
X1/X2
Network interface connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - RJ45 connector
Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.5 mm - 24

AWG - 8-core - PANTONE 430U
Number of
cores
Fireproof class
CM
Diameter of the
core
0.5 mm
Length
3 m, 5 m, 10 m, and 20 m
22.3.3 Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment

and the Other Huawei Transmission Equipment
The alarm cascading cable cascades the alarm signals of the OptiX OSN equipment and the
alarm signals of the other Huawei transmission equipment such as the OptiX 2500+ and
OptiX OSN 9500.
Both ends of the cable use the RJ45 connector. One end of the cable is connected to the
ALMO1 or ALMO2 interface of the OptiX OSN subrack. The other end of the cable is
connected to the alarm output interface or the alarm cascading interface of the subrack of the
other Huawei transmission equipment.
Figure 22-19 shows the structure of the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1463

System
22 Cables
equipment and the other Huawei transmission equipment.

Figure 1.1 Structure of the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment and the
other Huawei transmission equipment
1. RJ-45 network interface

connector
2. Main
label
3. Label
1
4. Cable connector - type D - 9pin - female
L: 5 m, 10 m, and 20 m

Table 22-14 provides the pin assignments of the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX
OSN equipment and the other Huawei transmission equipment.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment and
the other Huawei transmission equipment
Connector
X1
Direction
Connector
X2
Relationsh
ip
Description
X1.1
Out
X2.7
Critical alarm signal output (+)
X1.2
Out
X2.3
Twisted
pair
X1.3
Out
X2.6
Major alarm signal output (+)
X1.6
Out
X2.1
Twisted
pair
Critical alarm signal output (-)
Major alarm signal output (-)

Item
Description
Connector
X1
Connector
X2
Cable connector - type D - 9-pin - female
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1464

System
22 Cables
Item
Description
Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - SEYVP - 0.48 mm - 26 AWG

- 4-core - black
Number of
cores
Fireproof
class
CM
Diameter of
the core
0.5 mm
Length
5 m, 10 m, and 20 m
22.3.4 Alarm Input/Output Cable

The alarm input cable transmits the alarm signals of the external equipment to the OptiX OSN
equipment. The alarm output cable transmits the alarm signals of the OptiX OSN equipment
to the centralized alarm monitoring equipment.
The alarm input/output cable uses an RJ45 connector at one end to connect to the alarm
input/output interface of the equipment. The other end of the alarm input/output cable is
connected to the external equipment or the centralized alarm monitoring equipment. The
connector needs to be prepared on site as required. Each alarm input/output cable transmits
four channels of alarm signals.
Figure 22-20 shows the structure of the alarm input/output cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the alarm input/output cable
2. Main label

Table 22-15 provides the pin assignments of the alarm input/output cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1465

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the alarm input/output cable

Connector X1
Color
Relationship
Usage
X1.1
Blue
Twisted pair
Critical or major alarm

input/output (+)
X1.2
White
X1.3
Orange
X1.6
White
X1.4
Green
X1.5
White
X1.7
Brown
X1.8
White
Critical or major alarm

input/output (-)
Twisted pair
Minor or warning alarm

input/output (+)
Minor or warning alarm
input/output (-)
Twisted pair
Alarm signal input/output 1 (+)

Alarm signal input/output 1 (-)
Twisted pair
Alarm signal input/output 2 (+)

Alarm signal input/output 2 (-)
X1.1 to X1.8 can be set to alarm signal input or alarm signal output as required.

Item
Description
Connector X1
Cable type

Number of
cores
Fireproof
class
CM
Core diameter
0.5 mm
Length
10 m, 20 m, and 30 m
22.4 Management Cable

The management cables include the serial cable, ordinary phone line, COA cascading cable,
and network cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1466

System
22 Cables
22.4.1 OAM Serial Cable

The OAM serial cable is used for the management and remote maintenance of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
The OAM serial cable uses an RJ45 connector at one end to connect to the OAM interface of
the equipment and uses a DB25 connector at the other end to connect to a laptop computer,
serial NMS, or modem.
Figure 22-21 shows the structure of the OAM serial cable (using the DB25 connector).
Figure 1.1 Structure of the OAM serial cable
1. RJ-45 network
interface connector
2. Main
label
3. Cable
connector DB25 male
A-A. Sectional
view in direction
A
B-B. Sectional
view in direction
B

Table 22-16 provides the pin assignments of the OAM serial cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the OAM serial cable
Connector
X1
Direction
Connector X2
Relationship
Description
X1.2
Out
X2.20
Single
Data terminal ready (DTR)
X1.3
Out
X2.2
Single
Transmitting data (TD)
X1.6
In
X2.3
Single
Receiving data (RD)
X1.4
X2.7
Twisted pair
Signaling ground (SG)
X1.5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1467

System
22 Cables

Item
Description
Connector X1
Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded connector
Connector X2
Cable connector - type D - 25-pin - male, or cable connector - type D - 9pin - male
Type

Number of
cores
Fireproof class
CM
Length
5000 mm
22.4.2 Serial 1 to 4/F1/F&f Serial Cable

The serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable uses an RJ45 connector at one end to connect to the serial
1-4 interfaces, F1 serial port, or F&f serial port, and uses a DB9 connector at the other end to
connect to the external detecting equipment or external managed equipment.
The serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable performs the following functions:
Transparently transmits the environment monitoring data signal.
Manages external devices such as the COA.
Figure 22-22 shows the structure of the serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable
1. RJ-45 network
interface connector
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
2. Main
label
3. Cable
connector - DB9
male
A-A. Sectional
view in direction
A

Copyright Huawei
B-B. Sectional
view in direction
B
1468

System
22 Cables

Table 22-17 provides the pin assignments of the serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable
Connector
X1
Direction
Connector X2
Relationshi
p
Description
X1.1
Out
X2.8
Twisted pair
RS422TX+
X1.2
Out
X2.9
X1.3
In
X2.6
X1.6
In
X2.7
X1.4
In
X2.3
X1.8
Out
X2.2
X1.5
X2.5
RS422TXTwisted pair
RS422RX+
RS422RX-
Twisted pair
RS232RX
RS232TX
Single
SG

Item
Description
Connector X1
Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded connector
Connector X2
Cable connector - type D - 9-pin - male
Cable type
(1) Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.5 mm - 24

AWG - 8-core - PANTONE 430U (2) Symmetrical twisted-pair cable 100 ohms - SEYVP - 0.48 mm - 26 AWG - 8-core - black
Number of
cores
Fireproof
class
CM
Length
15 m in the case of cable type 1 and 3 m in the case of cable type 2
22.4.3 RS-232/RS-422 Serial Cable

The RS-232/RS-422 serial cable is used to transport the management signals between subnets.
Both ends of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable use the RJ45 connector. One end of the RS232/RS-422 serial cable is connected to the RS-232/RS-422 serial port of the equipment. The
other end is connected to the RS-232/RS-422 serial port of another piece of equipment that
needs to make orderwire calls to the other equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1469

System
22 Cables
Figure 22-23 shows the structure of the RS-232/RS4-22 serial cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable
2. Main label

Table 22-18 provides the pin assignments of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable
Connector
X1
Direction
Connector X2
Relationship
Description
X1.3
In
X2.1
Twisted pair
RX+
X1.6
In
X2.2
X1.1
Out
X2.3
X1.2
Out
X2.6
X1.5
Out
X2.5
X1.4
In
X2.8
X1.8
X2.4
RXTwisted pair
TX+
TX-
Twisted pair
232TX
232RX
Single
SG

Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit shielded - connector
Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.5 mm 24 AWG - 8-core - PANTONE 430U
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1470

System
Item
Description
Number of cores
Fireproof class
CM
Length
15 m
22 Cables
22.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Line

The ordinary telephone line is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends of the ordinary
telephone line use the RJ45 connector. One end of the ordinary telephone line is connected to
the PHONE interface of the equipment, and the other end is connected to the interface of the
orderwire phone.
Figure 22-24 shows the structure of the ordinary telephone line.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the ordinary telephone line
1. RJ45 connector
2. Main label

Table 22-19 provides the pin assignments of the ordinary telephone line.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the ordinary telephone line
Connector X1
Connector X2
Description
X1.1
X2.1
Not connected
X1.2
X2.2
Not connected
X1.3
X2.3
TIP
X1.4
X2.4
RING
X1.5
X2.5
Not connected
X1.6
X2.6
Not connected
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1471

System
22 Cables

Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector - 6-pin - 26 to 28 AWG
Cable type
Power cable - 150 V - UL20251 - 0.08 mm2 - 28 AWG - black - 1

A - 2-core telephone line
Number of cores
Fireproof class
CM
Length
15 m
22.4.5 COA Cascading Cable

When multiple COAs are installed in a cabinet, use COA cascading cables to cascade the
COAs.
Both ends of the COA cascading cable use the DB9 connector. One end of the COA cascading
cable is connected to the RS232-1 serial port of one COA, and the other end is connected to
the RS232-2 serial port of another COA.
Figure 22-25 shows the structure of the COA cascading cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the COA cascading cable
1. Cable connector - DB9 male
2. Label

Table 22-20 provides the pin assignments of the COA cascading cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the COA cascading cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Remarks
One pair
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1472

System
22 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Remarks
Grounding

Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - UL2464 - 0.32 mm 28 AWG - 2P - Huawei gray
Number of cores
Two pairs
Fireproof class
CM
Length
0.6 m and 2.5 m
22.4.6 Straight-Through Cable

The straight-through cable is used to connect the OptiX OSN equipment to an NM computer.
Both ends of the straight-through cable use the RJ45 connector. One end of the straightthrough cable is connected to the ETH interface of the equipment, and the other end is
connected to the network interface of the NM computer.
As the ETH interface of the OptiX OSN equipment supports the auto-sensing function, the ETH
interface can use a straight-through cable or a crossover cable.
Figure 22-26 shows the structure of the straight-through cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the straight-through cable

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
2. Label 1

Copyright Huawei
3. Main label
4. Label 2
1473

System
22 Cables

Table 22-21 provides the pin assignments of the straight-through cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.1
X2.1
White/Orange
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White/Green
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair

Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit shielded - connector - 24 to 26 AWG - CAT 6/configured with the
SFTP network cable
Cable type
Communication cable - 10015 ohms - CAT5E SFTP 24 AWG - 8core - PANTONE 445U
Number of cores
Fireproof class
CM
Length
5 m, 10 m, 20 m, and 30 m
22.4.7 Crossover Cable

The crossover cable is used to connect the OptiX OSN equipment, network management
computer, and Ethernet to achieve communication. Both ends of the crossover cable use the
RJ45 connector.
Figure 22-27 shows the structure of the crossover cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1474

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Structure of the crossover cable
1. RJ-45 network interface

connector
2. Label
1
3. Main
label
4. Network
cable
5. Label
2

Table 22-22 provides the pin assignments of the crossover cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the crossover cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.6
X2.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X1.3
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.1
X2.3
White/Green
X1.2
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair

Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit shielded - connector - 24 to 26 AWG - CAT 6/configured with the
SFTP network cable
Cable type
Communication cable - 1005 ohms - CAT5E SFTP 24 AWG - 8core - PANTONE 646U
Number of cores
Fireproof class
CM
Length
5 m and 30 m
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1475

System
22 Cables
22.5 Signal Cable

The signal cables include the E1/E3 signal cable, framed E1 signal cable, and Nx64 kbit/s
signal cable.
22.5.1 75-ohm 8xE1 Cable

The 75-ohm 8xE1 cable is used to receive and transmit E1 signals.
The 75-ohm 8xE1 cable uses a DB44 connector at one end to connect to the D75S. The other
end of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable is connected to the digital distribution frame (DDF). The
connector needs to be prepared on site as required. Each 75-ohm 8xE1 cable can transmit
8xE1 signals.
Figure 22-28 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable
View A
Pos.1
Pos.44
MO55
Main label
W
1. Cable connector - type D - 44-pin - male
2. Main label

Table 22-23 provides the pin assignments of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1476

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable

Connect
or
Cable W
Rema
rks
Direct
ion
Connecto
r
Cable W
Cor
e
No.
38
Rin
g
23
Tip
37
Rin
g
Cor
e
No.
R1
In
34
Rin
g
In
19
Tip
In
33
Rin
g
22
Tip
In
18
Tip
36
Rin
g
In
32
Rin
g
21
Tip
In
17
Tip
35
Rin
g
In
31
Rin
g
20
Tip
In
16
Tip
15
Rin
g
Out
11
Rin
g
30
Tip
Out
26
Tip
14
Rin
g
Out
10
Rin
g
29
Tip
Out
25
Tip
13
Rin
g
Out
Rin
g
28
Tip
Out
24
Tip
12
Rin
g
Out
Rin
g
27
Tip
Out
Tip
Out
Shell
External braid shield

layer/Without the
external braid shield
layer
Shell
External braid shield

layer/Without the
external braid shield
layer
R2
R3
R4
T1
T2
T3
T4
Rema
rks
Directi
on
R5
In
In
11
R6
In
In
13
R7
In
In
15
R8
In
In
10
T5
Out
Out
12
T6
Out
Out
14
T7
Out
Out
16
T8
Out

The external layer of the 75-ohm E1 cable may be of the shielded type or unshielded type.
The specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable with the shielded layer are different from the
specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable with the unshielded layer. Table 22-24 lists the
specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable with the external braid shield layer. Table 22-25 lists
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1477

System
22 Cables
the specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable without the external braid shield layer.
Figure 1.1 Specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable with the external braid shield layer
Item
Description
Connector X
Connector accessories- type D - 44-pin - male - cable welding type

- 3-row pins
Cable type
Coaxial cable - SYFVZP-LC 75-1-1x16 - 75 ohms - 13.10 mm 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm - Pantone Warm Gray 1U
Fireproof class
Complies with IEC60332-3C.
Number of cores
16 cores, 8xE1
Diameter of the shield

layer - diameter of the
internal insulation
internal conductor
13.10 mm - 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm
Length
3 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, and 50 m
Figure 1.2 Specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable without the external braid shield layer
Item
Description
Connector X
Connector accessories- type D - 44-pin - male - cable welding type

- 3-row pins
Cable type
Coaxial cable - SYFVZP-LC 75-1-1x16 - 75 ohms - 12.40 mm 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm - Pantone Warm Gray 1U
Fireproof class
Complies with IEC60332-3C.
Number of cores
16 cores, 8xE1
Diameter of the shield

internal insulation
internal conductor
12.40 mm - 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm
Length
5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, and 50 m
The pin assignment table is delivered with the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable in a packing bag. You must
keep the table carefully.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1478

System
22 Cables
22.5.2 120-ohm 8xE1 Cable

The 120-ohm 8xE1 cable is used to receive and transmit E1 signals.
The 120-ohm 8xE1 cable uses a DB44 connector at one end to connect to the 120-ohm E1
electrical interface board. The other end of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable is connected to the DDF.
The connector needs to be prepared on site as required. Each 120-ohm 8xE1 cable can
transmit 8xE1 signals.
Figure 22-29 shows the structure of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable
1. Cable connector - type D - 44-pin - male
2. Label 1, marked with "W1 (TX1-8)"
3. Label 3, marked with "W2 (RX1-8)"
4. Main label

Table 22-26 provides the pin assignments of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable
Connec
tor
Cable W1
Cor
e
No.
15
Blue
30
Whi
te
14
Ora
nge
29
Whi
te
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Rema
rks
Direct
ion
Connect
or
Cable W2
Core
No.
Twist
ed
pair
TX1
Out
38
Blue
Out
23
Whit
e
Twist
ed
pair
TX2
Out
37
Oran
ge
Out
22
Whit
e

Copyright Huawei
Rema
rks
Direct
ion
Twisted
pair
RX1
In
Twisted
pair
RX2
In
In
In
1479

System
Connec
tor
Cable W1
Cor
e
No.
13
Gree
n
28
Whi
te
12
Bro
wn
27
Whi
te
11
Gra
y
26
Whi
te
10
Blue
25
Red
Ora
nge
24
Red
Gree
n
Red
Shell
External braided
shield
22 Cables
Rema
rks
Direct
ion
Connect
or
Cable W2
Rema
rks
Direct
ion
Core
No.
Twist
ed
pair
TX3
Out
36
Gree
n
Twisted
pair
RX3
In
Out
21
Whit
e
Twist
ed
pair
TX4
Out
35
Bro
wn
Out
20
Whit
e
Twist
ed
pair
TX5
Out
34
Gray
Out
19
Whit
e
Twist
ed
pair
TX6
Out
33
Blue
Out
18
Red
Twist
ed
pair
TX7
Out
32
Oran
ge
Out
17
Red
Twist
ed
pair
TX8
Out
31
Gree
n
Out
16
Red
In
Shell
External braided shield
In
Twisted
pair
RX4
In
In
Twisted
pair
RX5
In
In
Twisted
pair
RX6
Twisted
pair
RX7
In
In
In
In
Twisted
pair
RX8
In

Item
Description
Connector X
Cable type
Communication cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.5 mm - 24 AWG 16-core - PANTONE 430U
Number of cores
16
Diameter of the
internal conductor
0.5 mm
Fireproof class
CM
Length
10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m, and 40 m
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1480

System
22 Cables
22.5.3 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable

The E3/T3/STM-1 cable is used to receive and transmit E3/T3/STM-1 electrical signals. The
E3/T3/STM-1 cable uses an SMB connector at one end to connect to the E3/T3/STM-1
electrical access board. The other end of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable is connected to the DDF. The
connector needs to be chosen on site as required.
Figure 22-30 shows the structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector - SMB
2. Main label
3. Coaxial cable

None.

Item
Description
Connector
Coaxial connector - SMB connector - 75 ohms - straight - female
Cable I
Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm - shielded

Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer diameter of the internal conductor: 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm
Length: 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, and 30 m
Cable II
Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 4.4 mm - 2.4 mm - 0.4 mm - shielded - gray

Length: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, and 40 m
Cable III
Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 6.7 mm - 3.8 mm - 0.61 mm - shielded - gray

Length: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, and 130 m
Cable IV
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 5.80 mm - 3.71 mm - 0.643 mm - black

Copyright Huawei
1481

System
Item
22 Cables
Description
Length: 30 cm
Cable V
Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm - shielded

Length: 10 m
Fireproof class
CM
22.5.4 Framed E1 Cable

The framed E1 cable is connected to the DB44 connector of the DM12 to transmit/receive
eight channels of framed E1 signals.
The framed E1 cables are available in two types, namely, 75-ohm framed E1 cable and 120ohm framed E1 cable.
For the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of the 75-ohm framed E1
cable, see the topic that describes the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable.
For the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of the 120-ohm framed
E1 cable, see the topic that describes the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable.
22.5.5 Nx64 kbit/s Cable

The Nx64 kbit/s cable is connected to the DB28 connector of the DM12 to transmit/receive
one channel of Nx64 kbit/s signals.
Table 22-27 provides the pin assignments of the DB28 connector.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the DB28 connector of the DM12
Pin
Signal
Direction
Description
TXD+
--->
Transmits data.
TXD-
--->
Transmits data.
TXC+
<-->
Transmits the clock signal provided by the

DCE to the DTE.
TXC-
<-->
Transmits the clock signal provided by the

DCE to the DTE.
NC
GND
-----
Circuit_GND
MODE0
<---
Receives the signal that identifies the type
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1482

System
Pin
Signal
22 Cables
Direction
Description
of cable.
MODE1
<---

of cable.
MODE2
<---

of cable.
10
MODE_DC
E
<---

of DCE/DTE cable.
11
DCD+
<-->
Detects the carrier.
12
DCD-
<-->
Detects the carrier.
13
RTS+
--->
14
RTS-
--->
15
TXCE+
--->
Transmits the data clock in the case of the

DCE and loops back the clock in the case of
the DTE.
16
TXCE-
--->
Transmits the data clock in the case of the

DCE and loops back the clock in the case of
the DTE.
17
RXC+
<---
Receives clock signals.
18
RXC-
<---
Receives clock signals.
19
RXD+
<---
Receives data.
20
RXD-
<---
Receives data.
21
GND
-----
Shield_GND
22
LL
<-->
Receives the loopback control signal.
23
CTS+
<---
Permits the transmission.
24
CTS-
<---
Permits the transmission.
25
DSR+
<---
Receives the DCE ready signal.
26
DSR-
<---
Receives the DCE ready signal.
27
DTR+
--->
28
DTR-
--->
The Nx64 kbit/s cables are classified into the following categories according to the protocol,
which the Nx64 kbit/s signals comply with:
V.35 DCE cable
V.35 DTE cable
V.24 DCE cable
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1483

System
V.24 DTE cable
X.21 DCE cable
X.21 DTE cable
RS-449 DCE cable
RS-449 DTE cable
RS-530 DCE cable
RS-530 DTE cable
22 Cables
1.1.1.1.1717 V.35 DCE Cable

Figure 22-31 shows the structure of the V.35 DCE cable.
Figure 1.1 Structure of the V.35 DCE cable
A-A
B-B
Pos.28
W
Pos.1
C
H
X1
X2
M
S
W
AA
EE
KK
BB
CC
HH
MM
1. Cable connector - D28 - male
2. Main label
3. Cable connector - D34 - female + D34 plastic shell
FF
LL
B
F
L
R
V
Z
DD
JJ
NN
Table 22-28 provides the pin assignments of the V.35 DCE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the V.35 DCE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
19
Twisted pair
20
15
16
AA
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
1484

System
22 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
17
Twisted pair
18
11
22
23
13
25
27
21
6+7+8
Pins 6, 7, and 8 are shortcircuited.
The technical specifications of the V.35 DCE cable are as follows.

Item
Description
Connector X1
Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm - matching with 28 to
30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2
Cable connector - V35 plug - 34-pin - molding shell - kit, exclusively

used by the OEM
Cable connector - V35 DCE plug - 34-pin - female - cable crimping
type - housing core, exclusively used by the OEM
Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - 0.38 mm - 28 AWG - 5

pairs - 8 cores - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used by the OEM
Number of cores
Five pairs and eight cores
Diameter of the
core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
1.1.1.1.1718 V.35 DTE Cable

Figure 22-32 shows the structure of the V.35 DTE cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1485

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.2 Structure of the V.35 DTE cable

A-A
B-B
Pos.28
Pos.1
X1
X2
1. Cable connector - D28

- male
2. Main label
4. Ordinary terminal
5. Cable connector - D34

- male
B
A
D
C
F J E H
L N K M
R T P S
V X U W
Z BB Y AA
DD FF CC EE
JJ LL HH KK
NN MM
3. Cable connector - D34 plastic shell
Table 22-29 provides the pin assignments of the V.35 DTE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the V.35 DTE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
Twisted pair
19
20
17
18
AA
15
16
11
22
13
23
27
25
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
1486

System
22 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
21
6 + 10 + 7 + 8
Pins 6, 7, 8, and 10 are

short-circuited.
The technical specifications of the V.35 DTE cable are as follows.

Item
Description
Connector X1
Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male

- cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm - matching with 28 to 30 AWG,
exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2
Cable connector - V35 plug - 34-pin - molding shell - kit, exclusively used
by the OEM
Cable connector - V35 DTE plug - 34-pin - female - cable crimping type housing core, exclusively used by the OEM
Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - 0.38 mm - 28 AWG - 5 pairs

- 8 cores - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used by the OEM
Number of
cores
Diameter of
the core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
1.1.1.1.1719 V.24 DCE Cable

Figure 22-33 shows the structure of the V.24 DCE cable.
Figure 1.3 Structure of the V.24 DCE cable
A-A
B-B
Pos.25
Pos.1
Pos.28
Pos.1
X1
X2
1. Cable connector - D25 - female
2. Main label
Table 22-30 provides the pin assignments of the V.24 DCE cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1487

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the V.24 DCE cable

Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
19
Twisted pair
23
13
25
20
27
11
22
18
15
17
24
15
17
21
Single
6+7
Pins 6 and 7 are shortcircuited.
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
The technical specifications of the V.24 DCE cable are as follows.

Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the V.24 DCE cable
Item
Description
Connector X1
Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm - matching with 28 to 30
AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2
Cable connector - type D - 25-pin - female - cable welding type
Cable type

Number of
cores
Diameter of the
core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
1.1.1.1.1720 V.24 DTE Cable

Figure 22-34 shows the structure of the V.24 DTE cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1488

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.4 Structure of the V.24 DTE cable

A-A
B-B
1
Pos.1
Pos.1
Pos.28
Pos.25
X1
X2
2. Main label
Table 22-32 provides the pin assignments of the V.24 DTE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the V.24 DTE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
Twisted pair
19
13
23
27
20
25
11
22
18
15
15
24
17
17
21
Single
6 + 10 + 7
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
The technical specifications of the V.24 DTE cable are as follows.

Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the V.24 DTE cable
Item
Description
Connector X1

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1489

System
Item
22 Cables
Description
Connector X2
Cable connector - type D - 25-pin - male - cable welding type
Cable type

Number of
cores
Diameter of
the core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
1.1.1.1.1721 X.21 DCE Cable

Figure 22-35 shows the structure of the X.21 DCE cable.
Figure 1.5 Structure of the X.21 DCE cable
A-A
B-B
1
Pos.15
Pos.1
Pos.28
Pos.1
X1
X2
2. Main label
Table 22-34 provides the pin assignments of the X.21 DCE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the X.21 DCE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
13
Twisted pair
14
12
23
24
10
19
20
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
1490

System
22 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
Twisted pair
11
15
16
13
21
6+9
Twisted pair
The technical specifications of the X.21 DCE cable are as follows.

Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the X.21 DCE cable
Item
Description
Connector X1

Connector X2
Cable type

Number of
cores
Diameter of
the core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
1.1.1.1.1722 X.21 DTE Cable

Figure 22-36 shows the structure of the X.21 DTE cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1491

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.6 Structure of the X.21 DTE cable

A-A
B-B
2
Pos.1
Pos.1
Pos.28
Pos.15
X2
X1
2. Main label
Table 22-36 provides the pin assignments of the X.21 DTE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the X.21 DTE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
13
Twisted pair
14
10
23
24
12
19
20
11
15
16
13
17
18
13
21
6 + 10 + 9
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
The technical specifications of the X.21 DTE cable are as follows.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1492

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the X.12 DTE cable

Item
Description
Connector X1
Connector X2
Cable type

Number of
cores
Diameter of the
core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
1.1.1.1.1723 RS-449 DCE Cable

Figure 22-37 shows the structure of the RS-449 DCE cable.
Figure 1.7 Structure of the RS-449 DCE cable
A-A
B-B
2
Pos.1
Pos.1
Pos.28
Pos.15
X2
X1
1. Cable connector - D28 male
2. Main
label
3. Cable connector - D37 - female I
Table 22-38 provides the pin assignments of the RS-449 DCE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the RS-449 DCE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
27
11
Twisted pair
28
29
25
12
26
30
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Twisted pair
1493

System
22 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
13
Twisted pair
14
27
23
24
25
11
13
12
31
19
20
22
24
15
16
26
17
17
18
35
23
22
10
21
6+8
19
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
The technical specifications of the RS-449 DCE cable are as follows.

Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the RS-449 DCE cable
Item
Description
Connector X1
Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm - matching with 28 to
30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2
Cable connector - type D - 37-pin - female - cable welding type,

Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - communication cable 0.32 mm - 28 AWG - 26-core - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used
by the OEM
Number of cores
26
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1494

System
22 Cables
Item
Description
Diameter of the
core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
1.1.1.1.1724 RS-449 DTE Cable

Figure 22-38 shows the structure of the RS-449 DTE cable.
Figure 1.8 Structure of the RS-449 DTE cable
A-A
B-B
1
3
Pos.37
Pos.28
Pos.1
X1
X2
2. Main label
Pos.1
3. Cable connector - D37 - male - I
Table 22-40 provides the pin assignments of the RS-449 DTE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the RS-449 DTE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
27
12
Twisted pair
28
30
25
11
26
29
13
14
25
23
24
27
11
13
12
31
19
20
24
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
1495

System
22 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
Twisted pair
22
15
17
16
35
17
18
26
23
22
10
21
6 + 8 + 10
19
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
The technical specifications of the RS-449 DTE cable are as follows.

Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the RS-449 DTE cable
Item
Description
Connector X1

Connector X2
Cable connector - type D - SUB plug - 37-pin - straight - male - cable

welding type - two rows, standard installation holes, exclusively used by
the OEM
Cable type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - communication cable - 0.32

mm - 28 AWG - 26-core - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used by the
OEM
Number of
cores
26
Diameter of
the core
0.32 mm
1.1.1.1.1725 RS-530 DCE Cable

Figure 22-39 shows the structure of the RS-530 DCE cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1496

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.9 Structure of the RS-530 DCE cable

A-A
Pos.25
B-B
2
3
Pos.1
X1
Pos.1
Pos.28
X2
2. Main label
Table 22-42 provides the pin assignments of the RS-530 DCE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the RS-530 DCE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
28
22
Twisted pair
27
26
23
25
20
24
19
23
22
18
Single
21
Single
20
14
Twisted pair
19
18
11
17
24
16
15
17
14
13
13
12
10
11
12
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
1497

System
22 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
15
16
6+7+9
Relationship
Twisted pair
The technical specifications of the RS-530 DCE cable are as follows.

Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the RS-530 DCE cable
Item
Description
Connector X1
Connector X2
Cable type

OEM
Number of
cores
26
Diameter of the
core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
1.1.1.1.1726 RS-530 DTE Cable

Figure 22-40 shows the structure of the RS-530 DTE cable.
Figure 1.10 Structure of the RS-530 DTE cable
A-A
B-B
1
Pos.1
Pos.1
X1
Pos.25
X2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Pos.28
2. Main label

Copyright Huawei
1498

System
22 Cables
Table 22-44 provides the pin assignments of the RS-530 DTE cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the RS-530 DTE cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
27
20
Twisted pair
28
23
25
26
22
13
14
19
23
24
13
11
12
10
19
20
16
14
15
24
16
11
17
17
18
15
12
22
18
21
6 + 7 + 9 + 10
Pins 6, 7, 9, and 10 are

short-circuited.
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
The technical specifications of the RS-530 DTE cable are as follows.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1499

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.2 Technical specifications of the RS-530 DTE cable

Item
Description
Connector X1
Connector X2
Cable type

OEM
Number of
cores
26
Diameter of
the core
0.32 mm
Length
3m
22.6 Clock Cable

The clock cables include the 75-ohm/120-ohm clock cable and clock transit cable.
22.6.1 75-ohm/120-ohm Clock Cable

The clock cables are available in two types, namely, 75-ohm clock cable and 120-ohm clock
cable. The clock cable is used to receive and transmit external clock signals. In the case of the
75-ohm clock cable, the cable uses an SMB connector at one end to connect to the external
clock interface of the OptiX OSN equipment. The other end of the cable is connected to the
external clock equipment. The connector needs to be prepared on site as required. In the case
of the 120-ohm clock cable, the cable uses an RJ45 connector at one end to connect to the
external clock interface of the OptiX OSN equipment. The other end of the cable is connected
to the external clock equipment. The connector needs to be prepared on site as required.
Figure 22-41 shows the structure of the 75-ohm clock cable. Figure 22-42 shows the structure
of the 120-ohm clock cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1500

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Structure of the 75-ohm clock cable
1. Coaxial connector - SMB
2. Label
Figure 1.2 Structure of the 120-ohm clock cable
1. Label 1 (R) and

label 2 (T)
2. Communication
cable
3. Main
label
4. Network interface
connector - RJ-45

Table 22-46 provides the pin assignments of the 120-ohm clock cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm clock cable
X1
Remarks
X1.1
Blue
W1
X1.2
White
X1.4
Orange
X1.5
White
W2
Figure 1.2 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm clock cable

X1
Relationship
Description
External Clock Mode
External Time Mode

(1 PPS + Time
Information)
X1.1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Twisted pair
CLK receive end (-)

Copyright Huawei
Not defined
1501

System
X1
Relationship
22 Cables
Description
External Clock Mode
External Time Mode

(1 PPS + Time
Information)
X1.2
X1.3
Twisted pair
X1.6
X1.4
Twisted pair
X1.5
X1.7
Twisted pair
X1.8
CLK receive end (+)
Not defined
Not defined
1 PPS signal (-)
Not defined
1 PPS signal (+)
CLK transmit end (-)
Grounding end
CLK transmit end (+)
Grounding end
Not defined
Time information (-)
Not defined
Time information (+)

Item
Description
75-ohm
clock cable
Connector: coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms - straight - female

Cable type: coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm - shielded
Length: 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, and 30 m
120-ohm
clock cable
Connector X: network interface connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - crystal

model connector
Cable type: symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.4
mm - 26 AWG - 2 pairs - PANTONE 430U
Diameter of the internal conductor: 0.4 mm/26 AWG
Length: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m, 50 m, 70 m, and 100 m
22.6.2 One-Channel Clock Transit Cable and Two-Channel Clock

Transit Cable
The clock transit cables are available in two types, namely, one-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm
clock transit cable and two-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable.
Figure 22-43 shows the structure of the one-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable.
Figure 22-44 shows the structure of the two-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1502

System
22 Cables
Figure 1.1 Structure of the one-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable
1. Coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms straight/plug - female
2. Main
label
3. 75-ohm-to-120-ohm transit
PCB
Figure 1.2 Structure of the two-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable
1. Coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms straight/plug - female
2. Label 1:
"1#"
3. Label 2:
"2#"
5. 75-ohm-to-120-ohm transit PCB
6. Label 3:
"1#"
7. Label 4:
"2#"
4. Main
label

Table 22-48 provides the pin assignments of the two-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock
transit cable.
Figure 1.1 Pin assignments of the two-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable
Connector
75-ohm Cable
Color
120-ohm Cable
X1
Core
Blue
W3
Shield layer
White
Core
Blue
Shield layer
White
X2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
W4
1503

System
22 Cables

Item
Description
One
channel
Connector: coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms - straight - female

75-ohm cable: coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm shielded
75-ohm cable: diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm) - diameter of the internal
insulation layer (2.1 mm) - diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm)
120-ohm cable: symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.4
Diameter of the internal conductor of the 120-ohm cable: 0.4 mm/26 AWG
Length: 30 m
Two
channels
Connector X1/X2: coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms - straight - female

75-ohm cable: coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm shielded
75-ohm cable: diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm) - diameter of the internal
insulation layer (2.1 mm) - diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm)
120-ohm cable: symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.4
Diameter of the internal conductor of the 120-ohm cable: 0.4 mm/26 AWG
Length: 30 m
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1504

System
23 Indicators
23
Indicators
About This Chapter

This topic describes the indicators on the OptiX OSN equipment and the indicators on the
boards of the OptiX OSN equipment.
23.1 Indicators on the Cabinet
This topic describes the indicators on the cabinet of the OptiX OSN equipment.
23.2 Alarm Indicators on the Boards
This topic describes the alarm indicators on the boards.
23.1 Indicators on the Cabinet

This topic describes the indicators on the cabinet of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Indicator
Description
Power indicator Power (green)
On: Power is supplied to the equipment.

Off: Power is not supplied to the equipment.
Critical alarm indicator Critical

(red)
On: A critical alarm occurs on the equipment.
Major alarm indicator Major

(orange)
On: A major alarm occurs on the equipment.
Minor alarm indicator Minor

(yellow)
On: A minor alarm occurs on the equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Off: No critical alarm occurs on the equipment.
Off: No major alarm occurs on the equipment.
Off: No minor alarm occurs on the equipment.

Copyright Huawei
1505

System
23 Indicators
23.2 Alarm Indicators on the Boards

This topic describes the alarm indicators on the boards.
1.1.1.1.1733 Board Hardware Status Indicator (STAT)

Status
Meaning
On (green)
The board operates properly.
On (red)
The hardware of the board is faulty or does not

match the equipment.
Off
The board is not powered on or does not start to

work.
STAT indicators are designed for non-service alarms such as alarms related to power, temperature,
abnormal communication, or absent optical modules.
1.1.1.1.1734 Service Activation Status Indicator/Board Status (Active/Standby)
Indicator (ACT)
Status
Meaning of the Service

Activation Status Indicator
Meaning of the Board Status

(Active/Standby) Indicator
On (green)
The services are activated. The

board is in the working state.
The board works as the working

board.
Off
The services are not activated.
The board works as the

protection board.
1.1.1.1.1735 Board Software Status Indicator (PROG)

Status
Meaning
On (green)
The board software or FPGA in the flash is

successfully loaded and stored, or the board
software is successfully initiated.
On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms

repeatedly (green)
The board software is being loaded to the flash or

the FPGA software is being loaded to the FPGA.
On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms

repeatedly (green)
The board software is being initialized and is in

the BIOS boot state.
The board is in the BIOS state because the board

is reset for three times in five minutes.
The board software or FPGA in the flash is lost.
The board software fails to be loaded.
The board software fails to be initialized.
On (red)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1506

System
23 Indicators
Status
Meaning
Off
No power is accessed.
The high-power-consumption board enters the

low-power-consumption mode.
1.1.1.1.1736 Service Alarm Indicator (SRV)

Type of Board
Status
Meaning
Service board
On (green)
The services are normal and no

service alarm is generated.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in

the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in

the services.
Off
The services are not configured and

no alarm is generated, or no power
is supplied to the board.
On (green)

On (red)
A critical alarm occurs.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs.
Off

On (green)

On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in

the subrack.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in

the subrack.
Off

Cross-connect and
timing board
System control board
1.1.1.1.1737 Synchronization Clock Status Indicator (SYNC)

Status
Meaning
On (green)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
The clock works in free-run mode and the

system clock priority list is not set. By default,
the system clock priority list contains only

Copyright Huawei
1507

System
23 Indicators
Status
Meaning
internal sources.
On (red)
The clock works in locked mode and is tracing a

clock source other than the internal sources in
the priority list.
The system clock priority list is set. All the clock

sources, however, are lost except for the internal
clock sources. The clock works in holdover mode or
free-run mode.
1.1.1.1.1738 Alarm Mute Indicator (ALMC)

Status
Meaning
On (yellow)
The board is in the alarm mute state.
Off
When an alarm is generated, the equipment emits an alarm

sound.
1.1.1.1.1739 Power Monitoring Indicators

Indicator
Status
Meaning
48 V power supply indicator of

channel A (PWRA)
On (green)
The 48 V power supply of channel

A is normal.
On (red)

A is faulty (lost or failed).
On (green)

B is normal.
On (red)

B is faulty (lost or failed).
On (green)
The +3.3 V backup power supply of

the system is normal.
On (red)
The +3.3 V backup power supply of

the system is lost.
48 V power supply indicator of

channel B (PWRB)
+3.3 V backup power supply

indicator of the system (PWRC)
1.1.1.1.1740 Ethernet Indicators

Indicator
Status
Meaning
Connection status indicator

LINK (green)
On
The fiber cable is successfully

connected to the equipment.
Off
The fiber cable is not connected to the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1508

System
Indicator
23 Indicators
Status
Meaning
equipment.
Data receiving and

transmission indicator ACT
(orange)
Flashing
The Ethernet interface is receiving or

transmitting data.
Off
The Ethernet interface is not receiving

or transmitting data.
1.1.1.1.1741 FAN Running Status Indicator (STATE)

Status
Meaning
On (green)
The fan operates properly.
On (red)
The fan, fan power supply board, or fan control

board is abnormal.
On (yellow)
The fan stops when the temperature is very low.
1.1.1.1.1742 Indicators on the Front Panel of the COA

Indicator
Status
Meaning
Running indicator
RUN (green)
Flashing once every two

seconds (green)
The COA operates properly.
Flashing once every four

seconds (green)
The COA is in database protection

mode. The communication between the
COA and the SCC is interrupted.
Flashing five times every

second (green)
The program is being started or loaded.
On (red)
Errors occur during the memory selfcheck.
Flashing thrice every other

second (red)
A critical alarm occurs.
Flashing twice every other

second (red)
A major alarm occurs.
Flashing once every other

second (red)
A minor alarm occurs.
Alarm indicator
ALM
1.1.1.1.1743 Power Indicator (POWER)

Status
Meaning
On (green)
The input of the power supply is normal.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1509

System
23 Indicators
Status
Meaning
Off
No power is supplied or the power supply fails.
1.1.1.1.1744 Indicators on the UPM

Module
Indicator
Status
Meaning
Rectifier
module
RUN
(green)
On
The rectifier module operates properly.
Off
The rectifier module is faulty or is

disabled.
ALM
(yellow)
Off
The rectifier module operates properly.
On
An alarm and revertive protection occur on

the module.
Flashing
The communication is interrupted.
FAULT
(red)
On
The rectifier module is faulty.
RUN
Flashing
(green)
Flashing slowly (on for 1s and off for 1s

repeatedly): The entire power system is
normal.
Monitoring
module
Flashing quickly (on for 125 ms and off for

125 ms repeatedly): The power system is
not registered or the communication is
interrupted.
ALM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
On (red)
The entire power system is faulty. In

normal situations, the indicator is off.

Copyright Huawei
1510

System
24 Labels
24
Labels
About This Chapter

This topic describes the safety labels and engineering labels on the OptiX OSN equipment.
24.1 Safety Labels
Various safety labels are attached to the equipment. This topic provides the indications and
positions of the safety labels.
24.2 Engineering Labels
The engineering labels should be prepared according to the local engineering specifications or
Huawei engineering specifications.
24.1 Safety Labels

Various safety labels are attached to the equipment. This topic provides the indications and
positions of the safety labels.
24.1.1 Label Description

Labels, such as the ESD protection label, grounding label, and fan warning label are attached
to the subrack.
Figure 1.1 Labels on the equipment
Label
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Label Name
Indication
ESD protection
label
The equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Laser safety
class label
The power class of

the laser source

Copyright Huawei
1511

System
Label
! ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY
DON'T TOUCH THE

FAN LEAVESBEFORE
THEYSLOW DOWN !
APD
24 Labels
Label Name
Indication
Grounding label
The grounding
position
Periodic
cleaning label
The air filter should

be cleaned
periodically.
Fan warning
label
The fan blades

should not be
touched when the
fan is rotating.
APD warning
label
The overload point

of the indicator is
9 dBm.
RoHS label
The equipment may

contain some of the
poisonous
substances
specified by the
regulations in
China, but can be
safely used within a
period of 50 years.
The equipment
should be recycled
or reused after 50
years.
Product
nameplate label
The product name

and certification
Receiver
MAX:-9dBm
In the case of the enhanced subrack:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1512

System
Label
24 Labels
Label Name
Indication
Certificate of
qualification
label
The equipment is
qualified.
24.1.2 Label Position

The ESD protection label and grounding label are attached to the subrack. The laser safety
class label and APD warning label are attached to the front panel of the board.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1513

System
24 Labels
Figure 1.1 Positions of the labels attached to the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack (1)
50
DON'T
TOUCH THE
FAN LEAVES BEFORE

THEY SLOW DOWN !
ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY
Figure 1.2 Positions of the labels attached to the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack (2)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1514

System
24 Labels
Figure 1.3 Positions of the labels attached to the board

SL16
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
APD
Receiver
MAX:-9dBm
BA2
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
24.2 Engineering Labels

The engineering labels should be prepared according to the local engineering specifications or
Huawei engineering specifications.
Table 24-2 provides the engineering specifications of Huawei.
For information on how to prepare and attach labels, see the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System Installation Guide.
Figure 1.2 Huawei specifications for the engineering labels
Label
Engineer
ing label
for the
power
cable
Illustration
TO:
A01
B08
(1)
-48V2
Description
TO:
B03
-48V2
(2)
(1) Label on the loaded cabinet side, that is,

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
On the loaded cabinet side, the

label marked with "A01/B08
48V2" on the cable indicates
that the cable supplies the 48
V2 power. This cable is led out
from the eighth connector in the
second row of the 48 V bus bar
in the power distribution cabinet
in row A and column 01 in the
1515

System
Label
24 Labels
Illustration
Description
the position of the cable on the power

distribution cabinet side
equipment room.
(2) Label on the power distribution cabinet

side, that is, the position of the cable on the
loaded cabinet side
Engineer
ing label
for the
external
alarm
cable
On the power distribution

cabinet side, the label marked
with "B0348V2" on the
cable indicates that the cable
supplies the 48 V2 power. This
cable is led out from the loaded
cabinet in row B and column 03
in the equipment room. In the
case of the PGND cable and
BGND cable, specify only the
row number and column number
of the power distribution
cabinet. It is not required to
specify the connector on the bus
bar.
The external alarm cable is
connected to the power
distribution cabinet (the first
cabinet in each row used for
power distribution). Attach
labels to the terminals of the
power distribution cabinet to
indicate the equipment that uses
the terminals. No engineering
label needs to be attached to the
equipment side, unless otherwise
specified.
"A01" indicates that the alarm
cable connects the power
distribution cabinet and the
cabinet in row A and column 01
in the equipment room.
Engineer
ing label
for the
network
cable
"A01-03-06-05" indicates that

the local end of the network
cable is connected to network
port 05 in slot 06 of subrack 03
in the cabinet in row A and
column 01 in the equipment
room.
"B02-03-12" indicates that the
opposite end of the network
cable is connected to network
port 12 in subrack 03 in the
cabinet in row B and column 02
in the equipment room. It is not
required to specify the slot
number.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1516

System
Label
Illustration
24 Labels
Description
Engineer
ing label
for the
fiber that
connects
two
pieces of
equipme
nt
"A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that

the local end of the fiber is
connected to optical receiving
room.
Engineer
ing label
for the
fiber that
connects
the
equipme
nt and
the ODF
"ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates
that the local end of the fiber is
connected to the optical
receiving terminal in row 01 and
column 01 of the ODF in row G
and column 01 in the equipment
room.
Engineer
ing label
for the
trunk
cable
that
connects
the
equipme
nt and
the DDF

the local end of the trunk cable
is connected to the receiving
terminal of trunk cable 01 in slot
01 of subrack 03 in the cabinet
in row A and column 01 in the
equipment room.
Engineer
ing label
for the
subscrib
er cable
"A01-03-01-01" indicates that

the local end of the subscriber
cable is connected to cable 01 in
slot 01 of subrack 03 in the
cabinet in row A and column 01

the opposite end of the fiber is
connected to optical receiving
room.
"DDF-G01-01-01-AR" indicates
that the opposite end of the trunk
cable is connected to the
receiving terminal of direction A
(connected to the optical
transmission equipment) in row
01 and column 01 of the DDF in
row G and column 01 in the
equipment room.
TO:
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
"G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that

the opposite end of the fiber is
connected to optical transmitting
in the cabinet in row G and
room.

Copyright Huawei
1517

System
Label
Illustration
24 Labels
Description
in the equipment room.
"MDF-G01-01-01" indicates
that the opposite end of the
subscriber cable is connected to
the terminal in row 01 and
column 01 of the MDF in row G
and column 01 in the equipment
room.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1518

System
25
25 Board Information Quick Reference
Board Information Quick Reference
About This Chapter

This topic provides information about whether a board is supported by the OptiX OSN
products, the parameters specified for the interfaces of the boards (including the parameters
specified for optical interfaces, electrical interfaces, and auxiliary interfaces), the loopback
capability of each board, the functions supported by each board, and the protection schemes
supported by each board.
25.1 Board Version Replacement
The board version replacement function is used only for some specified boards. Before using
this function, you should be familiar with the mapping between boards and their substitute
boards.
25.2 Quick Reference Table for Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the common parameters specified for the interfaces of boards.
25.3 Quick Reference of Board Functions
This topic describes the functions supported by SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, and
packet boards.
25.4 Loopback Capability of the Boards
The SDH boards, PDH boards, and data boards of the OptiX OSN equipment support various
types of loopbacks.
25.5 Protection Schemes Supported by Each Board
The SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, and packet boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
support various protection schemes.
25.6 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX OSN series
equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1519

System
25.1 Board Version Replacement

The board version replacement function is used only for some specified boards. Before using
this function, you should be familiar with the mapping between boards and their substitute
boards.
Table 25-1 provides the mapping between boards and their substitute boards.
Figure 1.3 Mapping between boards and their substitute boards
Substitute Board
To-Be-Substituted Board
Physical Board
Logical Board
Physical Board
N1PSXCS
N1SXCSA
N1SXCSA
N1PSXCS
N1SXCSA
N1EXCSA
N1EXCSA
N1SXCSA
N1UXCSA
N1UXCSA
N1SXCSB
N1UXCSB
N1UXCSB
N1SXCSB
N2PSXCSA
N1PSXCS
N1PSXCS
N2PSXCSA
N3PSXCSA
N1SXCSA
N1SXCSA
N1PSXCS
N1PSXCS
N2PSXCSA
N3PSXCSA
N1SL1A
N1SL1
N2PSXCSA
N1SL1
N1SL1A
N1SL4A
N1SL4
N1SL4
N1SL4A
N1SL64
N1SL64
N2SL64
N2SL64
T2SL64
T2SL64
N1SLD4A
N1SLD4
N1SLD4
N1SLD4A
N1SLQ1A
N1SLQ1
N1SLQ1
N1SLQ1A
N1SLQ4A
N1SLQ4
N1SLQ4
N1SLQ4A
N2SLQ16
N1SLQ16
N1SLQ16
N2SLQ16
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1520

System
Substitute Board
Physical Board
Logical Board
Physical Board
N3SL16
N1SL16
N1SL16
N3SL16
N3SL16A
N1SL16
N1SL16A
N3SL16
N3SLQ41
N1SLQ1
N1SLQ1
N1SLQ4
N1SLQ4
N2SLQ1
N2SLQ4
N4SF64
N2SLQ1
N3SLQ41
N2SLQ4
N1SF64
N1SF64
N4SF64
N4SL64
N1SL64
N1SL64
N2SL64
N2SL64
T2SL64
N4SL64
N4SLD64
N1SLD64
T2SL64
N1SLD64
N4SLD64
N4SLO16
N1SLO16
N1SLO16
N4SLO16
N4SLQ16
N1SLQ16
N1SLQ16
N2SLQ16
N2SLQ16
N4SLQ16
N2PD3
N1PD3
N1PD3
N2PD3
N2PL3
N1PL3
N1PL3
N2PL3
N2PL3A
N1PL3A
N1PL3A
N2PL3A
N2PQ1
N1PQ1
N1PQ1
N2PQ1
N2PQ1A
N2PQ1
N1PQ1A
N2PQ1B
N2PQ1
N1PQ1B
N2SPQ4
N1SPQ4
N1SPQ4
N2SPQ4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1521

System
Substitute Board
Physical Board
Logical Board
Physical Board
R2PD1
R1PD1
R1PD1
R2PD1
R2PD1A
R2PD1
R1PD1A
R2PD1B
R2PD1
R1PD1B
N2EFS0
N1EFS0
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N2EFS4
N1EFS4
N1EFS4
N2EFS4
N2EFT8
N1EFT8
N1EFT8
N2EFT8
N2EFT8A
N1EFT8A
N1EFT8A
N2EFT8A
N2EGS2
N1EGS2
N1EGS2
N2EGS2
N2EGT2
N1EGT2
N1EGT2
N2EGT2
N3EFS4
N1EFS4
N1EFS4
N2EFS4
N2EFS4
N3EFS4
N3EGS2
N1EGS2
N1EGS2
N2EGS2
N2EGS2
N3EGS2
N4EFS0
N1EFS0
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
N4EGS4
N3EGS4
N3EGS4
N4EGS4
N5EFS0
N1EFS0
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
N5EFS0
Q2SAP
Q1SAP
N4EFS0
Q1SAP
Q2SAP
TN12OBU1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
TN11OBU1
Copyright Huawei
TN11OBU1
1522

System
A substitute board may not support all the functions of its to-be-substituted board. Therefore,
when you replace a board with its substitute board, consider the differences between the two
boards. If a substitute board does not support an enabled function of its to-be-substituted
board and the enabled function may be used on the live network, the board cannot be
replaced. For restrictions on board replacement, see Table 25-2.
Figure 1.4 Restrictions on board replacement
Board That Supports the
Board Version
Replacement Function
Board That Cannot Be

Substituted
Condition
N1SL16A
N2SL16A
The TCM function is

enabled for the
N2SL16A/N3SL16A.
N3SL16A
N1SL64
N2SL64
T2SL64
The TCM function is

enabled or AU-3 services are
configured for the
N2SL64/T2SL64.
N1SLQ16
N2SLQ16
The TCM function is

configured for the
N2SLQ16.
N3SL16
N2SL16
The TCM function is

configured for the N2SL16.
N3SL16A
N2SL16A
AU-3 services are

configured for the
N2SL16A.
N3SLO1
N2SLO1
AU-3 services are

configured for the N2SLO1.
N4SL64
N2SL64
T2SL64
The TCM function is

configured for the
N2SL64/T2SL64.
N1EFS0
The N1EFS0 is
configured with QoS
functions.
If an N4EFS0/N2EFS0 is
configured as an
N1EFS0 and the
simulation package
loading method is used,
the board software of the
N1EFS0 is loaded. As a
result, a cold reset is
performed on the board
and the board version
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1523

System
Board That Supports the

Board Version
Replacement Function
Board That Cannot Be

Substituted
Condition
replacement function
becomes ineffective.
Therefore, an
N4EFS0/N2EFS0 must
not be configured as an
N1EFS0.
N2EFS4
N1EFS4
If an N2EFS4 is configured
as an N1EFS4 and the
simulation package loading
method is used, the board
software of the N1EFS4 is
loaded. As a result, a cold
reset is performed on the
board and the board version
Therefore, an N2EFS4 must
N1EFS4.
N4EFS0
N2EFS0
If an N4EFS0 is configured
as an N2EFS0 and the
simulation package loading
method is used, the board
software of the N2EFS0 is
loaded. As a result, a cold
reset is performed on the
board and the board version
Therefore, an N4EFS0 must
N2EFS0.
N2EGS2
N1EGS2
The N1EGS2 is configured

with QoS functions.
N1BPA
N2BPA
The ALS function is

required but not enabled on
the line board.
N2BPA
N1BPA
The ALS function is

required but not enabled on
the N2BPA.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1524

System
25.2 Quick Reference Table for Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the common parameters specified for the interfaces of boards.
25.2.1 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of SDH

Boards
This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of SDH boards.
Table 25-3 lists the common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the SDH
boards.
Table 25-4 lists the common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the SDH
boards with FEC function.
Table 25-5 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SDH boards.
Figure 1.5 Common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the SDH boards
Board Name
SL1 and SL1A
SLQ1 and
SLQ1A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Optical Module
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimu
m (dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
I-1
-15
S-1.1
Type
of
Fiber
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
-8
-23
-8
Singlemode
LC
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-1.1
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
L-1.2
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
Ve-1.2
-3
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
I-1
-15
-8
-23
-8
Singlemode
LC
S-1.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-1.1
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode

Copyright Huawei
1525

System
Board Name
Optical Module
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
L-1.2
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
Ve-1.2
-3
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
Ie-1
-19
-14
-30
-14
Multimode
LC
SLT1
S-1.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
SL4, SL4A,
SLD4, SLD4A,
SLQ4, and
SLQ4A
I-4
-15
-8
-23
-8
Singlemode
LC
S-4.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-4.1
-3
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-4.2
-3
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
Ve-4.2
-3
-34
-13
Singlemode
LC
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
L-16.2Je
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
V-16.2Je
(BA)
-2
(without
the BA)
3 (without
the BA)
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
SL16
Minimu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
LC
13 (with
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
15 (with
the BA)

Copyright Huawei
1526

System
Board Name
Optical Module
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
U-16.2Je
(BA+PA)
-2
(without
the BA or
PA)
Minimu
m (dBm)
SLD16
SLQ16
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
-28
(without
the BA or
PA)
-9
(without
the BA
or PA)
-32 (with
the PA)
-10 (with
the PA)
the BA)
15 (with
the BA)
SL16A
Maximu
m (dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
3 (without
the BA or
PA)
18 (with
the BA)
Singlemode
LC
I-16
-10
-3
-18
-3
Singlemode
LC
S-16.1
-5
-18
Singlemode
LC
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
Singlemode
LC
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
I-16
-10
-3
-18
-3
Singlemode
LC
S-16.1
-5
-18
Singlemode
LC
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
Singlemode
LC
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
I-16
-10
-3
-18
-3
Singlemode
LC
S-16.1
-5
-18
Singlemode
LC
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
Single-

Copyright Huawei
1527

System
Board Name
SLO16
SL64
Optical Module
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
I-16
-10
-3
-18
-3
Singlemode
LC
S-16.1
-5
-18
Singlemode
LC
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
Singlemode
LC
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
I-64.1
-6
-1
-11
-1
Singlemode
LC
I-64.2
-5
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
S-64.2b
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
L-64.2b
(BA)
-4
(without
the BA)
2 (without
the BA)
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Minimu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
mode
LC
13 (with
the BA)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
15 (with
the BA)
P1L12D2
-24
-7
Singlemode
LC
Le-64.2
-21
-8
Singlemode
LC
Ls-64.2
-21
-8
Single-

Copyright Huawei
1528

System
Board Name
SL64A
Optical Module
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
V-64.2b
(BA+PA
+DCU)
-4
(without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU)
-1
(without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU)
-14
(without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU)
13 (with
the BA)
15 (with
the BA)
-26 (with
the PA)
I-64.2
-5
-1
S-64.2b
-1
L-64.2b
(BA)
-4
(without
the BA)
Minimu
m (dBm)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
mode
LC
13 (with
the BA)
SLD64
Maximu
m (dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
-1
Singlemode
LC
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
2 (without
the BA)
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
15 (with
the BA)
Le-64.2
-21
-8
Singlemode
LC
Ls-64.2
-21
-8
Singlemode
LC
V-64.2b
(BA+PA
+DCU)
-4
(without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU)
-1
(without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU)
-14
(without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU)
-1
Singlemode
LC
13 (with
the BA)
15 (with
the BA)
-26 (with
the PA)
I-64.1
-6
-1
-11
-1
Singlemode
LC
S-64.2b
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC

Copyright Huawei
1529

System
Board Name
Optical Module
Mean Launched
Optical Power
SLQ41
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
I-1
SLH41
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
Minimu
m (dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
-15
-8
-23
-8
Singlemode
LC
S-1.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-1.1
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
L-1.2
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
Ve-1.2
-3
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
I-4
-15
-8
-23
-8
Singlemode
LC
S-4.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-4.1
-3
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-4.2
-3
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
Ve-4.2
-3
-34
-13
Singlemode
LC
S-1.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-1.1
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
S-4.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode

Copyright Huawei
1530

System
Board Name
Optical Module
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimu
m (dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
LC
Figure 1.6 Common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the SDH boards with
FEC function
Board
Name
SF16
Optical Module
Type of
Supporte
d Optical
Interface
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimum
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Ue-16.2c
-5 (without
the BA or
PA)
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimu
m
Overload
(dBm)
-1 (without
the BA or
PA)
-27.5
(without the
BA or PA)
-10
Singlemode
LC
13 (with
the BA)
15 (with
the BA)
-37 (with
the PA)
-5 (without
the BA or
PA)
-1 (without
the BA or
PA)
-27.5
(without the
BA or PA)
-10
Singlemode
LC
13 (with
the BA)
15 (with
the BA)
-37 (with
the PA)
-5 (without
the BA,
RA, or PA)
-1 (without
the BA,
RA, or PA)
-10
Singlemode
LC
15 (with
the BA)
18 (with
the BA)
-27.5
(without the
BA, RA, or
PA)
Ue-64.2c
-3
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Ue-64.2d
-3
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Ue-64.2e
-3
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Ue-64.2c
-4
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
Ue-16.2d
Ue-16.2f
SF64
SF64A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Type of
Fiber

Copyright Huawei
-42 (with
the PA)
1531

System
Board
Name
Optical Module
Type of
Supporte
d Optical
Interface
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimum
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimu
m
Overload
(dBm)
Type of
Fiber
LC
SFD64
Ue-64.2d
-4
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Ue-64.2e
-4
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Ue-64.2c
-4
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Ue-64.2d
-4
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Ue-64.2e
-4
-1
-14
-1
Singlemode
LC
Figure 1.7 Common parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the SDH boards
Board Name
Optical Module
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimu
m (dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
N3SLQ41,
N3SL16A,
N3SLH41,
N4SLO16,
N4SLQ16, and
N1SL4A
CWDM
(80 km)
DWDM
(120
km)
N4SLD64 and
N4SL64
CWDM
(70 km)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Type
of
Fiber
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
-1
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
-23
(1451
nm to
1551
nm)
-9
Singlemode
LC
-22

Copyright Huawei
1532

System
Board Name
Optical Module
Type of
Support
ed
Optical
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimu
m (dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
(1571
nm)
-21
(1591
nm to
1611
nm)
DWDM
(40 km)
-1
-17
-1
Singlemode
LC
DWDM
(80 km)
-1
-24
-9
Singlemode
LC
N4SFD64,
N1SF64,
N1SF64A,
N4SF64, N1SL64,
T2SL64, T2SL64A,
and N2SL64
DWDM
(40 km)
-1
-17
-1
Singlemode
LC
N3SL16
DWDM
(170
km)
-2
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
DWDM
(640
km)
-2
2.5
-28
10
Singlemode
LC
N1SF16
DWDM
(640
km)
-2
2.5
-28
10
Singlemode
LC
N1SF16E
DWDM
(120
km)
-1
-28
-9
Singlemode
LC
25.2.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Ports of PDH Boards

This topic lists parameters specified for optical ports of PDH boards.
Table 25-6 lists the common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PDH
boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1533

System
Figure 1.8 Common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the PDH boards
Board
Name
PFL1
Optical Module
Type of
Supporte
d Optical
Interface
Mean Launched Optical

Power
Minimum
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
I-2M
-15
-8
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimu
m
Overload
-23
-8
Type of
Fiber
Singlemode
LC
25.2.3 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Packet

Boards
This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of packet boards.
Table 25-7 lists common parameters specified for optical interfaces of packet processing
boards.Table 25-8 lists common parameters specified for optical interfaces of packet interface
boards.
Figure 1.9 Parameters specified for optical interfaces of packet processing boards
Board Name
N1PEX1
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Optical Module
Type
of
Interfa
ce
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Maximu
m
(dBm)
10GB
ASESR/SW
-7.3
10GB
ASELR/L
W
Type
of
Fiber
Trans
missio
n
Dista
nce
(km)
Receive
r
Sensitivi
ty
(dBm)
Minim
um
Overlo
ad
(dBm)
-1.3
-7.5
-1
Multimode
LC
0.3
-6
-1
-11
-1
Single
-mode
LC
10
10GB
ASEER/E
W
-1
-15
-1
Single
-mode
LC
40
10GB
ASEZR/Z
W
-24
-7
Single
-mode
LC
80

Copyright Huawei
1534

System
Board Name
N2PEX1
PEG16
PEX2
PEG8
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Optical Module
Type
of
Interfa
ce
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Maximu
m
(dBm)
10GB
ASELR
-6
10GB
ASEER
Type
of
Fiber
Trans
missio
n
Dista
nce
(km)
Receive
r
Sensitivi
ty
(dBm)
Minim
um
Overlo
ad
(dBm)
-1
-11
-1
Single
-mode
LC
10
-1
-15
-1
Single
-mode
LC
40
10GB
ASEZR
-24
-7
Single
-mode
LC
80
1000B
ASEZX
-2
-23
-3
Single
-mode
LC
80
1000B
ASEVX
-5
-23
-3
Single
-mode
LC
40
1000B
ASELX
-9
-3
-20
-3
Single
-mode
LC
10
1000B
ASESX
-9.5
-2.5
-17
Multimode
LC
0.5
10GB
ASELR
-6
-1
-11
-1
Single
-mode
LC
10
10GB
ASEER
-1
-15
-1
Single
-mode
LC
40
10GB
ASEZR
-24
-7
Single
-mode
LC
80
1000B
ASEZX
-2
-23
-3
Single
-mode
LC
80
1000B
ASEVX
-5
-23
-3
Single
-mode
LC
40
1000B
ASE-
-9
-3
-20
-3
Single
-mode
10

Copyright Huawei
1535

System
Board Name
Optical Module
Type
of
Interfa
ce
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Maximu
m
(dBm)
Receive
r
Sensitivi
ty
(dBm)
Minim
um
Overlo
ad
(dBm)
LX
1000B
ASESX
Type
of
Fiber
Trans
missio
n
Dista
nce
(km)
LC
-9.5
-2.5
-17
Multimode
LC
0.5
Figure 1.10 Parameters specified for optical interfaces of packet interface boards
Board
Name
CQ1
PEFF8
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Optical Module
Type of
Interfac
e
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Maximu
m
(dBm)
S-1.1
-15
L-1.1
Type of
Fiber
Transmi
ssion
Distance
(km)
Receive
r
Sensitivi
ty
(dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d (dBm)
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
2 to 15
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
15 to 40
L-1.2
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
40 to 80
100BAS
E-ZX
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
80
100BAS
E-VX
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
40
100BAS
E-LX
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
15
100BAS
E-FX
-19
-14
-30
-14
Multimode
LC

Copyright Huawei
1536

System
25.2.4 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Packet

Boards
This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of the EoD.
Table 25-9 lists the parameters specified for optical interfaces of the EoD.
Figure 1.11 Parameters specified for optical interfaces of the EoD
Board
Name
EDQ41
Optical Module
Type of
Interface
Mean Launched Optical

Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimu
m
Overload
(dBm)
Type of
Fiber
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
S-1.1
-8
-15
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-1.1
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
L-1.2
-5
-34
-10
Singlemode
LC
S-4.1
-8
-15
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-4.1
-2
-3
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
L-4.2
-2
-3
-28
-8
Singlemode
LC
Ve-4.2
-2
-3
-34
-13
Singlemode
LC
25.2.5 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Data

Boards
This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of data boards.
Table 25-10 lists the common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the data
boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1537

System
Figure 1.12 Common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the data boards
Board Name
Optical Module
Type
of
Suppo
rted
Optica
l
Interf
ace
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity
(dBm)
Minim
um
Overlo
ad
(dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
Minim
um
(dBm)
Maxim
um
(dBm)
EGS2, EGS4, EGR2, EGT2, 1000B

EMS2, EMS4, EGS4, EGS4A ASEand EMR0
ZX (80
km)
-2
-23
-3
Singl
emode
LC
1000B
ASEVX
(40
km)
-5
-23
-3
Singl
emode
LC
1000B
ASELX (10
km)
-9
-3
-20
-3
Singl
emode
LC
1000B
ASESX
(0.5
km)
-9.5
-2.5
-17
Multi
mode
LC
EAS2
10GB
ASELR/L
W
-6
-1
-11
-1
Singl
emode
LC
EFF8, EFF8A
100BA
SELX(15
km)
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singl
emode
LC
100BA
SEFX(2
km)
-19
-14
-30
-14
Multi
mode
LC
S-4.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singl
emode
LC
L-4.1
-3
-28
-8
Singl
emode
ADL4, IDL4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1538

System
Board Name
ADQ1, IDQ1
MST4
Optical Module
Type
of
Suppo
rted
Optica
l
Interf
Mean Launched
Optical Power
L-4.2
-3
-28
-8
Singl
emode
LC
Ve-4.2
-3
-34
-13
Singl
emode
LC
Ie-1
-19
-14
-30
-14
Multi
mode
LC
S-1.1
-15
-8
-28
-8
Singl
emode
LC
L-1.1
-5
-34
-10
Singl
emode
LC
L-1.2
-5
-34
-10
Singl
emode
LC
Ve-1.2
-3
-34
-10
Singl
emode
LC
X3.29
6/
(DVBASI)
EN500
83-9
-15
-8
-31
-8
Singl
emode
LC
-19
-14
-30
-14
Singl
emode
LC
-9.5
-2.5
-17
Singl
e-
Minim
um
(dBm)
Maxim
um
(dBm)
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity
(dBm)
Minim
um
Overlo
ad
(dBm)
LC
200M5SN-I
200SMIssue 02 (2013-01-18)
Type
of
Fiber

Copyright Huawei
1539

System
Board Name
Optical Module
Type
of
Suppo
rted
Optica
l
Interf
LC-I
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Minim
um
(dBm)
Maxim
um
(dBm)
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity
(dBm)
Minim
um
Overlo
ad
(dBm)
Type
of
Fiber
mode
LC
-10
-3
-21
-3
Multi
mode
LC
-5
-21
Singl
emode
LC
25.3 Quick Reference of Board Functions

This topic describes the functions supported by SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, and
packet boards.
25.3.1 Information Quick Reference of SDH Boards

This topic describes the functions supported by different types of SDH boards.
Table 25-11 provides the functions supported by SDH boards.
Figure 1.13 Basic functions of SDH boards
Funct
ion
ALS
REG
Specif
icatio
ns
PRBS
AU-3
TCM
FEC
Fixed
Wavel
ength
Color
ed
Wave
lengt
h
Tuna
ble
Wavel
ength
N1SL
64
N2SL
64
N4SL
64
T2SL
64
T2SL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1540

System
Funct
ion
ALS
REG
Specif
icatio
ns
PRBS
AU-3
TCM
FEC
Fixed
Wavel
ength
Color
ed
Wave
lengt
h
Tuna
ble
Wavel
ength
N1SF
64
N1SF
64A
N1SL
D64
N4SL
D64
N1SL
16
N2SL
16
N3SL
16
N1SL
16A
N2SL
16A
N3SL
16A
N1SL
D16
N1SL
Q16
N2SL
Q16
N4SL
Q16
N1SL
O16
N4SL
O16
N1SF
16
N1SF
64A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1541

System
Funct
ion
ALS
REG
Specif
icatio
ns
PRBS
AU-3
TCM
16E
FEC
Fixed
Wavel
ength
Color
ed
Wave
lengt
h
Tuna
ble
Wavel
ength
NOTE
The
N1S
F16E
supp
orts
the
outband
EFE
C
funct
ion.
N3SL
Q41
N3SL
H41
N1SL
4
N2SL
4
R1SL
4
N1SL
4A
N1SL
Q4
N2SL
Q4
N1SL
Q4A
N1SL
D4
N2SL
D4
R1SL
D4
R3SL
D4
N1SL
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1542

System
Funct
ion
ALS
REG
Specif
icatio
ns
PRBS
AU-3
TCM
FEC
Fixed
Wavel
ength
Color
ed
Wave
lengt
h
Tuna
ble
Wavel
ength
N1SL
T1
N1SL
Q1
N2SL
Q1
R1SL
Q1
N1SL
Q1A
R3SL
Q1
N1SL
1
N2SL
1
N1SL
1A
R1SL
1
R3SL
1
N1SL
H1
N1SE
P1
N2SL
O1
N3SL
O1
D4A
25.3.2 Information Quick Reference of PDH Boards

This topic describes the functions supported by different types of PDH boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1543

System
Table 25-12 provides the functions supported by PDH boards.

Figure 1.14 Basic functions of PDH boards
Function
PRBS
TPS
E13
M13
R1PL1
R1PD1
R2PD1
R3PD1
YNote
N1PQ1
N2PQ1
N1PQM
N1PL3
N2PL3
N1PL3A
N2PL3A
N1PD3
N2PD3
N2PQ3
N1DX1
N1DXA
N1SPQ4
N2SPQ4
N1PFL1
NOTE
The R3PD1 supports the E13 function only in server mode.
25.3.3 Information Quick Reference of Data Boards

This topic describes the functions supported by different types of data boards.
Table 25-13 provides the functions supported by Ethernet boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1544

System
Figure 1.15 Basic functions of Ethernet boards

Fu
ncti
on
EP
L
EV
PL
EP
LA
N
EV
PL
AN
MP
LS
VC
TR
UN
K
spe
cifi
cati
ons
Qo
S
ET
H
OA
M
(80
2.1
ag)
ET
H
OA
M
(80
2.3
ah)
Tes
t
Fra
me
s
Qin
Q
R
M
ON
IG
MP
Sno
opi
ng
R1
EF
T4
N1
EF
T8
16
N2
EF
T8
16
N1
EF
T8
A
N2
EF
T8
A
N1
EG
T2
N2
EG
T2
N1
EF
S0
12
N2
EF
S0
24
N4
EF
S0
24
N5
EF
S0
24
N1
EF
32
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1545

System
Fu
ncti
on
EP
L
EV
PL
EP
LA
N
EV
PL
AN
MP
LS
VC
TR
UN
K
spe
cifi
cati
ons
Qo
S
ET
H
OA
M
(80
2.1
ag)
ET
H
OA
M
(80
2.3
ah)
Tes
t
Fra
me
s
Qin
Q
R
M
ON
IG
MP
Sno
opi
ng
N1
EF
S4
12
N2
EF
S4
24
N3
EF
S4
24
N2
EG
S2
48
N3
EG
S2
48
N1
EM
S4
64
N1
EM
S2
48
N1
EG
S4
64
N3
EG
S4
64
N4
EG
S4
64
N2
EG
R2
N2
EM
S0
A
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1546

System
Fu
ncti
on
EP
L
EV
PL
EP
LA
N
EV
PL
AN
MP
LS
VC
TR
UN
K
spe
cifi
cati
ons
Qo
S
ET
H
OA
M
(80
2.1
ag)
ET
H
OA
M
(80
2.3
ah)
Tes
t
Fra
me
s
Qin
Q
R
M
ON
IG
MP
Sno
opi
ng
N1
EA
S2
24
N3
EA
S2
1 Y
7
R0
(
s
l
o
t
b
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
:
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
)
3
4
(
s
l
o
t
b
a
n
d
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1547

System
Fu
ncti
on
EP
L
EV
PL
EP
LA
N
EV
PL
AN
MP
LS
VC
TR
UN
K
spe
cifi
cati
ons
Qo
S
ET
H
OA
M
(80
2.1
ag)
ET
H
OA
M
(80
2.3
ah)
Tes
t
Fra
me
s
Qin
Q
R
M
ON
IG
MP
Sno
opi
ng
w
i
d
t
h
:
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
)
NOTE
For the ETH OAM functions supported by data boards, see "Availability" in the Feature Description.
Table 25-14 provides basic functions supported by SAN/Video boards.

Figure 1.16 Basic functions supported by SAN/Video boards
Functio
n
FC100
FC200
FICON
ESCON
DVBASI
SD-SDI
HD-SDI
N1MST
4
N1VST4
25.3.4 Information Quick Reference of Packet Boards

This topic describes the functions supported by different types of packet boards.
Table 25-15 provides the functions supported by packet Ethernet boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1548

System
Figure 1.17 Basic functions of packet Ethernet boards

F
u
n
ct
io
n
E
L
i
n
e
E
L
A
N
E
A
G
G
R
H
Q
o
S
L
A
G
M
P
L
S
T
u
n
n
el
A
P
S
P D
W is
tr
A ib
P ut
S e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
C
e
n
tr
al
iz
e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
/
M
P
L
S
T
P
O
A
M
M
C
L
A
G
M L
S P
T T
P
M
SP
W
E
T
H
O
A
M
Q
i
n
Q
I
G
M
P
S
n
o
o
pi
n
g
1
5
8
8
v
2
I
n
b
a
n
d
D
C
N
R
M
O
N
T
N
N
1
E
G
8
T
N
N
1
E
X
2
N
1
P
E
G
1
6
N
1
P
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1549

System
F
u
n
ct
io
n
E
L
i
n
e
E
L
A
N
E
A
G
G
R
H
Q
o
S
L
A
G
M
P
L
S
T
u
n
n
el
A
P
S
P D
W is
tr
A ib
P ut
S e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
C
e
n
tr
al
iz
e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
/
M
P
L
S
T
P
O
A
M
M
C
L
A
G
M L
S P
T T
P
M
SP
W
E
T
H
O
A
M
Q
i
n
Q
I
G
M
P
S
n
o
o
pi
n
g
1
5
8
8
v
2
I
n
b
a
n
d
D
C
N
R
M
O
N
T
N
N
1
E
G
1
6
N
1
P
E
X
1
N
2
P
E
X
1
N
1
E
G
8
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1550

System
F
u
n
ct
io
n
E
L
i
n
e
E
L
A
N
E
A
G
G
R
H
Q
o
S
L
A
G
M
P
L
S
T
u
n
n
el
A
P
S
P D
W is
tr
A ib
P ut
S e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
C
e
n
tr
al
iz
e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
/
M
P
L
S
T
P
O
A
M
M
C
L
A
G
M L
S P
T T
P
M
SP
W
E
T
H
O
A
M
Q
i
n
Q
I
G
M
P
S
n
o
o
pi
n
g
1
5
8
8
v
2
I
n
b
a
n
d
D
C
N
R
M
O
N
N
1
P
E
T
F
8
N
1
P
E
F
F
8
N
1
E
D
Q
4
1
P
E
X
2
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1551

System
F
u
n
ct
io
n
E
L
i
n
e
E
L
A
N
E
A
G
G
R
H
Q
o
S
L
A
G
M
P
L
S
T
u
n
n
el
A
P
S
P D
W is
tr
A ib
P ut
S e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
C
e
n
tr
al
iz
e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
/
M
P
L
S
T
P
O
A
M
M
C
L
A
G
M L
S P
T T
P
M
SP
W
E
T
H
O
A
M
Q
i
n
Q
I
G
M
P
S
n
o
o
pi
n
g
1
5
8
8
v
2
I
n
b
a
n
d
D
C
N
R
M
O
N
Q
1
P
E
G
S
2
R
1
P
E
G
S
1
R
1
P
E
F
4
F
R
1
P
E
F
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1552

System
F
u
n
ct
io
n
E
L
i
n
e
E
L
A
N
E
A
G
G
R
H
Q
o
S
L
A
G
M
P
L
S
T
u
n
n
el
A
P
S
P D
W is
tr
A ib
P ut
S e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
C
e
n
tr
al
iz
e
d
M
P
L
S
O
A
M
/
M
P
L
S
T
P
O
A
M
M
C
L
A
G
M L
S P
T T
P
M
SP
W
E
T
H
O
A
M
Q
i
n
Q
I
G
M
P
S
n
o
o
pi
n
g
1
5
8
8
v
2
I
n
b
a
n
d
D
C
N
R
M
O
N
T Y
N
N
1
E
T
M
C
T
N
N
1
E
F
F
8
S
8
25.4 Loopback Capability of the Boards

The SDH boards, PDH boards, and data boards of the OptiX OSN equipment support various
types of loopbacks.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1553

System
Table 25-16 provides the loopback capability of the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
Figure 1.18 Loopback capability of the SDH boards
Board
Inloop at an
Interface
Outloop at
an Interface
Inloop on a
VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-3 or
VC-12 Path
N1SL1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
R1SL1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N2SL1
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SL4
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
R1SL4
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SL16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N3SL16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SL64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N2SL64
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N4SL64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SF64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SF64A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N4SF64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N4SFD64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SLD64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N4SLD64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SL16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1554

System
Board
Inloop at an
Interface
Outloop at
an Interface
Inloop on a
VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-3 or
VC-12 Path
N2SL16
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N3SL16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SL16A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N2SL16A
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N3SL16A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SLD16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SLQ16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N2SLQ16
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N4SLQ16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SLO16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N4SLO16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SF16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SF16E
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N3SLQ41
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N3SLH41
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SL4
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N2SL4
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SL4A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
R1SL4
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
Not
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1555

System
Board
Inloop at an
Interface
Outloop at
an Interface
Inloop on a
VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-3 or
VC-12 Path
supported
supported
N1SLQ4
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SLQ4A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N2SLQ4
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SLD4
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SL4DA
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N2SLD4
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
R1SLD4
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SLT1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SLQ1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SLQ1A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N2SLQ1
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
R1SLQ1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SL1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SL1A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N2SL1
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
R1SL1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1SLH1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
N1SEP1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1556

System
Board
Inloop at an
Interface
Outloop at
an Interface
Inloop on a
VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-3 or
VC-12 Path
N2SLO1
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N3SLO1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Table 25-17 provides information on whether each SDH board of the OptiX OSN equipment
supports the insertion of the AU_AIS when the board is looped back.
Figure 1.19 Information on whether each SDH board of the OptiX OSN equipment supports the
insertion of the AU_AIS when the board is looped back
Board
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Port Side
(Inloop at an
Interface)
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Cross-Connect
Side (Outloop at
an Interface)
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Cross-Connect
Side (Inloop on
a VC-4 Path)
Insertion of
the AU_AIS to
the Port Side
(Outloop on a
VC-4 Path)
N1SL64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N4SL64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N2SL64
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SF64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N4SF64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SF64A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N4SFD64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SLD64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N4SLD64
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
N1SL16
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N2SL16
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N3SL16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SL16A
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N2SL16A
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N3SL16A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SLD16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SLQ16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N2SLQ16
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N4SLQ16
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1557

System
Board
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Port Side
(Inloop at an
Interface)
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Cross-Connect
Side (Outloop at
an Interface)
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Cross-Connect
Side (Inloop on
a VC-4 Path)
Insertion of
the AU_AIS to
the Port Side
(Outloop on a
VC-4 Path)
N1SLO16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N4SLO16
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SF16
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SF16E
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N3SLQ41
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N3SLH41
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SL4
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SL4A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N2SL4
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
R1SL4
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SLQ4
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SLQ4A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N2SLQ4
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SLD4
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SLD4A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N2SLD4
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
R1SLD4
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SLT1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SLQ1
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SLQ1A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N2SLQ1
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
R1SLQ1
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SL1
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SL1A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N2SL1
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
R1SL1
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N1SLH1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1SEP1
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1558

System
Board
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Port Side
(Inloop at an
Interface)
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Cross-Connect
Side (Outloop at
an Interface)
Insertion of the
AU_AIS to the
Cross-Connect
Side (Inloop on
a VC-4 Path)
Insertion of
the AU_AIS to
the Port Side
(Outloop on a
VC-4 Path)
N2SLO1
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
N3SLO1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Table 25-18 provides the loopback capability of the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
Figure 1.20 Loopback capability of the PDH boards
Board
Inloop at an Interface
Outloop at an Interface
R1PL1
Supported
Supported
R1PD1
Supported
Supported
N1PQ1
Supported
Supported
N1PQM
Supported
Supported
N1PD3
Supported
Supported
N1PL3
Supported
Supported
N2PQ3
Supported
Supported
N2SPQ4
Supported
Supported
N1PFL1
Supported
Supported
Table 25-19 provides the loopback capability of the data boards of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 1.21 Loopback capability of the data boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
Board
Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC4 Path
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC-3
Path
N1EFS4
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N2EFS4
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N3EFS4
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1559

System
Board
Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC4 Path
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC-3
Path
N1EFS0
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N2EFS0
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N4EFS0
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N5EFS0
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1EFS0A
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1EGT2
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N2EGT2
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1EFT8
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N2EFT8
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N1EFT8A
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N2EFT8A
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
R1EFT4
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N1EMS4
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1EMS2
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1EGS4
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N3EGS4
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N2EGS4
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N4EGS4
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1560

System
Board
Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC4 Path
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC-3
Path
N2EGS2
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
N3EGS2
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N2EGR2
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1EAS2
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N3EAS2
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N2EMR0
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Table 25-20 provides the loopback capability of the ATM/IMA boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
Figure 1.22 Loopback capability of the ATM/IMA boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
Board
Outloop at an
External
Interface
Inloop at an
External
Interface
Outloop at an
Internal
Interface
Inloop at an
Internal
Interface
N1ADL4
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1ADQ1
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1IDL4
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1IDL4A
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1IDQ1
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
N1IDQ1A
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Table 25-21 provides the loopback capability of the packet Ethernet boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1561

System
Figure 1.23 Loopback capability of the packet Ethernet boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
Board
Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC4 Path
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC-3
Path
N1PEX1
Not
supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N2PEX1
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1PEX2
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1PEG16
Not
supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1PEG8
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1PETF8
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
N1PEFF8
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
R1PEFS8
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
R1PEF4F
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
R1PEGS1
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Q1PEGS2
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
TNN1EG8
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
TNN1EG1
6
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
TNN1EX2
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
TNN1ETM
C
Supported
Supported
Supported
(only by
GE ports)
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
TNN1EFF
8
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Table 25-22 provides the loopback capability of the channelized STM-1 CES boards of the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1562

System

Figure 1.24 Loopback capability of the channelized STM-1 CES boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment
Board
Inloop
at a
Port
Outloo
p at a
Port
Inloop
on a
VC-4
Path
Outloo
p on a
VC-4
Path
Inloop on a
VC-12 Path
Outloop on a
VC-12 Path
N1CQ1
Support
ed
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Supported
Supported
TNN1CO1
Support
ed
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Supported
Supported
Table 25-23 provides the loopback capability of the packet ATM boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
Figure 1.25 Loopback capability of the packet ATM boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
Board
Inloop at a
Port
Outloop at
a Port
Inloop on a VC-4
Path
Outloop on a VC4 Path
TNN1AFO1
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Table 25-24 provides the loopback capability of the dual-domain boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
Figure 1.26 Loopback capability of the dual-domain boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
Board
Inloop at
a Port
Outloop
at a Port
Inloop on
a VC-4
Path
Outloop
on a VC4 Path
Outloop on a VC3/VC-12 Path
N1EDQ41
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Table 25-25 provides the loopback capability of the SAN/Video boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
Figure 1.27 Loopback capability of the SAN/Video boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
Board
Inloop at
a Port
Outloop
at a Port
Inloop on
a VC-4
Path
Outloop
on a VC4 Path
N1MST4
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not supported
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1563

System
Board
Inloop at
a Port
Outloop
at a Port
Inloop on
a VC-4
Path
Outloop
on a VC4 Path
N1VST4
Supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not supported
25.5 Protection Schemes Supported by Each Board

The SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, and packet boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
support various protection schemes.
Table 25-26 lists the protection schemes that the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
support.
Figure 1.28 Protection schemes that the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN equipment support
Board
Protection Scheme
TwoFiber
Ring
MSP
FourFiber
Ring
MSP
Linear
MSP
SNCP
SNCT
P
SNC
MP
MS
P
and
SNC
P
Fibe
rSha
red
Prot
ectio
n
TPS
Prote
ction
N1SL64
N2SL64
N4SL64
N1SF64
A
N4SF64
N4SFD6
4
N1SLD6
4
N4SLD6
4
N1SL16
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1564

System
Board
Protection Scheme
TwoFiber
Ring
MSP
FourFiber
Ring
MSP
Linear
MSP
SNCP
SNCT
P
SNC
MP
MS
P
and
SNC
P
Fibe
rSha
red
Prot
ectio
n
TPS
Prote
ction
N2SL16
N3SL16
N1SL16
A
N2SL16
A
N3SL16
A
N1SLD1
6
N1SLQ1
6
N4SLQ1
6
N1SLO1
6
N4SLO1
6
N1SF16
N1SF16E
N3SLQ4
1
N3SLH4
1
N1SL4
N2SL4
N1SL4A
R1SL4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1565

System
Board
Protection Scheme
TwoFiber
Ring
MSP
FourFiber
Ring
MSP
Linear
MSP
SNCP
SNCT
P
SNC
MP
MS
P
and
SNC
P
Fibe
rSha
red
Prot
ectio
n
TPS
Prote
ction
N1SLQ4
N2SLQ4
N1SLQ4
A
N2SLD4
N1SLD4
A
R1SLD4
N1SLT1
N1SLQ1
N2SLQ1
R1SLQ1
N1SL1
N2SL1
N1SL1A
N1SLH1
N1SEP1
N3SLO1
Note: "" means that the board supports the protection scheme and "x" means that the
board does not support the protection scheme.
Table 25-27 lists the protection schemes that the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
support.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1566

System
Figure 1.29 Protection schemes that the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN equipment support
Board
Protection Scheme
TPS
Protection
for the E1
Services
TPS
Protection
for the
E1/T1
Services
TPS
Protection
for the
E3/T3
Services
TPS
Protection
for the
E4/STM-1
Services
TPS
Protection
for the DDN
Services
R1PL1
R1PD1
N1PQ1
N1PQM
N1PL3
N2PL3
N1PL3A
N2PL3A
N1PD3
N2PD3
N2PQ3
N1DX1
N1DXA
N2SPQ4
N1PFL1
Table 25-28 lists the protection schemes that the data boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
support.
Figure 1.30 Protection schemes that the data boards of the OptiX OSN equipment support
Board
R1EFT
4
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Protection Scheme
LCA
S
STP/
RST
P
MST
P
TP
S
Pr
ote
cti
on
B
P
S
Pr
ot
ec
ti
on
P
P
S
Pr
ot
ec
ti
on
L
A
G
D
L
A
G
L
P
T
R
P
R
MSP,
SNCP,
SNCM
P, and
SNCT
P
ATM
Protect
ion

Copyright Huawei
1567

System
Board
Protection Scheme
LCA
S
STP/
RST
P
MST
P
TP
S
Pr
ote
cti
on
B
P
S
Pr
ot
ec
ti
on
P
P
S
Pr
ot
ec
ti
on
L
A
G
D
L
A
G
L
P
T
R
P
R
MSP,
SNCP,
SNCM
P, and
SNCT
P
ATM
Protect
ion
N1EFT
8
N2EFT
8
N1EFT
8A
N2EFT
8A
N1EG
T2
N2EG
T2
N1EFS
0
N2EFS
0
N4EFS
0
N5EFS
0
N1EFS
0A
N1EFS
4
N2EFS
4
N3EFS
4
N2EG
S2
N3EG
S2
N1EM
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1568

System
Board
Protection Scheme
LCA
S
STP/
RST
P
MST
P
TP
S
Pr
ote
cti
on
B
P
S
Pr
ot
ec
ti
on
P
P
S
Pr
ot
ec
ti
on
L
A
G
D
L
A
G
L
P
T
R
P
R
MSP,
SNCP,
SNCM
P, and
SNCT
P
ATM
Protect
ion
N1EM
S2
N3EG
S4
N4EG
S4
N2EG
R2
N2EM
R0
N1EA
S2
N3EA
S2
N1AD
L4
N1AD
Q1
N1IDL
4
N1IDQ
1
N1MS
T4
N1VS
T4
S4
Table 25-29 lists the protection schemes that the packet boards of the OptiX OSN equipment
support.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1569

System
Figure 1.31 Protection schemes that the packet boards of the OptiX OSN equipment support
Board
Protection Scheme
MPLS
Tunnel
1+1/1:1
Protecti
on
Packetbased
linear
MSP
LPT
LAG
MPLS
PW
1+1/1:1
MC-LAG
N1PEX1
N2PEX1
N1PEX2
N1PEG16
N1PEG8
TNN1EG8
TNN1EG16
TNN1EX2
N1PETF8
N1PEFF8
TNN1ETMC
R1PEFS8
R1PEF4F
R1PEGS1
Q1PEGS2
TNN1EFF8
Table 25-30 lists the protection schemes that the dual-domain boards of the OptiX OSN
equipment support.
Figure 1.32 Protection schemes that the dual-domain boards of the OptiX OSN equipment support
Board
Protection Scheme
SDH Protection
N1ED
Q41
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Packet
Protection
Twofiber
MSP
ring
Fourfiber
MSP
ring
Linear
MSP
SNCP
SNCM
P
SNCT
P
LAG
MCLAG

Copyright Huawei
1570

System
25.6 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of

Each Board
This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX OSN series
equipment.
Table 25-31 lists the power consumption and weight of each board.
Figure 1.33 Power consumption and weight of each board
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N1SLQ41
12
0.6
N1SLD4
17
0.6
N1SF64A
33(the OptiX
OSN 3500
supports)
1.1
N2SLD4
15
1.0
1.1
R1SLD4
11
0.5
SDH boards
26(the OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
N1SF64
33(the OptiX
OSN 3500
supports)
26(the OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
N1SL64A
40
1.1
N1SL4A
17
0.6
N1SL64
30(the OptiX
OSN 3500
supports)
1.1
N1SL4
17
0.6
22(the OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
N2SL64
32
1.1
N2SL4
15
1.0
T2SL64
40
1.1
R1SL4
10
0.5
N1SF16
26
1.1
R3SL4
11
0.5
N1SLO16
38
1.0
N1SEP1
15
1.0
N1SLQ16
20
0.9
N1SLH1
27
1.0
N2SLQ16
35
1.3
N1SLT1
22
1.3
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1571

System
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N1SLD16
23
0.9
N2SLO1
26
1.1
N1SL16A
20
0.6
N3SLO1
20
1.2
N2SL16A
20
1.1
N1SLQ1A
15
1.0
N3SL16A
22
0.9
N1SLQ1
15
1.0
N1SL16
19
1.1
N2SLQ1
15
1.0
N2SL16
19
1.1
R1SLQ1
12
0.4
N3SL16
22
1.1
N1SL1A
17
0.6
N1SLQ4A
17
1.0
N1SL1
17
0.6
N1SLQ4
17
1.0
N2SL1
14
1.0
N2SLQ4
16
1.0
R1SL1
10
0.3
N1SLD4A
17
0.6
R3SL1
11
0.3
T2SL64A
40
1.1
N3SLQ41
12
0.7
N1EU08
11
0.4
N1EU04
0.4
N1OU08
0.4
N2OU08
0.4
N3SLH41
49
1.5
N1SLD64
41
1.2
N4SL64
15(the OptiX
OSN 3500/7500
II supports)
1.1
N1SF16E
19.6
0.6
14(the OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
N4SLQ16
12
0.7
N4SLO16
21
1.0
N4SLD64
19
1.2
N4SF64
26
1.2
N4SFD64
37
1.1
N1SPQ4
24
0.9
N2PL3
12
0.9
N2SPQ4
24
0.9
N1PQM
22
1.0
N1DXA
10
0.8
N1PQ1
19
1.0
N1DX1
15
1.0
N2PQ1
13
1.0
N1PQ3
13
0.9
R1PD1
15
0.6
N1PD3
19
1.1
R2PD1
15
0.6
N2PD3
12
1.1
R3PD1
0.4
PDH boards
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1572

System
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N1PL3A
15
1.0
N1PL1
0.5
N2PL3A
12
0.9
R1PL1
0.5
N1PL3
15
1.0
N2PQ3
13
0.9
N1DM12
0.4
N1TSB8
0.3
N1TSB4
0.3
N1MU04
0.4
N1C34S
0.3
R1L12S
0.3
N1D34S
0.4
N1D12B
0.3
N1D75S
0.4
N1L75S
0.3
N1D12S
0.4
N1PFL1
17
Data boards (TDM mode)

N1MST4
26
0.9
N2EFS4
30
1.0
N1IDQ1
41
1.0
N3EFS4
18
0.6
N1IDL4
41
1.0
N1EFS0A
17
0.7
N1ADQ1
41
1.0
N1EFS0
35
1.0
N1ADL4
41
0.9
N2EFS0
35
1.0
N1EAS2
70
1.2
N4EFS0
35
1.0
N1EMR0
47
1.2
N5EFS0
22
0.6
N2EGR2
40
1.1
N1EGT2
29
0.9
N1EGS4
70
1.1
N1EFT8A
26
1.0
N3EGS4
70
1.1
N1EFT8
26
1.0
N4EGS4
34
0.7
N1EFT4
14
0.5
N1EMS4
65
1.1
N1EFT8
26
1.0
N1EMS2
40
0.8
N1EFT4
14
0.5
N2EGS2
43
1.0
R1EFT4
14
0.5
N3EGS2
25
0.6
N2EMR0
50
1.2
N1EFS4
30
1.0
N1ETF8A
11
0.4
N1ETS8
0.4
N1EFF8A
15
0.4
N1EFF8
0.4
N1ETF8
0.4
N1IDL4A
46
1.5
N1VST4
37
0.8
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1573

System
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N3EAS2
83
1.1
N2EFT8A
12
0.5
N2EGT2
15
0.9
N2EFT8
16
0.6
Packet boards
R1PEFS8
12
0.3
N1PETF8
0.4
Q1PEGS2
0.6
N1PEG16
137
2.3
R1PEGS1
0.4
N1PEX1
107
2.4
N1PEG8
47
1.2
N1PEX2
49
1.4
N2PEX1
48
1.4
N1PEFF8
13
0.5
TNN1EX2
60
1.3
TNN1EG8
58
1.3
TNN1CO1
17
0.6
TNN1ETM
C
11
0.5
TNN1D75
E
15
0.4
TNN1AFO
1
26
0.8
TNN1D12
E
15
0.4
TNN1EFF
8
16
0.6
R1PEF4F
15
0.4
TNN1EG1
6
51
1.05
70
1.0
N1MD75
12
0.5
N1MD12
12
0.5
N1CQ1
10
0.5
R1ML1A/
B
16
0.4
EoD Boards
N1EDQ41
CES boards
WDM boards
N1FIB
0.4
N1MR2B
1.0
N1MR2A
1.0
N1MR2
0.9
N1LWX
30
1.1
N1CMR4
0.9
N1MR4
0.9
N1CMR2
0.8
N1MR2C
1.0
Cross-Connect and system control boards

N1PSXCS
90
2.1
R1PCXLN
60
1.0
T1PSXCS
95
1.4
N4GSCC
19
1.0
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1574

System
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N2PSXCS
A
80
1.2
N3PSXCS
A
74
1.5
T1SXCSA
96
2.2
N1SXCSA
63
2.0
TNN1SCA
27
1.0
TNN1PSX
CS
140
2.4
N6GSCC
19
0.9
T2PSXCS
A
95
1.8
Auxiliary boards
N1FANA
19
1.2
R1AMU
0.5
XE1FAN
19
1.5
R1AUX
19
1.0
XE3FAN
19
1.2
R2AUX
19
1.0
R1FAN
20
0.8
Q1AUX
10
0.5
Q1SEI
10
0.9
N1AUX
19
1.0
N1SEI
0.9
T1AUX
0.4
Q1SAP
20
0.7
T1EOW
13
0.5
Q2SAP
25
1.0
R1EOW
10
0.4
TN81FAN
21
4.5
Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards

N1DCU
0.4
62COA
75
8.0
N2DCU
0.4
N1COA
10
3.5
N1RPC02
110
4.2
N1BPA
20
1.0
N1RPC01
70
4.0
N2BPA
11
1.2
61COA
10
3.5
N1BA2
20
1.0
TN11OBU
101
16
1.3
TN11OBU
103
13
1.3
TN12OBU
101
10
1.1
TN12OBU
103
11
1.1
TN12OBU
2
14
1.6
0.5
N1PIU
1.2
Power interface boards

R1PIUA
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1575

System
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
R1PIUB
0.4
Q2PIU
0.3
R1PIUC
0.5
Q1PIU
1.3
N1PIUA
0.5
R1PIU
0.4
T1PIU
1.3
UPM
(EPS304815AF)
10
UPM
(EPS754815AF)
15
UPM
(GIE4805S
)
10
TN81PIU
1.6
N1PIUB
0.6
T1PIUB
0.5
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1576

System
26 Parameter Settings
26
Parameter Settings
About This Chapter

You can set the parameters for the SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, packet boards,
WDM boards, optical amplifier boards, and cross-connect and timing unit by using the
U2000.
26.1 Packet Processing Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the packet boards include the working mode and
maximum frame length.
26.2 EoD Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the EoD boards include the SDH parameters and
Ethernet parameters.
26.3 Packet Interface Boards
The parameters that you need to set for packet interface boards include J0 byte, J1 byte, J2
byte, C2 byte, V5 byte, SDH interfaces, PDH interfaces, and recovery value of idle timeslots.
26.4 Data Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the SDH parameters, Ethernet
parameters, and ATM parameters.
26.5 SDH Processing Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the SDH processing boards include the J0 byte, J1 byte,
J2 byte, and C2 byte.
26.6 PDH Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the PDH boards include the J1 byte, C2 byte, J2 byte,
V5 byte, and tributary loopback.
26.7 WDM Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the WDM boards include the path use status, optical
interface loopback, service type, client service bearer rate (M), laser status, automatic laser
shutdown, current bearer rate (M), actual wavelength no./wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz),
actual band type, configure wavelength no./wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz), configure
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1577

System
band type, and SD trigger condition.

26.8 Cross-Connect and Timing Units
The parameters that need to be set for the cross-connect and timing units include the clock
source parameters and clock subnet parameters.
26.9 Optical Amplifier Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the optical amplifier boards include the laser status,
board work type, configure band, configure working band parity, actual band, actual working
band parity, threshold of input power loss, gain, rated optical power, nominal gain upper
threshold, and nominal gain lower threshold.
26.1 Packet Processing Boards

The parameters that need to be set for the packet boards include the working mode and
maximum frame length.
26.1.1 General Attributes

This topic describes the parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Port Mode, Enable Port, and Encapsulation Type.
Table 26-1 lists the parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.34 Parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port
Field
Value
Description
Port
For example, 21-N1PETF81(Port-1)
Indicates the port name.
Name
For example, Port1
User-defines a port name.
Enable Port
Enabled, Disabled.
The Enable Port parameter

sets whether the Ethernet
port is usable.
Default: Enabled
Click Enable Port(Ethernet

Interface) for more
information.
Port Mode
Layer 2, Layer 3
Selects the working mode of

the Ethernet port.
Layer 2: The port can
access the user-side
equipment or carry Ethernet
services that use the port
exclusively.
Layer 3: The port can carry
tunnels.
Encapsulation Type
Null, 802.1Q, QinQ

Default: For details, see
configuration guidelines.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
The Encapsulation Type

parameter sets the link layer
encapsulation type of the
1578

System
Field
Value
Description
port, and specifies the link
layer encapsulation type that
can be identified by this
port.
Click Encapsulation
Type(Ethernet Interface) for
more information.
Working Mode
10M Half-Duplex, 10M

Full-Duplex, AutoNegotiation, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M Full-Duplex,
1000M Full-Duplex, 10G
Full-Duplex LAN, 10G
Full-Duplex WAN
Default: Auto-Negotiation
Set the Working Mode

parameter to set the working
mode of the Ethernet port on
the board. The Working
Mode parameter indicates
the maximum transmission
rate and communication
mode of a port.
CAUTION
When configuring a service,
set Working Mode to the same
value if possible for the port
and its interconnected port.
Otherwise, the service may
fail.
Click Working
Mode(Ethernet Interface) for
more information.
Max Frame Length (byte)
For OptiX OSN 3500/7500:

960 to 9600
For other products: 960 to
9000
Default: 1620
The maximum frame length

is also the maximum
transport unit (MTU).
Click Max Frame
Length(byte) for an Ethernet
Port for more information.
26.1.2 Flow Control

This topic describes the parameters, such as autonegotiation and non-autonegotiation, which
are used for configuring flow control function of an Ethernet port.
Table 26-2 lists the parameters for configuring flow control of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.35 Parameters for configuring flow control of an Ethernet port
Field
Value Range
Description
Port
PORTn
Displays all the available

MAC ports on an Ethernet
board.
Specifies the PORT port. The
letter n indicates the number
of the PORT port.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1579

System
Field
Value Range
Description
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable Symmetric

Flow Control, Send Only,
Receive Only
The Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
(Ethernet Port Attribute)
specifies the flow control
mode adopted when an
Ethernet port works in nonauto-negotiation mode.
Default value: Disable
Click Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode (Ethernet
Port Attribute) for more
information.
Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode
The value ranges of the

parameters are different from
each other for different
boards and products. You can
click the hyperlink in the
description to display the
specific information.
The Autonegotiation Flow

Control Mode (Ethernet
Port Attribute) specifies the
flow control mode adopted
when an Ethernet port works
in auto-negotiation mode.
The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4
boards do not support the
autonegotiation traffic control
attribute.
Click Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode (Ethernet Port
Attribute) for more
information.
26.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include QinQ Type Domain, Tag, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority
Table 26-3 lists the parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.36 Parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays the port name.
QinQ Type Domain
0x0600 to 0xFFFE
Sets the QinQ type domain.
NOTE
For the PEG8, PEX2, PEX1,
and EDQ41, this parameter
can be set only to 0x88A8.
This parameter is available

only when you set
Encapsulation Type in
General Attributes to
QinQ.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1580

System
Field
Value
Description
Tag
Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid
Indicates which type of

packets can be processed.
Tag Aware: The port
transparently transmits the
packet with a VLAN ID
(tagged). If a packet does
not have a VLAN ID
(untagged), the port discards
this packet. In this case,
Default VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority are
meaningless.
Access: The port adds the
default VLAN ID to the
packet without any VLAN
ID (untagged). If the packet
has a VLAN ID (tagged),
the port discards this packet.
Hybrid: The port adds the
default VLAN ID to the
packet without any VLAN
ID (untagged). If the packet
has a VLAN ID (tagged),
the port transparently
transmits the packet.
This parameter is
unavailable when you set
Encapsulation Type in
General Attributes to
QinQ.
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
Sets the default VLAN ID of

packets that passes through
the port.
When you set Tag to
Access, packets that have a
VLAN ID the same as the
default VLAN ID are
discarded, and packets
without a VLAN are tagged
with the default VLAN ID
and then pass the port.
When you set Tag to
Hybrid, tagged packets are
allowed to pass, and
untagged packets are tagged
with the default VLAN ID
and then pass the port.
NOTE
If an MPLS tunnel needs to
traverse a Layer 2 network, set
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1581

System
Field
Value
Description
the VLAN IDs for the tunnels
connected to the NNI ports at
both ends to the same value
according to the VLAN
planning requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
Sets the QoS level. When

the network is busy, packets
of a higher VLAN priority
are processed first and those
of a lower VLAN priority
may be discarded. 0
indicates the lowest priority
and 7 the highest.
26.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Enable Tunnel, Specify IP, IP Address, and IP Mask
Table 26-4 lists the parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.37 Parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port
Field
Value
Description
Port
Enable Tunnel
Enabled, Disabled
The Enable
Tunnel(Ethernet Interface)
parameter sets the MPLS
enabling state of the port.
When Enable Tunnel is set
to Enabled, it indicates that
the port can identify and
process the MPLS label.
Default: Enabled
Click Enable
Tunnel(Ethernet
Interface)for more
information.
Max Reserved
Bandwidth(kbit/s)
For example, 102400
Sets the maximum

bandwidth used by the
tunnel.
The maximum reserved
bandwidth should not
exceed the physical
bandwidth of the bearer port.
Available Bandwidth(kbit/s)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Displays the available

bandwidth of the port. The
1582

System
Field
Value
Description
Available Bandwidth value
is obtained from equipment
and refreshed automatically
when the Max Reserved
Bandwidth value of the port
is modified or the tunnel
traversing the port is
adjusted.
Specify IP
Manually, Unspecified
Default: Unspecified
The Specify IP parameter,

set by port, indicates the
method of specifying the IP
address parameter of a
specified port.
Click Specify IP(Ethernet
Interface) for more
information.
IP Address
For example, 192.168.0.1
Sets the IP address for the

port.
IP Mask
For example, 255.255.255.0
Sets the subnet mask of the

port.
26.1.5 Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet
port. The parameters include Port Physical parameters, MAC Loopback, and Loopback
Check
Table 26-5 lists the parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.38 Parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port
Field
Value
Description
Port
Port Physical parameters
For example:
Displays physical
parameters of the port.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Port Enable: Enabled
Working Mode: AutoNegotiation
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode:
Disabled
MAC Loopback: NonLoopback
PHY Loopback: NonLoopback

Copyright Huawei
1583

System
Field
Value
Description
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Sets the loopback state of

the MAC layer.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
The PHY Loopback

parameter indicates the
loopback status of the
physical layer of an Ethernet
port. This parameter is an
advanced attribute of the
Ethernet port.
Default: Non-Loopback
Click PHY
Loopback(Ethernet
Interface) for more
information.
MAC Address
For example, 00-5A-3D-034C-1B
Displays the MAC address

of the port.
Default: FF-FF-FF-FF-FFFF
Transmitting Rate(kbit/s)
For example, 1024
Displays the rate at which

packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s)
For example, 1024
Displays the rate at which

packets are received.
Loopback Check
Enabled, Disabled
Sets loop detection.
Default: Disabled
When this function is

enabled, the equipment
automatically checks
whether a loop is generated
on the link. If a loop is
generated, the related alarm
is reported.
Currently, the OptiX OSN
equipment does not support
this function.
Loopback Port Block
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Sets the automatic shutdown

of the port.
When Loopback Check is
set to Enabled and
Loopback Port Block is set
to Enabled, the equipment
automatically checks
whether a loop is generated
on the link. If a loop is
generated, the port is
automatically shut down to
release the loop.
Unidirectional Operation
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Disabled, Enabled

Copyright Huawei
Set whether a 10GE port

works in unidirectional
1584

System
Field
Value
Description
Default: Enabled
operation mode or not.
Enabled: The port works

in unidirectional
operation mode, in which
the port disables the
function in the direction
where a unidirectional
fault occurs. For
example, upon detecting
a LOS alarm, the port
disables only its receive
function without
affecting its transmit
function.
Disabled: The port does

not work in
unidirectional operation
mode. In nonunidirectional operation
mode, the port will
disable both receive and
transmit functions upon
detecting a unidirectional
fault. For example, upon
detecting a LOS alarm,
the port disables its
receive and transmit
functions.
NOTE
N2PEX1 and N1PEX2
boards on the OptiX OSN
3500/7500 support this
parameter.
Enabling Broadcast Packet

Suppression
Disabled, Enabled
Default value: Disabled
EX2 boards on the OptiX

OSN 7500 II support this
parameter.
Specifies whether the

broadcast packet
suppression function at the
port is enabled to limit the
traffic rate of the incoming
broadcast packets. If the
broadcast packet
suppression function is
enabled, and if the traffic
rate of the incoming
broadcast packets exceeds
the specified value, the last
received broadcast packets
are discarded.
NOTE
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1585

System
Field
Value
Description
Suppression is valid for UNI
ports only.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
Example: 3
Allocates the specified

bandwidth to the broadcast
packets according to the
proportion of the broadcast
packets in the total packets
at the port. If the actual
bandwidth of the broadcast
packets exceeds the
specified threshold, the port
discards the last received
broadcast packets.
26.2 EoD Boards

The parameters that need to be set for the EoD boards include the SDH parameters and
Ethernet parameters.
1.1.1.1.1745 SDH Parameters
J0
J1
J2
C2
For the description of the parameter, see 26.5 SDH Processing Boards.
1.1.1.1.1746 Packet Data Parameters
Ethernet interface
For the description of the parameter, see 26.1 Packet Processing Boards.
1.1.1.1.1747 EoS Parameters
Working mode
For more parameters and the description of the parameters, see 26.4.2 Ethernet Parameters.
26.3 Packet Interface Boards

The parameters that you need to set for packet interface boards include J0 byte, J1 byte, J2
byte, C2 byte, V5 byte, SDH interfaces, PDH interfaces, and recovery value of idle timeslots.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1586

System
26.3.1 SDH Parameters

The SDH parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the J1 byte, C2 byte, J2
byte, and V5 byte.
1.1.1.1.1748 J1 Byte
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the J1 byte at the transmit end helps the
receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in the continuous
connection state.
When a J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the VC-3 path generates an LP_TIM_VC3
alarm and the VC-4 path generates an HP_TIM alarm.
When the J1 byte to be sent is set to the single-byte "" by default, the alarms are not
reported.
In the case of the N1EFS4/MST4/EAS2, the J1 byte to be sent is set to " HuaWei SBS " by
default. In the case of the other boards, the J1 byte to be sent is set to the single-byte "" by default.
In the case of the EMS4/EGS4, it is recommended that you set the J1 byte to be sent to " HuaWei
SBS ".
1.1.1.1.1749 C2 Byte
C2 is the signal label byte, which is used to indicate the multiplexing structure of the VC
frames and the payload property. The C2 byte to be sent must match the C2 byte to be
received.
When a C2 mismatch is detected, the VC-3 path generates an LP_SLM_VC3 alarm and the
VC-4 path generates an HP_SLM alarm.
1.1.1.1.1750 J2 Byte
J2 is the VC-12 path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a low order path
access point identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to
the intended transmitter.
When a J2 mismatch is detected, the VC-12 path generates an LP_TIM_VC12 alarm.
When the J2 byte is set to the single-byte "" by default, the alarms are not reported.
1.1.1.1.1751 V5 Byte
V5 is the path status and signal label byte. This byte is used to detect bit errors and indicate
remote errors or remote failures on lower order paths. The LP_REI and LP_RFI alarms are
generated accordingly.
When a V5 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the VC-12 path generates an
LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
Table 26-6 shows the relationship between the service type and the value of the V5 byte.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1587

System
Figure 1.1 relationship between the service type and the value of the V5 byte
Service Type
Value of the V5 Byte (Hexadecimal)
Unequipped or supervisory-unequipped
00
Equipped-non-specific payload
01
Asynchronous
02
Bit synchronization
03
Byte synchronization
04
Retained signal flag
05
O.181 test signal
06
VC-AIS
07
Other mapping (For test)
08
ATM mapping
09
HDLC/PPP mapping
0A
HDLC/LAPS mapping
0B
Virtual connection test signal (O.181

special mapping)
0C
GFP mapping
0D
26.3.2 Channelized STM-1 Port

Configuring a channelized STM-1 port includes setting of the parameters such as the
encapsulation type of the port, the maximum data packet size, and the enabling status of the
laser.
Figure 1.2 Parameters for the attributes of an SDH port
Field
Value Range
Description
Port
For example, 21-CQ11(PORT-1)
Name
For example, port1
Specifies the name of the

port specified by the user.
Port Mode
Layer 1
Displays the working mode

of the CES port Layer 1
indicates the channelized
STM port is currently
available.
The OptiX OSN equipment
currently supports only
Layer 1 in Port Mode. In
this case, the OptiX OSN
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1588

System
Field
Value Range
Description
equipment can transmit
channelized STM-1 services.
Encapsulation Type
Null
Indicates the link layer

encapsulation type of the
port. It specifies the link
layer encapsulation type that
can be identified and
processed by the port.
When Encapsulation Type
is set to Null, no link layer
encapsulation is available or
the link layer encapsulation
is not performed.
The OptiX OSN equipment
currently supports only
Layer 1 in Port Mode. For
this reason, Encapsulation
Type can only be set to Null
and cannot be changed.
Channelize
No
Displays whether the port is

a channelized port.
Channelize refers to the use
of the low-speed tributary
signals in the STM-N
service. One fiber is used to
transmit multiple channels
of data that are separated
from each other. Each
channel of data exclusively
occupies the bandwidth, in
addition to the starting point,
terminating point, and
monitoring policy.
Max Data Packet Size (byte)
Specifies the maximum size

of the packets that can be
received by the port.
This parameter is currently
inapplicable to the OptiX
OSN equipment.
Laser Interface Enabling

Status
On, Off
Laser Transmission
Distance(m)
Default: On
Specifies the enabling status

of the laser on the port.
Displays the transmission
distance of the laser on the
port.
OSN equipment.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1589

System
Field
Value Range
Description
Scrambling Capability
Suppresses multiple 0s and

1s in the data when the
Scrambling Capability is
enabled.
OSN equipment.
CRC Check Length
Specifies the length of the

CRC field in the mapping
protocol.
OSN equipment.
Clock Mode
The Clock Mode parameter

specifies the re-timing mode
of a port.
NOTE
inapplicable to an SDH port.
Loopback Mode
CES Encapsulation Clock

Mode
Non-loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Specifies the loopback status

of the port.
Default: Non-loopback
The loopback mode is used

for locating a fault. Outloop
is used for testing whether
the port module and external
fiber or cable of a board are
proper. Inloop is used for
testing whether the crossconnect unit and service
path of the equipment are
proper.
Null, Line Clock Mode,

System Clock Mode
Specifies the encapsulation

mode of the clock signal on
a UNI port on the master
side of the CES service.
Default: Null
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Null: The clock signal is

not encapsulated in the
service packets.
Line Clock Mode: The

clock frequency signal
extracted on a line port is
used as the time stamp,
which is encapsulated in
the RTP packet header
and transmitted to the
downstream.
System Clock Mode:

The system frequency
1590

System
Field
Value Range
Description
signal is used as the time
stamp, which is
encapsulated in the RTP
packet header and
transmitted to the
downstream.

Poke
Specifies the enabling status

of the CES encapsulation
clock poke.
OSN equipment.
Figure 1.3 Parameters for an associated service

Field
Value Range
Description
Service Type
For example, CES service
Displays the type of the

service associated with the
port.
Service ID
For example, 20
Displays the ID of the

port.
When you select the value of
the service ID, the active
window changes to the
service management dialog
box of the corresponding
service type.
Service Name
For example, CES
Displays the name of the

port.
Used Resource
For example, 64K

Timeslot1-31
Displays the resource used

by the service associated
with the port.
26.3.3 E1 Port
In addition to the general attributes of an E1 port, you need to set the frame format based on
the advanced attributes to ensure that the frame format specified for the E1 port is the same as
the service encapsulation format.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1591

System
Figure 1.4 Parameters for the general attributes of a PDH port

Field
Value Range
Description
Port
Slot ID-Board name-Port

(Port No.)
Name
For example, Port 1
Enters the port name

specified by the user.
Port Mode
Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3
Specifies the working mode

of the PDH port.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN
equipment, Port Mode can be
set to only Layer 1.
Encapsulation Type
Null
When this parameter is set to

Layer 1, the port can
transmit TDM signals.
Specifies Encapsulation
Type.
When Port Mode is set to
Layer 1, Encapsulation
Type is defaulted to Null
and cannot be changed.
Max Data Packet Size (byte)
Specifies the maximum size

of the packets.
NOTE
This parameter is not
applicable to an E1 port in the
CES service.
Figure 1.5 Parameters for the advanced attributes of a PDH port

Field
Value Range
Description
Port
Slot ID-Board name-Port

(Port No.)
Frame Format
Unframe, Double Frame,

CRC-4 Multiframe
Specifies the frame format.
HDB3
Displays the line encoding

format.
Line Encoding Format
When the E1 port transmits

CES services in CESoPSN
mode, this parameter can be
set to Double Frame or
CRC-4 Multiframe. It is
recommended that you set
this parameter to CRC-4
Multiframe. When the CES
services are in SAToP mode,
this parameter needs to be
set to Unframe.
The HDB3 codes are

transmitted on the E1 port.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1592

System
Field
Value Range
Description
Clock Mode
Master Mode, Slave Mode,

Line Clock Mode
The Clock Mode parameter

specifies the re-timing mode
of a port.
Default: Master Mode
Click Clock Mode for more

information.
Loopback Mode
Non-loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Specifies the loopback status

of the port.
Impedance
75 ohm, 120 ohm
Displays the impedance of

the port.
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN
3500/7500 uses the N1MD75
board, Impedance is set to 75
ohm and cannot be changed.
When the N1MD12 board is
used, Impedance is set to 120
ohm and cannot be changed.
Frame Mode
Specifies the value of the

frame mode.
The frame modes of the
local port and opposite port
need to be consistent.
NOTE
CES service.

Mode
Null, Line Clock Mode,

System Clock Mode
Default: Null
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
Queries the encapsulation

mode of the clock signal on
a UNI port on the master
side of the CES service.
Null: The clock signal is

not encapsulated in the
service packets.
Line Clock Mode: The

clock frequency signal
extracted on a line port is
used as the time stamp,
which is encapsulated in
the RTP packet header
and transmitted to the
downstream.
System Clock Mode:

The system frequency
signal is used as the time
stamp, which is
encapsulated in the RTP
packet header and
transmitted to the
downstream.
1593

System
Field
Value Range
Description

Poke
Queries the encapsulation

time stamp in the CES
service.
NOTE
CES service.
Idle Timeslot Recovery

Value
Queries the recovery value

of an idle timeslot in the
CES service.
NOTE
CES service.
Figure 1.6 Parameters for an associated service

Field
Value Range
Description
Service Type
For example, CES service
Displays the type of the

port.
Service ID
For example, 20
Displays the ID of the

port.
When you select the value of
the service ID, the active
window changes to the
service management dialog
box of the corresponding
service type.
Service Name
For example, CES
Displays the name of the

port.
Used Resource
For example, 64K

Timeslot1-31
Displays the resource used

by the service associated
with the port.
26.4 Data Boards

The parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the SDH parameters, Ethernet
parameters, and ATM parameters.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1594

System
26.4.1 SDH Parameters

The SDH parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the J1 byte, C2 byte, J2
byte, and V5 byte.
1.1.1.1.1752 J1 Byte
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the J1 byte at the transmit end helps the
receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in the continuous
connection state.
When a J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the VC-3 path generates an LP_TIM_VC3
alarm and the VC-4 path generates an HP_TIM alarm.
When the J1 byte to be sent is set to the single-byte "" by default, the alarms are not
reported.
In the case of the N1EFS4/MST4/EAS2, the J1 byte to be sent is set to " HuaWei SBS " by
default. In the case of the other boards, the J1 byte to be sent is set to the single-byte "" by default.
In the case of the EMS4/EGS4, it is recommended that you set the J1 byte to be sent to " HuaWei
SBS ".
1.1.1.1.1753 C2 Byte
received.
When a C2 mismatch is detected, the VC-3 path generates an LP_SLM_VC3 alarm and the
VC-4 path generates an HP_SLM alarm.
1.1.1.1.1754 J2 Byte
When a J2 mismatch is detected, the VC-12 path generates an LP_TIM_VC12 alarm.
When the J2 byte is set to the single-byte "" by default, the alarms are not reported.
1.1.1.1.1755 V5 Byte
generated accordingly.
When a V5 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the VC-12 path generates an
LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
Table 26-12 shows the relationship between the service type and the value of the V5 byte.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1595

System
Service Type
00
01
Asynchronous
02
Bit synchronization
03
04
05
O.181 test signal
06
VC-AIS
07
08
ATM mapping
09
HDLC/PPP mapping
0A
HDLC/LAPS mapping
0B

special mapping)
0C
GFP mapping
0D
26.4.2 Ethernet Parameters

The Ethernet parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the working mode and
Maximum Frame Length.
26.4.2.1 Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters, such as the port attribute, port enabling status, and
maximum frame length, for configuring the basic attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 26-13 lists the parameters for configuring the basic attributes of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.2 Parameters for configuring the basic attributes of an Ethernet port
Field
Value Range
Description
Port
PORTn

ports on an Ethernet port. The
of the PORT port.
Name
For example, PORT-1
Specifies the name of a PORT

port. The name can contain up
to 32 characters in English or
16 characters in Chinese.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1596

System
Field
Value Range
Description
Enable Port
Disabled, Enabled
"Enabled" indicates that this

port is used and services are
available. "Disabled"
indicates that the services on
this port are not processed.
Hence, when configuring a
service, you need to enable
the port to be used.
Click Enable Port (Ethernet

information.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 10M HalfDuplex, 10M Full-Duplex,

Full-Duplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M Full-Duplex,
10GE Full-Duplex LAN,
10GE Full-Duplex WAN
Specifies the working mode

of the Ethernet port on a
board. This parameter
determines the maximum
transmission rate and
communication mode of the
Ethernet port.
When setting this parameter,
you must ensure the working
modes of the interconnected
ports are the same. Otherwise,
the services are not available.
Force Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Max. Frame Length
MAC Loopback
10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M Half-Duplex,

100M Full-Duplex, 1000M
Half-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex
Values of parameters vary

with different boards and
products.
N4EGS4: 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex
N1EFS0A: 10M HalfDuplex, 10M Full-Duplex,

Full-Duplex

The Max. Frame Length

parameter specifies the
maximum frame length that is
supported at an Ethernet port.
Non-Loopback, Inloop
The MAC Loopback

parameter specifies the MAC
Default value: Non-Loopback

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Indicates the Ethernet port

works in the forced autonegotiation mode.

Copyright Huawei
Click Max. Frame Length

(Ethernet Port Attribute) for
more information.
1597

System
Field
Value Range
Description
loopback state at an Ethernet
port. Port loopback setting is
applied to locating faults only.
Click MAC Loopback
more information.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop
The PHY Loopback

parameter specifies the PHY
loopback state at an Ethernet
port. Port loopback setting is
applied to locating faults only.
Click PHY Loopback
more information.
Logic Type
SDH-OPPORT, SDH-EPORT
Displays the logic type of

port.
26.4.2.2 Flow Control

This topic describes the parameters, such as autonegotiation and non-autonegotiation, which
are used for configuring flow control function of an Ethernet port.
Table 26-14 lists the parameters for configuring flow control of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.3 Parameters for configuring flow control of an Ethernet port
Field
Value Range
Description
Port
PORTn

MAC ports on an Ethernet
board.
Specifies the PORT port. The
of the PORT port.
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable Symmetric

Flow Control, Send Only,
Receive Only
Default value: Disable
The Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
specifies the flow control
mode adopted when an
Ethernet port works in nonauto-negotiation mode.
Click Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode (Ethernet
information.
Autonegotiation Flow
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
The Autonegotiation Flow

1598

System
Field
Value Range
Description
Control Mode

Control Mode (Ethernet

Port Attribute) specifies the
flow control mode adopted
when an Ethernet port works
in auto-negotiation mode.
The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4
boards do not support the
autonegotiation traffic control
attribute.
Click Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode (Ethernet Port
Attribute) for more
information.
26.4.2.3 Network Attributes

This topic describes the parameters, such as port attribute and P port encapsulation format,
which are used for configuring network attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 26-15 lists the parameters for configuring network attributes of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.4 Parameters for configuring network attributes of an Ethernet port
Field
Value Range
Description
Port
PORTn or VCTRUNKn
Specifies the PORT or

VCTRUNK port. The letter n
indicates the number of the
port.
Port Attribute

The Port Attribute (Ethernet

Port) parameter specifies the
position of a port in the
network. Different port
attributes support different
packets.
MartinioE, stack VLAN
Encapsulation Format of P
Port (Network Attributes)
indicates that the board
supports receiving of data
packets in the MPLS
encapsulation format and
normal Ethernet data packets.
The port needs to process
different types of packets in
different ways, so you need to
set the port to a PE port or a P
port. The PE port is not
Encapsulation Format of
P Port
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Default value: MartinioE

Copyright Huawei
Click Port Attribute (Ethernet

Port) for more information.
1599

System
Field
Value Range
Description
configured with the
encapsulation format, while
the P port is configured with
the encapsulation format. The
P port indicates a port for
connecting the equipment of
the network provider, so the P
port receives data packets in
the MPLS encapsulation
format. You can set the packet
encapsulation format of the P
port by running the
configuration command.
supported by a board that
supports the QinQ function.
Click Encapsulation Format
of P Port (Network Attributes)
for more information.
26.4.2.4 Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters, such as the loop detection, loop port shutdown, and
traffic threshold (Mbit/s), which are used for configuring the advanced attributes of an
Ethernet port.
Table 26-16 lists the parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.5 Parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port
Field
Value Range
Description
Port
PORTn or VCTRUNKn
Indicates the PORT or

VCTRUNK port. The
letter n indicates the
number of the PORT port.

Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
The Enabling Broadcast

Packet Suppression
(Ethernet Interface
Attributes) parameter
specifies whether to enable
the function for a port to
suppress the broadcast
packets and to control the
traffic of the broadcast
data packets that enter the
port. If the broadcast
packet suppression
function is enabled, and if
the broadcast traffic
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1600

System
Field
Value Range
Description
exceeds the specified
threshold value, the
broadcast packets that
enter the port are
discarded.
Click Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression
(Ethernet Interface
Attributes) for more
information.
Broadcast Packet Suppression

Threshold
1-10
Default value: 3
The Broadcast Packet

Suppression
Threshold(Ethernet
Interface Attributes)
parameter allocates the
specified bandwidth to the
broadcast packets. The
bandwidth is allocated on
the basis of the traffic
proportion at the port. If
the bandwidth allocated to
the broadcast packets
reaches the specified
threshold, the port discards
the broadcast data packets
that are received.
Click Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
(Ethernet Interface
information.
Traffic Threshold(Mpbs)
0-100 (FE), 0-1000 (GE),

in step length of 1
Default value: 100 (FE),
1000 (GE)
The Traffic
Threshold(Mpbs)
(External Ethernet Port
Attribute) parameter
specifies the data flow
threshold at external
physical ports.
Click Traffic
Threshold(Mpbs)(External
Ethernet Port Attribute) for
more information.
Port Traffic Threshold Time

Window(Min)
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
1-30
Default value: 0

Copyright Huawei
The Port Traffic

Threshold Time
Window(Min) parameter
specifies the duration for a
VCTRUNK or an IP port
to monitor the traffic after
the zero traffic monitoring
function of the port is
1601

System
Field
Value Range
Description
enabled.
Click Port Traffic
Threshold Time
Window(Min) for more
information.
Loop Detection
Enabled, Disabled
The Loop Detection

function of reporting the
self-loop alarms after one
of the following loopback
cases is detected.
Click Loop Detection
Loop Port Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default value: Enabled
The Loop Port Shutdown

parameter is set to disable
the self-loop port after a
self-loop port is detected if
the loop port shutdown
function is enabled. After
the self-loop port is shut
down, the self-loop port
only transmits or receives
the self-loop detection
packets rather than any
other packets. If the port is
not a self-loop port, it
starts to work again.
Click Loop Port Shutdown
Zero-Flow Monitor
Enabled, Disabled
The Zero-Flow Monitor

parameter specifies
whether the traffic on a
port is monitored.
Click Zero-Flow Monitor
(Ethernet Interface
information.
Jumbo Frame Type
0 to 65535
Default value: 34928
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
The Jumbo Frame Type

value of the jumbo frame
type on an Ethernet port.
The jumbo frame indicates
the oversized Ethernet
frame, whose maximum
length is 65535 bytes. The
1602

System
Field
Value Range
Description
Ethernet service board
determines whether the
Ethernet frame is a jumbo
frame according to the
value of the jumbo frame
type.
Click Jumbo Frame Type
DNI Status
Enabled, Disabled
Indicates whether to enable

the DNI status of the
VCTRUNK port on a data
board.
26.4.2.5 TAG Attributes

Tag attributes are important attributes for configuring Ethernet services, including the
parameters such as the default VLAN ID, VLAN priority, ingress detection setting, and tag
ID.
Table 26-17 lists the parameters for configuring the tag attributes of an Ethernet port.
Figure 1.6 Parameters for configuring the tag attributes of an Ethernet port
Field
Value Range
Description
Port
PORTn or VCTRUNKn
Specifies the PORT or

VCTRUNK port. The letter n
indicates the number of the port.
Tag Identifier
Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid
The Tag Identifier parameter

indicates that the Ethernet port
supports IEEE 802.1Q Ethernet
packets that contain VLAN tags.
You can set three attributes to
differentiate the packets from
each other so that these packets
can be transmitted efficiently.
Default value: Tag Aware
Click Tag Identifier for more

information.
Default VLAN ID
1-4095
Default value: 1
The Default VLAN ID (Ethernet

Port Attribute) parameter
specifies the default VLAN ID of
a port.
Click Default VLAN ID (Ethernet
information.
VLAN Priority
0-7
Default value: 0
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
The VLAN Priority (Ethernet

specifies the priority of the default
1603

System
Field
Value Range
Description
VLAN ID of a port. It indicates
the priority of the service quality.
Click VLAN Priority (Ethernet
information.
Entry Detection
Enabled, Disabled
Default value: Enabled
The Entry Detection (Ethernet

specifies whether to identify the
tag labels in the data packets.
Click Entry Detection (Ethernet
information.
26.4.2.6 Encapsulation/Mapping
The equipment supports the setting of encapsulation and mapping protocols for Ethernet
packets, including the parameters such as mapping protocol, scrambling code, and CRC or
not.
Table 26-18 lists the parameters for configuring the encapsulation and mapping of an Ethernet
port.
Figure 1.7 Parameters for configuring the encapsulation and mapping of an Ethernet port
Field
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRUNKn
Indicates the VCTRUNK

port. The letter n indicates
the number of the
VCTRUNK port.
Mapping Protocol

parameters are different
from each other for different
boards and products. You
can click the hyperlink in
the description to display the
The Mapping Protocol

mapping protocol of the
VCTRUNK port.

The Scramble parameter

specifies whether to
scramble the payload area of
the encapsulation protocol
and the scramble mode.
Scramble
Click Mapping Protocol for

more information.
You can set this parameter

only when the mapping
protocol is GFP, HDLC, or
LAPS.
Click Scramble for more
information.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1604

System
Field
Value Range
Description
Set Inverse Value for CRC
Yes, No
The Set Inverse Value for

CRC parameter specifies
whether to set an inverse
value for the CRC field of
the HDLC or LAPS
protocol.
Default value: Yes

protocol is HDLC or LAPS.
Click Set Inverse Value for
CRC for more information.
Check Field Length

The Check Field Length

length of the CRC field of
the mapping protocol.
LAPS.
Click Check Field Length for
more information.
FCS Calculated Bit

Sequence

The FCS Calculated Bit

Sequence parameter
specifies the sequence of
storing the bits in the CRC
field of the mapping
protocol.
LAPS.
Click FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence for more
information.
Extension Header Option

The Extension Header

Option parameter specifies
whether Mapping Protocol
of the GFP protocol supports
the extension header.
protocol is GFP.
Click Extension Header
Option for more information.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1605

System
26.4.2.7 Bound Paths

This topic describes the parameters, such as available resources, available timeslots, and
service direction, which are used for binding a path with an Ethernet port.
The configured cross-connections must correspond to the bound bandwidth timeslots. Otherwise, the
services are unavailable.
Table 26-19 lists the parameters that are used for binding a path.
Figure 1.8 Parameters for binding paths
Field
Value Range
Description
Configurable Ports
For example, VCTRUNKn

VCTRUNK ports on the
board.
Available Resources
For example, VC4-1

VC-4s.
Available Timeslots
For example, VC12-1

timeslots.
VCTRUNK Port
VCTRUNKn
Displays the number (n) of

the VCTRUNK port.
Level
For example, VC12-xv
Specifies the level of a path

that is bound with the
VCTRUNK.
Service Direction
Bidirectional, Uplink,
Downlink
Specifies the direction of the

Ethernet service.
Default value: Bidirectional

Bound Path
For example, VC4-1VC12(1-3)
Specifies the number of the

path to be bound, for
example, VC4-1-VC12(1-3).
Number of Bound Paths
Displays the number of

VCTRUNKs to be bound.
The Used Channel
For example, VC4-1VC12(1)
Displays the actually used

channel.
Activation Status
Active, Deactive
Displays whether the path is

active.
Display in Combination
If you select Display in

Combination, the bound
paths are displayed in a
centralized manner.
Otherwise, the bound paths
are displayed in a distributed
manner.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1606

System
26.4.3 ATM Parameters

The ATM parameters that need to be set for the ATM boards include the port type and traffic
type.
1.1.1.1.1756 Port Type

The port types include NNI and UNI. The default port type is UNI.
1.1.1.1.1757 Traffic Type

The traffic type must meet the requirements of the port.
1.1.1.1.1758 Service Type

Five service types are available, namely, CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR, and UBR+.
1.1.1.1.1759 Peak Cell Rate

Set the peak cell rate of the ATM services. This parameter must be set for each service type.
1.1.1.1.1760 Sustainable Cell Rate

Set the sustainable cell rate of the ATM services. In the case of the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR
services, set this parameter.
1.1.1.1.1761 MBS
Set the MBS of the ATM services. In the case of the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR services, set this
parameter.
1.1.1.1.1762 CDVT
Set the CDVT of the ATM services. In the case of the CBR, rt-VBR, and UBR services, set
this parameter.
26.5 SDH Processing Boards

The parameters that need to be set for the SDH processing boards include the J0 byte, J1 byte,
J2 byte, and C2 byte.
1.1.1.1.1763 J0 Byte
The J0 byte is used to transmit repetitively a section access point identifier so that a section
receiver can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. It is recommended
that you set the J0 byte to the default value, namely, single-byte "Disabled".
1.1.1.1.1764 J1 Byte
J1 is the higher order path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a path access
point identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the
intended transmitter. When a J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1607

System
VC-4 path generates an HP_TIM alarm.

Generally, the J1 byte retains the default. However, when Huawei equipment is interconnected with
third-party equipment, the J1 byte must be set to the same value at both ends.
1.1.1.1.1765 J2 Byte
J2 is the lower order path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a low order path
To set and query the J2 byte to be received, enable the lower order monitoring function.
In the case of the SDH processing boards, the J2 byte to be sent cannot be set.
1.1.1.1.1766 C2 Byte
received. When a C2 mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path at the local end
generates an HP_SLM alarm.
Table 26-20 shows the relationship between the service type and the value of the C2 byte.
Figure 1.1 relationship between the service type and the value of the C2 byte
Service Type
Value of the C2 Byte (Hexadecimal)
TUG structure
02
34M/45M into C-3
04
140M into C-4
12
Unequipped
00
26.6 PDH Boards

The parameters that need to be set for the PDH boards include the J1 byte, C2 byte, J2 byte,
V5 byte, and tributary loopback.
1.1.1.1.1767 J1 Byte
J1 is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a path access point identifier
so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended
transmitter. When a J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path
generates an HP_TIM alarm.
The J1 byte is set to the single-byte "" by default.
The J1 byte was set to " HuaWei SBS
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
" by default.

Copyright Huawei
1608

System
1.1.1.1.1768 C2 Byte
received. When a C2 mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path at the local end
generates an HP_SLM alarm.
Table 26-21 shows the relationship between the service type and the value of the C2 byte.
Figure 1.1 relationship between the service type and the value of the C2 byte
Service Type
Value of the C2 Byte (Hexadecimal)
TUG structure
02
34M/45M into C-3
04
140M into C-4
12
Unequipped
00
1.1.1.1.1769 J2 Byte
1.1.1.1.1770 V5 Byte
generated accordingly. Table 26-22 shows the relationship between the service type and the
value of the V5 byte.
Service Type
00
01
Asynchronous
02
Bit synchronization
03
04
05
O.181 test signal
06
VC-AIS
07
08
ATM mapping
09
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1609

System
Service Type
HDLC/PPP mapping
0A
HDLC/LAPS mapping
0B

special mapping)
0C
GFP mapping
0D
1.1.1.1.1771 Equipping Indication

When a service channel only carries the service and does not process the service, select
Unequipped or Supervisory-Unequipped.
When a service channel carries the service and also processes the service, select EquippedUnspecific Payload.
1.1.1.1.1772 Tributary Loopback

The tributary loopback function is used to locate faults in the service channels.
The tributary loopback is also a diagnosis function. When the tributary loopback is performed,
related services are interrupted.
1.1.1.1.1773 Path Service Type

This parameter is set to specify service type for the channel.
Select E1 or T1 for E1/T1 processing boards according to the actual service type in the
channel.
Select E3 or T3 for E3/T3 processing boards according to the actual service type in the
channel.
1.1.1.1.1774 Serial Port Protocol Mode

For the DX1, select the protocol mode of the N x 64 kbit/s signals. The protocol mode
includes V.35, V.24, X.21, RS449, RS530 and RS530A.
1.1.1.1.1775 DDN Clock Source Management

The timing scheme and working clock source can be set for the DX1.
Set the timing scheme of the DDN channels 1012 and 1416 to the DCE internal
scheme, DCE slave scheme or DTE external scheme.
Set the timing scheme of the DDN channels 9 and 13 to the DCE internal scheme, DCE
slave scheme, DTE external scheme, DTE internal scheme, DTE slave scheme or DCE
external scheme. By default, the timing scheme is the DCE internal scheme for channels
9 and 13 is the DCE internal scheme.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1610

System
26.7 WDM Boards

The parameters that need to be set for the WDM boards include the path use status, optical
interface loopback, service type, client service bearer rate (M), laser status, automatic laser
shutdown, current bearer rate (M), actual wavelength no./wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz),
actual band type, configure wavelength no./wavelength (nm)/frequency (THz), configure
band type, and SD trigger condition.
1.1.1.1.1776 Path Use Status

Item
Description
Parameter description
Used to set the path use status
Parameter values
Used and Unused
Parameter value description
Default value: Used
Recommended value
Used
Application scenarios
In configuration, commissioning, and

maintenance stages
Impact on the system
When the Path Use Status of an optical

interface is set to Unused, service alarms at this
interface are suppressed, which disables the
automatic laser turn on function.
Relevant boards
LWX
Configuration requirements
When the channel is not required, its Path Use

Status can be set to Unused. In this case, a
command should be issued to shut down the
laser of this path; otherwise, an alarm indicates
that the laser is forcibly turned on is reported.
1.1.1.1.1777 Optical Interface Loopback

Item
Description
Used to set the loopback mode of the current

optical interface.
Parameter values
Non-Loopback, Outloop, and Inloop

Non-Loopback: indicates that the equipment is
in normal state. Optical interface loopback is not
required when the equipment normally operates.
Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be
output from the output interface of the local-end
equipment are looped back to the signal input
interface of this equipment. Inloop is used to test
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1611

System
Item
Description
the signal processing on the board.
Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed
signals accessed to the local-end equipment are
directly looped back to the corresponding output
interface without the signal structure changed.
Outloop is used to test connections between fiber
lines and connectors.
Recommended value
Non-Loopback
In commissioning and maintenance stages
When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or

Outloop, services are interrupted.
Relevant boards
RPC01 and RPC02
None
1.1.1.1.1778 Service Type

Item
Description
Used to set the type of services at a client-side

optical interface.
Parameter values
LWX: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12,

OC-48, FC-100, FC-200 FICON, FICON
Express, DVB-ASI DVB-SDI, and ESCON
Default value: Any
Recommended value
None

maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
LWX
The type of actually accessed services must be

the same as the type of configured services.
Otherwise, the services are not available.
1.1.1.1.1779 Client Service Bearer Rate (M)

Item
Description
Used to set the bearer rate of client-side services.
Parameter values(M)
16 to 2500
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1612

System
Item
Description
Parameter value
description
The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the
client-side services are of Any type. The set value should equal
to the maximum rate of actually accessed services.
Recommended value
None
In configuration, commissioning, and maintenance stages
A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually

accessed services exceeds the set value.
Relevant boards
LWX
Configuration
requirements (the set
value of bearer rate
should be the same as
the rate of actually
accessed services)
Actually
accessed
services
Set value
(M)
Actually
accessed
services
Set value (M)
STM-1
155.5
GE
1250
STM-4
622
FE
125
STM-16
2488.3
FC100
1062
OC3
155.5
FC200
2124
OC12
622
FICON
1062
OC48
2488.3
FICON
Express
2124
HDTV
270
ESCON
200
DVB-SDI
270
FDDI
125
DVB-ASI
270
1.1.1.1.1780 Laser Status

Item
Description
Used to set the laser Open/Close status.
Parameter values
Open and Close

Default value: Open
Open: The laser is turned on to start transmitting

services.
Close: The laser is turned off to stop service
transmitting.
Recommended value
Open
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1613

System
Item
Description
maintenance stages
When the laser is set to Close, services are

interrupted.
Relevant boards
LWX
When an optical interface is unused or is not

connected to a fiber, the laser at this interface
should be set to Open.
1.1.1.1.1781 Automatic Laser Shutdown

Item
Description
Used to set whether to enable automatic laser

shutdown (ALS) of the downstream laser of the
local board in the case of loss of received
signals. If ALS is enabled, when the received
signals are lost, the laser is automatically shut
down and stops transmitting signals. ALS
prolongs the service life of a laser and avoids
personal injury from the laser.
Parameter values
Enabled and Disabled
By default, ALS of optical interfaces on client

sides is set to Enabled and ALS of optical
interfaces on WDM sides is set to Disabled.
Recommended value
ALS of optical interfaces on client sides is set to

Enabled and ALS of optical interfaces on WDM
sides is set to Disabled.
In configuration and maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
LWX
If the optical interface on a WDM side does not

use the ESC as the network management channel
or no fiber is connected, you can set ALS of the
optical interface to Enabled to prolong the
service life of the laser.
1.1.1.1.1782 Current Bearer Rate (M)

Item
Description
Used to query the current bearer rate of client-
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1614

System
Item
Description
side services.
Parameter values
Can only be queried
None
Recommended value
None

maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
LWX
None
1.1.1.1.1783 Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

Item
Description
Used to query the operating wavelength at the

WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Parameter values
Can only be queried
None
Recommended value
None

maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
LWX
None
1.1.1.1.1784 Actual Band Type

Item
Description
Used to query the band type.
Parameter values
Can only be queried
None
Recommended value
None
None
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1615

System
Item
Description
Relevant boards
LWX
None
1.1.1.1.1785 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

Item
Description
Used to configure the operating wavelength at

the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Parameter values
C-band wavelength spacing: 100G (192.100196.00 THz)

CWDM-band wavelength spacing: 20 nm (12711611 nm)
The operating wavelength of a fixed-wavelength

OTU should be set to the actual wavelength of
the OTU. The operating wavelength of a tunablewavelength OTU should be set according to the
network wavelength planning.
Recommended value
None
In configuration stage
The same wavelength should be used for a

service in the receive and transmit directions.
If a service travels through multiple

regenerating stations, it is recommended that
these regenerating sections use the same
wavelength.
It is recommended that the active and standby

channels use the same wavelength when the
inter-board channel protection or client-side
path protection is adopted.
Relevant boards
LWX
The configured logic wavelength must be the

same as the actual physical wavelength.
Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is
reported. In the case of tunable optical modules,
issuing the captioned command directly changes
their physical wavelengths (but does not change
the band). In the case of non-tunable optical
modules, issuing this command changes their
logic wavelengths only.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1616

System
1.1.1.1.1786 Configure Band Type

Item
Description
Used to configure the band type.
Parameter values(dBm)
C and CWDM
None
Recommended value
None

maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
LWX
The configured logic band must be the same as

the actual physical band. Otherwise, a
CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported.
1.1.1.1.1787 SD Trigger Condition

Item
Description
Used to configure the trigger condition to

perform SD switching on the board.
Parameter values(dBm)
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, and

None
B1_SD: Regeneration section (B1) signal

degrade
OTUk_DEG: OTUk signal degrade
ODUk_PM_DEG: ODUk_PM signal degrade
None: No condition is configured for SD
switching.
Recommended value
Set the value to None.
When the B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, or

ODUk_PM_DEG alarm occurs, the protection
group might be triggered to perform protection
switching.
Relevant boards
LWX
Set the value to B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, or

ODUk_PM_DEG if the protection mechanism
needs such a trigger condition.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1617

System
26.8 Cross-Connect and Timing Units

The parameters that need to be set for the cross-connect and timing units include the clock
source parameters and clock subnet parameters.
Table 26-23 lists the parameters that need to be set for the cross-connect and timing units.
Figure 1.1 Parameters that need to be set for the cross-connect and timing units
Domain
Parameter
Value
Configuration
Clock
Synchroni
zation
Status
NE Name
Displays the name of an NE.
NE Clock
Working Mode
Tracing Mode,
Holdover Mode,
Free-Run Mode
This field shows the current working

mode of the clock function board on
the NE. This field is read-only.
Tracing Mode: It is the normal
working mode and indicates that the
clock is synchronized with the input
reference clock source under the
actual service conditions.
Holdover Mode: Indicates that the
clock works with the stored
frequency information as the timing
reference after all the timing
references are lost.
Free-Run Mode: Indicates that the
clock works through the internal
oscillator.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
S1 Byte
Synchronization
Quality
Information
For example: NA
Displays the S1 byte synchronous

quality information in the clock
function on the current NE. For
query only.
S1 Byte Clock
Synchronous
Source
For example: NA
Displays the trace source of the

current NE clock. For query only.
Synchronous
Source
For example:
External Clock
Source 1
This field displays no information

until the S1 byte (clock protection
function) is activated. Similarly, this
field displays NA until you press the
Query button, and then it displays
the related information.

Copyright Huawei
Displays the trace source of the

current NE clock. For query only.
Normally, the synchronous source
should be a clock source with the
highest priority among the clock
stratums. If the synchronous source
cannot be traced, try to trace a clock
source with a lower priority level
according to the sequence of the
clock stratums.
1618

System
Domain
Parameter
Value
Configuration
Data Output
Method in
Holdover Mode
Normal Data
Output Mode,
Keep the Latest
Data
Displays the data output method.
Default: Normal
Data Output
Mode
Clock
source
priority
Clock
source
switching
condition
Phaselocked
source
output by
external
clock
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Clock source
The clock sources currently used by

the NE are listed in sequence. The
top clock source is of the highest
priority.
External clock
source mode
2 MHz and 2
Mbit/s
Select the mode only for the input

external clock source.
Synchronous
status byte
Sa4, Sa5, Sa6,

Sa7, and Sa8
Select the synchronous status byte

only for the input external clock
source that is in 2 Mbit/s mode.
AlS alarm
generated
Selected and not

selected
This parameter specifies the

condition for determining the clock
source switching. When an AIS
alarm occurs on an NE, the NE
determines whether to perform the
clock source switching.
B1 BER
thresholdcrossing
generated
Selected and not

selected

condition for determining the clock
source switching. When the B1 BER
on an NE crosses the threshold, the
NE determines whether to perform
the clock source switching.
RLOS, RLOF
and OOF alarms
generated
Selected
When an RLOS, RLOF, or OOF

alarm occurs on an NE, the NE
considers that the corresponding
clock source fails.
External clock
output mode
when 2M output
synchronous
source is invalid
Synchronization
quality
unavailable,
output AIS, and
shut off
This parameter is used to set the

operation to be performed by the
system when the output of the
synchronous clock (that is, 2M
phase-locked source) fails.
Default value:
Shut off
Output mode of
external clock
source 1
2 Mbit/s and 2
MHz
The NE provides two external clock

outputs. This parameter is used to
set the output mode for external
clock source 1.
Output mode of
external clock
source 2
2 Mbit/s and 2
MHz
The NE provides two external clock

outputs. This parameter is used to
set the output mode for external

Copyright Huawei
1619

System
Domain
Parameter
Value
Configuration
clock source 2.
Clock
source
switching
Clock
source
reversion
parameter
Clock
subnet
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Clock source
threshold
No threshold
value, G.813
SDH equipment
timing source
(SETS) signal,
G.812 local clock
signal, G.812
transit clock
signal, G.811
clock signal, and
unknown
Set a threshold for the 2M

synchronous output sources. The
threshold is set for the clock
protection function of the S1 byte.
The NE clock system uses this
threshold as the basis for ensuring
the quality of the output clock. If a
clock is of a quality higher than the
threshold, the clock system transmits
clock signals.
Lock status
Lockout and
unlock
This parameter is used to set

whether the clock source switching
is allowed.
Switching
operation
Forced switching,
manual switching,
and clear
switching

switching operation to be performed
on the clock source.
Higher priority
clock source
reversion mode
Auto-revertive
and non-revertive
When the clock source of a higher

priority degrades, the NE
automatically switches to the clock
source of a lower priority. When this
parameter is set to "Auto-revertive",
the NE automatically switches back
to the clock source of a higher
priority when the clock source of the
higher priority is restored. When this
parameter is set to "Non-revertive",
the NE does not automatically
switch back to the clock source of a
higher priority when the clock
source of the higher priority is
restored.
Clock source
WTR time
0 to 12 minutes

period from the time when the
recovery of the clock is detected to
the time when the clock selector
responds. This setting prevents
repeated switching from occurring
in the case of unstable signals.
Affiliated subnet
Default value: 0

subnet ID.
Protection status
Start extended
SSM protocol,
start standard
SSM protocol,
and stop SSM
This parameter specifies whether to

start up the SSM protocol.

Copyright Huawei
1620

System
Domain
Parameter
Value
Configuration
protocol
Clock source ID
1 to 15
Huawei equipment uses the first

four bits of the S1 byte to identify
the clock source. Hence, the subnet
clock source ID is the four bits.
SSM
output
control
Line port
All the line ports

of the current NE
This parameter displays the line

ports that can be controlled.
Control status
Enabled and
disabled
This parameter specifies whether the

line port allows the output of the
quality information carried by the
S1 byte. Generally, set this
parameter to "Disabled" at edges of
a network to prevent impact on the
other equipment.
Clock
quality
Configuration
quality
Unknown
synchronization
quality, G.811
clock signal,
G.812 transit
clock signal,
G.812 local clock
signal, G.813
SDH equipment
timing source
(SETS) signal, do
not use for
synchronization,
and automatic
extraction

clock quality. Specify the clock
quality of the clock source listed in
the priority table. If an option other
than "Automatic extraction" is
selected, the NE considers the
specified clock quality (other than
the actual clock quality) as the
criteria.
Default value:
Automatic
extraction
Clock ID
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Clock quality
Unknown
synchronization
quality, G.811
clock signal,
G.812 transit
clock signal,
G.812 local clock
signal, G.813
SDH equipment
timing source
(SETS) signal, do
not use for
synchronization,
and automatic
extraction
The clock source quality

information actually received by the
NE is extracted by the NE from the
S1 byte of each clock source. When
the customer queries the actual clock
quality and the NE successfully
returns the result, the quality can be
displayed. Otherwise, it displays "no
information".
Line port
All the line ports
This parameter displays the line

Copyright Huawei
1621

System
Domain
Parameter
status
Enabled status
Value
Configuration
of the current NE
ports that can be configured with the

clock ID.
Enabled and
disabled
This parameter specifies whether to

enable the setting of the clock ID.
Default value:
Enabled
26.9 Optical Amplifier Boards

The parameters that need to be set for the optical amplifier boards include the laser status,
board work type, configure band, configure working band parity, actual band, actual working
band parity, threshold of input power loss, gain, rated optical power, nominal gain upper
threshold, and nominal gain lower threshold.
1.1.1.1.1788 Laser Status

Item
Description
Used to set the laser Open/Close status.
Parameter values
Open and Close

Default value of the OBU1: Open
Default value of the RPC01/RPC02: Close
Recommended value
Close

maintenance stages
When the laser is set to Close, services are

interrupted.
Relevant boards
OBU1, RPC01, and RPC02
When services are normal, the laser of the optical

amplifying unit should be set to Open.
1.1.1.1.1789 Board Work Type

Item
Description
Used to query and set the Board Work Type.
Parameter values
C, C+L, and L
None
Recommended value
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1622

System
Item
Description

maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
RPC01 and RPC02
None
1.1.1.1.1790 Configure Band

Item
Description
Used to configure the type of the working band

of a board.
Parameter values
Supports only C band.
Recommended value
None

maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
None
1.1.1.1.1791 Configure Working Band Parity

Item
Description
Selects the required parity of the working band.
Parameter values
All, Even, and Odd
All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even

wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C
band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is
applicable for the OBU1, RPC01, and PRC02
boards.
Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even
wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There
are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the RPC01 and PRC02 boards.
Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1623

System
Item
Description
wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There
are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for
the RPC01 and PRC02 boards.
Recommended value
Corresponding wavelengths are used according

to different requirements.
None
Relevant boards
When configuring the parity of wavelengths,

make sure that the parity configured is consistent
with the parity of the actual working
wavelengths.
1.1.1.1.1792 Actual Band

Item
Description
Used to query the actual working band of the

board.
Parameter values
Can only be queried
None
Recommended value
None
None
Relevant boards
OBU1
None
1.1.1.1.1793 Actual Working Band Parity

Item
Description
Used to query the parity of the actual working

band of the board.
Parameter values
Can only be queried
None
Recommended value
None
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1624

System
Item
Description
None
Relevant boards
None
1.1.1.1.1794 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

Item
Description
Indicates the lower threshold of input optical

power loss (an MUT_LOS alarm is reported).
Parameter values
Can only be queried
The default value varies with the boards and

subjects to the on-site queried result.
Recommended value
None
None
Relevant boards
OBU1
None
1.1.1.1.1795 Gain (dB)

Item
Description
Used to query the optical power gain of the

current optical amplifying unit.
Parameter values
Can only be queried
None
Recommended value
None

maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
OBU1
Normally, the queried result should range from

the nominal gain minus 2.5 dB to the nominal
gain plus 2.5 dB.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1625

System
1.1.1.1.1796 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

Item
Description
Used to query the nominal gain upper threshold.
Parameter values
Can only be queried
None
Recommended value
None
None
Relevant boards
OBU1
None
1.1.1.1.1797 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

Item
Description
Used to query the nominal gain lower threshold.
Parameter values
Can only be queried
None
Recommended value
None
None
Relevant boards
OBU1
None
1.1.1.1.1798 Rated Optical Power (dBm)

Item
Description
Used to set and query the single-wavelength

rated optical power as the reference value for
automatic optical power adjustment.
Parameter values (dBm)
30.0 to 30.0
Default value at the input optical interface: 19

dBm
Default value at the output optical interface: 4
dBm
Recommended value
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
OBUC01: input interface: 20 dBm; output

Copyright Huawei
1626

System
Item
Description
interface: 0 dBm
OBUC03: input interface: 19 dBm; output
interface: 4 dBm

maintenance stages
None
Relevant boards
OBU1
The rated input and output optical power should

be configured by referring to the actual
configurable input and output range of the
optical amplifying unit and should be the same
as the input and output values measured when
the optical amplifying unit operates normally.
1.1.1.1.1799 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

Item
Description
Used to set or query the output optical power of

an optical amplifier board.
5 to 30.0 (continuously tunable)
Normally, the fixed pump optical power of the

RPC board should be larger than 23 dBm. The
value is related to the system specifications.
Recommended value
None

maintenance stages
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) must be set

within a range between Min. Fixed Pump
Optical Power (dBm) and Max. Fixed Pump
Optical Power (dBm). If the fixed pump optical
power value is beyond the range, the board
might work abnormally.
Relevant boards
RPC01 and RPC02
None
1.1.1.1.1800 Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

Item
Description
Used to query the minimum pump optical power
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1627

System
Item
Description
that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the
fixed pump optical power value is smaller than
the minimum value, the board might work
abnormally.
5 to 30.0
None
Recommended value
Default value: 20 dBm

maintenance stages
If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical

Power (dBm) is smaller than the value of Min.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board
Relevant boards
RPC01 and RPC02
None
1.1.1.1.1801 Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

Item
Description
Used to query the maximum pump optical power

that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the
fixed pump optical power value is larger than the
maximum value, the board might work
abnormally.
5 to 30.0
None
Recommended value
Default value: 26 dBm

maintenance stages
If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical

Power (dBm) is larger than the value of Max.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board
Relevant boards
RPC01 and RPC02
None
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1628

System
27 Task Collection
27
Task Collection
About This Chapter

This topic describes the operation tasks to be performed during board commissioning and
board configuration.
27.1 Querying the Protection Subnet
You can know the network protection schemes by querying the protection subnet to which an
NE belongs. Then, you can configure services for the board according to the protection
schemes.
27.2 Troubleshooting Service Unavailability
In certain cases, the services become unavailable after the cross-connections related to the
services are configured. This topic describes the methods of troubleshooting service
unavailability.
27.3 Troubleshooting the Clock Tracing Failure
In many cases, the equipment still fails to trace the clock after you configure the clock source
priority list. To locate the clock tracing problem, you need to check all the stations that the
clock travels along the clock tracing direction and from the source station to the sink station.
27.4 Configuring the F&f Debugging Serial Port and OAM NM Port
The OAM NM port provides the network management function and is used for remote
maintenance. The F&f debugging serial port is used for managing the external equipment
such as the COA, TDA, and DCU. The F&f debugging serial port supports a maximum
transmission distance of 15 m. The AUX board provides the ports for connecting the F&f
debugging serial port and OAM NM port.
27.5 Testing the Frequency Accuracy of the Free-Run Clock
The frequency accuracy indicates the deviation of the actual clock frequency from the
nominal clock frequency, which is a highly stable frequency. Generally, the frequency
accuracy is represented by the relative frequency deviation.
27.6 Testing the Clock Holdover Accuracy
The SDH equipment supports the clock holdover function. That is, the SDH equipment can
retain the clock accuracy of 0.37 ppm or a higher clock accuracy (at a temperature from
20C to 30C) relative to the clock frequency at the service interruption moment, within 24
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1629

System
27 Task Collection
hours after the external clock source is interrupted.

27.7 Checking Board Parameters
To learn about board parameter status, you can check board parameters. Before actual
configuration operations in networking, you need to check board parameters, to make sure
that the board parameter status meets the requirements of actual networking.
27.8 Testing the SAN Service Channel
When a network carries services, you need to check the availability of the service channels.
27.9 Testing the SDI Service Channel
27.1 Querying the Protection Subnet

You can know the network protection schemes by querying the protection subnet to which an
NE belongs. Then, you can configure services for the board according to the protection
schemes.
1.1.1.1.1802 Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The SDH board must be created.
1.1.1.1.1803 Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > SDH Protection Subnet Maintenance from the Main Menu to
display the Protection Subnet Attributes dialog box.
Step 2 In Protection Subnet Attributes, the left pane displays the protection subnet to which the NE
belongs, and the right pane displays the attribute information of the protection subnet.
----End
27.2 Troubleshooting Service Unavailability

In certain cases, the services become unavailable after the cross-connections related to the
services are configured. This topic describes the methods of troubleshooting service
unavailability.
1.1.1.1.1804 Context
After the cross-connections are configured, the services are unavailable.
1.1.1.1.1805 Impacts on the System

The services are unavailable.
1.1.1.1.1806 Possible Causes
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Cause 1: The type of the logical board is different from the type of the physical board.
Copyright Huawei
1630

System
Cause 2: The services are configured incorrectly.
Cause 3: The other boards on the NE do not operate normally.
27 Task Collection
1.1.1.1.1807 Tools, Instruments, and Materials

Step 1 Ensure that the type of the logical board configured on the is the same as the type of the
physical board. If the type of the logical board configured on the U2000 is different from the
type of the physical board, delete the current logical board and then add the correct logical
board. For the operations of deleting a logical board, see Deleting Boards. For the operations
of adding a logical board, see Adding Boards.
Step 2 Ensure that the cross-connect services are configured correctly and that the cross-connect
services are activated. If the cross-connect services are configured correctly, modify the
configuration of the cross-connect services. For details, see Modifying the Service
Configuration Data.
Step 3 Check whether all the boards on the NE operate normally and whether any critical or major
alarms are generated on the boards.
Step 4 Switch the services from the working cross-connect board to the protection cross-connect
board. If the services are restored after the switching, replace the working cross-connect
board. If the services are still unavailable after the switching, perform Step 5.
Step 5 Contact Huawei technical support personnel.
----End
27.3 Troubleshooting the Clock Tracing Failure

In many cases, the equipment still fails to trace the clock after you configure the clock source
priority list. To locate the clock tracing problem, you need to check all the stations that the
clock travels along the clock tracing direction and from the source station to the sink station.
The NE must be connected to the NMS through an NMS port or using a DCC
communication management device.
The software must be installed on the PC and the PC must be started.
Step 1 Ensure that the clock source priority list is configured correctly.
If the problems are detected in Steps 113, correct the configurations according to the
operations in Configuring Clocks.
Step 2 Query the input mode of the external clock and ensure that the input mode of the external
clock source is set correctly. That is, ensure that the input mode of the external clock source is
set to the 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s.
Step 3 Ensure that the SSM mode is enabled.
Step 4 Ensure that the clock source to be traced is available.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1631

System
27 Task Collection
Step 5 If the line source is unavailable, check whether the LOS or LOF alarm occurs on the
corresponding optical port. If the LOS or LOF alarm occurs on the corresponding optical port,
clear the alarm. If the LOS or LOF alarm does not occur on the corresponding optical port,
run the test command to check whether the inter-board communication is normal. If the interboard communication is not normal, it indicates that the equipment fails to trace the clock due
to the abnormal inter-board communication.
Step 6 Check whether the external clock is derived from the BITS or other NEs. If the source of the
external clock is incorrect, set the correct external clock source.
Step 7 Check whether the clock source is locked. If the clock source is locked, unlock the clock
source.
Step 8 Check whether the switching mode of the clock source is non-revertive on the . If the
switching mode of the clock source is non-revertive, change the switching mode to revertive.
Step 9 Check whether any forced switching or manual switching is performed for other clock
sources. If a forced switching or manual switching is performed for other clock sources, clear
the switching.
Step 10 Check whether the S1 byte that carries the clock source signal is DNU. If the S1 byte that
carries the clock source signal is DNU, go to step 13.
Step 11 Check whether the S1 byte is correct. If the S1 byte is incorrect, set the correct S1 byte.
Step 12 If the S1 byte is correct, check whether the external clock is derived from the BITS or other
NEs. If the source of the external clock is incorrect, set the correct external clock source.
Check whether the clock source is locked. If the clock source is locked, unlock the clock
source. Check whether any forced switching or manual switching is performed for other clock
sources. If a forced switching or manual switching is performed for other clock sources, clear
the switching.
Step 13 In the case of the line clock source, check whether the timeslot for receiving the S1 byte is
any of sa4sa8. If the timeslot for receiving the S1 byte is not any of sa4sa8, set the timeslot
for receiving the S1 byte to any of sa4sa8.
----End
27.4 Configuring the F&f Debugging Serial Port and OAM

NM Port
The OAM NM port provides the network management function and is used for remote
maintenance. The F&f debugging serial port is used for managing the external equipment
such as the COA, TDA, and DCU. The F&f debugging serial port supports a maximum
transmission distance of 15 m. The AUX board provides the ports for connecting the F&f
debugging serial port and OAM NM port.
The PC must be connected to the equipment through a network cable. The PC must be
started.
The U2000 must be started.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1632

System
27 Task Collection
Step 1 Open the NE whose F&f debugging serial port and OAM NM port need to be configured on
the U2000.
Step 2 Choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree. See Figure 27-1.
Figure 1.1 Configuring the F&f debugging serial port and OAM NM port
Step 3 Configure the OAM NM port. Select Enable OAM Access. This operation is optional.
Step 4 Configure the F&f debugging serial port. Select Enable Serial Port Access and set the baud
rate to 38400.
Step 5 Click Apply so that the settings can take effect.
----End
27.5 Testing the Frequency Accuracy of the Free-Run Clock

The frequency accuracy indicates the deviation of the actual clock frequency from the
nominal clock frequency, which is a highly stable frequency. Generally, the frequency
accuracy is represented by the relative frequency deviation.
1.1.1.1.1813 Tools and Instruments

Frequency meter
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1633

System
27 Task Collection
1.1.1.1.1814 Test Connection Diagram

Connect the frequency meter to the NE as shown in Figure 27-2.
Figure 1.1 Connection for testing the frequency accuracy of the free-run clock
2 MHz
Equipment
Standard clock
Frequency meter
Step 1 Use the frequency meter to measure the frequency of the standard clock.
Step 2 Set the clock to be in free-run mode. Set the output mode of the external clock to the 2 MHz
or 2 Mbit/s mode. Connect the output clock signal to the frequency meter for measurement.
Step 3 Use the frequency meter to measure the frequency of the free-run clock. Compare the actual
frequency of the free-run clock with the frequency of the standard clock to calculate the
frequency accuracy of the free-run clock.
Step 4 You can calculate the frequency deviation and determine the frequency accuracy only after
you check the clock frequencies at different time periods within several months and perform
frequency tests under different conditions. In addition, you need to perform the frequency
tests at appropriate time periods based on the actual situations.
----End
27.6 Testing the Clock Holdover Accuracy

The SDH equipment supports the clock holdover function. That is, the SDH equipment can
retain the clock accuracy of 0.37 ppm or a higher clock accuracy (at a temperature from
20C to 30C) relative to the clock frequency at the service interruption moment, within 24
hours after the external clock source is interrupted.
The following operations must be performed:
The U2000 LCT must be started.
You must log in to the NE.
1.1.1.1.1817 Tools and Instruments

Frequency meter, SDH analyzer, and U2000 LCT
1.1.1.1.1818 Test Connection Diagram

Connect the testing tools to the NE as shown in Figure 27-3.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1634

System
27 Task Collection
Figure 1.1 Connection for testing the clock holdover accuracy

K
Standard clock
Frequency
meter
Equipment
SDH
analyzer
Step 1 Turn on Switch K. Configure the standard clock source for the OptiX OSN 3500 on the
U2000 LCT.
Step 2 After performing all the preparations before locking the clock source, record the frequency.
Then, the equipment locks the standard clock source for 24 hours. Turn off Switch K. Then,
the clock of the OptiX OSN 3500 changes to holdover mode. Then, record the clock
frequency every other hour.
Step 3 Check the records in 24 hours. The test requires that the frequency stability of the standard
clock should be higher than 1x1010/day.
----End
27.7 Checking Board Parameters

To learn about board parameter status, you can check board parameters. Before actual
configuration operations in networking, you need to check board parameters, to make sure
that the board parameter status meets the requirements of actual networking.
Step 1 Check SDH board parameters. For the SDH board parameters, see Table 27-1.
Figure 1.1 SDH board parameters
Boar
d
Type
SDH
Paramete
r
MSP
sharing
Laser
Switch
Optical(El
ectrical)Int
erface
Loopback
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Navigation Path
Application Scenario
1. In the NE
Explorer,
select a board.
2. Choose
Configuratio
n > SDH
Interface
from the
Function Tree.
3. Click By
When configuring MSP shared services on an

optical interface of a board, enable this
parameter.
When configuring services on an optical
interface of a board, enable this parameter.
Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When

the equipment runs normally, set this
parameter to non-loopback.
Inloop: The loop is performed toward the

Copyright Huawei
1635

System
Boar
d
Type
Paramete
r
Navigation Path
Board/Port(c
hannel) and
select Port
from the dropdown list.
Hardware
REG
Enable
27 Task Collection
local NE.
Outloop: The loop is performed toward the

opposite NE. Inloop and outloop of an
optical interface affect services. They are
used to locate faults.
In the REG working mode, the board processes

only the framer header and regenerator section
overheads. In the case of the non-REG service
configuration, set this parameter to Disabled.
Step 2 Check PDH board parameters. For the PDH board parameters, see Table 27-2.
Figure 1.2 PDH board parameters
Boar
d
Type
Paramete
r
PDH
J2 byte
V5 byte
Service
Load
Indication
Tributary
Loopback
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Navigation Path
1. In the NE
Explorer,
select a board.
2. Choose
Configuratio
n > Overhead
Management
from the
Function Tree.
3. Click By
Board/Port(c
hannel) and
select VC12
Path
Overhead
The J2 byte is a trace byte. Ensure that a device

has the same J2 byte as its interconnected
device.
1. In the NE
Explorer,
select a board.
2. Choose
Configuratio
n > PDH
Interface
from the
Function Tree.
3. Click By
Board/Port(c
hannel) and
The V5 byte is a path status and signal label

byte. It is used to detect bit errors and indicate
remote errors or failures on lower order paths.
V5 values must match service types.
Non-loaded: The service path does not

process the services that are carried, to
suppress alarms in non-loaded service paths.
Load: The service path processes the

services that are carried. In the case of a
tributary board that has services, set this
parameter to Load.
Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When

the equipment runs normally, set this
parameter to non-loopback.
Inloop: When input service signals reach the

Copyright Huawei
1636

System
Boar
d
Type
Paramete
r
Navigation Path
27 Task Collection
select Port
tributary board of the target NE, the signals

revert to the original trail. This function is
used to locate faults of each service path.
Outloop: When input service signals reach

the tributary board through the input port of
the local NE, the signals are looped back
directly to the service output end.
Step 3 Check data board parameters. For the data board parameters, see Table 27-3.
Figure 1.3 Data board parameters
Board
Type
Paramet
er
Ethern
et
Enabled/
Disabled
When configuring Ethernet board port

services, set the port to Enabled.
Working
Mode
Set the working mode of Ethernet ports

according to networking configuration
requirements.
Maximu
m Frame
Length
When a packet exceeds the maximum

frame length that is set, the packet is
discarded. Alternatively, the packet length
is minimized to satisfy the specified frame
length. By default, the value is set to
1522, unless otherwise specified.
MAC
Loopbac
k
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer,
select a board.
2. Choose
Configuration >
Ethernet Interface
Management >
Ethernet Interface
from the Function
Tree.
3. Click External
Port.
4. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.
PHY
Loopbac
k
TAG
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
select a board.
2. Choose
Non-loopback: It is a normal state.

When the equipment runs normally,
set this parameter to non-loopback.
Inloop: Inside the equipment, services

from the cross-connect side are looped
back to the cross-connect side. This
operation affects services configured
on ports and is used to locate faults.
Non-loopback: It is a normal state.

When the equipment runs normally,
set this parameter to non-loopback.
Inloop: Inside the equipment, services

from the cross-connect side are looped
back to the cross-connect side. This
operation affects services configured
on ports and is used to locate faults.
Tag Aware: If the client-side

equipment sends tag packets, set the
TAG attribute of external ports to Tag

Copyright Huawei
1637

System
Board
Type
Paramet
er
27 Task Collection
Navigation Path
Configuration >
Ethernet Interface
Management >
Ethernet Interface
from the Function
Tree.
3. Click External
Port.
4. Click the TAG
Attributes tab.
Access: If the client-side equipment

sends untagged packets, set the TAG
attribute of external ports to Access.
Hybrid: If the client-side equipment

sends tag and untagged packets, set the
TAG attribute of external ports to
Hybrid.
Aware.
Entry
Detection
Port Type
ATM
UPC/NP
C
Enabled/
Disabled
select a board.
2. Choose
Configuration >
ATM Interface
Management >
ATM Interface
Management from
the Function Tree.
3. Click External
Port.
This parameter is used to identify tags in

data packets. During the configuration of
VLAN services, set this parameter to
Enabled.
UNI: The maximum number of VPI

bits is 8. The UNI is used on edge
nodes between the user network and
ATM network.
NNI: The maximum number of VPI

bits is 12. The NNI is used between
ATM networks.
Enabled: When the traffic parameter is

valid and strict control of traffic is
required, set this parameter to
Enabled.
Disabled: When the traffic parameter

is invalid (excepting the PCR of CBR
services) and service burst and
grooming are permitted, set this
parameter to Disabled.
Loopbac
k
Inloop is used to locate faults. During

normal service configuration, set this
parameter to No Loopback.
Laser
Switch
This parameter is used to set the on/off

status of a laser. During normal service
configuration, set this parameter to Open.
----End
27.8 Testing the SAN Service Channel

Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1638

System
27 Task Collection
1.1.1.1.1821 Testing the Loopback Function When the FC Flow Control Function Is
Disabled
Step 1 Connect the optical fibers to the equipment according to Figure 27-4. Ensure that the mode of
the GBIC optical module of the SmartBits and the mode of the SFP optical module of the
MST4 match the mode of the optical fibers.
Figure 1.1 Connection for testing the loopback function when the FC flow control function is
disabled
NE1
NE2
SDH
network
SmartBits
Signal flow
Step 2 Disable the FC flow control function on both the local and remote MST4 boards.
Step 3 Loop back the port of the remote MST4 by using an optical fiber or set an inloop on the port
of the remote MST4.
Step 4 Connect the SmartBits to NE1 and set the SmartBits to the private Pt-2-Pt mode.
Step 5 Check whether the services are normal on the SmartBits.
Step 6 If the services are unavailable, configure a loopback to the remote MST4 on the cross-connect
board of NE1 and a loopback to the local MST4 on the cross-connect board of NE2. Then,
perform the test section by section to locate the fault.
----End
1.1.1.1.1822 Testing the Connection to the FC Switch When the FC Flow Control
Function Is Disabled
Step 1 Connect the optical fibers to the equipment according to Figure 27-5 after ensuring that
services are available on the SmartBits when the FC flow control function is disabled. In
addition, do not modify the configuration of the boards.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1639

System
27 Task Collection
Figure 1.1 Connection for testing the connection to the FC switch when the FC flow control
function is disabled
Switch A
NE1
NE2
Switch B
SDH
network
SmartBits
SmartBits
Step 7 Set the port of the SmartBits to the public Pt-2-Pt mode. Then, perform the following
operations: link_up, login, public, commit, and packet transmission.
If an error occurs when you perform the link_up or login operation, check the connection
between the SmartBits and the switch. In addition, check the port rate.
If an error occurs when you perform the public operation, check whether the mode of the
SFP optical module of the MST4, the mode of the SFP optical module that is installed on
the FC port to which the MST4 is connected, and the mode of the optical fibers match
each other. If the connection is correct, log in to the switch and issue the portcfgshow
command to check the configuration status of the switch port. The configuration of the
port must meet the requirement and the configurations of the ports at both ends must be
consistent. Then, issue the switchshow command to check the status of the FC switch
and check whether the port is in the Online state. In addition, you need to check whether
WWW of the switch at the opposite end, the downstream information, and the upstream
information are displayed.
If the configuration of the switch port is correct and WWW of the switch at the opposite
end is displayed but the downstream information and upstream information are not
displayed, check whether the configuration of the SmartBits is correct. In addition, check
whether WWN Src and WWN Dst are correctly set on the SmartBits.
If the configuration of the SmartBits is correct, check whether network segments are set
on the FC switches. If network segments are set on the FC switches, ensure that the
switch ports to which the SmartBits is connected are in the same network segment.
----End
27.9 Testing the SDI Service Channel

1.1.1.1.1823 SDI Service Loopback Test

Step 1 Connect the cables to the equipment according toFigure 27-6.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1640

System
27 Task Collection
Figure 1.1 Connection for an SDI service loopback test

NE1
SDH
network
Video generator
NE2
Video analyzer
Signal flow
Step 2 Set the service type on a video generator.

Step 3 Set the eye diagram, image, BER, and jitter on a video analyzer.
Step 4 Before the test, set the BER window to 0. Observe the video analyzer to check whether the
service is available.
Step 5 If the service is unavailable, configure a loopback from the local cross-connect board to the
opposite VST4 board and a loopback from the opposite cross-connect board to the local VST4
board. Perform a test section by section to locate the fault.
----End
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1641

System
A Glossary
Glossary
Numerics
2DM
two-way delay measurement
3G
See 3rd Generation.
3R
reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G)
The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the

International Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is
expected to deliver data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s,
compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation
technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ)
A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged
frame. The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with
a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted
over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag.
This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent
transmission of packets over private VLANs.
A
AAL
See ATM Adaptation Layer.
ABR
See available bit rate.
AC
alternating current
ACH
associated channel header
ACL
See access control list.
ACR
allowed cell rate
ADM
add/drop multiplexer
ADMC
automatically detected and manually cleared
ADSL
asymmetric digital subscriber line
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1642

System
A Glossary
AF
See assured forwarding.
AGC
automatic gain control
AIS
alarm indication signal
ALC
See automatic level control.
ALS
See automatic laser shutdown.
AM
See adaptive modulation.
AMI
See alternate mark inversion.
AMU
ATM cell multiplex unit
ANSI
See American National Standards Institute.
APD
See avalanche photodiode.
APS
automatic protection switching
ARP
See Address Resolution Protocol.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASK
amplitude shift keying
ATM
asynchronous transfer mode
ATM Adaptation Layer

(AAL)
An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode

(ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various
types of information, including voice, video, and data.
ATPC
See automatic transmit power control.
AU
See administrative unit.
AUG
See administrative unit group.
AWG
arrayed waveguide grating
Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP)
An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts

and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP
responses.
American National
Standards Institute
(ANSI)
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing

industry. ANSI participates in defining network protocol standards.
access control list (ACL)
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have
access to a resource.
adaptive modulation
(AM)
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according

to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses
a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and
the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the
equipment uses the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the antiinterference capability of the link that carries high-priority services.
administrative unit (AU)
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order
path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload
(the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1643

System
A Glossary
payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.

administrative unit group
(AUG)
One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM

payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
alternate mark inversion

(AMI)
A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent

logical 1 values.
assured forwarding (AF)
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of
IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth
and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in
forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service
class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.
automatic laser shutdown

(ALS)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser

transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control

(ALC)
A feature that identifies speech signals and adjusts the sound volume to stay
within a comfortable range, improving user experience.
automatic transmit power

control (ATPC)
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal
detected at the receiver
available bit rate (ABR)
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides
possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require
the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or
delay.
avalanche photodiode
(APD)
A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.

Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free
an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher
voltages than other semiconductor electronics.
B
B-ISDN
See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA
booster amplifier
BBE
background block error
BC
boundary clock
BCD
binary coded decimal
BDI
See backward defect indication.
BE
See best effort.
BER
bit error rate
BFD
See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP
Border Gateway Protocol
BIOS
See basic input/output system.
BIP
See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8
See bit interleaved parity-8.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1644

System
A Glossary
BIP-X
bit interleaved parity-X
BITS
See building integrated timing supply.
BMC
best master clock
BNC
See bayonet-neill-concelman.
BPDU
See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS
board protection switching
BRAS
See broadband remote access server.
BSC
binary synchronous communication
BSS
base station subsystem
BTS
base transceiver station
BWS
backbone wavelength division multiplexing system
Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection (BFD)
A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established
between neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to
each other. If one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated
period, the system regards that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper
layer protocol to take actions to recover the faulty link.
backplane
An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backward defect
indication (BDI)
A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform
the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
basic input/output system

(BIOS)
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output

control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system
setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions
for the computer.
bayonet-neill-concelman
(BNC)
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
best effort (BE)
A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are

forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the
bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram
can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any
improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability.
bit interleaved parity

(BIP)
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by

equipment at the transmit end over a specified portion of the signal in such a
manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all
X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides
even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified
portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that
there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A
monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion
includes the BIP-X.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1645

System
A Glossary
bit interleaved parity-8

(BIP-8)
Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a

transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits
(one byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the
number of "1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for
the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bridge protocol data unit

(BPDU)
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended
LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain
information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends
up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to
detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting
down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup,
or blocked, state.
broadband integrated
services digital network
(B-ISDN)
A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as

voice. It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNETbased circuits at 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadband remote access

server (BRAS)
A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between

backbone networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods
for fundamental access and manages the broadband access network. It is
deployed at the edge of network to provide broadband access services,
convergence, and forwarding of multiple services, meeting the demands for
transmission capacity and bandwidth utilization of different users. BRAS is a
core device for the broadband users' access to a broadband network.
building integrated timing

supply (BITS)
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one

can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to
connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory
synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called
BITS.
built-in WDM
A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that
belong to the OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several
wavelengths directly.
C
CAR
committed access rate
CAS
See channel associated signaling.
CAS multiframe
A multiframe set up based on timeslot 16. Each CAS multiframe contains 16 E1

PCM frames. Among the 8 bits of timeslot 16 in the first frame, the first 4 bits
are used for multiframe synchronization. The multiframe alignment signal
(MFAS) for synchronization is 0000. The last 4 bits are used as the not
multiframe alignment signal (NMFAS). The NMFAS is XYXX. For the other 15
frames, timeslot 16 is used to transmit exchange and multiplexing (E&M)
signaling corresponding to each timeslot.
CAU
See client automatic upgrade.
CBR
See constant bit rate.
CBS
See committed burst size.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1646

System
A Glossary
CC
See continuity check.
CDVT
cell delay variation tolerance
CE
See customer edge.
CES
See circuit emulation service.
CFM
connectivity fault management
CFR
cell fill rate
CGMP
Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR
committed information rate
CISPR
International Special Committee on Radio Interference
CIST
See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLEI
common language equipment identification
CLNP
connectionless network protocol
CLP
See cell loss priority.
CMI
coded mark inversion
CRC
See cyclic redundancy check.
CRC-4 multiframe
A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of
timeslot 0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in
principle and implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM
frames. Each CRC-4 multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each
CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits.
Bits C1 to C4 of a check block can check the previous check block.
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSES
consecutive severely errored second
CSF
Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD
See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CSPF
constraint shortest path first
CST
See common spanning tree.
CV
connectivity verification
CW
control word
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CIST)
The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical
connectivity using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that
all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC)
The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully

maintained atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds
worldwide.
carrier sense multiple
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1647

System
access with collision

detection (CSMA/CD)
A Glossary
networking access method in which:
A carrier sensing scheme is used.
A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a

frame, stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits
for a random time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP)
A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being
dropped if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured
traffic, which is unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort
traffic, which might be dropped.
channel associated
signaling (CAS)
A signaling system in which signaling information is transmitted within a

dedicated voice channel. China Signaling System No. 1 is a type of CAS
signaling.
circuit emulation service

(CES)
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM
networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into
ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM
network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these
ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in
E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.
client automatic upgrade

(CAU)
A function that enables a user to automatically detect the update of the client
version and upgrade the client. This keeps the version of the client is the same as
that of the server.
coarse wavelength division

multiplexing (CWDM)
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical

channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of
several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in shortdistance chain networking.
collision
A condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the
same time. Their interference makes both unintelligible.
committed burst size

(CBS)
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum
burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that
this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that
might be forwarded.
common spanning tree

(CST)
A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every
MST region is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as
their spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP.
constant bit rate (CBR)
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells
based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that
depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check (CC)
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is
achieved after MEPs transmit Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) periodically.
customer edge (CE)
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection

to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cyclic redundancy check

(CRC)
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error

checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data
transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission
and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1648

System
A Glossary
device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the
same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is
known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data
but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DC
direct current
DC-C
See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I
See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common (with

ground) (DC-C)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is shortcircuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric
equipment.
DC-return isolate (with

ground) (DC-I)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is shortcircuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is
isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply
cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC
See data communications channel.
DCE
data connection equipment
DCM
See dispersion compensation module.
DCN
See data communication network.
DDF
digital distribution frame
DDN
See digital data network.
DE
discard eligible
DEI
device emulation interrupt
DHCP
See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch
dual in-line package switch
DLAG
See distributed link aggregation group.
DM
See delay measurement.
DNI
dual node interconnection
DRDB
dynamic random database
DSCP
See differentiated services code point.
DSL
See digital subscriber line.
DSLAM
See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DTE
See data terminal equipment.
DTMF
See dual tone multiple frequency.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1649

System
A Glossary
DVB-ASI
digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM
See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
DiffServ
See Differentiated Services.
Differentiated Services
(DiffServ)
An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding

traffic in a differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network
congestion.
Distance Vector Multicast

Routing Protocol
(DVMRP)
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements
a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to
exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration

parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides
a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
data communication
network (DCN)
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data

communication function.
data communications
channel (DCC)
The data channel that uses the D1D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N
signal to transmit information about operation, management, maintenance and
provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of
bytes D1D3 are referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC
channels that are composed of bytes D4D12 are referred to as the 576 kbit/s
DCC-M channel.
data terminal equipment

(DTE)
A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through
the DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals
produced by DCE.
delay measurement (DM)
The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a
source node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the
same source node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination
node.
dense wavelength division

multiplexing (DWDM)
The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low
attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with
specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit
simultaneously in the same fiber.
differentiated services
code point (DSCP)
According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (DiffServ), the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most
significant bits and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for
priority marking. Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most
important bits in the ToS. It is the combination of IP precedence and types of
service. The DSCP value is used to ensure that routers supporting only IP
precedence can be used because the DSCP value is compatible with IP
precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore, terminal
devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital data network

(DDN)
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as
fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross
multiplex technology.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1650

System
A Glossary
digital subscriber line

(DSL)
A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local
telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines
without affecting the POTS service.

access multiplexer
(DSLAM)
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company

that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using
multiplexing techniques.
dispersion
The maximum error of the local clock compared with the reference clock.
dispersion compensation
module (DCM)
A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the

dispersion of transmitting fiber.
distributed link
aggregation group
(DLAG)
A board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts

and to negotiate with the opposite end. Once a link down failure occurs on a port
or a hardware failure occurs on a board, the services can automatically be
switched to the slave board, achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
dual tone multiple

frequency (DTMF)
In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set

combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four
low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.
E
E-Aggr
See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN
See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line
See Ethernet line.
EBS
See excess burst size.
ECC
See embedded control channel.
EDFA
See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEPROM
See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.
EF
See expedited forwarding.
EFM
Ethernet in the First Mile
EFM OAM
Ethernet in the first mile OAM
EIA
See Electronic Industries Alliance.
EIR
See excess information rate.
EMC
See electromagnetic compatibility.
EPD
early packet discard
EPL
See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN
See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPON
See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS
Ethernet ring protection switching
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1651

System
A Glossary
ESC
See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON
See enterprise system connection.
ESD
electrostatic discharge
ESN
See equipment serial number.
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC
Ethernet virtual connection
EVPL
See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
Electronic Industries
Alliance (EIA)
An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various

electronics manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components. RS-232C, for example, is the EIA standard for connecting serial components.
EoD
See Ethernet over dual domains.
Ethernet
A LAN technology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection.

The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or
10000 Mbit/s. An Ethernet network features high reliability and is easy to
maintain.
Ethernet aggregation (EAggr)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet

virtual connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet

virtual connection).
Ethernet local area

network (E-LAN)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC

(Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethernet over dual

domains (EoD)
A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling
Ethernet service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethernet passive optical

network (EPON)
A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband

access technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber
transmission. It supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s
and a reach distance of up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth
is shared based on encrypted broadcast transmission for different users. In the
upstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on TDM. EPON meets the
requirements for high bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN

service (EPLAN)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks.

This service is carried over a dedicated bridge and point-to-multipoint
connections.
Ethernet private line

(EPL)
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and pointto-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet virtual private

LAN service (EVPLAN)

This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual private

line (EVPL)

This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-point connections.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1652

System
A Glossary
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for

GSM.
eSFP
enhanced small form-factor pluggable
electric supervisory
channel (ESC)
A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and

transmission of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The
monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is
transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable
programable read-only
memory (EEPROM)
A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for
stable storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing
reprograming. EEPROMs contain less memory than RAM, take longer to
reprogram, and can be reprogramed only a limited number of times before
wearing out.
electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing

its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment
without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same
environment.
embedded control channel

(ECC)
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical
layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance
(OAM) information between NEs.
encapsulation
A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a

message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the
lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and
are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B
header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying.
Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP.
enterprise system
connection (ESCON)
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage
system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is
200 Mbit/s.
equalization
A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can

compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency
selective fading.
equipment serial number

(ESN)
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct

allocation of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called
"equipment fingerprint".
erbium-doped fiber
amplifier (EDFA)
An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short
length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy
level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes
the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific
wavelength range.
excess burst size (EBS)
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM)
mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst
size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the
maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the
committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1653

System
A Glossary
recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of
the IP packet that might be forwarded.
excess information rate
(EIR)
The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result
of the actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
exercise switching
An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions

properly. The protection switching is not really performed.
expedited forwarding
(EF)
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services
that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the
cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set
rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".
F
FC
See fiber channel.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
FDD
See frequency division duplex.
FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI
See forward defect indication.
FDI packet
See forward defect indication packet.
FDV
See frame delay variation.
FEC
See forwarding equivalence class.
FFD
fast failure detection
FIB
See forward information base.
FICON
See Fiber Connect.
FIFO
See first in first out.
FLR
See frame loss ratio.
FPGA
See field programmable gate array.
FPS
See fast protection switching.
FRR
See fast reroute.
FTN
FEC to NHLFE
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
Fiber Connect (FICON)
A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various control
units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber
channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
fast protection switching

(FPS)
A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the
working PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the
sink receives the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the
interworking function (IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1654

System
A Glossary
fast reroute (FRR)
A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when

part of a network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or
path for an active route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic
on the active route can be switched to the standby route. When the active route is
recovered, the traffic can be switched back to the active route. FRR is
categorized into IP FRR, VPN FRR, and TE FRR.
fiber channel (FC)
A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs).

Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily
used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel
supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling
can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel
provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
fiber distributed data

interface (FDDI)
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for

high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides
specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per
second on networks based on the token ring network.
field programmable gate

array (FPGA)
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the application specific integrated

circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable
components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects
of customized circuits but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original
programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays.
first in first out (FIFO)
A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
forward defect indication

(FDI)
A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node
that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and
its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward defect indication

packet (FDI packet)
A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms
of the upper layer network where failure has occurred.
forward information base

(FIB)
A table that provides information for network hardware (bridges and routers) for
them to forward data packets to other networks. The information contained in a
routing table differs according to whether it is used by a bridge or a router. A
bridge relies on both the source (originating) and destination addresses to
determine where and how to forward a packet.
forwarding equivalence
class (FEC)
A class-based forwarding technology that classifies the packets with the same
forwarding mode. Packets with the same FEC are processed similarly on an
MPLS network. The division of FECs is flexible, and can be a combination of
the source address, destination address, source port, destination port, protocol
type, and VPN.
frame delay variation

(FDV)
A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service

frames, where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to
point ETH connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR)
A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not

delivered divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T,
where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the
number of service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number
of service frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH
connection.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1655

System
frequency division duplex

(FDD)
A Glossary
An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system,

the uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through
bursts. Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time
length.
G
G-ACH
generic associated channel header
GAL
generic associated channel header label
GCC
general communication channel
GCP
GMPLS control plan
GCRA
generic cell rate algorithm
GFC
generic flow control
GFP
See Generic Framing Procedure.
GMPLS
generalized multiprotocol label switching
GNE
See gateway network element.
GPON
gigabit-capable passive optical network
GPS
See Global Positioning System.
GRE
See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM
See Global System for Mobile Communications.
Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP)
A framing and encapsulation method which can be applied to any data type. It
has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
Generic Routing
Encapsulation (GRE)
A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other
network. GRE is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the
Internet. GRE serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for
transparently transmitting data packets.
Global Positioning System

(GPS)
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation,

and timing services to worldwide users.
Global System for Mobile

Communications (GSM)
The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European

Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a
standard for global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to
use a phone globally. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching
subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gain
The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the
optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the
jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.
gateway network element

(GNE)
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application

layer and the NM application layer.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1656

System
A Glossary
H
HCS
higher order connection supervision
HD
high definition
HD-SDI
See high definition-serial digital interface signal.
HDB3
See high density bipolar of order 3 code.
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control
HDTV
See high definition television.
HEC
See header error control.
HPA
high order path adaptation
HPT
higher order path termination
HQoS
See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA
See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI
high-speed Internet
HSL
See high-level script language.
High Speed Downlink

Packet Access (HSDPA)
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the

requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services.
It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without
changing the WCDMA network topology.
header error control

(HEC)
A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in
the cell Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a
CRC check in the first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hierarchical quality of
service (HQoS)
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling
according to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics
function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each
service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic
analysis.
high definition television

(HDTV)
A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080

interlaced active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using
at least 540 progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high definition-serial
digital interface signal
(HD-SDI)
High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
high density bipolar of

order 3 code (HDB3)
A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices.

The HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction,
no direct current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three
consecutive zeros.
high-level script language

(HSL)
A script language. Based on python, the HSL syntax is simple, clear, and
extendable.
hot patch
A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to
a program without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the
equipment using the built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated,
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1657

System
A Glossary
confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or queried.
I
IAE
incoming alignment error
IANA
See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC
See integrated circuit.
ICC
See ITU carrier code.
ICMP
See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ICP
IMA Control Protocol
IEEE
See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF
See Internet Engineering Task Force.
IF
See intermediate frequency.
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGMP snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol

manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet
Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3
devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can
be prevented efficiently.
IGP
See Interior Gateway Protocol.
ILM
incoming label map
IMA
See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IN
intelligent network
IP
Internet Protocol
IPA
See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV
See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4
See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6
See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS
See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN
integrated services digital network
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
ISP
See Internet service provider.
IST
internal spanning tree
ITC
independent transmit clock
ITU
See International Telecommunication Union.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1658

System
A Glossary
ITU carrier code (ICC)
A code assigned to a network operator/service provider, maintained by the ITUT Telecommunication Standardization Bureau (TSB).
ITU-T
See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication

Standardization Sector.
Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers
(IEEE)
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States

but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
Interior Gateway Protocol

(IGP)
A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in
small-sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the
routing information protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol
(IGRP), the enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Intermediate System to
Intermediate System (ISIS)
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to

forward datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
International
Telecommunication Union
(ITU)
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential

recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for
telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R).
International
Telecommunication
Union-Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
(ITU-T)
An international body that develops worldwide standards for

telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series
which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number
specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series
which deals with data networks and open system communications and number
"25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority
(IANA)
A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP addressspace allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other
organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers
used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control Message

Protocol (ICMP)
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error

correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example,
it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an
unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI
reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering Task

Force (IETF)
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the

Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF
is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing
solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is
carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics such as
routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to
the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP)
One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol
multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
television (IPTV)
A system in which video is transmitted in IP packets. Also called "TV over IP",
IPTV uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduled TV programs or
video-on-demand (VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or through cable to a
TV set, IPTV uses the transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requires
either a computer and software media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1659

System
A Glossary
the images in real time.

Internet Protocol version
4 (IPv4)
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address
which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D,
or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0
through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number,
an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and
subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used
to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol version

6 (IPv6)
An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task

Force (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of
the Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4
address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service provider

(ISP)
An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
integrated circuit (IC)
A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in

place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a
microcircuit function.
intelligent power
adjustment (IPA)
A mechanism used to reduce the optical power of all the amplifiers in an

adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system
detects the loss of optical signals on the link. If the fiber is broken, the device
performance degrades, or the connector is not plugged well, the loss of optical
signals may occur. With IPA, maintenance engineers will not be hurt by the laser
sent out from the slice of broken fiber.
intermediate frequency
(IF)
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an

RF signal.
inverse multiplexing over

ATM (IMA)
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM

cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth
logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.
L
L2VPN
Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN
Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP
See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU
Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG
See link aggregation group.
LAN
See local area network.
LAPD
link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS
Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB
local battery
LC
Lucent connector
LCAS
See link capacity adjustment scheme.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1660

System
A Glossary
LCK
See Locked signal function.
LCN
local communications network
LDP
Label Distribution Protocol
LED
See light emitting diode.
LER
See label edge router.
LIFO
See last in first out.
LLC
See logical link control.
LLID
local loopback ID
LM
See loss measurement.
LMP
link management protocol
LOC
loss of clock
LOM
loss of multiframe
LOP
loss of pointer
LOS
See loss of signal.
LPA
low order path adaptation
LPT
link-state pass through
LSP
See label switched path.
LSR
See label switching router.
LT
linktrace
LVDS
See low voltage differential signal.
Layer 2 switching
A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch

transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC
address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is
called Layer 2 switching.
Link Aggregation Control

Protocol (LACP)
A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of
their parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link
is formed, LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts
the ports on the aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function

(LCK)
A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer,
informs consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client
layer, and suppresses the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router (LER)
A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information
to assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label switched path (LSP)
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through

label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically,
based on common routing mechanisms or through configuration.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1661

System
A Glossary
label switching router

(LSR)
Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The
LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is
responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label
forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter
forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.
last in first out (LIFO)
A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly.
light emitting diode (LED)
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic
product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights,
traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in
multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers.
linear MSP
linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group

(LAG)
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a

link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group
as if it were a single link.
link capacity adjustment

scheme (LCAS)
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides
a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet
the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing
member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of
capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the
end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management
systems.
local area network (LAN)
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a

few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low
error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to
implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or
Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical link control (LLC)
According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is
the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the
various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
loss measurement (LM)
A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service
frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data
frames between a pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS)
No transitions occurring in the received signal.
low voltage differential

signal (LVDS)
A low noise, low power, low amplitude method for high-speed (gigabits per
second) data transmission over copper wire.
M
MA
maintenance association
MAC
See Media Access Control.
MADM
multiple add/drop multiplexer
MAN
See metropolitan area network.
MBS
maximum burst size
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1662

System
A Glossary
MCF
message communication function
MCR
minimum cell rate
MD
See maintenance domain.
MDF
See main distribution frame.
MDP
message dispatch process
MDU
See multi-dwelling unit.
ME
See maintenance entity.
MEG
See maintenance entity group.
MEL
maintenance entity group level
MEP
maintenance end point
MFAS
See multiframe alignment signal.
MIB
See management information base.
MIP
maintenance intermediate point
MLD
See multicast listener discovery.
MP
maintenance point
MPLS
See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE
multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS TP
See Multiprotocol Label Switching traffic policing.
MPLS VPN
See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP
See multiprotocol label switching transport profile.
MS
multiplex section
MSA
multiplex section adaptation
MSB
most significant bit
MSOH
multiplex section overhead
MSP
See multiplex section protection.
MST
See multiplex section termination.
MSTI
See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF
See mean time between failures.
MTTR
See mean time to repair.
MTU
See maximum transmission unit.
MUX
See multiplexer.
Media Access Control

(MAC)
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part
of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1663

System
A Glossary
and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data,
the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be
transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data
and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical
layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is
correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct
and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the
data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multiple Spanning Tree
Protocol (MSTP)
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP
blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree
network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs
and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be
normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree
corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in

different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network
layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost
performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching traffic policing
(MPLS TP)
It is a scheme that supervises the specific traffic entering the communication

devices. By policing the speed of traffic that enters the network, it "punishes" the
traffic out of the threshold, so the traffic going into network is limited to a
reasonable range, protecting the network resources and the interests of the
carriers.
main distribution frame

(MDF)
A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
maintenance domain
(MD)
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by
connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are
managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity (ME)
An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two

ends of a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs)
on the trail.
maintenance entity group

(MEG)
A MEG consists of MEs that meet the following criteria:
Exist within the same management edges.
Have the same MEG hierarchy.
Belong to the same P2P or P2MP connection.
management information
base (MIB)
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network.

It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage
entities (such as routers and switches) in a network.
maximum transmission
unit (MTU)
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size
varies, depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example,
1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring.
Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the
network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or
PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can
transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved.
mean time between
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1664

System
A Glossary
failures (MTBF)
measure of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair

(MTTR)
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
metropolitan area
network (MAN)
A network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area

or region larger than that covered by even a large LAN but smaller than the area
covered by an WAN. The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a
city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection
to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several
local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is
also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
mirror
An action to store a copy of a file to another archive site to release the load of
the original site, or to provide an archive site closer to the users geographically.
mirroring
The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several
computers with identical data.
multi-dwelling unit
(MDU)
A network access unit used for multi-dwelling units. It provides Ethernet and IP
services and optionally VoIP or CATV services; has multiple broadband
interfaces on the user side and optionally POTS ports or CATV RF ports. It is
mainly applicable to FTTB, FTTC, or FTTCab networks.
multicast listener
discovery (MLD)
A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their

directly connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member
relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts
and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can
dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members
on the local network.
multiframe alignment
signal (MFAS)
A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes,

always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to
establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree

instance (MSTI)
A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide

a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging
to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN
cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section
protection (MSP)
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal

between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from
a "working" to a "protection" channel.
multiplex section
termination (MST)
A function, which is performed to generate the MSOH during the process of

forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer (MUX)
Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number

of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and
aggregate channels being fixed.
multiprotocol label
switching transport
profile (MPLS-TP)
A packet transport technology proposed by IETF that combines the packet

experience of MPLS with the operational experience of transport networks.
multiprotocol label
switching virtual private
network (MPLS VPN)
An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the

multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS
technology for network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core
routers, and combines traditional routing technology and label switching
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1665

System
A Glossary
technology. It can be used to construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to

meet various service requirements.
N
NAS
network access server
NDF
new data flag
NHLFE
next hop label forwarding entry
NMC
network management center
NNI
network-to-network interface
NPC
See network parameter control.
NPE
network provider edge
NRT-VBR
non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ
non-return to zero
NRZI
non-return to zero inverted
NSAP
See network service access point.
NSF
non-stop forwarding
NTP
Network Time Protocol
network parameter
control (NPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on

each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is
exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function.
The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into
UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network
interface, while NPC at the network interface.
network service access

point (NSAP)
A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made
available to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
O
O&M
operation and maintenance
OA
optical amplifier
OADM
See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM
See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU
operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAU
See optical amplifier unit.
OC
ordinary clock
OCP
optical channel protection
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1666

System
A Glossary
OCS
optical core switching
ODF
optical distribution frame
ODU
See outdoor unit.
OLT
optical line terminal
ONT
See optical network terminal.
ONU
See optical network unit.
OPEX
operating expense
OPU
optical channel payload unit
OSC
See optical supervisory channel.
OSI
See open systems interconnection.
OSN
optical switch node
OSNR
See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF
See Open Shortest Path First.
OTDR
See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTM
optical terminal multiplexer
OTN
optical transport network
OTU
See optical transponder unit.
OTUk
optical channel transport unit-k
Open Shortest Path First

(OSPF)
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing.

Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its
routing metric. A link state database is constructed with the network topology
which is identical on all routers in the area.
open systems
interconnection (OSI)
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems

made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized
into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on
their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and
provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end
communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3
through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, administration
and maintenance (OAM)
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment

operation, support activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure
detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults
and keep a segment in an operational state, and support activities required to
provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.
optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM)
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to
one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one
channel.
optical amplifier unit

(OAU)
A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can
be used in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1667

System
A Glossary
optical network terminal

(ONT)
A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
optical network unit

(ONU)
A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to
electrical signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper
wiring to individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the
most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. OSNR
= signal power/noise power.
optical supervisory
channel (OSC)
A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication

among nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data
in a certain channel.
optical time domain

reflectometer (OTDR)
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication
system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber
length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault.
optical transponder unit

(OTU)
A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the
G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or

maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU)
The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements

frequency conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
P
P2MP
point-to-multipoint
P2P
See point-to-point service.
PADR
PPPoE active discovery request
PBS
See peak burst size.
PCB
See printed circuit board.
PCM
See pulse code modulation.
PCR
See peak cell rate.
PDH
See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU
See power distribution unit.
PE
See provider edge.
PHB
See per-hop behavior.
PHP
penultimate hop popping
PIM-DM
Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM
Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PIR
peak information rate
PLL
See phase-locked loop.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1668

System
A Glossary
PM
performance monitoring
PMS
Product Management System
POH
path overhead
PON
passive optical network
POS
See packet over SDH/SONET.
PPD
partial packet discard
PPI
PDH physical interface
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPS
port protection switching
PQ
See priority queuing.
PRBS
See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC
primary reference clock
PRI
primary rate interface
PSD
See power spectrum density.
PSN
See packet switched network.
PSTN
See public switched telephone network.
PSU
power supply unit
PT
payload type
PTI
payload type indicator
PTN
packet transport network
PTP
See point to point.
PVID
See port default VLAN ID.
PVP
See permanent virtual path.
PW
See pseudo wire.
PWE3
See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
packet over SDH/SONET

(POS)
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The
POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the
transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet switched network

(PSN)
A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
packet switching
A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of

exchanging packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple
connections.
parity check
A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of
bits, usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1669

System
A Glossary
even (odd or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same
parity. When the transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of
1s in the frame and attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the
1s and, if there is parity error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
peak burst size (PBS)
A parameter that is used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the
maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that
PBS should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded. See also CIR, CBS, and PIR.
peak cell rate (PCR)
The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.
per-hop behavior (PHB)
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as

per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in
the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of
DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector
(CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
permanent virtual path

(PVP)
Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
phase-locked loop (PLL)
A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the

frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier
signal or reference-frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after
passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to
keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency.
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy (PDH)
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the

minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s
rates.
point to point (PTP)
A type of service in which data is sent from a single network termination to

another network termination.
point-to-point service
(P2P)
A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
terminal users.
port default VLAN ID

(PVID)
A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame

carries no VLAN tag when reaching the port.
power distribution unit

(PDU)
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
power spectrum density

(PSD)
The power layout of random signals in the frequency domain.
printed circuit board

(PCB)
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic

components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper
sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.
priority queuing (PQ)
A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the

PQ algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth,
lower latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till
all packets of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher
priorities are processed earlier than others.
provider edge (PE)
A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A
PE is responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1670

System
A Glossary
exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs

the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the
public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary
sequence (PRBS)
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent

of the values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire (PW)
An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is

established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status
information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation

edge-to-edge (PWE3)
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential

attributes of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a
packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of
low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The
simulation approximates to the real situation.
public switched telephone

network (PSTN)
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the

public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
pulse code modulation

(PCM)
A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of

pulses. Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can
change continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several
predefined values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog,
pulse code modulation is more immune to noise than PAM.
Q
QAM
See quadrature amplitude modulation.
QPSK
See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ
See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.
QoS
See quality of service.
quadrature amplitude
modulation (QAM)
Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message
signals, or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of
two carrier waves, using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation
scheme or amplitude modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two
waves, usually sinusoids, are out of phase with each other by 90 and are thus
called quadrature carriers or quadrature components hence the name of the
scheme.
quadrature phase shift

keying (QPSK)
A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation

and the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the
fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star
diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each
QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code
on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS)
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or

channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter,
delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to
measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the
services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1671

System
A Glossary
users.
R
RADIUS
See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAN
See radio access network.
RDI
remote defect indication
RED
See random early detection.
REG
See regenerator.
REI
remote error indication
RIP
See Routing Information Protocol.
RMEP
remote maintenance association end point
RMON
remote network monitoring
RNC
See radio network controller.
ROPA
See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RPR
resilient packet ring
RSOH
regenerator section overhead
RST
regenerator section termination
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP
See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE
See Resource ReserVation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
RTN
radio transmission node
RTP
real-time performance
RTS
request to send
Rapid Spanning Tree

Protocol (RSTP)
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward
compatible with the STP protocol.
Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service
(RADIUS)
A networking protocol that provides centralized Authentication, Authorization,

and Accounting (AAA) management for computers to connect and use a
network service.
Resource ReserVation
Protocol-Traffic
Engineering (RSVP-TE)
An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in
MPLS networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the
LSPs by initiating label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also
supports LSP rerouting and LSP bandwidth increasing.
Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP)
A network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) and
designed for Integrated Service and used to reserve resources on every node
along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not
transport application data.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1672

System
A Glossary
RoHS
restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Routing Information
Protocol (RIP)
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines
a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a
distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its
neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio access network

(RAN)
The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates
the CN from wireless network.
radio network controller

(RNC)
A piece of equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and
the integrity of the radio resources.
random early detection

(RED)
A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet

according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global
TCP synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
real-time variable bit rate

(rt-VBR)
A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over

IP (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell
rate (PCR), sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can
expect the source device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve

a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
reflectance
The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
regenerator (REG)
A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
remote optical pumping

amplifier (ROPA)
A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power

supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power
compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
rt-VBR
See real-time variable bit rate.
S
SAI
service area identifier
SAN
storage area network
SAToP
Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC
square connector
SCR
sustainable cell rate
SD
See signal degrade.
SD-SDI
See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH
See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI
See serial digital interface.
SDP
serious disturbance period
SDRAM
See synchronous dynamic random access memory.
SELV
safety extra-low voltage
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1673

System
A Glossary
SEMF
synchronous equipment management function
SES
severely errored second
SF
See signal fail.
SFP
small form-factor pluggable
SFTP
See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL
See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SLA
See service level agreement.
SLIP
See Serial Line Interface Protocol.
SMB
Server Message Block
SMSR
side mode suppression ratio
SNCMP
subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP
subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP
subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SOH
section overhead
SONET
See synchronous optical network.
SP
See service provider.
SPC
soft permanent connection
SPE
See superstratum provider edge.
SPI
SDH physical interface
SRG
See shared risk group.
SRLG
shared risk link group
SSH
See Secure Shell.
SSL
See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM
See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB
synchronization status message byte
SSU
synchronization supply unit
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
Secure File Transfer

Protocol (SFTP)
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Secure Shell (SSH)
A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a

secure channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect
information and provide powerful authentication function for a network when a
user logs in to the network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses
from being deceived and plain text passwords from being captured.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1674

System
A Glossary
Secure Sockets Layer

(SSL)
A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the
TCP layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate
concerned entities.
Serial Line Interface

Protocol (SLIP)
A protocol that defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement
transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host
interconnection function with a known IP address.
Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP)
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and

modify the management information of a network element. This protocol
ensures the transmission of management information between any two points.
The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to
SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the
activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the
network console workstation. Control information about each device is
maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status
Message (SSM)
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing

link. Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire
upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform
proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to
holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes.
serial digital interface

(SDI)
An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
service level agreement

(SLA)
A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies

the service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source
domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning
agreement as a whole or partially.
service provider (SP)
An entity that offers service subscriptions to individual subscribers and contracts

with carriers to implement services for a specific DN. A service provider may
contract with more than one carrier.
shared risk group (SRG)
A group of resources that share a common risk component whose failure can
cause the failure of all the resources in the group.
signal degrade (SD)
A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded
defect condition is active.
signal fail (SF)
A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end
defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
single-pair high-speed
(SHDSL)
A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL,

and HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected
to the user terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis
coded pulse amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed
data and provide the broadband access service.
span
The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of
spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of
equipment and varies according to transmission system type.
standard definition-serial
digital interface signal
(SD-SDI)
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1675

System
A Glossary
superstratum provider
edge (SPE)
Core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. The UPE
devices that are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices.
The PWs set up between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs
of the SPE devices. The SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the
sites on UPE side and those of the UPE interfaces that are connected with the
SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE.
synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines
the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing
mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of
ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the
signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used
only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high
speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible
mapping structure.
synchronous dynamic
random access memory
(SDRAM)
A new type of DRAM that can run at much higher clock speeds than
conventional memory. SDRAM actually synchronizes itself with the CPU's bus
and is capable of running at 100 MHz, about three times faster than conventional
FPM RAM, and about twice as fast as EDO DRAM or BEDO DRAM. SDRAM
is replacing EDO DRAM in computers.
synchronous optical
network (SONET)
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications

carriers to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to
handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of
51.84 Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCI
tag control information
TCM
See trellis coded modulation scheme.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDC
tunable dispersion compensator
TDM
See time division multiplexing.
TE
See traffic engineering.
TFTP
See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM
trail trace identifier mismatch
TLV
See type-length-value.
TM
See terminal multiplexer.
TMN
See telecommunications management network.
TOD
time of day
TPID
tag protocol identifier
TPS
See tributary protection switching.
TST
See Test.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1676

System
A Glossary
TTI
trail trace identifier
TTSI
See trail termination source identifier.
TUG
tributary unit group
Telnet
A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet

allows users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were
connected to a local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Test (TST)
A function which is used to perform one-way on-demand in-service or out-ofservice diagnostics tests. This includes verifying bandwidth throughput, frame
loss, bit errors, and so on.
Trivial File Transfer

Protocol (TFTP)
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server.
TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide
authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for
bootstrapping diskless machines.
tail drop
A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are

discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in
network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
telecommunications
management network
(TMN)
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a

communications network. An architecture for management, including planning,
provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of
telecommunications equipment, networks and services.
terminal multiplexer (TM)
A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate

signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of
high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
throughput
The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment,

connection, service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be
measured with bandwidth.
time division multiplexing

(TDM)
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into

time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple
signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing
digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.
traceroute
A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of

datagrams with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time
exceeded messages that return to determine routers along the path.
traffic engineering (TE)
A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and
the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as
traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction
parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is
to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.
trail termination source

identifier (TTSI)
A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the

connectivity verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If
it matches the TTSI received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity
defect.
trellis coded modulation

scheme (TCM)
A modulation scheme which allows highly efficient transmission of information

over band-limited channels such as telephone lines.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1677

System
A Glossary
tributary protection
switching (TPS)
A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary

processing boards.
tunnel
A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between
PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two
entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN
information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
type-length-value (TLV)
An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called
Code-Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined
through different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V
indicates the actual data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding
features high expansibility. New TLVs can be added to support new features,
which is flexible in describing information loaded in packets.
U
UART
universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS
unavailable second
UAT
See unavailable time event.
UBR
unspecified bit rate
UBR+
Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol.
UNI
See user-to-network interface.
UPC
See usage parameter control.
UPE
user-end provider edge
UPI
user payload identifier
UPM
uninterruptible power module
UPS
uninterruptible power supply
UTC
See Coordinated Universal Time.
User Datagram Protocol

(UDP)
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to

send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol
(UDP) uses IP to deliver datagram. UDP provides application programs with the
unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. There is a possibility that UDP
messages will be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. The
destination device does not confirm whether a data packet is received.
unavailable time event

(UAT)
An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive

severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the
unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better
than 10-3 within 10 consecutive seconds.
usage parameter control

(UPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on

each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is
exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function.
The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1678

System
A Glossary
UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network
interface, while NPC at the network interface.
user-to-network interface
(UNI)
The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment
(for example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI
virtual network-network interface
V-UNI
See virtual user-network interface.
VB
virtual bridge
VBR
See variable bit rate.
VCC
See virtual channel connection.
VCCV
virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG
See virtual concatenation group.
VCI
virtual channel identifier
VDSL
very-high-data-rate digital subscriber line
VDSL2
See very-high-speed digital subscriber line 2.
VLAN
virtual local area network
VOA
variable optical attenuator
VP
See virtual path.
VPI
See virtual path identifier.
VPLS
See virtual private LAN service.
VPN
virtual private network
VPWS
See virtual private wire service.
VRRP
See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI
See virtual switch instance.
Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP)
A protocol used for multicast or multicast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of

routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is
regarded as a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router
has its own IP address. The host in the network communicates with other
networks through this virtual router. If the active router in the backup group
fails, one of the backup routers in this backup group becomes active and
provides routing service for the host in the network.
VoIP
See voice over IP.
variable bit rate (VBR)
One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in
bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams
such as voice calls.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1679

System
A Glossary
very-high-speed digital
subscriber line 2 (VDSL2)
An extension of the VDSL technology, which complies with ITU G.993.2,

supports multiple spectrum profiles and encapsulation modes, and provides
short-distance and high-speed access solutions to the next-generation FTTx
access service.
virtual channel connection

(VCC)
A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network.
A point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or
multiple end points.
virtual concatenation
group (VCG)
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to

the same virtual concatenation link
virtual path (VP)
A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an

ATM network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier

(VPI)
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies
to which virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN

service (VPLS)
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network.

VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other
through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private wire

service (VPWS)
A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as

ATM, FR, Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual switch instance

(VSI)
An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to
the virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has
Ethernet bridge function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network
interface (V-UNI)
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service

classification and traffic control in HQoS.
voice over IP (VoIP)
An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a
digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuitcommitted protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
W
WAN
See wide area network.
WCDMA
See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM
wavelength division multiplexing
WEEE
waste electrical and electronic equipment
WFQ
See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN
See wireless local area network.
WRED
See weighted random early detection.
WRR
weighted round robin
WTR
See wait to restore.
Wideband Code Division

Multiple Access
A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology

derived from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)

Copyright Huawei
1680

System
A Glossary
(WCDMA)
wait to restore (WTR)
The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working
line.
weighted fair queuing

(WFQ)
A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This

scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues,
according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner,
packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early

detection (WRED)
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global
TCP synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the
high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
wide area network (WAN)
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which
are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area,
such as a province, a state or even a country.
wireless local area

network (WLAN)
A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology.

It uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out
data interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the
traditional LAN.
Z
Z interface extension
Issue 02 (2013-01-18)
Extending the analogue subscriber to another place by extending the Z interface.

Copyright Huawei
1681

Huawei OptiX OSN 3500 Hardware Description (V200R012)

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Huawei OptiX OSN 3500 Hardware Description (V200R012)

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX OSN 3500

Network design and planning engineers

Hardware installation engineers

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

About This Document

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-01-18) Based on Product Version

In chapter "Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards", optimized the

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Based on Product Version

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-07-31) Based on Product Version

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-04-30) Based on Product Version

In section "SDH Boards", added the description of N1SF16E, N4SLQ16, N4SLO16,

Deleted the section "Microwave Boards".

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

4.1 Appearances and Dimensions of the Boards..........................................................................................................35

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

6.2.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................................63

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

6.3.9 Configuring and Commissioning the Board.....................................................................................................86

7 Packet Processing Boards.............................................................................................................92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

7.1.14 List of Performance Events...........................................................................................................................110

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

7.3.3 Functions and Features...................................................................................................................................140

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

7.4.8 Feature Code...................................................................................................................................................171

8 Packet Interface Boards..............................................................................................................181

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

8.1.12 List of Alarms...............................................................................................................................................193

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

8.3.3 Functions and Features...................................................................................................................................220

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

8.4.9 Configuring and Commissioning the Board...................................................................................................237

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

10.1.3 Functions and Features.................................................................................................................................284